(1M8)

(1M9)
(1M10)
(1M12)

Instruction Manual
(Original Manual)

ver.G
(Blank Page)
[Note]
• For safety operation, read thoroughly <2. Safety Precautions> to fully understand the safety precautions before
starting work.
• Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of all information in this manual. However, the manual may
contain incorrect explanation or typographical errors. If you notice any part unclear, incorrect, or omitted in the
manual, please contact our company.
• The contents of this manual may be revised without prior notice.
• This manual applies to only the machine of the machine number shown on the back cover. Do not use manuals
written for dealers and reference when operating the machine. Also, do not use this manual for other machines.
• The characteristics, functions, and operations of the machine explained in this manual do not apply to worldwide use.
Some illustrations in the manual may not be identical to the actual machine.
• Citizen Machinery Co., Ltd. has all copyrights regarding this manual. No part of this document may be reproduced
in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, or photocopying, without the prior written permission of
Citizen Machinery Co., Ltd.
• Citizen Machinery Co., Ltd. has copyrights regarding the software and programs described in this manual.
• This machine is a product controlled under the Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Act of Japan and is subject to
restriction in export. Therefore, you should take necessary procedures in accordance with the above Law to export
this machine. Contact our company before exporting this machine.
• The company names and product names shown in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the
companies.
• The CE marking put on the machine indicates that the main unit of the machine and the standard attachment units
conform to the EC Directive. The optional attachment units and the units of special specification may not conform to
the EC Directive. If you intend to relocate the machine to the country where compliance to EC Directive is required,
consult with our company beforehand.

 Introduction
• This Instruction Manual contains the following information.
The Operator's Manual is used when operating the machine. It covers general information on the machine and
procedures for basic daily machine operations.
The Programmer's Manual is used for machine programming. It covers information for Cincom programming in
order to carry out various basic machining.
The Maintenance Manual is used when checking, maintaining, and repairing the machine. It contains detailed
information for locating problems in the machine, identifying and eliminating their cause, and otherwise
maintaining the machine.
• The peripheral devices for this machine are shipped with the instruction manual for the device. Be sure read the
instruction manual of the relevant device before using it.

(1)
  Information to be attached to inquiries
When making inquiries, please confirm the following items as far as possible so that we can take quick action:
No. Item Example Location
1 Model L32-1M8, L32-1M9 Aluminum nameplate on machine
L32-1M10, L32-1M12 front panel, operation panel,
instruction manual
2 Serial No. V30006 Aluminum nameplate on machine
front panel
3 NC unit CINCOM SYSTEM M70LPC-VU <3. Machine Specifications>, the
operation panel, etc.
4 Delivery date May, 2015
5 Machine paint color Gray two-tone color Appearance
Your specified color
6 Special specification Dedicated transporter
7 Page of the instruction Manual: Operator's Manual,
manual that contains the Programmer's Manual, or
information concerning Maintenance Manual
your inquiry
8 Software version NCMAIN BND-1010W000-** Operation panel screens
PLC 001-001 See <23.6.3 Checking the version
NC OS BND-1000W022-** of software>.
HMIs BND-1010W101-**
HMIs-Control BND-1200W200-**
HMIu 001-001
MACRO 001-001
PARAMET 001-001
9 Hardware NC TYPE MITSUBISHI CNC 70
LPC-V
MODEL NAME FCA70LPC-2A
SERIAL NO M7*********
UNIT NAME FCU7-MU552-C01
Before making inquiries about problems, please read <23. Troubleshooting> and take action if necessary.

(2)
(Blank Page)

(3)
 Instruction Manual
0. Table of Contents
This contents does not go into details.
Please refer to the table of contents for detailed headline listed on the top of each chapter.

0. Table of Contents..................................................................................................................................................... 0-1

1. Outline .................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Outline of This Manual .............................................................................................................................. 1-3
1.2 Audience ................................................................................................................................................... 1-4

2. Safety Precautions ................................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Safety Signs.............................................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2 Emergency Stop Button ............................................................................................................................ 2-6
2.3 Safety Devices .......................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.4 Specifications for Safe Operation ........................................................................................................... 2-11
2.5 General Precautions During Operation ................................................................................................... 2-12
2.6 Safety During Installing the Machine ...................................................................................................... 2-14
2.7 Before Starting the Machine ................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.8 Safety During Setup ................................................................................................................................ 2-15
2.9 Safety During Automatic Operation......................................................................................................... 2-16
2.10 Safety During Maintenance..................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.11 Safety After Everyday Operation............................................................................................................. 2-16
2.12 Fire Prevention Practices ........................................................................................................................ 2-17
2.13 Handling Emergency Situations .............................................................................................................. 2-19
2.13.1 Machine operation at occurrence of an accident ............................................................................... 2-19
2.13.2 Emergency situations requiring evacuation ....................................................................................... 2-19
2.13.3 Power failure ..................................................................................................................................... 2-19
2.13.4 Resuming work ................................................................................................................................. 2-19
2.14 Notes for prevention of machine damage ............................................................................................... 2-19
2.15 Notes on prevention of accidents caused by electromagnetic radiation and magnetism ........................ 2-20

3. Machine Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 3-1

3.1 Main Components of the Machine ............................................................................................................ 3-3
3.2 Outside Dimensions and Layout of Machine............................................................................................. 3-4
3.3 Standard machine specifications .............................................................................................................. 3-7
3.3.1 Machine Specifications ....................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.2 Standard NC specifications ............................................................................................................... 3-11
3.3.3 Attachment specifications.................................................................................................................. 3-20
3.3.4 Environmental information................................................................................................................. 3-26

4. Operation Panel and Screen .................................................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Names and Functions of Operation Panel Components ........................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Fields and Functions of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) ............................................................................... 4-9
4.3 Screen Transition .................................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.3.1 Screen transition when the machine is turned on.............................................................................. 4-12

0-1
5. Preparation for Operating the Machine .................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Turning On/Off the Power ......................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 Menu Keys ................................................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.2.1 Menu key operation............................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.2.2 Scrolling through menu pages............................................................................................................. 5-5
5.2.3 Selecting screen.................................................................................................................................. 5-6
5.2.4 Selecting an operation ........................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.2.5 Selecting another menu group ............................................................................................................ 5-8
5.3 Page Keys ................................................................................................................................................ 5-9
5.4 WIN Key.................................................................................................................................................. 5-10
5.5 Data Setting ............................................................................................................................................ 5-11
5.5.1 Data setting operation ....................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.5.2 Data in the data setting fields ............................................................................................................ 5-13

6. Operation for Running the Machine ......................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Selecting a Program ................................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.1.1 Selecting an execution program .......................................................................................................... 6-6
6.1.2 Machining data setting ........................................................................................................................ 6-8
6.1.3 Required fields for machining data ...................................................................................................... 6-8
6.1.4 Checking machining data .................................................................................................................. 6-13
6.1.5 Entering, updating and storing the machining data ........................................................................... 6-14
6.1.6 Verifying the tool layout pattern ......................................................................................................... 6-15
6.1.7 Setting the free tool layout pattern .................................................................................................... 6-17
6.2 Preparation ............................................................................................................................................. 6-20
6.2.1 Return position .................................................................................................................................. 6-22
6.2.2 Positioning point ................................................................................................................................ 6-24
6.2.3 Start position ..................................................................................................................................... 6-27
6.2.4 Gang tool post retraction ................................................................................................................... 6-30
6.2.5 Opposite tool post retraction ............................................................................................................. 6-32
6.2.6 Chuck thrust ...................................................................................................................................... 6-34
6.2.7 Tool set .............................................................................................................................................. 6-35
6.2.8 Cut-off machining .............................................................................................................................. 6-82
6.2.9 Non-conformed material phase adjustment....................................................................................... 6-85
6.2.10 Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................ 6-87
6.2.11 Adjustment of non-conformed material ............................................................................................. 6-89
6.2.12 Exciting Guide Bushing ..................................................................................................................... 6-91
6.3 On-machine Program Check .................................................................................................................. 6-92
6.3.1 Program check for 1-cycle operation................................................................................................. 6-92
6.3.2 Program check for 1-block operation ................................................................................................ 6-93
6.3.3 On-machine program check by handle feed...................................................................................... 6-94
6.3.4 Editing a program being executed..................................................................................................... 6-97
6.3.5 Editing an executed program by backward running .......................................................................... 6-99
6.3.6 High-speed program check ............................................................................................................. 6-101
6.3.7 Block skip ........................................................................................................................................ 6-101
6.3.8 Optional stop ................................................................................................................................... 6-102
6.3.9 Override .......................................................................................................................................... 6-102
6.3.10 Disconnect Bar Loader (BL DIS) ..................................................................................................... 6-102
6.3.11 Coolant Flow Rate Detector ............................................................................................................ 6-102
6.3.12 Disconnecting the bar loader........................................................................................................... 6-103
6.4 Automatic Operation ............................................................................................................................. 6-104
6.4.1 Continuous automatic operation...................................................................................................... 6-104
6.4.2 One cycle automatic operation ........................................................................................................ 6-105

0-2
 6.4.3 One block automatic operation........................................................................................................ 6-106
6.4.4 Hold and restart the automatic operation ........................................................................................ 6-107
6.5 Position Data Screen ............................................................................................................................ 6-108
6.6 Modal Information Screen ..................................................................................................................... 6-109
6.7 Manual operation .................................................................................................................................. 6-110
6.7.1 Handle feed ..................................................................................................................................... 6-110
6.7.2 Manual data input (MDI) .................................................................................................................. 6-112
6.8 Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................... 6-118
6.8.1 Zero return ...................................................................................................................................... 6-118
6.8.2 Recovering from overrun status ...................................................................................................... 6-120
6.8.3 Counter set...................................................................................................................................... 6-122
6.8.4 Setting and displaying the tool offset............................................................................................... 6-124
6.8.5 Mechanism adjustment ................................................................................................................... 6-129
6.8.6 Setting switches .............................................................................................................................. 6-130
6.9 Creating and Editing the Program......................................................................................................... 6-135
6.9.1 Program list ..................................................................................................................................... 6-135
6.9.2 Creating a new program .................................................................................................................. 6-136
6.9.3 Editing individual programs ............................................................................................................. 6-137
6.9.4 Editing a program ............................................................................................................................ 6-141
6.9.5 Creating and editing machining data ............................................................................................... 6-173
6.9.6 Data input and output ...................................................................................................................... 6-175
6.10 Program Conversion ............................................................................................................................. 6-201
6.11 Machine Variable Screen ...................................................................................................................... 6-207
6.12 Machine Structure................................................................................................................................. 6-208
6.13 Backup Screen ..................................................................................................................................... 6-212
6.14 Alarm History ........................................................................................................................................ 6-213
6.15 Message Screen ................................................................................................................................... 6-214
6.16 Tool Life Management (Option)............................................................................................................. 6-215
6.17 Spare Tool Life Management (Option) .................................................................................................. 6-217
6.18 External Memory Program Operation ................................................................................................... 6-218
6.19 Workpiece conveyor ............................................................................................................................. 6-220
6.20 Eco Screen ........................................................................................................................................... 6-221
6.20.1 Power Consumption ........................................................................................................................ 6-221
6.20.2 Power Consumption ........................................................................................................................ 6-221
6.20.3 Regenerative energy ....................................................................................................................... 6-221
6.20.4 Pwr (Time Interval) .......................................................................................................................... 6-222
6.20.5 Power regeneration ......................................................................................................................... 6-222
6.20.6 Eco Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 6-222
6.20.7 Frequency ....................................................................................................................................... 6-223
6.20.8 Eco Reset........................................................................................................................................ 6-223
6.20.9 Range change of displayed electric energy (W/kW)........................................................................ 6-223
6.20.10 Graph display of electric energy ...................................................................................................... 6-224
6.21 Machine Operation Information Screen ................................................................................................ 6-227
6.21.1 Machine Operation Status ............................................................................................................... 6-227
6.21.2 Ratio of cut time / non-cut time........................................................................................................ 6-230
6.22 PLC Data Screen .................................................................................................................................. 6-231
6.23 Bit Select Screen .................................................................................................................................. 6-232
6.24 I/F Diagnosis Screen ............................................................................................................................ 6-233
6.25 Software List Screen ............................................................................................................................. 6-234

0-3
 6.26 B-axis Operation ................................................................................................................................... 6-235
6.26.1 Machining data setting .................................................................................................................... 6-235
6.26.2 Tool setting for B-axis tools ............................................................................................................. 6-235
6.26.3 Shift amount adjustment ................................................................................................................. 6-236
6.26.4 Center (core) position adjustments ................................................................................................. 6-244
6.26.5 Handle feed ..................................................................................................................................... 6-251
6.26.6 Zero return ...................................................................................................................................... 6-256
6.26.7 B-axis coordinate display ................................................................................................................ 6-257
6.27 Regular maintenance screen ................................................................................................................ 6-258
6.27.1 Completing regular maintenance .................................................................................................... 6-259
6.27.2 Changing maintenance intervals and remaining time...................................................................... 6-259
6.28 Unloading Screen ................................................................................................................................. 6-260
6.29 Loader device operations...................................................................................................................... 6-264

7. Mounting and Adjusting Chuck ................................................................................................................................ 7-1

7.1 Mounting and Adjusting Chuck ................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.1.1 Mounting and replacing spindle chuck ................................................................................................ 7-4
7.1.2 Adjusting spindle chucking force ......................................................................................................... 7-5
7.1.3 Mounting rego chuck ........................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.1.4 Mounting and replacing the spindle stabilizer pipe .............................................................................. 7-9
7.2 Mounting/Adjusting a Guide Bushing Device .......................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.1 Replacing a synchronous rotary guide bushing device ..................................................................... 7-10
7.2.2 Replacing and adjusting the guide bushing ....................................................................................... 7-13
7.3 Switching over between GB-specification and GBL-specification ........................................................... 7-14
7.3.1 Switching from GB-specification (synchronous rotary guide bushing) to GBL-specification .............. 7-14
7.3.2 Switching from GBL-specification to GB-specification (synchronous rotary guide bushing).............. 7-18
7.4 Rearrangement of Back Spindle Device ................................................................................................. 7-23
7.4.1 Mounting and adjusting chuck ........................................................................................................... 7-23
7.4.2 Adjusting back spindle chucking force .............................................................................................. 7-25
7.5 Adjusting knock-out device ..................................................................................................................... 7-28
7.5.1 Mounting and replacing knock-out jig ................................................................................................ 7-28
7.5.2 Adjusting protrusion amount of knock-out jig..................................................................................... 7-29
7.5.3 Resetting knock-out overload alarm (U51B)...................................................................................... 7-29
7.5.4 Adjusting knock-out feed rate ............................................................................................................ 7-30
7.6 Rearrangement of through-hole workpiece ............................................................................................. 7-31
7.6.1 Mounting knock-out device for through-hole workpiece knock-out device ........................................ 7-31
7.6.2 Replacing the knock-out jig for through-hole workpieces .................................................................. 7-33
7.7 Diameter/Length Selection Type Knock-out Jig ...................................................................................... 7-37
7.7.1 Selection of knock-out jig diameter/length ......................................................................................... 7-37
7.7.2 Model name and selection of diameter/length ................................................................................... 7-38
7.7.3 Knock-out jig selection example ........................................................................................................ 7-39
7.7.4 General shapes of knock-out jigs ...................................................................................................... 7-40
7.8 Phase Adjustment between Spindle and Guide Bushing (Non-conformed Material) .............................. 7-42
7.9 Mounting and Adjusting Workpiece Separator ........................................................................................ 7-44
7.9.1 Workpiece collection mode ............................................................................................................... 7-44
7.9.2 Pick-off collection mode (U30J, U31J) .............................................................................................. 7-44
7.9.3 Setup for retrieving workpieces from the workpiece receiver box (U33J) .......................................... 7-45
7.10 Setting Up and Adjusting the Long Workpiece Device (Option) .............................................................. 7-48
7.10.1 Process changeover of long workpiece pipe ..................................................................................... 7-49
7.10.2 Mounting cap nut and collar for long workpiece device ..................................................................... 7-52
7.10.3 Installing a stabilizer guide ................................................................................................................ 7-54

0-4
 7.10.4 Long workpiece receiver shelf (option).............................................................................................. 7-55
7.10.5 Adjusting position of longitudinal adjustment pipe ............................................................................. 7-57
7.11 Workpiece conveyor ............................................................................................................................... 7-58
7.11.1 Adjusting workpiece chute................................................................................................................. 7-58
7.11.2 Cleaning the workpiece conveyor ..................................................................................................... 7-59
7.12 Workpiece Unloader (U35J, Option), Workpiece Receiver Box (U351J, Option) .................................... 7-60
7.12.1 Workpiece unloader overview ........................................................................................................... 7-60
7.12.2 Installing product shelf in workpiece unloader ................................................................................... 7-63
7.12.3 Replacing and adjusting fingers in the hand ..................................................................................... 7-64
7.12.4 Adjusting the core of the hand........................................................................................................... 7-66
7.12.5 Receiver box overview ...................................................................................................................... 7-68
7.12.6 Replacing the receiver box ................................................................................................................ 7-68
7.12.7 Switching from long workpiece device to shared shelf for workpiece unloader (U422B)................... 7-70
7.13 Mounting and Removing Tools................................................................................................................ 7-71
7.13.1 Mounting tools ................................................................................................................................... 7-71
7.13.2 Removing tools ................................................................................................................................. 7-72
7.13.3 Installing tools on gang tool post rotary tool drive device .................................................................. 7-72
7.13.4 Installing tools on the opposite tool post ........................................................................................... 7-79
7.13.5 Installing tools on the back tool post ................................................................................................. 7-80
7.13.6 Adjustment using alignment ring (Option) ......................................................................................... 7-82
7.13.7 Tool set jig (GPJ101) (option) ............................................................................................................ 7-83
7.14 Coolant Flow Detector (U53R) ................................................................................................................ 7-84
7.14.1 Names and functions of components ................................................................................................ 7-85
7.14.2 Setting method .................................................................................................................................. 7-86
7.14.3 Operation check / Maintenance......................................................................................................... 7-88
7.15 Adjustment and Handling of Medium-/High-pressure Coolant Device .................................................... 7-89
7.15.1 Medium-/high-pressure coolant device (option) configuration ........................................................... 7-89
7.15.2 Adjusting the nozzle .......................................................................................................................... 7-90
7.15.3 Notes on using the separate pump unit............................................................................................. 7-97
7.15.4 Handling of the high-pressure coolant device ................................................................................. 7-100
7.16 Adjusting coolant nozzle length ............................................................................................................ 7-106
7.17 Connecting the Automatic Bar Loader .................................................................................................. 7-108
7.17.1 Connecting the emergency stop circuit of the loader ...................................................................... 7-108
7.17.2 Jumper pin setting procedure .......................................................................................................... 7-109
7.18 Loader .................................................................................................................................................. 7-111
7.18.1 Overview of the loader .................................................................................................................... 7-111
7.18.2 Replacing the load hand fingers and workpiece support ................................................................. 7-113
7.18.3 Center adjustment of the loader hand ............................................................................................. 7-115
7.18.4 Adjusting positions of the loader ..................................................................................................... 7-116
7.18.5 Adjusting the loader speed .............................................................................................................. 7-117

8. Operating Procedures .............................................................................................................................................. 8-1

8.1 Flow of Setup ............................................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.2 Procedure from Turning the Power on to Automatic Operation ................................................................. 8-5
8.3 Procedure from Continuous Operation to Turning the Power Off.............................................................. 8-7
8.4 Offset (Compensation) Data Input Procedure ........................................................................................... 8-8
8.5 MDI Operating Procedure ......................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.6 Procedure for Program Input from External Device ................................................................................ 8-10
8.6.1 Input from Front Card Slot ................................................................................................................. 8-10
8.6.2 Input from USB Port .......................................................................................................................... 8-11

0-5
 8.6.3 Input Using RS232C Interface (option) ............................................................................................. 8-12
8.7 Procedure for Program Output to External Device.................................................................................. 8-13
8.7.1 Output to Card Slot ........................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.7.2 Output to USB Port ........................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.7.3 Output Using RS232C Interface (option)........................................................................................... 8-15
8.8 Program Creating Procedure .................................................................................................................. 8-16
8.9 Program Calling Procedure..................................................................................................................... 8-17
8.10 Program Editing Procedure..................................................................................................................... 8-18
8.11 Program Deleting Procedure .................................................................................................................. 8-19
8.12 Machining Data Setting Procedure ......................................................................................................... 8-20
8.13 Counter Setting Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 8-21
8.14 Tool Setting Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.14.1 Gang Tool Setting Procedure (T01's tool) ......................................................................................... 8-22
8.14.2 Gang Rotary Tool Setting Procedure ................................................................................................. 8-25
8.14.3 Front Drilling Tool Setting Procedure (T21's tool) .............................................................................. 8-27
8.14.4 Back Drilling Tool Setting Procedure (T31's tool) .............................................................................. 8-30
8.14.5 Back Drilling Tool Setting Procedure (T51's tool) .............................................................................. 8-32
8.15 Zero Point Returning Procedure ............................................................................................................. 8-34
8.16 Transformation of Eco・Machine Operation Information in csv format ................................................... 8-35
8.17 Csv File Format of Eco and Machine Operation Information .................................................................. 8-36

11. Fundamentals of Programming ............................................................................................................................ 11-1

11.1 The NC Program..................................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.1.1 Difference between cam control and NC ........................................................................................... 11-4
11.2 Process of Program Creation.................................................................................................................. 11-5
11.3 NC Program Structure ............................................................................................................................ 11-7
11.3.1 Machining data (screen display)...................................................................................................... 11-10
11.4 Tool Layout Pattern ............................................................................................................................... 11-14
11.5 Drive Axis .............................................................................................................................................. 11-15
11.5.1 6-axis control specification (Type XII).............................................................................................. 11-15
11.5.2 6-axis control specification (Type X)................................................................................................ 11-16
11.5.3 5-axis control specification (Type IX)............................................................................................... 11-17
11.5.4 5-axis control specification (Type VIII)............................................................................................. 11-18
11.5.5 Stroke drawing ................................................................................................................................ 11-19
11.5.6 Multi-axis control group ................................................................................................................... 11-20
11.6 Coordinate System ............................................................................................................................... 11-21
11.6.1 Coordinate axis ............................................................................................................................... 11-21
11.6.2 Setting the coordinate system (program zero point)........................................................................ 11-21
11.6.3 Signs ............................................................................................................................................... 11-22
11.6.4 Coordinate values ........................................................................................................................... 11-22
11.6.5 Absolute and incremental commands ............................................................................................. 11-23
11.7 Machining Pattern ................................................................................................................................. 11-24
11.7.1 Machining pattern list ...................................................................................................................... 11-25
11.7.2 Machining pattern flow .................................................................................................................... 11-27
11.7.3 Free pattern (machining pattern cancel) (G600) ............................................................................. 11-28
11.7.4 $1 single machining (G610) ............................................................................................................ 11-30
11.7.5 Inner/outer diameter simultaneous machining (G620) .................................................................... 11-33
11.7.6 Front/back parallel machining (G630) ............................................................................................. 11-35
11.7.7 Pick-off, center-support (G650) ....................................................................................................... 11-37

0-6
 11.7.8 Front/back simultaneous machining (G660) .................................................................................... 11-41
11.7.9 Superimpose control ....................................................................................................................... 11-43

12. Command Codes ................................................................................................................................................. 12-1

12.1 Summary of Addresses Used in NC Programs ....................................................................................... 12-3
12.2 Axis Commands (Feed Commands) ....................................................................................................... 12-5
12.3 T Functions (Tool Codes) ........................................................................................................................ 12-6
12.3.1 Tool mounting positions and machining points .................................................................................. 12-8
12.3.2 Overview of coordinate systems ....................................................................................................... 12-9
12.4 T Code Arguments ................................................................................................................................ 12-10
12.4.1 Tools on the gang tool post (T0100 to T1400) ................................................................................. 12-10
12.4.2 Back drilling tool on gang tool post (T5100 to T6000) ..................................................................... 12-26
12.4.3 Front drilling tool on opposite tool post (T2100 to T2400) ............................................................... 12-32
12.4.4 Back spindle (T3000) ...................................................................................................................... 12-35
12.4.5 Back drilling tool on back tool post (T3100 to T3900) ..................................................................... 12-36
12.4.6 T codes and arguments effective in machining patterns ................................................................. 12-43
12.5 G Functions (G Codes) ......................................................................................................................... 12-44
12.5.1 G codes table .................................................................................................................................. 12-44
12.5.2 Rapid feed positioning (G00)........................................................................................................... 12-46
12.5.3 Linear interpolation (G01) ............................................................................................................... 12-48
12.5.4 Circular interpolation (G02, G03) .................................................................................................... 12-50
12.5.5 Dwell (G04) ..................................................................................................................................... 12-52
12.5.6 Exact stop check (G09) ................................................................................................................... 12-53
12.6 F Functions (F Codes) (Cutting Feed Rate) .......................................................................................... 12-54
12.6.1 Cutting feed rate (F) ........................................................................................................................ 12-54
12.7 M Functions (M Codes)......................................................................................................................... 12-55
12.7.1 M codes table .................................................................................................................................. 12-55
12.7.2 Main spindle rotation and stop (M03, M04, M05) ............................................................................ 12-58
12.7.3 Back spindle rotation and stop (M23, M24, M25) ............................................................................ 12-59
12.7.4 Rotary tool on gang tool post rotation and stop (M80, M81, M82)................................................... 12-60
12.7.5 Rotary tool on back tool post rotation and stop (M180, M181, M182) ............................................. 12-61
12.7.6 Front rotary tool on opposite tool post rotation and stop (M83, M84, M85) ..................................... 12-62
12.7.7 Spindle chuck open and close (M06, M07) ..................................................................................... 12-63
12.7.8 Back spindle chuck open and close (M15, M16) ............................................................................. 12-63
12.7.9 Workpiece conveyor start (M31) ..................................................................................................... 12-64
12.7.10 Opposite tool post advance and return (M140, M141) .................................................................... 12-65
12.7.11 Gang tool post retraction (M151)..................................................................................................... 12-67
12.7.12 Thread Cutting Chamfering ON/OFF (M204, M205) ....................................................................... 12-68
12.7.13 Interference check function (M88, M89) .......................................................................................... 12-70
12.8 S Function (S Codes) (Spindle Speed Commands).............................................................................. 12-71
12.9 Queuing Function between Axis Control Groups "!" .............................................................................. 12-72

13. Sample Programming [Advanced] ....................................................................................................................... 13-1

13.1 Tool Position Offset ................................................................................................................................. 13-3
13.1.1 Examples of offset specification ........................................................................................................ 13-4
13.2 Bar Feed Program Enable/Terminate (M08, M09) .................................................................................. 13-7
13.3 Bar Feed (M54, M55) .............................................................................................................................. 13-8
13.4 Automatic Bar Feeder ............................................................................................................................. 13-9
13.4.1 M108 (Material change using an argument) ...................................................................................... 13-9
13.4.2 General-purpose material change program (by user program) ....................................................... 13-17
13.5 Subprogram (M98)................................................................................................................................ 13-20

0-7
 13.5.1 Subprogram call instruction ............................................................................................................. 13-20
13.5.2 Calling a subprogram from the main program ................................................................................. 13-20
13.5.3 Example of using a subprogram...................................................................................................... 13-21
13.6 Spindle Speed Change Detection Function (M94, M95, M96, M97) ..................................................... 13-23
13.7 Constant Surface Speed Control (G96, G97) ....................................................................................... 13-24
13.8 Tool Nose Radius Compensation Function ........................................................................................... 13-26
13.8.1 Tools subject to tool nose radius compensation and virtual tool nose numbers .............................. 13-27
13.8.2 Basic pattern of tool nose radius compensation G code ................................................................. 13-28
13.9 Cut-off Tool Breakage Detection (M51) ................................................................................................. 13-31
13.10 Corner Chamfering / Corner R .............................................................................................................. 13-34
13.11 Thread Cutting (Equal Pitch Thread Cutting and Continuous Thread Cutting) (G32) .......................... 13-36
13.12 Longitudinal Cut-Off Cycle (G75) .......................................................................................................... 13-38
13.13 Deep Hole Drilling Cycle 2 (G79, G80) ................................................................................................. 13-40
13.14 Synchronous Tapping Functions (G88, G84, G80) ............................................................................... 13-42
13.14.1 Synchronous tapping for outer circumference with a rotary tool (G88 and G80)............................. 13-42
13.14.2 Synchronous tapping for the end face of a workpiece with a rotary tool (G84, G80)....................... 13-44
13.14.3 Synchronous tapping for the center of the end face of a workpiece (main or back) (G84, G80) ..... 13-46
13.14.4 Continuously synchronous tapping ................................................................................................. 13-48
13.15 Arc Threading (G35, G36) .................................................................................................................... 13-50
13.16 Differential Speed Rotary Tool Function (G164) ................................................................................... 13-52
13.17 Canned Cycle Longitudinal Machining (G90)........................................................................................ 13-55
13.17.1 Straight cutting cycle ....................................................................................................................... 13-56
13.17.2 Taper cutting cycle .......................................................................................................................... 13-57
13.18 Thread Cycle Canned Cycle (G92) ....................................................................................................... 13-58
13.19 Link-Thread Machining ......................................................................................................................... 13-62
13.20 Multi-thread Screw Cutting.................................................................................................................... 13-65
13.21 Machine Coordinate System Command (G53) ..................................................................................... 13-67
13.22 Y-axis Holder ........................................................................................................................................ 13-68
13.23 Multi-piece Machining ........................................................................................................................... 13-70
13.24 Rapid Feed Acceleration/Deceleration Time Constant Setting ON/OFF (M360/M361) ......................... 13-72
13.25 Medium-/High-pressure Coolant Device ............................................................................................... 13-74
13.26 Rapid Feed Rate Setting ON/OFF (M350/M351) .................................................................................. 13-76
13.27 Cutting Start Interlock Enabled/Disabled (M86, M87) ........................................................................... 13-77
13.28 Error Detect ON/OFF (M92, M93)......................................................................................................... 13-78
13.29 Start Position Queuing (Type 1) (G115) ................................................................................................ 13-79
13.30 Start Position Queuing (Type 2) (G116) ................................................................................................ 13-80
13.31 Auxiliary Function Output during Axis Feed (G117) .............................................................................. 13-81
13.32 Arbitrary Axis Change (G140) ............................................................................................................... 13-82
13.33 End Position Specified Queuing (G149) ............................................................................................... 13-83
13.34 Arbitrary Axes Superimposition (G156)................................................................................................. 13-84
13.35 Line Angle Command ........................................................................................................................... 13-85
13.36 Geometric Command ............................................................................................................................ 13-87
13.37 Free Tool Layout Pattern (Holder Name = Free Tool) ........................................................................... 13-88
13.38 User Macro Program (Program Call by G code) ................................................................................... 13-89
13.39 User Macro Date Adding Function ........................................................................................................ 13-90

0-8
 13.40 DPRINT Function (POPEN, PCLOS, BPRNT, DPRNT) ........................................................................ 13-91
13.41 External Memory Program Operation Function..................................................................................... 13-92
13.42 Collision Detection Function ................................................................................................................. 13-93
13.43 Optional Block Skip ............................................................................................................................... 13-94
13.43.1 Expansion of the optional block skip function .................................................................................. 13-94
13.43.2 Optional block skip M code (M238) ................................................................................................. 13-96
13.44 Thermal Displacement Correction Function .......................................................................................... 13-98
13.44.1 Environmental requirements and restrictions on use ...................................................................... 13-98
13.44.2 Setting thermal displacement correction function ............................................................................ 13-99
13.45 B Code I/F (MB) .................................................................................................................................. 13-100
13.46 Simultaneous Machining ..................................................................................................................... 13-101
13.46.1 Inner/outer diameter simultaneous machining............................................................................... 13-101
13.47 ø38 Specification (Option) Tooling Restrictions .................................................................................. 13-104
13.48 Loader device ..................................................................................................................................... 13-105
13.48.1 Workpiece loading operations (M42) ............................................................................................. 13-105
13.48.2 Workpiece loading preparations (M42).......................................................................................... 13-109
13.48.3 Loader advance, retract (M221, M222) ......................................................................................... 13-110
13.48.4 Loader arm advance, retract (M223, M224) .................................................................................. 13-110
13.48.5 The loader hand opens and closes. (M225, M226) ....................................................................... 13-111
13.48.6 Shutter open, close (M227, M228) ................................................................................................ 13-111
13.48.7 Back spindle air blow On, Off (M229, M230) ................................................................................. 13-111
13.48.8 Front spindle headstock moves to the return position, start tool positioning (G698) ..................... 13-112

14. Sample Programming [Rotary tool Machining] ..................................................................................................... 14-1

14.1 Rotary Tool Process Guidelines .............................................................................................................. 14-3
14.1.1 Turning process and rotary tool process ........................................................................................... 14-3
14.1.2 Machining process order ................................................................................................................... 14-3
14.1.3 The coordinate system for rotary tool process .................................................................................. 14-4
14.2 Main Spindle Indexing ............................................................................................................................ 14-5
14.2.1 Main spindle indexing (M28, M20) .................................................................................................... 14-5
14.2.2 Back spindle indexing (M78, M79) .................................................................................................... 14-6
14.2.3 Main spindle C-axis indexing (M18) .................................................................................................. 14-7
14.2.4 Back spindle C axis indexing (M48) .................................................................................................. 14-9
14.2.5 C axis machining in the spindle synchronous control mode ............................................................ 14-10
14.3 Calculating the Command Speed ......................................................................................................... 14-11
14.3.1 Calculating the spindle speed value ................................................................................................ 14-11
14.4 Upcut and Downcut .............................................................................................................................. 14-12
14.4.1 Calculating the tool feed rate........................................................................................................... 14-13
14.5 Automatic Control of Rotation Direction of Rotary Tool ......................................................................... 14-14
14.5.1 Applicable tool layout and tool numbers .......................................................................................... 14-14
14.5.2 Rotary tool start/stop (M80/M81/M82) ............................................................................................. 14-16
14.5.3 Simultaneous front/back end-face tapping (G84) ............................................................................ 14-19
14.6 Two-Surface Width Machining (Including Indexing) Program ............................................................... 14-20
14.7 Through-Hole Machining....................................................................................................................... 14-22
14.8 Circular Interpolation in Rotary tool Process ......................................................................................... 14-23
14.8.1 Plane selection ................................................................................................................................ 14-23
14.8.2 Tool diameter compensation in rotary tool process ......................................................................... 14-24
14.9 Milling Interpolation (G12.1, G13.1) ...................................................................................................... 14-27
14.9.1 Milling coordinates .......................................................................................................................... 14-27
14.9.2 Milling plane .................................................................................................................................... 14-29

0-9
 14.9.3 Programming of a milling process ................................................................................................... 14-30
14.9.4 Calculation of milling coordinates .................................................................................................... 14-32
14.9.5 Program format ............................................................................................................................... 14-37
14.9.6 Supplementary explanation for tool diameter compensation ........................................................... 14-38
14.9.7 Milling interpolation and mirror image ............................................................................................. 14-39
14.9.8 List of NC unit errors during milling interpolation ............................................................................. 14-40
14.9.9 Example of using the milling interpolation function 1....................................................................... 14-41
14.9.10 Example of using the milling interpolation function 1 (D cut) ........................................................... 14-43
14.9.11 Example of using the milling interpolation function 2....................................................................... 14-45
14.9.12 Example of using the milling interpolation function 3....................................................................... 14-48
14.9.13 Example of using the milling interpolation function 4....................................................................... 14-50
14.10 Polygon Machining Function (G114.2, G113) ....................................................................................... 14-52
14.11 Hobbing Machining Function (G114.3, G113) ....................................................................................... 14-54
14.11.1 Gear formula ................................................................................................................................... 14-56
14.11.2 Cutting condition table (reference) .................................................................................................. 14-56
14.11.3 Example of using the hobbing machining function .......................................................................... 14-57
14.12 Coordinate rotation (G950, G951) ........................................................................................................ 14-58
14.13 B-axis Function ..................................................................................................................................... 14-59
14.13.1 Machining data setting .................................................................................................................... 14-59
14.13.2 B-axis tool angle.............................................................................................................................. 14-60
14.13.3 B-axis tool coordinate system ......................................................................................................... 14-60
14.13.4 Commands and program examples for B-axis control .................................................................... 14-61
14.13.5 Command specified axes and offset axes of B-axis tools ............................................................... 14-67
14.13.6 Offset for B-axis tools ...................................................................................................................... 14-68
14.13.7 How to avoid problems in B-axis mode ........................................................................................... 14-69
14.13.8 Precautions to be heeded during B-axis tool use ............................................................................ 14-69
14.14 Helical Interpolation .............................................................................................................................. 14-71
14.14.1 End-face helical interpolation process............................................................................................. 14-71
14.14.2 Slanted helical interpolation process (G173) ................................................................................... 14-73
14.14.3 Slanted helical interpolation process (G950, G951) ........................................................................ 14-76
14.15 3D Chamfering Function (G370) (Option) ............................................................................................. 14-77

15. Sample Programming [Back Machining] .............................................................................................................. 15-1

15.1 Back Machining Program ........................................................................................................................ 15-3
15.2 Back Machining Coordinates .................................................................................................................. 15-4
15.3 Back Machining Process......................................................................................................................... 15-5
15.4 Back Spindle Air Blow (M72, M73) .......................................................................................................... 15-8
15.5 Knock-out Advance/Retract (M10, M11) ................................................................................................. 15-9
15.5.1 Air cylinder driven knock-out device .................................................................................................. 15-9
15.5.2 Motor-driven knock-out device ........................................................................................................ 15-10
15.6 Product Collection by Basket (M320, M33, M34, M780) ....................................................................... 15-11
15.6.1 Move basket forward (M320)........................................................................................................... 15-11
15.6.2 Basket collection mode - Move product collection position (M33) ................................................... 15-13
15.6.3 Basket collection mode - sequential operation of product collection (M34) ..................................... 15-15
15.6.4 Mounting and adjusting the basket on back spindle (M780) ........................................................... 15-16
15.7 Pick-off Collection of Products by Back Spindle (M33, M34) ................................................................ 15-17
15.7.1 Move product collection position (M33) ........................................................................................... 15-17
15.7.2 A series of operations for product separation (M34)........................................................................ 15-19
15.7.3 Cut-off and product collection.......................................................................................................... 15-20
15.8 Workpiece unloader .............................................................................................................................. 15-22

0-10
 15.8.1 Series of workpiece unloader operations (M334) ............................................................................ 15-22
15.8.2 Workpiece unloader command (M335) ........................................................................................... 15-29
15.8.3 M code list for workpiece unloader .................................................................................................. 15-30
15.9 Spindle Synchronous Control (G114.1, G814, G113, G813, M77) ........................................................ 15-31
15.10 C1-C2 Axis Superimposition (M190, M191) .......................................................................................... 15-34
15.11 Pick-Off and Ending Process ................................................................................................................ 15-36
15.11.1 Pick-off process ............................................................................................................................... 15-38
15.11.2 Re-chucking of a long workpiece .................................................................................................... 15-40
15.12 Executing the Last Program (G999) ..................................................................................................... 15-46
15.13 Pick-off failure detect(M50) ................................................................................................................... 15-48
15.14 Machining with Tool or Rotary Tool in Back Machining ......................................................................... 15-49
15.15 Back Spindle Feed Per Rotation ON/OFF (G44, G43) ......................................................................... 15-51
15.16 Use of "Back Chuck Extend Length" in Machining Data ....................................................................... 15-52
15.17 Back Spindle Torque Limit (M122, M123, M124) .................................................................................. 15-54
15.18 Pick-off Cancel (G231).......................................................................................................................... 15-55
15.19 Back Machining Program Skip Function (M239) ................................................................................... 15-56

16. Program Example ................................................................................................................................................ 16-1

16.1 Program Creation ................................................................................................................................... 16-3
16.1.1 Example 1 (Front machining) ............................................................................................................ 16-3
16.1.2 Example 2 (Front machining with opposite tool post) ...................................................................... 16-10
16.1.3 Example 3 (Back machining)........................................................................................................... 16-15
16.1.4 Example 4 (Front/back simultaneous machining)............................................................................ 16-20
16.1.5 Example 5 (Machining with rechucking long workpiece) ................................................................. 16-29
16.1.6 Example 6 ....................................................................................................................................... 16-33
16.1.7 Example 7 ....................................................................................................................................... 16-41

17. Tooling ................................................................................................................................................................. 17-1

17.1 Structure of Tooling System .................................................................................................................... 17-3
17.2 Details of Tooling System...................................................................................................................... 17-10
17.2.1 Tool Holder ...................................................................................................................................... 17-10
17.2.2 Sleeve Holder.................................................................................................................................. 17-15
17.2.3 Rotary tool ....................................................................................................................................... 17-26
17.2.4 Idle Gear Unit .................................................................................................................................. 17-46
17.2.5 Sleeve ............................................................................................................................................. 17-47
17.2.6 Tapping and Die Sleeve .................................................................................................................. 17-78
17.2.7 Sleeve Adapter ................................................................................................................................ 17-92
17.2.8 Notes on using the end face drilling sleeve holder to be mounted on the vertical holder ................ 17-95

21. Machine Structure ................................................................................................................................................ 21-1

21.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 21-3
21.2 Main Components of the Machine .......................................................................................................... 21-4
21.3 Spindle Device ........................................................................................................................................ 21-5
21.4 Guide Bushing and Guide Bushing Drive Device.................................................................................... 21-6
21.5 Tool Post ................................................................................................................................................. 21-7
21.6 Rotary Tool Drive Devices....................................................................................................................... 21-8
21.7 Back Spindle Devices ............................................................................................................................. 21-9
21.8 Z-Axis Feed Mechanism ....................................................................................................................... 21-10
21.9 X, Y-Axis Feed Mechanism................................................................................................................... 21-11

0-11
 21.10 Lubricating Device ................................................................................................................................ 21-12
21.11 Coolant Device ..................................................................................................................................... 21-14
21.12 Pneumatic Device ................................................................................................................................. 21-15
21.13 Electric Device ...................................................................................................................................... 21-17

22. Periodical Check .................................................................................................................................................. 22-1

22.1 Periodical Check ..................................................................................................................................... 22-3
22.1.1 Daily Check ....................................................................................................................................... 22-4
22.1.2 Monthly Check .................................................................................................................................. 22-6
22.1.3 Semi-Annual Check ........................................................................................................................ 22-11
22.1.4 Removing Chips .............................................................................................................................. 22-13
22.1.5 Cleaning the coolant tank of the high-pressure coolant device ....................................................... 22-15
22.2 Oil and Grease Supply .......................................................................................................................... 22-16
22.2.1 Lubrication list ................................................................................................................................. 22-16
22.2.2 Precautions on Lubrication and Replacement of Lubricant ............................................................. 22-17
22.2.3 Coolant............................................................................................................................................ 22-21
22.3 Consumable Parts ................................................................................................................................ 22-23

23. Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................................................... 23-1

23.1 Failure Detection..................................................................................................................................... 23-3
23.1.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 23-3
23.1.2 Failure detecting procedure............................................................................................................... 23-3
23.2 Interface Diagnosis ................................................................................................................................. 23-5
23.2.1 Operating the I/F DIAGNOSIS screen ............................................................................................... 23-5
23.2.2 Device numbers and display data ..................................................................................................... 23-6
23.3 Alarms..................................................................................................................................................... 23-7
23.3.1 Error and alarm messages ................................................................................................................ 23-7
23.3.2 Alarm lists.......................................................................................................................................... 23-8
23.3.3 Stop codes ...................................................................................................................................... 23-18
23.3.4 File system error lists ...................................................................................................................... 23-19
23.4 Post-Alarm Actions ............................................................................................................................... 23-21
23.4.1 Recovery from interference check alarm ......................................................................................... 23-21
23.4.2 Resetting Knock-Out Alarm ............................................................................................................. 23-23
23.4.3 Recovery from spindle chuck illegal state ....................................................................................... 23-26
23.4.4 Recovery from back spindle chuck illegal state ............................................................................... 23-27
23.4.5 Recovery from emergency stop button alarm.................................................................................. 23-28
23.4.6 Recovery from pump overload alarm .............................................................................................. 23-30
23.4.7 Recovery from overcurrent alarm .................................................................................................... 23-31
23.4.8 Troubleshooting when 24 VDC power supply fails .......................................................................... 23-33
23.4.9 Troubleshooting after main spindle, back spindle, and rotary tool alarms ....................................... 23-33
23.4.10 Troubleshooting after spindle related alarms .................................................................................. 23-34
23.4.11 Recovery from external device alarms ............................................................................................ 23-37
23.4.12 Troubleshooting after OP076 Device battery low level Alarm .......................................................... 23-39
23.4.13 Recovery from other alarms ............................................................................................................ 23-40
23.4.14 Recovery from thermal displacement correction device alarm ........................................................ 23-48
23.4.15 Recovery from loader device alarms ............................................................................................... 23-48
23.5 Mechanical Errors ................................................................................................................................. 23-52
23.5.1 Machine fails to start ....................................................................................................................... 23-52
23.5.2 Main spindle does not rotate during automatic operation ................................................................ 23-53
23.5.3 Back spindle does not rotate during automatic operation................................................................ 23-53
23.5.4 Rotary tool does not rotate during automatic operation................................................................... 23-53

0-12
 23.5.5 Guide bushing alarms ..................................................................................................................... 23-54
23.5.6 If "It fails in the update of OP088 Eco/ope. info. file." alarm occurred ............................................. 23-55
23.6 Appendix ............................................................................................................................................... 23-58
23.6.1 PLC constant setting ....................................................................................................................... 23-58
23.6.2 PLC bit selection parameter setting ................................................................................................ 23-60
23.6.3 Checking the version of software .................................................................................................... 23-62
23.6.4 Checking the alarm history .............................................................................................................. 23-63
23.6.5 Checking the key-in history ............................................................................................................. 23-64
23.6.6 Terminal layout ................................................................................................................................ 23-65
23.6.7 Control box component layout......................................................................................................... 23-67

24. Relocating the NC Machine ................................................................................................................................. 24-1

24.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 24-3
24.2 Selecting the Installation Site .................................................................................................................. 24-3
24.3 Preparation for Transporting ................................................................................................................... 24-7
24.4 Transportation ....................................................................................................................................... 24-14
24.4.1 Hoist sling........................................................................................................................................ 24-14
24.4.2 Forklift truck..................................................................................................................................... 24-15
24.5 Installing the NC Machine ..................................................................................................................... 24-16
24.6 Fixing the Machine using Anchor Bolts ................................................................................................. 24-20
24.7 Pre-operation Check ............................................................................................................................. 24-22
24.8 Disposal ................................................................................................................................................ 24-23

0-13
 Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ
Document Code 1E1-0005
Mfg. No. L32/0480～
Issue Date 2016.12

0-14
 1. Outline
1.1 Outline of This Manual .............................................................................................................................. 1-3
1.2 Audience ................................................................................................................................................... 1-4

1-1
 (Blank Page)

1-2
 L32

1.1 Outline of This Manual

Described below are the purposes of the manual:
• Provides information for operators who need to understand Cincom in order to operate the machine safely.
• Provides information for programmers who need to create a program to perform a variety of basic machining.
• Provides information for service and maintenance engineers who need to inspect, maintain, and repair the machine
safely.
The manual contains information about how to handle, check, and maintain the machine while taking advantage of the
best performance the machine can yield. Fully understand and learn operation and maintenance methods described in
this manual for correct and safe operations in the best condition with any loss of performance.
The manual is composed of the following chapters:
Operator's Manual
Chapter 1 Outline
Explains the purpose and organization of this manual.
Chapter 2 Safety Precautions
Explains notes on safety in programming, setting up and adjusting, operating, and maintaining the machine.
This chapter also explains the provided safety devices and the operation procedures for emergencies.
Chapter 3 Machine Specifications
Explains the major parts of the machine and their functions.
Chapter 4 Operation Panel and Screens
Explains the operation panel, names and functions of switches, lamps, and keys, and various screens which are needed to
operate the machine.
Chapter 5 Preparation for Operating the Machine
Explains power-on and power-off of the machine, menu keys, and page keys.
Chapter 6 Operation for Running the Machine
Explains the machining procedures in sequence of machine operation, and functions on each screen in detail.
Chapter 7 Mounting and Adjustment
Explains the methods of mounting and adjusting methods needed for daily operation.
Chapter 8 Operating Procedures
Explains the essential points of the selected operating methods frequently used in daily operation.
Programmer's Manual
Chapter 11 Fundamentals of Programming
Gives basic knowledge needed for programming.
Chapter 12 Command Codes
Explains in detail commands needed for programming.
Chapter 13 Sample Programming [Advanced]
Gives rather complex examples of programming and adds explanations.
Chapter 14 Sample Programming [Secondary Machining]
Gives examples of secondary machining programming and adds explanation.
Chapter 15 Sample Programming [Back Machining]
Gives examples of back machining programming and adds explanation.
Chapter 16 Programming Practices
Gives programming practices.
Chapter 17 Tooling
Lists various tooling systems available with this machine and gives information about the specifications and dimensions
of the tools.

1-3
L32

Maintenance Manual
Chapter 21 Machine Components
Explains the major parts of the machine and their functions.
Chapter 22 Scheduled Maintenance Checks
Explains regular maintenance and check items (e.g., daily, monthly, and semi-annually) and related information.
Chapter 23 Troubleshooting
Explains various types of machine troubles and alarms and how to respond to these events.
Chapter 24 Relocating the NC Machine
Explains reinstallation conditions and procedures for transportation when the installed machine should be relocated.

Operator's Manual (Separate Volume)

• Parts List
Gives the detailed figures of machine parts and parts list.
• Wiring Diagram
Gives wiring diagrams and terminal numbers.
• Ladder I/O List
Gives the operation sequence of the machine.
1.2 Audience
This manual is intended for:
• All users and operators who use the Cincom machine
• Programmers who who want to make products using the Cincom machine
• Service and maintenance engineers who inspect, maintain, and repair the Cincom machine
To handle the machine safely, be sure to read through the manual and get an adequate understanding.
The target readers should read this manual thoroughly and fully understand it, including the information described in <2.
Safety Precautions>.

1-4
 L32

(Blank Page)

1-5
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 1E1-0101
Mfg. No. L32/0480～
Issue Date 2016.12

1-6
 2. Safety Precautions
2.1 Safety Signs.............................................................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2 Emergency Stop Button ............................................................................................................................ 2-6
2.3 Safety Devices .......................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.4 Specifications for Safe Operation ........................................................................................................... 2-11
2.5 General Precautions During Operation ................................................................................................... 2-12
2.6 Safety During Installing the Machine ...................................................................................................... 2-14
2.7 Before Starting the Machine ................................................................................................................... 2-14
2.8 Safety During Setup ................................................................................................................................ 2-15
2.9 Safety During Automatic Operation......................................................................................................... 2-16
2.10 Safety During Maintenance..................................................................................................................... 2-16
2.11 Safety After Everyday Operation............................................................................................................. 2-16
2.12 Fire Prevention Practices ........................................................................................................................ 2-17
2.13 Handling Emergency Situations .............................................................................................................. 2-19
2.13.1 Machine operation at occurrence of an accident ............................................................................... 2-19
2.13.2 Emergency situations requiring evacuation ....................................................................................... 2-19
2.13.3 Power failure ..................................................................................................................................... 2-19
2.13.4 Resuming work ................................................................................................................................. 2-19
2.14 Notes for prevention of machine damage ............................................................................................... 2-19
2.15 Notes on prevention of accidents caused by electromagnetic radiation and magnetism ........................ 2-20

2-1
 EC Declaration of Conformity

The construction of the machine

Machine Model:
Serial number:

has been developed, constructed and manufactured in compliance with the following
EC directives under the full responsibility of Citizen Machinery Co., Ltd
4107-6, Miyota Miyota-Machi, Kitasaku-Gun, 389-0206 Nagano, Japan

The following EC directives:

• 2006/42/EC Machinery Directive

• 2004/108/EC EMC Directive
(Electro magnetic compatibility)

The following harmonised standards have been referred to:

• EN ISO 12100
• EN ISO 13849-1
• EN ISO 23125
• EN 60204-1

To evaluate the results regarding electromagnetic compatibility, the following standards were referred to:

• EN 50370-1 (for emission)

• EN 50370-2 (for immunity)

For configuration of the technical documentation is authorised:

GmbH, 73728 Esslingen

Manufacturer
CITIZEN MACHINERY CO., LTD
4107-6, Miyota Miyota-Machi, Kitasaku-Gun, 389-0206 Nagano, Japan

Authorized Representative

* This document is applied only to a machine for EC.

2-2
 L32

2.1 Safety Signs

Be sure to read and understand this chapter and all other applicable chapters of this Manual and all on-product safety
signs before preparation, operating, and maintaining this machine.
Each safety sign has the specific signal word indicating the degree of the danger. The following three signal words are
provided. Each signal word indicates a particular degree of danger as described below.
• DANGER
alerts you to an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious personal injury.
• WARNING
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious personal injury.
• CAUTION
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate personal injury
and/or possible damage to the machine and its components.
The location and content of the on-product safety signs are on the following pages. Be sure these signs are read and
understood.

Do not remove or hide any safety sign (warning label). If it is peeling, contact your Service Department.
The warning labels are intended to call user’s attention to dangers by indicating the contents of the dangers
and further prevent the user’s safety from being injured or dead and also the machine from being
damaged.

2-3
L32

<Figure 2.1-1> shows the locations of the warning labels. <Figure 2.1-2> describes the contents of the warning labels.

Figure 2.1-1 Locations on which the warning labels are put

2-4
 L32

Figure 2.1-2 Contents of warning labels

2-5
L32

2.2 Emergency Stop Button

The red emergency stop button is located on the operation panel. When there is an emergency situation such as fire,
power failure, earthquake, or lightning or if you need to evacuate at once, press this button to stop the operation
immediately before you leave the work site. Press this button anytime you feel dangerous while operating the machine.
Note, however, that pressing these emergency stop buttons during machine operation might damage a tool as well as the
product being processed. To reset the emergency stop state, first verify your safety, and perform the following steps.
[Procedure]
1. Turn the locked emergency stop button clockwise to release the lock.
2. Press the Power OFF button to turn the power off.
3. Press the Power ON button to turn the power on.
4. Return all the mobile sections of the machine to their return positions and then remove all the workpieces subject to
machining from the machine

<Figure 2.2-1> shows the location of Emergency Stop button.

Figure 2.2-1 Location of the emergency stop button

2-6
 L32

2.3 Safety Devices

No safety devices provide complete safety against accidents and hazards.

Be sure to follow the precautions and described in this chapter to operate the machine.
Failure to do so could result in death or serious personal injury.

Cincom provides the following kinds of safety devices to prevent and detect accidents and hazards when operating the
machine. The standard and optional safety devices shown and described on the following pages are installed depending
on particular operating needs of the customer.
• Devices to detect any accident that occurs during machine operation.
• Devices to stop the machine operation under an unsafe condition.
• Devices to prevent production of defective products.
• Devices to prevent damage to the machine or tools.
Safety devices are strongly recommended in the following situations:
• When reducing operator’s attention such as operating the machine continuously or in night shift.
• When extending the duties of the operator beyond this machine.
• When further reducing the possibility of accidents.
The remainder of this section shows the locations of safety devices and outlines their functions.

[Note]
Optional safety device can be used only when you purchase it.

2-7
L32

<Figure 2.3-1> and <Figure 2.3-2> shows the locations on which safety devices are installed.

Figure 2.3-1 Locations of the safety devices (front view of the machine)

2-8
 L32

Figure 2.3-2 Locations of the safety devices (rear view of the machine)

2-9
L32

The following are detailed descriptions of the safety devices:

• Door locks (standard)
Door locks prevent any person from opening the doors of cutting room (1) and spindle side (2) during machine
operation. See <Figure 2.3-1>. These doors will open only when the Door open button is pressed while the
machine is stopped.
When the door (4) on the rear panel of the machine is open, all operations including handle feed and preparation
mode are disabled.
However, when the door (4) on the rear panel of the machine is closed, but doors (1), (2) and (3) on the front panel
are open, operations (excluding main spindle operations) are performed at a speed of up to 2 m per minute in the
Handle Feed or Preparation mode. In addition, manually opening or closing the chuck and turning coolant supply on
or off can be performed whether the doors are open or closed, if the Setting switch is set to " ".

• Automatic fire extinguisher (standard accessory in Japan)

When a sensor in the machine detects that a set temperature has been exceeded, it will activate a carbon dioxide fire
extinguisher to automatically put out a fire.
The automatic fire extinguisher is not a device that can prevent a fire from occurring. It is a device to prevent a fire
from spreading. The automatic fire extinguisher may not be able to extinguish any fire that occurs. Observe the
<2.12 Fire Prevention Practices> to prevent fires. The provided CO2 fire extinguisher cannot extinguish metal
fires.
• Main breaker (standard)
This device automatically shuts itself off when it detects an over current of 60A or more, or an electric leakage of 30
mA or more.
• Cut-off tool breakage detector (standard)
A cut-off tool is very easily damaged. If you continue to operate the machine with a damaged cut-off tool, this might
damage the machine or cause a fire. This device detects whether or not material is properly cut. In other words, it
indirectly detects whether the cut-off tool is damaged to prevent the above possible dangers. When this device
detects a damaged cut-off tool, the alarm message "EX107 Tool bit breakage alarm. Cut off tool is broken." is
displayed.
• Coolant level detector (standard)
This device is installed in the coolant tank and detects the height of the coolant level. When the coolant level gets
lower than the limit, the alarm message "EX203 Coolant oil alarm. Supply the oil." is displayed and the operation of
the machine is automatically stopped after completing one cycle to prevent a fire hazard.
• Lubricant level detector (standard)
This device is installed in the central lubricating oil unit and detects the level of the lubricating oil. When the oil
level gets lower than the limit, the alarm message "EX202 Lubrication oil empty alarm. Supply the oil." is displayed
and the operation of the machine is automatically stopped after completing one cycle to prevent machine damage.
• Coolant flow rate detector (option)
This device is installed in the coolant supply path to observe the flow rate of the coolant.
If the flow rate drops below the set value, "EX105 Coolant Discharge Alarm Insufficient coolant oil, the nozzle is
clogged." is displayed. The motor stops automatically to prevent machine damage.

The following software functions are installed as safety devices in the machine.
• Spindle speed change detection (standard)
This function detects excessive changes in spindle speed to prevent machine damage. The alarm message "EX109
Main spindle speed fluctuation alarm." or "EX110 Back spindle speed fluctuation alarm." is displayed when it
detects a change of more than 10% from the specified speed.
Note, however, that this function must be turned off when the constant surface speed control function is used and
during tap and die machining.
• Interference check (standard)
This function checks for interference between spindles, guide bushing, and tool posts of the machine. When the
function determines the possibility of interference during machine operation, the NC alarm message "OP2 
and  are interfered." is displayed and the operation of the machine is stopped to prevent machine damage.
If this alarm is displayed, the operator must correct the program.

2-10
 L32

2.4 Specifications for Safe Operation

The start, stop, and operation speeds of the machine are specified for safety as shown below.
Door opened
(The Setting switch key is Door closed
set to “ ”)
Automatic operation Activation disabled Command-specified speed (Override
enabled)
Programmed operation
Program check
MDI operation
Chucking operation
Cutting during cut-off machining
Non-conformed material phase
adjustment
Knock-out advance/return
Preparation Operation at a speed of 2 m/min or Operation at a speed of 10 m/min or less
less (Override enabled)
Return position (Override enabled) In manual tool setting, operation speed is 2
Positioning point m/min or less (Operation speed increases to
Start position 10 m/min when "Toolset Feed UP" on the
Manual tool setting Set SW screen is enabled.)
Gang tool post retraction
Opposite tool post retraction
Tool selection for cut-off
machining
Material setting
Manual operation
Handle feed
Others Operation at 100% speed Operation at 100% speed
Opening/closing of chuck with
the SP.CHUCK key

The machine has door locks standard with the splash guard and spindle cover sections.

[Note]
• If the setting switch key is set to the " " position , machine operation excluding handle feed is disabled
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine and handle feed is not
available.
• On a machine equipped with an Enable switch, hold the Enable switch halfway down and press the Start button with
the Setting switch key set to “ ” position to perform the door opening preparation.

2-11
L32

2.5 General Precautions During Operation

Be sure to follow these general precautions for handling the machine.

Failure to do so could result in death or serious personal injury.

Follow these safety practices.
• This Cincom is a machine that aimed to cut the workpiece (e.g., metal or resin) with the cutting tool in
automatic operation mode. Do not use the machine in any other purpose than cutting.
• Do not operate the machine with any cover open.
• Do not put your fingers or hands into any moving part of the machine during machine operation. When
the Start button LED on the operation panel lights or flashes, regard the machine status as
Operating.
• Do not touch or stand close to any cutting tool or rotating part of the machine during machine operation.
• Do not touch any live electrical component of the electrical system. You could be electrocuted if you
touch live electrical components.
All the control unit covers and doors must be closed during machine operation.
Shutdown the main breaker of the machine before removing the control unit covers and doors.
• Do not modify the machine and control circuit.
• Press the emergency stop button to stop all machine motions if an emergency state arises.
To restore the machine after an emergency stop, make sure that the restoration of the machine is safe
without causing danger, reset the pressed emergency stop button, shut off the power supply and the
main breaker and then return them on immediately. After that return all machine moving parts to the
respective return positions and remove all materials having been machined from the machine.

Follow these safety practices while operating the machine. Failure to do so could result in death or serious
personal injury.
• Never disable any safety devices while operating the machine during automatic operation.
• Do not open all doors unless the machine is completely stopped.
• Make sure that all doors are closed and locked and all safety devices are activated before operating the
machine.
• When operating the machine, sufficiently understand the operation and visually confirm the operation
switch to be used before actually pressing that switch.
• When machining a material combustible (flammable) during machining by cutting, operate the machine
in a state in which the operator can always monitor the machining process.

2-12
 L32

Follow these safety practices.

Failure to do so may result in minor/moderate personal injury and/or damage to the machine:
• The machine must be properly grounded. The ground must be electrically separated from power lines
or the grounding wires of another machine that could be a source of massive electrical noise.
See <24. Relocating the NC Machine>.
• Make sure that there is enough coolant in the machine and it is being supplied smoothly to all
necessary parts.
• Check the tooling to see that it is securely clamped in place before starting the machine.
• Be sure to do the periodical checking described in the manual.
• Clean the machine regularly to remove any chips and debris from the cutting area and the chip
receiving area.
• Remove stray chips from the coolant tank as required, depending on cutting condition and type of
material being machined.

2-13
L32

2.6 Safety During Installing the Machine

Failure to do so could result in death or serious personal injury. Follow these safety practices.
• Machine transfer requires work using cranes and forklifts and slinging work. Be sure to assign the personnel
certified by the public institute to the work.
• Be sure to shutdown the main breaker of the machine and the breaker for power supply to the machine on the plant
side before connecting/disconnecting the power cable to/from the machine.
• Be sure to connect the ground line when connecting the power cable to the machine.
2.7 Before Starting the Machine
Before starting the machine for the first time, you should know the following:
• The locations of the emergency stop button safety devices, and all doors.
• The meaning of all safety signs.
• How to stop the machine in an emergency situation.
• What happens to the machine when you operate buttons, switches and keys on the operation panel.
• Proper shutdown and startup procedures.
• Procedures for clearing machine troubles.
• How to shutdown the main breaker of the machine.
• Fire prevention procedures (see <2.12 Fire Prevention Practices>).

Failure to do so may result in minor/moderate personal injury and/or damage to the machine: Be sure to take the
following precautions before you start operating the machine.
• Make sure you wear the proper work clothes (no loose clothing), safety goggles, cap, and safety footwear. Also
make sure you remove any gloves, rings, accessories, neckties that may cause you to be caught by the machine.
• Make sure you are not too tired or sick to operate the machine safely. If you are tired or sick, DO NOT OPERATE
THIS MACHINE.
• Inspect the area around the machine for spills or objects that could cause slipping, falling, or tripping.
• Make sure that no maintenance work is being performed on the machine.
• Check the inside and outside of the machine to see that it is free of all foreign objects (tools, workshop towels, etc.).
• Make sure there is enough oil in the lubricating oil tank and coolant tank.
• Clean dirt, oil, and coolant off of the machine, especially on the operation panel.
• Make sure that the machine safety devices are engaged and working properly. NEVER operate the machine with the
safety devices disabled or removed.
• Make sure that the emergency stop button is working properly.
• Do not modify the machine and control circuit.
• Check all screws of the tool holder, chuck, guide bushing and others to make sure they are not loose; tighten them if
necessary.
• Make sure that the tools and the material are mounted firmly. Also make sure that the correct tools are installed for
the machining program to be used and the offset has been specified properly (if necessary).
• Make sure that all doors are securely closed.

2-14
 L32

2.8 Safety During Setup

Failure to do so could result in death. Follow these safety practices during operation.
• Never adjust the tools or measure the dimension of the material during machine operation. This can cause severe
personal injury.
If adjustment or measurement is necessary, stop the machine first. Then, before adjusting or measuring, make sure
that all machine motion has stopped and that the work cycle will not start automatically.
• Check whether the chucking force is sufficient for the material.
• Do not make the guide bushing too tight. It can cause burning or galling. Fix the guide bushing using the most
suitable tightening torque.
• When you have used any jig or tool for adjusting the guide bushing or chuck, be sure to remove the jig or tool.
• Before attempting to move a part by pressing a button, be sure to visually confirm that part and button.
• All cutting room doors must be fully open during maintenance work in the cutting room. Fully open means that the
rollers on each side of the door engage the rail grooves. Firmly hold the door handle when opening and closing the
doors. Keep your hands away from door openings to avoid getting your hand caught in the door.

Failure to do so may result in minor/moderate personal injury and/or damage to the machine: Follow these safety
practices during operation.
• Make sure that tools attached do not interfere with mechanical portions of the machine every time the machine is set
up for new and exchanged programs or tools. If there is interference, this could cause machine damage and personal
injury.
• When you check the tool movement, always know where you are in the machining program so that you know when
and how the machine will move and can follow the necessary safety precautions for this movement.
• Verify the machining program and the actual setup. Check for unintended results, which you should always try to
anticipate, such as machine damage and dangerous operating conditions.
• Because this machine has no way to check and correct user's machining programs, the machine will act exactly the
way it is programmed.
• Verify the machining programs carefully. Failure to do so could cause machine damage and personal injury.
• Never attempt to perform work that is beyond the specifications of the machine.
• Take coolant flow into consideration when you select the tooling. Select tooling that allows a smooth passage of
chips.
• Use the proper tools and install them only after the machine is completely stopped.
• When any door is open during machine setup, do not select a tool, or do not operate the main and back spindles or the
rotary tool driving device. Also, do not touch cutting tools on the tool posts during machine operation.

2-15
L32

2.9 Safety During Automatic Operation

To prevent any secondary accident from being triggered by an unexpected incident, such as jammed chips be sure to
monitor the operation status at appropriate intervals during the automatic operation and troubleshoot a failure, if any.
Regularly Monitor the Machine
• To produce high-quality products and avoid damage to the machine and possible personal injury, monitor the
machine at regular intervals for alarm messages, tool wear, coolant flow, etc.
• Be aware of common operating problems and correct them immediately. Common problems include jammed chips,
damaged tools, burned material, etc.
• Perform the following inspections on a regular basis. Monitoring intervals will depend on cutting condition, type of
material, etc., and can only be determined by the operator through experience with the machine.
• Clear the Machine of Chips
Too many chips on the tools and materials can greatly reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. Reduced cooling
effect can cause a fire, depending on the type of material being machined. Remove chips from the chip receiving
area and the cutting area at suitable intervals. When the machine is regularly used, intervals depend on cutting
condition, material, etc. Monitor the level and condition of coolant periodically. Failure to do so can result in
damage to the tools and a possible fire hazard.
• Inspect the Coolant
Monitor the coolant condition and level periodically. Check regularly to make sure that the coolant is discharged
smoothly and that the supply to the machining position is adequate. Failure to do so can result in damage to the
tools and a possible fire hazard.
• Inspect the Tools
Dull, worn, or damaged tools put excessive load on the machine. This can damage the machine and possibly
cause a fire. Follow a regular inspection/maintenance schedule for the tools.
During machine operation, listen for abnormal sounds and be aware of possible troubles due to damaged, dull, or
worn out tools. Also inspect completed workpieces for evidence of damaged, dull, or worn out tools.
2.10 Safety During Maintenance
Disregarding the following safety practices could cause machine damage and serious personal injury.
• Only qualified maintenance personnel should perform maintenance operations on the machine.
• The safety devices can be disengaged for maintenance operations using the operation panel. Before disengaging the
safety devices, make sure you are familiar with the current program and where the machine is in the program.
Make sure the machine has stopped before reaching into the machine to make any adjustments.
Cincom recommends that the safety devices be engaged for all machine operations except during required
maintenance.
Before removing control unit covers and doors, turn off the work light, then turn off main circuit breaker of the
machine.
• Always use the specified fuse. Installing a wrong type/size of fuse in the machine can cause machine damage and a
possible fire.
• A blown fuse indicates an electrical problem that must be corrected.
• The electrical components in this machine are high precision devices that can be damaged by excessive force, shock,
or vibration.
Use caution when you handle all electrical components of the machine.
• Use care when you disconnect connectors. They are easily damaged.
• Periodically clean the air filter. The cleaning interval depends on the operating environment.
Operating the machine with a dirty air filter could damage the electrical components.
• Follow appropriate lockout/tagout procedures during maintenance.
2.11 Safety After Everyday Operation
• Turn off the work light, then turn off the main circuit breaker of the machine.
• Carefully remove any chips caught on the material and cutting tools.
• Apply rust prevention oil on all unprotected (unpainted) machine surfaces.

2-16
 L32

2.12 Fire Prevention Practices

 Major causes of occurrence of fire
• The friction between the workpiece and the tool or the metallic section of the machine caused by break or wear of a
cutting tool may overheat the machine to be fired.
• Because the coolant is not discharged to the machining point enough, the workpiece is overheated to fire. The
following causes may be assumed:
• The position of the coolant nozzle is incorrect.
• Chips get caught in the coolant nozzle to move the position of the coolant nozzle.
• Because of insufficient coolant in the coolant tank, the coolant flow is rather low.
• Because chips are accumulated in the coolant tank to decrease the quantity of coolant flown into the pump, the
coolant flow is rather low.
• Because the filter in the coolant tank is clogged, the coolant flow is rather low.
• Chips are accumulated around the machining point.
• Others
• A combustible workpiece (flammable workpiece) is subject to machining to cause a fire to occur.
• Because no safety devices are operated, any failure cannot be detected to cause a fire to occur.
• A coolant having too low flash temperature (100ºC or lower) is used to cause a fire to occur.

 Major causes of spread of fire

• The occurrence of a fire was found late because the machine was not monitored.
• Frames were spread out of the cutting room because the cutting room door, chip outlet, and/or product outlet were
opened.

 Notes for fire prevention

Failure to do so may cause a fire resulting not only in damage to property but also death or serious personal injury.
Follow these safety practices.
• Monitor the machine status regularly. Then take appropriate action if a malfunction is found.
• To minimize the spread of a fire if it occurs, monitor operation status to enable the extinguishing work to be done
immediately.
• Always check the machine as described in <22. Periodical Check>.
• Check the cutting tools to use proper tools which are neither broken nor worn.
• Operate the machine within the range of the specification. See <8. Operating Procedures> in this Manual.
• Provide machining under the proper cutting conditions.
• Make sure that there is enough coolant in the machine and it is being supplied smoothly to all necessary parts.
• Confirm that the coolant hose is neither twisted nor broken, the connections are not loosened, and chips are not
accumulated at the bending sections.
• It is particular dangerous when an error occurs in the electric device of the machine to generate sparks. Stop the
machine immediately, turn off the main circuit breaker of the machine, and contact your Service Department.
• For the machining of a combustible workpiece (flammable workpiece), operate the machine under the condition that
an operator always monitors it. Prepare a metal fire extinguisher near the machine.
• Check the cutting tools for any breaks or wears. If a failure is found on a cutting tool, replace it with a normal one.
Also check the machining surfaces of products. If they indicate a failure of the tool, replace it with a normal one.
• Do not bring fire such as light of cigarette, light of lighter, and sparks close to the machine.
• Confirm the all doors on the cutting room, chip outlet, and product outlet to close them securely.
• Monitor the quantity of chips in the chip receiver and the coolant tank regularly to remove them.

2-17
L32

 Equipment for fire prevention

Take appropriate measures for fire prevention.
• The machine sold in Japan is equipped with automatic fire extinguisher.
• If you operate the machine without the automatic fire extinguisher, take substitute fire prevention measures.
The automatic fire extinguisher is not a device that can suppress the fire to occur. It is a device to prevent spreading
when a fire occurs. Even if an automatic fire extinguisher has been installed, fire might not be able to be extinguished
depending on the status of a fire. The most important thing is to prevent a fire from occurrence.
Be sure to operate, maintain, or inspect the automatic fire extinguisher according to Appendix <Fire extinguisher
manual>.

Observe the following to prevent fire from spreading.

• At the first time you operate the machine that has an automatic fire extinguisher, or before starting
operation, maintenance work, and/or inspection of the machine, be sure to read thoroughly the
Instruction Manual of Fire Extinguisher.
• If you operate the machine without the automatic fire extinguisher, be sure to take substitute fire
prevention measures.
• The automatic fire extinguisher functions when the cutting room door, chip outlet, and product outlet
are closed (in airtight state). Confirm that the cutting room door, chip outlet, and product outlet are
closed during machine operation.
• Be sure to mount the shutter on the mist collector that closes automatically by interlocking with the
automatic fire extinguisher. If the shutter is open, extinguishment will fail.
Also observe the following to prevent metal-caused fire from spreading.
• The combustible metal may ignite and burn by the cutting heat or others, if it is a thin tip, particle, or
melting state. The provided CO2 fire extinguisher cannot extinguish such as metal-caused fire. Be sure
to use a fire extinguisher dedicated to metal-caused fire. Keep the following in mind when cutting the
above workpiece:
• Avoid unattended operation.
• Prepare a fire extinguisher dedicated to metal fires near the machine.
• Do not use water to fight such fires. Fighting such a fire using water may cause it to spread.
Listed below are typical combustible metals. Contact the manufacturer of the material for detailed
information.
zirconium, magnesium, titanium, calcium, hafnium, lithium, plutonium, sodium, thorium, uranium, zinc, and
potassium

2-18
 L32

2.13 Handling Emergency Situations

Actions and procedure required in emergency situations are explained in this section.
2.13.1 Machine operation at occurrence of an accident
If an accident (e.g., any part of an operator's body caught in the machine) occurs, immediately stop the machine and
perform the following procedure:
• When the Emergency Stop button is already pressed:
Release the Emergency Stop button by turning it clockwise, and press the Power off button . Then, turn OFF
the main circuit breaker, then turn them ON again. After that, press the Power on button to turn on the power,
and move the control axis into a safety direction in manual operation mode. For the manual operation mode, see
<6.7 Manual operation>.
• When the Emergency Stop button is not pressed yet:
Move the control axis into a safety direction in manual operation mode. For the manual operation mode, see <6.7
Manual operation>.
2.13.2 Emergency situations requiring evacuation
When evacuation is required in the case of emergency situations, such as fire, earthquake, or lightning, perform these
procedures with the top priority on human lives.
• If you have time before evacuating
Stop the machine quickly and turn off the main circuit breaker.
Try to get the machine to stop when the tool is not touching the material. Otherwise, the tip of the tool may be
damaged in the process of stopping or restarting operation.
• If you do not have time and must evacuate immediately
Press the emergency stop button to stop the machine immediately.
2.13.3 Power failure
When power failure occurs, turn off the main circuit breaker.
2.13.4 Resuming work
After emergency stop of the machine or a power failure, follow the procedure below to resume operation of the machine:
[Procedure]
1. Inspect the tool and machine carefully for damage and replace or repair if necessary.
And confirm the machine can be operated safely and properly.
2. Cut off the material that was being machined when the emergency occurred.
3. Resume operation of the machine according to the Instruction Manual.
2.14 Notes for prevention of machine damage
Be sure to follow the notes described below. If not, the assets including the machine and machining products may be
lost.
• Confirm that the installed tool does not interfere with the machine in a preparation work such as program installation
or tool replacement.
• Do not modify the machine and control circuit.
• Do not provide any machining exceeding over the machine specification.
• The electrical components in this machine are high precision devices that can be damaged by excessive force, shock,
or vibration. Use caution when you handle all electrical components of the machine.
• Use care when you disconnect connectors. They are easily damaged.
• Pay attention to the cleanness of supply air. Contaminated air can cause damage to the machine. For information
regarding supplying clean air, see <24.2 Selecting the Installation Site>.

2-19
L32

2.15 Notes on prevention of accidents caused by electromagnetic radiation

and magnetism

• This machine conforms to International Standard concerning the limiting value of the electromagnetic
radiation. A person who uses an implanted medical device such as a pacemaker and other medical
electronics device must consult with the medical institution or the manufacturer of such device for the
influence caused by the electromagnetic radiation before operating this machine.
• In the machine that uses a linear motor to drive the feed axis, a strong magnet is used for the relevant
locations. The magnetism is attenuated while the cover of the magnet is being closed. However, if the
cover is removed for maintenance work or others, the magnet is exposed. Under such a condition, an
electronic equipment and the precision instrument may be affected if they are placed in a area within 30
cm of the magnet.
A person who uses an implanted medical device such as a pacemaker and other medical electronics
device should not operate the machine in the state that the magnet is exposed.
The fatal accident might be caused.
If you feel an abnormality of medical equipment even if you are away from the magnet by 30 cm or
more, immediately keep away from the magnet and consult your doctor.
• Do not bring a magnetic substance including the tool close to the magnet of a linear motor that is
exposed. A strong magnetic force may cause a hazardous situation which will result in death or serious
personal injury.
Do not bring the clock, the cellular phone, the camera, personal computer, magnetic card, nor a
magnetic storage media close to the magnet. Doing so may cause a damage or a failure of the
equipment.

2-20
 L32

(Blank Page)

2-21
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 1E1-0203
Mfg. No. L32/0480～
Issue Date 2016.12

2-22
 3. Machine Specifications
3.1 Main Components of the Machine ............................................................................................................ 3-3
3.2 Outside Dimensions and Layout of Machine............................................................................................. 3-4
3.3 Standard machine specifications .............................................................................................................. 3-7
3.3.1 Machine Specifications ....................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3.2 Standard NC specifications ............................................................................................................... 3-11
3.3.3 Attachment specifications.................................................................................................................. 3-20
3.3.4 Environmental information................................................................................................................. 3-26
3.3.4.1 Basic information ......................................................................................................................... 3-26
3.3.4.2 Environmental performance information ...................................................................................... 3-26
3.3.4.3 Approach to environmental issues............................................................................................... 3-27

3-1
 (Blank Page)

3-2
 L32

3.1 Main Components of the Machine

Front view of machine

Rear view of machine

3-3
L32

3.2 Outside Dimensions and Layout of Machine

Outside dimensions of the machine

Machine layout

Manufacturer Machine type L1 L2

IKURA SEIKI OS38RE-3.0m 4290 6810
Alps Tool ASR X-32PN2-3.0m 4300 6820
Citizen CAV32E-LE-IS 5061 8561

3-4
 L32

Outline drawing and dimensions (when the U60J or U60S loader device is installed)

Machine layout (when the U60J or U60S loader device is installed)

3-5
L32

Optional machine layout drawing

3-6
 L32

3.3 Standard machine specifications

3.3.1 Machine Specifications
L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
1 Maximum machining ø32mm (ø10 - max. machining diameter)
diameter (Optimum ø38 mm (option)
machining diameter)
2 Maximum machining GB: 320mm/1 chuck The maximum length of the
length products that can be collected
GBL: 2.5D (max. 80 mm)/1 chuck by the workpiece separator is
150 mm (type VIII, IX) and
140 mm (type X, XII).
To machine products longer
than this limit, use an optional
long workpiece device. This
device allows machining and
collection of a product up to
500 mm long.
3 Maximum front drilling ø12mm Drilling larger holes than
diameter specified is possible,
depending on cutting
conditions and material.
4 Maximum front tapping M12 (tap) The maximum tapping
diameter M10 (die) diameter on the left is the
(tap and die) specification for the cutting
tap.
5 Spindle through-hole ø39 mm The through-hole diameter of
diameters ø38 mm specification: ø39 mm (option) the chuck sleeve is ø33 mm.
ø32 mm specification: ø39 mm (standard The maximum diameter of the
specification) finger of the bar loader must
be smaller than above
diameter.
6 Main spindle speed 200 - 8,000min–1
7 Main spindle speed Stepless, S5-digit
change steps
8 Main spindle indexing 1゜
9 Main spindle C axis 0.001゜ Option
10 Maximum chucking ø32 mm
diameter of back spindle ø38 mm (option)
11 Maximum 150mm 140mm Optional long-workpiece unit
front protrusion length of can be used to collect up to
back-machined 500mm products.
workpiece
12 Maximum external 80 mm 65mm Maximum length of the
workpiece length of back protrusion of workpiece from
spindle the end face of the back
spindle chuck.
13 Back machining ø10 mm Drilling larger holes than
maximum drilling specified is possible,
diameter depending on cutting
conditions and material.
14 Back machining M10 The maximum tapping
maximum tapping diameter on the left is the
diameter specification for the cutting
tap.
15 Main spindle speed 200 to 8,000min-1
16 Back spindle speed Stepless, S4-digit
change steps
17 Back spindle indexing 1゜ Option
18 Back spindle C axis 0.001゜ Option

3-7
L32

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
19 Rotary tool for cross Drilling larger holes than
machining specified is possible,
Maximum drilling ø10 mm depending on cutting
diameter conditions and material. The
Maximum tapping M6 maximum tapping diameter on
diameter the left is the specification for
the cutting tap.
Main spindle speed 200 to 6,000 (4,500) min-1 ( ): Rated spindle speed. If the
Main spindle speed Stepless, S4-digit speed exceeds the rated value,
change steps the motor may be overloaded.
Reduce the speed to machine
the workpieces. Machining the
workpieces without reducing
the speed may damage the
machine components such as
motor and gears.
20 Front machining rotary Option
tool Drilling larger holes than
Maximum drilling ø10 mm specified is possible,
diameter depending on cutting
Maximum tapping M8 conditions and material. The
diameter maximum tapping diameter on
Main spindle speed 200 to 6,000 (4,500) min-1 the left is the specification for
Main spindle speed Stepless, S4-digit the cutting tap.
change steps ( ): Rated spindle speed. If the
speed exceeds the rated value,
the motor may be overloaded.
Reduce the speed to machine
the workpieces. Machining the
workpieces without reducing
the speed may damage the
machine components such as
motor and gears.
21 Back machining rotary VIII, IX options Drilling larger
tool holes than specified is
Maximum drilling ø10 mm possible, depending on cutting
diameter conditions and material. The
Maximum tapping M8 maximum tapping diameter on
diameter the left is the specification for
Main spindle speed 200 to 6,000 (4,500) min-1 the cutting tap.
Main spindle speed Stepless, S4-digit ( ): Rated spindle speed. If the
change steps speed exceeds the rated value,
the motor may be overloaded.
Reduce the speed to machine
the workpieces. Machining the
workpieces without reducing
the speed may damage the
machine components such as
motor and gears.
22 Chucking, bushing types
Main spindle collet FC-081-M
chuck FC-251-M（ø38 mm: Option)
Guide bushing FG-531-M
FG-581-M(ø38 mm: Option)
Rego type chuck ER11, AR11, ER16, AR16
Back spindle collet FC-081-M-K
chuck FC-251-M-K（ø38 mm: Option)

3-8
 L32

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
23 Number of tools to be 19 26 24 30
mounted When a ø38 specification is
Lathing tool 6 6 6 6 used, five cutting tools can be
Gang tool drilling tool 4 7 5 7 mounted.
Front drilling tool 4 4 4 4
Back drilling tool 5 9 9 13
24 Tool size 16 × 16 × 140mm [0.47 × 0.47 × 5.12"]
Tool bit
Sleeve

ø25.4 mm
25 Tools mounted in the ø10 mm (ER16, AR16)
rotary tool holder
Maximum shank
diameter
(Drill and end mill)
26 Rapid feed rate
X1 axis 32m/min
Y1 axis 32m/min
Z1 axis 32m/min
X2 axis 32m/min
Y2 axis - 24m/min
Z2 axis 32m/min
B1 axis - 36,000 - 36,000
deg/min deg/min
A3 axis 15m/min
A4 axis 36m/min
27 Least input increment Least input increment ( ): Option
X1 axis (diameter) 0.001 mm (0.0001 mm)
Y1 axis (diameter) 0.001 mm (0.0001 mm)
Z1 axis 0.001 mm (0.0001 mm)
X2 axis (diameter) 0.001 mm (0.0001 mm)
Y2 axis (diameter) - 0.001 mm (0.0001 mm)
Z2 axis 0.001 mm (0.0001 mm)
B1 axis - 0.001 deg - 0.001 deg
A3 axis 0.1mm
A4 axis 0.01mm
28 Axis stroke
X1 axis 124mm
Y1 axis 437mm
Z1 axis 325mm (with GB), 80mm (with GBL),
X2 axis 500mm
Y2 axis - 75mm
Z2 axis 377mm
B1 axis - 135 deg - 135 deg
(-45 to +90 (-45 to +90
deg) deg)
A3 axis 150mm
A4 axis 1319mm 1274mm
29 Bar length 2,500-4,000 mm
30 Center height 1,050mm

3-9
L32

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
31 Motors The control method is as
follows:
For spindle drive 3.7/7.5KW (Continuous/15 min rating) Built-in spindle motor
Rotary tool for cross 1.0kW AC servo motor
machining
For back spindle drive 2.2/3.7 KW Built-in spindle motor
(Continuous/15 min rating)
For back machining 0.75KW AC servo motor
rotary tool
Front machining rotary 1.0kW AC servo motor
tool
X1 axis 0.5KW AC servo motor
Y1 axis 1.0kW AC servo motor
Z1 axis 1.0kW AC servo motor
X2 axis 1.0kW AC servo motor

Y2 axis - 0.5KW AC servo motor

Z2 axis 1.0kW AC servo motor
B1 axis - 0.4KW - 0.4KW AC servo motor
A3 axis 0.2KW AC servo motor
A4 axis 0.2KW AC servo motor
For coolant oil 0.4KW
For lubrication oil 0.003KW
32 Rated power 13.2 kVA
consumption
33 Coolant tank capacity 220 liters
34 Required floor space 1,382mm (Depth) Clean air should be supplied.
2,520mm (Width)
1,750mm (Height)
Pneumatic device
Pressure 0.5 MPa
Consumption 49 (Power On), 69.3 (stationary),197 (during air
blow) N/min
35 Noise level 78.5dB [A] Equivalent continuous sound
level A at work place
36 Weight
2,850kg [6.54 klb] 2,900kg [6.65 klb]

3-10
 L32

3.3.2 Standard NC specifications

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
1 NC unit CINCOM NC unit dedicated to the
SYSTEM M70LPC-VU Cincom L32 series.
2 Display device 8.4 inch Color (LCD)
Liquid Crystal Display
3 Displayed language English, Japanese, Chinese (traditional), German, ( ): Option
French, Italian, Spanish,
Russian, Polish, Czech,
(Portuguese)
4 Main spindle S1 S1 S1: Main spindle
S2, S2, S2: Back Spindle
S3, S3, S3: Rotary tool spindle on
(S4) (S4) gang tool post
(S5) (S5) S4: Front machining rotary
tool spindle
S5: Back machining rotary
tool spindle
( ): Option
5 Control axis (command X1, X1, X1, X1, The machine is capable of
axis) Y1, Y1, Y1, Y1, simultaneous control of all
Z1, Z1, Z1, Z1, axes.
X2, X2, X2, X2, X1: Gang tool post
Y2, Y2, Y1: Gang tool post
Z2, Z2, Z2, Z2, Z1: Headstock
B1 B1 X2: Back tool post
(C1), (C1), (C1), (C1), Y2: Back spindle headstock
(C2) (C2) (C2) (C2) Z2: Back tool post
B1: B-axis
(A3) (A3) (A3) (A3) (C1): Main C axis
(A4) (A4) (A4) (A4) (C2): Back C axis
(A7) (A7) (A7) (A7) (A3): Knock-out device
(A4): Workpiece unloader
(A7): Dedicated bar loader
CAV
( ): Option
6 Control axis groups 2 Auxiliary axis control group is
enabled automatically as
required.
7 Input code ISO
8 Command input system Incremental or Absolute
9 Feed command system Feed per revolution or feed per minute (G code
conversion)
10 Linear interpolation G00 (Standard function)
11 G00 feed rate command G00,F (Standard function)
12 Dwell G04 (Standard function)
13 Workpiece coordinate G50 (Standard function)
system command
14 Machine coordinate G53 (Standard function)
system command
15 Call sub-program M98 (Standard function)
16 Override function A rotary switch is used to set the override ratio. The setting range for cutting
Range: 1, 3, 5, 10, 20, ….. 100% (Standard function) feed can be expanded to the
Rapid feed maximum of 200% by
Cutting feed switching the setting of the
software setting switch.

3-11
L32

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
17 Zero point return function Manual zero point return system (Standard function) This machine has an absolute
position detection function.
Therefore, you normally do
not have to perform the
manual zero point return.
18 Automatic operation (Standard function) This function enables the
function selected program to run.
Continuous, 1 cycle, or 1
block can be selected.
19 On-machine program Manual pulse generator rotation system (Standard When a program is checked
check function function) using the machine, the
execution speed of the
program is proportional to the
rotation speed of the manual
pulse generator. The program
can be run backward by
rotating the pulse generator in
the minus direction.
20 Manual feed function Available for all the axes (Standard function) This function enables the
operator to move all the
control axes by turning the
handle.
21 Manual data input (MDI) (Standard function) This function enables the MDI
function input and execution of
programs.
22 Self-diagnostic function (Standard function) This function automatically
detects machine alarms and
displays alarm messages.
23 Machine status display (Standard function) This function displays the
machine status.
24 Backup function (Standard function) This function saves NC data
such as parameter settings in
memory.
25 Memory protection (Standard function) This function protects the
function programs, offset data and
parameter data.
26 Operating time display (Standard function) This function displays the
machine's operating time,
1-cycle time, and actual
cutting time in 1-cycle
operation.
27 Cumulative power-ON (Standard function) The total of NC unit power-on
hours hours is displayed.
28 Product counter Max. 8 digit (Standard function) The machine enters the
indication 1-cycle stop state when the
product counter reaches the
specified number of products.
29 Machine operation (Standard function) This function displays the
information display machine operation status in
graph. The information
includes sums of running time
and alarm stop time, and ratio
of cutting/no-cutting time.
30 Cycle time check function (Standard function) This function checks the
machine for abnormal state by
managing cycle time. If the
cycle time exceeds 30 minutes,
the system stops the machine
assuming the occurrence of an
alarm.

3-12
 L32

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
31 Automatic back-light (Standard function) This function automatically
off function turns off the back-light when
none of the keys or switches
on the operation panel is
operated for 10 minutes.
32 Eco display (Standard function) This function displays power
consumption, idling stop state,
etc.
33 Door open sensor (Standard function) This function detects the door
function open status.
34 Door lock function (Standard function) This function locks the door
while the machine is
operating.
35 Enable switch (Option)
36 Alarm history display (Standard function) This function displays the past
function 100 alarms.
37 Manual start/stop spindle (Standard function) This function allows starting
function and stopping of the main
spindle using the spindle
operation keys.
38 Preparation functions The functions below are
provided to support
preparation for automatic
operation.
Automatic return to the (Standard function) All the axes automatically
retract point return to their retract points
(fixed point) in the defined
order.
Automatic return to the (Standard function) Each axis automatically
positioning point returns to the positioning point
(fixed point, or point specified
in the machining data).
Automatic return to the (Standard function) Each axis automatically
start point returns to the start point of
automatic operation according
to the numeric value specified
in the machining data that can
be set for each workpiece.
Automatic cut-off (Standard function) This function automatically
machining function performs cut-off machining
(short cut).
In-machine tool set (Standard function) This function supports tool
function setting.
Phase adjustment (Standard function) Executes phase adjustment
function between the spindle and GB,
the spindle and the back
spindle, and the spindle C axis
and the back spindle C axis.
To be used together with the
spindle synchronous control
function and the C axis
function.
Non-conformed (Standard function) This function executes phase
material phase adjustment between the
adjustment function non-conformed material and
main spindle C axis.
Guide bushing (Standard function) This function supports
adjustment function clearance adjustment of guide
bushing.

3-13
L32

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
39 Automatic power-off (Standard function) This function shuts down the
function main breaker to turn off the
power when an alarm occurs
during automatic continuous
operation.
40 Three-dimensional (Standard function) This function monitors
interference check interference with machine
function components and stops the
machine if there is a risk of
interference.
41 Collision detection (Standard function) Detects collision of the
function machine during rapid feed
(G0) operation to minimize
damage to the machine.
42 Tool offset pairs 40 (Standard function)
80 (Option)
43 Simultaneous 4-spindle (Standard function) Up to four spindle speed
speed specification commands can be specified
simultaneously.
44 Simultaneous 4-M (Standard function) Up to four M commands can
specification be specified simultaneously
for each block. There is a limit
to M codes that can be
specified simultaneously.
45 Double axis move (Standard function) When a moving axis is moving
command output or it has reached the specified
point, a new move command
can be issued for another axis
to move.
46 Auxiliary function output (Standard function) When a moving axis is moving
during axis feed or it has reached the specified
point, an M, S, or T command
can be issued.
47 End position specified (Standard function) When a specified axis reaches
queuing the specified point, another
axis can be moved to the end
point at the same time.
48 Control axis change (Standard function) All the axis control groups are
function permitted to specify an
arbitrary axis or execute an
auxiliary command.
49 Control axes (Standard function) Simultaneous inner-outer
superimposition function diameter machining and
pick-off operation can be
performed by superimposing
the Z2 axis on the Z1 axis.
50 Queuing between axis (Standard function)
control groups
51 Axis overlap function (Standard function) Circular operation when
executing a T code in thread
cutting canned cycle (G92)
52 Macros dedicated to the (Standard function) The L20E is equipped with
Cincom L32 series dedicated macros (e.g., T code
macros).
53 Background editing (Standard function) While a program is running,
another program can be edited.

3-14
 L32

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
54 Simultaneous 2-line (Standard function) The programs of two axis
program editing control groups can be
simultaneously edited on a
single screen.
55 Editing support functions The functions below are
provided to support program
editing.
Calculator function (Standard function) This function calculates values
for various operations.
Code list display (Standard function) This function displays the lists
Code insertion of available M codes and G
codes. The function also
allows entry of G and M codes
on the List screen.
Coordinates calculation (Standard function) Coordinate values can be
function obtained by simply entering
specified parameters.
Format check function (Standard function) This function checks T, M and
G code numbers and
arguments before executing a
program.
Alarm block display (Standard function) This function displays the
function block where an alarm occurred
during program execution.
56 Program storage capacity (Standard function) Each tape length at left
Program storage capacity includes the size of machining
Equivalent to 40 m tape [About 16 KB] data.
(Option) Each program work area
Program storage capacity capacity indicates the
Equivalent to 80m tape [About 32K] maximum size of the program
(Option) that is actually run.
Program storage capacity If a subprogram is used, the
Equivalent to 160m tape [About 64K] subprogram size must also be
(Option) added.
Program storage capacity To increase the work area
Equivalent to 320m tape [About 128K] capacity, add a program work
(Option) area as an option.
Program storage capacity
Equivalent to 600m tape [About 240K]
57 Input/output interface Compact flash card slot (Standard component) A compact flash card can be
used.
RS232C connector (option) Various input/output devices
can be used.
USB slot (Standard component) This function allows
input/output of machining
program from/to USB flash
drive.
58 Optional block skip (Standard function) This function enables or
disables the block including a
slash ("/") in the program.
59 Optional block skip 9 sets (Option) This function enables or
disables the block including a
slash ("/") in the program. 9
sets
60 Optional stop (Standard function) This function stops (pauses)
automatic operation at a block
specified by the M01
command.

3-15
L32

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
61 Chamfering ON/OFF (Standard function) This function allows the
setting for whether chamfering
is executed or not by
specifying an M code
(M204/M205).
62 Exact stop check function (Standard function) This function allows the
specification for exact stop by
the G code (G09).
63 Error detect function (Standard function) This function allows the
setting for whether error detect
is executed or not by
specifying the M code
(M92/M93).
64 Front spindle speed (Standard function) This function stops the
fluctuation detection machine if it detects that the
function difference between the
specified and actual spindle
speeds exceeds the preset
fluctuation ratio. The function
is effectively used to prevent
overload during operation.
65 Back spindle speed (Standard function) This function stops the
fluctuation detection machine if it detects that the
function difference between the
specified and actual spindle
speeds exceeds the preset
fluctuation ratio. The function
is effectively used to prevent
overload during operation.
66 Spindle indexing function This function indexes the
Main spindle 1º (Standard function) spindle at 1° intervals and
Back Spindle 1º (Option) positions the spindle by the
holding force of the spindle
motor without using any
mechanical lock.
67 Main Spindle C-Axis This function controls the
Function profile positioning of the
Main spindle 0.001º (Option) spindle at an arbitrary angle
Back Spindle 0.001° while using the spindle motor
(Option) (for driving the spindle) as the
C axis control servo motor.
The function positions the
spindle by the holding force of
the spindle motor without
using any mechanical lock.
68 Constant surface speed This function automatically
control controls the spindle speed for
Main spindle (Standard function) the tool position so that the
Back Spindle (Standard function) workpiece surface speed
becomes constant during the
cutting process.
69 Constant surface speed Enables mm/rev feeding and
control thread cutting with a tool.
Main spindle (Standard function)
Back Spindle (Standard function)

3-16
 L32

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
70 Simplified cut-off tool (Standard function) This function gives a speed
breakage command to the front spindle
detection when the back spindle has
picked off a workpiece. The
function checks if the back
spindle rotates together with
the first spindle and
determines if the cut-off tool is
broken.
71 Corner chamfering (Option) This function simplifies the
/Corner R function specification of corner
chamfering and corner R by
using the "C" and "R"
commands.
72 Tool nose radius (Standard function) This function makes
compensation function compensation for the radius of
a tool nose by using the G code
command. To use this
function, store the tool nose
radius of each tool and the tool
offset in the memory.
73 Arc radius specification (Standard function) This function simplifies arc
machining by using the "R"
(radius) command.
74 Continuous threading (Standard function) Continuous thread cutting can
be performed by executing
thread cutting commands
(G32) consecutively.
75 Thread cycle canned (Standard function) Canned cycle prepared for
cycle thread cutting
76 Multi-thread screw thread (Standard function) Thread cutting start position
cutting cycle can be specified by an angle
(Q argument).
77 Variable lead thread (Option) Lead increase/decrease
cutting cycle amount per turn of a thread can
be specified.
78 Circular threading (Option) This function enables circular
function thread cutting.
79 Front-spindle (Option) Synchronous tapping can be
synchronous tapping performed with the front
function spindle.
80 Back-spindle (Option) Synchronous tapping can be
synchronous tapping performed with the back
function spindle.
81 Tool spindle synchronous (Option) Synchronous tapping can be
tapping function performed with the tool
spindle.
82 High-speed synchronous (Option) Synchronous tapping can be
tapping function performed at a high speed.
83 Synchronous tapping (Standard function) This function adjusts phase in
phase adjustment synchronous tapping
function operation.
84 Spindle synchronous (Option) This function synchronizes the
control function front spindle with the back
spindle. The function is useful
for picking off a workpiece.
85 User macro (Option) User macros enable the use of
macro programs.

3-17
L32

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
86 User Macro (Standard function) This function allows
G code Call registration of user macro G
codes.
87 Compound type fixed (Option) This function enables the use
cycle for turning of several types of canned
machining cycles.
88 Canned drilling cycle (Option) This function enables use of
canned cycles such as deep
hole drilling cycles and boring
cycles.
89 Differential speed rotary (Option) This function enables drilling
tool function and tapping by using the
difference between two
spindle speeds. The function
helps to decrease the cycle
time.
90 Milling interpolation (Option) This function enables
function contouring control in the
workpiece end face direction
using the linear and rotary
(C-axis) axes.
91 Sub-micron command (Option) This command specifies the
least input increment with
0.0001 mm.
92 Tool life management I (Option) This function stops the
machine when a tool has
reached its life, and reports the
tool number.
93 Tool Life Management II (Option) When a tool has reached its
life, this function
automatically selects a spare
tool.
94 Helical interpolation (Option) This function enables helical
function interpolation with a tool
spindle device.
95 Slanted helical (Option) (Standard (Option) (Standard This function enables inclined
interpolation function function) function) helical interpolation with a
tool spindle device.
96 Coornidate rotation (Option) (Standard (Option) (Standard This function enables easier
command function function) function) programming for inclined
rotary tool.
97 Polygon machining (Option) This function enables polygon
function machining by syncronizing
tool spindle device and spindle
rotation.
98 Polygon machining (Option) This function enables hobbing
function machining the spur gear,
helical gear by syncronizing
tool spindle device and C axis
rotation.
99 Quick program check (Standard function) Without running the machine,
function this function checks for
program errors while running
the machining program at a
high speed.
The function also measures
approximate cycle time.

3-18
 L32

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
100 Line angle command (Standard function) This function automatically
function calculates the coordinates of
the end position by specifying
the angle of the line.
101 Geometric command (Option) When it is difficult to obtain
function the intersection point of two
lines in execution of
consecutive linear
interpolation commands, an
angle can be specified instead
of the intersection point by
using this function.
102 B code I/F (Option)
103 External memory (Option) This function allows the use of
program operation subprograms stored in the CF
card set in the CF card slot.
104 Network Input/output (Option) This function enables
function input/output of programs and
other data via the network.
105 Remote screen operation (Option) This function allows you to
function monitor or manipulate the
screen of the machine from the
remote PC.
106 alkartshop (Standard function) You can get a software options
through Internet.
107 Back machining program (Option) This function skips machining
skip function program steps between M239
and N19999 if no workpiece is
chucked by back spindle.
108 Thermal Displacement (Standard function)
Correction Function
109 C axis command during (Standard function) This function allows
spindle synchronization specification of C axis
command during spindle
synchronization mode.
110 B-axis control function - (Standard - (Standard
function) function)
111 3D chamfering function (Option) The G code command allows
you to chamfer cross drilling
holes.

3-19
L32

3.3.3 Attachment specifications

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
1 Front-spindle chucking L32 U940Z Collet chucking device
device (FC081-M, 40.008, TF37, 76-740) installed on the front spindle.
(Standard component)

L32 U950Z
(FC251-M, 231.009, TF48, 76-81, F48)
(Option)
(ø38 specification)

L32 U960Z
(FC951-M, TF43, 171E, 76-99-F42)
(Option)
(ø38 specification)
Chuck sleeve for L32 U640Z Main spindle chuck sleeve for
non-conformed material (FC933-M, FC934-M) machining square bars and
(Option) hexagonal bars.

L32 U650Z
(FC252-M, FC253-M)
(Option)
(ø38 specification)

2 Rotary guide bushing This device is used to

drive device (Standard component) synchronize the rotary guide
bushing device with the
spindle, and driven by a belt
and spline shaft.
3 Synchronous rotary guide L32 U240Z Equipped with the belt and the
bushing device (FG531-M, WFG531-M, TD32, 28.001) spline shaft, this device
(Option) supports the guide bushing
while the guide bushing and
L32 U2140Z spindle are being rotated
(229) synchronously. A
(Option) super-high-precision,
high-speed ball bearing is used
L32 U2160Z with the device for performing
(FG581-M, STM38, 468.001) turning precisely.
(Option)
(ø38 specification)
4 Rotary Tool Drive Device L32 U30B L32 U32B L32 U31B L32 U32B This unit drives a tool spindle
(Standard (Standard (Standard (Standard which is mounted on the X1
component component component component axis slide to perform drilling or
) ) ) ) key grooving on the outer
L32 U31B L32 U30B circumference of a workpiece.
(Option) (Option)
5 Back spindle device L32 U40B This device enables the
(Standard component) machine to simultaneously
perform front machining, and
machining similar to front
machining on the cut-off face
(back) of a workpiece. The
product knock-out device is
also installed as a standard
component.

3-20
 L32

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
6 Back-spindle chucking L32 U940B Collet chucking device
device (FC081-M-K, TF37, 40.008, 76-740) installed on the back spindle.
(Standard component)

L32 U950B
(FC251-M-K)
(Option)
(ø38 specification)

L32 U960B
(TF43)
(Option)
(ø38 specification)
Back chuck sleeve for L32 U640B Back spindle chuck sleeve for
non-conformed material (FC933-M-K, FC934-M-K) machining square bars and
(Option) hexagonal bars.

L32 U650B
(FC252-M-K,FC253-M-K)
(Option)
(ø38 specification)

7 Back knock-out device L32 U53B or U51B Air blower for cleaning inside
(air cylinder driven) (Standard component) the back spindle chuck
Back knock-out device L32 U52B Air blower for cleaning inside
(motor driven) (Option) the back spindle chuck
Allows you to specify the
knock-out positioning point.
8 Front 4-spindle L32 U120B Holder for drilling a hole in the
Sleeve Holder Four sleeves end face. The sleeve diameter
(Standard component) is ø19.05 mm . The sleeve
diameter is ø25.4 mm.
Deep holes can be drilled.
9 Front rotary tool drive L32 U121B Rotary tools mounted in he
device Driving of 3 tools end-face direction. These tools
(Option) drill eccentric holes in the end
face of a workpiece.
10 Back 5-spindle L32 U150B - Holder for back drilling. The
Sleeve Holder sleeve diameter is ø25.4 mm.
(Standard component)
11 Back rotary tool drive L32 U151B - Rotary tools for back
device machining These tools drill
Driving of 5 tools eccentric holes in the back side
(Option) of a workpiece. A stationary
sleeve having a diameter of
ø25.4 mm can also be used if
an adapter is mounted.
- L32 U12B Rotary tools for back
Driving of 4 tools machining These tools drill
Five sleeves eccentric holes or perform
(Standard component) cross drilling in the back side
of a workpiece.
This will require optional
rotary tools, sleeve holders and
adapters.

3-21
L32

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
12 Knock-out jig for through L32 U550B Device to prevent chips from
hole workpiece (Option) going into the back spindle
L32 U551B during machining of
(Option) through-hole workpieces.
(ø38 specification: For L32 U950B) Workpieces are unloaded onto
L32 U552B the front of the back spindle.
(Option) Mount it on the back spindle.
(ø38 specification: For L32 U960B) Max. 60 mm inside the chuck?
Workpieces with a maximum
length of 140 mm (type VIII,
IX) and 125 mm (type X, XII)
can be ejected.
13 Workpiece separator L32 U30J L32 U31J The product after cut-off
(Standard component) (Standard component) machining Chute for
Product length Product length transferring products after
max.150mm max.140mm cut-off machining to the
workpiece conveyor.
Workpiece separator L32 U33J Collects workpieces that
(collection by back (Option) cannot be picked-off in the
basket) Product max. 50 mm basket mounted on the back
spindle.
14 Product shelf in long L32 U420B Use this device to machine a
workpiece device (Option) long workpiece which turns
out a product longer than
L32 U422B 150mm up to 500mm (~ø20).
(Option: Shared L32 U35J type) The device is equipped with a
support pipe and unloads
workpieces from the left side
of the machine.
When used together with the
workpiece conveyor, use
L32U420B. When used
together with the workpiece
unloader L32 U35J (option),
use the L32 U422B.
Long workpiece device M432 U4202B This flange holds the long
flange workpiece pipe.
Long workpiece pipe M432 U4221B (for ø20 mm) This pipe is used for collecting
M432 U4226B (for ø25 mm) long products. Three types for
M432U4233B (ø32 mm) products with different
diameters. Maximum diameter
of workpiece that can be
collected is ø32 mm.
Cap nut for long L32 U943B This cap nut is used to install a
workpiece device stabilizer support on end face
of the back spindle.
Maximum diameter of
workpiece that can be
collected is ø32 mm.
Used together with the L32
U940B.
15 Workpiece conveyor L32 U32J This conveyor unloads
(Standard component) workpieces (collected by the
workpiece separator) from the
left side of the machine. (With
scar prevention)
Workpiece unloader L32 U35J
(option) can be selected.

3-22
 L32

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
16 Workpiece unloader L32 U35J The hand grips workpieces on
(Option) the back spindle that have been
Product length max. 220 Product length max. 205 machined and unloads them on
mm mm the left side of the machine.
Product receiver box L32 U351J This device uses the basket to
(Option) collect workpieces that are
Product length max. 150 mm otherwise difficult to collect. It
is used together with the L32
U35J instead of fingers.
Product shelf for L32 U352J The L32 U352J is a dedicated
workpiece unloader (Option) shelf for the workpiece
L32 U422B unloader
(Option) When used with the long
workpiece device, use the
L32U422B.
17 Chip Conveyor L32 U90J This conveyor sends out chips
from the machine.
(Option) The coolant level detection
Coolant pump 0.4 kW Dipping type function is provided as
Coolant oil amount 285 L standard.
18 Cut-off Tool Breakage L32 Y90Z This detector checks if a
Detector (Standard component) workpiece is cut off normally
after completion of cut-off
machining. If a workpiece
remains due to a cut-off tool
breakage, the system stops
automatic machine operation.
19 GBL-specific component L32 U60C Spindle cap used for the
GBL-machine. Comes with
(Standard component) nuts and springs for the
stopper and stabilizer pipe
used during cutting.
Support pipe L32 U100C (blank) With the GBL-machine, these
L32 U108C (ø6) - L32 U132C (ø32) pipes are mounted in the
(Option) spindle, and they suppress
runout of workpiece while it is
rotating.
Used with the L32 U60 C nut
and spring.
20 Light (LED) L32 U86Z Amber life 40,000 hours
(Standard component)
Patrol lamp device L32 U80Z The patrol lamp of which
(Option) indication is linked with the
alarm display on the machine's
operation panel can be
mounted on the top of the
machine.
3-stage signal tower L32 U81Z The 3-color (green, yellow,
(Option) and red) patrol lamp can be
mounted on the top of the
machine. Green: The machine
is in continuous operation
mode. Yellow: The machine is
in cycle-stop state. Red: An
alarm has occurred.

3-23
L32

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
21 Automatic fire L32 U99Z Provided in case of a fire.
extinguisher (Standard component only in Japan)
Fire damper FD150 (option) The pipe to the mist collector
FD151 (option) is shut off to prevent entry of
FD152 (option) extinguisher gas.
A mist collector is not
provided.
22 Coolant supply unit L32 U10R The coolant level detection
(Standard component) function is provided as
Coolant pump 0.4 kW Dipping type standard.
Cartridge-type
Coolant oil amount 220 liters
23 Air supply system for air L32 U70N Pressurized Air Seal system
seal function for Guide bush and front/back
(Standard component) Spindle.
24 Coolant Flowrate L32 U53R This detector monitors the
Detector (Option) discharge from the coolant
nozzle. The system stops
automatic machine operation
when the flow rate becomes
lower than the preset value.
25 Medium-pressure coolant A220 U75R This device provides medium
device L32 U751R pressure coolant to the back
(4 lines) (Option) spindle and the guide bushing
device.
Maximum discharge pressure: 1.2 MPa The flow rate varies depending
Flow rate: 12 / 14.4 /min (50Hz / 60Hz) on the discharge pressure and
Filter: 20 μm the viscosity of the coolant.
26 High-pressure coolant L32 U77R These are devices for
device L32 U771R supplying high-pressure
(4 lines) (Option) coolant to machining
positions.
Maximum discharge pressure: 7 MPa The flow rate varies depending
Flow rate: 12.8 / 16 /min on the discharge pressure and
(20cSt 50Hz / 60Hz) the viscosity of the coolant.
Filter: 20 μm
27 Option for A320N U7511R These are piping parts required
medium-/high-pressure L32 U772R to supply coolant to the back
coolant device L32 U754R spindle, guide bushing device
L32 U7541R (ø38 specification) and tool posts.
M432 U7511R (ø38 specification)
L32 U7751R
L32 U7752R
L32 U7761R
L32 U777R
(Option)
28 Lubricating oil supply (Standard component) The lubricating oil level
unit detection function is provided
Lubricating oil tank 0.8 liters as standard.
capacity
Discharge 1.5 cc in 60 min
29 Door lock L32 Y76Z This device locks the machine
(Standard component) doors while the machine is
running, and unlocks them
only while the machine is
stopped.
30 Ground fault circuit Rated current 60A (Standard component) Rated sensitivity current: 30
interrupter mA

3-24
 L32

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
31 Required tools L32 Y80Z (Option) Used in a process changeover
L32 Y817Z (Option) of a machine.
L32 Y818Z (for RGB ø38 option)

Chip remover rod CB120 (option) Used for removing chips.

32 Loader device L32 U60J This device receives
(Option) workpieces from an external
bar loader and loads them on
the spindle. Workpieces up to
100 mm in length can be
supplied.
33 Shutter L32 U20S An automatic door that
(Option) prevents ingress of oil in the
cutting room when the spindle
is retracted.
34 Spindle stopper base L32 U62C It is a part for inserting a
positioning stopper in the
spindle chuck during forging.

3-25
L32

3.3.4 Environmental information

3.3.4.1 Basic information
L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
1 Front-spindle chucking
device
Power supply voltage 200 VAC
Rated power 13.2 kVA
consumption
Required pneumatic 0.5 MPa
pressure

3.3.4.2 Environmental performance information

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
1 Power consumption
Standby power*1 0.310KW 0.346KW 0.346KW 0.353KW
Power consumption 0.013KWh/cycle
with model
workpiece*2
Power consumption 6.669g/cycle
value above converted
to a
CO2 value*3
2 Air consumption
Required air flow rate 49 (power ON), 69.3 (stationary)
197 (during air blow) N/min
3 Lubricant consumption
At power ON 1.5 cc in 60 min
4 Noise level
Value measured based 78.5dB [A]
on JIS
5 Environmental load
reduction
RoHS Directive/ Compliant
* REACH regulations

3-26
 L32

3.3.4.3 Approach to environmental issues

L32
Type Ⅷ Type IX Type Ⅹ Type Ⅻ
No. Specification Remarks
(L32- (L32- (L32- (L32-
1M8) 1M9) 1M10) 1M12)
1 Recycling
Name of materials used Covered in the Parts List (Separate Volume) *4
in plastic parts

2 Environmental • We are ISO14001 accredited.

management
• We pursue "Green Procurement", whereby we
make our purchases while prioritizing goods and
services that show consideration for the
environment.
*1
This is the standby power in the idle stop mode (a function that turns servomotor excitation off when it is not necessary,
for example during program editing).
*2
This is the power consumption in program operation (when not cutting) for one of our standard test pieces, shown for
the purpose of comparing the environmental performance with that of existing models.
*3
This is the value converted in accordance with the CHUBU Electric Power CO2 emissions coefficient for 2014 as
published by the Ministry of the Environment.
*4
If polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and fluoric resin are not processed correctly they can generate harmful gases. When
recycling these materials, commission a contractor that is capable of processing them appropriately.

3-27
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 1E1-0303
Mfg. No. L32/0480～
Issue Date 2016.12

3-28
 4. Operation Panel and Screen
4.1 Names and Functions of Operation Panel Components ........................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Fields and Functions of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) ............................................................................... 4-9
4.3 Screen Transition .................................................................................................................................... 4-12
4.3.1 Screen transition when the machine is turned on.............................................................................. 4-12

4-1
 (Blank Page)

4-2
 L32

4.1 Names and Functions of Operation Panel Components

4-3
L32

Color of
No. Name Symbol Function
lamp
1 Power ON button – Turns on the power of the NC.

2 Power OFF button – Turns off the power of the NC.

3 Emergency stop – Firmly press this button in case of an emergency

button during machine operation to disconnect power from
the machine and stop all machine motions. To reset,
turn the button toward the direction shown by an
arrow (clockwise). Then, turn OFF the NC power and
the main circuit breaker, then turn them ON again.
4 Feed rate override – Changes feedrate at 0, 1, 3, 5 and 10 to 100% (10%
increment in the range from 10 to 100%) of the
feedrate specified in a program. The adjustable range
can be expanded to 0 to 200% using the setting
switch.

5 Handle – • In the manual operation mode, turning the handle

magnification clockwise or counterclockwise moves the X1, Y1,
button Z1, X2, and Z2 axes in the positive or negative
direction, respectively.
• In the program check mode, turning the handle
clockwise or counterclockwise runs the program
forward or backward, respectively.
• In the Mechanism Adjustment mode, turning the
handle clockwise or counterclockwise moves the
X1, Y1, Z1, X2, and Z2 axes in the positive or
negative direction, respectively.
• The ×1, ×10, and ×100 multiplication factor keys
select the handle feed speed in the manual
operation mode or the program operation speed in
the program check mode.
6 Start button Green Starts automatic operation.
Operation
Automatic

The lamp lights during automatic operation. The lamp

blinks when the machine is being paused during
preparation, waiting for cut-off operation or the doors
are being locked.
Hold button Red Pauses the automatic operation.
The lamp lights if the automatic operation is paused.
7 Spindle start button Green Allows the main, back and tool spindles, temporarily
Main spindle stop

stopped by pressing the all spindle stop key during

automatic operation or program check, to start at the
previously set speed. (This operation is permitted
only while the machine is in the hold state or block
stop state with the door closed.) While the spindle is
rotating the lamp in the key lights. The lamp blinks in
the spindle re-start enabled state.
All spindles stop Red Regardless of whether the manual operation mode or
button automatic operation mode is selected, this key stops
the main spindle, back spindle, and tool spindle by the
manual operation.
8 Coolant button Orange Turns on/off the coolant during manual and automatic
operation
Manual

operations. The lamp lights when the coolant is

discharged.

4-4
 L32

Color of
No. Name Symbol Function
lamp
9 Door Open button Orange While the door is locked, pressing this button unlocks
operation
Manual

the door for 10 seconds, and the button lamp blinks.

While the door is locked, the button lamp is turned
off. While the door is open, the button lamp turns on.

10 Liquid crystal – – Displays the menus, coordinates, programs, offset

display (LCD) data, alarm, and diagnostics.
11 Menu Keys – Select desired screens or operations from the menu at
the bottom of the LCD screen. Software keys located
just below the menu.
12 Menu Up/Down – Switches between the upper and lower menus.
selection key Pressing this key with the upper menu enabled
(Right) enables the lower menu instead. Pressing the key with
13 Menu Up/Down – the lower menu enabled enables the upper one
selection key (Left) instead.
14 Manual key – The lamp lights in manual operation mode. In this
Operation Modes

mode, you can manually feed the X1, Y1, Z1, X2, and
Z2 axes using the handle or manually operate the
dedicated bar loader (CAV).
MDI key – The lamp lights in MDI mode. Create a program by
manual data input and execute the command.

Auto key – The lamp lights in automatic operation mode in which

the program loaded in memory can be executed.

Program Check key – The lamp lights in program check mode in which the
program can be checked while actually operating the
machine.
Preparation key – The lamp lights in the preparation mode. You can
perform the preparations for operations such as the
tool set and the start position operation.
15 Back Spindle chuck Orange Opens or closes the back chuck. The lamp on this key
Manual operation

key lights when the main spindle chuck is closed. Press

this key once to close the main spindle chuck. Press
the key again to open the chuck. The key works only
in manual operation or preparation mode.
Main Spindle chuck Orange Opens or closes the main spindle chuck. The lamp on
key this key lights when the main spindle chuck is closed.
Press this key once to close the main spindle chuck.
Press the key again to open the chuck. The key works
only in manual operation or preparation mode.
16 Power key Orange Enables activation of the dedicated bar loader (CAV).
Bar Loader

The bar loader can be activated when the lamp on this

key is on.

4-5
L32

Color of
No. Name Symbol Function
lamp
17 Edit key – Executes program editing including creation, save,
Screen Operation Functions

search, insertion, and deletion, etc. Also press this key

to enter machining data.
Offset key – Sets the offset data.

Parameter key – Sets the parameters.

Diagnosis key – Displays diagnostics data, alarm history, and software

version numbers.

Alkartnet key – Not used

18 Reset key – Clears an NC alarm or machine alarm status.

19 Previous page key – When there is multi-page data on the screen, press the
Previous page key to scroll back one page.
Next Page key – When there is multi-page data on the screen, press the
Next page key to scroll forward one page.
Up arrow key – Moves the cursor left, line by line. If you hold down a
cursor key, the cursor will continue to move.

Down arrow key – Moves the cursor left, line by line. If you hold down a
cursor key, the cursor will continue to move.

Right arrow key – Moves the cursor left, line by line. If you hold down a
cursor key, the cursor will continue to move.

Left arrow key – Moves the cursor left, line by line. If you hold down a
cursor key, the cursor will continue to move.

Right tab key – Moves the cursor to the beginning of the next word in
the program.
Moves the cursor to the right setting field.
Left tab key – Moves the cursor to the beginning of the previous
word in the program.
Moves the cursor to the left setting field.

4-6
 L32

Color of
No. Name Symbol Function
lamp
20 Alphanumeric keys – Press the alphanumeric keys to enter letters, numbers,
and special characters.
Space key – Enters a blank space equivalent to one character.

End of block key – Enters the end of the block symbol required at the end
of each block (program line).

Shift key – Press this key before pressing an alphanumeric key to

enter the letter, symbol, or special character printed
on the lower portion of the keycaps.
Line deletion key – Deletes a specific data block in a program. Deletes
one setting data item.
Input key – Enters an edited program in memory. Enters edited
setting data in memory.

Insert key – Toggles data input to the program between an insert

mode and an overwrite mode.

Delete key – Deletes program data. Deletes setting data. Deletes

data behind the cursor.

Backspace key – Deletes program data. Deletes setting data. Deletes

data in front of the cursor.

21 Escape key – Cancels setting, reverting to the original state of the

current setting. Pressing the ESC key with a window
displayed on the screen closes that window. Pressing
the key with two or more windows on the screen
closes the topmost one.
Window select key – Selects active window in multi-windows.

22 Alarm lamp Red When a machine alarm occurs, this lamp will either
blink or remain lit. If this lamp remains lit, turn off the
machine once, remove the cause of the trouble, and
then turn on the machine. If this lamp is blinking,
remove the cause of the trouble and press the Reset
key to clear the alarm status. If the lamp still remains
blinking, turn off the power and shut down the main
circuit breaker. Remove the cause of the alarm, then
turn it on again.
Caution lamp Orange This lamp blinks when an error occurs. Remove the
cause of the trouble to recover the machine. The lamp
blinks in zero point return mode.
Axis motion lamp Green This lamp lights while the axes are being moved. The
lamp blinks during program reverse operation in
program check mode.
Automatic power Orange This function is enabled when the lamp lights. It
off lamp disconnects power from the machine in the event of
an alarm during continuous cycle operation.
Skip lamp Orange The block skip function is enabled when the lamp
lights. The function disregards the commands
specified in a block which is preceded by a slash (/)
code.
Optional stop lamp Orange This function is enabled when the lamp lights. It stops
automatic operation after executing a block using the
M01 command in the machining program. When the
program is being paused, the lamp on the Start key
blinks. Pressing the Start key again restarts automatic
operation.

4-7
L32

Color of
No. Name Symbol Function
lamp
23 Setting switch key – If door is opened with this switch key set to “ ”
position, machine operation is disabled. If door is
opened with this switch key set to “ ” position, each
axis moves at 2 m/min or slower, and opening/closing
of chuck and charge/discharge of coolant are also
available.
Program edit switch – Set this key to “ ” to turn ON the program
key protection. While the protection is ON, you can not
edit or write a program. When this switch is set to
“ ”, you can edit or write program.
Enable switch － – To operate the machine while the door is open, hold
this switch key halfway down, then press and hold
Start button.

4-8
 L32

4.2 Fields and Functions of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)

The LCD has eight fields or sections.
(1) Data display
(2) Operation mode display field
(3) Operation status field
(4) Data setting field
(5) Message display field
(6) Override feed rate display field
(7) Submenu display field
(8) Main menu display field

(1) Data display

The data display field displays data either in the entire field or with a window appearing for additional data display
above the field.

(2) Operation mode display field

This field displays the currently selected operation mode.
Operation mode display
Symbol Description
MEM Memory operation mode
HDL Handle mode
MDI MDI mode
AST Zero return mode

4-9
L32

(3) Operation status field

Preparation and operation statuses for each axis control group number are displayed.

Operation status
Symbol Description
EMG Emergency stop
RST Resetting the NC
RDY Completed preparation
AUT During automatic operation
SYN Queuing for synchronization
CRS Queuing for axis cross
BST Stopping
HLD Holding

Operation status display color and machine status

Display color Machine status
Green Normal
Red Dangerous

(4) Data setting field

Set the data in the data setting filed.
After entering the data in this field, press the Input key and the data is set in the data display field.

(5) Message display field

This field displays error messages, machine operating status messages, operation guide messages, etc.
(6) Override feed rate display field
This field displays the override value for the feed rate, rapid feed rate or dwell.

[Note]
On some screens, this field is not available.

(7) Submenu display field

This field provides a submenu for selecting screens and operations.
The submenu is usually dimmed. Pressing the menu Up/Down selection key makes the submenu to appear in
blue, indicating that it can be selected.
When the submenu is displayed in blue, pressing the menu key corresponding to a menu selects that menu.

4-10
 L32

(8) Main menu display field

This field provides a main menu for selecting screens and operations.
The menu is usually displayed in blue.
When the menu is displayed in blue, pressing the menu key corresponding to a menu selects that menu.
This menu is dimmed and cannot be selected when the submenu is displayed in blue.
Pressing the menu Up/Down selection key then makes the menu to appear in blue, indicating that it can be
selected.

4-11
L32

4.3 Screen Transition

4.3.1 Screen transition when the machine is turned on
Turn the NC power on after turning the main circuit breaker on, and the initial screen is displayed. In several tens
seconds the program selection screen in the Preparation mode is automatically displayed. Do not attempt to touch any
key until the program selection screen is displayed.

[Note]
If none of the keys or switches on the operation panel are pressed for 10 minutes, the backlight of the LCD is
automatically turned off for protection of the display. You can also turn on the backlight again by pressing either the
operation mode selection keys screen operation keys, alphanumeric keys and arrow keys.

4-12
 L32

(Blank Page)

4-13
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 1E1-0400
Mfg. No. L32/0001～
Issue Date 2015.5

4-14
 5. Preparation for Operating the Machine
5.1 Turning On/Off the Power ......................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2 Menu Keys ................................................................................................................................................ 5-4
5.2.1 Menu key operation............................................................................................................................. 5-4
5.2.2 Scrolling through menu pages............................................................................................................. 5-5
5.2.3 Selecting screen.................................................................................................................................. 5-6
5.2.4 Selecting an operation ........................................................................................................................ 5-7
5.2.5 Selecting another menu group ............................................................................................................ 5-8
5.3 Page Keys ................................................................................................................................................ 5-9
5.4 WIN Key.................................................................................................................................................. 5-10
5.5 Data Setting ............................................................................................................................................ 5-11
5.5.1 Data setting operation ....................................................................................................................... 5-11
5.5.2 Data in the data setting fields ............................................................................................................ 5-13

5-1
 (Blank Page)

5-2
 L32

5.1 Turning On/Off the Power

Turning On/Off the Power
[Procedure]
1. Turn on the main circuit breaker.
2. Reset the emergency stop button if it is being pressed.
3. Press the Power ON button on the operation panel.
The safety relay is reset and the initial screen appears. In several tens seconds, the program selection screen in the
Preparation mode appears.

[Note]
If the emergency stop button is pressed or if relays are melting and adhere together, the safety relays cannot be reset. If
this happens, the alarm "EX052 Emergency button alarm. Emergency button is pressed." and "S01 0010 SERVO
ALARM" will appear. Turn off the machine power and turn it on again.

To turn off the machine

[Procedure]
1. Press the Power OFF button on the operation panel.
The screen is blank.
2. Turn the machine light off.
3. Turn off the main circuit breaker.

Emergency stop
[Procedure]
1. Press the Emergency stop button.

Resetting emergency stop

[Procedure]
1. After checking safety, turn the emergency stop button clockwise.
2. Press the Power OFF button and turn off the power.
3. Turn off the main circuit breaker.
4. Turn on the main circuit breaker.
5. Press the Power ON button and turn on the power.

5-3
L32

5.2 Menu Keys

For efficiency in selecting the desired screen, screens with similar functions or related to a single operation are grouped
together.
Press the key on the operation panel corresponding to the desired screen group, and then use the menu keys to select the
desired screen from the displayed menu.
There are two on-screen menus: the main menu at the bottom of the screen and the submenu above the main menu.

5.2.1 Menu key operation

(Main menu displayed)

The two fields at the bottom of the screen are the menu display area.
The lower menu is the main menu; the upper one the submenu.
Usually, the main menu is displayed in blue, allowing its menu selection keys to be selected.
The menu Up/Down selection keys are provided on the right and left sides of the menus. Pressing either menu Up/Down
selection key makes the submenu be displayed in blue, allowing its menu selection keys to be selected.
The menu Up/Down selection key toggles menu selection between the main menu and submenu.

(Submenu displayed with menu Up/Down selection key pressed)

To select a screen, an operation, or another screen group, press the menu key (under the screen) corresponding to the
desired menu right above it.
In the remainder of this manual, [Menu 1] to [Menu n] represent the menu selection keys for selecting menus 1 to n,
respectively.
Each menu selection key is displayed like a button. Each menu selection key is displayed like a button. It looks
depressed when selected; it looks raised when not selected.
There are three types of menus. They are the screen selection menu which is used to change the screen, the operation
selection menu which is used for editing and machine operation, and the screen groups selection menu-which is used to
move to other screen groups.

5-4
 L32

5.2.2 Scrolling through menu pages

The screen can display only ten menus at a time.
Some screens, however, have more than ten menus. These screens require a menu selection menu [Menu SEL] to scroll
through the menu pages. Press the corresponding menu key to scroll through the menu pages.

Press the menu key [Menu SEL]. The menu page is scrolled.

(Next menu page)

Press the menu key corresponding to [Menu SEL]. If there is no menu page that follows, the menu display field returns
to the previous menu page.

(Previous menu page)

5-5
L32

5.2.3 Selecting screen

Screens are classified into some groups to select desired screen among a hundred or more screens. The procedure to
select and display desired screen is as follows.
[Procedure]
1. Press the corresponding <screen operation function key> and <operation mode key> corresponding to the desired
screen to select the screen group.
The last selected screen in the group appears.
2. Find the name of the desired screen from the main menu and the submenu and press the corresponding menu key to
display the desired screen.
Example
[Procedure]
1. Press the Offset key . The screen in the same screen group is displayed.
Last selected screen (Tool data screen)

2. Press the menu key [Offset]. Desired Offset screen appears.

[Note]
The TOOL LIFE and SPARE TOOLS screens are available as options.
The tool life and spare tool screens are displayed only when the tool life management I option is purchased and the tool
life management function is enabled on the CONTROL PARAMETERS screen.

5-6
 L32

5.2.4 Selecting an operation

Select the screen to perform desired operation in the same manner as explained in <5.2.3 Selecting screen>.
Select the desired operation from the main menu or the submenu displayed (on the bottom of the screen) and then press
the menu key corresponding to the desired operation.
Example
Example: Switching between the normal display and the simultaneous display on the edit screen.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Edit key .
The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the menu key [Edit].
The Edit screen appears.

3. Press the menu key [Menu SEL].

The menu display is changed.

4. Press the menu key [Synchronous display].

The screen changes to synchronous display.

5. Press the menu key [Synchronous display].

The synchronous changes to normal display.

5-7
L32

5.2.5 Selecting another menu group

Using the menu keys [Correct] and [Operat.] allows you to move from one screen group to another and then return to
the previous screen.
The [Correct] is used to reinforce the editing function under the On-Machine Program Check mode. This screen group
can be accessed from the On-Machine Check screen.
Example
Example: Use the procedure below to move to the Edit screen and then to return to the Program check screen
[Procedure]
1. Press the menu key [Correct].

The On-Machine Check (Edit) screen appears. The menu keys change as shown below.

2. Press the menu key [Operat.].

The On-Machine Check screen appears. The menu keys change as shown below.

[Note]
You can move to the Edit screen only while the program is running. Otherwise, the operating status will not change even
if the menu key [Correct] is pressed.

5-8
 L32

5.3 Page Keys

If a screen has multiple pages, use the Page key or to move from page to page.

Next page key

Press the key to skip and display the next page of the screen. Nothing happens when you press this key at the last
page of the screen.

Previous page key

Press the key to skip and display the previous page of the screen. Nothing happens when you press this key at the
first page of the screen.

5-9
L32

5.4 WIN Key

When you have multiple window screens displayed, pressing the Window select key moves the focus from one
window screen to another.
Moving the focus between window screens

[Procedure]
1. Press the Window select key .

5-10
 L32

5.5 Data Setting

5.5.1 Data setting operation
When the screen where data input is possible is displayed, the data setting fields are enabled.
The data setting fields are common to all screens. Move the cursor to the data setting field of the desired item using the
arrow keys or the tab keys and then enter the data using the alphanumeric keys. Press the Input key

and the entered data is accepted as the input to the field. To cancel the entered data, press the Escape key , an
arrow key or a tab key before pressing the Input key.
[Procedure]
Example: To change the Machining Length in the Machining Data to 15 mm
1. Select the Machining Data screen.

2. Press the arrow key to move the cursor to the setting field in which the machining length is set.

5-11
L32

3. Press the number keys and .

"15" is displayed.

4. Press the Input key .

The data is now set.
The cursor automatically moves to the next setting field.

5-12
 L32

5.5.2 Data in the data setting fields

The data input in the data setting fields can be edited using the procedure below.

Moving the cursor

[Procedure]
Press the arrow key once to move the cursor key one character to the left. .

Press the arrow key once to move the cursor key one character to the right.

Inserting characters
Character(s) can be inserted in front of the cursor.
[Procedure]
1. Move the cursor to the position at which data is to be inserted.
2. Press the alphanumeric key .
A "5" is inserted at the desired position and the next character can be entered.
3. Press the Input key .
The data is now set.

5-13
L32

Deleting characters
Deleting the character at the cursor position
[Procedure]
1. Move the cursor to the position at which data is to be deleted.
2. Press the Delete key .
One character is deleted and the space is left or right justified.

Deleting the character to the left of the cursor position

[Procedure]
1. Move the cursor to the character position that follows the character you want to delete.
2. Press the Backspace key .
One character is deleted and the space is left or right justified.

5-14
 L32

(Blank Page)

5-15
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 1E1-0500
Mfg. No. L32/0001～
Issue Date 2015.5

5-16
 6. Operation for Running the Machine
6.1 Selecting a Program ................................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.1.1 Selecting an execution program .......................................................................................................... 6-6
6.1.2 Machining data setting ........................................................................................................................ 6-8
6.1.3 Required fields for machining data ...................................................................................................... 6-8
6.1.4 Checking machining data .................................................................................................................. 6-13
6.1.5 Entering, updating and storing the machining data ........................................................................... 6-14
6.1.6 Verifying the tool layout pattern ......................................................................................................... 6-15
6.1.7 Setting the free tool layout pattern .................................................................................................... 6-17
6.2 Preparation ............................................................................................................................................. 6-20
6.2.1 Return position .................................................................................................................................. 6-22
6.2.2 Positioning point ................................................................................................................................ 6-24
6.2.2.1 Positioning point .......................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.2.3 Start position ..................................................................................................................................... 6-27
6.2.4 Gang tool post retraction ................................................................................................................... 6-30
6.2.5 Opposite tool post retraction ............................................................................................................. 6-32
6.2.6 Chuck thrust ...................................................................................................................................... 6-34
6.2.7 Tool set .............................................................................................................................................. 6-35
6.2.7.1 Tool setting procedure ................................................................................................................. 6-36
6.2.7.2 Selecting the tool to be set .......................................................................................................... 6-38
6.2.7.3 Longitude (gang tool)................................................................................................................... 6-40
6.2.7.4 Core (outer circumference) .......................................................................................................... 6-42
6.2.7.5 Core (core down) ......................................................................................................................... 6-45
6.2.7.6 Core (center) ............................................................................................................................... 6-48
6.2.7.7 Diameter (gang tool / cross rotary tool) ....................................................................................... 6-50
6.2.7.8 Diameter (back tool set / cross rotary tool) type X and XII only ................................................... 6-56
6.2.7.9 Longitude (core) (drill) ................................................................................................................. 6-59
6.2.7.10 Longitude (back drill) ................................................................................................................... 6-67
6.2.7.11 Centering the tool (drill) (boring) .................................................................................................. 6-72
6.2.7.12 Tool Name ................................................................................................................................... 6-80
6.2.8 Cut-off machining .............................................................................................................................. 6-82
6.2.9 Non-conformed material phase adjustment....................................................................................... 6-85
6.2.10 Adjustment ........................................................................................................................................ 6-87
6.2.11 Adjustment of non-conformed material ............................................................................................. 6-89
6.2.12 Exciting Guide Bushing ..................................................................................................................... 6-91
6.3 On-machine Program Check .................................................................................................................. 6-92
6.3.1 Program check for 1-cycle operation................................................................................................. 6-92
6.3.2 Program check for 1-block operation ................................................................................................ 6-93
6.3.3 On-machine program check by handle feed...................................................................................... 6-94
6.3.4 Editing a program being executed..................................................................................................... 6-97
6.3.5 Editing an executed program by backward running .......................................................................... 6-99
6.3.6 High-speed program check ............................................................................................................. 6-101
6.3.7 Block skip ........................................................................................................................................ 6-101
6.3.8 Optional stop ................................................................................................................................... 6-102
6.3.9 Override .......................................................................................................................................... 6-102
6.3.10 Disconnect Bar Loader (BL DIS) ..................................................................................................... 6-102
6.3.11 Coolant Flow Rate Detector ............................................................................................................ 6-102
6.3.12 Disconnecting the bar loader........................................................................................................... 6-103
6.4 Automatic Operation ............................................................................................................................. 6-104
6.4.1 Continuous automatic operation...................................................................................................... 6-104
6.4.2 One cycle automatic operation ........................................................................................................ 6-105
6.4.3 One block automatic operation........................................................................................................ 6-106
6.4.4 Hold and restart the automatic operation ........................................................................................ 6-107

6-1
 6.5 Position Data Screen ............................................................................................................................ 6-108
6.6 Modal Information Screen ..................................................................................................................... 6-109
6.7 Manual operation .................................................................................................................................. 6-110
6.7.1 Handle feed ..................................................................................................................................... 6-110
6.7.2 Manual data input (MDI) .................................................................................................................. 6-112
6.7.2.1 Selecting the axis control group for MDI operation .................................................................... 6-112
6.7.2.2 Executing MDI operation ........................................................................................................... 6-112
6.7.2.3 Editing MDI program.................................................................................................................. 6-115
6.8 Maintenance ......................................................................................................................................... 6-118
6.8.1 Zero return ...................................................................................................................................... 6-118
6.8.2 Recovering from overrun status ...................................................................................................... 6-120
6.8.3 Counter set...................................................................................................................................... 6-122
6.8.4 Setting and displaying the tool offset............................................................................................... 6-124
6.8.4.1 Setting the tool wear data .......................................................................................................... 6-124
6.8.4.2 Setting the tool data................................................................................................................... 6-126
6.8.4.3 Setting the tool nose radius ....................................................................................................... 6-128
6.8.4.4 Clearing all screen data ............................................................................................................. 6-128
6.8.5 Mechanism adjustment ................................................................................................................... 6-129
6.8.6 Setting switches .............................................................................................................................. 6-130
6.9 Creating and Editing the Program......................................................................................................... 6-135
6.9.1 Program list ..................................................................................................................................... 6-135
6.9.2 Creating a new program .................................................................................................................. 6-136
6.9.3 Editing individual programs ............................................................................................................. 6-137
6.9.3.1 Deleting a program .................................................................................................................... 6-137
6.9.3.2 Copying a program .................................................................................................................... 6-138
6.9.3.3 Changing a program number ..................................................................................................... 6-139
6.9.3.4 Sorting program list ................................................................................................................... 6-140
6.9.4 Editing a program ............................................................................................................................ 6-141
6.9.4.1 Selecting an axis control group for editing a program................................................................ 6-141
6.9.4.2 General editing operations ........................................................................................................ 6-142
6.9.4.3 Undo .......................................................................................................................................... 6-146
6.9.4.4 Find ........................................................................................................................................... 6-146
6.9.4.5 Replace ..................................................................................................................................... 6-147
6.9.4.6 Copy .......................................................................................................................................... 6-149
6.9.4.7 Move .......................................................................................................................................... 6-150
6.9.4.8 Cutting cycle .............................................................................................................................. 6-151
6.9.4.9 Calculator .................................................................................................................................. 6-152
6.9.4.10 Coordinate calculation ............................................................................................................... 6-155
6.9.4.11 Code insertion ........................................................................................................................... 6-156
6.9.4.12 Format check ............................................................................................................................. 6-158
6.9.4.13 Display of alarm block ............................................................................................................... 6-159
6.9.5 Creating and editing machining data ............................................................................................... 6-173
6.9.6 Data input and output ...................................................................................................................... 6-175
6.9.6.1 Setting the input/output device and communication parameter ................................................. 6-175
6.9.6.2 Connecting input/output unit ...................................................................................................... 6-176
6.9.6.3 Inputting the machining program from external devices ............................................................ 6-179
6.9.6.4 Inputting the tool offset data from external devices ................................................................... 6-182
6.9.6.5 Inputting the parameter (including machine-specific data) ........................................................ 6-185
6.9.6.6 Outputting the machining program to external devices.............................................................. 6-188
6.9.6.7 Outputting the tool offset data to external devices ..................................................................... 6-191
6.9.6.8 Outputting the parameter (including machine-specific data)...................................................... 6-194
6.9.6.9 Output of Eco / Machine Operation Information......................................................................... 6-197
6.9.6.10 DPRINT output setting ............................................................................................................... 6-199
6.10 Program Conversion ............................................................................................................................. 6-201
6.11 Machine Variable Screen ...................................................................................................................... 6-207

6-2
6.12 Machine Structure................................................................................................................................. 6-208
6.13 Backup Screen ..................................................................................................................................... 6-212
6.14 Alarm History ........................................................................................................................................ 6-213
6.15 Message Screen ................................................................................................................................... 6-214
6.16 Tool Life Management (Option)............................................................................................................. 6-215
6.17 Spare Tool Life Management (Option) .................................................................................................. 6-217
6.18 External Memory Program Operation ................................................................................................... 6-218
6.19 Workpiece conveyor ............................................................................................................................. 6-220
6.20 Eco Screen ........................................................................................................................................... 6-221
6.20.1 Power Consumption ........................................................................................................................ 6-221
6.20.2 Power Consumption ........................................................................................................................ 6-221
6.20.3 Regenerative energy ....................................................................................................................... 6-221
6.20.4 Pwr (Time Interval) .......................................................................................................................... 6-222
6.20.5 Power regeneration ......................................................................................................................... 6-222
6.20.6 Eco Mode ........................................................................................................................................ 6-222
6.20.7 Frequency ....................................................................................................................................... 6-223
6.20.8 Eco Reset........................................................................................................................................ 6-223
6.20.9 Range change of displayed electric energy (W/kW)........................................................................ 6-223
6.20.10 Graph display of electric energy ...................................................................................................... 6-224
6.21 Machine Operation Information Screen ................................................................................................ 6-227
6.21.1 Machine Operation Status ............................................................................................................... 6-227
6.21.1.1 Operation information by item.................................................................................................... 6-228
6.21.1.2 Machine Operation Information - Time Line .............................................................................. 6-229
6.21.2 Ratio of cut time / non-cut time........................................................................................................ 6-230
6.22 PLC Data Screen .................................................................................................................................. 6-231
6.23 Bit Select Screen .................................................................................................................................. 6-232
6.24 I/F Diagnosis Screen ............................................................................................................................ 6-233
6.25 Software List Screen ............................................................................................................................. 6-234
6.26 B-axis Operation ................................................................................................................................... 6-235
6.26.1 Machining data setting .................................................................................................................... 6-235
6.26.2 Tool setting for B-axis tools ............................................................................................................. 6-235
6.26.3 Shift amount adjustment ................................................................................................................. 6-236
6.26.4 Center (core) position adjustments ................................................................................................. 6-244
6.26.5 Handle feed ..................................................................................................................................... 6-251
6.26.6 Zero return ...................................................................................................................................... 6-256
6.26.7 B-axis coordinate display ................................................................................................................ 6-257
6.27 Regular maintenance screen ................................................................................................................ 6-258
6.27.1 Completing regular maintenance .................................................................................................... 6-259
6.27.2 Changing maintenance intervals and remaining time...................................................................... 6-259
6.28 Unloading Screen ................................................................................................................................. 6-260
6.29 Loader device operations...................................................................................................................... 6-264

6-3
 (Blank Page)

6-4
 L32

The start, stop, and operation speeds of the machine are specified for safety as shown below.
Door opened
(The Setting switch key is Door closed
set to " ")
[Automatic operation] Activation disabled Command-specified speed (Override
enabled)
[Program check]
Programmed operation
[MDI operation]
Knock-out advance/return
[Preparation]
Chucking operation
Cutting during cut-off machining
Non-conformed material phase
adjustment
[Preparation] Operation at a speed of 2 m/min or Operation at a speed of 10 m/min or less
less (Override enabled)
Return position (Override enabled) In manual tool setting, operation speed is 2
Positioning point m/min or less (Operation speed increases to
Start position 10 m/min when "Toolset Feed UP" on the
Manual tool setting Set SW screen is enabled.)
Gang tool post retraction
Opposite tool post retraction
Tool selection for cut-off
machining
Adjustment
[Manual operation]
Handle feed
[Others] Operation at 100% speed Operation at 100% speed
Chuck open/close operation with
chuck open/close key

The machine has door locks standard with the splash guard and spindle cover sections.

[Note]
• If the Setting switch key is set in the " " position, machine operation is disabled while the door is open.

• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• On a machine equipped with an Enable switch, hold the Enable switch halfway down and press the Start button with
the Setting switch key set to the “ ” position while performing the door opening preparation to start the
machine.

6-5
L32

6.1 Selecting a Program

Selecting a program means the procedure to select a program to be executed from the stored programs. When you select
a program for execution, the machining data associated with the selected program is also called up automatically.
Manual tool setting is to adjust the tool bit position of each tool in the holder mounted on the machine to each workpiece
coordinate zero point. The mounted holder is set as tool post of machining data items for the program to be run. Since the
tool layout pattern for the program is set automatically according to the holder name, there is no numeric data item to be
set (except for a free tool layout pattern). Be sure to perform tool setting after mounting a holder or replacing the tool.
For the automatic operation, operate in accordance with the selected program and the machining data associated with the
selected program.
For the MDI operation and the Preparation operation, operate in accordance with the machining data associated with the
currently selected program.

6.1.1 Selecting an execution program

To select a stored program for execution.
[Procedure]
Selecting a program by directly entering the program number

1. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation screen appears.

2. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key , then press the menu key [PRG SEL].
The Program Select screen appears.

6-6
 L32

3. Enter the desired program number in the data setting field.

4. Press the Input key .
The program is selected.
[Procedure]
Selecting a program by positioning the cursor in the program number list using the Page keys and up/down
cursor keys

1. Press the Preparation key .

2. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key , then press the menu key [PRG SEL].
The Program Select screen appears.
3. Use the Page keys and Arrow keys to move the cursor in the program number list to the
program number you want to select.
4. Press the Input key .
The program is selected.

[Note]
When a program is selected, the machining data associated with the retrieved program is also retrieved automatically.
After the program is selected, be sure to check the machining data.

6-7
L32

6.1.2 Machining data setting

Machining data is needed for the preparation for the machine operation and automatic operation. Machining data is
handled in the same way as a machining program and stored in the memory.
The machining data for execution other than the one currently used for operation can be created and edited as a
background operation.
The machining data displayed on the Machining Data screen is currently effective and used for the preparation and
automatic operation.
The machining data will not be changed by moving to other screens or turning off the power supply and turning it on
again.
This section explains the setting of the Execution Machining Data that has been retrieved from the memory together
with the execution program by program selection operation.

6.1.3 Required fields for machining data

• Bar Stock O.D.
Outside diameter of material machined by currently selected program.
• Tool Positioning Point (DIA) Outside diameter of material +
Use the menu key [POS PNT] to move the front machining tool selected (at the cursor position) on the Preparation
screen to the position of (material outer diameter + tool positioning point). Move the tool in the same way even when
you have specified a front machining tool for programmed operation.
This value is the diameter converted from the distance in millimeters from the material to the positioning point at
which the tool stops.
• Cut-Off Tool
Number of tool used as cut-off tool, when cut-off machining is performed during preparation. In the GB
specification, this tool is also selected after setting the machine to the start position.
<Loader device specifications when enabled>
The cut-off tool number cannot be entered.
• Cut-Off Speed
The tip of materials is cut at this speed specified by CUT-OFF in Preparation screen or M108 Material Exchange
program. When cut-off machining or face turning is performed during preparation, the selected tool (with the cursor
positioned on the Preparation screen) stops once at the positioning point. When cut-off machining is restarted, the
spindle starts rotating at this speed. The spindle stops after cut-off machining.
<Loader device specifications when enabled>
The cut-off speed cannot be entered.
• Cut-Off Feed (in mm per revolution)
The tip of materials is cut at this speed specified by CUT-OFF in Preparation screen or M108 Material Exchange
program. When cut-off machining or face turning is performed during preparation, the selected tool (with the cursor
positioned on the Preparation screen) stops once at the positioning point. When cut-off machining is restarted and
the spindle reaches the speed of "Cut-Off Speed" above, the tool operates at this cutting feed rate.
<Loader device specifications when enabled>
The cut-off speed of the cut-off tool cannot be entered.
• Cut-Off End (DIA)
The tip of materials is cut to the end position of this X-axis position specified by CUT-OFF in Preparation screen or
M108 Material Exchange program. End position of cut-off machining when cut-off machining is performed or face
turning is performed during preparation. The tool specified in "Cut-Off Tool Tool Number" is positioned at this
point when you move the axes to the machining start position during preparation.
If moving axis to the center of the material is not required (e.g., pipe material), a positive value can be specified. In
such a case, the value must be preceded by plug (+) sign. For example, enter as "+1.0".
<Loader device specifications when enabled>
The indication changes to "spindle return position."
The "spindle return position" is a position that allows you to set Z1 axis retraction position when the "start position"
is set during preparation. Use machine coordinates to set values. It is normal to set the same value as the M42R or
G698R argument. For details, see <13.48 Loader Device>.

6-8
 L32

• Machining Length, Start point shift amount

The entered values are different when using the GB model and when using the GBL model + stopper enabled
specifications.

<GB machine>
It is normal to enter the Z1 axis stroke required for machining one workpiece.
(Product length + Cut-off tool width + Face-cut allowance + α (Margin))

<In GBL, when stopper specifications are available>

Enter the value <(Maximum move distance required for machining the workpiece) – (Overall length of
workpiece)>.
(1) Right-handed cut-off tool Enter the value (Cut-off chip width) + (Shift amount of rear turning
tool).
(If tool secondary machining tool is used, enter the shift amount of
that tool.)
(2) Left-handed cut-off tool Enter the larger value either of Cut-off tool shank width, or shift
amount of secondary machining tool.
The <loader device specification enabled> indication changes to "workpiece 0 point."
The "workpiece 0 point" is the length in Z direction from the chuck end face to the workpiece coordinate zero point
(end face of a completed workpiece) of material to be processed by the currently selected program. For details, see
<13.48.1 Series of workpiece loader operations (M42)>.

• Product count per chuck:

Number of pieces machined per chuck. Normally, enter 1.

[Note]
A "Machining Length × Pieces/1Chuck" value that exceeds the stroke (GB：325 mm, GBL：80 mm) of Z1, cannot be
set.

6-9
L32

• Back chuck extend length

Enter the length the chuck protrudes from the cap nut when mounted. In other words, enter the long-neck amount
when a long-neck chuck is used instead of a standard chuck. If "With Stabilizer" is specified for Back Spindle of
Machining data, the Back Chuck Extend Length is not displayed.

• Back work extend length

Distance from back spindle work coordinate zero point to back spindle chuck position (back spindle cap nut end
face) for machining the workpiece chucked on the back spindle.
(Back work extend length) = (Overall workpiece length) – (Chuck position specified in program)

6-10
 L32

[Note]
For the workpiece coordinate zero point for back machining, the back long-neck chuck protrusion amount and the back
workpiece extend length are included.

• Wrk Length + C-off TL Width

Enter the value "work length + cut-off tool width". Displayed only when CAV is installed. Use this menu to display
the rough estimate of products that can be machined with the remnant material.
• Guide bushing type
Specify the type of guide bushing of the selected program by selecting one in the list.
• Stopper number (In GBL, when stopper specifications are available)
Enter the stopper number. If the stopper is not used, enter "0" to disable the stopper specifications.
Stopper numbers are: T01 to T06, and T20.

6-11
L32

<Loader device specifications when enabled>

The indication changes to "start tool number."
The "start tool number" is the number of the tool selected when the "start position" is set during preparation. A tool
number specified using an R argument cannot be set.
• Gang tool post
Specify the name of the holder to be mounted on the gang tool post. Check the type of the holder mounted on the
machine (the type marked on the holder) and select the holder name from the list.
• Gang tool post (tool for specifying T numbers)
Specify the name of the holder (corresponding T number) to be mounted on the gang tool post. Check the type of the
holder mounted on the machine (the type marked on the holder) and select the holder name from the list.
• Opposite tool post
Specify the name of the holder mounted in the opposite post. Select it from the list. Usually, select "4P Spindle
Holder".
• Back tool post
Set the name of the holder mounted in the back tool post. Select it from the list. Usually, select "5P spindle holder" or
"9P spindle holder."
• Back spindle
Set the type of the back spindle attached to the back spindle cap. Select "Standard" when the chuck is used.
Select "With Basket" to attach a workpiece receiver box or "With Support" to attach an end bushing as a support for
long workpiece machining.

[Note]
Once machining data has been set, new programs created later reflect the machining data.

6-12
 L32

6.1.4 Checking machining data

To check the machining data which is needed for machining use the following.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key , Automatic Operation key , Program Check key , MDI key , Edit

key or Offset key .

The pressed key lamp lights or only the screen changes accordingly.
2. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key , then press the menu key [MC-Data].
The Machining Data screen appears.

6-13
L32

6.1.5 Entering, updating and storing the machining data

To enter, update and store the Machining Data use the following procedure.
[Procedure]
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ". The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Preparation key , Automatic Operation key , Program Check key , MDI key , Edit

key or Offset key . The pressed key lamp lights or only the screen changes accordingly.

3. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key , then press the menu key [MC-Data]. The Machining Data screen
appears.

4. Use the Page key or the Arrow keys to select the item you want to specify or change.

5. Enter the desired value using numeric keys. For the tool post, find the selection number of the desired holder in the
list and enter it to the setting field.

6. Press the Input key . The new data you have just entered is set. The machine will be operated in accordance
with the new machining data you have set.

[Note]
While the Program edit switch key is set to " ", you cannot edit the program or machining data.

6-14
 L32

6.1.6 Verifying the tool layout pattern

To verify the tool layout pattern of the gang tool post, use the following procedure.
When a T code is specified in the program or when a tool changing on the Preparation screen, the machine operates
based on this data.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key ,Automatic Operation key ,Program Check key ,MDI key , or Offset

key .
The pressed key lamp lights or only the screen changes accordingly.
2. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key , then press the menu key [T-PATT].
The Tool Pattern screen appears.

6-15
L32

6-16
 L32

6.1.7 Setting the free tool layout pattern

To set the free tool layout pattern, use the following procedure.
When a T code is specified in the program or when a tool changing on the Preparation screen, with the free tool layout
pattern specified as machining data, the machine operates based on this data.
Free tool layout pattern can be set separately for gang tool posts, front drilling posts and back drilling posts.
This section describes the operating procedure for setting the free tool layout pattern only for the gang tool posts. The
free tool layout pattern for front drilling posts and back drilling posts can be set in the same manner.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key ,Automatic Operation key ,Program Check key ,MDI key , or Offset

key .
The pressed key lamp lights or only the screen changes accordingly.
2. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key , then press the menu key [MC-Data].
The Machining Data screen appears.

3. Make sure that the gang tool post is "Free Tool".

If not, set it to "Free Tool". See <6.1.5 Entering, updating and storing the machining data>.

6-17
L32

4. Press the menu key [T-PATT]. The Tool Pattern screen appears.

5. Use the Tab keys , page keys , or the Arrow keys to select the item you want to
enter or change.

6-18
 L32

6. Enter the desired value using numeric keys.

7. Press the Input key . The new data you have just entered is set.

6-19
L32

6.2 Preparation
After selecting a program you need to prepare the machine for operation before you can start machining a product. The
Preparation functions involve tool setting, cut-off machining and moving of the axes to start positions before automatic
operation after tool setup.

In the preparation mode if the door is open, the machine operates only while you are holding down the Start
button . (except during cut-off machining and phase adjustment.)
Releasing the Start button stops the machine and causes the Start button lamp to blink (remains on for two
seconds and off for one second). Pressing the Start button with the lamp blinking restarts the machine. The
Start button lamp goes out upon completion of the current operation.
Make sure that the operation has been completed with the Start button lamp off, then proceed to the
operation to be performed next.
If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
If the machine is equipped with an Enable switch and you want to operate the machine while the door is
open, hold the Enable switch halfway down and press the Start button concurrently to start the
machine.
If the Enable switch is moved from the halfway down position or the Start button is released during
operation, the machine halts. Holding down the Enable switch while pressing the Start button will resume
operation.
To operate the machine while the door is closed, press the Start button once. The door is locked and
the Start button lamp blinks (on for 0.3 seconds and off for 0.3 seconds). Press the Start button again while
the lamp is blinking, and the machine starts operating. In this case, it is not necessary to hold down the
Start button. The Start button lamp goes out upon completion of the operation.
Described below are operation procedures when the Setting switch key is set to " ".
If you are going to work inside the machine, press the Door open button to unlock the door.
The door cannot be unlocked unless the following conditions are met.
• All spindles have stopped.
• All servo axes have stopped.
• The machine is not operating.
• The coolant is not discharged.
• The Door open button is pressed.

6-20
 L32

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.

Keep your hands and body away from the operating area during the preparation. Keep your hands and
body away from the machining area during Preparation.
When preparing to operate using new and existing machining programs, or executing a new machining
program, make sure that the tools mounted on the machine do not interfere with a part of the machine. If a
tool interferes with another part, this may damage the machine or may result in personal injury.
When you check the tool operations, find the part of the machining program corresponding to tool motion
and act safely by following the corresponding safety precautions.
For other precautions, see <2. Safety Precautions>.

6-21
L32

6.2.1 Return position

The axes move to the return position. That is, the X1 axis moves in the plus (upward) direction, the Z1 axis moves in the
minus (rightward) direction, and the Z2 axis moves to the return position (safe position on the left).
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp turns on, and the Preparation screen appears.

2. Press the [RET POS] menu key.

The Return Position screen appears.

* The screen is for a machine equipped with a guide bushing device. In GBL, the Z1 axis return position is not
displayed.
3. Make sure that all doors are closed before pressing the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.

6-22
 L32

4. Press the Start button .

The Start button lamp lights, and the X1, Z1, and Z2 axes return to their respective return position.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• With GBL-machine, Return position operation does not move the Z1 axis.
• Since the loader device moves to the workpiece loading positioning point after a Z1 axis retract operation when the
loader device is enabled, check spindle and loader hand status before operation. If the loader devices is retracted
when both the loader hand and the spindle chuck hold a workpiece, the loader hand could be damaged or the spindle
may be displaced from the center.

6-23
L32

6.2.2 Positioning point

The specified tool (the front machining tool with the cursor positioned) is moved to the positioning point.

Described below are operation procedures when the Setting switch key is set to " ".
If you are going to work inside the machine, press the Door open button to unlock the door.
The door cannot be unlocked unless the following conditions are met.
• All spindles have stopped.
• All servo axes have stopped.
• The machine is not operating.
• The coolant is not discharged.
• The Door open button is pressed.

6.2.2.1 Positioning point

• Tool, cross machining tool
(Material outer diameter) + (Positioning point) + (Diameter data set on the Preparation screen)
• The hole of the end face
The center of the material
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.

2. Use the Arrow keys to select the desired tool number.

6-24
 L32

3. Press the menu key [POS PNT].

The Positioning Point screen appears.

4. Select "Q1 Ope." as necessary.

After the Q1 Operation is selected, the specified tool directly moves to the queuing position from the current
position. This motion is mainly used after the program auto run is terminated. When using the Q1 motion, be sure
to unload the workpiece from the machine.
5. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
6. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights. The Z2 axis moves to return point and the specified tool moves to its positioning
point.

7. When operations are completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the screen changes to the Positioning
Point Handle screen.

8. Press one of the Handle Magnification button , , or .

Larger numbers result in faster machine motions.
9. Move the Z1 axis by handle.
10. Press the Escape key to finish the operation.

6-25
L32

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• The menu key [POS PNT] is disabled if no program is selected.

6-26
 L32

6.2.3 Start position

Use the following procedure to move the axes into position for carrying out automatic operation. The Z1 axis will move
for the machining length from the foremost position and X1 axis will move to the cut-off ending position.
The Z2 axis moves to the return point.
<Loader device specifications when enabled>
The Z1 axis moves to the spindle return position and the specified tool is selected using the start tool number and the X1
axis moves to the workpiece coordinate value 100.0 mm position. However, the X1 axis moves to the center when the
start tool is used for end-face drilling.

[Note]
The cut-off ending position complies with the Cut-Off End (DIA) value set in the Machining Data . The default Cut-Off
End (DIA) value is -4.0mm. The machining length indicates the data set in Machining Data.
The spindle return position and the start tool number refer to data set in the machining data that are only displayed when
the loader device specification is enabled.

Described below are operation procedures when the Setting switch key is set to " ".
If you are going to work inside the machine, press the Door open button to unlock the door.
The door cannot be unlocked unless the following conditions are met.
• All spindles have stopped.
• All servo axes have stopped.
• The machine is not operating.
• The coolant is not discharged.
• The Door open button is pressed.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp turns on, and the Preparation screen appears.

6-27
L32

2. Press the [ST POS] menu key.

The Start Position screen appears.

3. Make sure that all doors are closed before pressing the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
4. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the start position operation is started. During machine operation the message
"Moving to start position" appears. When operation is completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the message
changes to "Moving to start position completed."
5. When operations are completed, menu selection will be canceled.

6-28
 L32

[Note]
• The machine selects the tool specified in machining data "Cut-off Tool Tool Number" for start position operation,
regarding it as the cut-off machining tool.
• If you specify the machining start position when already the cut-off tool has been selected and the X1 and Y1 axes
have moved to the area within ( 0.1 mm from the respective machining start position (completion position), the X1
axis will not move in the vertical direction.
(the Q1 motion of T code macro is performed)
• If you instruct the machine to perform start position operation with the main spindle chuck closed, the instruction
results in an alarm of "EX501: Spindle chuck closed. Open spindle chuck." Open the main spindle chuck before
retrying start position operation.
• You do not need to move the axes to the return position before moving them to the machining start position.
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• The menu key [ST POS] is disabled if no program is selected.
• After the idle stop, be sure to perform Start position operation on Preparation screen before starting operation.
• With the GBL-machine, "Stopper" is selected for Start position operation instead of "Cut-off Tool".
• In the start point operation when the loader device is enabled, the tool specified by the start tool number is selected
not the cut-off tool. The X1 axis moves to the 100.0 mm position of the work coordinates.
If the loader hand of the loader has not gripped the workpiece, move it to the position where it will receive the
workpiece and open the loader hand. If it has gripped the workpiece, move it to the workpiece loading position (the
loader hand should not open).
• "Spindle return position" of the machining data is normally set to the same value as the M42R argument or G698R
argument when the loader device is enabled.
• When the "No. 53 bar loader disconnect" setting switch is set to ON, start point operation is possible also when the
spindle chuck is closed.

Moving the axes to the start position involves movement of the headstock. Keep away from any moving
part of the machine You could be injured if you come into contact with any moving parts. Be sure to remove
the material before starting to move the axes to the machining start positions.
If the headstock moves forward while the material is inserted into headstock, the material and tool might
cause interference.

6-29
L32

6.2.4 Gang tool post retraction

Only the gang tool post moves to the retraction end position (upward direction).

Described below are operation procedures when the Setting switch key is set to " ".
If you are going to work inside the machine, press the Door open button to unlock the door.
The door cannot be unlocked unless the following conditions are met.
• All spindles have stopped.
• All servo axes have stopped.
• The machine is not operating.
• The coolant is not discharged.
• The Door open button is pressed.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.

2. Press the menu key [G.Pt RET]. The Gang Tool Post Retract Pnt screen appears.

3. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
4. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the gang tool post moves to the return position.

6-30
 L32

5. When operations are completed, menu selection will be canceled.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.

6-31
L32

6.2.5 Opposite tool post retraction

Only the opposite tool post Z2 axis moves to the retraction end position.

Described below are operation procedures when the Setting switch key is set to " ".
If you are going to work inside the machine, press the Door open button to unlock the door.
The door cannot be unlocked unless the following conditions are met.
• All spindles have stopped.
• All servo axes have stopped.
• The machine is not operating.
• The coolant is not discharged.
• The Door open button is pressed.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key . The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.

2. Press the menu key [OPP-RET]. The opposite tool post retract point screen appears.

3. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
4. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the machine moves to the opposite tool post return position.

6-32
 L32

5. When operations are completed, menu selection will be canceled.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.

6-33
L32

6.2.6 Chuck thrust

The chuck thrust screen shows a graph of the chucking force adjustment nut angle that is referenced during chuck thrust
adjustments.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.

2. Press the menu key [Chuck thrust].

Chuck thrust screen appears.

6-34
 L32

6.2.7 Tool set

A tool must be mounted so that the tool nose position (cutting point) is identical to the defined reference point. The
purpose of tool setting is to set the tool nose position (cutting point) of each tool to the reference point.
If a tool nose position is not identical to the reference point, the dimensions of a machined workpiece become different
from the dimensions specified in the program. Also, a material (workpiece) may interfere with the tool during operation.
Tool setting requires the following adjustment in mounting tools:
Diametrical adjustment :In the X-axis direction
Core adjustment :In the Y-axis direction
Longitudinal adjustment :In the Z-axis direction

Be sure to correctly adjust the core as well. Core adjustment does not directly influence product dimensions, but it
influences the surface roughness and tool's life.
If the program is changed in program selection or the tool holder set in the machining data is changed, you need to
change the tool set data (DIA., Core, or Longitude) as needed.
The machine uses the in-machine tool setting function (except for special tools). The software for supporting the
in-machine tool setting is provided.

Pull out the material carefully. If the tool interferes with the material, this could damage the tool and cause
personal injury.
Described below are operation procedures when the Setting switch key is set to " ".
If you are going to work inside the machine, press the Door open button to unlock the door.
The door cannot be unlocked unless the following conditions are met.
• All spindles have stopped.
• All servo axes have stopped.
• The machine is not operating.
• The coolant is not discharged.
• The Door open button is pressed.

6-35
L32

6.2.7.1 Tool setting procedure

To set the tools in the machine, use one of the two procedures given below.
[Procedure]
When the tool is attached right adjacent to the tool to be set
Steps enclosed by dashed lines can be omitted if it is not
required.

1. Perform core adjustment of the tool.

See <6.2.7.4 Core (outer circumference) >.

2. Perform longitude adjustment of the cut-off tool.

See <6.2.7.3 Longitude (gang tool) >.

3. Perform longitude adjustments of tools other than the cut-off tool.

See <6.2.7.3 Longitude (gang tool) >.

4. Attach the tool.

See <6.2.7.7 Diameter (gang tool / cross rotary tool) >.

5. Perform end surface cutting using each tool.

See <6.2.5 Opposite tool post retraction >.

6. Confirm the nib amount and directly enter the core height compensation amount.

7. Perform diameter adjustment of the tool again.

See <6.2.7.7 Diameter (gang tool / cross rotary tool) >.

8. Attach the rotary tool.

See <6.2.7.7 Diameter (gang tool / cross rotary tool) >.

9. Perform core adjustment of the rotary tool.

See <6.2.7.5 Core (core down) >.

10. Attach the front drilling tool.

See <6.2.7.9 Longitude (core) (drill) >.

11. Perform center adjustment of the front drilling tool.

See <6.2.7.11 Centering the tool (drill) (boring) >, Procedure 1.

12. Perform the one cycle machining operation.

13. Attach the back machining drilling tool.

See <6.2.7.10 Longitude (back drill) >.

14. Perform center adjustment of the back machining drilling tool.

See <6.2.7.11 Centering the tool (drill) (boring) >, Procedure 1.

6-36
 L32

[Procedure]
When the tool is not attached right adjacent to the tool to be set
Steps enclosed by dashed lines can be omitted if it is not
required.

1. Perform longitude adjustment of the cut-off tool.

See <6.2.7.3 Longitude (gang tool) >.

2. Perform longitude adjustments of tools other than the cut-off tool.

See <6.2.7.3 Longitude (gang tool) >.

3. Attach the tool.

See <6.2.7.7 Diameter (gang tool / cross rotary tool) >.

4. Perform core adjustment of the tool.

See <6.2.7.5 Core (core down) >.

5. Remove the tool once and after attaching it again, perform diametric adjustment.
See <6.2.7.7 Diameter (gang tool / cross rotary tool) >.

6. Perform end surface cutting using each tool.

See <6.2.5 Opposite tool post retraction >.

7. Confirm the nib amount and directly enter the core height compensation amount.

8. Perform diameter adjustment of the tool again.

See <6.2.7.7 Diameter (gang tool / cross rotary tool) >.

9. Attach the rotary tool.

See <6.2.7.7 Diameter (gang tool / cross rotary tool) >.

10. Perform core adjustment of the rotary tool.

See <6.2.7.5 Core (core down) >.

11. Attach the front drilling tool.

See <6.2.7.9 Longitude (core) (drill) >.

12. Perform center adjustment of the front drilling tool.

See <6.2.7.11 Centering the tool (drill) (boring) >.

13. Perform the one cycle machining operation.

14. Attach the back machining drilling tool.

See <6.2.7.10 Longitude (back drill) >.

15. Perform center adjustment of the back machining drilling tool.

See <6.2.7.11 Centering the tool (drill) (boring) >.

6-37
L32

6.2.7.2 Selecting the tool to be set

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.

2. Use the Arrow keys or Tab keys to move the cursor to the tool to be set.

3. Press the menu key [Man. Set]. The Manual Tool Set screen appears.

6-38
 L32

4. After machine operation the Manual Handle screen appears.

6-39
L32

6.2.7.3 Longitude (gang tool)

Align the machining surface positions of other tools based on the machining surface of the cut-off tool.
Adjust the tool position so that the machining surface of a tool matches with the end surface of the material.
This function shifts the program reference point and tool cutting point in the longitudinal direction.
In normal case, use the longitudinal direction coordinate system shift command in the machining program. (See <8.5
Coordinate System Shift> in the Instruction Manual (Optional).)
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Turn off the bar loader torque and open the chuck.
(Turn off a dedicated bar loader . On other bar loaders, turn off torque.)

3. Perform start position operation.

See <6.2.3 Start position>.
4. Align the material with the tip of the cut-off tool.

5. Close the chuck.

6. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the Longitud of the tool to be set.

7. Press the menu key [Man. Set].

The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Make sure that the cursor is placed at the longitude. If the cursor is not on the
longitude, use the arrow keys to move it to the longitude.

8. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
9. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the Z2, Z1, X1, and Y1 axes will move.

6-40
 L32

10. When operations are completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the screen changes to the Manual Handle
screen.

11. Apply the tool to the tool holder and move the material (Z1 axis) back and forth in handle feed to perform
longitudinal adjustment so that the end face of the tool is aligned with the end face of the material.

12. Press the Input key .

13. Open the chuck and return the material.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• When performing adjustment for core (Y), diameter (X) and center (X) using the handle, selection of multiplication
ratio ×100 is not possible.
• If the cut-off tool is shifted to the longitudinal direction, this function is unavailable.

• The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.

6-41
L32

6.2.7.4 Core (outer circumference)

Adjust the core height of the gang tool. Move the tool so that the machining tool upper end (rake face) is aligned with the
circumference of a material. The X1 axis is moved to the POSITIONING PT. preset in the machining data.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the core of the tool to be set.

3. Press the menu key [Man. Set].

The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Confirm that the cursor is at the core. If the cursor is not at the core, use the
Arrow keys to move the cursor to the Core.

4. Press the arrow key . Two cursors appear and the list showing the move positions is displayed. Enter the

selection number of "Center" and press the Input key .

The Move POS setting is saved as a default, so once "Core (outer circumference)" is set it is valid for the next tool
setting.

5. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.

6-42
 L32

6. Press the Start button .

The Start button lamp lights and the tool moves to the circumference of the material. X1 axis is moved to the
positioning point.

7. When operations are completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the screen changes to the Manual Handle
screen.

8. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
9. Pull out the material and move the tool up and down by hand to check whether the tool tip is aligned with the
circumference of the material.

10. Feed the Y1 axis by handle so that the tool tip is aligned with the circumference of the material.
11. Press the Input key .

12. Press the Escape key to finish the operation.

6-43
L32

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• When performing adjustment for core (Y), diameter (X) and center (X) using the handle, selection of multiplication
ratio ×100 is not possible.
• The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.

6-44
 L32

6.2.7.5 Core (core down)

Adjust the core height of the gang tool and rotary tool drill. Move the tool or the rotary tool so that the tool rake face or
the tip of rotary tool drill is aligned with the circumference of a material.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the core of the tool to be set.

3. Press the menu key [Man. Set].

The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Confirm that the cursor is at the core. If the cursor is not at the core, use the
Arrow keys to move the cursor to the Core.

4. Press the arrow key . Two cursors appear and the list showing the move positions is displayed. Enter the

selection number of "Core DWN" and press the Input key .

The Move POS setting is saved as a default, so once "Core DWN" is set it is valid for the next tool setting.

5. Make sure that the material is housed in the guide bushing.

6. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
7. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the tool moves to the circumference of the material. The X1 axis is moved to X=0.

6-45
L32

8. When operations are completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the screen changes to the Manual Handle
screen.

9. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
10. Pull out the material and check whether the tool tip is aligned with the circumference of the material.
11. Adjust the core height in the Y1-axis direction by handle so that the tool tip is aligned with the circumference of the
material.

12. Press the Input key .

If you set a rotary tool, perform the adjustment by manually entering tool diameter (a) to be added.
After making this adjustment, revert the diameter value.
13. Press the Escape key to finish the operation.

6-46
 L32

Pull out the material carefully.

If the tool interferes with the material, this could damage the tool and cause personal injury.
If you perform this function while the material is extending out of the guide bushing and the tool is attached
next to the tool to be set, the tool may interfere with the material and could result in damage of the tool.

[Note]
• The X1 axis moves in the direction in which the selected tool cuts the material.
• The Y1 axis moves in the direction which intersects the cutting direction.
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• When performing adjustment for core (Y), diameter (X) and center (X) using the handle, selection of multiplication
ratio ×100 is not possible.
• The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.

6-47
L32

6.2.7.6 Core (center)

Adjust the core height of the gang tool. Move the tool so that the tool rake face is aligned with the center of the material.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the core of the tool to be set.

3. Press the menu key [Man. Set].

The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Confirm that the cursor is at the core. If the cursor is not at the core, use the
Arrow keys to move the cursor to the Core.

4. Press the arrow key . Two cursors appear and the list showing the move positions is displayed. Enter the

selection number of "Center" and press the Input key .

The Move POS setting is saved as a default. Once you select "Center" when setting a tool, therefore, the setting
applies also to the tool you set next.

5. Make sure that the material is housed in the guide bushing.

6. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.

6-48
 L32

7. Press the Start button .

The Start button lamp lights and the tool moves to the center position of the material.
The X1 and Y1 axes are moved to X0, Y0.

8. When operations are completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the screen changes to the Manual Handle
screen.

9. Temporarily attach the tool to the tool holder and confirm that the tool tip is aligned with the material cut-off mark.
10. Move the Y1 axis in handle feed to make adjustment so that the tip of the tool bit is aligned with the center of the
cut-off mark at the end of the material.

11. Press the Input key .

12. Press the Escape key to finish the operation.

6-49
L32

[Note]
• The X1 axis moves in the direction in which the selected tool cuts the material.
• The Y1 axis moves in the direction which intersects the cutting direction.
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• When performing adjustment for core (Y), diameter (X) and center (X) using the handle, selection of multiplication
ratio ×100 is not possible.
• The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.
6.2.7.7 Diameter (gang tool / cross rotary tool)
Position the tool or the cross rotary tool so that the tip of the tool or the cross rotary tool is aligned with the outer
diameter of the material.
[Procedure]
To set the tool or cross rotary tool to the tool holder:

1. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the DIA of the tool to be set.

3. Make sure that the material is housed in the guide bushing.

4. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Confirm that the cursor is at the DIA. IIf the cursor is not at the DIA, use the
Arrow keys to move the cursor to the DIA.

5. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
6. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the selected tool (gang tool post) moves to the position of the material outer
diameter.

6-50
 L32

7. When operations are completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the screen changes to the Manual Handle
screen.

8. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
9. Pull out the material and bring the tool tip or cross rotary tool tip into light contact with the outer diameter of the
material and temporarily secure the tool or the cross rotary tool.

10. Move the X1 axis in the plus (+) direction by handle to relieve the tool or the cross rotary tool from the material. Or
perform positioning point return operation. See <6.2.2 Positioning point>.

11. Fix the tool or cross rotary tool in the tool holder firmly.
12. Press the Escape key to finish the operation.

6-51
L32

[Procedure]
To make fine adjustment for the fixed tool or cross rotary tool in the diametric direction

1. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the DIA of the tool to be set.

3. Make sure that the material is housed in the guide bushing.

4. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Confirm that the cursor is at the DIA. IIf the cursor is not at the DIA, use the
Arrow keys to move the cursor to the DIA.

5. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
6. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the tool moves to the outer diameter of the machining material.

7. When operations are completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the screen changes to the Manual Handle
screen.

8. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
9. Pull out the material.

6-52
 L32

10. Move the X1 axis by handle to align the tool tip or the cross rotary tool tip with the outer diameter of the material.

11. Press the Input key .

12. Press the Escape key to finish the operation.

6-53
L32

[Procedure]
To set the tool or cross rotary tool to the tool holder with larger protrusion amount than normal
(When performing deep hole drilling for through hole machining using a cross rotary tool)

1. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the DIA of the tool to be set.

3. Make sure that the material is housed in the guide bushing.

4. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Confirm that the cursor is at the DIA. IIf the cursor is not at the DIA, use the
Arrow keys to move the cursor to the DIA.

5. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
6. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the tool moves to the outer diameter of the machining material.

7. When operations are completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the screen changes to the Manual Handle
screen.

8. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.

6-54
 L32

9. Pull out the material.

10. Move the X1 axis in the plus (+) X direction by handle to provide protrusion amount necessary for machining and
temporarily fix the tool or the cross rotary tool in the tool holder in the state the tool tip or the cross rotary tool tip
is in contact with the outer diameter of the material.

11. Press the Input key .

12. Move the X1 axis in the plus (+) direction by handle to relieve the tool or the cross rotary tool from the material.
13. Fix the tool or cross rotary tool in the tool holder firmly.
14. Press the Escape key to finish the operation.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• When performing adjustment for core (Y), diameter (X) and center (X) using the handle, selection of multiplication
ratio ×100 is not possible.
• The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.

6-55
L32

6.2.7.8 Diameter (back tool set / cross rotary tool) type X and XII only
[Procedure]
Adjusting a back tool set or cross rotary tool in the diametric direction
Position the back tool set or the cross rotary tool so that the tip of the tool or the cross rotary tool is aligned with the outer
diameter of the material.

1. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the DIA of the tool to be set.

3. Press the menu key [Back diameter]. Enter the diameter of the back tool set.

4. Press the menu key [Man. Set].

The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Confirm that the cursor is at the DIA. If the cursor is not on the diameter, use
the arrow keys to move the cursor to the diameter.

5. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
6. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights. The back spindle moves to the return point and then to its positioning point. And then
to the outer diameter of the cross rotary material.

6-56
 L32

7. When operations are completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the screen changes to the Manual Handle
screen.

8. Move the cursor to Longitude by pressing the Arrow keys and advance the back spindle by turning the
handle.
9. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
10. Bring the cross rotary tool tip into light contact with the outer diameter of the material and temporarily secure the
cross rotary tool.

11. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to "Diameter".

12. Handle feed in the + direction to move the rotary tool away from the material. Or perform positioning point return
operation.

13. Fix the tool or cross rotary tool in the tool holder firmly.
14. 13. Press the Escape key to finish the operation.

6-57
L32

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• When performing adjustment for core (Y), diameter (X) and center (X) using the handle, selection of multiplication
ratio ×100 is not possible.
The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.

6-58
 L32

6.2.7.9 Longitude (core) (drill)

This function operates the machine so that the drill, to be mounted in the drilling tool holder on the gang tool post (T08
to T10, T11 to T17) or in the drilling tool holder on the opposite tool post (T21 to T23) , is mounted in the tool holder or
the spindle with the specified overhang amount.
[Procedure]
To set the right-handed cut-off tool (T1****):

1. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Turn off the bar loader torque and open the chuck.
3. Perform cut-off operation on the end face of the material. (End the operation with the chuck closed.)
See <6.2.8 Cut-off machining>.
4. Align the material with the tip of the cut-off tool. Perform cut-off and the operation ends in the state the material
and the cut-off tool are in contact with each other.

5. Move the cut-off tool to the positioning point.

6. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the core of the tool to be set.

7. Attach the tool to the sleeve and insert the sleeve into the tool post deeply.
8. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Confirm that the cursor is at the core. If the cursor is not at the core, use the
Arrow keys to move the cursor to the Core.

9. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
10. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights. The Z2 axis returns to return position, and the selected tool is positioned.

6-59
L32

11. Bring the tool tip into contact with the end face of the material and temporarily tighten the sleeve.

12. Press the Escape key .

The Manual Tool Set screen closes.
13. Move the material away from the tool, then tighten up the sleeve firmly.

6-60
 L32

[Procedure]
To set the right-handed cut-off tool (T1****):

1. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Turn off the bar loader torque and open the chuck.
3. Perform cut-off operation on the end face of the material. (End the operation with the chuck closed.)
See <6.2.8 Cut-off machining>.
4. Assume that the tool shank width of the cut-off tool is 12.0 mm and the width of the cut-off tip is 2.0 mm. When the
material is cut off with this cut-off tool, the end face of the material extends 10.0 mm from the program zero point.

5. Move the cut-off tool to the positioning position.

6. Press the MDI key .

7. Enter "G0 W–10.0" in $1 program and, after closing the door, execute this program.
[Note]
The value of "G0 W-10.0" varies according to the tool shank width and tip width of the cut-off tool.

8. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
9. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the core of the tool to be set.

10. Attach the tool to the sleeve and insert the sleeve into the tool post deeply.
11. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Confirm that the cursor is at the core. If the cursor is not at the core, use the
Arrow keys to move the cursor to the Core.

12. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.

6-61
L32

13. Press the Start button .

The Start button lamp lights. The Z2 axis returns to the stroke end, the Z1 axis returns 1 mm, and after the selected
tool is positioned, the Z1 axis advances 1 mm.

14. Bring the tool tip into contact with the end face of the material and temporarily tighten the sleeve.

15. Press the Escape key .

The Manual Tool Set screen closes.
16. Move the material away from the tool, then tighten up the sleeve firmly.

6-62
 L32

[Procedure]
To set the right-handed cut-off tool (T2****):

1. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Turn off the bar loader torque and open the chuck.
3. Perform cut-off operation on the end face of the material. (End the operation with the chuck closed.)
See <6.2.8 Cut-off machining>.
4. Align the material with the tip of the cut-off tool. Perform cut-off and the operation ends in the state the material
and the cut-off tool are in contact with each other.

5. Move the cut-off tool to the positioning point.

6. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the Longitud of the tool to be set.

7. Attach the tool to the sleeve and insert the sleeve into the tool post deeply.
8. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Make sure that the cursor is placed at the longitude. If the cursor is not on the
longitude, use the arrow keys to move it to the longitude.

9. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
10. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the gang tool post moves to the return position.
The selected tool is positioned in X2-axis direction, the Z2 axis moves forward to the set position.

6-63
L32

11. Bring the tool tip into contact with the end face of the material and temporarily tighten the sleeve.

12. Press the menu key [OPP-RET], and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
13. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the opposite tool post returns to the Z2 axis zero point.
14. Tighten up the sleeve firmly.

6-64
 L32

[Procedure]
To set the left-handed cut-off tool (T2****):

1. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Turn off the bar loader torque and open the chuck.
3. Perform cut-off operation on the end face of the material. (End the operation with the chuck closed.)
See <6.2.8 Cut-off machining>.
4. Assume that the tool shank width of the cut-off tool is 12.0 mm and the width of the cut-off tip is 2.0 mm. When the
material is cut off with this cut-off tool, the end face of the material extends 10.0 mm from the program zero point.

5. Move the cut-off tool to the positioning position.

6. Press the MDI key .

7. Enter "G0 W–10.0" in $1 program and, after closing the door, execute this program.
[Note]
The value of "G0 W-10.0" varies according to the tool shank width and tip width of the cut-off tool.

8. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
9. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the Longitude of the tool to be set.

10. Attach the tool to the sleeve and insert the sleeve into the tool post deeply.
11. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Make sure that the cursor is placed at the longitude. If the cursor is not on the
longitude, use the arrow keys to move it to the longitude.

12. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.

6-65
L32

13. Press the Start button .

The Start button lamp lights and the gang tool post moves to the return position.
The selected tool is positioned in X2-axis direction, the Z2 axis moves forward to the set position.

14. Bring the tool tip into contact with the end face of the material and temporarily tighten the sleeve.

15. Press the menu key [OPP-RET], and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
16. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the opposite tool post returns to the Z2 axis zero point.
17. Tighten up the sleeve firmly.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• When performing adjustment for core (Y), diameter (X) and center (X) using the handle, selection of multiplication
ratio ×100 is not possible.
• If the operation is interrupted by pressing the Reset key , the material (Z1 axis) may remain the position
retracted 1.0 mm. Set the material to the proper position again.
• The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.

6-66
 L32

6.2.7.10 Longitude (back drill)

This function sets the drill to protrude the specified length. The length of the back drilling tool is given below.
For information on protruding length of tooling other than those below, refer to <17. Tooling>.
Protruding drill length

[Procedure]
Mounting a back drilling tool (T3***)
1. Chuck a product (material) on the back spindle.
Usually, chuck that product which has been front-machined by one-cycle operation and its overall length is
corrected. Make sure that the product is protruding from the end of the back spindle (chucked at the right position).

2. Measure the length of the protrusion of the product from the back chuck and check whether the measured length
matches the value entered in machining data "Back Spindle Chuck POS." (For machining data, see <6.1.3
Required fields for machining data> and <6.1.4 Checking machining data>.)

3. Press the Preparation key . The Preparation key lamp turns on, and the Preparation screen appears.

4. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the Longitude of the tool to be set.

5. Put the sleeve deep into the tool post.

6. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Make sure that the cursor is placed on the longitude. If the cursor is not on the
longitude, use the arrow keys to move it to the longitude.

7. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
8. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights, the back spindle (Z2 axis) moves return position to select the desired tool and then
advances to the standard set position.

6-67
L32

9. Bring the tool tip into contact with the end face of the material and temporarily tighten the sleeve.

10. Press the menu key [OPP-RET], and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
11. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the opposite tool post returns to the Z2 axis zero point.
12. Tighten up the sleeve firmly.
[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operation.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• When performing adjustment for core (Y), diameter (X) and center (X) using the handle, selection of multiplication
ratio ×100 is not possible.
• The tool may cause interference during back machining if the actual length of the protrusion from the back spindle is
different from the chucking position entered in machining data.
• The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.

6-68
 L32

[Procedure]
To mount a drill in the back gang tool post (T51 to T60)
1. Chuck a product (material) on the back spindle.
Usually, chuck that product which has been front-machined by one-cycle operation and its overall length is
corrected.

2. Measure the length of the protrusion of the product from the back chuck and check whether the measured length
matches the value entered in machining data "Back Spindle Chuck POS." (For machining data, see <6.1.3
Required fields for machining data> and <6.1.4 Checking machining data>.)

3. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
4. Use the Page keys , the Arrow keys , or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the
Longitud of the tool to be set.
5. Put the sleeve deep into the tool post.
6. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Make sure that the cursor is placed on the longitude. If the cursor is not on the
longitude, use the arrow keys to move it to the longitude.

7. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
8. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights. The Z2 axis returns to the stroke end, the X2 axis moves to the spindle center line
position, and after the selected tool is positioned, the Z2 axis advances to the standard setting position.

9. Bring the tool tip into contact with the end face of the material and temporarily tighten the sleeve.

10. Press the menu key [OPP-RET], and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.

6-69
L32

11. Press the Start button .

The Start button lamp lights and the opposite tool post returns to the Z2 axis zero point.
12. Tighten up the sleeve firmly.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operation.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• When performing adjustment for core (Y), diameter (X) and center (X) using the handle, selection of multiplication
ratio ×100 is not possible.
• The tool may cause interference during back machining if the actual length of the protrusion from the back spindle is
different from the chucking position entered in machining data.
• The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.

6-70
 L32

[Procedure]
Mounting a slitting cutter for back machining
The back slitting cutter is protruded from the standard tool nose position of T31's.
Calculate the protrusion length of the slitting cutter in longitudinal direction, and enter the value in tool set data.
To mount the slitting cutter, specify the value calculated by the following formula for "Longitude" field on the Manual
Tool Set screen.

Before mounting a slitting cutter, be sure to specify a value for setting tool in longitudinal direction
according to the following formula. If the value is not specified correctly, the workpiece on back spindle may
interfere with the slitting cutter.

Tool set position for longitudinal direction ＝ － { (Diameter of slitting cutter) / 2 }

1. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to Longitude for the tool (T34) on
which the slitting cutter is mounted.
3. Press the menu key [Man. Set]. The Manual Tool Set screen appears.
Make sure that the cursor is placed on the longitude.
4. Enter the value obtained from the formula by using the sheet key, then press the Input key .
On Preparation screen, make sure that the value shown in "Longitud (longitudinal setting)" field of T34 (on which
the slitting cutter is mounted) is correct.

6-71
L32

6.2.7.11 Centering the tool (drill) (boring)

Center the front drilling or back drilling tool.

[Note]
Since the machine is adjusted to center tools when assembled, perform this operation only when necessary.
[Procedure]
To align the center of the drill in the front gang tool post (T10 to T19) with the center of material

1. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the Core or DIA for the tool you
want to set.
3. Put the sleeve deep into the tool post.
4. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Make sure that the Core or DIA setting is highlighted with the cursor. If the
cursor is not at the Core or DIA setting, use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the Core or DIA
setting.
5. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
6. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights. The material (Z1 axis) returns 1.0 mm, and after the selected tool is positioned, the
material (Z1 axis) advances 1.0 mm.

7. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
8. Pull the material without letting its end face touch the tool.
9. Move the X1 or Y1 axis in handle feed so that the tip of the tool bit is aligned with the center of the cut-off mark at
the end of the material.

10. Press the Input key .

11. Press the Escape key .

The Manual Tool Set screen closes.
12. Move the material away from the tool.

6-72
 L32

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• When performing adjustment for core (Y), diameter (X) and center (X) using the handle, selection of multiplication
ratio ×100 is not possible.
• The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.
[Procedure]
To align the center of the front drill (T2***)

1. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the center setting for the tool you
want to set.
3. Put the sleeve deep into the tool post.
4. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Make sure that the center setting is highlighted with the cursor. If the cursor
is not at the center setting, use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the center setting.

5. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
6. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the gang tool post moves to the return position.
The selected tool is positioned in X2-axis direction, the Z2 axis moves forward to the set position.

7. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the Longitude.

6-73
L32

8. Use the handle to advance the Z2 axis.

9. Move the cursor to Center by pressing the Arrow keys .

10. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
11. Pull the material without letting its end face touch the tool.
12. Move the X2 axis in handle feed so that the tip of the tool bit is aligned with the center of the cut-off mark at the
end of the material.

13. Press the Input key .

14. Press the menu key [OPP-RET], make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
15. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the opposite tool post returns to the Z2 axis zero point.

6-74
 L32

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• When performing adjustment for core (Y), diameter (X) and center (X) using the handle, selection of multiplication
ratio ×100 is not possible.
• The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.

6-75
L32

[Procedure]
To align the center of the back drill (T3***)
1. Chuck a product (material) on the back spindle.

2. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
3. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the center setting for the tool you
want to set.
4. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Make sure that the center setting is highlighted with the cursor. If the cursor
is not at the center setting, use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the center setting.

5. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
6. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the back spindle is selected for being centering.

7. Move the cursor to Longitude by pressing the Arrow keys and advance the Z2 axis by handle.

8. Move the cursor to Center by pressing the Arrow keys .

6-76
 L32

9. Move the X2 axis in handle feed so that the tip of the tool bit is aligned with the center of the cut-off mark at the
end of the material.

10. Press the Input key .

11. Press the menu key [OPP-RET], make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
12. Press the Start button . The Start button lamp lights and the opposite tool post returns to the Z2 axis zero point.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• When performing adjustment for core (Y), diameter (X) and center (X) using the handle, selection of multiplication
ratio ×100 is not possible.
• The tool may cause interference during back machining if the actual length of the protrusion from the back spindle is
different from the value entered in the back spindle work length of machining data.
• The tool may cause interference during back machining if the actual length of the protrusion from the back spindle is
different from the back chuck extend length entered in machining data.
• The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.

6-77
L32

[Procedure]
To align the center of the drill in the back gang tool post (T5***)
1. Chuck a product (material) on the back spindle.

2. Press the Preparation key . The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.

3. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the Core or DIA for the tool you
want to set.
4. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Make sure that the Core or DIA setting is highlighted with the cursor. If the
cursor is not at the Core or DIA setting, use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the Core or DIA
setting.
5. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
6. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights, the Z2 axis retracts full stroke, the selected tool is positioned and then the back
spindle is selected for being centering.

7. Move the cursor to Longitude by pressing the Arrow keys and advance the Z2 axis by handle.

6-78
 L32

8. Move the X1 or Y1 axis in handle feed so that the tip of the tool bit is aligned with the center of the cut-off mark at
the end of the material.

9. Press the Input key .

10. Press the menu key [OPP-RET], make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
11. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the opposite tool post returns to the Z2 axis zero point.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• When performing adjustment for core (Y), diameter (X) and center (X) using the handle, selection of multiplication
ratio ×100 is not possible.
• The tool may cause interference during back machining if the actual length of the protrusion from the back spindle is
different from the value entered in the back spindle work length of machining data.
• The tool may cause interference during back machining if the actual length of the protrusion from the back spindle is
different from the back chuck extend length entered in machining data.
• The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.

6-79
L32

6.2.7.12 Tool Name

Specify the tool name.

[Note]
The standard tool name is selected at the program selection. Perform steps below to change the tool name.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the tool to be set.

3. Press the menu key [Man. Set].

The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Make sure that the tool name setting is highlighted with the cursor. If the
cursor is not at the tool name setting, use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the tool name setting.

4. Enter the number assigned to the tool you want to select in the tool list, then press the Input key .

You can find the tool you want to select by scrolling the list with the Page key .
Example of the tool name
Name Description
19R 19 sq. tool for forward rotation
19R SFT 19 sq. tool for right-shifted forward rotation
19L 19 sq. tool for reverse rotation
19L SFT 19 sq. tool for left-shifted forward rotation
19L Y 19 sq. tool for Y-axis cutting tool
16R 16 sq. tool for forward rotation
16R SFT 16 sq. tool for right-shifted forward rotation
16L 16 sq. tool for reverse rotation
16L SFT 16 sq. tool for left-shifted forward rotation
16L Y 16 sq. tool for Y-axis cutting tool
13R 13 sq. tool for forward rotation
13R SFT 13 sq. tool for right-shifted forward rotation
13L 13 sq. tool for reverse rotation
13L SFT 13 sq. tool for left-shifted forward rotation
13LY 13 sq. tool for Y-axis cutting tool
12R 12 sq. tool for forward rotation
12R SFT 12 sq. tool for right-shifted forward rotation
12L 12 sq. tool for reverse rotation
12L SFT 12 sq. tool for left-shifted forward rotation
12LY 12 sq. tool for Y-axis cutting tool

6-80
 L32

Name Description
10R 10 sq. tool for forward rotation
10R SFT 10 sq. tool for right-shifted forward rotation
10L 10 sq. tool for reverse rotation
10L SFT 10 sq. tool for left-shifted forward rotation
10LY 10 sq. tool for Y-axis cutting tool
Cross Cross machining rotary tool
Face End-face drilling tool, end-face rotary tool
Back Back end-face drilling tool, back end-face rotary tool
Clined Adjustable angle rotary tool
No Tool No tool is mounted

6-81
L32

6.2.8 Cut-off machining

Perform cut-off machining or end face turning based on the data set as machining data.

Described below are operation procedures when the Setting switch key is set to " ".
If you are going to work inside the machine, press the Door open button to unlock the door.
The door cannot be unlocked unless the following conditions are met.
• All spindles have stopped.
• All servo axes have stopped.
• The machine is not operating.
• The coolant is not discharged.
• The Door open button is pressed.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp turns on, and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Use the Arrow keys to position the cursor at the tool to be used for cut-off machining.

3. Feed the material so that it projects for the length to be cut-off or the length for end face cutting.
4. Press the [Cut-Off] menu key.
The Cut-Off screen appears.

5. Make sure that all doors are closed before pressing the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.

6-82
 L32

[Note]
On the Cut-Off window, if the check mark is entered for the "Exec st pnt ope." item below Operation Select, the chuck
automatically opens and the Z1 moves to the start position after the completion of cut-off operation.

6. Press the Start button .

The Start button lamp lights. The Z2 axis returns and the tool is positioned at the positioning point. (The operation
can be executed while the door is open up to the completion of positioning at the position point.)
After the completion of operation, the Start button lamp blinks (on for 0.5 seconds and off for 0.5 seconds).

7. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
8. Expose only that portion of the material which is to be subject to cut-off machining or end face turning.
You can feed the Z1 axis by handle to expose the material by selecting "Handle Operation (Z1)" in the Cut-Off
screen.

9. Close all doors.

10. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Coolant button .
11. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
12. Press the [Cut-Off] menu key and the Start button at the same time.
The Start button lamp lights, the chuck is closed, and cut-off machining starts. The message "Executing cut-off" is
displayed during the operation. Upon completion of the operation, the message disappears and the Start button
lamp turns off. (The spindle stops rotation but the chuck remains closed.)
If the check mark is set for the "Exec st pnt ope." item, the Z1 axis moves to the start position after the chuck is
opened.

6-83
L32

[Note]
• To open the door, set the Setting switch key to the " " position, and press the Door open button . If this
switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• Cut-off machining is disabled while the door is open. Lock the door before starting exciting GB.
• The door lock cannot be released unless the following conditions are met.
All spindles have stopped.
The machine is not operating.
The coolant is not discharged.
• The menu key [Cut-Off] is disabled if no program is selected.
• If the check mark is set for the "Exec st pnt ope." item, the chuck automatically opens after the completion of cut-off
operation and the Z1 moves to the start position. Accordingly, the end face of the material may move away from the
cut-off tool if the gap adjustment for the guide bushing is loose. Before turning on the bar loader torque, make sure to
check the position of the material end face.
• The [Cut-off] menu key is not displayed when the loader device is enabled.

6-84
 L32

6.2.9 Non-conformed material phase adjustment

Adjust the phase between the main spindle and the back spindle to machine non-conformed materials. When the chuck
for non-conformed material is used, make sure to adjust the phase.

Described below are operation procedures when the Setting switch key is set to " ".
If you are going to work inside the machine, press the Door open button to unlock the door.
The door cannot be unlocked unless the following conditions are met.
• All spindles have stopped.
• All servo axes have stopped.
• The machine is not operating.
• The coolant is not discharged.
• The Door open button is pressed.

To adjust the non-conform material phase, you must first adjust the non-conformed material.
<6.2.11 Adjustment of non-conformed material>

6-85
L32

[Procedure]
Adjust the phase between the main spindle and back spindle.
(If C axis function is enabled, adjust the phase between the front C axis and the back C axis so that the 0° of front C axis
matches the 0° of back C axis.)
1. Put a material (non-conformed material) through the main spindle and back spindle.
2. Press the menu key [Phse adj].
The Non-conform material phase adjustment screen appears.
3. In Operation Select field, select "Phse adj between m sp and b sp". Press the numeric key "1" and then Input key
.
When "Phse adj between m sp and b sp" is selected for Operation Select field, the cursor moves to "Back sp. chuck
does not close".

4. If you do not need to close the back spindle chuck during phase adjustment, press the Input key .
A check mark is placed in the "Back sp. chuck does not close" check box.
5. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
6. Press the menu key [Phse adj] and the Start button at the same time.
The Start button lamp lights, and phase adjustment between the main spindle and back spindle is executed. During
adjustment, the message "Executing non-conformed material phase adjustment" is displayed on the screen. Upon
completion of adjustment, the message "Completion of non-conformed material phase adjustment" appears on the
screen.

[Note]
If you take no action for 15 seconds after pressing the menu key [Phse adj], the Non-conform material phase adjustment
dialog box is closed automatically.

6-86
 L32

6.2.10 Adjustment
Move the tool holder to the position so that the guide bushing can be replaced smoothly. This section explains guide
bushing replacement on the screen. See <7.2 Mounting/Adjusting a Guide Bushing Device> and <7.4 Rearrangement of
Back Spindle Device> when you actually replace or adjust the guide bushing.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.

2. Press the menu key [ADJUST].

The adjustment screen is displayed.

3. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
4. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights, and the X1, Z1, and Z2 axes return to their respective return position.

The machine may move suddenly while the Start button lamp goes on.
Be sure to keep hands away from the machine while the lamp is going on.

6-87
L32

5. When operations are completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the screen changes to the Adjustment
Handle screen.

6. Press one of the Handle Magnification button , , or .

Larger numbers result in faster machine motions.
7. Return the Z1 axis in handle feed and perform replace or adjust the chuck and the guide bushing.
8. Press the Escape key to finish the operation.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• With the GBL-machine, performing adjustment does not move the Z1 axis.

6-88
 L32

6.2.11 Adjustment of non-conformed material

Adjust the zero point of non-conformed material by handle operation from outside of the machine.

To adjust the non-conform material phase, you must first adjust the non-conformed material.

[Procedure]
1. Insert the non-conformed material into the main spindle, and close the chuck.
2. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [Non-conf].
The Non-conf Adjust screen appears.
4. Select "Non-conformed material adjustment" for "Operation Select" field. Press the numeric key "1" and then
Input key .

5. Close all doors.

6. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button . The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and
the doors will lock.
7. Press the menu key [Non-conf] and the Start button simultaneously.
The Start button lamp lights, the main chuck closes, and the main spindle enters into the C-axis mode.
* The main chuck closes if it is open at the execution of adjustment. You need to confirm the position of material
before starting adjustment.
8. The Non-conf Adjust Handle screen appears.

9. Press the Door open button to unlock the door.

6-89
L32

10. Set the dial gauge to the gang tool post.

11. Select "C1 Shift Angle" on the Non-conf Adjust Handle screen. When you turn the handle, the non-conformed
material rotates.
12. When you select "X1 POS." and "Y1 POS." on the Non-conf Adjust Handle screen and turn the handle, the dial
gauge mounted on the gang tool post moves. Measure the run-out of the material, and define the zero point of
material surface.
Moving the cursor to "Z1 POS." and turning the handle can move the material forward or backward.
13. When the material surface is adjusted to the zero point, move the cursor to "C1 Shift Angle" and press the Input
key.

14. When finished, press the Escape key to close the window.

[Note]
If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.

6-90
 L32

6.2.12 Exciting Guide Bushing

Excite the guide bushing to secure it.
Adjustment of clearance between the guide bushing and the material can be performed without using the adjustable pin
wrench.
[Procedure]
1. Retract the Z1 axis by handle feed.
2. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [GB Excite].
4. Close all doors.
5. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button . The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and
the doors will lock.
6. Press the Start button .
The guide bushing is excited.
During exciting, a message "Exciting GB" is displayed.

[Note]
• To open the door, set the Setting switch key to the " " position, and press the Door open button . If this
switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited while the door is open.
• Exciting GB is disabled while the door is open. Lock the door before starting exciting GB.
• The door lock cannot be released unless the following conditions are met.
All spindles have stopped.
The machine is not operating.
The coolant is not discharged.
• To cancel excitation, move to any other screen, select any other operation menu, or press the menu key [GB Excite]
again.
• Exciting GB cannot be canceled by pressing the Reset key.
• A caution screen is displayed while the message "Exciting GB" is displayed.

6-91
L32

6.3 On-machine Program Check

Actually operate the machine in the forwards and backward directions to check for machine interference, and if any
problems are found the program can be corrected on the spot. Switching between 1 cycle operation, 1 block operation,
and handle operation can be done during operation. Backward running is also possible during the handle feed mode.

If you want to perform actual thread cutting or tapping in on-machine program check mode, be sure to
press the menu key [Act. Cut] before starting operation. Pressing the menu key [Act. Cut] during operation
does not enable the function. The accurate shape will not be displayed if [Act. Cut] is disabled.

6.3.1 Program check for 1-cycle operation

The program is executed for one cycle in the automatic operation mode.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Select the program to be executed.
See <6.1.1 Selecting an execution program>.
3. Press the menu key [ST POS].
See <6.2.3 Start position>.
4. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
5. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the start position operation is started. During machine operation the message
"Moving to start position" appears. When operation is completed the Start button lamp turns off and the message
changes to "Moving to start position completed.".

6. Press the Program Check key .

The Program Check key lamp lights and the On-Machine Check screen appears.
7. Press the menu key [1 Cycle]. Check that the menu key [Handle] is not pressed.
If [Handle] is pressed, press the menu key [Handle] to cancel its selection.
8. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
9. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the program will be executed.

[Note]
• Reverse operations can be performed only when the menu key [Handle] is being pressed.
• The "1 Block" operation cannot be performed in the reverse operation.
• Switching between [1 Cycle], [1 Block], and [Handle] can be done during program execution.
• To open the door, set the Setting switch key to the " " position, and press the Door open button . If this
key is set to the " " position, the door cannot be opened.
To make readjustments, press the Reset key and start over from the operations ready start point.

• The door lock cannot be released unless the following conditions are met.
All spindles have stopped.
All servo axes have stopped.
The machine is not operating.
The coolant is not discharged.

6-92
 L32

6.3.2 Program check for 1-block operation

Press the Start button to have the program execute for 1 block and then stop.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key . The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.

2. Select the program to be executed.

See <6.1.1 Selecting an execution program>.
3. Press the menu key [ST POS].
See <6.2.3 Start position>.
4. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
5. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the start position operation is started. During machine operation the message
"Moving to start position" appears. When operation is completed the Start button lamp turns off and the message
changes to "Moving to start position completed.".

6. Press the Program Check key .

The Program Check key lamp lights and the On-Machine Check screen appears.
7. Press the menu key [1 Block]. Check that the menu key [Handle] is not pressed.
If [Handle] is pressed, press the menu key [Handle] to cancel its selection.
8. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
9. Press the Start button . The Start button lamp lights. After one block of the program is executed, the lamp
blinks on and off.

[Note]
• Reverse operations can be performed only when the menu key [Handle] is being pressed.
• The "1 Block" operation cannot be performed in the reverse operation.
• Switching between [1 Cycle], [1 Block], and [Handle] can be done during program execution.
• To open the door, set the Setting switch key to the " " position, and press the Door open button . If this
key is set to the " " position, the door cannot be opened.
To make readjustments, press the Reset key and start over from the operations ready start point.

• The door lock cannot be released unless the following conditions are met.
All spindles have stopped.
All servo axes have stopped.
The machine is not operating.
The coolant is not discharged.

6-93
L32

6.3.3 On-machine program check by handle feed

The operation can be automatically switched from forward action to backward running by turning the handle in either
the forward or backward direction. This can be done to check for interference, etc.
1-cycle handle operation
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Select the program to be executed.
See <6.1.1 Selecting an execution program>.
3. Press the menu key [ST POS].
See <6.2.3 Start position>.
4. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
5. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the start position operation is started. During machine operation the message
"Moving to start position" appears. When operation is completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the message
changes to "Moving to start position completed."

6. Press the Program Check key .

The Program Check key lamp lights and the On-Machine Check screen appears.
7. Press the menu key [1 Cycle]. Check that the menu key [Handle] has been pressed.
If [Handle] is not pressed, press the menu key [Handle] to select it.
8. Press one of the Handle Magnification button , , or .
The larger the number the faster the machine will move.
9. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
10. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights.
11. Turn the handle clockwise, and the program is executed in proportion to the amount of rotation of the handle. (The
programmed feed rate is not exceeded.) To check machine operation carefully, turn the handle slowly or set the
Handle Magnification button to a lower value.
12. Stop the handle.
The program will stop. The Start button lamp remains lit.
13. Turn the handle counterclockwise. The program is executed in the backward direction in proportion to the amount
the handle is turned.

6-94
 L32

1-block handle operation

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Select the program to be executed.
See <6.1.1 Selecting an execution program>.
3. Press the menu key [ST POS].
See <6.2.3 Start position>.
4. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
5. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the start position operation is started. During machine operation the message
"Moving to start position" appears. When operation is completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the message
changes to "Moving to start position completed."

6. Press the Program Check key .

The Program Check key lamp lights and the On-Machine Check screen appears.
7. Press the menu key [1 Block]. Check that the menu key [Handle] has been pressed.
If [Handle] is not pressed, press the menu key [Handle] to select it.
8. Press one of the Handle Magnification button , , or .
The larger the number the faster the machine will move.
9. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
10. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights.
11. Turn the handle clockwise, and the program is executed in proportion to the amount of rotation of the handle. (The
programmed feed rate is not exceeded.) To check machine operation carefully, turn the handle slowly or set the
Handle Magnification button to a lower value.
12. Stop the handle.
The program will stop. The Start button lamp remains lit.
13. Turn the handle counterclockwise. The program is executed in the backward direction in proportion to the amount
the handle is turned.
14. Turn the handle clockwise. The program is executed in the forward direction in proportion to the amount the
handle is turned.
When the operation is finished, the Start button lamp turns off.

6-95
L32

While executing the on-machine program check by pressing the menu key [Handle], the machine does not
move unless the handle is turned. However, never put your hands in the machine during on-machine
program check operation since the machine can suddenly move if the handle is turned by mistake and you
could suffer serious injury.
During on-machine program check, although feed rate of axes is determined according to the rate of
handle turning, the spindles rotate at the speed specified in the program, so the cutting conditions differ
from those assumed in programming. Therefore, if a workpiece is actually cut, pay sufficient care to the
feed rate. Cutting under inappropriate conditions could cause the material or the tool to be broken.

[Note]
• Backward running is inhibited for the M code, T code, and G code macros.
• Backward running can be specified for M codes and S codes other than the above, but will not be executed.
• You can use the on-machine program check function in the handle operation or automatic operation. When
performing actual thread cutting or tapping, press the menu key [Act. Cut] before starting operation. Pressing the
menu key [Act. Cut] during operation does not enable the function. With the menu key [Act. Cut] being pressed, the
machine stops just before the tread cutting or tapping command. Press the Start button again. Override
function is disabled while executing thread cutting or tapping (100%).
• Chamfering of the thread cutting is not performed in the on-machine program check function.
• Cycle start remains disabled with any door left open.
• To open the door, set the Setting switch key to the " " position, and press the Door open button . If this
key is set to the " " position, the door cannot be opened.
To make readjustments, press the Reset key and start over from the operations ready start point.

• The door lock cannot be released unless the following conditions are met.
All spindles have stopped.
All servo axes have stopped.
The machine is not operating.
The coolant is not discharged.

6-96
 L32

6.3.4 Editing a program being executed

This edit function corrects a program being executed by the on-machine program check function in the automatic
operation. Use the edit function if a program error is likely to cause interference.
For the sake of safety, do not machine a workpiece when using the edit function.
[Procedure]
1. Perform operation with the on-machine program check function.
See <6.3.1 Program check for 1-cycle operation>
The check function is implemented during one cycle.
2. Press the [1 Block] menu key.
When a block stop is executed, the program stops, and the Start button lamp turns off.
When one of the programs of two axis control groups enters the "block stop" state, the programs of the other axis
control group enters the "hold" state during execution.
"BST" is displayed as the operation status of the axis control group in the block stop state. "HLD" is displayed for
the other axis control group in the hold state. The cursor of that axis control group is reversed just as when its
program is being executed.
Make sure that the program of the axis control group you want to edit is in the block stop status.
3. When the axis control group program you want to edit enters the block stop state, do the operation in step 4.
If the axis control group program you want to edit is in the hold state, press the Start button again to run the
program one block forward. The program enters the block stop state.
4. Press the [Correct] menu key.
The On-Machine Check (Edit) screen appears. (The menu key also change.)

5. Edit the program.

6. Press the [Operat.] menu key at completion of editing.
The On-Machine Check screen appears. (The menu key also change.)
7. Make sure that all doors are closed before pressing the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.

6-97
L32

8. Press the Start button .

The Start button lamp lights and the program execution restarts.

[Note]
Program can be edited only for the axis control group stopped in the block stop state. To edit the program, the memory
area must have at least 500 characters of free area. (Editing is possible only for the axis control group for which "BST"
is displayed at the lower left area of the screen.)
Remember that, however, the program in external memory cannot be edited.

6-98
 L32

6.3.5 Editing an executed program by backward running

Use this edit function when you want to change an executed block in a program. To edit the block, operate the machining
program backward to a block preceding the block.
[Procedure]
1. Perform operation with the on-machine program check function.
See <6.3.3 On-machine program check by handle feed>.
Execute the on-machine program check function with [Handle] and [1 Cycle] selected.
2. Turn the handle counterclockwise to run the program backward.
Stop the handle when reaching a block preceding the block to be edited in the program.
3. Press the menu key [1 Block].
4. Turn the handle clockwise to run the program forward.
When one of the programs of two axis control groups enters the "block stop" state, the programs of the other axis
control group enters the "hold" state during execution.
5. When the axis control group program you want to edit enters the block stop state, do the operation in step 6.
If the axis control group program you want to edit is in the hold state, press the Start button again, then turn
the handle clockwise to run the program one block forward. The program enters the block stop state.
6. Press the menu key [Correct].
The On-Machine Check (Edit) screen appears. If the On-Machine Check (Edit) screen is not displayed, run the
program backward several blocks to edit the program.
7. Edit the program.
8. Press the menu key [Operat.] at completion of editing.
The On-Machine Check screen appears.
9. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
10. Press the Start button . Turn the handle clockwise.
The Start button lamp lights and the program execution restarts.

6-99
L32

[Note]
• Up to ten blocks (blocks which axes move) can be run backward.
You can execute the program forward/backward freely within this range. However, when either of the machining
programs of two axis control groups reaches the last of the blocks with which backward running is permitted, the
program of the other axis control group can no longer run backward.
• The Axis Motion lamp flashes during backward running. When the program reaches the last of the blocks with
which backward running is permitted, backward running is stopped, and the Axis Motion lamp turns off.

Do not put your hand into the machine while the Axis Motion lamp is flashing. Doing so could result in
serious personal injury. The machine appears to be in the stopped state, but it is in the operation mode for
backward running.

• When you run a program backward to edit it or operate 1-block operation, the two axis control groups may become
asynchronous with each other. To maintain the synchronous status, make the final program check by running the
program forward or executing automatic operation.
• When you edit a block of the program after running it backward, there are cases the program must be run backward
at least five blocks, from the backward running start block, to enable editing.
• Cycle start remains disabled with any door left open.

Even in the block with which backward running is inhibited, the program can run backward for the axis
control group to which the backward running is permitted. In the case, an axis move forward and another
axis move backward, and these axes may interfere each other. Therefore, the operation for avoiding an
interference may be required.

• To open the door, set the Setting switch key to the " " position, and press the Door open button . If this
key is set to the " " position, the door cannot be opened.
To make readjustments, press the Reset key and start over from the operations ready start point.

• The door lock cannot be released unless the following conditions are met.
All spindles have stopped.
All servo axes have stopped.
The machine is not operating.
The coolant is not discharged.

6-100
 L32

6.3.6 High-speed program check

This function is used to check a program at a high speed for detecting programming errors and other problems. If the
machine coordinates of the X1, Z1 and Y1 axes differ between the program start and end positions, the function displays
an alarm message.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key . The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.

2. Select the program to be executed.

See <6.1.1 Selecting an execution program>.
3. Press the menu key [ST POS]. See <6.2.3 Start position>.
4. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
5. Press the Start button . The Start button lamp lights and the start position operation is started. During machine
operation the message "Moving to start position" appears. When operation is completed the Start button lamp turns
off and the message changes to "Moving to start position completed.".

6. Press the Program Check key . The Program Check key lamp lights and the On-Machine Check screen
appears.
7. Press the menu key [HISPCHCK]. The High Speed Prg Check screen appears.

8. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
9. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the program will be executed.

[Note]
• Use the 1-cycle time (rough estimate) as an approximate time.
• The high-speed program check operation is executed about five times faster than the actual machining time.
• Be sure to perform start position operation in preparation mode before high-speed program check operation. If you
have cancelled high-speed program check operation due to an alarm, you must also perform start position operation.
6.3.7 Block skip
The block skip function can be used during program execution to ignore blocks which include a slash ("/") at the
beginning of the block.
[Procedure]
1. Press the menu key [Skip 1].
The menu key [Skip 1] enters the selected state and the block skip function is turned on.
At the same time, the Skip lamp on the operation panel lights.

6-101
L32

6.3.8 Optional stop

The optional stop function suspends execution of the program of the control axis group for which the "M1" block is
executed. When the execution of the program is suspended in the optional block stop state, the Start button lamp blinks
on and off.
Pressing the Start button restarts the automatic operation.
[Procedure]
1. Press the menu key [Op.Stop].
The menu key [Op.Stop] enters the selected state and the optional stop function is turned on. At the same time, the
Optional stop lamp on the operation panel lights.

6.3.9 Override
The same override (percentage) is valid for the feed rate, rapid feed rate, and dwell time.
[Procedure]
1. Set the Feed rate override dial at an appropriate position.
100% The machine operates at the feed rate specified by the program.
0% The machine does not operate.
200% The machine operates twice as fast as the feed rate specified by the program.

[Note]
When machining is performed using the two axis control groups, setting the override more than 100% causes the feed
rate to exceed the maximum rapid feed and the speed is clamped. The speed clamp may cause the machining timing to
shift, and the product may not be manufactured as it should be with the machining program being used. Therefore, the
feed rate override is normally effective up to 100%. If 100% to 200% is specified, 100% will be set as the override.
If the machining involve the possible speed clamp, you can make the feed rate override effective up to 200% by setting
Turn on the Override No Limit switch (Item 15) from the Set SW screen See <6.8.6 Setting switches>. When the
Override No Limit setting is set to ON, you can set the override of the cutting speed to up to 200%. The rapid feed
commanded between 100% and 200% override will be assumed as 100%.

6.3.10 Disconnect Bar Loader (BL DIS)

If Disconnect Bar Loader function is enabled, the power status of the bar loader will not be checked.
[Procedure]
1. Press the menu key [BL DIS].
The menu key [BL DIS] enters the selected state and the Disconnect Bar Loader function is turned on.

6.3.11 Coolant Flow Rate Detector

On the right bottom corner of the Screen, the status of coolant flow rate sensor (Enabled or Disabled) is displayed.

[Note]
The procedures to perform Block skip, Optional stop, Override, Load/unload bar feeder, and Coolant flow rate detection
device on Automatic Operation screen are same as on the On-machine Program Check screen.

6-102
 L32

6.3.12 Disconnecting the bar loader

Displayed when "Loader device" in the Machine Structure screen is selected. If the Disconnect Bar Loader function is
enabled, the signals of external bar loaders will not be checked.
[Procedure]
1. Press the [BL DIS] menu key.
The [BL DIS] menu key enters the selected state and the Disconnect Bar Loader function is turned on.

6-103
L32

6.4 Automatic Operation

Automatic operation is used to execute a selected program to perform machining operation. There are three functions
available in automatic mode, they are continuous automatic operation, one cycle automatic operation and one block
automatic operation.
[Procedure]
1. Press the menu key [Cont.], [1 Cycle] or [1 Block] on the Automatic Operation screen.
The automatic operation mode corresponding to the key pressed is selected.
Pressing [Last PRT] executes the last program.

[Note]
You can switch the automatic mode ([Cont.], [1Cycle] or [1 Block]) during program execution. For example, you can
change the mode to the one cycle automatic operation during execution of continuous automatic operation and stop the
operation after completing one cycle operation.

6.4.1 Continuous automatic operation

The continuous automatic operation executes the program repeatedly and continuously.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Select the program to be executed.
See <6.1.1 Selecting an execution program>.
3. Press the menu key [ST POS].
See <6.2.3 Start position>.
4. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
5. Press the Start button . The Start button lamp lights and the start position operation is started. During machine
operation the message "Moving to start position" appears. When operation is completed the Start button lamp turns
off and the message changes to "Moving to start position completed.".

6. Press the Automatic Operation key .

The Automatic Operation key lamp lights and the Automatic Operation screen appears.
7. Press the menu key [Cont.].
8. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
9. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the program will be executed.

[Note]
• When a program is called, the machining data associated with the called program is also automatically called up.
After the program is selected, be sure to check the machining data.
• To open the door, set the Setting switch key to the " " position, and press the Door open button . If this
key is set to the " " position, the door cannot be opened.
To make readjustments, press the Reset key and start over from the operations ready start point.

• The door lock cannot be released unless the following conditions are met.
All spindles have stopped.
All servo axes have stopped.
The machine is not operating.
The coolant is not discharged.

6-104
 L32

6.4.2 One cycle automatic operation

The one cycle automatic operation executes the program to the end of one cycle.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key . The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.

2. Select the program to be executed. See <6.1.1 Selecting an execution program>.

3. Press the menu key [ST POS]. See <6.2.3 Start position>.
4. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
5. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the start position operation is started. During machine operation the message
"Moving to start position" appears. When operation is completed the Start button lamp turns off and the message
changes to "Moving to start position completed.".

6. Press the Automatic Operation key . The Automatic Operation key lamp lights and the Automatic Operation
screen appears.
7. Press the menu key [1 Cycle].
8. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
9. Press the Start button . The Start button lamp lights and the program will be executed.

[Note]
• When a program is called, the machining data associated with the called program is also automatically called up.
After the program is selected, be sure to check the machining data.
• Cycle start remains disabled with any door left open.
• Pressing the menu key [Last PRT] in the one-cycle operation mode executes the last program (back machining) to
complete one cycle.
• To open the door, set the Setting switch key to the " " position, and press the Door open button . If this
key is set to the " " position, the door cannot be opened.
To make readjustments, press the Reset key and start over from the operations ready start point.

• The door lock cannot be released unless the following conditions are met.
All spindles have stopped.
All servo axes have stopped.
The machine is not operating.
The coolant is not discharged.

6-105
L32

6.4.3 One block automatic operation

The one block automatic operation executes only one block of the execution program.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key . The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.

2. Select the program to be executed. See <6.1.1 Selecting an execution program>.

3. Press the menu key [ST POS]. See <6.2.3 Start position>.
4. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
5. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the start position operation is started. During machine operation the message
"Moving to start position" appears. When operation is completed the Start button lamp turns off and the message
changes to "Moving to start position completed.".

6. Press the Automatic Operation key . The Automatic Operation key lamp lights and the Automatic Operation
screen appears.
7. Press the menu key [1 Block].
8. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
9. Press the Start button . After one block of the program is executed, the lamp turns off.
10. Press the Start button . The Start button lamp lights, and the next block or the program is executed.

[Note]
• When a program is called, the machining data associated with the called program is also automatically called up.
After the program is selected, be sure to check the machining data.
• Cycle start remains disabled with any door left open.
• One block operation may not be executed depending on the G code used. (See <Programmer's Manual>.)
• To open the door, set the Setting switch key to the " " position, and press the Door open button . If this
key is set to the " " position, the door cannot be opened.
• To make readjustments, press the Reset key and start over from the operations ready start point.

• The door lock cannot be released unless the following conditions are met.
All spindles have stopped.
All servo axes have stopped.
The machine is not operating.
The coolant is not discharged.

6-106
 L32

6.4.4 Hold and restart the automatic operation

You can suspend the program being executed by pressing the Hold button .
The program will be resumed by pressing the Start button .
To suspend the program
[Procedure]
1. Press the Hold button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, the door lock is released the Hold button lamp lights, and the
machine stops.
To restart the machine after a hold
[Procedure]
1. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
2. Press the Start button .
The Hold button lamp turns off, the Start button lamp lights, and the machine resumes execution of the
program.

Do not put your hand or any other part of your body into the machine during automatic operation. Even
when automatic operation is being paused, the spindle remains rotating, involving a potential risk of
causing a fatal or severe injury.

[Note]
• For procedures to perform Block skip, Optional stop, Override, Load/unload bar feeder, and Coolant flow rate
detection device, see "On-machine Program Check".
• To open the door, set the Setting switch key to the " " position, and press the Door open button . If this
key is set to the " " position, the door cannot be opened.
To make readjustments, press the Reset key and start over from the operations ready start point.

• The door lock cannot be released unless the following conditions are met.
All spindles have stopped.
All servo axes have stopped.
The machine is not operating.
The coolant is not discharged.

6-107
L32

6.5 Position Data Screen

The Position Data screen shows the position information of command specified axes.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key . The submenus are enabled.
2. Press the menu key [POS Data].
The Position Data screen appears.
Item Description
$1 Indicates an axis control group.
$2
MC COORD Machine coordinate value of each axis.
WRK COORD Work coordinate value of each axis.
Dis to Go Move distance of each axis required for next command execution.
$1: T Shows a T-code command value and offset number.
$2: T

6-108
 L32

6.6 Modal Information Screen

This screen displays the G modal information.
The Modal Information screen is accessed from the Automatic Operation, On-Machine Check, and MDI screen.

[Procedure]
1. Press the MDI key , Program Check key , or Automatic Operation key .
The pressed key lamp lights and the screen changes accordingly.
2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [Modal] is displayed.
The Modal Information screen appears.
Item Description
$1 Indicates an axis control group.
$2
G Displays the G modal every axis control group.
N Displays the program sequence number every axis control group.
FC Displays the feed rate every axis control group.
M: Displays up to two G modals every axis control group.
(O, N) Displays the program and sequence numbers of the subprogram every axis control group.
Load value Indicates the load value for the spindle and tool spindle with the meter.
▲ represents the maximum value.

6-109
L32

6.7 Manual operation

Manual operation is used for individually operating each axis of the machine as required. There are two functions to
move the machine by handle or MDI in manual mode.

6.7.1 Handle feed

The handle (manual pulse generator) is provided for manual operation. You can move a selected control axis to an
arbitrary position at an arbitrary feed rate by turning the handle.
The selected control axis can be moved into three directions: the direction in which the selected tool cuts into the
workpiece (X1, X2), the direction of the core height (Y1), and the longitudinal direction (Z1, Z2).

Described below are operation procedures when the Setting switch key is set to " ".
If you are going to work inside the machine, press the Door open button to unlock the door.
The door cannot be unlocked unless the following conditions are met.
• All spindles have stopped.
• All servo axes have stopped.
• The machine is not operating.
• The coolant is not discharged.
• The Door open button is pressed.

6-110
 L32

[Procedure]
1. Press the Manual key .
The Manual key lamp lights and the Handle Feed screen is displayed.

2. Use the Arrow keys to select the control axis you want to feed.
The name portion of the selected control axis will be displayed in yellow.
3. Press one of the Handle Magnification button , , or .
The Handle Magnification button lamp goes on. The larger the number the faster the machine will move.
4. Turn the handle.
The feed direction is determine by the direction the handle is turned.
If a feed instruction that exceeds the stored stroke limit is issued, the overrun alarm "M01 Operation error 0007"
will be generated.
See <6.8.2 Recovering from overrun status>.

[Note]
To confirm the position (coordinate) of the workpiece that is moving, select the menu key [POS Data] to open the
sub-window.
If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.

6-111
L32

6.7.2 Manual data input (MDI)

You can create or execute a program in MDI operation mode in the same way as a usual program.
The MDI operation has two execution patterns: "1 block" and "all blocks".

[Note]
Only an MDI program that fits into a screen can be created.

6.7.2.1 Selecting the axis control group for MDI operation

[Procedure]
1. Press the MDI key .
The MDI key lamp lights and the MDI screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [$-Select] to display the program input screen for $1 or $2.

6.7.2.2 Executing MDI operation

1 Block
The program can be executed 1 block at a time.
[Procedure]
1. Press the MDI key .
The MDI key lamp lights and the MDI screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [$-Select] to display the program input screen for $1 or $2.
3. Enter a program and press the Input key .
The message "Set COMP" is displayed.
4. Press the menu key [1 Block].
5. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.

6-112
 L32

6. Press the Start button .

The Start button lamp lights and the one block of the specified program is executed.
The execution cursor will move to that block. While the program is executing the message "Executing" is
displayed.
After the one block is executed, The Start button lamp turns off.
If you are going to open the door, press the Door open button to unlock the door.
If door lock release conditions are not met, door locks will not be released.

7. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
8. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the next one block is executed. The execution cursor will move to that block.
While the program is executing the message " Executing" is displayed.
After the one block is executed, The Start button lamp turns off.
If you are going to open the door, press the Door open button to unlock the door.
If door lock release conditions are not met, door locks will not be released.

[Note]
• 1 block operation cannot be performed for T code, M code, or G code macros.
The Start button must be pressed several times until the execution of 1 block is completed.

• To open the door, set the Setting switch key to the " " position, and press the Door open button . If this
key is set to the " " position, the door cannot be opened.
To make readjustments, press the Reset key and start over from the operations ready start point.

• The door lock cannot be released unless the following conditions are met.
All spindles have stopped.
All servo axes have stopped.
The machine is not operating.
The coolant is not discharged.

6-113
L32

All blocks
The programs of all the blocks can be executed at a time.
[Procedure]
1. Press the MDI key . The MDI key lamp lights and the MDI screen appears.

2. Press the menu key [$-Select] to display the program input screen for $1 or $2.
3. Enter the program. The message "Editing ... " appears.
4. Press the Input key . The message "Set COMP" is displayed.

5. Press the menu key [All Block].

6. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
7. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the MDI program for all blocks are executed.
While the program is executing the message " Executing" is displayed.
After all blocks are executed, The Start button lamp turns off.
If you are going to open the door, press the Door open button to unlock the door.
If door lock release conditions are not met, door locks will not be released.

[Note]
• Cycle start remains disabled with any door left open.
• To open the door, set the Setting switch key to the " " position, and press the Door open button . If this
key is set to the " " position, the door cannot be opened.
To make readjustments, press the Reset key and start over from the operations ready start point.

• The door lock cannot be released unless the following conditions are met.
All spindles have stopped.
All servo axes have stopped.
The machine is not operating.
The coolant is not discharged.

6-114
 L32

6.7.2.3 Editing MDI program

You can edit MDI programs as described below.
Any change you made to the MDI program is confirmed by pressing the Input key . If you switch to another screen
before pressing the Input key, the edit processing is canceled.

(1) Insert mode and overwrite mode switching

[Procedure]
1. Press the Insert key .
Each time the Insert key is pressed, the mode is switched as insert → overwrite → insert. The mode is also
switched to the insert mode if the Input key is pressed in the overwrite mode.
When a switch is made the corresponding mode "INS" or "OVR" message is displayed on the lower right of the
screen.

(2) Entering a character

[Procedure]
1. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the position where you
want to enter a character.
2. Enter a character using the alphanumeric keys.
Example: To type "C" after "AB":
1. Move the cursor to the right side of "B".

2. Press the C key to type "C".

(3) Replacing a character

[Procedure]
1. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor over the character to be
edited.
2. Enter a character using the alphanumeric keys.
The original character will be overwritten.
Example: To change "ABC" to "ABD":
1. Move the cursor before "C".

2. Press the Insert key .

(Make sure that the status display field at the lower right corner of the screen indicates "OVR".)
3. Press the D key to type "D".

6-115
L32

(4) Inserting a character

[Procedure]
1. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the position where you
want to insert a character.
2. Insert additional character using the alphanumeric key. The characters will be inserted.
Example: To type in "D" between "B" and "C" of "ABC":
1. Move the cursor between "B" and "C".

2. Press the Insert key .

(Make sure that the status display field at the lower right corner of the screen indicates "INS".)
3. Press the D key to type "D".

(5) Deleting a character

• Deleting a character after the cursor position
[Procedure]
1. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the left side of character
to be deleted.
2. Press the Delete key . The character after the cursor position will be deleted.
Example: To delete "B" from a previously entered "ABC":
1. Move the cursor before "B".

2. Press the Delete key .

• Deleting the character in front of the cursor

[Procedure]
1. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the right side of
character to be delete.
2. Press the Backspace key . The character in front of the cursor will be deleted.
Example: To delete "B" from a previously entered "ABC":
1. Move the cursor after "B".

2. Press the Backspace key .

6-116
 L32

(6) Deleting a line

[Procedure]
1. Move the cursor to the block to be deleted using the Arrow keys and the Tab keys .

2. Press the Line deletion key .

The character string in the block located by the cursor is deleted.
Example: To delete "DEF;" in the "ABC;DEF;":
1. Move the cursor to the block to be deleted.

2. Press the Line deletion key .

[Note]
If the block where the cursor is positioned does not fit in the display screen, deletion is not possible.

(7) Cleaning a screen

[Procedure]
1. When the screen to be deleted is displayed, press the Shift key and the Line deletion key .
All blocks on the screen will be cleared.
Example: Delete a screen displaying multiple program blocks.

1. Press the Shift key and the Line deletion key .

[Note]
The block that does not fit in the display screen cannot be deleted.

6-117
L32

6.8 Maintenance
6.8.1 Zero return
This section provides instructions for the zero return of each axis. Normally, there is no need to perform the zero return.
The zero return must be performed only when the zero return alarm is issued.
[Procedure]
Zero return for the specified axis only

1. Press the Parameter key .

2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [ZP EXE] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [ZP EXE].
The Zero Return screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [Indvdal].
5. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the axis for which zero return will be performed.

Press the Input key .

The axis with check mark is selected.
Pressing the Input key again to cancel the selection.
Several axes can be selected at one time.
6. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
7. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the zero return operations for the selected axes are performed.
The message "Executing Zero Returning" appears in the operation status field for the axis during zero return, and
the message "Completed Zero Return" appears for axes for which zero return is completed.
8. The Start button lamp goes off at the completion of zero return of the selected axis.

6-118
 L32

[Procedure]
Zero return for all axes

1. Press the Parameter key .

2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [ZP EXE] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [ZP EXE].
The Zero Return screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [All axes].
5. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
6. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the zero return operations for all axes are performed.
The message "Executing Zero Returning" appears in the operation status field for the axis during zero return, and
the message "Completed Zero Return" appears for axes for which zero return is completed.

[Note]
• Zero Point Returning Procedure is not required in a daily operation. It is required only when the zero point return
request is issued or when the motor is replaced.
• When All Axes Zero Return is specified, first Z1, X1, and Z2 axes return to zero point. After X1 axis has returned to
zero point, Y1 axis starts to return to zero point. After Z2 axis has returned to zero point, X2 axis starts to return to
zero point.

6-119
L32

6.8.2 Recovering from overrun status

If you specify a position which exceeds the stored stroke limit (permitted operating range) of each axis, the machine will
display the overrun alarm message.
If this happens, use the following procedure to clear the overrun alarm.
[Procedure]
1. Any overrun alarm will flash the Caution lamp (yellow) and automatically displays a Message screen.
Confirm the overrun axis in the message.
If the Message screen is not displayed, press the Menu Up/Down selection key .
The submenus are enabled.
Press the menu key [Message] to display the Message window.

2. Press the Manual key .

The Handle Feed screen appears.
3. Use the Arrow keys to select the control axis that is over running.
The axis name field of the selected control axis will be reverse displayed in yellow.
4. Press one of the Handle Magnification button , , or .
The Handle Magnification button lamp goes on.
Larger numbers result in faster machine motions.
5. For the control axis that is over running, turn the handle in the overrun cancel direction.
When the overrun is canceled the yellow light (alarm) will turn off.

6-120
 L32

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If doors are opened while set to disallowed, " ", the servos will turn off and
an alarm will be generated.

• Handle feed can be performed using the menu key [MECH ADJ] instead of Handle key .

Press the Parameter key and then press the menu key [MECH ADJ].
The Mechanism Adjustment screen appears. The operation method thereafter is the same as that for the Handle Feed
screen.
• The Message screen displays messages like those below when the overrun alarm occurs.
Overrun axis Message
$1 X1 axis M01 S/W STROKE END AXIS 0007 X1 $1
OPERATION ERROR
Z1 axis M01 S/W STROKE END AXIS 0007 Z1 $1
OPERATION ERROR
Y1 axis M01 S/W STROKE END AXIS 0007 Y1 $1
OPERATION ERROR
$2 X2 axis M01 S/W STROKE END AXIS 0007 X2 $2
OPERATION ERROR
Z2 axis M01 S/W STROKE END AXIS 0007 Z2 $2
OPERATION ERROR
Y2 axis M01 S/W STROKE END AXIS 0007 Y2 $2
OPERATION ERROR
$3 B1 axis M01 S/W STROKE END AXIS 0007 B1 $3
OPERATION ERROR
A3 axis S52 ISV: Software limit warning 98.1/ 0001
98.2
A4 axis S52 ISV: Software limit warning 98.1/ 0002
98.2
* The Y2 axis is available on type X and type XII only.
* The B1 axis is available on type IX and type XII only.
* A3 axis (motor-driven knock-out device), A4 axis (workpiece unloader) are options.

• Stored stroke limit values (machine value)

(mm)
Overrun axis –Limit +Limit
$1 X1 axis -0.5 124.5
Z1 axis -1.0 GB 325.5
GBL 429.5
Y1 axis -1.0 438.0 *4
$2 X2 axis -1.0 501.0
Z2 axis -1.0 378.0
Y2 axis -76.0 1.0
$3 B1 axis -46.0 *4 91.0
A3 axis -1.0 151.0
A4 axis -1.0 1320.0 (type Ⅷ/
Ⅸ)/1275.0 (type Ⅹ/Ⅻ)
*1
The numerical values are the radius value displays for all axes.
*2
The Y2 axis is available on type X and type XII only.
*3
The B1 axis is available on type IX and type XII only.
*4
The stored stroke limit for the Y1 and B1 axes may be limited depending on the tooling. For more information, see
<17. Tooling>.
*5
A3 axis (motor-driven knock-out device), A4 axis (workpiece unloader) are options.

6-121
L32

6.8.3 Counter set

The Counter screen is used for calculating the running time of a program executed in automatic operation mode and for
counting the number of finished workpieces.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Automatic Operation key .
The Automatic Operation screen appears.
2. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key .
The submenus are enabled.
3. Press the menu key [Counter].
The Counter screen appears.

4. Press the menu key [Cnt Set].

The Counter screen changes to a status that setting is enabled. (Fields that can be input become white.)

5. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the desired field.

6. Press the alphanumeric key.

Enter the data.
7. Press the Input key .
The entry data will be confirmed.
8. Press the menu key [Set Cmpl] to determine the entry data.

6-122
 L32

[Note]
• Required
When the number of workpieces already "Machined" matches the "Required" number of workpieces, an alarm is
raised to stop the machine. Press the Reset key to reset the alarm. If automatic power off function has been
turned on, the machine stops operation and the power supply is turned off.
The "Required" number of workpieces can be set up to 99,999,999.
If you set this item to "0", the counter does not count "Machined" workpieces.
If you want to change the value of "Required", clear the scheduled completion time (SCHD COMPL Time).
• Machined
The value of this item is incremented by one for each instance of M56 issued after machining of one workpiece.
When the value reaches the "Required" number of workpieces, an alarm is raised to stop the machine. Pressing the
Reset key clears only this item to "0".
The "Machined" number of workpieces can be set up to 99,999,999. If you want to change the value of "Machined",
clear the scheduled completion time (SCHD COMPL Time).
• Total Quantity
This item indicates the total number of workpieces machined. The value is incremented in response to M56.
The value is incremented to a maximum of 99,999,999 and returns to "0".
• Running Time
The automatic operation run time is added.
To clear counter data, set the counter you want to clear to zero.
• Current Time
If you want to change the value of "Current Time", clear the scheduled completion time (SCHD COMPL Time).
• Cumulative power-ON hours
Only "0" can be set.
• "Cycle Time", "Cutting Time" and "SCHD COMPL Time" can not be set. They are only displayed.
• The menu keys "Cnt Set" and "Set Cmpl" appear as the upper menu.
When "Cnt Set" is selected, "Set Cmpl" is displayed. When "Set Cmpl" is selected, "Cnt Set" is displayed.

6-123
L32

6.8.4 Setting and displaying the tool offset

When a tool offset number is specified by the tool command (T command), the machine makes compensation for the
total of tool nose wear and tool length. For each tool to be used, the tool nose wear is set in the offset data, and the tool
length is set in the tool data.
Both the Offset screen and the Tool Data screen consist of more than one page. If the screen does not display the data
number of the data you want to set or confirm, press the Page key and/or to display the data of the desired
number.

6.8.4.1 Setting the tool wear data

[Procedure]
Add (increment) the offset amount to the preset value

1. Press the Offset key .

The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [Offset].
The Offset screen appears.
3. If the "INC" is not displayed on the upper right corner of the screen, press the menu key [ABS/INC]. The "INC" is
reversed.
4. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the input field in which you want to
enter data.
5. Press the alphanumeric key. Enter the data.
6. Press the Input key .
The entered value is added.

6-124
 L32

[Procedure]
Input an absolute value

1. Press the Offset key .

The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [Offset].
The Offset screen appears.
3. If the "ABS" is not displayed on the upper right corner of the screen, press the menu key [ABS/INC].
The "ABS" is reversed.
4. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the input field in which you want to
enter data.
5. Press the alphanumeric key.
Enter the data.
6. Press the Input key .
The message "Entered data will be set. Are you sure?" is displayed together with the menu keys [Yes] and [No].
7. Press the menu key [Yes].
The data is overwritten.

6-125
L32

6.8.4.2 Setting the tool data

[Procedure]
Add (increment) the offset amount to the preset value

1. Press the Offset key .

The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [T-Data].
The Tool Data screen appears.
3. If the "INC" is not displayed on the upper right corner of the screen, press the menu key [ABS/INC].
The "INC" is reversed.
4. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the input field in which you want to
enter data.
5. Press the alphanumeric key.
Enter the data.
6. Press the Input key .
The entered value is added.

6-126
 L32

[Procedure]
Input an absolute value

1. Press the Offset key .

The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [T-Data].
The Tool Data screen appears.
3. If the "ABS" is not displayed on the upper right corner of the screen, press the menu key [ABS/INC].
The "ABS" is reversed.
4. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the input field in which you want to
enter data.
5. Press the alphanumeric key.
Enter the data.
6. Press the Input key .
The message "Entered data will be set. Are you sure?" is displayed together with the menu keys [Yes] and [No].
7. Press the menu key [Yes].
The data is overwritten.

6-127
L32

6.8.4.3 Setting the tool nose radius

If the tool nose is rounded, there will be a slight difference between the programmed shape and actual cutting shape. You
can perform an automatic correction of the tool nose radius by setting the tool nose radius correction.
[Procedure]
Set the data in the R and P fields using the same procedure as setting the offset and tool data. See <6.8.4.1 Setting the
tool wear data>, <6.8.4.2 Setting the tool data>.

6.8.4.4 Clearing all screen data

Use the following procedure to clear all data displayed on a screen at a time.
[Procedure]
1. Display the screen for which all of the displayed data is to be cleared.
2. Press the Shift key and the Line deletion key .
The message "Is it eliminated? Yes/No" is displayed together with the menu keys [Yes] and [No].
3. Press the menu key [Yes].
All the data is cleared to 0.

[Note]
• The all clear function is enabled with only a screen. Executing this function does not affect data in the other pages.
• When the menu key [UNDO] is displayed, operation can be returned by one step to the previous operation.

6-128
 L32

6.8.5 Mechanism adjustment

You can move a selected control axis to an arbitrary position on machine coordinate system by turning the handle
(manual pulse generator).
[Procedure]
1. Press the Parameter key .

2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [MECH ADJ] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [MECH ADJ]. The Mechanism Adjustment screen appears.

4. Use the Arrow keys to select the control axis you want to feed.
The name portion of the selected control axis will be displayed in yellow.
5. Press one of the Handle Magnification button , , or .
The Handle Magnification button lamp goes on. The larger the number the faster the machine will move.
6. Turn the handle.
The feed direction is determined by the direction the handle is turned.
If a feed instruction that exceeds the stored stroke limit is issued, the overrun alarm "M01 Operation error 0007"
will be generated. See <6.8.2 Recovering from overrun status>.

[Note]
To confirm the position (coordinate) of the workpiece that is moving, select the menu key [POS Data] to open the
sub-window.
If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.

6-129
L32

6.8.6 Setting switches

Switches are provided with various control signals for NC operation. You can set the switches to on or off.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key . The submenus are enabled.
2. Press the [Set SW] menu key.
The Set SW screen appears.
3. Move the cursor to the item (switch) to be set using the Arrow keys , the Tab keys , and/or the

Page keys .

4. Press the Input key .

If the selected switch is ON, the switch is set to OFF and the check mark is cleared.
If the selected switch is OFF, the switch is set to ON and the check mark is set.

Setting switch 1

Setting switch 2

6-130
 L32

Explanation
The details of each PLC switch is summarized below.
No. Item Setting Description Remarks
1 $1 Single Block Off ON Disables single block operation
2 $2 Single Block Off for each axis control group.
OFF Enables single block operation
for each axis control group.
Set the single block operation
switch for each axis control
group.
4 Dry Run Enabled ON Disables dry run.
OFF Disables dry run.
7 Loader Disconnect ON The power supply of the bar Displayed only when the bar
loader is not checked. loader is connected.
(Option)
OFF The power supply of the bar
loader is checked.
(Option)
8 Tool Data Protect ON Protects the tool data. Tool data
cannot be edited or input/output.
While this function is ON, the
following message is displayed.
"Tool data is protected."
OFF Tool data can be edited or
input/output.
10 Parameter Protect ON Protects the user parameters and
common variable data from
accidental modification or
erasure.
User parameters and common
variable data cannot be edited,
input or output.
While this function is ON, the
following message is displayed.
"Parameter are protected."
The user parameter includes
CONTROL PARAMETER,
AXIS PARAMETER, and
SETUP DATA.
OFF Allows input, output, and
modification of user parameters
and common variable data.
11 Interference Check Off ON Disables the interference check.
OFF Enables the interference check.
Enables the check when the
machine is turned on.
12 Patlight Off ON Disables the beacon lamp from
lighting even when an alarm is
raised.
OFF Enables the beacon lamp to light
when an alarm is raised.
13 Cycle Time ALM. OFF ON Disables the cycle time alarm. Displayed when External
OFF Enables the cycle time alarm. Memory Program Operation is
enabled.
15 Override No Limit ON Allows the feed rate to be set
between 0 and 200%. (The rapid
feed rate override is 100% when
the rapid feed rate override
switch is set at 100% to 200%.)
OFF The feed rate override is 100%
when the feed rate override
switch is set at more than 100%.

6-131
L32

No. Item Setting Description Remarks

16 Error detect ON ON Enables error detection.
OFF Disables error detection.
17 Chamfering Off ON Disables chamfering in the thread
cutting cycle.
OFF Enables chamfering in the thread
cutting cycle.
18 $1 Cycle Start Off ON Disables cycle start of selected
19 $2 Cycle Start Off axis control group.
OFF Enables cycle start of selected
axis control group.
22 Internal diameter chuck for ON Set to grip the internal diameter
work hand of a work piece (the hand opens
to grip the work piece). (Option)
OFF Set to grip the external diameter
of a work piece (the hand closes
to grip the work piece). (Option)
23 Tool set Feed UP ON While the door is closed, axis
feed rate in tool setting is set at 10
m/min.
OFF While the door is closed, axis
feed rate in tool setting is set at
2m/min.
25 Automatic power off ON Enables the automatic power off Turns to OFF at power-on.
function. Automatically turns off
the power if an alarm occurs
during machine operation in
continuous cycles.
OFF Disables the automatic power off
function.
29 CAV bar loader operation ON Turn on to use the CAV bar
details loader.
OFF Turn off when not using the CAV
bar loader.
30 Blk skip chng prhbt ON Prohibits turning on/off operation
of the menu key [Skip 1].
OFF Enables turning on/off operation
of the menu key [Skip 1].
31 Optional Function 1 ON Customer-specific function
32 Optional Function 2 OFF Customer-specific function
33 Remote Access Permission ON Permits a remote access from PC. Displayed only when Remote
OFF Prohibits a remote access from Screen Operation Function is
PC. enabled.

6-132
 L32

No. Item Setting Description Remarks

34 Optional Block Skip ON Specify whether to skip the block
1 which includes a slash ("/") at the
35 Optional Block Skip beginning of the block. The
2 number following the slash (/)
36 Optional Block Skip corresponds to Block Skip 1 to 9.
3 If the number is omitted, the
37 Optional Block Skip block is regarded as "/1" (Block
4 Skip 1).
38 Optional Block Skip If this switch is set to ON, the
5 block that contains slash (/) at the
39 Optional Block Skip beginning of the block is ignored
6 during program execution.
40 Optional Block Skip Block Skip 1 is linked with the
7 [Skip1] menu on Automatic
41 Optional Block Skip Operation, On-machine Program
8 Check, and MDI screens.
42 Optional Block Skip
9
OFF When this item is set to OFF, the
block which includes a slash ("/")
at the beginning of the block is
not ignored and executed in
normal way.
43 Eco Mode Disabled OFF If this item is set to ON, the
machine enters into power-saving
status when changed to Edit
mode (except during program
running mode).
ON If this item is set to OFF, the
status remains unchanged even
when changed to Edit mode.
44 Alert Message Popup ON A message window pops up
every time when an alert is
issued.
OFF A message window does not pop
up (except for certain alerts).
45 Alm blk disp dsabl ON Disables the reverse display of
alarm block.
OFF Enables the reverse display of
alarm block..
47 Z1 Axis Stroke Limit Cancel ON Cancels the stroke limit of Z1 Displayed only on the GBL
axis. machine. When enabled,
OFF Limits the Z1 axis stroke. switching to GB machine is
unavailable. Turn to disabled
state at power-on.
48 Y1 axis stroke limit is ON Cancels the stroke limit of Y1 Displayed only when a specific
canceled axis. holder is selected in the
OFF Limits the Y1 axis stroke. machining data. For more
information, see <17. Tooling>.
This is disabled when not
displayed.
If the stroke limit is canceled, the
holder and guide bushing may
interfere with each other
depending on the angle the holder
is mounted. Take due care when
the machine is turned on.

6-133
L32

No. Item Setting Description Remarks

51 Work conveyor 1 short mode ON Set the menu key [Workpiece Displayed only when the
conveyor ON] to use workpiece unloader is connected.
intermittent operation of the When both are off, the workpiece
workpiece conveyor. conveyor operates when the
OFF Disables menu key [Workpiece menu key [Workpiece conveyor
conveyor ON] intermittent ON] is pressed.
operation.
52 Work conveyor continuous ON Set the menu key [Workpiece
mode conveyor ON] to use continuous
operation of the workpiece
conveyor.
OFF Disables menu key [Workpiece
conveyor ON] continuous
operation.
53 Disconnect the bar loader ON Dry runs can be performed when Displayed when "Loader device"
a loader is installed but no in the Machine Structure screen is
workpieces have been loaded. selected.
OFF Dry runs cannot be performed
when a loader is installed but no
workpieces have been loaded.

6-134
 L32

6.9 Creating and Editing the Program

This machine achieves various types of machining with five axes (X1, Y1, Z1, X2, and Z2) which are divided into two
axis control groups. To perform various types of machining, create a program for each axis control group, and execute
the programs at the same time.
Assign a program number to the overall program of two axis control groups, and consider the programs created for the
axis control groups to be one program when performing various operations for the programs.
The Edit screen for program displays the programs of two axis control groups individually or simultaneously.
You can also create a program for one axis control group only.

The machine components may move suddenly during some preparation tasks. Keep your hands and body
away from the operating area during the preparation.
When preparing to operate using new and existing machining programs, or executing a new machining
program, make sure that the tools mounted on the machine do not interfere with a part of the machine. If a
tool interferes with another part, this may damage the machine or may result in personal injury.
When you check the tool operations, find the part of the machining program corresponding to tool motion
and obey the safety precaution items corresponding to that movement.
For other precautions, see <2. Safety Precautions>.

6.9.1 Program list

Use the following procedure to display the program numbers, comments, character number, program size, and creation
date of a registered program.
Creating a new program and inputting/outputting a program are possible using the List screen.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Edit key . The previously selected screen appears.

2. Press the menu key [List]. The List screen appears.

[Note]
Programs are initially listed in the ascending order of program numbers.

6-135
L32

6.9.2 Creating a new program

Use the following procedure to create a new program.
[Procedure]
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key .

The last screen selected appears.
3. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears. Take a look at the list, and choose a non-existing program number as a new program
number.
4. Press the menu key [NEW-INP].
The Create New Program screen appears.
5. Press the Numeric keys to enter the new program number and then press the Input key .
(The program number can have up to eight digits.)
6. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Comment", enter the comment and then press the Input key

. The comment can be omitted.

7. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Decision" and then press the Input key . The program
number is stored and the Edit screen for new program appears.

[Note]
• The program number can be of up to 8 digits. However, do not assign the numbers between 9000 and 9999. These
numbers are reserved by the manufacturer for customized programs.
• While the Program edit switch key is set to " ", you cannot edit the program or machining data.

6-136
 L32

6.9.3 Editing individual programs

6.9.3.1 Deleting a program
Use the following procedure to delete a single program.
[Procedure]
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key .

The last screen selected appears.
3. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
4. Use the Arrow keys or the Page key to move the cursor to the program to be deleted.

5. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key to enable the submenu key.
6. Press the menu key [Delete].
The Program Delete screen appears.
The last selected program number is displayed, if you want to delete a different program, use the Arrow keys

to move the cursor to "Program No.", enter the number of the program to be deleted and then press the Input

key .

7. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Decision" and then press the Input key .

8. The menu keys [Yes] and [No] are displayed. Press the menu key [Yes].
The specified program is deleted.

[Note]
While the Program edit switch key is set to " ", you cannot edit the program or machining data.

6-137
L32

6.9.3.2 Copying a program

Use the following procedure to copy an existing program with a different number.
[Procedure]
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key .

The last screen selected appears.
3. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
4. Use the Arrow keys or the Page key to move the cursor to the program to be copied.

5. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key to enable the submenu key.
6. Press the menu key [Copy].
The Program Copy screen appears.
7. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "New Program No.", enter the new program number for

copied program and then press the Input key .

8. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "New Comment", enter the new comment for copied program

and then press the Input key .

The comment can be omitted.
9. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Decision" and then press the Input key .
The specified program is copied.

[Note]
While the Program edit switch key is set to " ", you cannot edit the program or machining data.

6-138
 L32

6.9.3.3 Changing a program number

Use the following procedure to change a program number that has been stored.
[Procedure]
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key .

The last screen selected appears.
3. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
4. Use the Arrow keys or the Page key to move the cursor to the program to be changed.

5. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key to enable the submenu key.
6. Press the menu key [Rename].
The Program Rename screen appears.
7. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "New Program No.", enter the new program number and then

press the Input key . When changing the comment only, enter the same program number as before.

8. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "New Comment", enter the new comment and then press the

Input key .
The comment can be omitted.
9. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Decision" and then press the Input key . The program
number is changed to the specified number.

[Note]
While the Program edit switch key is set to " ", you cannot edit the program or machining data.

6-139
L32

6.9.3.4 Sorting program list

This section explains the procedure for setting the order in which programs are listed.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Edit key .
The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
3. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key to enable the submenu key.
4. Press the menu key [Sort].
The List display Arrangement screen appears.
5. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Sort Item". Enter a number corresponding to "Program No."
or "Date".
6. Press the Input key .
The multiple programs are sorted in the specified order.
7. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Sort Order". Enter a number corresponding to "Sort Ascend"
or "Sort Descend".
8. Press the Input key .
The multiple programs are sorted in the specified order.

9. When you have finished, press the Escape key to close the dialog box.

6-140
 L32

6.9.4 Editing a program

6.9.4.1 Selecting an axis control group for editing a program
Take the following procedure to select the target axis control group when editing a program.

[Note]
Up to 247 characters per block can be entered. (A space and end of block are counted as a character.) Up to 2,000 blocks
can be entered per axis control group. The allowable size for entire program is 96,000 characters or less. To edit the
program, the memory area must have at least 500 characters of free area.
A comment enclosed by “(“ and “)” is regarded as one block.
[Procedure]
To display two control axis groups simultaneously
1. Select the Edit screen.
The programs of two axis control groups are usually displayed at the same time.
2. Press the menu key [$-Select].
The cursor moves to $1, $2, then back to $1 each time [$-Select] is pressed.

[Procedure]
To display single control axis group
1. Select the Edit screen.
The programs of two axis control groups are usually displayed at the same time.
2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL].
3. Press the menu key [1 Lines].
Only the program for control axis group 1 is displayed.

6-141
L32

6.9.4.2 General editing operations

You can edit programs using the following procedure:
[Procedure]
See <6.7.2.3 Editing MDI program>.

[Note]
• While the Program edit switch key is set to " ", you cannot edit the program or machining data.

• Press the Input key to save the effect of editing.

(1) Insert mode and overwrite mode switching

[Procedure]
1. Press the Insert key .
Each time the Insert key is pressed, the mode is switched as insert → overwrite → insert.
The mode is also switched to the insert mode if the Input key is pressed in the overwrite mode.

The message "INS" or "OVR" is displayed on the lower right of the screen.
(2) Entering a character
[Procedure]
1. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the position where you
want to enter a character.
2. Press the Insert key . The display on the lower right of the screen will change to "INS".

3. Enter a character using the alphanumeric keys.

Example: To type "C" after "AB":
1. Move the cursor to the right side of "B".

2. Press the Insert key .

(Make sure that the status display field at the lower right corner of the screen indicates "INS".)
3. Press the C key to type "C".

6-142
 L32

(3) Replacing a character

[Procedure]
1. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor over the character to be
edited.
2. Press the Insert key . The display on the lower right of the screen will change to "OVR".

3. Enter a character using the alphanumeric keys.

The original character will be overwritten.
Example: To change "ABC" to "ABD":
1. Move the cursor before "C".

2. Press the Insert key .

(Make sure that the status display field at the lower right corner of the screen indicates "OVR".)
3. Press the D key to type "D".

(4) Inserting a character

[Procedure]
1. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the position where you
want to insert a character.
2. Insert additional character using the alphanumeric key.
The characters will be inserted.
Example: To type in "D" between "B" and "C" of "ABC":
1. Move the cursor between "B" and "C".

2. Press the Insert key .

(Make sure that the status display field at the lower right corner of the screen indicates "INS".)
3. Press the D key to type "D".

6-143
L32

(5) Deleting a character

• Deleting a character after the cursor position
[Procedure]
1. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the left side of character
to be deleted.
2. Press the Delete key .
The character after the cursor position will be deleted.
Example: To delete "B" from a previously entered "ABC":
1. Move the cursor before "B".

2. Press the Delete key .

• Deleting the character in front of the cursor

[Procedure]
1. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the right side of
character to be delete.
2. Press the Backspace key .
The character in front of the cursor will be deleted.
Example: To delete "B" from a previously entered "ABC":
1. Move the cursor after "B".

2. Press the Backspace key .

6-144
 L32

(6) Deleting a line

[Procedure]
1. Move the cursor to the block to be deleted using the Arrow keys and the Tab keys .

2. Press the Line deletion key .

The character string in the block located by the cursor is deleted.
Example: To delete "DEF;" in the "ABC;DEF;":
1. Move the cursor to the block to be deleted.

2. Press the Line deletion key .

[Note]
If the block where the cursor is positioned does not fit in the display screen, deletion is not possible.

(7) Cleaning a screen

[Procedure]
1. When the screen to be deleted is displayed, press the Shift key and the Line deletion key .
All blocks on the screen will be cleared.
Example: Delete a screen displaying multiple program blocks.

1. Press the Shift key and the Line deletion key .

[Note]
The block that does not fit in the display screen cannot be deleted.

6-145
L32

6.9.4.3 Undo
Pressing the menu key [Undo] returns the program to the state just before the Input key was pressed.
[Procedure]
1. Once the Input key is pressed while the Edit screen is displayed, [Undo] appears in the upper menu.
2. Press the menu key [Undo].
3. The program state just before the Input key was pressed is displayed.
The menu key [Undo] no longer appears.
If you edit the program and press the Input key again, the menu key [Undo] reappears.
6.9.4.4 Find
Take the following procedure to search for a character string.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Edit key .
The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the menu key [Edit].
The Edit screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] twice.
4. Press the menu key [Find].
The Character Row Search screen appears.
5. Enter the character string (you want to find) into the "String to be found" text box, then press the Input key .

6. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Reverse" or "Forward", then press the Input key to
decide the search direction.
7. To search the programs of both control groups for the character string, use the Arrow keys or the Tab

keys to move the cursor to "All Control Groups", then press the Input key .

8. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Execute", then pressing the Input key starts searching
for the specified character string.
9. When you have finished, press the Escape key to close the dialog box.

[Note]
Search options
Reverse The find function searches backward from the current cursor
position, toward the beginning of the program.
Forward The find function searches forward from the current cursor
position, toward the end of the program.
All Control Groups The find function searches the entire program of axis control
groups 1 and 2

6-146
 L32

6.9.4.5 Replace
Take the following procedure to replace a character string.
[Procedure]
Replace all of the character strings in the program
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key .

The last screen selected appears.
3. Press the menu key [Edit].
The Edit screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] twice.
5. Press the menu key [Replace].
The Replace Character Row screen appears.
6. Enter the character string to be replaced into the "String to be found" text box, then press the Input key .

7. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the "New Character Row" text box, enter a new character

string, then press the Input key .

8. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Reverse" or "Forward", then press the Input key to
decide the search direction.
9. To replace character strings for all axis control groups, move the cursor to "All Control Groups" using the Arrow
keys and the Tab keys and enter the check mark for this item by pressing the Input key .

10. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to "Replace All", then press the Input

key .

11. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Execute", then press the Input key .

12. The character string is replaced for the program of the axis control group currently edited or for the programs of all
of the displayed axis control groups.
13. When you have finished, press the Escape key to close the dialog box.

6-147
L32

[Procedure]
Replace a part of character strings in the program
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ". The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key . The previously selected screen appears.

3. Press the menu key [Edit]. The Edit screen appears.

4. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] twice.
5. Press the menu key [Replace]. The Replace Character Row screen appears.
6. Enter the character string to be replaced into the "String to be found" text box, then press the Input key .

7. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the "New Character Row" text box, enter a new character

string, then press the Input key .

8. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Reverse" or "Forward", then press the Input key to
decide the search direction.
9. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to "Replace Each", then press the

Input key .

10. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Execute", then press the Input key .
Searching for the specified character string starts.
To skip replacing the found string, use Arrow key to move the cursor to "Search next" and press the Input key, then
select "Execute" and press the Input key.
To replace the found string, move the cursor to "Execute", and press the Input key.
11. Repeat step 9 to continue find and replace operation.
12. When you have finished, press the Escape key to close the dialog box.

[Note]
• Replace function is disabled during editing.
• Replace options
Replace All Replaces all character strings in the program of the control axis group being edited.
Search next Start searching from the cursor position.
Replace Each Start replacing from the cursor position.
Reverse The find function searches backward from the current cursor position, toward the
beginning of the program.
Forward The find function searches forward from the current cursor position, toward the end
of the program.
All Control Groups The find function searches the entire program of axis control groups 1 and 2

• While the Program edit switch key is set to " ", you cannot edit the program or machining data.

6-148
 L32

6.9.4.6 Copy
The copy function copies the specified blocks in the program.
[Procedure]
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key .

The last screen selected appears.
3. Press the menu key [Edit].
The Edit screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] twice.
5. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor in the line containing the character string you wish to copy.

6. Press the menu key [Range].

The block at the cursor position is highlighted (reverse video).
7. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the last block of the blocks to be copied.
All blocks to be copied are highlighted.
8. Press the menu key [Copy].
Reverse display is canceled and the specified character strings are stored.
9. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the start of the character string where you wish to insert the
selected blocks.
10. Press the menu key [Paste].
Character string stored in step 8 is inserted where the cursor is located. (The message "Editing... " appears at the
lower right corner of the screen.)
11. Press the Input key .
The status display "Editing... " at the lower corner of the screen disappears, indicating that the pasted character
string has been accepted.

[Note]
• If you switch to another screen before pressing the Input key while pasting the copied character string, the
copy processing is canceled, and the program is restored to the original status.
• Since the copied program is retained, it can be inserted at several places.
• While the status display "Editing... " is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen, the menu key [Range] is not
active. In this case, press the Input key to confirm the entered data.

• While the Program edit switch key is set to " ", you cannot edit the program or machining data.

6-149
L32

6.9.4.7 Move
The move function moves the specified blocks in a program to the desired position.
[Procedure]
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key .

The last screen selected appears.
3. Press the menu key [Edit].
The Edit screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] twice.
5. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the first block of the blocks to be moved.

6. Press the menu key [Range].

The block at the cursor position is highlighted (reverse video).
7. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the last block of the blocks to be moved.
All blocks to be moved are highlighted.
8. Press the menu key [Cut]. (The message "Editing... " appears at the lower right corner of the screen.)
The specified character strings are cut and stored.
9. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the destination location.

10. Press the menu key [Paste].

Character string stored in step 8 is inserted where the cursor is located.
11. Press the Input key .
The status display "Editing... " at the lower corner of the screen disappears, indicating that the pasted character
string has been accepted.

[Note]
• If you switch to another screen before pressing the Input key while pasting the move (cut) character string, the
move processing is canceled, and the program is restored to the original status.
• Since the cut program is retained, it can be inserted at several places.
• While the status display "Editing... " is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen, the menu key [Range] is not
active. In this case, press the Input key to confirm the entered data.

• While the Program edit switch key is set to " ", you cannot edit the program or machining data.

6-150
 L32

6.9.4.8 Cutting cycle

Take the following procedure to enter setup items which will automatically create a cutting cycle program with multiple
blocks.
[Procedure]
Inserting G92 thread cutting canned cycle
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key .

The last screen selected appears.
3. Press the menu key [Edit].
The Edit screen appears.
4. Move the cursor onto the program you want to insert a cutting cycle by using Arrow keys and menu key
[$-Select].
5. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key to enable the submenu key.
6. Press the menu key [CutCycle].
The Cycle Selection screen appears.
7. Use the Arrow keys to select "G92 Thread Cutting Canned Cycle", then press the Input key .
The G92 Thread Cutting Canned Cycle screen appears.
8. Use the Arrow keys o move the cursor to "Material". Enter the number for the material, then press the

Input key . The selected material is set. The cursor moves to the next item.

9. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Lead(L) ". Enter the number for the thread, then press the

Input key . The selected thread lead is set. The cursor moves to the next item.

10. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Tool shift(a)". Press the Numeric keys to enter the amount of

tool shift, then press the Input key . The entered new value is set. The cursor moves to the next item.

11. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Thread Diameter(M)". Press the Numeric keys to enter the

thread diameter, then press the Input key . The entered new value is set. The cursor moves to the next item.

12. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Effective Length(Za)". Press the Numeric keys to enter the

effective length of thread, then press the Input key . The entered new value is set. The cursor moves to the
next item.
13. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Cycle INS", then press the Input key .
The screen closes and the cutting cycle program is inserted into the axis control group being edited.
(The message "Editing... " appears at the lower right corner of the screen.)
14. Press the Input key .
The status display "Editing... " at the lower corner of the screen disappears, indicating that the pasted character
string has been accepted.

[Note]
• If you switch to another screen before pressing the Input key to confirm the inserted cutting cycle program, the
cutting cycle insertion processing is canceled, and the program is restored to the original status.
• Only the G92 thread cutting canned cycle for outer diameter can be inserted.
• While the Program edit switch key is set to " ", you cannot edit the program or machining data.

6-151
L32

6.9.4.9 Calculator
Take the following procedure for calculation with the displayed calculator.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Edit key .
The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [Edit].
The Edit screen appears.
3. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key to enable the submenu key.
4. Press the menu key [Calclatr].
The Calculator screen appears.
5. Press the Alphanumeric keys to enter the formula.
Calculations using parentheses can also be used.
The calculation formula is displayed.

6. Press the Shift key and the Equal key . Or press the Input key .
The data is calculated.
The calculation result is displayed in the display area of the Calculator screen. It is also displayed in the calculation
result display area on the Edit screen.

7. To make a new calculation, press the Line deletion key to erase the previous calculation result.

8. Press the Escape key to close the Calculator screen at completion of operation.

[Procedure]

How to use

1. Open the Calculator screen.

For example, to calculate "sin(30)", follow the procedure below.

2. Move the yellow cursor on the Calculator screen to by pressing the Arrow keys .

6-152
 L32

3. Press the Shift key and the Space key .

The “sin(“ calculation formula is displayed.
4. Next, enter "30", and then enter the closing parentheses ")".
5. Press the Shift key and the Equal key . Or press the Input key .
The data is calculated. The calculation result for "sin(30)" is displayed.
6. To make a new calculation, press the Line deletion key to erase the previous calculation result.

7. Press the Escape key to close the Calculator screen at completion of operation.

[Procedure]

How to use

1. Open the Calculator screen.

For example, to calculate "√30", follow the procedure below.

2. Move the yellow cursor on the Calculator screen to by pressing the Arrow keys .

3. Press the Shift key and the Space key .

The “sqrt(“ calculation formula is displayed.
4. Next, enter "30", and then enter the closing parentheses ")".
5. Press the Shift key and the Equal key . Or press the Input key .
The data is calculated. The calculation result for "√30" is displayed.
6. To make a new calculation, press the Line deletion key to erase the previous calculation result.

7. Press the Escape key to close the Calculator screen when operation is completed.

[Procedure]

How to use

1. Open the Calculator screen.

For example, to calculate "3 to the 2nd power (3 squared)", follow the procedure below.

2. Move the yellow cursor on the Calculator screen to by pressing the Arrow keys .

3. Press the Shift key and the Space key .

The “sqr(“ calculation formula is displayed.
4. Next, enter "3", and then enter the closing parentheses ")".
5. Press the Shift key and the Equal key . Or press the Input key .
The data is calculated. The calculation result for "3 to the 2nd power (3 squared)" is displayed.
6. To make a new calculation, press the Line deletion key to erase the previous calculation result.

7. Press the Escape key to close the Calculator screen when operation is completed.

[Procedure]

How to use

 While the Calculator screen is open, is used when using the previous calculation result for
the next calculation.
1. Open the Calculator screen.
For example, after performing the calculation "1 + 2 = ", to multiply that result by 5, follow the procedure below.
2. Press the Line deletion key .

3. Move the yellow cursor on the Calculator screen to by pressing the Arrow keys .

6-153
L32

4. Press the Shift key and the Space key .

The “Ans“ calculation formula is displayed.
5. Next enter [*5].
6. Press the Shift key and the Equal key . Or press the Input key .

The data is calculated. The calculation result for "3*5" is displayed.

7. To make a new calculation, press the Line deletion key to erase the previous calculation result.

8. Press the Escape key to close the Calculator screen when operation is completed.

[Note]
The above explains decimal calculation. To do hexadecimal calculation, press the Arrow keys to select
"HEX" in the CALC SEL field after the operation in step 4. To convert calculation results from decimal to hexadecimal
value, press the Arrow keys
to select "HEX" after the operation in step 6.

[Procedure]
How to delete input data when entering a calculation formula
1. Press the Backspace key [BS].
The previous entered value is deleted.

[Procedure]
How to enter a calculation result to a program
1. After performing a calculation, press [Copy] in the top section of the menu keys while the Calculator screen is
open.
The calculation result is saved.
2. Press the Escape key to close the window.

3. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the position in the program where you want to enter the
calculation result in the Edit screen.
4. Press the menu key [Paste].
The calculation result is inserted at the cursor position.

[Note]
When the calculation result in copied using the calculator function, the data that was saved using [Copy] or [Paste] in
the Edit screen is discarded.

6-154
 L32

6.9.4.10 Coordinate calculation

Take the following procedure to automatically calculate defined pattern coordinates.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Edit key .
The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the menu key [Edit].
The Edit screen appears.
3. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key to enable the submenu key.
4. Press the menu key [CoordCAL].
The Coordinate Calculation screen appears.
5. Press the arrow key and/or Tab keys .
Move the cursor to the pattern (drawing) you want to use.
6. Press the Input key .
The selected pattern screen appears.
7. Use the Tab keys to move the cursor to "Rotate 90-DEG". Keep pressing the Input key until the
desired drawing appears.
8. Use the Tab keys to move the cursor to the data input field.

9. Press the Alphanumeric keys to enter the values for calculation, then press the Input key .

10. Use the Tab keys to move the cursor to "Calculation", then press the Input key . The calculation
result is displayed.
It is also displayed in the calculation result display area on the Edit screen.
11. Press the Escape key twice to close the Coordinate Calculation screen at completion of operation.

6-155
L32

6.9.4.11 Code insertion

This function is used to select a code (M, G, Special G, or T code) and insert it into the program.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Edit key .
The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the menu key [Edit].
The Edit screen appears.
3. Move the cursor onto the program you want to insert a code by using Arrow keys and menu key
[$-Select].
4. Press the menu key [Code LST].
The Code List screen appears.

5. Press the Tab key to move the cursor horizontally to the desired code type, and press the Input key
to determine it.
6. Press the Arrow keys to move the cursor vertically to select a code you want to insert.

7. Use the Tab key to move the cursor to "Code Insert" field, and press the Input key .
The Code Insert screen appears.

8. Use the Arrow keys and Tab keys to move the cursor to an argument field you want to
specify.
9. Enter an argument with the alphanumeric key, and press the Input key .
The code to be inserted is displayed in the "Image to Insert" field.

6-156
 L32

10. When you have specified the argument, move the cursor to "Insert" field by using the Arrow key and

press the Input key .

The specified code is inserted into the program currently being edited. (The message "Editing... " appears at the
lower right corner of the screen.)
11. Press the Input key .
The message "Editing... " is cleared and the change you have made on the program is determined.

[Note]
If you switch to another screen before pressing the Input key after the code is inserted into the program, code
insertion processing is canceled and the program is restored to the original status.
Optional codes are not displayed in Code List screen.

6-157
L32

6.9.4.12 Format check

On the Edit screen, you can check if the syntax error is contained in your machining program. If a syntax error is found,
the block containing a syntax error is reversed (red). Move the cursor to the error block, the contents of an error is
displayed in the box adjacent to the error block.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Edit key .
The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [Edit].
The Edit screen appears.
3. Edit the machining program, and press the Input key ,
A format check is performed. A block that contains a syntax error is reversed in red, and the menu keys [UP
SRCH] [DWN SRCH] appear.
4. Pressing the menu key [UP SRCH] or [DWN SRCH] moves the cursor to the error block one by one.
5. Modify the machining program according to the error contents, and press the Input key .
The format check is performed again. If no syntax error is found, the reverse display is canceled.
(While editing the machining program, the reverse display is canceled and the menu keys [UP SRCH] [DWN
SRCH] disappear.)

[Note]
The [Format Check] function is enabled at power on. If you press the menu key [FormtChk] to deselect the menu, the
Format Check function is disabled.
(Reverse display of error block is canceled.)

6-158
 L32

6.9.4.13 Display of alarm block

If an alarm occurs while the machining program is running, the error block is highlighted in red on the Edit screen so that
you can easily identify the block where the alarm occurred.

[Procedure]
When an alarm occurs in machining program while running the automatic operation or on-machine program
check. (The program stops at an error block and an alarm display appears on the screen.)
1. Press the Reset key to reset the alarm.

2. Press the Edit key .

The previously selected screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
4. Call the machining program that was running.
The Edit screen appears and the block that contains an alarm is reversed in red.
5. Modify the error in the error block, and press the Input key .
While editing the machining program, the reverse display is canceled and the window showing the error contents
also disappears.

[Note]
• Put a check mark on "45 Alarm block OFF" on the Set SW screen to disable the reverse display of alarm block.
• The error information of the alarm block is retained even the machine is powered off by the automatic shutoff
function.
• If "x" appears in the Program No. field of the List screen, it indicates that the program contains an alarm block
information.
• When the subprogram is called and an alarm occurs in the subprogram, the error block information is contained in
subprogram. (The call origin program does not have the error block information.)
• The reverse display is canceled when editing a block other than the error block.

6-159
L32

Alarm messages displayed when syntax error occurs

Alarm message
No. Code Alarm condition
(24 characters by 7 lines)
T code
1 T0100's Specified argument is not Q, H, Invalid argument was specified.
X, Z, Y, K, E, R nor M. Valid arguments are: Q, H, X, Z, Y, K, E, R, A,
M. (*** argument not allowed)
Other than 1 is specified for Q Allowable value for Q argument is 1.
argument.
Other than 2 is specified for K Allowable value for K argument is 2.
argument.
The value specified for E Allowable range for E argument is between 0 and
argument is out of the range less than 360.
between 0 and less than 360.
Other than 1 or 2 is specified for R Allowable value for R argument is 1 or 2.
argument.
Other than 1, 2, or 3 is specified Allowable values for M argument is 1, 2, and 3.
for M argument.
2 T1100's Specified argument is not Q, X, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
Y, E, R nor M. Valid arguments are: H, X, Z, Y, E, R, M
(*** argument not allowed)
Other than 1 is specified for Q Allowable value for Q argument is 1.
argument.
The value specified for E Allowable range for E argument is between 0 and
argument is out of the range less than 360.
between 0 and less than 360.
Other than 1 or 2 is specified for R Allowable value for R argument is 1 or 2.
argument.
Other than 1, 2, or 3 is specified Allowable values for M argument is 1, 2, and 3.
for M argument.
3 T2100's Specified argument is not Q, W, Invalid argument was specified.
X, Z, nor S. Valid arguments are: Q, W, X, Z, S
(*** argument not allowed)
Specified argument is not Q, W, Invalid argument was specified.
X, Z, Y nor S. Valid arguments are: Q, W, X, Z, Y, S
(*** argument not allowed)
Other than 1 is specified for Q Allowable value for Q argument is 1.
argument.
The value specified for E Allowable range for E argument is between 0 and
argument is out of the range less than 360.
between 0 and less than 360.
4 T3000 Specified argument is not Q, W, Invalid argument was specified.
or E. Valid arguments are: Q, W, E.
(*** argument not allowed)
Other than 1 is specified for Q Allowable value for Q argument is 1.
argument.
The value specified for E Allowable range for E argument is between 0 and
argument is out of the range less than 360.
between 0 and less than 360.
5 T3100's Specified argument is not Z, W, Invalid argument was specified.
X, Y, Q, or E. Valid arguments are Z, W, X, Y, Q, and E.
(*** argument not allowed)
Other than 1,3 is specified for Q Allowable value for Q argument is 1,3.
argument.
The value specified for E Allowable range for E argument is between 0 and
argument is out of the range less than 360.
between 0 and less than 360.

6-160
 L32

Alarm message
No. Code Alarm condition
(24 characters by 7 lines)
6 T5100 and higher Specified argument is not X, Y, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, Q, E, nor R. Valid arguments are: X, Y, Z, W, Q, E, R. (***
argument not allowed)
Other than 1,3 is specified for Q Allowable value for Q argument is 1,3.
argument.
The value specified for E Allowable range for E argument is between 0 and
argument is out of the range less than 360.
between 0 and less than 360.
Other than 1 is specified for R Allowable value for R argument is 1.
argument.
G code
1 G0 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, Y, V, C, H, ",F", F, ", nor I". Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, Y, V, C, H, ",F",
F, ",I".
(*** argument not allowed)
2 G1 Specified argument is not Invalid argument was specified.
X,U,Z,W,Y,V,C,H,F,A, ”,C”, Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, Y, V, C, H, F,
",R", ", nor l". A,
",C", ",R", I. (*** argument not allowed)
3 G2 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, Y, V, C, H, I, J, K, R, F, ",C, Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, Y, V, C, H, I, J,
",R, P, nor ",I". K, R, F, ",C", ",R", P, ",I". (*** argument not
allowed)
4 G3 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, Y, V, C, H, I, J, K, R, F, ",C, Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, Y, V, C, H, I, J,
",R, P, nor ",I". K, R, F, ",C", ",R", P, ",I".
(*** argument not allowed)
5 G4 Specified argument is not U, P, Invalid argument was specified.
nor X. Valid arguments are: U, P, X.
(*** argument not allowed)
6 G12.1 Specified argument is not D, nor Invalid argument was specified.
E=. Valid arguments are: D, "E=".
(*** argument not allowed)
Other than 0 or 1 is specified for D Allowable value for D argument is 0 or 1.
argument.
7 G16 Other than C argument is Invalid argument was specified.
specified. Valid argument is: C.
(*** argument not allowed)
8 G32 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, F, E, Q, nor A. Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, F, E, Q, A. (***
argument not allowed)
A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for Q argument is between 0 and
and 360 is specified for Q 360.
argument.
9 G34 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, F, E, K, nor A. Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, F, E, K, A. (***
argument not allowed)
10 G35 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, I, K, R, F, E, nor Q. Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, I, K, R, F, E, Q.
(*** argument not allowed)
A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for Q argument is between 0 and
and 360 is specified for Q 360.
argument.
11 G36 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, I, K, R, F, E, nor Q. Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, I, K, R, F, E, Q.
(*** argument not allowed)
A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for Q argument is between 0 and
and 360 is specified for Q 360.
argument.

6-161
L32

Alarm message
No. Code Alarm condition
(24 characters by 7 lines)
12 G40 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, Y, V, C, H, F, I, J, nor K. Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, Y, V, C, H, F, I,
J, K.
(*** argument not allowed)
13 G41 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, Y, V, C, H, F, I, J, nor K. Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, Y, V, C, H, F, I,
J, K.
(*** argument not allowed)
14 G42 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, Y, V, C, H, F, I, J, nor K. Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, Y, V, C, H, F, I,
J, K.
(*** argument not allowed)
15 G50 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, Y, V, C, H, S nor Q. Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, Y, V, C, H, S,
Q. (*** argument not allowed)
16 G53 Specified argument is not Invalid argument was specified.
X,U,Z,W,Y,V,C,H, Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, Y, V, C, H, ",F",
F, ”,F” ",I"
(*** argument not allowed)
17 G65 Invalid argument is specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)
P argument is not specified. Specify the P argument.
18 G66 Invalid argument is specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)
P argument is not specified. Specify the P argument.
19 G66.1 Invalid argument is specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)
P argument is not specified. Specify the P argument.
20 G70 Specified argument is not A, P, Q, Invalid argument was specified.
nor ",I". Valid arguments are: A, P, Q, ",I".
(*** argument not allowed)
21 G71 Specified argument is not U, R, A, Invalid argument was specified.
P, Q, W, F, S, T, nor ",I". Valid arguments are: U, R, A, P, Q, W, F, S, T,
",I". (*** argument not allowed)
22 G72 Specified argument is not U, R, A, Invalid argument was specified.
P, Q, W, F, S, T, ”,I”. Valid arguments are: U, R,A,P,Q, W, F,S,T, ”,I”.
(*** argument not allowed)
23 G73 Specified argument is not U, R, A, Invalid argument was specified.
P, Q, W, F, S, T, ”,I”. Valid arguments are: U, R, A, P, Q, W, F, S,
T, ”,I”. (*** argument not allowed)
24 G74 Specified argument is not R, X, U, Invalid argument was specified.
Z, W, P, Q, F, nor ",I". Valid arguments are: R, X, U, Z, W, P, Q, F, ",I".
(*** argument not allowed)
25 G75 Specified argument is not R, X, U, Invalid argument was specified.
Z, W, P, Q, F, nor ",I". Valid arguments are: R, X, U, Z, W, P, Q, F, ",I".
(*** argument not allowed)
26 G76 Specified argument is not R, X, U, Invalid argument was specified.
Z, W, P, Q, F, nor ",I". Valid arguments are: R, X, U, Z, W, P, Q, F, ",I".
(*** argument not allowed)
27 G76.1 Specified argument is not R, X, U, Invalid argument was specified.
Z, W, P, Q, F, nor ",I". Valid arguments are: R, X, U, Z, W, P, Q, F, ",I".
(*** argument not allowed)
28 G76.2 Specified argument is not R, X, U, Invalid argument was specified.
Z, W, P, Q, F, A, nor ",I". Valid arguments are: R, X, U, Z, W, P, Q, F, A,
",I". (*** argument not allowed)
29 G79 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, R, I, K, A, Q, J, F, ” nor F”. Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, R, I, K, A, Q, J,
F, ",F".
(*** argument not allowed)

6-162
 L32

Alarm message
No. Code Alarm condition
(24 characters by 7 lines)
30 G83 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, C, H, R, Q, P, F, K, M, ",F", Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, C, H, R, Q, P, F,
nor ",I". K, M, ",F", ",I". (*** argument not allowed)
31 G84 Specified argument is not Z, W, Invalid argument was specified.
R, F, D, S, Q, ",R", C, E, H, K, M, Valid arguments are: Z, W, R, F, D, S, Q, ", R", C,
P, X, U, ",F", nor ",I". E, H, K, M, P, X, U, ",F", ",I". (*** argument not
allowed)
Other than ±1, ±2, ±3, ±4, or ±5 is Allowable value for D argument is ±1, ±2, ±3, ±4,
specified for D argument. or ±5.
A value out of range between 100 Allowable range for Q argument is between 100
and 500 is specified for Q and 500.
argument.
Other than 1 or 2 is specified Allowable value for ",R" argument is 1 or 2.
for ,R argument.
32 G85 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, C, H, R, P, F, K, M, ",F", nor Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, C, H, R, P, F, K,
",I". M, ",F", ",I". (*** argument not allowed)
33 G87 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, C, H, R, Q, P, F, K, M, ",F", Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, C, H, R, Q, P, F,
nor ",I". K, M, ",F", ",I". (*** argument not allowed)
34 G88 Specified argument is not X, U, R, Invalid argument was specified.
F, D, S, Q, ",R", C, E, H, K, M, P, Valid arguments are: X, U, R, F, D, S, Q, ",R", C,
Z, W, ",F", nor ",I". E, H, K, M, P, Z, W, ",F", ",I". (*** argument not
allowed)
Other than ±3, ±4, or ±5 is Allowable value for D argument is ±3, ±4, or ±5.
specified for D argument.
A value out of range between 100 Allowable range for Q argument is between 100
and 500 is specified for Q and 500.
argument.
Other than 1 or 2 is specified for Allowable value for ",R" argument is 1 or 2.
",R" argument.
35 G89 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, C, H, R, P, F, K, M, ",F", nor Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, C, H, R, P, F, K,
",I". M, ",F", ",I". (*** argument not allowed)
36 G90 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, R, F, nor ",I". Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, R, F, ",I". (***
argument not allowed)
37 G92 Specified argument is not X, U, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
W, R, F, E, Q, nor ",I". Valid arguments are: X, U, Z, W, R, F,E, Q, ",I".
(*** argument not allowed)
A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for Q argument is between 0 and
and 360 is specified for Q 360.
argument.
38 G96 Specified argument is not S nor P. Invalid argument was specified.
Valid arguments are: S, P.
(*** argument not allowed)
39 G97 – –
40 G113 Specified argument is not H nor Invalid argument was specified.
D. Valid arguments are: H, D.
(*** argument not allowed)
Other than 1, 2, 3, or 5 is specified Allowable value for H argument is 1, 2, 3, or 5.
for H argument.

6-163
L32

Alarm message
No. Code Alarm condition
(24 characters by 7 lines)
41 G114.1 Specified argument is not H, D, R, Invalid argument was specified.
nor A. Valid arguments are: H, D, R, A.
(*** argument not allowed)
H argument is not specified. Specify the H argument.
Allowable value for H argument is 1 or 2.
D argument is not specified. Specify the D argument.
Allowable value for D argument is ±1 or ±2.
Other than 1 or 2 is specified for H Allowable value for H argument is 1 or 2.
argument.
Other than ±1 or ±2 is specified Allowable value for D argument is ±1 or ±2.
for D argument.
A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for R argument is between 0 and
and 360 is specified for R less than 360.
argument.
42 G114.2 Specified argument is not H, D, E, Invalid argument was specified.
L, R, nor A. Valid arguments are: H, D, E, L, R, A.
(*** argument not allowed)
H argument is not specified. Specify the H argument.
Allowable value for H argument is 3, 4, or 5.
D argument is not specified. Specify the D argument.
Allowable value for D argument is ±1 or ±2.
Other than 3, 4, or 5 is specified Allowable value for H argument is 3, 4, or 5.
for H argument.
Other than ±1 or ±2 is specified Allowable value for D argument is ±1 or ±2.
for D argument.
A value out of range between 1 Allowable range for E argument is between 1 and
and 999 is specified for E 999.
argument.
A value out of range between 1 Allowable range for L argument is between 1 and
and 999 is specified for L 999.
argument.
A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for R argument is between 0 and
and 360 is specified for R less than 360.
argument.

6-164
 L32

Alarm message
No. Code Alarm condition
(24 characters by 7 lines)
43 G114.3 Specified argument is not H, D, E, Invalid argument was specified.
L, R, P, Q, nor A. Valid arguments are: H, D, E, L, R, P, Q, A. (***
argument not allowed)
H argument is not specified. Specify the H argument.
Allowable value for H argument is 3, 4, or 5.
D argument is not specified. Specify the D argument.
Allowable value for D argument is ±9.
Other than 3, 4, or 5 is specified Allowable value for H argument is 3, 4, or 5.
for H argument.
Other than ±9 is specified for D Allowable value for D argument is ±9.
argument.
A value out of range between 1 Allowable range for E argument is between 1 and
and 999 is specified for E 999.
argument.
A value out of range between 1 Allowable range for L argument is between 1 and
and 999 is specified for L 999.
argument.
In millimeter/inch specification: In millimeter/inch specification:
A value out of range between Allowable range for P argument is from -89000 to
-89000 and 89000 is specified for 89000.
P argument. In sub-micron/sub-inch specification:
In sub-micron/sub-inch Allowable range for P argument is from -890000
specification: to 890000.
A value out of range between
-890000 and 890000 is specified
for P argument.
In millimeter specification: In millimeter specification:
A value out of range between 100 Allowable range for Q argument is from 100 to
and 25000 is specified for Q 25000.
argument. In sub-micron/inch specification:
In sub-micron/inch specification: Allowable range for Q argument is between 100
A value out of range between and 250000.
1000 and 250000 is specified for In sub-inch specification:
Q argument. Allowable range for Q argument is from 10000 to
In sub-inch specification: 2500000.
A value out of range between
10000 and 250000 is specified for
Q argument.
A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for R argument is between 0 and
and 360 is specified for R less than 360.
argument.
44 G115 Specified argument is not X, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
nor C. Valid arguments are: X, Z, C.
(*** argument not allowed)
45 G116 Specified argument is not X, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
nor C. Valid arguments are: X, Z, C.
(*** argument not allowed)
46 G117 Specified argument is not X, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
nor C. Valid arguments are: X, Z, C.
(*** argument not allowed)
47 G140 – –
48 G149 Specified argument is not Q, X, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
nor C. Valid arguments are: Q, X, Z, C.
(*** argument not allowed)
49 G156 – –

6-165
L32

Alarm message
No. Code Alarm condition
(24 characters by 7 lines)
50 G164 Specified argument is not H nor Invalid argument was specified.
D. Valid arguments are: H, D.
(*** argument not allowed)
H argument is not specified. Specify the H argument.
D argument is not specified. Specify the D argument.
Other than 1 or 2 is specified for H Allowable value for H argument is 1 or 2.
argument.
Other than ±3, ±4, or ±5 is Allowable value for D argument is ±3, ±4, or ±5.
specified for D argument.
51 G173 Specified argument is not X, Z, Y, Invalid argument was specified.
U, W, V, nor D. Valid arguments are: X, Z, Y, U, W, V, D. (***
argument not allowed)
52 G200's (except G231) Other than G231 is specified for Invalid G code is specified. (G*** command not
G200's. allowed)
53 G231 G231 is specified in $2. Specify G231 in $1.
Specified argument in $1 is not $1 Invalid argument was specified.
X, F, A, nor Z. Valid arguments are: X, F, A, Z.
(*** argument not allowed)
A argument is not specified in $1. Specify the A argument.
54 G300's G300 level command other than Invalid G code is specified. (G*** command not
G370 was specified. allowed)
55 G370 Specified argument is not A, C, D, Invalid argument was specified.
E, F, H, I, J, K, Q, R, S, T, U, X, or Valid arguments are A, C, D, E, F, H, I, J, K, Q, R,
Z. S, T, U, X, or Z. (*** argument not allowed)
A argument is not specified. Specify the A argument.
C argument is not specified. Specify the C argument.
D argument is not specified. Specify the D argument.
Q argument is not specified. Specify the Q argument.
Allowable value for Q argument is ±1.
F argument is not specified. Specify the F argument.
H argument is not specified. Specify the H argument.
I argument is not specified. Specify the I argument.
J argument is not specified. Specify the J argument.
A value other than 2 or 3 is Allowable value for E argument is 2 or 3.
specified for the E argument.
A value other than ±1 is specified Allowable value for Q argument is ±1.
for the Q argument.
A value other than 1 is specified Allowable value for T argument is 1.
for the T argument.
56 G400's G400's command is specified. Invalid G code is specified. (G*** command not
allowed)
57 G500's G500's command is specified. Invalid G code is specified. (G*** command not
allowed)
58 G600's (except Other than G600, G610, G620, Invalid G code is specified. (G*** command not
G600, G610, G620 G621, G622, G630, G650, or allowed)
G621, G622, G630 G660
G650, G660) is specified for G600's.
59 G600 Other than W argument is Invalid argument was specified.
specified in $2. Valid argument is: W.
(*** argument not allowed)
A value other than 0 is specified Allowable value for W argument is 0.
for W argument in $2.
60 G610 Other than W argument is Invalid argument was specified.
specified in $2. Valid argument is: W.
(*** argument not allowed)
A value other than 0 is specified Allowable value for W argument is 0.
for W argument in $2.
61 G620 Other than Z argument is Invalid argument was specified.
specified in $2. Valid argument is: Z.
(*** argument not allowed)

6-166
 L32

Alarm message
No. Code Alarm condition
(24 characters by 7 lines)
62 G621 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)
63 G622 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)
64 G630 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)
65 G650 Specified argument in $2 is not Z, Invalid argument was specified.
U, nor W. Valid arguments are: Z, U, W.
(*** argument not allowed)
A value other than 0 is specified Allowable value for U argument is 0.
for U argument in $2.
A value other than 0 is specified Allowable value for V argument is 0.
for V argument in $2.
A value other than 0 is specified Allowable value for W argument is 0.
for W argument in $2.
66 G660 Other than W or X argument is Invalid argument was specified.
specified in $2. Valid arguments are: W, X.
(*** argument not allowed)
A value other than 0 is specified Allowable value for W argument is 0.
for W argument in $2.
A value other than 2 is specified Allowable value for X argument is 2.
for X argument in $2.
67 G700's G700's command is specified. Invalid G code is specified. (G*** command not
allowed)
68 G800's (except Other than G813, G814, or G899 Invalid G code is specified. (G*** command not
G813, G814, G899) is allowed)
specified for G800's.
69 G814 A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for R argument is between 0 and
and 360 is specified for R less than 360.
argument.
70 G900's (except Other than G950, G951, or G999 Invalid G code is specified. (G*** command not
G950, G951, G999) is allowed)
specified for G900's.
71 G900 Other than $1 or $2 is specified. Specify the G900 in $1 or $2.
Specified argument is not X, Z, Y Invalid argument was specified.
nor B. Valid arguments are: X, Z, Y, B.
(*** argument not allowed)
X argument is not specified. Specify the X argument.
Z argument is not specified. Specify the Z argument.
A value out of range between Allowable range for B argument is between -91.0
-91.0 and 91.0 is specified for B and 91.0.
argument.
72 G901 Specified argument is not B. Invalid argument was specified.
Valid arguments is B.
(*** argument not allowed)
A value out of range between Allowable range for B argument is between -91.0
-91.0 and 91.0 is specified for B and 91.0.
argument.
73 G910 Specified argument is not B nor Invalid argument was specified.
D. Valid arguments is B, D.
(*** argument not allowed)
A value out of range between Allowable range for B argument is between -91.0
-91.0 and 91.0 is specified for B and 91.0.
argument.
Other than 1 is specified for D Allowable value for D argument is 1.
argument.

6-167
L32

Alarm message
No. Code Alarm condition
(24 characters by 7 lines)
74 G950 Specified argument is not X, Z, Y Invalid argument was specified.
nor B. Valid arguments are: X, Z, Y, B.
(*** argument not allowed)
A value out of range between Allowable range for B argument is between -91.0
-91.0 and 91.0 is specified for B and 91.0.
argument.
75 G1200 to G1399 – –
are user macro
numbers.
76 G1400 or higher Greater than G1400 is specified. Invalid G code is specified. (G*** command not
allowed)
M code
1 M12 to M14, M17, The M codes described left was Invalid M code is specified. (M*** command not
M19, M21, M22, specified. allowed)
M26,
M27, M29, M30,
M32,
M35 to M37,
M40 to M42, M44,
M45, M49,
M57 to M60,
M66 to M71,
M74 to M76, M90,
M91 and M109,
M112 to M116,
M118 to M121,
M125 to M139,
M142 to M150,
M152 to M159,
M170 to M179,
M183 to M189,
M192 to M203,
M206 to M209,
M213 to M237,
M240 to M259,
M270 to M319,
M321 to M333,
M336 to M349,
M352 to M359,
M362 to M429,
M438 to M451,
M454 to M779,
M781 to M799,
M801,
M803 or higher
2 M3 – –
3 M4 – –
4 M5 to M9 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)
5 M10 Specified argument is not Z, F nor Invalid argument was specified.
T. Valid arguments are: Z, T, F.
(*** argument not allowed)
A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for T argument is between 0 and
and 100 is specified for T 100.
argument.
6 M11 Specified argument is not Z nor F. Invalid argument was specified.
Valid arguments are: Z, F.
(*** argument not allowed)
7 M15, M16 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)

6-168
 L32

Alarm message
No. Code Alarm condition
(24 characters by 7 lines)
8 M18 Other than C argument is Invalid argument was specified.
specified. Valid argument is: C.
(*** argument not allowed)
A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for C argument is between 0 and
and 360 is specified for C less than 360.
argument.
9 M20 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)
10 M23 – –
11 M24 – –
12 M25 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)
13 M28 Specified argument is not S. Invalid argument was specified.
Valid argument is: S.
(*** argument not allowed)
A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for S argument is between 0 and
and 359 is specified for S 359.
argument.
14 M31 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)
15 M33 Specified argument is not W, D, Invalid argument was specified.
U, nor E. Valid arguments are: W, D, U, E.
(*** argument not allowed)
16 M34 Specified argument is not X, Y, Invalid argument was specified.
W, D, U, E, Z, F, T, B, S, or K1. Valid arguments are X, Y, W, D, U, E, Z, F, T, B,
S, and K1. (*** argument not allowed)
Other than 1 is specified for K Allowable value for K argument is 1.
argument.
17 M48 Other than C argument is Invalid argument was specified.
specified. Valid argument is: C.
(*** argument not allowed)
A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for C argument is between 0 and
and 360 is specified for C less than 360.
argument.
18 M50 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)
19 M51 Specified argument is not X, W, Invalid argument was specified.
nor F. Valid arguments are: X, W, F.
(*** argument not allowed)
20 M52 to M56 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
M61 to M65 (*** argument not allowed)
M72, M73, M77
21 M78 Specified argument is not S. Invalid argument was specified.
Valid argument is: S.
(*** argument not allowed)
A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for S argument is between 0 and
and 359 is specified for S 359.
argument.
22 M79 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)
23 M80 – –
24 M81 – –
25 M82 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)
26 M83 – –
27 M84 – –
28 M85 to M89 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
M92 to M97 (*** argument not allowed)

6-169
L32

Alarm message
No. Code Alarm condition
(24 characters by 7 lines)
29 M98 Specified argument is not P, H, L, Invalid argument was specified.
nor ",D". Valid arguments are: P, H, L, ",D".
(*** argument not allowed)
A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for P argument is between 0 and
and 99999999 is specified for P 99999999.
argument.
A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for H argument is between 0 and
and 99999 is specified for H 99999.
argument.
A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for L argument is between 0 and
and 9999 is specified for L 9999.
argument.
Other than 2 is specified for ,D Allowable value for ",D" argument is 2.
argument.
30 M99 Specified argument is not P nor L. Invalid argument was specified.
Valid arguments are: P, L.
(*** argument not allowed)
31 M100 to M107 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)
32 M108 The specified argument is not U, Invalid argument was specified.
C, B, D, W, F, S, R, A, K, T, E, X Valid arguments are: U, C, B, D, W, F, S, R, A, K,
or I. T, E, X or I.
(*** argument not allowed)
Other than 1 is specified for R Allowable value for R argument is 1.
argument.
Other than 1 is specified for K Allowable value for K argument is 1.
argument.
A value other than 1 is specified Allowable value for E argument is 1.
for the E argument.
33 M122 to M124 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)
34 M140 Specified argument is not W nor Invalid argument was specified.
Z. Valid arguments are: W, Z.
(*** argument not allowed)
35 M141 Specified argument is not W nor Invalid argument was specified.
Z. Valid arguments are: W, Z.
(*** argument not allowed)
36 M151 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
M160 to M169 (*** argument not allowed)
M176 Specified argument is not T. Invalid argument was specified.
Valid argument is: T
(*** argument not allowed)
A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for T argument is between 0 and
and 100 is specified for T 100.
argument.
37 M180 – –
38 M181 – –
39 M182 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
M190,M191 (*** argument not allowed)
M204,M205
40 M211 Specified argument is not Y. Invalid argument was specified.
Valid argument is: Y
(*** argument not allowed)
Other than 1 or 2 is specified for Y Allowable value for Y argument is 1 or 2.
argument.
41 M212 Specified argument is not Y. Invalid argument was specified.
Valid argument is: Y
(*** argument not allowed)
Other than 1 or 2 is specified for Y Allowable value for Y argument is 1 or 2.
argument.

6-170
 L32

Alarm message
No. Code Alarm condition
(24 characters by 7 lines)
42 M238 Specified argument is not A. Invalid argument was specified.
Valid argument is: A.
(*** argument not allowed)
A value out of range between 1 Allowable range for A argument is between 1 and
and 9 is specified for A argument. 9.
43 M239 Specified argument is not Z, F, T, Invalid argument was specified.
nor K. Valid arguments are: Z, F, T, nor K.
A value out of range between 0 Allowable range for T argument is between 0 and
and 100 is specified for T 100.
argument.
Other than 1,2 is specified for K Allowable value for K argument is 1 or 2.
argument.
44 M260 to M269 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)
45 M320 Specified argument is not X, W, Invalid argument was specified.
U, V, Z, R, nor F. Valid arguments are: X, W, U, V, Z, R, F. (***
argument not allowed)
46 M350 Specified argument is not X, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
nor Y. Valid arguments are: X, Z, Y.
(*** argument not allowed)
A value out of range between 1 Allowable range for X argument is between 1 and
and 32000 is specified for X 32000.
argument.
A value out of range between 1 Allowable range for Z argument is between 1 and
and 32000 is specified for Z 32000.
argument.
A value out of range between 1 Allowable range for Y argument is between 1 and
and 32000 is specified for Y 32000.
argument.
47 M351 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
(*** argument not allowed)
48 M360 Specified argument is not X, Z, Invalid argument was specified.
nor Y. Valid arguments are: X, Z, Y.
(*** argument not allowed)
A value out of range between 1 Allowable range for X argument is between 1 and
and 6 is specified for X argument. 6.
A value out of range between 1 Allowable range for Z argument is between 1 and
and 6 is specified for Z argument. 6.
A value out of range between 1 Allowable range for Y argument is between 1 and
and 6 is specified for Y argument. 6.
49 M361 Argument was specified. Invalid argument was specified.
M430 to M437 (*** argument not allowed)
M452
M453
M780
S code
1 S number Other than S1, S2, S3, S5, or S9 is Invalid S number is specified.
specified. (S* command not allowed)
A value over 10000 is specified Allowable range for "S1" argument is between 0
for S1 argument. and 10000.
A value over 8000 is specified for Allowable range for "S2" argument is between 0
S2 argument. and 8000.
A value over 5000 is specified for Allowable range for "S3" argument is between 0
S3 argument. and 5000.
A value over 7500 is specified for Allowable range for "S4" argument is between 0
S4 argument. and 7500.
A value over 5000 is specified for Allowable range for "S5" argument is between 0
S5 argument. and 5000.

6-171
L32

Alarm message
No. Code Alarm condition
(24 characters by 7 lines)
B code
1 MB number A value out of range between 1 Allowable range for MB number is between 1 and
and 255 is specified for MB 255.
number.
N number
1 N number A value out of range between 1 Allowable range for N number is between 1 and
and 99999 99999.
Specification
Others
1 Parentheses in Number of parentheses unmatch. Number of open parentheses "(" do not match the
comment close parentheses ")".
The specified parentheses are six Specify the parentheses five folds or less.
fold or more.
2 Variable number The specified variable number of The specified variable number of out of range.
out of range.
3 Arithmetic expression Illegal arithmetic expression. The specified arithmetic expression is illegal.
4 No. of characters Over 250 characters are specified Allowable number of characters per block is 250.
for single block. Use alphanumeric and symbol characters.

6-172
 L32

6.9.5 Creating and editing machining data

This section explains the procedure for creating and editing the machining data of a program.
You cannot edit the machining data of the program that is being operated.
[Procedure]
Creating and editing machining data
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key .

The last screen selected appears.
3. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
4. Call the program you want to edit.
The Edit screen appears.
5. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key to enable the submenu key.
6. Press the menu key [MC-Data].
The Machining Data screen appears.
7. Use the Page key or the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the item for which you want to
enter a value or change the current value.
8. Press the alphanumeric keys to enter the numeric value.
9. Press the Input key .

10. The entered new value is set. The cursor moves to the next item. If you press the Arrow keys before the

Input key , the entered value is set back to the original value.

[Note]
Entering the value in the field "Cut-Off End (DIA)" with no + or – sign causes an input error to occur.

6-173
L32

[Procedure]
Setting the holder name
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ". The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key . The previously selected screen appears.

3. Press the menu key [List]. The List screen appears.

4. Call the program you want to edit. The Edit screen appears.
5. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key to enable the submenu key.
6. Press the menu key [MC-Data]. The Machining Data screen appears.
7. Use the Page key or the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the Tool Post field for which you
want to change a tool post.
List of available holders is displayed.

[Note]
Use the Page key to view the guidance.

8. Press the Numeric key to select the number.

9. Press the Input key .

The selected holder name is set. The cursor moves to the next item. If you press the Arrow keys before
the Input key, the entered value is set back to the original value.

[Note]
While the Program edit switch key is set to " ", you cannot edit the program or machining data.

6-174
 L32

6.9.6 Data input and output

The machining program, offset, and parameters can be input and output by connecting various input devices to the
machine.
6.9.6.1 Setting the input/output device and communication parameter
The Citizen recommended input/output unit are as follows.
• CF (Compact flash) card drive (front slot)
• USB flash drive (front slot)
When using a different input/output unit, refer to <"Input/output Parameters"> in the NC unit instruction manual and set
the RS-232C conditions. (RS232C is an option.)
[Procedure]
1. Press the Edit key .
The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [232C SET].
The RS232C Setting screen appears.

5. With the cursor in "Input/Output Destination", enter the number for the unit to be selected.
6. Press the Input key .
The unit is selected and the information of parameter is displayed.
7. Set the communication parameters of the selected unit.

6-175
L32

6.9.6.2 Connecting input/output unit

Be sure to turn off the machine main power before installing or removing the input/output device. There is
the danger of electric shock if this work is done while the power is on.

[Procedure]
Installation of CF card
1. Open the cover at the right of the display unit.
2. Insert the CF card into the CF card slot with its surface leftward. Pay attention to the orientation of the card.

[Procedure]
Removal of CF card
1. Confirm that no data is being input or output, and pull out the CF card from the CF card slot.
2. Certainly close the cover at the right of the display unit.

6-176
 L32

The following memory cards commercially available are already checked to operate normaly.
Memory cards
• Compact flash cards
Recommended CF cards

CITIZEN MACHINERY
Machine type Capacity
M416U810T 512MB
M416U811T 1GB
M416U812T 2GB

Notes on Memory Cards

• To prevent any error from occurring, turn off the power of the system before removing or inserting a memory card.
• To prevent memory data from being erased, neither pull out a memory card and nor turn off the power during data
accessing.
• We cannot secure damaged and erased data. Accordingly, back up important data to other storage as a precaution.
[Procedure]
Installation of USB flash drive
1. Open the cover at the right of the display unit.
2. Insert the USB flash drive into USB port. Pay attention to the orientation of the USB flash drive.

[Procedure]
Removal of USB flash drive
1. Confirm that no data is being input or output, and pull out the USB flash drive from the USB port.
2. Certainly close the cover at the right of the display unit.

6-177
L32

[Procedure]
Connecting the RS232C (optional) communication device

[Note]
A 25-pin RS232C connector is provided. Connect the RS232C communication device using the cable with the 25-pin
RS232C connector.

6-178
 L32

6.9.6.3 Inputting the machining program from external devices

You can load the machining program from the input/output device using the following procedure.
[Procedure]
Input from the CF card
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key .

The previously selected screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
6. Press the menu key [Input].
7. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Machining program",
then press the Input key .
The "Machining program" is selected, and the cursor moves to Folder in "External" field.
8. Enter the number assigned to the "CF card" and press the Input key .
The "External" folder is determined, and the cursor moves to Folder in "External" field.
9. Enter the number for the target directory, then press the Input key .
The "External" directory is selected.
10. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to "program" in "External" field. Enter the number for the target file, then
press the Input key .
The "External" program is selected.
11. Press the Input key .
Data input starts.

6-179
L32

[Procedure]
Input from the USB flash drive
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key .

The previously selected screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
6. Press the menu key [Input].
7. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Machining program",
then press the Input key .
The "Machining program" is selected, and the cursor moves to Folder in "External" field.
8. Enter the number assigned to the "USB flash drive" and press the Input key .
The "External" folder is determined, and the cursor moves to Folder in "External" field.
9. Enter the number for the target directory, then press the Input key .
The "External" directory is selected.
10. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to "program" in "External" field. Enter the number for the target file, then
press the Input key .
The "External" program is selected.
11. Press the Input key .
Data input starts.

[Note]
• An error message is displayed if 100 items are exceeded for any of Folder, Directory and Program.
• A folder name, directory name and program name can contain up to 62 characters. If several directories are
structured in hierarchy, the limit of the number of characters of total directory names is 62 characters. Characters
specified over 62 characters cannot be displayed.
• A space character or a 2-byte character is not allowed for directory name.

6-180
 L32

[Procedure]
Input from the RS232C (optional) communication device
The following explanation assumes the RS232C(optional) communication device has already been installed.
1. Power on the RS232C communication device to make it ready to communicate.
2. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

3. Press the Edit key .

The previously selected screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
6. Press the menu key [RS232C].
The RS232C screen appears.
7. Press the menu key [Input].
8. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Machining program",
then press the Input key .
The "Machining program" is selected, and the cursor moves to Communication Parameter in "External Device"
field.
9. Enter the number for the target parameter, then press the Input key .
The communication setting is confirmed and the cursor moves to "I/O Port" in "External Device" field.
10. Enter the number for the I/O Port, then press the Input key .
The I/O port is confirmed.
11. Press the Input key .
The machine is ready to receive data.
12. Output data from the RS232C communication device.
13. A message "Input Completed" will be displayed when all the data is received by the machine side.
[Note]
• For details on the operation method, see the RS232C (optional) communication device Instruction Manual.
• Confirm that the communication protocol of the machine side is identical to that of the RS232C communication
device.

6-181
L32

6.9.6.4 Inputting the tool offset data from external devices

You can load the tool offset data from the input/output device using the following procedure.
[Procedure]
Input from the CF card

1. Press the Offset key .

The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [Input].
5. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Offset data", then press
the Input key .
The "Offset data" is selected, and the cursor moves to Folder in "External" field.
6. Enter the number assigned to the "CF card" and press the Input key .
The "External" folder is selected, and the cursor moves to Directory in "External" field.
7. Enter the number for the target directory, then press the Input key .
The "External" directory is selected.
8. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to "file" in "External" field. Enter the number for the target file, then press
the Input key .
The "External" file is selected.
9. Press the Input key .
Data input starts.

[Note]
• An error message is displayed if 100 items are exceeded for any of Folder, Directory and Program.
• A folder name, directory name and program name can contain up to 62 characters. If several directories are
structured in hierarchy, the limit of the number of characters of total directory names is 62 characters. Characters
specified over 62 characters cannot be displayed.
• A space character or a 2-byte character is not allowed for directory name.

6-182
 L32

[Procedure]
Input from the USB flash drive

1. Press the Offset key .

The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [Input].
5. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Offset data", then press
the Input key .
The "Offset data" is selected, and the cursor moves to Folder in "External" field.
6. Enter the number assigned to the "USB flash drive" and press the Input key .
The "External" folder is selected, and the cursor moves to Directory in "External" field.
7. Enter the number for the target directory, then press the Input key .
The "External" directory is selected.
8. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to "file" in "External" field. Enter the number for the target file, then press
the Input key .
The "External" file is selected.
9. Press the Input key .
Data input starts.

[Note]
• An error message is displayed if 100 items are exceeded for any of Folder, Directory and Program.
• A folder name, directory name and program name can contain up to 62 characters. If several directories are
structured in hierarchy, the limit of the number of characters of total directory names is 62 characters. Characters
specified over 62 characters cannot be displayed.
• A space character or a 2-byte character is not allowed for directory name.

6-183
L32

[Procedure]
Input from the RS232C (optional) communication device
1. Power on the RS232C communication device to make it ready to communicate.
2. Press the Offset key .
The previously selected screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [RS232C].
The RS232C screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [Input].
6. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Offset data", then press
the Input key .
The "Offset data" is selected, and the cursor moves to Communication Parameter in "External Device" field.
7. Enter the number for the target parameter, then press the Input key .
The parameter for communication is selected, and the cursor moves to Input/Output Port in "External Device"
field.
8. Enter the number for the I/O Port, then press the Input key .
The input/output port is selected.
9. Press the Input key .
The machine is ready to receive data.
10. Output data from the RS232C communication device.
11. A message "Input Completed" will be displayed when all the data is received by the machine side.
[Note]
• For details on the operation method, see the RS232C (optional) communication device Instruction Manual.
• Confirm that the communication protocol of the machine side is identical to that of the RS232C communication
device.

6-184
 L32

6.9.6.5 Inputting the parameter (including machine-specific data)

You can load the tool parameter (including machine-specific data) from the input/output device using the following
procedure.
[Procedure]
Input from the CF card

1. Press the Parameter key .

The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [I/O] is displayed.
Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [Input].
5. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Parameter (txt)", then
press the Input key .
The "Parameter (txt)" is selected, and the cursor moves to Folder in "External" field.
6. Enter the number assigned to "CF Card 1", then press the Input key .
The "External" folder is selected, and the cursor moves to Directory in "External" field.
7. Enter the number for the target directory, then press the Input key .
The "External" directory is selected.
8. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to "file" in "External" field. Enter the number for the target file, then press
the Input key .
The "External" file is selected.
9. Press the Input key .
Data input starts.

[Note]
• An error message is displayed if 100 items are exceeded for any of Folder, Directory and Program.
• A folder name, directory name and program name can contain up to 62 characters. If several directories are
structured in hierarchy, the limit of the number of characters of total directory names is 62 characters. Characters
specified over 62 characters cannot be displayed.
• A space character or a 2-byte character is not allowed for directory name.

6-185
L32

[Procedure]
Input from the USB flash drive

1. Press the Parameter key .

The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [I/O] is displayed.
Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [Input].
5. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Parameter (txt)", then
press the Input key .
The "Parameter (txt)" is selected, and the cursor moves to Folder in "External" field.
6. Enter the number assigned to the "USB flash drive" and press the Input key .
The "External" folder is selected, and the cursor moves to Directory in "External" field.
7. Enter the number for the target directory, then press the Input key .
The "External" directory is selected.
8. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to "file" in "External" field. Enter the number for the target file, then press
the Input key .
The "External" file is selected.
9. Press the Input key .
Data input starts.

[Note]
• An error message is displayed if 100 items are exceeded for any of Folder, Directory and Program.
• A folder name, directory name and program name can contain up to 62 characters. If several directories are
structured in hierarchy, the limit of the number of characters of total directory names is 62 characters. Characters
specified over 62 characters cannot be displayed.
• A space character or a 2-byte character is not allowed for directory name.

6-186
 L32

[Procedure]
Input from the RS232C (optional) communication device
1. Power on the RS232C communication device to make it ready to communicate.
2. Press the Parameter key .
The previously selected screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [I/O] is displayed.
Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [RS232C].
The RS232C screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [Input].
6. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Parameter (txt)", then
press the Input key .
The "Parameter(txt)" is selected, and the cursor moves to Communication Parameter in "External Device" field.
7. Enter the number for the target parameter, then press the Input key .
The parameter for communication is selected, and the cursor moves to Input/Output Port in "External Device"
field.
8. Enter the number for the I/O Port, then press the Input key .
The input/output port is selected.
9. Press the Input key .
The machine is ready to receive data.
10. Output data from the RS232C communication device.
11. A message "Input Completed" will be displayed when all the data is received by the machine side.
[Note]
• For details on the operation method, see the RS232C (optional) communication device Instruction Manual.
• Confirm that the communication protocol of the machine side is identical to that of the RS232C communication
device.

6-187
L32

6.9.6.6 Outputting the machining program to external devices

You can send the machining program to the input/output device using the following procedure.
[Procedure]
Output to the CF card
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key .

The previously selected screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
6. Press the menu key [Output].
7. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Machining program",
then press the Input key .
The "Machining program" is selected, and the cursor moves to Folder in "External" field.
8. Enter the number assigned to the "CF card" and press the Input key .
The "External" folder is selected, and the cursor moves to Directory in "External" field.
9. Enter the number for the target directory, then press the Input key .
The "External" directory is selected.
10. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "NC", then press the
Input key .
The "NC" program is selected.
11. Press the Input key .
Data output starts.

[Note]
• An error message is displayed if 100 items are exceeded for any of Folder, Directory and Program.
• A folder name, directory name and program name can contain up to 62 characters. If several directories are
structured in hierarchy, the limit of the number of characters of total directory names is 62 characters. Characters
specified over 62 characters cannot be displayed.
• A space character or a 2-byte character is not allowed for directory name.

6-188
 L32

[Procedure]
Output to the USB flash drive
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key .

The previously selected screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
6. Press the menu key [Output].
7. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Machining program",
then press the Input key .
The "Machining program" is selected, and the cursor moves to Folder in "External" field.
8. Enter the number assigned to the "USB flash drive" and press the Input key .
The "External" folder is selected, and the cursor moves to Directory in "External" field.
9. Enter the number for the target directory, then press the Input key .
The "External" directory is selected.
10. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "NC", then press the
Input key .
The "NC" program is selected.
11. Press the Input key .
Data output starts.

[Note]
• An error message is displayed if 100 items are exceeded for any of Folder, Directory and Program.
• A folder name, directory name and program name can contain up to 62 characters. If several directories are
structured in hierarchy, the limit of the number of characters of total directory names is 62 characters. Characters
specified over 62 characters cannot be displayed.
• A space character or a 2-byte character is not allowed for directory name.

6-189
L32

[Procedure]
Output to the RS232C (optional) communication device
1. Power on the RS232C communication device to make it ready to communicate.
2. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

3. Press the Edit key .

The previously selected screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
6. Press the menu key [RS232C].
The RS232C screen appears.
7. Press the menu key [Output].
8. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Machining program",
then press the Input key .
The "Machining program" is selected, and the cursor moves to Communication Parameter in "External Device"
field.
9. Enter the number for the target parameter, then press the Input key .
The parameter for communication is selected, and the cursor moves to Input/Output Port in "External Device"
field.
10. Enter the number for the I/O Port, then press the Input key .
The input/output port is selected.
11. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "NC", then press the
Input key .
The "NC" program is selected.
12. Press the Input key .
The machine is ready to send data.
13. Data input from the RS232C communication device starts.
14. A message "Output Completed" will be displayed when all the data is received by the machine side.
[Note]
• For details on the operation method, see the RS232C (optional) communication device Instruction Manual.
• Confirm that the communication protocol of the machine side is identical to that of the RS232C communication
device.

6-190
 L32

6.9.6.7 Outputting the tool offset data to external devices

You can output the tool offset data to the input/output device using the following procedure.
[Procedure]
Output to the CF card

1. Press the Offset key .

The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [Output].
5. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Offset data", then press
the Input key .
The "Offset data" is selected, and the cursor moves to Folder in "External" field.
6. Enter the number assigned to the "CF card" and press the Input key .
The "External" folder is selected, and the cursor moves to Directory in "External" field.
7. Enter the number for the target directory, then press the Input key .
The "External" directory is selected.
8. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "NC" file, then press the
Input key .
The "NC" file is selected.
9. Press the Input key .
Data output starts.

[Note]
• An error message is displayed if 100 items are exceeded for any of Folder, Directory and Program.
• A folder name, directory name and program name can contain up to 62 characters. If several directories are
structured in hierarchy, the limit of the number of characters of total directory names is 62 characters. Characters
specified over 62 characters cannot be displayed.
• A space character or a 2-byte character is not allowed for directory name.

6-191
L32

[Procedure]
Output to the USB flash drive

1. Press the Offset key .

The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [Output].
5. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Offset data", then press
the Input key .
The "Offset data" is selected, and the cursor moves to Folder in "External" field.
6. Enter the number assigned to the "USB flash drive" and press the Input key .
The "External" folder is selected, and the cursor moves to Directory in "External" field.
7. Enter the number for the target directory, then press the Input key .
The "External" directory is selected.
8. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "NC" file, then press the
Input key .
The "NC" file is selected.
9. Press the Input key .
Data output starts.

[Note]
• An error message is displayed if 100 items are exceeded for any of Folder, Directory and Program.
• A folder name, directory name and program name can contain up to 62 characters. If several directories are
structured in hierarchy, the limit of the number of characters of total directory names is 62 characters. Characters
specified over 62 characters cannot be displayed.
• A space character or a 2-byte character is not allowed for directory name.

6-192
 L32

[Procedure]
Output to the RS232C (optional) communication device
1. Power on the RS232C communication device to make it ready to communicate.
2. Press the Offset key .
The previously selected screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [RS232C].
The RS232C screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [Output].
6. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Offset data", then press
the Input key .
The "Offset data" is selected, and the cursor moves to Communication Parameter in "External Device" field.
7. Enter the number for the target parameter, then press the Input key .
The parameter for communication is selected, and the cursor moves to Input/Output Port in "External Device"
field.
8. Enter the number for the I/O Port, then press the Input key .
The input/output port is selected.
9. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "NC" file, then press the
Input key .
The "NC" file is selected.
10. Press the Input key .
The machine is ready to send data.
11. Data input from the RS232C communication device starts.
12. A message "Output Completed" will be displayed when all the data is received by the machine side.

[Note]
• For details on the operation method, see the RS232C (optional) communication device Instruction Manual.
• Confirm that the communication protocol of the machine side is identical to that of the RS232C communication
device.

6-193
L32

6.9.6.8 Outputting the parameter (including machine-specific data)

You can send the tool parameter (including machine-specific data) to the input/output device using the following
procedure.
[Procedure]
Output to the CF card

1. Press the Parameter key .

The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [I/O] is displayed.
Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [Output].
5. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Parameter (txt)", then
press the Input key .
The "Parameter (txt)" is selected, and the cursor moves to Folder in "External" field.
6. Enter the number assigned to "CF Card", then press the Input key .
The "External" folder is selected, and the cursor moves to Directory in "External" field.
7. Enter the number for the target directory, then press the Input key .
The "External" directory is selected.
8. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "NC" file, then press the
Input key .
The "NC" file is selected.
9. Press the Input key .
Data output starts.

[Note]
• An error message is displayed if 100 items are exceeded for any of Folder, Directory and Program.
• A folder name, directory name and program name can contain up to 62 characters. If several directories are
structured in hierarchy, the limit of the number of characters of total directory names is 62 characters. Characters
specified over 62 characters cannot be displayed.
• A space character or a 2-byte character is not allowed for directory name.

6-194
 L32

[Procedure]
Output to the USB flash drive

1. Press the Parameter key .

The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [I/O] is displayed.
Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [Output].
5. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Parameter (txt)", then
press the Input key .
The "Parameter (txt)" is selected, and the cursor moves to Folder in "External" field.
6. Enter the number assigned to "USB flash drive", then press the Input key .
The "External" folder is selected, and the cursor moves to Directory in "External" field.
7. Enter the number for the target directory, then press the Input key .
The "External" directory is selected.
8. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "NC" file, then press the
Input key .
The "NC" file is selected.
9. Press the Input key .
Data output starts.

[Note]
• An error message is displayed if 100 items are exceeded for any of Folder, Directory and Program.
• A folder name, directory name and program name can contain up to 62 characters. If several directories are
structured in hierarchy, the limit of the number of characters of total directory names is 62 characters. Characters
specified over 62 characters cannot be displayed.
• A space character or a 2-byte character is not allowed for directory name.

6-195
L32

[Procedure]
Output to the RS232C (optional) communication device
1. Power on the RS232C communication device to make it ready to communicate.
2. Press the Parameter key .
The previously selected screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [I/O] is displayed.
Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [RS232C].
The RS232C screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [Output].
6. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Parameter (txt)", then
press the Input key .
The "Parameter(txt)" is selected, and the cursor moves to Communication Parameter in "External Device" field.
7. Enter the number for the target parameter, then press the Input key .
The parameter for communication is selected, and the cursor moves to Input/Output Port in "External Device"
field.
8. Enter the number for the I/O Port, then press the Input key .
The input/output port is selected.
9. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "NC" file, then press the
Input key .
The "NC" file is selected.
10. Press the Input key .
The machine is ready to send data.
11. Data input from the RS232C communication device starts.
12. A message "Output Completed" will be displayed when all the data is received by the machine side.
[Note]
• For details on the operation method, see the RS232C (optional) communication device Instruction Manual.
• Confirm that the communication protocol of the machine side is identical to that of the RS232C communication
device.

6-196
 L32

6.9.6.9 Output of Eco / Machine Operation Information

Use the following procedures to output the Eco / Machine Operation Information data file from the machine to external
I/O device.

[Note]
• Eco / Machine Operation Information cannot be output to the machine.
• Eco / Machine Operation Information data file cannot output through the RS232C interface.
[Procedure]
Output to the CF card

1. Press the Edit key .

The previously selected screen appears.

2. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [Output].
6. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Eco / Machine
Operation Information", then press the Input key .
The "Eco / Machine Operation Information" is selected, and the cursor moves to Folder in "External" field.
7. Enter the number assigned to "CF Card ", then press the Input key .
The "External" folder is selected, and the cursor moves to Directory in "External" field.
8. Enter the number for the target directory, then press the Input key .
The "External" directory is selected.
9. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to "NC file" field. Enter the number assigned to "NC", then press the Input
key .
The "NC" program is selected.
10. Press the Input key .
Data output starts.

6-197
L32

[Procedure]
Output to the USB flash drive

1. Press the Edit key .

The previously selected screen appears.

2. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [Output].
6. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to I/O Contents field. Enter the number assigned to "Eco / Machine
Operation Information", then press the Input key .
The "Eco / Machine Operation Information" is selected, and the cursor moves to Folder in "External" field.
7. Enter the number assigned to "USB flash drive", then press the Input key .
The "External" folder is selected, and the cursor moves to Directory in "External" field.
8. Enter the number for the target directory, then press the Input key .
The "External" directory is selected.
9. Use the Arrow key to move the cursor to "NC file" field. Enter the number assigned to "NC", then press the Input
key .
The "NC" program is selected.
10. Press the Input key .
Data output starts.

[Note]
• When outputting the Power Consumption data, three files (YYCns.csv, MMCns.csv, and DDCns.csv) are output at
the same time. Each file cannot be output individually.
• When outputting the Electric Power Regeneration data, three files (YYRgn.csv, MMRgn.csv, and DDRgn.csv) are
output at the same time. Each file cannot be output individually.
• When outputting the Reduction Power data, three files (YYEco.csv, MMEco.csv, and DDEco.csv) are output at the
same time. Each file cannot be output individually.
• When outputting the Machine Operation Information data, four files (YYEchOpe.csv, MMEchOpe.csv,
DDEchOpe.csv, and DDTimOpe.csv) are output at the same time. Each file cannot be output individually.
• When outputting the Cutting Time data, three files (YYCut.csv, MMCut.csv, and DDCut.csv) are output at the same
time. Each file cannot be output individually.
• See <8.17 Csv File Format of Eco and Machine Operation Information> for the data format of each file.
• The last output date is displayed on each graph screen. See <6.20 Eco Screen> or <6.21 Machine Operation
Information Screen> for details of graph indication.
• A folder name and directory name can contain up to 62 characters. If several directories are structured in hierarchy,
the limit of the number of characters of total directory names is 62 characters. Characters specified over 62
characters cannot be displayed.
• A space character or a 2-byte character is not allowed for directory name.

6-198
 L32

6.9.6.10 DPRINT output setting

Use this menu to provide setting for external device when transferring data which is output at the program execution
using the DPRINT function.
When the output destination is "CF Card," "USB flash drive" or "Network Drive", the data is transferred with the file
name "PRNT.PRN".

[Procedure]
Output to the RS232C (optional) communication device

1. Press the Edit key .

The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
3. Press the menu key [I/O].
The previously selected screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [DRPN Set].
The DPRINT output setting screen appears.
The cursor appears on the output destination.
5. Enter the number assigned to "RS232C", and press the Input key .
The "RS232C" is selected, and the cursor moves to Communication Parameter in "RS232C" field.
6. Enter the number assigned to the communication parameter to be used for output, and press the Input key .
The parameter for communication is determined, and the cursor moves to Input/Output Port in "RS232C" field.
7. Enter the destination port number, and press the Input key .

[Procedure]
Output to the CF card

1. Press the Edit key . The previously selected screen appears.

2. Press the menu key [List]. The List screen appears.

3. Press the menu key [I/O]. The previously selected screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [DRPN Set].
The DPRINT output setting screen appears.
The cursor appears on the output destination.
5. Enter the number assigned to "CF Card", and press the Input key .

6-199
L32

[Procedure]
Output to the USB flash drive

1. Press the Edit key . The previously selected screen appears.

2. Press the menu key [List]. The List screen appears.

3. Press the menu key [I/O]. The previously selected screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [DRPN Set].
The DPRINT output setting screen appears.
The cursor appears on the output destination.
5. Enter the number assigned to "USB flash drive", then press the Input key .

[Procedure]
Output to the Network Drive (Option)

1. Press the Edit key . The previously selected screen appears.

2. Press the menu key [List]. The List screen appears.

3. Press the menu key [I/O]. The previously selected screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [DRPN Set].
The DPRINT output setting screen appears.
The cursor appears on the output destination.
5. Enter the number assigned to "Network Drive", and press the Input key .
The "Network Drive" is selected, and the cursor moves to Network drive in "Network Drive" field.
6. Enter the network drive number to send data, and press the Input key .

[Note]
• A user macro option is required to use the DPRINT function.
• For details on the operation method, see the RS232C (optional) communication device Instruction Manual.
• Confirm that the communication protocol of the machine side is identical to that of the RS232C communication
device.
• If you specify the "CF Card" as output destination, insert the CF card into the card slot before executing the DPRINT
function. Do not remove the CF card while the DPRINT function is running.
• If you specify the "USB flash card" as output destination, insert the USB flash drive into the USB port before
executing the DPRINT function. Do not remove the USB flash drive while the DPRINT function is running.
• The maximum file size that can be output to CF card or USB flash drive is 1.4 MB.
If the file size exceeds 1.4 MB, an alarm message "MEMORY CAPACITY OVER" is displayed.
• The maximum file size that can be output to network drive is 500 KB. If the file size exceeds 500KB, an alarm
message "MEMORY CAPACITY OVER" is displayed.

6-200
 L32

6.10 Program Conversion

The program code of the machining program is automatically converted from code for the affected models (A32VII
[1M7]) to code for new models (L32Ⅷ/Ⅸ/Ⅹ/Ⅻ [1M8/1M9/1M10/1M12]) and from code for new models to code for
the affected models.

Be sure to always confirm the converted machining program before using it for operation. In particular,
product collection sections must be rewritten manually.
Also, T codes are not converted for free tool layout patterns.

The conversion procedure for machining programs is shown below.

[Procedure]
When converting a program from a compatible model to a new model

1. Press the Edit key .

The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears, the program number field marked with an asterisk "*" indicates the available programs for
the conversion operation.

[Note]
• The conversion target machining program is a machining program that can be edited.
• The compatible models are the A32Ⅶ [1M7].
• If the selected gang tool post holder uses a free tool layout, the T codes are not converted.
• Be sure to always confirm the program data of the converted machining program.
Be extremely careful when converting a program.
• Any codes inside comments are not converted.
• Be sure to also check the gang tool post holder, opposite tool post holder, back tool post holder, and back spindle.
• Machining programs entered while "Program Conversion Enabled" is not checked in the Machine Structure screen
are treated as machining programs for new models.

3. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the location of the program that you want to convert, and then

press the Input key .

6-201
L32

4. This opens the Edit screen. Use the menu key [Menu SEL] to change the menu, and then press the menu key
[Prg.Cnvt]. The Program Conversion screen appears, and the Machining Data screen is displayed.

5. After setting the machining data, press the menu key [MC-Data] or the Escape key . The Machining Data
screen is closed.
When the Machining Data screen shown when the Program Conversion screen is displayed is closed, the message
screen is displayed.

6-202
 L32

6. Check the content of the message, and then press the menu key [Caution] or the Escape key to display the
program conversion codes for the conversion target model.

7. Press the menu key [Execute].

A message is displayed and menu keys [Yes] and [No] are displayed in the upper row menu.

8. Press the menu key [Yes].

After conversion, the screen automatically returns to the Edit screen, and the converted program is displayed.
The message "Program conversion is complete" appears in the message display area.

9. Press the menu key [List].

The asterisk "*" in the converted program number field is removed.

6-203
L32

[Procedure]
When converting a program from a new model to a compatible model
1. In step 2 of "When converting a program from a compatible model to a new model", the available programs are the
programs that are not marked by an asterisk "*" in the program number field, and the procedure is identical to the
procedure up to step 6 from the Machining Data screen.
2. Press the menu key [Cvt.Num], and enter the program number.
After conversion, a list of the registered program numbers appears on the right side of the screen to ensure that the
newly-created program number does not duplicate an existing number.

3. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to "Execute", and then press the Input key .

4. Press the menu key [Execute].

A message is displayed and menu keys [Yes] and [No] are displayed in the upper row menu.

6-204
 L32

5. Press the menu key [Yes].

After conversion, the screen automatically returns to the Edit screen.
The message "Program conversion is complete" appears in the message display area.

6. Press the menu key [List].

An asterisk "*" now appears in the converted program number field.

6-205
L32

 Code Conversion Table

L32Ⅷ/Ⅸ/X/Ⅻ Conversion A32Ⅶ

[1M8/1M9/1M10/1M12] direction [1M7]
T code
Gang tool front machining tool T0800 T1600
(Argument)
No R argument Empty
T0800 T1700
(Argument)
R1 argument Empty
T0800 T1800
(Argument)
R2 argument Empty
Gang tool rear machining tool T5800 T5600
(Argument)
No R argument Empty
T5800 T5700
(Argument)
R1 argument Empty
T5800 T5800
(Argument)
R2 argument Empty
M code
Opposite Tool Post /Back Sp. Retract M141 M241
Mirror image ON M211 M211
(Argument)
Y1 argument Empty
M211 M213
(Argument)
Y2 argument Empty
Mirror image OFF M212 M212
(Argument)
Y1 argument Empty
M212 M214
(Argument)
Y2 argument Empty
Call sub-program M98 M98
(Argument)
D2 argument D1 argument
Other codes
B code MB B

[Note]
• The conversion target machining program is a machining program that can be edited.
• The compatible models are the A32Ⅶ [1M7].
• If the selected gang tool post holder uses a free tool layout, the T codes are not converted.
• Be sure to always confirm the program data of the converted machining program.
Be extremely careful when performing operation.
• Any codes inside comments are not converted.
• Be sure to also check the gang tool post holder, opposite tool post holder, back tool post holder, and back spindle.
• Machining programs entered while "Program Conversion Enabled" is not checked in the Machine Structure screen
are treated as machining programs for new models.

6-206
 L32

6.11 Machine Variable Screen

This screen displays variables that are mainly used with the machine manufacturer's macros.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Parameter key .
The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the menu key [MC-VAR].
The Machine Variable screen appears.
3. Press the Page keys until the desired number is displayed.

6-207
L32

6.12 Machine Structure

Use this screen to provide settings for the specification and optional functions of the machine.
The Machine Structure screen consists of five pages.
First and second These pages are used to check mounted optional devices. When you have mounted
pages: a device listed on these pages, check the device. If you have removed it, uncheck it.
Pressing the menu key [Set] allows you to check devices on the page.
Third, fourth, and These pages are used to view installed software options. You can confirm the
fifth pages: software options installed on the machine; you cannot check items on the page.

Machine Structure screen 1

Machine Structure screen 2

6-208
 L32

Machine Structure screen 3

Machine Structure screen 4

Machine Structure screen 5

6-209
L32

Machine Structure screen 6

Display items
Item Remarks
Synchronous RGB Device Be sure to select only one among "Synchronous RGB
Fixed GB Device Device", "Fixed GB Device", and "GBL Specification".
GTF**16(口 16,口 5/8") Only one of the two items can be selected.
Free Tool
GBL Specification Be sure to select only one among "Synchronous RGB
Device", "Fixed GB Device", and "GBL Specification".
Stopper Specification Enabled This is displayed when "GBL Specification" is selected.
Automatic Bar Loader Only one of the two items can be selected for
"CAV32LE-IS-4.0M."
Chuck Sleeve Non-Conformed (CAV) Select to use chuck sleeve for non-conform/square bar
CAV32-LE-IS-4.0M Only one automatic bar loader can be selected.
Oversize Specification Switch to ø38 specification
Oil Air Lubrication Unit Device
Medium-pressure Coolant Device
RS232C Connector
T.D.C. Function Enabled Thermal Displacement Correction Function is enabled.
AGB Specification Cannot be switched when "GBL Specification" is enabled.
Be sure to select only one among "Synchronous RGB
Device", "Fixed GB Device", and "AGB Specification".
Work Unloader A (Basket) Only "Work Unloader A (Basket)" or "Work Unloader B
Work Unloader B (Hand) (Hand)" can be selected.
Long Workpiece Device
Chip Conveyor
Coolant Flowrate Detector
Cut-off Tool Breakage Detector
Motor Drive Knock-out Detector
Opp. Rotary Tool Drive Device
Back Rotary Tool Drive Device
Sub Micron/Sub Inch Command Function Displayed if sub micron/sub inch command is enabled.
Inch Specification Displayed if mm/inch specification setting enabled is enabled.
Program Conversion Enabled
Synchronous Bar Loader Set
Loader device Displayed only for a loader device specification.
Program Strage 40m (16 KB) Only one of the two items can be selected.
Program Strage 80m (32KB)
Program Strage 160m (64KB)
Program Strage 320m (128KB)
Program Strage 600m (240KB)
User Macro

6-210
 L32

Item Remarks
Sub Micron/Sub Inch Command Set Enb.
MM/Inch Specification Set Enabled
Rotary Tool Synchronous Tap
Main SP Synchronous Tap
Back SP Synchronous Tap
Canned Drilling Cycle
Main SP C-axis Function
Corner Chamfering / Corner R
Compound Fixed Cycles Ⅰ/Ⅱ
Back SP 1° Indexing Function
Back SP C-axis Function
Diff.Speed Rotary Tool Func.
B code I/F
Tool Life Management I
Tool Life Management II
Milling Interpolation Function
Ex. Memory Program Operation
Spindle Synchronous Control
Polygon Machining Function
Hobbing Machining Function
Helical Interpolation Function
Slant Helical Interpolation Function
Geometric Command Function
Variable Lead Thread Cutting
Circular Threading Function
B Axis Control Function
Coornidate Rotation Command Function
Network I/O Function
Tool Offset Pairs 80 pairs
High-Speed Synchronous Tap
Remote Screen Operation Func.
Optional Block Skip 9
Back Machining Program Skip
alkartshop
Enable Switch
3D Chamfering Function

[Procedure]
1. Press the Parameter key .
The previously selected screen appears.
2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [MC-STRCT] is displayed.
3. Press the [MC-STRCT] menu key.
The Machine Structure screen appears.
4. Use the arrow keys , Tab keys , and Page keys to move the cursor to the item you
want to change setting.
5. Press the Menu selection key to make an upper menu active, and press the menu key [Set].
6. Press the Input key to determine the setting you have made.

[Note]
If you change setting, turn off the NC power. The new setting is made valid at next power-on.

If you operate the machine with the settings (checks) on the machine structure screen not matching the
machine structure of actually mounted devices, an alarm may be generated or the machine may be
damaged. Make correct settings (checks) on the screen.

6-211
L32

6.13 Backup Screen

Use this screen to backup various types of software and parameters.

[Procedure]
To backup data

1. Press the Parameter key .

The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key to switch the menu, and press the menu key [Backup].
The Backup screen appears.
3. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to "Backup".

4. Press the Input key to put a checkmark on "Backup".

5. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the item you want to backup the data.

6. Press the Input key to put a checkmark on the item you want to backup the data.
If several items are to be backed up, repeat steps 5 and 6 to put a checkmark on the item you want to backup the
data.
7. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to "Execute".

8. Press the Input key to execute backup operation.

[Procedure]
To restore the data

1. Press the Parameter key .

The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key to switch the menu, and press the menu key [Backup].
The Backup screen appears.
3. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to "Restore".

4. Press the Input key to put a checkmark on "Restore".

5. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the item you want to restore the data.

6. Press the Input key to put a checkmark on the item you want to restore the data.
If several items are to be restored, repeat steps 5 and 6 to put a checkmark on the item you want to restore the data.
7. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to "Execute".

8. Press the Input key to execute restore operation.

[Note]
Restoration is unavailable for the item which has not been backed up.

6-212
 L32

6.14 Alarm History

The alarms generated on the machine are stored and listed on the Alarm History screen.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Diagnosis key .
The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [History] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [History].
The Alarm History screen appears.
4. Use the arrow keys or Page keys to browse the alarm history.

[Note]
• Pressing the menu key [NC ALM] displays the NC alarm only.
• Pressing the menu key [PLC ALM] displays the PLC alarm only.
• Pressing the menu key [KeyHist] displays the Key History screen.
• The information of up to 100 alarms can be stored and displayed on the Alarm History screen.
When the number of alarms has reached 100, they are deleted automatically in the order in which they were
recorded.

6-213
L32

6.15 Message Screen

Use this screen to display messages such as alarm messages.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key to switch the menu, and press the menu key [Message].
2. Use the arrow keys and Page keys to browse messages.

6-214
 L32

6.16 Tool Life Management (Option)

The tool life management feature accumulates the tool usage time and count commanded by programs and monitors the
usage status of the tools. Up to 99 tools (tool 1 - tool 99) can be subject to the tool life management.
Tool Life Management 1
• Management based on tool usage time
The cutting time after a tool selection command (such as G01, G02 and G03) is added to the tool usage time
corresponding to the commanded tool number. If the tool usage time exceeds its life in the tool selection command,
a single cycle is halted and the alarm occurs.
• Management based on tool usage count
The cutting command after a tool selection command (such as G01, G02 and G03) causes the tool usage count
corresponding to the commended tool number to be incremended. If the tool usage count exceeds its life in a tool
selection command, a single cycle is halted and the alarm occurs.

Display item Description Setting range

Tool No. If the tool usage time reaches to its life time or the tool usage －
count exceeds its life count, the corresponding tool number is
highlighted reversely.
Time Used Accumulated tool usage time 0:0:0 - 4999:59:0
Accumulated during cutting time. (Time: min.:sec.)
Life Tool life time 0:0:0 - 4999:59:0
Set the maximum tool usage time.
Count Used Accumulated tool usage time 0 - 99999
Incremented during curring after tool selection. (Count)
Life Tool life count 0～99999
Set the maximum tool usage count.
Status A Indicates the tool life management status. 0～2
0: Not used
1: Used
2: Life over
B Not used －

6-215
L32

[Note]
• The tool usage count is not incremented without the change of the tool number.
• The time management in seconds cannot be set.
• Set the tool usage time and life as follows:
For example, to set the time to 100 hours and 30 minutes, point the cursor to the item to be set and enter 100/30 in the
setting field and press the Input key .

• After the life comes to cause alarm stop, clear the tool usage time or count and return the status to "0".
• If the life time or count is set to "0", the tool usage time is accumulated or the tool usage count is incremented but the
alarm stop does not occur.
• Use shift to increment the tool number for tools that are called by specifying the R argument using the T code.

T code Tool No. T code Tool No. T code Tool No.

T0700 07 T0700 R1 62 T0700 R2 82
T0800 08 T0800 R1 63 T0800 R2 83
T0900 09 T0900 R1 64 T0900 R2 84
T1000 10 T1000 R1 65 T1000 R2 85
T1100 11 T1100 R1 66 T1100 R2 86
T1200 12 T1200 R1 67 T1200 R2 87
T1300 13 T1300 R1 68 T1300 R2 88
T1400 14 T1400 R1 69 T1400 R2 89
T1500 15 T1500 R1 70 T1500 R2 90

T5100 51 T5100 R1 71 T5100 R2 91

T5200 52 T5200 R1 72 T5200 R2 92
T5300 53 T5300 R1 73 T5300 R2 93
T5400 54 T5400 R1 74 T5400 R2 94
T5500 55 T5500 R1 75 T5500 R2 95
T5600 56 T5600 R1 76 T5600 R2 96
T5700 57 T5700 R1 77 T5700 R2 97
T5800 58 T5800 R1 78 T5800 R2 98
T5900 59 T5900 R1 79 T5900 R2 99
T6000 60 T6000 R1 80 T6000 R2 Not compatible

6-216
 L32

6.17 Spare Tool Life Management (Option)

In this management, the life (usage time and count) of each tool is managed and, if the life comes, a spare tool set for the
tool is automatically selected to continue the machining. Up to 20 sets of master tools can be set. Up to three spare tools
can be set for each master tool.

Display item Description Remarks

# No. Number of master tools for which tool numbers can be registered.
Master No. Master tool number.
Set a master tool number.
ST Indicates the life management status of a master tool. 0: Not used
1: Used
2: Life over
Spare 1 No. Spare tool number.
Set the first spare tool number.
ST Indicates the life management status of spare tool 1. 0: Not used
1: Used
2: Life over
Spare 2 No. Spare tool number.
Set the second spare tool number.
ST Indicates the life management status of spare tool 2. 0: Not used
1: Used
2: Life over
Spare 3 No. Spare tool number.
Set the third spare tool number.
ST Indicates the life management status of spare tool 3. 0: Not used
1: Used
2: Life over
Offset Offset value.
For example, if the offset number is set to 3 and the offset number
of a master tool number is T05, the offset number of spare tool 1 is
T (5 + 3), or T8 and that of spare tool 2 is T (5 + 3 + 3), or T11.

[Note]
To allow the tools of process pattern G660 (front/back simultaneous machining) to be replaced with spare tools, the
tools on the front side (No. T1*) and rear side (No. T5*) should reach to their lives in the same cycle.

6-217
L32

6.18 External Memory Program Operation

The external memory operation means to call and execute the program stored in the CF card. This is controlled by NC
memory.
See the Programmer's Manual for calling a program.
To execute the program, store it in the CF card prepared for execution. The program in the size up to 1 GB can be
executed.
To browse the program in the CF card, use the following procedure.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Edit key .

The previously selected screen appears.

2. Press the menu key [List].
The programs in the NC memory are listed.

3. Set the CF card that contains the program to be executed.

4. Press the menu key [Ext.Mem].
[Note]
If the CF card is not set, the List <NC Memory> screen will not appear.

6-218
 L32

5. The list of programs stored in CF card are displayed.

[Note]
• Only the programs stored in the root directory of the CF card can be browsed or run.
• The program stored in CF card cannot be edited on the machine. Use the external device such as PC to edit the
program.
• The program stored in CF card is regarded as a subprogram. In actual operation, the machining data of the main
program is used.
• If cycle time is longer than 30 minutes due to large program size, enter the check mark for the setting switch of "13
Cycle Time ALM. OFF". For setting switches, see <6.8.6 Setting switches>. By checking the setting switch "13
Cycle Time ALM. OFF", operation stop mode at the occurrence of an alarm is changed from 1 cycle stop to
immediate stop. This change applies to the following alarms.
Alarm No. Description
EX202 Lubrication oil empty alarm.
EX203 Coolant oil alarm. Supply the oil.

• Do not remove the CF card while the program is running by the external memory device.
• If the CF card is removed while the program is running, an alarm "P463 Device not installed" will occur when the
NC unit reads the program from the external memory device.
• If the external memory program operation is performed in automatic operation mode or on-machine program check
mode, the program is read from the CF card. The screen display may not be refreshed while the program is being
read.

6-219
L32

6.19 Workpiece conveyor

The workpiece conveyor unloads the workpiece out of the machine. The conveyor unloads workpieces one by one.
Using the workpiece conveyor protects the workpiece from being damaged due to an interference with other
workpieces.
Hot to use the operation panel
The workpiece conveyor operates as long as the menu key [Workpiece conveyor ON] on the the Preparation screen or
Automatic Operation screen is pressed.
The user can also select whether continuous operation or intermittent operation will be selected when the menu key
[Workpiece conveyor ON] is pressed. Use the setting switch to change to desired operation mode. For setting switches,
see <6.8.6 Setting switches>.
Turn on the "work conveyor continuous mode" switch and the work conveyor will continue operating when the menu
key [Workpiece conveyor ON] is pressed. The work conveyor stops when the menu key [Workpiece conveyor ON]
is pressed again.
Turn on the "work conveyor 1 short mode" switch and the work conveyor will operate for a set period in the same way as
when an M code (M31 or M34) is used when the menu key [Workpiece conveyor ON] is pressed.

Using the switch box (optional)

Two operation modes, continuous and intermittent, are available. The desired mode can be selected with the switch
provided at the workpiece exit side of the conveyor (the switch box is an option). Turning the switch to the left selects
the intermittent operation mode and turning it to the right selects the continuous operation mode.
In the continuous operation mode, the conveyor keeps running when the main breaker is ON. In the intermittent mode,
the conveyor runs for a preset length of time according to the specification of an M code (M31 or M34). For details of M
code specification, refer to the Programmer’s Manual.

Workpiece conveyor operation switch box (optional)

When taking out products from the workpiece conveyor, use the workpiece conveyor to unload them
outside the machine. Putting your hands in the workpiece conveyor could result in personal injury.

6-220
 L32

6.20 Eco Screen

Use this screen to see the power status of your machine for energy-saving purpose. The screen shows the current Power
Consumption, Maximum Power Consumption, Total Power Consumption, and Regenerative status.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Diagnosis key . The previously selected screen appears.

2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [Eco] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [Eco]. The Eco screen appears.

6.20.1 Power Consumption

The current power consumption is displayed in the numerical value and the graph. When regenerative energy is large, it
becomes a minus indication, and it is displayed on a minus side in the graph because the regenerative energy is included
in Power Consumption. In addition, the peak value after the power-on is displayed by ▲ mark.

6.20.2 Power Consumption

Power Consumption per product and per planned products are displayed.
After machining one material (after exchanging materials), the Power Consumption per product is calculated and
displayed. The displayed Power Consumption contains electric power required for the material exchange .
The Power Consumption per planned products is calculated based on the electric power used in the second cycle of
continuous operation. However, the electric power required for material exchange is not included in the displayed Power
Consumption.
6.20.3 Regenerative energy
The current regenerative energy is displayed in the numerical value. (It is displayed by a positive numeric value.)
Regenerative energy: The electric power generated when the main axis motor or the feed axis motor is decelerated.

6-221
L32

6.20.4 Pwr (Time Interval)

The electric energy can be measured at an arbitrary time interval. During measurement, the message "Measuring" blinks,
and the electric energy and the measurement time are updated.
[Procedure]
Elc.Engy1
1. Press the menu key [Start 1].
The measurement starts and the message "Measuring" blinks. At this time, the menu key [Start 1] changes to
[Stop 1].
2. Press the menu key [Stop 1].
The measurement stops. At this time, the menu key [Stop 1] changes to [Restart 1]. Press the menu key [Restart
1] to continue measurement.
3. Press the menu key [Reset 1].
The measured electric energy and the measuring time is cleared to 0.
The Elc.Engy2 can be measured in similar way.

6.20.5 Power regeneration

If any one of the main spindle, guide bushing, back spindle, or rotary tool is decelerated while the machine is running in
automatic operation, on-machine program check, or MDI mode, the power regeneration status is displayed.
"Regenerating" is displayed on green background.
6.20.6 Eco Mode
While the Eco Mode is enabled, status of Idling stop and the Reduced Power Consumption in Eco mode are displayed.
When the Eco mode is disabled, they are displayed by thin characters.
To enable the Eco mode, remove the checkmark from "Eco Mode Disabled" on Set SW screen. (By the default, the Eco
mode is enabled.)
During idling stop, the message "In Idling Stop" blinks on the green background.

Idling stop
• When the mode screen (e.g., Preparation, On-machine Check, Automatic Operation, MDI, Manual Operation), Zero
Return screen, Mechanism Adjustment screen is not displayed and automatic power-on is disabled, excitation of the
feed axis motor is turned off and the machine enters into the idling stop status.
For example, in the default setting, the machine enters the idling stop status 30 minutes after transiting to the Edit
screen except during automatic operation. On the Edit screen and List screen, the message "In Idling Stop" is
displayed.
Use PLC-Data #18123 to change the time until the machine enters idling stop status. # Since the 18123 value is set in
100 ms units, enter a #18123 = 6000 to have the machine enter idling stop status after 10 minutes.
For details regarding PLC-Data settings, refer to <23.6.1 PLC constant setting>.
• The machine enters into idling stop status when no operation is performed on the operation panel for five minutes. If
any key is pressed, the machine will enter into idling stop status only when it is again left idle for five minutes.

[Note]
When exiting from Idling Stop status, perform ST POS (start position operation) on the Preparation screen before
restarting machine operation.

6-222
 L32

6.20.7 Frequency
The frequency currently used is displayed. Selection of other frequency is also available.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key .
The submenus are enabled.
2. Press the menu key [Hz Chg.].
The cursor is positioned at the selected Hz.
3. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired Hz.

4. Press the menu key [Hz Chg.].

The frequency is changed.

6.20.8 Eco Reset

Clears the value of Power Consumption per one product and per planned products.
[Procedure]
1. Press the menu key [EcoReset].
The message "Is it eliminated? Yes/No" is displayed together with the menu keys [Yes] and [No].
2. Press the menu key [Yes].
All the data is cleared to 0.

6.20.9 Range change of displayed electric energy (W/kW)

[Procedure]
1. Press the menu key [Rang Chg].
The cursor is displayed on [W] or [kW] of Power Consumption range.
2. Use the Arrow keys to Power Consumption you want to change.

3. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key .

The submenus are enabled.
4. Press the menu key [W/kW].
The range is changed as [W] ↔ [kW] or [Wh] ↔ [kWh].
5. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key .
6. Press the menu key [Rang Chg].
The cursor disappears.

[Note]
• Power Consumption
The Power Consumption displays a rough value.
Power Consumption of the peripheral devices are measured. Measurement is not performed on customer-specific
device and the general-purpose bar feeder .
Power Consumption of the devices other than driving device such as the main spindle motors and the feed axis
motors is the mean values measured beforehand.
• When the operating program is changed, the amount of Power Consumption per one product and per planned
products are cleared to 0.
• If the machine clock is changed to the next day or the subsequent days, the normal operation starts at the next day of
the changed time. If the machine clock is changed to the last day and previous days, the normal operation will not
start until the next day of the day before changed.

6-223
L32

6.20.10 Graph display of electric energy

Power Consumption, Regenerative Energy, Reduction Power are displayed in graph format.
[Procedure]
Power Consumption

1. Press the Diagnosis key . The previously selected screen appears.

2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [Eco] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [Eco]. The Eco screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [Energy G]. Electric Energy is displayed in graph.
5. Press the Tab keys to select a graph you want to view the detailed information. The selected data is
displayed in display area.

[Note]
• Pressing the menu key [Year], [Month],or [Day] displays the graph for each year, month, or day respectively.
• Up to 14 columns is displayed on graph.
• Pressing the menu key [Redraw] displays the latest data.
• The graph data displayed on screen can be output as the data in csv file format by using the File Access screen. See
<6.9.6.9 Output of Eco / Machine Operation Information> for more information.
• The date you output the data last is displayed in "Last Output".
• If the machine clock is changed to the next day or the subsequent days, the normal operation starts at the next day of
the changed time. If the machine clock is changed to the last day and previous days, the normal operation will not
start until the next day of the day before changed.

6-224
 L32

[Procedure]
Regenerative energy

1. Press the Diagnosis key .

The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [Eco] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [Eco]. The Eco screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [Rege Gph].
Regenerative energy is displayed in graph.
5. Press the Tab keys to select a graph you want to view the detailed information. The selected data is
displayed in display area.

[Note]
• Pressing the menu key [Year], [Month],or [Day] displays the graph for each year, month, or day respectively.
• Up to 14 columns is displayed on graph.
• Pressing the menu key [Redraw] displays the latest data.
• The graph data displayed on screen can be output as the data in csv file format by using the File Access screen. See
<6.9.6.9 Output of Eco / Machine Operation Information> for more information.
• The date you output the data last is displayed in "Last Output".
• If the machine clock is changed to the next day or the subsequent days, the normal operation starts at the next day of
the changed time. If the machine clock is changed to the last day and previous days, the normal operation will not
start until the next day of the day before changed.

6-225
L32

[Procedure]
Reduced Power

1. Press the Diagnosis key .

The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [Eco] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [Eco].
The Eco screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [Eco Gph].
Reduced Power is displayed in graph.
5. Press the Tab keys to select a graph you want to view the detailed information. The selected data is
displayed in display area.

[Note]
• Pressing the menu key [Year], [Month],or [Day] displays the graph for each year, month, or day respectively.
• Up to 14 columns is displayed on graph.
• Pressing the menu key [Redraw] displays the latest data.
• The graph data displayed on screen can be output as the data in csv file format by using the File Access screen. See
<6.9.6.9 Output of Eco / Machine Operation Information> for more information.
• The date you output the data last is displayed in "Last Output".
• If the machine clock is changed to the next day or the subsequent days, the normal operation starts at the next day of
the changed time. If the machine clock is changed to the last day and previous days, the normal operation will not
start until the next day of the day before changed.

6-226
 L32

6.21 Machine Operation Information Screen

6.21.1 Machine Operation Status
Classify the customer's Machine Operation Information into Automatic operation time, Alarm stop time, Setup time, No
operation time, and Power off time. The information is displayed in graph by each item or time series.
Items of Machine Operation Status screen
Item Description
Auto Time measured when the continuous operation is performed in automatic operation mode.
Setup Time measured when the setup is performed.
ALM Stop Time measured from the occurrence of alarm to reset of alarm.
No Ope Time measured when no operation is performed on operation panel.
PowerOFF Time measured from power-off to next power-on of operation panel.

[Note]
• If switching to one-cycle operation during continuous operation in automatic operation mode, the time to end of
one-cycle operation is summed up as automatic operation time.
• If switching to one-block operation during continuous operation in automatic operation mode, the time to switch
point is summed up as automatic operation time.
• If switching to continuous operation during one-cycle operation in automatic operation mode, the time used for
one-cycle operation is summed up as automatic operation time.
• If switching to continuous operation during one-block operation in automatic operation mode, the time after switch
point is summed up as automatic operation time.
• One-cycle/one-block operation in automatic operation mode, running time on On-machine program check screen,
and running time in MDI mode are summed up as setup time.
• The time used for startup is summed up as setup time.
• The alarm stop due to counter full error is summed up as no operation time.
• When a cycle time over alarm is generated, the fixed time is added as alarm stop time and summed up. The fixed
time depends on the setting.
• The change of the mode over 300 times per day is not recorded.
• If the machine clock is changed to the next day or the subsequent days, the normal operation starts at the next day of
the changed time. If the machine clock is changed to the last day and previous days, the normal operation will not
start until the next day of the day before changed.

6-227
L32

6.21.1.1 Operation information by item

When you press the menu key [Itemize], the five items are displayed in column chart.
[Procedure]
Machine Operation Information - Each Item

1. Press the Diagnosis key .

The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [Status] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [Status].
The Machine Operation Information screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [Itemize].
Itemized Machine Operation Information is displayed in graph.
5. Press the Tab keys to select a graph you want to view the detailed information. The selected data is
displayed in display area.

[Note]
• Pressing the menu key [Year], [Month],or [Day] displays the graph for each year, month, or day respectively.
• Up to 14 columns is displayed on graph.
• "100%" indicates one year for Year data, one month for Month data, and 24 hours for Day data, respectively.
• Pressing the menu key [Redraw] displays the latest data.
• The graph data displayed on screen can be output as the data in csv file format by using the File Access screen. See
<6.9.6.9 Output of Eco / Machine Operation Information> for more information.
• The date you output the data last is displayed in "Last Output".
• If the machine clock is changed to the next day or the subsequent days, the normal operation starts at the next day of
the changed time. If the machine clock is changed to the last day and previous days, the normal operation will not
start until the next day of the day before changed.

6-228
 L32

6.21.1.2 Machine Operation Information - Time Line

Five items are displayed by the time series in graphs by pressing the menu key [TimeLine].
[Procedure]
Machine Operation Information - Time Line

1. Press the Diagnosis key .

The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [Status] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [Status].
The Machine Operation Information screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [TimeLine].
The graph of the time series of the machine operation information is displayed.

[Note]
• Only the daily data is displayed. The data display of month or year is not available.
• Up to 14 columns is displayed on graph.
• 24 hours are displayed as an elapsed time of a day in the time line display, and one scale represents about 5 minutes.
• Pressing the menu key [Redraw] displays the latest data.
• The graph data displayed on screen can be output as the data in csv file format by using the File Access screen. See
<6.9.6.9 Output of Eco / Machine Operation Information> for more information.
• The date you output the data last is displayed in "Last Output".
• If the machine clock is changed to the next day or the subsequent days, the normal operation starts at the next day of
the changed time. If the machine clock is changed to the last day and previous days, the normal operation will not
start until the next day of the day before changed.

6-229
L32

6.21.2 Ratio of cut time / non-cut time

The ratio of cut time/non-cut time for each axis control group during continuous operation performed in the automatic
operation mode is displayed in the graph.
Ratio of cut time / non-cut time
Item Description
Cut time Shows the cutting time in automatic operation.
Non-cut time Shows the non-cutting time in automatic operation.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Diagnosis key . The previously selected screen appears.

2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [Status] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [Status]. The Machine Operation Information screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [CutTime]. The graph of the cutting time/non-cutting time ratio is displayed.
5. Press the Tab keys to select a graph you want to view the detailed information. The selected data is
displayed in display area.

[Note]
• Pressing the menu key [Year], [Month],or [Day] displays the graph for each year, month, or day respectively.
• Up to 14 columns is displayed on graph.
• 100% represents: Year data: automatic operation time for one year Month data: automatic operation time for one
month Day data: automatic operation time for one day
• Pressing the menu key [Redraw] displays the latest data.
• The graph data displayed on screen can be output as the data in csv file format by using the File Access screen. See
<6.9.6.9 Output of Eco / Machine Operation Information> for more information.
• The date you output the data last is displayed in "Last Output".
• If the machine clock is changed to the next day or the subsequent days, the normal operation starts at the next day of
the changed time. If the machine clock is changed to the last day and previous days, the normal operation will not
start until the next day of the day before changed.

6-230
 L32

6.22 PLC Data Screen

This screen lists constants used with PLC.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Parameter key .
The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [PLC-Data] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [PLC-Data].
PLC CONSTANT PARAMETERS screen appears.
4. Use the Page keys to browse the parameters.
Item Description
No. Constant numbers
Data Values of constants

6-231
L32

6.23 Bit Select Screen

This screen lists bit parameters used with PLC.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Parameter key .
The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [BIT SEL] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [BIT SEL].
The BIT SELECTION PARAMETERS screen appears.
4. Use the Page keys to browse the parameters.
Item Description
No. Bit parameter numbers
Data Values (0 or 1) of bit parameters

6-232
 L32

6.24 I/F Diagnosis Screen

This screen displays various input/output signals for PLC control.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Diagnosis key .
The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [I/F Diag] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [I/F Diag].
The I/F DIAGNOSIS screen appears.
4. Use the Tab keys to select a table to be displayed. The "DEV" column of the selected table is reversed in
white.
5. Enter the number you want to browse and press the Input key the screen jumps to the specified signal.

Or, you can use the Page keys to browse them.

Item Description
DEV Device numbers used with PLC
76543210 The data corresponding to each device number is expressed with bits.
HEX Data is displayed in hexadecimal.

6-233
L32

6.25 Software List Screen

This screen displays software versions.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Diagnosis key .
The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [S/W LIST] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [S/W LIST].
The S/W LIST screen appears.
Item Description
NCMAIN Shows software versions.
PLC
NC OS
HMIs
HMIs-Control
HMIu
MACRO
PARAMET

6-234
 L32

6.26 B-axis Operation

B-axis operation requires a previous setting

6.26.1 Machining data setting

When a holder mounted on the B-axis unit is selected, specify the holder with the B-axis (***+SEU1110) for gang tool
post in machining data.

6.26.2 Tool setting for B-axis tools

Adjust the shift amount and center position of the B-axis. It can be adjusted in cross direction and end-face direction. Set
the tool names in the Preparation screen to distinguish between cross direction and end-face direction. A tool name like
B-axis cross machining indicates cross direction, while names like B-axis end-face drilling indicates end-face direction.
Normally, tools should be set in cross direction.

6-235
L32

6.26.3 Shift amount adjustment

 Adjusting shift amount for a B-axis tool in cross direction
Place the cursor on the diameter and select [Man. Set] to turn the B-axis tool to cross position (a B-axis angle of 90
degrees) and call it to the diameter position. Then adjust it in diameter direction.
Diameter position

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Specify the tool name as B-axis cross machining.
See <6.2.7.12 Tool Name >.
3. Use the arrow keys and tab key to place the cursor on the diameter of the tool (T1100 to T1400) you want to set.
4. Make sure that the material does not protrude from the guide bushing.
5. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Confirm that the cursor is at the DIA. If the cursor is not on the diameter, use
the arrow keys to move the cursor to the diameter.

6. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
7. Press the Start button .
The Start button lights and the selected tool rotates to the cross position (a B-axis angle of 90 degrees) and the tool
tip moves to a point on the circumference of the material.

6-236
 L32

8. When operations are completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the screen changes to the Manual Handle
screen.

9. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
10. Pull out the material.
11. Make sure that the cursor is on the diameter and handle feed the X-axis in the + X direction to obtain the necessary
protrusion amount for machining and temporarily stop the tool when it comes into contact with the outer diameter
of the material.
12. Press the Input key .
The diameter value is set in the Preparation screen.
13. Handle feed the Y-axis in the + direction to move the rotary tool away from the material.
14. Firmly secure the rotary tool.
15. Press the Escape key to finish the operation.

6-237
L32

 Adjusting shift amount for a B-axis tool in end-face direction (T1100 to T1400)
Place the cursor on the longitude and select [Man. Set] to turn the B-axis tool to end-face position (a B-axis angle of 0
degrees) and call it to the longitudinal position (G/B center). Then adjust it in longitudinal direction.
Longitudinal position

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Specify the tool name as B-axis end-face drilling.
See <6.2.7.12 Tool Name >.
3. Turn off the bar loader torque and open the chuck.
(Turn off the power key on the operation panel for the dedicated bar loader. On other bar loaders, turn off
torque.)
4. Perform cut-off operation on the end face of the material. (The chuck remains closed when the operation ends.)
See <6.2.8 Cut-off machining >.
5. Align the material with the tip of the cut-off tool. Perform cut-off and the operation ends in the state the material
and the cut-off tool are in contact with each other.
6. Move the cut-off tool to the positioning point.
7. A left-handed cut-off tool ... Moves to the next position.
A right-handed tool... Moves the material end-face (Z1-axis) to the program zero point.
8. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the Longitud of the desired tool
(T1100 to T1400).
9. Mount a tool in the rotary tool. Insert it deep enough that it does not interfere with the material.
10. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Make sure that the cursor is placed at the longitude. If the cursor is not on the
longitude, use the arrow keys to move it to the longitude.

11. Enter numerics so that the longitudinal value becomes 15.0 mm and press the Input key . (This is done
because the program zero point of the B-axis tool is 15.0 mm away from the guide bushing.)

6-238
 L32

12. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
13. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights, the material (Z1-axis) retracts 1 mm, the selected tool rotates to the end-face position
(a B-axis angle of 0 degrees) and when it has moved to the center of the guide bushing, the material (Z1-axis)
moves forward 15.0 mm (longitude value) and then one more mm.
14. When operations are completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the screen changes to the Manual Handle
screen.

15. Make sure that cursor is at the longitude and handle feed the material to the position you want to place it.
16. Press the Input key .
The longitudinal value is set in the Preparation screen.
17. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
18. Bring the tool tip into contact with the end face of the material and temporarily tighten the sleeve.
19. Press the Escape key to finish the operation.

20. Move the material away from the tool, then tighten up the sleeve firmly.

6-239
L32

 Precautions for adjusting shift amount for a B-axis tool in end-face direction
When making adjustments in end-face direction and placing the tip of the tool at the program zero point as shown in
Figure 1, the tool will be 15.0 mm away from the center or B-axis rotation. In this situation, use the customary
longitudinal value of 0 for tool setting.

As shown in Figure 2, when tools are placed so that they protrude only slightly beyond the program zero point, be sure to
use the coordinate system shift without programming to set the shift amount at the longitudinal value of the tool set.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
• Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations. To restart operations, be sure
to again make selections with the menus.
• The speed of a handle feed operation is limited to 1.8 m/min.
• Multiplication ratio x 100 is not available during core, diameter and center adjustments using the handle.
• The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.

6-240
 L32

 Adjusting shift amount for a B-axis tool in end-face direction (T5100 to T5400)
Place the cursor on the longitude and select [Man. Set] to turn the B-axis tool to end-face position (a B-axis angle of 0
degrees) and call it to the longitudinal position G/B center). Then adjust it in longitudinal direction.
Longitudinal position

[Procedure]
1. Chuck a product (material) on the back spindle.
Usually, chuck that product which has been front-machined by one-cycle operation and its overall length is
corrected.

2. Measure the length of the protrusion of the product from the back chuck and check whether the measured length
matches the value entered in machining data "Back Spindle Chuck POS." (For machining data, see <6.1.3
Required fields for machining data> and <6.1.4 Checking machining data>.)

3. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
4. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the Longitud of the desired tool
(T5100 to T5400).
5. Specify the tool name as B-axis end-face drilling.
See <6.2.7.12 Tool Name >.
6. Insert the tool deeply.

6-241
L32

7. Press the menu key [Man. Set].

The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Make sure that the cursor is placed at the longitude. If the cursor is not on the
longitude, use the arrow keys to move it to the longitude.

8. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
9. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights, the Z2-axis moves to the return position, the X2-axis moves to the spindle center line
position and after positioning the selected tool, the Z2-axis advances to the standard setting position.
10. When operations are completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the screen changes to the Manual Handle
screen.

11. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
12. Bring the tip of the tool into contact with the material and temporarily stop it.
13. Press the menu key [OPP-RET], make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
14. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the opposite tool post returns to the Z2 axis zero point.
15. Firmly secure the tool.

6-242
 L32

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
• Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations. To restart operations, be sure
to again make selections with the menus.
• The speed of a handle feed operation is limited to 1.8 m/min.
• Multiplication ratio x 100 is not available during core, diameter and center adjustments using the handle.
• The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.

6-243
L32

6.26.4 Center (core) position adjustments

Align the center (core) of a B-axis tool.

 Adjusting center position (core) of a B-axis tool in cross direction

Place the cursor on the core and select [Man. Set] to turn the B-axis tool to cross position (a B-axis angle of 90 degrees)
and call it to the core (outer circumference, core down) position. Then adjust it in core direction.
Core (outer circumference) position

Core down position

6-244
 L32

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .

The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.
2. Specify the tool name as B-axis cross machining.
See <6.2.7.12 Tool Name >.
3. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the Core of the desired tool (T1100
to T1400).
4. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Confirm that the cursor is at the core. If the cursor is not on the core, use the
arrow keys to move the cursor to the core.

5. Press the arrow key .

A moving position list is displayed.

6. Enter the selected number for Core or Core DWN from the moving position list and press the Input key .
The Move POS setting is saved as a default. For that reason, once "Core" or "Core DWN" has been selected, it will
be available at the next tool setting.
7. Make sure that the material is housed in the guide bushing.
8. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
9. Press the Start button .
The Start button lights and the selected tool rotates to the cross position (a B-axis angle of 90 degrees) and the tool
tip moves to a point on the circumference of the material.

6-245
L32

10. When operations are completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the screen changes to the Manual Handle
screen.

11. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
12. Pull out the material and check that the top of the tool is aligned with the outer circumference of the material.
13. Make sure that the Core or Core DWN is selected, then use handle feed to align the top of the tool with the outer
circumference of the material.
14. Consider the tool diameter in calculating the handle feed amount (handle feed amount + tool diameter) when you
manually enter the total amount.
The core value is set in the Preparation screen.
15. Press the Escape key to finish the operation.

6-246
 L32

 Adjusting center position (core) of a B-axis tool in end-face direction (T1100 to T1400)
Place the cursor at the core or diameter and select [Man. Set] to turn the B-axis tool to end-face position (a B-axis angle
of 0 degrees) and call it to the core/diameter position (G/B center). Then adjust it in core/diameter direction.
Core/diameter position

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key . The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.

2. Specify the tool name as B-axis end-face drilling. See <6.2.7.12 Tool Name>.
3. Turn off the bar loader torque and open the chuck.
(Turn off the power key on the operation panel for the dedicated bar loader. On other bar loaders, turn off
torque.)
4. Perform cut-off operation on the end face of the material. (End the operation with the chuck closed.)
See <6.2.8 Cut-off machining>.
5. Align the material with the tip of the cut-off tool. Perform cut-off and the operation ends in the state the material
and the cut-off tool are in contact with each other.
6. Move the cut-off tool to the positioning point.
7. Use the arrow keys and tab key to place the cursor on the core or the diameter of the tool
(T1100 to T1400) you want to set.
8. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
9. Mount the tool in the sleeve and insert the sleeve deep into the tool post.
10. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Make sure that the Core or DIA setting is highlighted with the cursor. If the
cursor is not on the Core or the DIA, use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the Core or the DIA
setting.

11. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
12. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights, the material (Z1-axis) retracts 1 mm, the selected tool rotates to the end-face position
(a B-axis angle of 0 degrees) and when it has moved to the center of the guide bushing, the material (Z1-axis)
moves forward 1 mm.

6-247
L32

13. When operations are completed, the Start button lamp turns off and the screen changes to the Manual Handle
screen.

14. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
15. Pull the material without letting its end face touch the tool.
16. Select the core or diameter and use handle feed to position and adjust the front end and tip of the tool to the center
of the circumference of the material.
17. Press the Input key .
The core and diameter value is set in the Preparation screen.
18. Press the Escape key to finish the operation.

19. Move the material away from the tool.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
• Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations. To restart operations, be sure
to again make selections with the menus.
• The speed of a handle feed operation is limited to 1.8 m/min.
• Multiplication ratio x 100 is not available during core, diameter and center adjustments using the handle.
• The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.

6-248
 L32

 Adjusting center position (core) of a B-axis tool in end-face direction (T5100 to T5400)
[Procedure]
1. Chuck a product (material) on the back spindle.

2. Press the Preparation key . The Preparation key lamp lights and the Preparation screen appears.

3. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab keys to move the cursor to the Core or DIA for the tool you
want to set.
4. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears. Make sure that the Core or DIA setting is highlighted with the cursor. If the
cursor is not at the Core or DIA setting, use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to the Core or DIA
setting.
5. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
6. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights, the Z2 axis retracts full stroke, the selected tool is positioned and then the back
spindle is selected for being centering.

7. Move the cursor to Longitude by pressing the Arrow keys and advance the Z2 axis by handle.

6-249
L32

8. Move the X1 or Y1 axis in handle feed so that the tip of the tool bit is aligned with the center of the cut-off mark at
the end of the material.

9. Press the Input key .

10. Press the menu key [OPP-RET], make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
11. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the opposite tool post returns to the Z2 axis zero point.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
• Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations. To restart operations, be sure
to again make selections with the menus.
• The speed of a handle feed operation is limited to 1.8 m/min.
• Multiplication ratio x 100 is not available during core, diameter and center adjustments using the handle.
• The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.

6-250
 L32

6.26.5 Handle feed

 B-axis front machining (T11's)
If for some reason, operation stops during front machining using B-axis tools, and the program operation is reset, use the
Handle Feed screen to move the Z-axis in minus direction and retract the B-axis tools from the material.
When T1100 - T1400 is selected

To retract a B-axis tool in B-axis angle direction

 B-axis back machining (T51's)

If for some reason, operation stops during back machining using B-axis tools, and the program operation is reset, use the
Handle Feed screen to move the Z-axis in minus direction and retract the B-axis tools from the material.

6-251
L32

[Procedure]
1. Make sure that the selected tool is T1100 - T1400.
If the selected tool is something other than T1100 - T1400, it will not be possible to move in the B-axis angle
direction.

2. Press the Manual key .

The Manual key lamp goes on and the Handle Feed screen appears.
3. Deselect the menu key (motor axis) (no menu key reversal).
4. Use the arrow keys to select Z1.
Z1 is highlighted yellow.
5. Press any of the Magnification buttons , , or .
The Magnification button lamp lights.
Larger numbers result in faster machine motions.
6. Turn the handle in minus direction.
The tool is retracted from the material.
When a movement command that causes movement to exceed stored stroke limit is issued, an overrun alarm
indicating that "M01 S/W stroke limit axis detected" is generated.
Refer to <6.8.2 Recovering from overrun status> or information on how to clear an overrun alarm.

Direction of movement during Z1 handle feed

6-252
 L32

 To move the B-axis in motor axis direction

What is motor axis direction?
Motor axis direction indicates the direction that the feed axis motor is installed in. See the figure below.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Manual key . The Manual key lamp goes on and the Handle Feed screen appears.

2. Deselect the menu key [motor axis] (no menu key reversal).
3. Use the Arrow keys to select the control axis you want to feed.
The name of the selected control axis is highlighted yellow.
4. Press any of the Magnification buttons , , or .
The Magnification button lamp lights. Larger numbers result in faster machine motions.
5. Turn the handle.
The feed direction is determined by the direction the handle is turned.
When a movement command that causes movement to exceed stored stroke limit is issued, an overrun alarm
indicating that "M01 S/W stroke limit axis detected" is generated.
Refer to <6.8.2 Recovering from overrun status> or information on how to clear an overrun alarm.

6-253
L32

Axis feed direction

Depending on what menu key [motor axis] is selected and the selected tool number, the direction of each axis is
switched depending on whether the X1, Z1, Y1, Z2 or B1-axis is selected.
Pattern 1 Pattern 2
Selected T0100 - T1000 tool (tool not related to the T11000 - T1400 B-axis tool is being selected when
axis B-axis) is being selected when menu key [motor the menu key [motor axis] is not selected
axis] is selected or not selected.
X1

Gang tool post moves in diameter direction. The B-axis tool moves in vertical B-axis angle
direction (The Z1 and Y1 motor axes moves using
interpolation).
Z1

The headstock moves. The B-axis tool moves in B-axis angle direction (The
Z1 and Y1 motor axes moves using interpolation).
Y1

Gang tool post moves in core direction. The B-axis tool moves in core direction.
(The X1 axis moves.)
B1

It moves in the same direction as handle feed. It moves in the same direction as handle feed.

6-254
 L32

Pattern 1 Pattern 2
Selected T0100 - T1000 tool (tool not related to the T5100 - T5400 B-axis tool is being selected when
axis B-axis) is being selected when menu key [motor the menu key [motor axis] is not selected
axis] is selected or not selected
X1

Gang tool post moves in diameter direction. The B-axis tool moves in vertical B-axis angle
direction (The Z2 and Y1 motor axes moves using
interpolation).
Z2

The back headstock moves. The B-axis tool moves in B-axis angle direction (The
Z2 and Y1 motor axes moves using interpolation).
Y1

Gang tool post moves in core direction. The B-axis tool moves in core direction.
(The X1 axis moves.)
B1

It moves in the same direction as handle feed. It moves in the same direction as handle feed.

[Note]
• Tool movement in B-axis rotation angle using handle feed along the Z1 and Z2 axes cannot be performed in the
Mechanism Adjustment screen. The direction of movement in the Mechanism Adjustment screen is always in motor
axis direction.
• The speed of a handle feed operation is limited to 1.8 m/min or less.

6-255
L32

6.26.6 Zero return

Return the B-axis to zero.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Parameter key .

2. Press the menu key [ZP EXE].

The Zero Return screen appears.

3. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to B1 and press the Input key .
B1-axis is selected.
4. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
5. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp lights and the B1-axis starts to return to zero.
6. When zero return is completed, the Start button lamp goes off, Completed Zero Return is displayed and the B-axis
tool stops at cross direction (B-axis 90 degrees) position.
7. The operation panel and the breaker are turned off.
8. Turn on the breaker and operation panel.

6-256
 L32

6.26.7 B-axis coordinate display

The B-axis coordinates appear on the Preparation screen, On-Machine Check screen, Automatic Operation screen, MDI
screen, Handle Feed screen and the Position Data Screen.
Preparation screen On-Machine Check screen

Automatic Operation screen MDI screen

Handle Feed screen Position Data Screen

6-257
L32

6.27 Regular maintenance screen

This screen informs users what items require regular maintenance, the required maintenance intervals and time left to
the next maintenance period to assist customers in performing regular maintenance.

Regular maintenance screen items

Display item Description
Item Items displayed on the regular maintenance screen.
For details, refer to <22. Periodical Check>.
Interval This is the interval between regular maintenance work.
Intervals are indicated in numbers of hours.
Remaining time Time remaining until the next maintenance.
Counts power on time and generates an alarm when the remaining time is 0H.
Intervals are indicated in numbers of hours.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Diagnosis key . The previously selected screen appears.

2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [Regular Maintenance] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [Regular Maintenance]. The Regular Maintenance screen appears.

The Regular maintenance screen does not display all regular maintenance functions.

6-258
 L32

6.27.1 Completing regular maintenance

Reset the remaining time when regular maintenance is completed.
[Procedure]
1. Use the Arrow keys to select completion of regular maintenance.

2. Press the Input key .

Selected items are checked.
3. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key to enable the submenu key.
4. Press the menu key [Regular Maintenance].
The message "Is it eliminated? Yes/No" is displayed together with the menu keys [Yes] and [No].
5. Press the menu key [Yes].
The remaining time is reset to the regular maintenance interval time.

[Note]
Complete regular maintenance when maintenance is performed.
6.27.2 Changing maintenance intervals and remaining time
Use the following procedures to change maintenance intervals to suit specific machine environments.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key to enable the submenu key.
2. Press the menu key [Set time].
3. Use the Arrow keys or the Tab key to select the item you want to use or change.

4. Use the sheet key to enter a new time and press the Input key .

5. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key to enable the submenu key.
6. Press the menu key [Set Cmpl].
[Note]
The remaining time interval is reset when the regular maintenance interval is changed.

6-259
L32

6.28 Unloading Screen

The user can move the workpiece unloader (hand or basket) to the specified position, perform handle feed as well as
open and close the hand or basket. This tool is mainly used to adjust the position of the hand and basket.

Before starting operation, be sure to enter values for "protruded length of workpiece" and "back chuck extend length" in
the machining data. When back spindle in the machining data is set to "stabilization," a fixed value of 10 mm will be
used instead of any "back chuck extend length" setting.

 Returning to adjusting position

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .

2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [Unload] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [Unload].
The Unloading screen appears.
4. Select the "Return to adjust posit" operation.
5. Press the numeric key "1" and then Input key . The "Return to adjust posit" operation is selected.

6. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
7. Press the Start button to return to the adjusting position.

Use this function to center the hand or adjust the workpiece grip position.

6-260
 L32

After adjusting position, use handle feed to move the hand to the workpiece grip position. At this time, enter the
workpiece coordinates for the A4 axis in the A argument of M334 (a series of workpiece unloader operations).
The basket will be positioned at the positioning point.

[Note]
• To return to adjusting position, be sure to enter values for "protruded length of workpiece" and "back chuck extend
length" in the machining data before starting operation. The hand moves to a position 5 mm from the back
workpiece end face (back workpiece + back chuck extend length + 5.0 mm). When back spindle in the machining
data is set to "stabilization," the protruded length of workpiece + 10 mm + 5.0 mm will be used instead of any "back
chuck extend length" setting.
• The hand opens the chuck fingers when return to adjust position is executed.
• To return to the adjusting position, use the menu keys or the setting switch screen to disable interference check. Be
sure to enable interference check after completing the adjustment.

 Moving to the positioning point

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .

2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [Unload] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [Unload].
The Unloading screen appears.
4. Select the "Move to position pnt." operation.
5. Press the numeric key "2" and then the Input key .
The "Move to position pnt." operation is selected.
6. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
7. Press the Start button to move the tool to the positioning point.

Perform this operation after adjusting the workpiece grip position and unload position. The hand (basket) returns to
positioning point.

 Moving to unload position

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .

2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [Unload] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [Unload].
The Unloading screen appears.
4. Select "Move to unload posit."

6-261
L32

5. Press the numeric key "3" and then the Input key .
The "Move to unload posit." operation is selected.
6. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
7. Press the Start button to move the workpiece to the unload position.

Use this function to adjust the workpiece unload position.

After adjusting the unload position, use handle feed to move the workpiece to the unload position. At this time,
enter the machine coordinates for the A4 axis in the D argument of M334 (a series of workpiece unloader
operations).

[Note]
• Note that order of operation for returning to the adjusting position, moving to the positioning point and moving to
the unload position may differ from the above depending on the relationship between the back spindle (Z2 axis) and
the hand or basket (A 4 axis).
• When returning to the adjusting position, moving to the positioning point and moving to the unload position, the
position that matches the back workpiece end face of the left end face of the chuck fingers of the hand become 0
workpiece coordinate of the hand or basket (A4 axis).

 To open the hand

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .

2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [Unload] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [Unload].
The Unloading screen appears.
4. Select the "Hand open" operation.
5. Press the numeric key "4" and then the Input key .
Select the "Hand open" operation.
6. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
7. Press the Start button to open the hand.

[Note]
• The basket will not open if it is not at A4 axis coordinate position <1211.0 mm.

6-262
 L32

 To close the hand

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .

2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [Unload] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [Unload].
The Unloading screen appears.
4. Select the "Hand close" operation.
5. Press the numeric key "5" and then the Input key .
Select the "Hand close" operation.
6. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
7. Press the Start button to close the hand.

 Using the handle to operate hand and basket

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .

2. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [Unload] is displayed.
3. Press the menu key [Unload].
The Unloading screen appears.
4. Select the "Hand (bucket) movement" operation.
5. Press the numeric key "6" and then the Input key .
The "Hand (bucket) movement" operation is selected.
6. Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor to select the axis you want to feed and press the Input key .

7. Press any of the Magnification keys , , or .

The Magnification key lamp lights.
Larger numbers result in faster machine motions.
8. Turn the handle.
The feed direction is determined by the direction the handle is turned.

[Note]
This indicates the multiplication factor and movement of handle feed for the workpiece unloader (A4 axis). "-" indicates
multiplication factor that cannot be selected.
Multiplication factor
of the operation Millimeter Sub-micron Inch Sub-inch
panel
×1 － － － －
×10 0.01 － 0.001 －
×100 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.001
×1000 － 0.1 － 0.01

6-263
L32

6.29 Loader device operations

Enables the user to move the loader to the specified position and open and close the hand. Used only for position
adjustments.

 Loader advance
Enables the user to advance the loader to the workpiece loading position.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .

2. Press and hold the [Menu SEL] menu key until the [Loader device] is displayed.
3. Press the [Loader device] menu key.
The Loader device screen appears.
4. Select "Advance loader."
5. Press the “1” numeric key and then the Input key . "Advance loader" is selected.

6. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
7. Press the Start button to advance the loader.

[Note]
• The door interlock function releases the door and the machine does not run. Make sure that all doors are closed
before pressing the Start button .
• This function cannot be used to advance the loader when the loader arm is advancing.
• This function cannot be used to advance the loader when the loader is not at the front end or rear end. Manually
move the loader to the front or rear end before using this function.

 Loader retract
Enables the user to retract the loader to the position for receiving the workpiece.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .

2. Press and hold the [Menu SEL] menu key until the [Loader device is displayed.
3. Press the [Loader device] menu key.
The Loader device screen appears.
4. Select "Retreat loader."
5. Press the “2” numeric key and then the Input key . "Retreat loader" is selected.

6. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.

6-264
 L32

7. Press the Start button to retract the loader.

[Note]
• The door interlock function releases the door and the machine does not run. Make sure that all doors are closed
before pressing the Start button .
• This function cannot be used to retract the loader when the loader arm is advancing.
• This function cannot be used to retract the loader when the loader is not at the front or rear end. Manually move the
loader to the front or rear end before using this function.

 Arm advance
Enables the user to advance the loader arm to the workpiece loading position.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .

2. Press and hold the [Menu SEL] menu key until the [Loader device is displayed.
3. Press the [Loader device] menu key.
The Loader device screen appears.
4. Select "Advance arm."
5. Press the “3” numeric key and then the Input key . "Advance arm" is selected.

6. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
7. Press the Start button to advance the arm.

[Note]
• The door interlock function releases the door and the machine does not run. Make sure that all doors are closed
before pressing the Start button .
• This function cannot be used to advance the arm when the headstock (Z1 axis) is not at the return position (Z1=0).
• This function cannot be used to advance the arm when the loader is not at the front end. Manually move to the front
end before using this function.
• This function cannot be used to advance the arm when the arm is not at the front end or rear end. Manually move the
arm to the front or rear end before using this function.
• When the arm advances, the Z1 axis stroke is limited to prevent interference.

 Arm retract
Enables the user to retract the loader arm to the workpiece loading position.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .

2. Press and hold the [Menu SEL] menu key until the [Loader device is displayed.
3. Press the [Loader device] menu key.
The Loader device screen appears.
4. Select "Retract arm."
5. Press the “4” numeric key and then the Input key . The "Retract arm" operation is selected.

6. Make sure that all doors are closed before pressing the Start button.
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
7. Press the Start button to retract the arm.

[Note]
• The door interlock function releases the door and the machine does not run. Make sure that all doors are closed
before pressing the Start button .
• This function cannot be used to retract the arm when the headstock (Z1 axis) is not at the retract position (Z1=0).
• This function cannot be used to retract the arm when the arm is not at the front end or rear end. Manually move the
loader to the front or rear end before using this function.

6-265
L32

 Hand opens
The loader hand opens.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .

2. Press and hold the [Menu SEL] menu key until the [Loader device is displayed.
3. Press the [Loader device] menu key.
The Unloading screen appears.
4. Select the "Hand open" operation.
5. Press the “5” numeric key and then the Input key .
Select the "Hand open" operation.
6. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
7. Press the Start button to open the hand.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.

 The hand closes

The loader hand closes.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .

2. Press and hold the [Menu SEL] menu key until the [Loader device is displayed.
3. Press the [Loader device] menu key.
The Unloading screen appears.
4. Select the "Hand close" operation.
5. Press the “6” numeric key and then the Input key .
The "Hand close" operation is selected.
6. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
7. Press the Start button to close the hand.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.

 Selecting axis
Use the handle to select an axis.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .

2. Press and hold the [Menu SEL] menu key until the [Loader device is displayed.
3. Press the [Loader device] menu key.
The Unloading screen appears.
4. Select "Select axis" operation.
5. Press the “7” numeric key and then the Input key .
The "Select axis" operation is selected.

6-266
 L32

6. Press the arrow key .

The selected cursor moves to the Z1 axis.
7. Turn the handle.
The feed direction is determined by the direction the handle is turned.

6-267
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 1E1-0601
Mfg. No. L32/0261～
Issue Date 2015.12

6-268
 7. Mounting and Adjusting Chuck
7.1 Mounting and Adjusting Chuck ................................................................................................................. 7-3
7.1.1 Mounting and replacing spindle chuck ................................................................................................ 7-4
7.1.2 Adjusting spindle chucking force ......................................................................................................... 7-5
7.1.3 Mounting rego chuck ........................................................................................................................... 7-8
7.1.4 Mounting and replacing the spindle stabilizer pipe .............................................................................. 7-9
7.2 Mounting/Adjusting a Guide Bushing Device .......................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.1 Replacing a synchronous rotary guide bushing device ..................................................................... 7-10
7.2.2 Replacing and adjusting the guide bushing ....................................................................................... 7-13
7.3 Switching over between GB-specification and GBL-specification ........................................................... 7-14
7.3.1 Switching from GB-specification (synchronous rotary guide bushing) to GBL-specification .............. 7-14
7.3.2 Switching from GBL-specification to GB-specification (synchronous rotary guide bushing).............. 7-18
7.4 Rearrangement of Back Spindle Device ................................................................................................. 7-23
7.4.1 Mounting and adjusting chuck ........................................................................................................... 7-23
7.4.2 Adjusting back spindle chucking force .............................................................................................. 7-25
7.5 Adjusting knock-out device ..................................................................................................................... 7-28
7.5.1 Mounting and replacing knock-out jig ................................................................................................ 7-28
7.5.2 Adjusting protrusion amount of knock-out jig..................................................................................... 7-29
7.5.3 Resetting knock-out overload alarm (U51B)...................................................................................... 7-29
7.5.4 Adjusting knock-out feed rate ............................................................................................................ 7-30
7.6 Rearrangement of through-hole workpiece ............................................................................................. 7-31
7.6.1 Mounting knock-out device for through-hole workpiece knock-out device ........................................ 7-31
7.6.2 Replacing the knock-out jig for through-hole workpieces .................................................................. 7-33
7.7 Diameter/Length Selection Type Knock-out Jig ...................................................................................... 7-37
7.7.1 Selection of knock-out jig diameter/length ......................................................................................... 7-37
7.7.2 Model name and selection of diameter/length ................................................................................... 7-38
7.7.3 Knock-out jig selection example ........................................................................................................ 7-39
7.7.4 General shapes of knock-out jigs ...................................................................................................... 7-40
7.8 Phase Adjustment between Spindle and Guide Bushing (Non-conformed Material) .............................. 7-42
7.9 Mounting and Adjusting Workpiece Separator ........................................................................................ 7-44
7.9.1 Workpiece collection mode ............................................................................................................... 7-44
7.9.2 Pick-off collection mode (U30J, U31J) .............................................................................................. 7-44
7.9.3 Setup for retrieving workpieces from the workpiece receiver box (U33J) .......................................... 7-45
7.10 Setting Up and Adjusting the Long Workpiece Device (Option) .............................................................. 7-48
7.10.1 Process changeover of long workpiece pipe ..................................................................................... 7-49
7.10.2 Mounting cap nut and collar for long workpiece device ..................................................................... 7-52
7.10.3 Installing a stabilizer guide ................................................................................................................ 7-54
7.10.4 Long workpiece receiver shelf (option).............................................................................................. 7-55
7.10.5 Adjusting position of longitudinal adjustment pipe ............................................................................. 7-57
7.11 Workpiece conveyor ............................................................................................................................... 7-58
7.11.1 Adjusting workpiece chute................................................................................................................. 7-58
7.11.2 Cleaning the workpiece conveyor ..................................................................................................... 7-59
7.12 Workpiece Unloader (U35J, Option), Workpiece Receiver Box (U351J, Option) .................................... 7-60
7.12.1 Workpiece unloader overview ........................................................................................................... 7-60
7.12.2 Installing product shelf in workpiece unloader ................................................................................... 7-63
7.12.3 Replacing and adjusting fingers in the hand ..................................................................................... 7-64
7.12.4 Adjusting the core of the hand........................................................................................................... 7-66
7.12.5 Receiver box overview ...................................................................................................................... 7-68
7.12.6 Replacing the receiver box ................................................................................................................ 7-68

7-1
 7.12.7 Switching from long workpiece device to shared shelf for workpiece unloader (U422B)................... 7-70
7.13 Mounting and Removing Tools................................................................................................................ 7-71
7.13.1 Mounting tools ................................................................................................................................... 7-71
7.13.2 Removing tools ................................................................................................................................. 7-72
7.13.3 Installing tools on gang tool post rotary tool drive device .................................................................. 7-72
7.13.3.1 SEU1110 removal (type Ⅸ, Ⅻ) ................................................................................................... 7-72
7.13.3.2 GSE1610, GSE1810, GSE1910, GSE2010 (type X) ................................................................... 7-73
7.13.3.3 GSE3210 (type X) ....................................................................................................................... 7-76
7.13.4 Installing tools on the opposite tool post ........................................................................................... 7-79
7.13.5 Installing tools on the back tool post ................................................................................................. 7-80
7.13.6 Adjustment using alignment ring (Option) ......................................................................................... 7-82
7.13.7 Tool set jig (GPJ101) (option) ............................................................................................................ 7-83
7.14 Coolant Flow Detector (U53R) ................................................................................................................ 7-84
7.14.1 Names and functions of components ................................................................................................ 7-85
7.14.2 Setting method .................................................................................................................................. 7-86
7.14.3 Operation check / Maintenance......................................................................................................... 7-88
7.15 Adjustment and Handling of Medium-/High-pressure Coolant Device .................................................... 7-89
7.15.1 Medium-/high-pressure coolant device (option) configuration ........................................................... 7-89
7.15.2 Adjusting the nozzle .......................................................................................................................... 7-90
7.15.3 Notes on using the separate pump unit............................................................................................. 7-97
7.15.4 Handling of the high-pressure coolant device ................................................................................. 7-100
7.16 Adjusting coolant nozzle length ............................................................................................................ 7-106
7.17 Connecting the Automatic Bar Loader .................................................................................................. 7-108
7.17.1 Connecting the emergency stop circuit of the loader ...................................................................... 7-108
7.17.2 Jumper pin setting procedure .......................................................................................................... 7-109
7.18 Loader .................................................................................................................................................. 7-111
7.18.1 Overview of the loader .................................................................................................................... 7-111
7.18.2 Replacing the load hand fingers and workpiece support ................................................................. 7-113
7.18.3 Center adjustment of the loader hand ............................................................................................. 7-115
7.18.4 Adjusting positions of the loader ..................................................................................................... 7-116
7.18.5 Adjusting the loader speed .............................................................................................................. 7-117

7-2
 L32

7.1 Mounting and Adjusting Chuck

Described below are operation procedures when the Setting switch is set to the “ ”.
If you are going to work inside the machine, press the Door open button to unlock the door.
If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
The door cannot be unlocked unless the following conditions are met.
• All spindles have stopped.
• All servo axes have stopped.
• The machine is not operating.
• The coolant is not discharged.
• The Door open button is pressed.

7-3
L32

7.1.1 Mounting and replacing spindle chuck

[Procedure]
1. Use the Operation mode switch button on the operation panel to select Preparation . The Main spindle chuck
key lamp goes off.
2. Place the hook wrench on the cap nut, and fit a single-ended wrench onto the two-side width (70mm wide) of the
spindle to loosen the cap nut (right-hand screw).
3. Turn the cap nut to remove it from the spindle.
4. Mount a new chuck on the chuck sleeve inserted into the spindle.
* Before mounting it, check the square spring is in the chuck sleeve.
If an old chuck is on the chuck sleeve, hold it and pull it out to this side, and mount a new one.
* When a spindle stabilizing pipe is used with an oversize-specification chucking device, use the collar provided
with the chucking device.
5. Screw the cap nut into the spindle, and firmly tighten it with the hook wrench and single-ended wrench.

7-4
 L32

7.1.2 Adjusting spindle chucking force

Be sure to confirm that the spindles and machine have stopped before attempting to adjust the chucking
force. The work during machine operation could result in serious personal injury.

[Procedure]
1. Use the Operation mode switch button on the operation panel to select Preparation .

The Preparation screen appears.

2. Press the Main spindle chuck button on the operation panel to open the chuck. Then, insert the material into
it.
3. Loosen the lock screw of chuck adjustment nut located behind the chuck finger holder, and turn and loosen the
chuck adjustment nut counterclockwise.
4. Press the Main spindle chuck button on the operation panel to close the chuck.
* Check the Main spindle lamp goes on.
5. With the chuck adjustment nut being fully loose and chuck closed, slowly tighten the chuck adjustment nut until
the chuck gets in touch with the material and starts to chuck it.
Define the point as the nut angle zero point.
6. Press the Main spindle chuck button on the operation panel to open the chuck.
The Main spindle chuck button lamp goes off.
7. Pull out the connecting shaft that secures the chucking lever and the chuck open/close cylinder shaft.
Because the connecting shaft is secured by the force of the spring, it can be pulled out without using a tool.

7-5
L32

8. From the nut angle zero point defined in Step 5, tighten the chuck adjustment nut by the specified angle according
to the guideline shown in the figure below.

Relationship between adjustment nut rotating angle of main spindle and chuck thrust

*1
The screw hole interval on the chuck finger holder circumference is 60° and the interval between dials is 15°.
*2
The figure shown above indicates the data when a Citizen authorized chuck is used. If a third party chuck is
used, the force may not be equivalent to the value shown in the figure above.

9. Fit the chuck open close tool on the chucking lever, and move the chucking lever right and left while checking the
chucking force to adjust it.
10. When obtaining a suitable chucking force, set the chucking lever to place the spindle chuck in open state (the
chuck finger is away from the bobbin).
11. Insert the connecting shaft in the chucking lever and the chuck open/close cylinder shaft until the rim of the
connecting shaft contacts the chucking lever. The connecting shaft is secured in place by a spring, and so check
that it cannot be easily removed.
12. Tighten the lock screw of the chuck adjustment nut to prevent loosening. Then, remove the material.

7-6
 L32

• Avoid empty chuck (chucking without bar material). Otherwise, malfunctioning or damage to the collet
chuck may occur.
• In the machining where higher cutting force is generated, set strong chucking force. If the chucking
force is weak, the material may slip.
Note, however, do not set the value beyond the adaptable range shown in the graph on previous page.
Doing so may cause damage to the machine.
• When using pipe material, excess chucking force may deform the material. In such the case, readjust
the chucking force.
• When adjusting the chuck, do not move air cylinder further upwards than needed.
Otherwise the cables or the air tube connected to the cylinder could break.

7-7
L32

7.1.3 Mounting rego chuck

[Procedure]
1. Mount the rego chuck to the cap nut.
Wash the rego chuck cleanly and use the one free from scratches.

2. Insert a drilling tool into the rego chuck.

3. Screw the cap nut to which the tool was set into the sleeve thread.
Wash the sleeve inner tapered portion cleanly and check it is free from scratches.

4. Fit a dedicated wrench onto the two-side width of the sleeve and tighten the cap nut firmly.

Be sure to mount the rego chuck to the cap nut before inserting the drilling tool. The Inserted drilling tool
length must always be longer than the overall length of the rego chuck. Otherwise, the tool and/or rego
chuck may be damaged.

7-8
 L32

7.1.4 Mounting and replacing the spindle stabilizer pipe

(U60C, U100C - U132C)
In bar machining, the vibration due to the rotation of the workpiece greatly influences the machining accuracy.
To suppress the vibration due to rotation of the workpiece, use the stabilizer ring and stabilizer pipe of which outside
diameter approximately +0.3 to 1.0 mm.

[Procedure]
1. Remove the main spindle chucking device (chuck and chuck sleeve) according to the procedures described in
<7.1.1 Mounting and replacing spindle chuck>.
2. Loosen the lock nut at the rear of the spindle.
Insert a single-ended wrench (width: 70mm) into the front end of the spindle, remove the nut, and then take off the
coil spring and guide ring.
3. Insert a rod of suitable length from the rear end of the spindle, and push the four stabilizer pipes inserted in the
spindle toward the front of the spindle.
4. Insert the four new stabilizer pipes one by one into the spindle from the front end of the spindle, and then mount the
spindle chucking device.
5. Insert the guide ring on the support pipe and the coil spring onto the rear end of the main spindle removed in Step
2, and tighten the lock nut on the main spindle.
Then, secure the lock screw of the nut.

[Note]
• When a spindle stabilizing pipe is used with an oversize-specification chucking device, use the collar provided with
the chucking device.

7-9
L32

7.2 Mounting/Adjusting a Guide Bushing Device

7.2.1 Replacing a synchronous rotary guide bushing device

Be sure to confirm that the spindles and machine have stopped before attempting to mount the guide
bushing device.
The work during machine operation could result in serious personal injury.

[Procedure]
1. Move the Z1 axis to the return position.
2. Remove the spindle belt cover and the guide bushing belt cover.

Figure 1 Rotary Guide Bushing specification

7-10
 L32

Figure 2 Guide Bushing Device and Guide Bushing Belt Cover

3. Use your fingers to loosen the three arm fixing bolts.

Remove the two arm positioning bolts from the plate.
4. Loosen the two fixing bolts of the guide bushing drive device and the two retensioning bolts so that the tension of
the belt is loose enough to bring the guide bushing drive device to the spindle side.
* Do not loosen the retensioning block fixing bolts. This bolt is used as a reference for applying tension to the belt.

5. Remove the flange cover and the guide bushing device.

* Hold the guide bushing device by the flange unit and gently pull it out toward the front. When you remove the
guide bushing device, the air outflows from the air pipe hole and the sound is heard. But it is not a failure.
6. Insert the new guide bushing device into the mounting hole while hanging belt, and secure it with the four fixing
bolts.
Pay attention so that the belt is not crushed by the guide bushing device.

7-11
L32

7. Press by hand so that the bracket of the guide bushing drive device gently touches both sides of the retensioning
block, and then tighten the retensioning bolts, and secure temporarily using the two fixing bolts.
* The belt tension is suitable at this position.

8. Make sure that the tension of belts on the timing pulleys at the spindle side and the guide bushing device side are
same. Turn the spindle clockwise and counterclockwise by hand to make sure that the guide bushing driving
device rotates along with the spindle rotation. Then, firmly tighten the bolts of the guide bushing drive device.
9. Temporarily tighten the arm fixing bolts so that there is no rattling.
Tighten the two arm positioning bolts.
Tighten the three arm fixing bolts to secure the arm to the block.

Failure to perform the operations in [Procedure 7], [Procedure 8], and [Procedure 9] can cause a failure of
the guide bushing drive device or other severe accident. Be sure to always perform the operations in these
steps.

10. Make sure that the spline nut moves along with the spindle rotation (parallelism between the spindle and the spline
shaft) by moving the Z1 axis forward and backward.

11. Attach the flange cover and spindle belt cover and the guide bushing belt cover.

7-12
 L32

7.2.2 Replacing and adjusting the guide bushing

[Procedure]
1. Insert the guide bushing adjustment wrench (provided as a standard tool) into the tommy hole of the drawbar,
which is mounted at the rear of the guide bushing device, and loosen the drawbar clamp screw with a hexagonal
rod wrench. The rod wrench should be attached to the guide bushing adjustment wrench before the work.

Guide bushing and guide bushing adjustment spanner

2. Turn the guide bushing adjustment wrench counterclockwise to loosen the drawbar.
* To prevent the guide bushing device from turning, insert the adjustable pin wrench into the tommy hole of the
guide bushing sleeve. Use the adjustable pin wrench to secure the guide bushing with the securing screw.
3. Pull out the guide bushing toward the front of the device.
4. Insert a new guide bushing into the guide bushing sleeve.
Align the key in the sleeve with the key groove on the outer circumference of the guide bushing.
5. Screw the drawbar into the guide bushing rear and turn the drawbar clockwise for tightening.
6. Using the guide bushing adjustment wrench, tighten the drawbar. Insert a bar material into the guide bushing and
adjust the clearance between guide bushing and bar material while moving the bar material to the axis direction.
7. With the guide bushing adjustment wrench inserted into the drawbar, tighten the clamp screw of the drawbar with
a hexagonal rod wrench.
Be sure to cut-off or remove the bar material.

After the work, be sure to remove the used tool from the guide bushing.
If the machine is operated without removing the tool, the machine may seriously be damaged.

7-13
L32

7.3 Switching over between GB-specification and GBL-specification

7.3.1 Switching from GB-specification (synchronous rotary guide bushing) to
GBL-specification
[Procedure]
1. Move the Z1 axis to backward end position.
 See <6.2.1 Return position>.
2. Remove the spindle belt cover, the guide bushing belt cover, and spindle belt housing.

Figure 1 Guide Bushing Device and Guide Bushing Belt Cover

3. Remove the three arm fixing bolts. Remove the two arm positioning bolts from the plate.

Figure 2 Rotary Guide Bushing specification

7-14
 L32

4. Loosen the two fixing bolts of the guide bushing drive device and the two retensioning bolts and bring the guide
bushing drive device to the spindle side so that the tension of the belt is loose enough.
* Do not loosen the retensioning block fixing bolts. This bolt is used as a reference for applying tension to the belt.

5. Replace the air tube for air purging with the air stopping joint provided on the tool post to stop air inflow.
6. Remove the flange cover of the guide bushing device and the guide bushing device.
* Hold the guide bushing device by the flange unit and gently pull it out toward the front.
7. Plug the M6 air hole to prevent oil from entering the air piping on the guide bushing mounting face by inserting the
socket set screw (M6 × 8) stored in the M6 tapped hole for socket set screw storage into it.

7-15
L32

8. Remove the belt for driving the guide bushing device.

Once the belt is removed, close the guide bushing belt cover.

Figure 3 Guide Bushing-less specification

9. Raise the arm and move it close to the tool post, and as shown in the figure, use a fixing bolt to secure the arm to the
bracket.
10. Place the belt on the belt hook.
11. Tighten the two tension bolts of the guide bushing drive device until the guide bushing drive device gently contacts
the retensioning block, and then secure the guide bushing device using the two fixing bolts.

7-16
 L32

12. Install the guide bushing-less spindle cap.

Be sure to pull the guide bushing drive device to the operator's side and fix it in place.
Otherwise, the guide bushing drive device interferes with the headstock when the Z1 axis moves forward.

13. Press the Parameter key .

The previously selected screen appears.

14. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [MC-STRCT] is displayed.
15. Press the menu key [MC-STRCT].
The Machine Structure screen appears.
16. Use the Arrow keys , Tab keys , or Page key to move the cursor to "GBL
Specification".
17. Press the Menu selection key to make an upper menu active, and press the menu key [Set].
18. Press the Input key to determine the selection.
19. Turn off the NC power, and then on.
[Note]
If you change setting, turn off the NC power. The new setting is made valid at next power-on.

Set "GBL Specification" in Machine Structure.

7-17
L32

7.3.2 Switching from GBL-specification to GB-specification (synchronous rotary guide

bushing)
[Procedure]
1. Move the Z1 axis to backward end position.
 See <6.2.1 Return position>.

2. Press the Parameter key .

The previously selected screen appears.

3. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] until the menu key [MC-STRCT] is displayed.
4. Press the menu key [MC-STRCT].
The Machine Structure screen appears.
5. Use the Arrow keys , Tab keys , or Page key to move the cursor to "Synchronous
RGB Device".
6. Press the Menu selection key to make an upper menu active, and press the menu key [Set].
7. Press the Input key to determine the selection.
8. Turn off the NC power, and then on.
* If you change a setting, turn off the NC power. The new setting is enabled at the next power-on.

Be sure to always set "Synchronous RGB Device" in Machine Structure.

9. Remove the guide bushing-less spindle cap.

Figure 1 Guide Bushing-less specification

10. Loosen the bolts that secure the arm, and hold the arm while removing the bracket.

7-18
 L32

11. Take the bracket on which the belt was mounted and shift it upward a distance equivalent to the size of the slot, and
secure it.
* Be sure to shift the bracket upward. Failure to do so may result in it interfering with the spindle belt cover.
12. Slide the arm towards the main spindle side, place the arm on the block and finger tighten the fixing bolts.

Figure 2 Rotary Guide Bushing specification

13. Fully loosen the fixing bolts and retensioning bolts of the guide bushing drive device, and move the guide bushing
drive device to the spindle side.
* Do not loosen the retensioning block fixing bolts. This bolt is used as a reference for applying tension to the belt.

14. Place the belt on the spindle pulley.

7-19
L32

15. Remove the socket set screws (M6x8) for stopping the air on the guide bushing device mounting surface. You can
store the socket set screws by screwing them into the M6 tap holes of guide bushing drive device bracket.

16. Open the guide bushing belt cover, and place the belt inside the guide bushing base.
17. Insert the replacement guide bushing device of rotary type into the mounting hole while hanging the belt onto the
pulley, and firmly secure using the fixing bolt of the guide bushing device.
* Pay attention so that the belt is not crushed by the guide bushing device.

Figure 3 Guide Bushing Device and Guide Bushing Belt Cover

7-20
 L32

18. Press by hand so that the guide bushing drive device gently touches both sides of the retensioning block, and then
tighten the tension bolts, and secure temporarily using the two fixing bolts.
* The belt tension is suitable at this position.

19. Make sure that the tension of belts on the timing pulleys at the spindle side and the guide bushing device side are
same. Turn the spindle clockwise and counterclockwise by hand to make sure that the guide bushing driving
device rotates along with the spindle rotation. Then, firmly tighten the bolts of the guide bushing drive device.
20. Temporarily secure the three arm fixing bolts, then tighten the two positioning bolts of the plate.
Fully tighten the three arm fixing bolts to secure the arm to the block.
* Turn the belt by hand while adjusting the position of the connection block so that the belt is centered on the
pulleys.

Failure to perform the operations in [Procedure 15], [Procedure 18], and [Procedure 19] can cause a failure
of the guide bushing drive device or other severe accident. Be sure to always perform the operations in
these steps.

7-21
L32

21. Make sure that the spline nut moves along with the spindle rotation by moving the Z1 axis forward and backward.

22. Install the flange cover from the spindle room side and insert the air tube to provide air.
23. Install the spindle belt housing, spindle belt cover, and guide bushing belt cover.
24. Install the spindle cap for guide bushing specifications.

7-22
 L32

7.4 Rearrangement of Back Spindle Device

7.4.1 Mounting and adjusting chuck
[Procedure]
1. Loosen the spindle cap set screws and remove the spindle cap.

2. Place the hook wrench on the cap nut, fit a single-ended wrench onto the two-side width (width:70mm) of the
spindle, and loosen the cap nut.
* The cap nut is right hand screw.
3. Turn the cap nut to remove it from the spindle.
4. Mount a new chuck on the chuck sleeve inserted into the spindle.
* Before mounting it, check the square spring is in the chuck sleeve.
If an old chuck is on the chuck sleeve, hold it and pull it out to this side, and mount the new one.

7-23
L32

5. Screw the cap nut into the spindle, and firmly tighten it with the hook wrench and single-ended wrench.
6. Finally, firmly secure the spindle cap with the set screws.
* Mount so that the oil drain hole of the chuck faces downwards.

If the oil drain hole of the spindle cap does not face straight downward, oil enters into the bearing to
cause possible damage. Be sure to mount the cap so that the oil drain hole faces straight
downward.

7-24
 L32

7.4.2 Adjusting back spindle chucking force

[Procedure]
1. Use the Operation mode switch button on the operation panel to select Preparation .

The Preparation screen appears.

2. Remove the back spindle cover.
3. Press the Back spindle chuck key on the operation panel to open the chuck. Then, insert the workpiece into
the chuck.

4. Loosen the lock screw of chuck adjustment nut located behind the chuck finger holder, and turn and loosen the
chuck adjustment nut counterclockwise.
5. Press the Back spindle chuck button on the operation panel to close the chuck.
* Check the Back spindle chuck key lamp goes on.
6. With the chuck adjustment nut being fully loose and chuck closed, slowly tighten the chuck adjustment nut until
the chuck gets in touch with the material and starts to chuck it.
Define the point as the nut angle zero point.
7. Press the back spindle chuck button to open the chuck.
The back spindle chuck button goes off.
8. Pull out the connecting shaft that secures the chucking lever and the chuck open/close cylinder shaft.
* Because the connecting shaft is secured by the force of the spring, it can be pulled out without using a tool.

7-25
L32

9. Insert the removed connecting shaft in the hole below the air cylinder and raise the air cylinder.

10. Tighten the chuck adjustment nut from the 0 degree nut angle confirmed in step 6 to the required angle as shown in
the figure.

Relationship between adjustment nut rotating angle of back spindle and chuck thrust

*1
The screw hole interval on the chuck finger holder circumference is 60° and the interval between dials is 15°.
*2
The figure shown above indicates the data when a Citizen authorized chuck is used. If a third party chuck is
used, the force may not be equivalent to the value shown in the figure above.
11. Firmly insert the chuck open close tool (tommy rod) into the hole on the chucking lever, and use it to move the
chucking lever right and left to check the chucking force.
If chucking force is too large or too small, turn the chuck adjustment nut to adjust it.
12. When obtaining a suitable chucking force, set the chucking lever to place the spindle chuck in open state (the
chuck finger is away from the bobbin).
13. Insert the connecting shaft in the chucking lever and the chuck open/close cylinder shaft until the rim of the
connecting shaft contacts the chucking lever. The connecting shaft is secured in place by a spring, and so check
that it cannot be easily removed.
14. Tighten the lock screw of the chuck adjustment nut to prevent loosening, and then remove the workpiece.

7-26
 L32

• Avoid empty chuck (chucking without bar material). Otherwise, malfunctioning or damage to the collet
chuck may occur.
• In the machining where higher cutting force is generated, set strong chucking force. If the chucking
force is weak, the material may slip.
Note, however, do not set the value beyond the adaptable range shown in the graph on previous page.
Doing so may cause damage to the machine.
• When using pipe material, excess chucking force may deform the material. In such the case, readjust
the chucking force.
• When adjusting the chuck, do not move air cylinder further upwards than needed.
Otherwise the cables or the air tube connected to the cylinder could break.

7-27
L32

7.5 Adjusting knock-out device

The knock-out device unloads the workpiece from the back spindle. The knock-out device is also used as an air blower
in the back spindle device. The device is equipped with a safety unit so that an alarm occurs to stop it if the workpiece is
not unloaded appropriately in spite of specification of workpiece unloading. A knock-out jig appropriate to the diameter
of the workpiece must be used. Two knock-out jigs are provided as standard accessories for the device. If these
knock-out jigs are not appropriate to the diameter of the machined workpiece, the customer must manufacture a proper
knock-out jig.
There are two types of knock-out devices, an air cylinder driven (U53B or U51B) and a motor driven (U52B). Note that
they do not operate in the same way.
7.5.1 Mounting and replacing knock-out jig
[Procedure]
1. Advance the knock-out device to allow you to see the knock-out jig through the front-end of the back spindle cap.
2. Stop the machine and remove the back spindle cap.
Remove the cap nut, chuck and chuck sleeve.
3. The knock-out pipe and the knock-out jig extrude from the front end of the spindle.
4. Remove the knock-out jig by using the dedicated wrench.

When replacing the knock-out jig, pay attention not to apply excess force to the knock-out pipe. Deformed
knock-out pipe will fail to knock-out the workpiece correctly, and it causes a damage to the machine.

5. Mount a new knock-out jig appropriate to the workpiece diameter on the pipe.
6. Insert the chuck sleeve and the chuck and tighten the cap nut.
7. Adjust the length of the knock-out pipe so that the knock-out jig extends 3mm beyond the front end of the cap nut
and tighten the bolt.
 See <7.5.2 Adjusting protrusion amount of knock-out jig>.
8. Mount the back spindle cap.
9. Adjust the chucking force of back spindle.
 See <7.4.2 Adjusting back spindle chucking force>.

7-28
 L32

7.5.2 Adjusting protrusion amount of knock-out jig

Adjust the knock-out jig protrusion amount from the end face of the back cap nut.
[Procedure]
1. Stop the machine and remove back spindle cover.
2. Make the knock-out device advanced.
3. Loosen the bolt, and adjust the position of knock-out pipe appropriately.
* Adjust the knock-out jig protrusion amount from the front end of the cap. Set the protrusion amount to 3 mm.
4. Tighten the split bolt to fix the knock-out pipe in place.
5. Advance and retract the knock-out device several times to make sure that the bolt is not loosened and the knock-out
jig protrusion amount does not change.
6. Mount back spindle cover.
[Note]
When the "KNOCK-OUT OVERLOAD" alarm occurs after adjusting the U51B, the sensor position must be readjusted.
See <7.5.3 Resetting knock-out overload alarm (U51B)>.
7.5.3 Resetting knock-out overload alarm (U51B)
If the knock-out operation fails, the workpiece may be left in the back spindle chuck. The sensor mounted on the
knock-out device detects error status to prevent the machine from being damaged if the knock-out cylinder does not
make normal stroke or the knock-out pipe is pushed backward by larger than the predetermined value.
Reset the "KNOCK OUT OVERLOAD" alarm in the following procedures.
[Procedure]
1. Remove the back spindle cap and the cap nut. Then, remove the workpiece from the chuck.
2. Make sure that the knock-out pipe and the knock-out jig are not damaged.

If the knock-out pipe is seriously damaged (e.g., bent or deformed), replace the knock-out pipe with new
one. With the bent knock-out pipe will fail the knock-out operation, and causes a damage to the machine.

3. Move the knock-out device to the retract position.

4. Press the Reset key to cancel "KNOCK OUT OVERLOAD" alarm.
If pressing the Reset key does not reset the alarm, the sensor must be adjusted again. If the alarm still appears after
the adjustment of the sensor, see <23.4.13 Recovery from other alarms>.
5. Mount the chuck, cap nut and the back spindle cap.
6. Make sure that the knock-out jig is protruding from the front-end of the cap nut by 3mm.
7. Advance and retract the knock-out device several times to make sure that the alarm does not occur.
8. Adjust the chucking force of back spindle.
 See <7.4.2 Adjusting back spindle chucking force>.

7-29
L32

7.5.4 Adjusting knock-out feed rate

 U53B, U51B
Adjust the speed controller of knock-out advance and retract and adjust feed rate of the knock-out shaft.

 U52B
The speed of the knock-out shaft can be specified by the program.
For details, see <15.5 Knock-out Advance/Retract (M10, M11)>.

7-30
 L32

7.6 Rearrangement of through-hole workpiece

7.6.1 Mounting knock-out device for through-hole workpiece knock-out device
[Procedure]
1. Remove the knock-out jig from the knock-out pipe.
 See <7.5.1 Mounting and replacing knock-out jig>.
2. Loosen the taper cap bolt, remove the standard knock-out pipe and replace it with a knock-out pipe for
through-hole workpiece.
3. Pull out the collet chuck, chuck sleeve, square spring, and collar.
 See <7.4.1 Mounting and adjusting chuck>.
4. Insert the assembly of the cartridge, sleeve, compression coil spring and through-hole workpiece knock-out jig (to
be referred to as a cartridge, hereafter) into the chuck sleeve.
Next, insert the square spring, and collet chuck into the sleeve in this order.

5. Insert the chuck sleeve partially assembled in Step 4 into the back spindle, and mount the cap nut and spindle cap.
 See <7.4.1 Mounting and adjusting chuck>.

7-31
L32

Do not use the standard knock-out jig to mount the through-hole workpiece knock-out device. The
machine may be damaged by interference with the knock-out jig.

6. Move the knock-out device forward and backward to make sure that nothing engages with the knock-out pipe.
7. Move the knock-out device forward and lightly press the tip of the jig.
Make sure that the jig does not go in further than the cap end. If the jig goes into the cap, it is necessary to adjust the
knock-out device.
 See <7.5 Adjusting knock-out device>.
8. Adjust the chucking force of back spindle.
 See <7.4.2 Adjusting back spindle chucking force>.

7-32
 L32

7.6.2 Replacing the knock-out jig for through-hole workpieces

You need to replace the knock-out jig depending on the workpiece profile (chuck diameter and through-hole diameter).
The following four types of knock-out jigs for through-hole workpieces and a blank knock-out jig are available.
L32 U550B
L32 U551B L32U552B
(For L32U940B,
(For L32U950B) (For L32U960B)
L32U941B)
For ø8   
For ø16   
For ø20   
For ø25   
For ø32   
For ø38   
For ø25 blank   
For ø32 blank  － －
For ø38 blank －  
• For ø8 (Material: C3604B)

• For ø16 (Material: C3604B)

7-33
L32

• For ø20 (Material: C3604B)

• For ø25 (Material: C3604B)

• For ø32 (Material: C3604B)

7-34
 L32

• For ø38 (Material: C3604B)

• For ø25 blank (Material: C3604B)

• For ø32 blank (Material: C3604B)

7-35
L32

• For ø38 blank (Material: C3604B)

[Procedure]
1. Remove the spindle cap, cap nut, and collet chuck.
 See <7.4.1 Mounting and adjusting chuck>.
2. While holding the tip of knock-out jig for through-hole workpiece, pull out the square spring and the cartridge of
knock-out device for through-hole workpiece toward you.
3. Replace the knock-out jig for through-hole workpiece at the tip of cartridge by using a wrench.
4. Insert the cartridge, square spring and collet chuck into the chuck sleeve in order. Then, mount the cap and spindle
cap.
 See <7.4.1 Mounting and adjusting chuck>.
5. Move the knock-out device forward and backward to make sure that nothing engages with the knock-out jig.
6. Move the knock-out device forward and lightly press the tip of the jig.
Make sure that the jig does not go in further than the cap end. If the jig goes into the cap, it is necessary to adjust the
knock-out device.
 See <7.5 Adjusting knock-out device>.
7. Adjust the chucking force of back spindle.
 See <7.4.2 Adjusting back spindle chucking force>.

[Note]
• Two kinds of compression coil springs are provided with the machine. If the knock-out device does not work as
expected, use the stronger one.
• If the knock-out device is used together with medium pressure coolant device, the same through-hole knock-out jig
to be used.

7-36
 L32

7.7 Diameter/Length Selection Type Knock-out Jig

7.7.1 Selection of knock-out jig diameter/length
Besides the knock-out jig that is supplied as an accessory with the machine, knock-out jigs whose diameter and length
are selectable are optionally available. (Built-to-order products)
To order one, select the model (example: KJSC0304), the jig end diameter ød [mm] and the length (neck length) L [mm],
and contact Citizen Machinery.
Knock-out jig/model correspondence table
Model Jig end diameter: ød [mm] Length (neck length): L [mm] Knock-out device type
KJSC0304 ø3.0 to ø4.9 L32U52B
KJSC0507 ø5.0 to ø7.9 L32U53B
0 to 15
KJSC0821 ø8.0 to ø21.9 S: Standard type
KJSC2237 ø22.0 to ø37.9 (for solid workpieces)
KJHC0304 ø3.0 to ø4.9 L32U550B
KJHC0513 ø5.0 to ø13.9 L32U551B
KJHC1424 ø14.0 to ø24.9 0 to 15 L32U552B
H: Through-hole type
KJHC2537 ø25.0 to ø37.9
(for hollow workpieces)
The jig end diameter ød [mm] and length (neck length) L [mm] cited in the table above are as indicated in the figure
below.

7-37
L32

7.7.2 Model name and selection of diameter/length

(1) Selection of knock-out device type

• S
Standard: Standard type (for solid workpieces)
• H
Hole: Through-hole type (for hollow workpieces)
(2) Selection of jig end diameter: ød [mm]
Select ød according to the diameter of the workpiece to be clamped in the back spindle.
(ød can be selected in 0.1-mm increments.)
(3) Selection of model name
Select the model name from the table below according to ød.
Model Jig end diameter: ød [mm] Knock-out device type
KJSC0304 ø3.0 to ø4.9
L32U52B
KJSC0507 ø5.0 to ø7.9
L32U53B
KJSC0821 ø8.0 to ø21.9
S: Standard type (for solid workpieces)
KJSC2237 ø22.0 to ø37.9
KJHC0304 ø3.0 to ø4.9 L32U550B
KJHC0513 ø5.0 to ø13.9 L32U551B
KJHC1424 ø14.0 to ø24.9 L32U552B
KJHC2537 ø25.0 to ø37.9 H: Through-hole type (for hollow workpieces)
(4) Selection of length (neck length): L [mm]
Select in the range from 0 to 15 [mm] according to the neck length of the collet chuck.
(L can be selected in 1-mm increments.)

*1
KJ: Knock-out Jig
*2
C: Identification code (varying depending on the machine model)

7-38
 L32

7.7.3 Knock-out jig selection example

When selecting a knock-out jig to be used on L32 for solid workpieces to be clamped in the back spindle with a chucking
diameter of ø20.0 using a collet chuck with a neck length of L = 10.
Model Part Name Diameter/length Q’ty
Standard knock-out jig (ø8.0 to 21.9) 1

(1) Since the jig is used on L32 for solid workpieces, the leading code of the model name is KJSC.
(2) Since the chucking diameter of the workpiece to be clamped in the back spindle is ø20.0, ø19.0 is selected for ød as
an example.
* Select a value smaller than the chucking diameter of the back spindle collet chuck for ød.
(3) Since the standard type KJSC for solid workpieces is selected in (1) and ød = 19.0 is selected in (2), KJSC0821 is
selected from the table below.
Model Jig end diameter (ød) [mm] Knock-out device type
KJSC0304 ø3.0 to ø4.9
L32U52B
KJSC0507 ø5.0 to ø7.9
L32U53B
KJSC0821 ø8.0 to ø21.9
S: Standard type (for solid workpieces)
KJSC2237 ø22.0 to ø37.9
KJHC0304 ø3.0 to ø4.9 L32U550B
KJHC0513 ø5.0 to ø13.9 L32U551B
KJHC1424 ø14.0 to ø24.9 L32U552B
KJHC2537 ø25.0 to ø37.9 H: Through-hole type (for hollow workpieces)
(4) Since the neck length of the collet chuck is L = 10, select L = 10 also for the knock-out jig.

7-39
L32

7.7.4 General shapes of knock-out jigs

 Knock-out jig for standard workpieces
• KJSC0304: Standard knock-out jig (ø3.0 to 4.9)

• KJSC0507: Standard knock-out jig (ø5.0 to 7.9)

• KJSC0821: Standard knock-out jig (ø8.0 to 21.9)

• KJSC2237: Standard knock-out jig (ø22.0 to 37.9)

7-40
 L32

 Knock-out jig for through-hole workpiece

• KJHC0304: Through-hole knock-out jig (ø3.0 to 4.9)

• KJHC0513: Through-hole knock-out jig (ø5.0 to 13.9)

• KJHC1424: Through-hole knock-out jig (ø14.0 to 24.9)

• KJHC2537: Through-hole knock-out jig (ø25.0 to 37.9)

7-41
L32

7.8 Phase Adjustment between Spindle and Guide Bushing

(Non-conformed Material)
To use a non-conformed material, the phase between the main spindle and the guide bushing device must be adjusted.
Take the following procedures to adjust the phase. Before starting, provide a sufficient work space because the
adjustment is to be performed from the rear of the machine.
[Procedure]
1. Mount the chuck for non-conformed material, and adjust the chucking force.
 For mounting the chuck for non-conformed material, see <7.1.1 Mounting and replacing spindle chuck>
and <7.1.2 Adjusting spindle chucking force>.

A pin is inserted into the chuck sleeve for non-conformed material. Be sure to align the chuck with
a pin when tightening the main spindle cap nut. If the chuck and the pin are not aligned, the chuck
may be damaged when tightening the main spindle cap nut.

2. Mount the guide bushing for non-conformed material.

 See <7.1.1 Mounting and replacing spindle chuck>.
* The clearance of guide bushing must be adjusted after the phases between the main spindle and the guide
bushing device has been adjusted.
Subsequent operations are performed on the rear side of the machine.
3. Remove the guide bushing belt cover.
You will see the timing pulley of the guide bushing driving device.

7-42
 L32

4. Loosen the four bolts securing the flange with the timing pulley. You do not need to remove them.

5. Rotate the timing pulley to align the phase of the main spindle with that of the guide bushing device so that
non-conformed material can go into the guide bushing device.
For adjustment, adjust the phases between the flange and the pulley.
If the phases between the spindle and the guide bushing device cannot be aligned completely, you need to move the
hanging position of the belt by one teeth.
 See <7.2 Mounting/Adjusting a Guide Bushing Device>.
6. Adjust the clearance between the guide bushing and the material.
 See <7.1.1 Mounting and replacing spindle chuck>.
7. Fix the phases of the spindle and the guide bushing.
Firmly tighten the four bolts that have been loosened in Step 4.
Make sure that the belt is properly set to the timing pulley.
8. Slowly move the spindle forward and backward to make sure that the guide bushing device and the non-conformed
material are properly adjusted.
9. Make sure that the non-conformed material can be inserted into guide bushing device repeately.
10. If the phases are not aligned, perform adjustment again.
11. Mount the guide bushing belt cover.

7-43
L32

7.9 Mounting and Adjusting Workpiece Separator

7.9.1 Workpiece collection mode
This machine provides the following four methods for collecting the workpieces.
• Pick-off collection mode (U30J, U31J) — (standard)
Holds a workpiece with the back spindle ("pick-off") and puts it in a workpiece chute ("knock-out"). This method is
normally used for collecting a workpiece that can be chucked by the back spindle and unloaded outside the machine
by the workpiece conveyor.
Maximum product length for U30J (for type Ⅷ, IX) is 150 mm and 140 mm for U31J (for type X, Ⅻ).
• Workpiece receiver box mode (U33J) — (optional)
This method is used for collecting a workpiece (a short workpiece or disc shape workpiece) which cannot be
chucked by the back spindle. The back spindle chucking device is removed and replaced with the workpiece receiver
box. The finished workpiece is cut off and collected in this workpiece receiver box. The workpiece receiver box can
collect a workpiece that is up to 50mm [1.96"] in length. When this method is used, however, back machining is
disabled. After being dropped into the product chute, it is unloaded outside the machine by the workpiece conveyor.
• Long workpiece device mode (U420B) — (optional)
Workpieces pass inside the back spindle one after the other, each pushing the one in front towards the back spindle
and into the the long workpiece product shelf where they are collected. The workpiece receiver box can collect a
workpiece that is between 150 mm and 500 mm in length, and up to 32 mm in diameter.
• Workpiece unloader mode(U35J) — (option)
Workpieces are directly transferred from the back spindle to the hand, which places it in the product shelf outside the
machine. Maximum product length is 220 mm for type Ⅷ and IX and 205 mm for type X and Ⅻ. Workpieces that
are difficult to handle are handled by the workpiece receiver box (U351J) instead of the hand which unloads them in
the product shelf outside the machine. Maximum product length for the U351J is 150 mm.
7.9.2 Pick-off collection mode (U30J, U31J)
The back spindle approaches the fixed product chute, then holds and puts the workpiece in a workpiece chute. If the
workpiece is too thin or small to collect, the advance position of the back spindle must be changed.

7-44
 L32

7.9.3 Setup for retrieving workpieces from the workpiece receiver box (U33J)
Mount the workpiece receiver box at the tip of back spindle. The machined workpiece is collected in the receiver box,
and ejected to the product chute.
The opposite tool post, the back tool post tool type and cutting tool length interfere with each other.
If this happens, remove the tool that causes interference.

Described below are operation procedures when the Setting switch is set to the “ ”.

If you are going to work inside the machine, press the Door open button to unlock the door.
If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
The door cannot be unlocked unless the following conditions are met.
• All spindles have stopped.
• All servo axes have stopped.
• The machine is not operating.
• The coolant is not discharged.
• The Door open button is pressed.

7-45
L32

[Procedure]
1. Press the Back spindle chuck key to open the back spindle chuck.
2. Loosen the lock screw of the chuck adjustment nut on the rear side of the chuck finger holder.
 See <7.4.1 Mounting and adjusting chuck>.
3. Loosen the chuck adjustment nut.
4. Move the chuck finger holder to the rear side of the spindle.

5. Remove the back spindle cap and cap nut.

 See <7.4.1 Mounting and adjusting chuck>.
6. Remove the chuck, the square spring and the stabilizer.

7-46
 L32

7. Remove the knock-out.

 See <7.5.1 Mounting and replacing knock-out jig>.
8. Install a chuck sleeve. Do not install a square sprint and stabilizer.
9. Screw the basket cap nut into the front end of the back spindle, and firmly tighten it with the hook wrench and
dedicated wrench.
10. Specify M780 command in MDI mode to index the back spindle.
11. Press the reset key to cancel the indexing operation.
12. Finger tighten the workpiece receiver box and ring washer bolts.

13. Mount the spindle cap, and secure the spindle cap with fixing screw.
Be sure to mount the spindle cap so that its drain cutout facing straight down.

Otherwise, oil will enter the bearings and damage them. Mount the spindle cap with its oil drain
cutout facing straight down.

14. Use the dedicated spanner to prevent the spindle from turning and tighten the fixing bolts of the workpiece receiver
box.
15. With the spindle chuck open state, turn the chuck adjustment nut toward you and lightly tighten it until it stops.
Then, tighten the lock screw securely.
16. After mounting the receiver box, issue the M780 command again to confirm the normal operataion, since the back
spindle is not energized.
17. Make sure that the device does not interfere with the guide bushing at cut-off machining.
Slowly advance the back spindle to X=1000.0, Z2=322.5 of the machine coordinate.
18. Make sure that the device does not interfere with the product chute.
Slowly advance the back spindle until it reaches product ejection position (X2 = 0.0, Z2 = 121.0 for type Ⅷ and Ⅸ)
(X2＝0.0, Z2 = 61.0 for type X and Ⅻ), observing the interference with the tools for back machining.

7-47
L32

7.10 Setting Up and Adjusting the Long Workpiece Device (Option)

Qualified maintenance personnel should perform mounting and removing receiver shelf for long workpiece
device or pipe.

The device is used to unload products exceeding 150mm [3.94"] in workpiece length. A product of up to 500mm in
workpiece length can be unloaded with this device. The product is transferred through the workpiece stock pipe
mounted in the back spindle and unloaded to the workpiece receiver shelf mounted on the left side of the machine. Select
the pipe for long workpieces (option), bushing (option) and collar appropriate to the diameter of the workpiece.

If the specific receiver shelf for long workpiece is not mounted, the stock pipe extrudes from the machine.
Running the machine with that state may cause a workpiece to run out from the pipe, resulting in a serious
personal injury. Be sure to mount the workpiece receiver shelf specified by the manufacturer for your
safety.

Long Workpiece Device Type

7-48
 L32

7.10.1 Process changeover of long workpiece pipe

[Procedure]
1. Select "Long workpiece device" in the Machine Structure screen.
2. Provide some work space at the side of the machine.
3. Push the front end of the air joint to remove the air hose. If an intermediate pressure device is also used, remove the
intermediate pressure hose as well.
4. Loosen bolt 1 and remove the connection plate and the knock-out pipe. There is no need to loosen bolt 2 that holds
the knock-out pipe in place.
5. Remove bolt 3 and remove the guide sleeve.
6. Install the long workpiece device flange after removing the guide sleeve.
7. Insert a workpiece stock pipe appropriate to the workpiece diameter and secure the pipe with set screws.
8. Mount a support pipe on a plate at the rear end of the workpiece stock pipe.
 For adjusting the longitudinal adjustment pipe. See <7.4.1 Mounting and adjusting chuck>
9. Advance the air cylinder of the knock-out device to shorten the cylinder rod.
This is intended to protect the knock-out from vibration during the machine operation.
• When long workpieces are collected, adjust the back spindle position and adjustment pipe position to prevent the
workpiece at the end of the workpiece stock pipe from becoming unstable. As a rule, that happens when more than
half of workpiece length extends beyond the workpiece stock pipe.

7-49
L32

• When adjusting back spindle position and the adjusting pipe does not prevent instability of workpieces at the back
end of the workpiece stock pipe, advance the Z1 axis to eject the workpiece before starting cutting.
• There are the following types of workpiece stock pipes (option).
Compatible
workpiece diameter
M432 U4221B ø20 mm
M432 U4226B ø25 mm
M432 U4233B ø32 mm
• Workpiece stock pipe (for ø20)

• Workpiece stock pipe (for ø25)

• Workpiece stock pipe (for ø32)

7-50
 L32

• Support pipe (for ø20)

• Support pipe (for ø25)

• Support pipe (for ø32)

7-51
L32

7.10.2 Mounting cap nut and collar for long workpiece device
To process long workpieces, install a stabilizing front end bushing in the cap nut of the back spindle.

[Procedure]
1. Remove the chuck, square spring, and collar from the chuck sleeve of back spindle.
 See <7.4.1 Mounting and adjusting chuck>.
2. Mount the cap having the diameter appropriate to the workpiece.
* Use long-body shape for small-diameter and short workpiece
3. Mount the cap nut for long workpiece device.
4. Mount the bushing on the end of the cap nut.
5. Adjust the chucking force again.
 See <7.4.2 Adjusting back spindle chucking force>.

[Note]
• The long workpiece processing pipe comes with the following standard bushings.
M432U4221B M432 U4226B M432 U4233B
Nominal diameter ø32 – – 1
(D) Blank 1 1 –
Machine the following parts as indicated.
Hole diameter in blank D + 0.5± 0.1
(øD1) =
D: Maximum workpiece
diameter

7-52
 L32

Front end bushing (ø32)

• When a front end bushing is mounted, it will protrude 10 mm further out than the standard cap nut so you need to
watch back spindle advance position during cut-off operations.

7-53
L32

7.10.3 Installing a stabilizer guide

[Procedure]
1. Remove the chuck sleeve from the back spindle.
 See <7.4.1 Mounting and adjusting chuck>.
Remove the chuck and square spring from the chuck sleeve and replace the support guide.
Follow the instructions to remove the chuck sleeve in the reverse order to install it.

[Note]
• A support guide, as shown below, are provided for the cap nut of the long workpiece device as a standard accessory.
The long body support guide makes it possible to collect workpieces with a diameter less than 32 mm, from
workpieces with a diameter of 25 mm and with a total length of 70 mm or more.
L32 U943B
Nominal diameter (D) Standard configuration ø32.3 (Supplied with chucking
device L32 U940B)
Long body shape ø25.3 1
Blank Standard configuration 1
Long body shape 1
Machine the following parts as indicated.
Hole diameter in blank D + 0.3± 0.1
(øD1) =
D: Maximum workpiece
diameter

L32 standard configuration

7-54
 L32

L32 Long body shape

7.10.4 Long workpiece receiver shelf (option)

The product shelf comes in two types, a dedicated type (U420B) and a shared type (U422B) that is used with the
workpiece unloader.

The receiver shelf is very large and heavy component. At least two persons are required to handle the shelf
to avoid personal injury.

[Procedure]
1. Remove the right side cover.
2. Mount the shelf.
If the height of the shelf does not match with the machine height, adjust the position of the shelf with the height
adjustment bolt.
3. Mount the side cover for long workpiece device.
4. Store the cover that was removed in Step 1 in a safe place.
5. When the shared type (U422B) is used with the workpiece unloader (U35J), the U35J is provided with a chute as
shown in the figure.

Long workpiece device (U420B)

7-55
L32

Long workpiece device (U422B)

Long workpiece device (U422B)

7-56
 L32

7.10.5 Adjusting position of longitudinal adjustment pipe

The workpiece is transferred through the workpiece stock pipe mounted in the back spindle and unloaded sequentially to
the left side of the machine. You need to adjust the position of stock pipe in longitudinal direction using the adjustment
pipe mounted at the exit of the stock pipe.

[Procedure]
1. Loosen the fixing screws in the adjusting pipe.
 See the figure of the long workpiece device (U420B).
2. Adjust the position of longitudinal adjustment pipe so that the workpiece to be unloaded does not run out from the
end of pipe.
3. Firmly tighten the securing screws in the adjustment pipe and secure the support pipe.

Be sure to adjust the position of adjustment pipe in longitudinal direction. The workpiece to be unloaded
may run out from the pipe for long workpiece machining device, and it may cause damage to the receiver
shelf or machine body.

Be sure to confirm that the machine has stopped before attempting to adjust the position of adjustment
pipe. The adjustment during machine operation could result in serious personal injury.

7-57
L32

7.11 Workpiece conveyor

Before adjusting the workpiece conveyor, make sure to turn OFF the main breaker. The work with the main
breaker set in the ON position could result in serious personal injury.

7.11.1 Adjusting workpiece chute

Adjust the position of the delrin plate appropriate to the workpiece, and adjust the gap between the workpiece chute and
the belt. Collecting the thin or small workpieces without adjusting the gap may reduce the collection efficiency.
Therefore, it is recommended to adjust the gap every time the different size of workpiece is machined. See the figure
below.
[Procedure]
1. Loosen the bolt.
2. Move the position of delrin plate to adjust gap between the chute and the belt.
3. Tighten the bolt.
4. Make sure that the workpiece chute is firmly fixed.
5. To make a test cut or similar single operations, it is possible to use a stopper if required.

Adjust the delrin plate so that it does not contact with the belt. Otherwise, the workpiece conveyor might be
damaged when running the machine.

7-58
 L32

7.11.2 Cleaning the workpiece conveyor

The workpiece conveyor carries chips together with workpieces, and ejects them in the oil pan. Remove chips
accumulated in the chip receiver box.

Before removing chips, make sure to turn OFF the main breaker. The work with the main breaker set in the
ON position could result in serious personal injury.

[Procedure]
1. Remove the fixing bolt and raise the oil pan slightly to remove it.
2. Remove chips accumulated in the oil pan.
3. Replace the oil pan and secure it with the fixing bolt.

7-59
L32

7.12 Workpiece Unloader (U35J, Option), Workpiece Receiver Box (U351J,

Option)
By using the workpiece unloader (U35J) instead of the work conveyor (U32J), the largest (type Ⅷ, Ⅸ: 220 mm, type X,
Ⅻ: 205 mm) workpieces picked off by the back spindle can be handled and unloaded from the machine.
Replacing the chuck finger holder of the handling unit with the receiver box (U351J) allows the receiver box to handle
difficult to handle workpieces up to 150 mm. It will also be able to receive workpieces from the workpiece separator
(back basket collector: U33J).
7.12.1 Workpiece unloader overview

[Procedure]
1. The hand removes workpieces picked off by the back spindle.
2. When the back spindle moves to pick off the next workpiece, the hand unloads the previous workpiece.
3. Then the hand returns to the machine to wait for the next operation.
 For details on hand operations, see <15.8.1 Series of workpiece unloader operations (M334)>.
Special specifications will make possible transfer of workpieces to other machines.

7-60
L32

7-61
L32

7-62
 L32

7.12.2 Installing product shelf in workpiece unloader

The product shelf comes in two types, a dedicated type (U352J) and a shared type (U422B) that is used with the long
workpiece device.
For details on the shared type, see ＜7.10.4 Long workpiece receiver shelf (option)＞.

The receiver shelf is very large and heavy component. At least two persons are required to handle the shelf
to avoid personal injury.

[Procedure]
1. Remove the right side cover.
2. Mount the shelf.
If the height of the shelf does not match with the machine height, adjust the position of the shelf with the height
adjustment bolt.
3. Mount the side cover for long workpiece device.
4. Store the cover that was removed in Step 1 in a safe place.

Dedicated shelf for product unloader (U352J)

 Workpiece receiver box

The product collection box can use the oil bath type product receiver box that is supplied with the U352J or the U422B.

7-63
L32

7.12.3 Replacing and adjusting fingers in the hand

The fingers of the hand need to be selected to suit the diameter and configuration of workpieces.
The following four finger types are provided as standard accessories. When replacing a finger, press it firmly into the
chuck finger holder to attach it.
Workpieces that cannot be gripped by these fingers will make it necessary to create fingers with a configuration that can.

• For ø32 - 38

Number of chuck fingers: 2

• For ø26 - 32

Number of chuck fingers: 2

7-64
 L32

• For ø20 - 26

Number of chuck fingers: 2

• For ø12 - 20

Number of chuck fingers: 2

• For ø4 - 12

The set air pressure of the air chuck used by the workpiece hand is normally 0.5 MPa. However, by adjusting the air
chuck regulator at the rear of the machine will allow you to lower the air pressure to adjust gripping force.

7-65
L32

Rear of the machine

7.12.4 Adjusting the core of the hand

Use the steps below to adjust the workpiece hand and the back spindle core.
Since only the fingers in the hand are replaced, this operation is not required.
To return a chuck finger from the receiver box (U351J), adjust the core of only the chuck finger holder.
[Procedure]
1. Remove the cover and the hand chuck fingers.
2. From on the operation panel, execute "Unloading" -->"Return to adjust posit".

3. On the same screen, run "Hand open" and then "Hand (bucket) movement".
This will allow you to move the hand.
For details on operations in Step 2 and 3, see <6.28 Unloading Screen>.
4. Handle feed the workpiece hand until the R indentation in the chuck finger holder engages the outer diameter of the
back spindle cap nut.
When the back spindle chucking device is a 38 mm diameter L32U950B, you can use the Y35Z simplified
centering jig to perform this process.
If highly accurate centering is required, place the workpiece in the chuck finger before centering.

7-66
 L32

5. Loosen the bolts that secure the air chuck of the workpiece hand unit and chuck finger holder.
6. From on the operation panel, execute "Unloading" -->"Hand close".

* A hand sensor alarm may occur at this time, but press to clear the alarm and continue operation.

7. Tighten the bolt you loosened in step 5.

8. Repeat "Hand open" and "Hand close" a number of times to confirm that the workpiece is centered.
9. If it is not centered, repeat steps 5 - 8 again.

7-67
L32

7.12.5 Receiver box overview

Replacing the chuck finger holder of the handling unit in the workpiece unloader (U35J) with the receiver box (U351J)
makes it possible to use the basket for unloading.
A workpiece with a maximum diameter of 38 mm and a total length of 150 mm can be unloaded.

[Procedure]
1. A workpiece in the chuck of the back spindle that has been machined is unloaded in the receiver box.
2. When the back spindle moves to pick off the next workpiece, the hand unloads the previous workpiece.
3. Then the hand returns to the machine to wait for the next operation.
For details on basket operations, see <15.8.1 Series of workpiece unloader operations (M334)>.
7.12.6 Replacing the receiver box
 To change from work chuck finger to receiver box
[Procedure]
1. Remove the chuck finger holder and cover from the workpiece unloader.

7-68
 L32

2. Install the receiver box and the covers.

3. Select "Work Unloader (Basket)" in the Machine Structure screen.

See <6.12 Machine Structure>.

 To change from receiver box to work chuck finger

[Procedure]
1. Remove the receiver box and the covers.
2. Install the chuck finger holder and workpiece hand cover.
3. Select "Work Unloader (Hand)" in the Machine Structure screen.
See <6.12 Machine Structure>.
4. If required, make a core adjustment for the chuck finger holder.
See <7.12.4 Adjusting the core of the hand>.

[Note]
If you change settings in the Machine Structure screen, turn off NC power.
The new setting is made valid at next power-on.

7-69
L32

7.12.7 Switching from long workpiece device to shared shelf for workpiece unloader
(U422B)
 Switching from long workpiece device to workpiece unloader

[Procedure]
1. Remove the long workpiece chute.
2. Attach the chute for device for unloading product outside machine.
3. If required, make a core adjustment for the chuck finger holder.
See <7.12.4 Adjusting the core of the hand>.

[Note]
If you change settings in the Machine Structure screen, turn off NC power.
The new setting is made valid at next power-on.

 Switching from workpiece unloader to long workpiece device

[Procedure]
1. Remove the chute for device for unloading product outside machine.
2. Attach the long workpiece chute.
3. Select "Long workpiece device" in the Machine Structure screen.
See <6.12 Machine Structure>.
4. If required, make a core adjustment for the chuck finger holder.
See <7.12.4 Adjusting the core of the hand>.

[Note]
If you change settings in the Machine Structure screen, turn off NC power.
The new setting is made valid at next power-on.

7-70
 L32

7.13 Mounting and Removing Tools

The procedures for mounting and removing tools are given below. See the figure below when you perform the following
procedure.
If it is difficult to mount or dismount a tool from the front of the machine,
you may replace a tool from the rear side of the machine.

Be sure to confirm that the spindles and machine have stopped before attempting to mount a tool. The
work during machine operation could result in serious personal injury.

7.13.1 Mounting tools

[Procedure]
1. If required, insert the floor plate (shim) between the tool and holder, and place the tool in the groove of the holder.
The GTF5916 comes with a floor plate with a thickness of 3 mm, the GTF6016 (38 mm in dia. specification) has a
1 mm and 4 mm thick floor plate and the floor plage in T01 is used to install tools.
2. Insert a tool into the holder and tighten the fixing bolts uniformly to fix the wedge. (The tightening torque for the
tool fixing bolts is about 1.5 kgm (15 Nm), which is equivalent to a force applied with a Allen wrench.)
For the wedge in each groove without a tool, also, tighten the fixing bolts to secure the wedge. Insert tools in all
grooves (T01 - T06 for the GTF5916, T01 - T05 for the GTF6016). Making sure that there are no empty grooves
will considerably improve cutting capacity.
For more information on tool holders, see <17. Tooling>.
3. For the wedge in each groove without a tool, also, tighten the fixing bolts to secure the wedge.

Even in the grooves with no tool mounted on the tool holder, tighten the fixing bolts to secure the wedge.
Any wedge protruding may cause an interference, resulting in severe damage to the machine.

Be sure to tighten the tool fixing bolts securely.

If the tool comes off from the holder during machine operation, it may cause a damage to the machine.

7-71
L32

7.13.2 Removing tools

Loosen the bolt securing the wedge.

7.13.3 Installing tools on gang tool post rotary tool drive device
[Procedure]
1. Different holders are used for different tools, refer to <17. Tooling> for information on tools used on the gang tool
post rotary tool drive device.
2. Place a cap on holders that do not contain tools to cover the opening.

7.13.3.1 SEU1110 removal (type Ⅸ, Ⅻ)

To use the machine without the SEU1110, install an optional cap (Y33Z).
If a coolant oil nozzle (U61R or U777R) is provided, use the supplied plug to cover the coolant supply port.

7-72
 L32

7.13.3.2 GSE1610, GSE1810, GSE1910, GSE2010 (type X)

The GSE2010 can be mounted at any angle either in cross-machining direction (90°) or end-face machining direction
(0°) when combined with the U31B gang rotary tool drive device.
When mounted in cross-machining direction (90°) or end-face machining direction (0°), attach the pin supplied with the
U31B in the positioning pin of the U318B. Then secure it using bolts and it will be easy to determine machine
orientation.

When used in the cross-machining direction or end-face direction, add two securing bolts to improve mounting strength.

Use the following procedure to adjust the machine for machining at any angle such as during oblique drilling.

[Procedure]
1. Set the rotary tool (GSE2010, etc.) to the desired angle and finger tighten the securing bolts.
2. Install a dial gauge (separately sold) stand on the tool mounting face or top of the opposite tool post (U120B or
U121B).
3. Place the gauge head of the dial gauge inside the measurement range (within 24 mm from the mounting surface).
4. Interpolate the Z2 and X2 axes at any angle and move about 70 mm to adjust so that interpolation and the rotary
tool plane become parallel.

7-73
L32

5. Tighten the fixing bolts evenly to secure the rotary tool.

6. Install the U31B fingerboard on the GSE1810, GSE1910, GSE2010 to obtain a means to estimate angles.

7-74
 L32

[Note]
The accuracy of rotary tool measurement range can be measured as shown below. By using it to measure rotary tools
adjustment procedures can be simplified. To achieve high mounting accuracy, it is recommended you install a pin gauge
or similar device on the rotary tool spindle and perform measurements and adjustments.

If a coolant oil nozzle (U61R or U777R) is provided for the GSE1810 and GSE2010, and rotary tools will not be used,
use the supplied plug to cover the coolant supply port.

7-75
L32

7.13.3.3 GSE3210 (type X)

Mounting can be performed at any angle either in the cross-machining direction (90°) or end-face machining direction
(0°) when combined with the U31B gang rotary tool drive device.

[Procedure]
1. To use the GSE3210, first 0° and 90° stopper adjustment must be performed.

2. Visually set the GSE3210 to 0° and orientation (main spindle and parallel orientation) and tighten the bolts to
secure the GSE3210.

3. Install a dial gauge (separately sold) stand on the tool mounting face or top of the opposite tool post (U120B or
U121B).
4. Place the gauge head of the dial gauge inside the measurement range (within 50mm from the mounting surface).
5. While moving the Z2 axis about 70 mm, adjust GSE3210 angle to ensure that the Z2 axis movement and
measurement range are parallel. Then tighten the securing bolts evenly.
6. Install the stopper plate on the GSE3210, push it against the stopper pin and tighten the bolts to secure the stopper.
7. Align the fingerboard with 0° on the scale and tighten the fixing bolts.
8. Set the GSE3210 to a 90° angle and finger tighten the fixing bolts.

7-76
 L32

9. While moving the Y1 axis about 70 mm, adjust GSE3210 angle orientation to ensure that the Y1 axis movement
and measurement range are parallel. Then tighten the securing bolts evenly.
10. Push the 90° orientation stopper plate on the U31B side against the stopper plate previously secured at 0°.
11. Tighten the fixing bolts in the stopper plate on the U31B side.

[Note]
The accuracy of rotary tool measurement range is shown by the tolerance in parallelism between rotary tool mounting
holes, which is 0.01 mm.
The adjustment procedures have been simplified by measuring the side of the rotary tool.
When the GSE3210 has been replaced with one having a different serial number, the stopper adjustment must be
performed again.

7-77
L32

7-78
 L32

7.13.4 Installing tools on the opposite tool post

 Type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, X, Ⅻ (U120B, U121B)
[Procedure]
1. The tools that can be used depend on the type of opposite tool post, refer to <17. Tooling> for further information.
2. Place a cap on holders that do not contain tools to cover the opening.

7-79
L32

7.13.5 Installing tools on the back tool post

 Type Ⅷ, Ⅸ (U150B, U151B)
[Procedure]
1. The tool positions that can be used differ with the tool, refer to <17. Tooling> for further information.
2. 2. Place a cap on holders that will not contain any tools with the U151B to cover the opening.

7-80
 L32

 Type X and Ⅻ (U12B)

[Procedure]
1. The tool positions that can be used differ with the tool, refer to <17. Tooling> for further information.
2. Place a cap on holders that do not contain tools to cover the opening.

7-81
L32

7.13.6 Adjustment using alignment ring (Option)

The alignment ring is used to align the position of drilling tool with the core of the workpiece.
Use this tool to adjust the position of drilling sleeve holder or rotary tool with the core of guide bushing.
Call the Cincom Service Office.

[Procedure]
1. Set the drilling sleeve, guide bushing, pin gauge ((ø6 mm [ø0.24"]), and alignment ring (inner diameter ø6 mm
[ø0.24"]), as shown in the figure below. Insert the alignment ring into the pin gauge so that its convex portion faces
the guide bushing.
(The shank part of drilling tool or other material of which diameter is ø6.0 mm [ø0.24"] can be used as an
alternative of pin gauge. Note, however, the backlash with the alignment ring may cause an alignment error.)

2. Perform adjustment in diameter direction (X direction).

Select the tool on which the alignment ring is mounted, select［Preparation］→［Tool Set (manual)］→［Dia.］
→［Start］, and perform adjustment in diameter direction (X direction).
As shown in the figure below, adjust the area A then B, so that A equals to B. When finished adjustment, press
［INPUT］.

7-82
 L32

7.13.7 Tool set jig (GPJ101) (option)

This is a presetter for positioning the protrusion length of end face and cross-machining tools. It comes with a magnetic
stand.

7-83
L32

7.14 Coolant Flow Detector (U53R)

If the coolant flowrate is dropped due to some reason, the coolant is not fed to the cutting point to likely cause fire or
other disasters. This device detects the drop in coolant flowrate and automatically stops the machine operation.

[Note]
• The coolant flowrate varies depending on the temperature. To distinguish the change in flow rate under normal
conditions from that in abnormal state, set the alarm flow rate (Low Flow) to the flow rate when the valve is fully
closed. Define the normal flowrate as the value determined by valve full-open state.
• When the initial coolant temperature is 15°C or less, this detector does not work. Therefore, although the machine
must be started early in the morning of the winter, for example, this device is turned off until the coolant temperature
is elevated to at least 15°C. The operator must watch the temperature. Once the coolant temperature reaches 15°C,
this detector works and maintains the active state; and even if the temperature is dropped by environment, the device
keeps the function enabled.

Position of coolant flow detector

7-84
 L32

7.14.1 Names and functions of components

Coolant flow sensor

• Flow indication LEDs

In normal operation, the LED shows the current flowrate in green LED. The Set point LED lights orange while
coolant is discharged in normal rate, and red in slow rate. The LEDs are used to indicate the specified flow rate,
current temperature, specified temperature, or alarm.
• Adjustment buttons
Use these buttons to change indications and setting values.
• Active flow rate sensor status display (Lower right corner of the screen)
Indicates the flow rate sensor function status. The flow rate is monitored while the Display is enabled, but not when
the Display is disabled. (Standard temperature of this machine: 15°C or more.)
If Display is disabled, pay strict attention to run the machine. Do not leave the machine while running.

7-85
L32

7.14.2 Setting method

 Setting Procedure
[Procedure]
1. Set the High Flow rate.
2. Set the Low Flow rate.
3. Set the flowrate switch point.
4. Set the switch point of temperature to activate the flowrate sensor.
* At the shipment, the temperature to activate the flowrate sensor is set to 15°C. Accordingly, you do not need to
set it again in normal operation. If you restore the default temperature setting (4°C), you need to set it to 15°C.

 Setting High Flow

Set the indication of maximum flowrate to the upper limit. (All the LEDs except the switch point LED light green.)
Set High Flow in the following procedure.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Coolant button , and confirm that all nozzles discharge the coolant at maximum flowrate.
2. Hold the button for a certain time.
LED9 goes on, then starts flashing five seconds later.
3. When LED9 starts flashing, release the button.
The value for High Flow is set, and the system goes back to operation mode.

 Setting Low Flow

[Note]
Be sure to set Low Flow after setting for High Flow has completed.
[Procedure]
1. Close all coolant nozzle valves completely.
2. Press the Coolant button to let the coolant flow.
3. Hold the button for a certain time.
LED0 goes on, then starts flashing five seconds later.
4. When LED0 starts flashing, release the button.
The value for Low Flow is set, and the system goes back to operation mode.

 Setting Setpoint (Flowrate Monitoring)

Set the Setpoint in the following procedure:
[Procedure]
1. Press the button for a short time.
The LED for the current switch point starts flashing.
2. Use either of the (toward left) or (toward right) button to move to the desired position.
About five seconds have passed after the button is released, the position currently being indicated is set as the new
switch point. Then, the machine goes back to operation mode.
Set the range appropriately, using the LED7 as a guideline.

7-86
 L32

 Setting Setpoint (Temperature Monitoring)

At the shipment, the temperature to activate the flowrate sensor is set to 15°C. Accordingly, you do not need to set it
again in normal operation. However, if you reset the flowrate sensor, the default temperature setting (4°C) is restored.
Use the following procedure to set it to 15°C.
[Procedure]
1. Press the button once to let the current temperature and temperature setting to be displayed.
2. Press the button to enter into the temperature setting mode.
The currently setting value is displayed.
• Lighting green (or orange): Indicates the current coolant temperature in unit of 10°C.
• Flashing green (or orange): Indicates the current coolant temperature in unit of 1°C.
(When the current coolant temperature is higher than the initial temperature: Orange LED. When the current
coolant temperature is lower than the initial temperature: Green LED)

Indicates the setting value in green or orange. (In the example, current setting is 15°C.)
Red LED indicates the current coolant temperature. The rightmost position shows the 10°C unit. (In the example,
current coolant temperature is in the range between 20 and 29°C.)
3. Press the (drop 1°C) or (raise 1°C) button several times until it reaches 15°C.
The LED for indicating 10°C unit is turned on or off automatically.
About five seconds have passed after the button is released, the position currently being indicated is set as the new
switch point. Then, about five seconds later, the machine goes back to operation mode to monitor the flowrate.

[Note]
• If the button is not pressed for five seconds, the new setpoint is set, the temperature monitoring setpoint is displayed
with new setting. After the additional five seconds later, the system goes back to flowrate monitoring mode.
• If an error is detected in setting procedure, all LEDs flash red. The system goes back to operation mode with the
previous setting. When you finish setting, make sure that no LED is flashing red.

7-87
L32

7.14.3 Operation check / Maintenance

[Procedure]
1. The machine is turned on.
All the flow indication LEDs go on once. Afterwards, LEDs go off one by one, and the system goes to operation
mode.
2. Turn the coolant discharge on.
3. Make sure the flowrate sensor shows the coolant temperature of at least 15°C.
Press the button once to check the current coolant temperature indicated by the red LED.
The red LED at the rightmost position indicates the coolant temperature in unit of 10°C.
In the example on the figure of <Setting Setpoint (Temperature Monitoring)>, current coolant temperature is in
the range between 20 and 29°C.
4. Check if the flowrate sensor works normally (by indications in operation mode).
The green LED shows the flowrate change.
The set point is displayed as follows.
• Output ON: Orange LED
• Output OFF: Red LED

[Note]
• If only LED 9 is flashing green while all other LEDs are lighting green, it indicates an excess flowrate.
• If the setpoint lights in red and LED0 lights in green, it indicates an insufficient flowrate.

 Error indication
If the output 1 (flowrate monitoring) is short-circuited, indication of operation mode and five red LEDs (LED0 to LED4)
are alternately displayed.
If the output 2 (temperature monitoring) is short-circuited, indication of operation mode and five red LEDs (LED5 to
LED9) are alternately displayed.

 Lock / Unlock
You can lock the setting value electrically to protect the settings from being modified.
Press the and buttons simultaneously for about 10 seconds lock (or unlock) the setting. (After 10 seconds, all
LEDs go off for about 1 second.)

7-88
 L32

7.15 Adjustment and Handling of Medium-/High-pressure Coolant Device

Each of the medium- and high-pressure coolant devices is a coolant device with 4 systems of ON/OFF valves. You can
select location of coolant discharge depending on the specifications. When creating a program, be sure to confirm the
rating plate indicating the medium- and high-pressure coolant discharge locations and the valve rating plate on the rear
panel of the machine, and the related ON/OFF M codes. For details on the M codes, refer to <13.25
Medium-/High-pressure Coolant Device>.
The medium-/high-pressure coolant device takes up coolant from the coolant tank. Using the medium-/high-pressure
coolant device may cause the coolant level to become lower than the normal level. If coolant is added in the coolant tank
in this state, the coolant may overflow from the tank when the medium-/high-pressure coolant device is stopped. Be sure
to maintain the proper level of coolant when using the medium-/high-pressure coolant device.
Using two or more lines simultaneously may lower the pressure at the nozzle tip. Make sure that the coolant is only
discharged where it is needed.
7.15.1 Medium-/high-pressure coolant device (option) configuration
The medium-/high-pressure coolant device has the following configuration. Four lines are available from L32U772R to
L32U777R to enable selection of discharge locations based on the specifications.
CAUTION
A220 U75R Medium-pressure coolant device
L32 U751R Medium-pressure coolant device external piping
L32 U77R High-pressure coolant device
L32 U771R High-pressure coolant device external piping
L32 U772R Side rotary guide bushing
L32 U773R Upper rotary guide bushing
L32 U754R Oil blower in back spindle Not selectable for the
high-pressure coolant device
L32 U7751R Front machining with opposite tool post (for L32 U120B)
L32 U7752R Front machining with opposite tool post (for L32 U121B)
L32 U7761R Back machining with opposite tool post (for L32 U150B, L32U151B)
L32 U7762R Back machining with opposite tool post (for L32 U12B)
L32 U777R B axis, square angle adjustment end face tool
(For SEU1110, GSE1810, GSE2010, T11 tool position only)
* When the L32 U754R is used with the back spindle chucking device L32 U950B (38 mm dia. specification) a
medium pressure coolant device adapter (for FC251) L32U7541R is required.
* When the L32 U754R is used with the back spindle chucking device L32 U960B (38 mm dia. specification) a
medium pressure coolant device adapter (for TF43) M432U7511R is required.
* In a connection of three or fewer lines, the ON/OFF valve of a separate pump unit without a hose connection is
closed using an adapter (A320N U7551R).
* When a connection of 5 or more lines is required, a special specification will be required.

7-89
L32

7.15.2 Adjusting the nozzle

Be sure to confirm that the machine has stopped before attempting to adjust the position of nozzle. The
work during machine operation could result in serious personal injury.

 Opposite tool post (for U120B)

Coolant is supplied to the opposite tool post for front machining.
* Four blow ports are provided. Select blow ports and joints that suit the tool layout.
* Be sure to adjust the position of the nozzle so that the coolant oil is supplied to the tip of tool.
* Cut the pipe nozzle to an appropriate length before using it.
* Use the supplied plugs to cover unused blow ports.

7-90
 L32

 Opposite tool post (for U121B)

Coolant is supplied to front machining on the opposite tool post.
* Three blow ports are provided.
* Be sure to adjust the position of the nozzle so that the coolant oil is supplied to the tip of tool.
* Cut the pipe nozzle to an appropriate length before using it.
* Use the supplied plugs to cover unused blow ports.

7-91
L32

 Back tool post (type Ⅷ, Ⅸ)

Coolant is supplied to back machining on the back tool post.
* The back tool post provides five blow ports.
Select blow ports and joints that suit the tool layout.
* Use up to three blow ports.
Use of many blow ports will reduce coolant oil pressure.
* Be sure to adjust the position of the nozzle so that the coolant oil is supplied to the tip of tool.
* Cut the pipe nozzle to an appropriate length before using it.
* Use the supplied plugs to cover unused blow ports.

7-92
 L32

 Back tool post (type X, Ⅻ)

Coolant is supplied to back machining on the back tool post.
* The back tool post provides five blow ports.
Select blow ports and joints that suit the tool layout.
* Cut the pipe nozzle to an appropriate length before using it.
* Use three or fewer blow ports.
Use of many blow ports will reduce coolant oil pressure.
Use the supplied plugs to cover unused blow ports.
* Be sure to finely adjust the nozzle so that coolant reaches the tip of the tool.
* If the cross spindle is mounted, some blow ports cannot be used.

7-93
L32

 Oil blower in back spindle

Coolant is discharged from the back spindle.
Use the knock-out jig supplied with the medium-coolant device. When the through-hole workpiece knock-out device is
used together, use the knock-out jig provided with the through-hole workpiece knock-out device. If the blow hole is
required, drill the hole additionally before using. See <7.5.1 Mounting and replacing knock-out jig> and <7.6.2
Replacing the knock-out jig for through-hole workpieces> of <7.6 Rearrangement of through-hole workpiece> for
replacement of knock-out jig and dimensions of provided jigs.
When the medium pressure coolant device is mounted, air-driven back spindle blower can be used together.
Reset the "knock-out overload alarm" using the usual procedure. For information on recovery procedures, see <7.5.3
Resetting knock-out overload alarm (U51B)>.

 Guide bushing device (side)

The coolant device supplies coolant to the guide bushing device (machining point).
A nozzle provided at the side of the guide bushing device supplies coolant. Be sure to adjust the position of the nozzle so
that the coolant oil reaches the machining position.

Guide bushing (side)

7-94
 L32

 Guide bushing device (upper)

The coolant device supplies coolant to the guide bushing device (machining point).
A nozzle at the top of the guide bushing device supplies coolant.
Be sure to adjust the position of nozzle so that the coolant oil reaches the machining position.

After adjusting the pipe, close the securing bolts, and secure the pipe position firmly in place. Otherwise,
the pipe may fall during operation, resulting in damage to the machine.

Be sure to confirm that the machine has stopped before attempting to adjust the position of the pipe.
Attempting to adjust without stopping the machine could result in a serious personal injury.

7-95
L32

 Front drill
The U32B axis tooling and U31B square adjusting tool (machining point) are provided with coolant oil.
Install a block on the tooling. Four blowing ports are provided.
Adjust the position of nozzle so that the coolant oil reaches the machining position.

7-96
 L32

7.15.3 Notes on using the separate pump unit

The medium pressure coolant device is equipped with a separate pump unit. The pump unit has many piping and wiring,
e.g., suction tube from coolant tank, supply tube to the machine side, cables for connection with other devices. Be sure to
arrange these piping and wiring by using the provided duct or others to secure the sufficient space where you can work
safely.
The separate pump unit has a filter to filtrate the chips and other substances contained in the coolant oil. Because the
filter must be checked regularly, install the pump unit in the place where the sufficient work space for maintenance can
be sucured.

Be sure to check filter on a regular basis. Using the dirty or clogged filter may cause a serious accident
such as a damage to the pump or a fire due to ignition of the pump.

 Cleaning trochoid pump filter

The filter mounted in the upper portion of trochoid pump can be used repeatedly by cleaning. The time to clean the filter
can be known from the indication of pressure gauge. When the pressure gauge indicates a pressure of -0.05 MPa or less
(yellow - red indication), use the steps below to clean the filter.

[Procedure]
1. Stop the machine and trochoid pump.
2. Remove the plug from the top of the case.
When this plug has removed, air is taken into the pump, and the coolant in the filter is sucked into the tank and the
discharge port side. It takes about 10 seconds until the coolant in the filter is removed.
3. Switch the lever with allen wrench for M8.

7-97
L32

4. Remove the case.

5. Take out the filter and clean it.

6. Clean the case. Remove chips and sludges adhered to the screws of the case.
7. Put the filter back to the original position.
8. Apply certain amount of grease to the screw position of the case, and mount the case.
Be careful not to damage the O-ring when mounting the case.
9. Mount the plug to the top of the case.

If the filter has deformed or is badly clogged and hard to clean, be sure to replace the filter with new one.
Using the deteriorated filter may cause a serious accident such as damage to the pump or fire due to
ignition of the pump.

7-98
 L32

 Cleaning the line filter

The elements in the line filter can be used repeatedly by cleaning. Follow the steps below to clean the filter once a
month.

[Procedure]
1. Stop the machine and trochoid pump.
2. Rotate the case of line filter and take it out downward.
You will see the element.
3. Take the element out of the case, and clean it.
4. Clean the case.
Remove chips and sludges adhered to the screws of the case.
5. Put the element back into the case.
6. Apply certain amount of grease to the screw position of the case, and mount the case.

If the element has deformed or is badly clogged and hard to clean, be sure to replace the element with new
one. Using the deteriorated element may cause a serious accident such as damage to the pump or fire due
to ignition of the pump.

 Checking discharge pressure of trochoid pump

The discharge pressure of trochoid pump can be checked by pressure gauge mounted on the line filter.
The value indicated by the pressure gauge of the line filter is different from the pressure of coolant when discarged from
the nozzle tip. The pressure at the nozzle chip is reduced by the number of nozzles used, pile line resistance, and others.
The pressure is also reduced due to clogged filter of trochoid pump. Use the indication of pressure gauge as a guideline.

7-99
L32

7.15.4 Handling of the high-pressure coolant device

The high-pressure coolant device comprises the coolant tank, float switches (2 locations), screw pump (high-pressure
pump, hereinafter), supply pump, chiller, filter, relief valve, electromagnetic valve (4 systems) and control unit.
The device has a lot of piping and wiring, such as the suction hose from coolant tank, supply hose to the machine side,
and cables. Be sure to sort out this piping and wiring, by using the provided ducts for example, to secure sufficient
working space for safety reasons.
A filter is provided to prevent chips from entering the coolant tank of the high-pressure coolant device. Since the filter
needs to be replaced periodically, install the high-pressure coolant unit at a location where sufficient maintenance space
can be secured. Replace the filter by referring to <Replacing the filter>.

Be sure to check the filter on a regular basis. Using the clogged filter may cause a serious accident such as
damage to the pump or a fire due to ignition of the pump.

The following shows the specifications of the high-pressure coolant device.

Maximum discharge
7 MPa
pressure*1
12.8/16 /min
Flow rate*2
(Oil-based coolant: 7 MPa: 20 mm2/s (cSt), 50 Hz/60 Hz)
Tank capacity 140 L
Filter 20 µm
Chiller cooling capacity 700 W/750 W (50 Hz/60 Hz)
Dry mass 230 kg
*1
The discharge pressure can be adjusted using a relief valve.
*2
The flow rate varies depending on the discharge pressure and the viscosity of the coolant.

7-100
 L32

 Instructions and precautions on handling each device

Observe the instructions and precautions when working on each device. Neglecting the instructions or precautions may
cause a serious accident involving a fire hazard due to ignition of the device.
About the coolant tank
Supply only coolant that has been cleaned by passage through a filter to the coolant tank.
When supplying coolant to the coolant tank of the device from the coolant tank of the machine, fill the machine’s
coolant tank to the upper limit and run the supply pump by specifying M458 in the MDI mode. The supply pump stops
automatically when the coolant tank is filled to the upper limit.

Never supply coolant that contains chips or other foreign matter to the coolant tank. Negligence may
damage devices such as electromagnetic valves or cause a serious accident involving a fire hazard due to
ignition of the high-pressure pump.

About the float switch

Two float switches are provided, one at the upper limit and the other at the lower limit, to check the oil level.
When the oil level drops and the float switch at the lower end goes off, the supply pump automatically runs to supply
coolant to the coolant tank of the high-pressure coolant device.
When the oil level rises and the float switch at the upper limit comes on, the supply pump automatically stops to stop
coolant supply to the coolant tank of the high-pressure coolant device.
About the filter
For details on the filter replacement work, refer to <Replacing the filter of the high-pressure coolant device>.
When working with materials that generate chips that float in oil such as aluminum, the filter may clog in a short time. In
such cases, it is advisable to use the device with a chip conveyor equipped with a drum filter.
About the high-pressure pump
When creating programs, restrict the number of pump ON/OFF operations in one hour to within 200.
About the chiller
The chiller starts running upon turning on the power switch of the high-pressure coolant device.
Adjust the temperature setting by turning the dial on the temperature switch. The chiller starts cooling when the coolant
temperature has exceeded the set temperature. It stops cooling when coolant is cooled to 2.5°C below the set
temperature.
When the air filter is contaminated with grit and dust, clean it using compressed air or a vacuum cleaner. If it is
contaminated with oil, wash it thoroughly using neutral detergent and dry it. Setting the temperature well below the
room temperature may cause dew condensation. Use the chiller with the temperature set to the room temperature or
higher.

• Ensure that no coolant, etc., gets onto the chiller body. This could cause failure of the chiller or electric
shock.
• Running the chiller with the air filter clogged with grit and dust may cause failure or a serious accident
involving a fire hazard.

• Do not insert anything that can become entangled, such as thin tools or fingers, into the exhaust port.
Negligence may cause injury due to contact with, or getting entangled in, the cooling fan.
• Do not place anything on the top face of the chiller body. It is very dangerous because things placed on
the top of the chiller can block exhaust air or fall inside the chiller through the exhaust port.

7-101
L32

About the relief valve (discharge pressure)

Set the desired discharge pressure by turning the dial on the relief valve while checking the pressure on the pressure
gauge.
The value indicated by the pressure gauge is different from the pressure of the coolant that actually discharges from the
nozzle. The pressure at the nozzle is lowered due to resistance in the piping and varies depending on the number of
nozzles used and other conditions.
Depending on the coolant discharge conditions, a large quantity of air bubbles may be mixed in the coolant and this can
lower the discharge rate of the high-pressure pump. In addition, the amount of mist generated will increase when the
discharge pressure is high, deteriorating the environment in the factory. Therefore, it is advisable to keep the pressure
setting of the unit as low as possible.

Setting the pressure higher than 7 MPa may damage devices such as electromagnetic valves.

 Replacing the filter of the high-pressure coolant device

[Procedure]
1. Make sure that the machine will not be operated, then open the lid.
Check that the stopper is preventing the lid from closing.

2. Grip the handle to lift the filter bracket and rest its hose side on the edge of the tank.

7-102
 L32

3. Grip the handle at the other side to lift the filter bracket and pull it in the direction shown by the arrow to rest the
filter bracket on the edge of the tank.
* If the bracket is pulled with excessive force in the direction shown by the arrow, the hose side of the filter bracket
may come off the edge of the tank and fall into the tank.
Coolant inside the filter comes out in this state. Remove coolant from the filter as required.

4. Disconnect the hose connector from the filter.

5. Take the filter out of the bracket and replace it with a new one.

7-103
L32

6. Connect the hose connector.

Press the filter against the filter bracket in the direction shown by the arrow until a click is heard.

7. Grip the handle at the opposite side to the hose to lift the filter bracket and move the filter bracket in the direction
shown by the arrow to sink it into the tank.

8. Grip the handle at the hose side and sink the entire filter bracket into the tank.

7-104
 L32

9. Pull the stopper at the part indicated with an asterisk (*) to close the lid.
Take care not to trap the hose.

7-105
L32

7.16 Adjusting coolant nozzle length

When adjusting the length of coolant nozzle by reassembling the nozzles, follow the procedure explained below.

• When adjusting the coolant nozzle length, make sure to confirm that the machine is at a stop.
• If an attempt is made to adjust the coolant nozzle length before stopping the machine, you may be
caught by the machine to be injured seriously. Use a dedicated tool when disengaging and engaging
nozzles.
• If you handle nozzles with bare hands, the hands may slip on the nozzles and be hit against cutting
tools and/or parts in the machine to be seriously injured.

 To remove the nozzle (using special tool)

[Procedure]
1. Insert the dedicated tool onto nozzles.

* Tools must be inserted in a certain direction, so be careful to face it the correct way.

2. Open the tool in the direction shown in the figure, and the nozzles are disengaged.
* Be sure to operate the tool with both hands.

7-106
 L32

 Engaging nozzles (using dedicated tool)

[Procedure]
1. Engage the nozzles by inserting the dedicated tool in the correct direction in the same manner as disengaging the
nozzles.
* The nozzles may break if the tool is inserted in the incorrect direction.

To purchase the dedicated tool, please contact our company.

Model of dedicated tool
• For 1/2" systems
26172 (Nikki Trading Corp.)
• For 1/4" systems
26171(Nikki Trading Corp.)

7-107
L32

7.17 Connecting the Automatic Bar Loader

The emergency stop circuit on the loader side varies depending on the safety standards of the respective country. The
loader and Cincom emergency stop circuit can be connected for enabling even safer machine operation. Make the
settings to match the loader specifications.
7.17.1 Connecting the emergency stop circuit of the loader
 Loaders where the emergency stop circuit is connected to Cincom by two lines (redundant line
system)

[Procedure]
1. The CNBAR connectors (4) and (5) and (22) and (23) are connected to the emergency stop circuit on the loader
side.
2. When the emergency stop button is pressed on the loader side, Cincom changes to the emergency stop state.

 Loaders where the emergency stop circuit is connected to Cincom by one line

[Procedure]
1. The CNBAR connectors (4) and (5) are connected to the emergency stop circuit on the loader side.
2. Connectors (22) and (23) are connected in a short-circuit using a jumper plug.
3. When the emergency stop button is pressed on the loader side, Cincom changes to the emergency stop state.

7-108
 L32

 Loaders where the emergency stop circuit is not connected to Cincom

*Although the emergency stop circuit is not connected, both alarm signals are connected separately.

[Procedure]
1. Connectors (4) and (5) and (22) and (23) are connected in a short-circuit using a jumper plug.
2. When the emergency stop button is pressed on the loader side, Cincom changes to the immediate stop alarm state.
7.17.2 Jumper pin setting procedure
The setting procedure for the jumper pins is shown below.
JP3-2 and JP3-3 on the relay board in the control panel are the jumper pins for setting the loader.

7-109
L32

[Procedure]
1. Turn off the machine NC, and set the main circuit breaker of the machine to the OFF position.
2. Open the door of the control panel, and set the jumper pins on the relay board.
Set the inserted jumper plug based on the emergency stop specifications of the loader below.
Loader: Emergency stop circuit specifications Jumper plug position
JP3
ⅰ) Loaders where the emergency stop circuit is
connected to Cincom by two lines (redundant
line system)

ⅱ) Loaders where the emergency stop circuit is

connected to Cincom by one line

ⅲ) Loaders where the emergency stop circuit is

not connected to Cincom
or
When no loader is installed
[Procedure]
1. In the initial status (insertion position), the jumper plug is the state in iii).
2. The machine will be an in emergency stop state if a jumper plug is not installed correctly, and so be careful that you
do not lose the jumper plugs.

7-110
 L32

7.18 Loader
7.18.1 Overview of the loader

7-111
L32

Item Description
Slider The slider is equipped with the loader arm and loader hand, and actuated by
the air cylinder.
Loader hand The loader hand is used to hold material.
Loader arm The loader arm advances/retracts the loader hand to/from the point where
material is supplied to the spindle.
Workpiece receiving position This is the waiting position for receiving material from the external material
loader.
Workpiece loading waiting position This is the waiting position for supplying material to the spindle.
Workpiece loading position This is the position for supplying material to the spindle.

[Motion sequence]
1. The loader receives a workpiece from the external material loader at the “workpiece receiving position”.
2. The loader moves to the “workpiece loading waiting position”.
3. The spindle moves to the “workpiece loading retract position”.
4. The loader moves to the “workpiece loading position”.
5. The spindle moves to the “spindle loading advance position” to receive the workpiece.
6. The loader moves to the “workpiece loading waiting position”.
7. The spindle advances and the machining starts.
8. In parallel with the operation in step 7, the loader moves to the “workpiece receiving position” to receive another
workpiece from the external material loader.

7-112
 L32

7.18.2 Replacing the load hand fingers and workpiece support

The fingers and workpiece support of the loader hand need to be replaced depending on the diameter and geometry of
the workpiece.

7-113
L32

[Procedure]
1. Remove the fingers and workpiece support of the loader hand.
2. Mount the fingers and workpiece support appropriate for the targeted workpiece.
Secure the fingers while firmly pressing them against the holder.
Prepare the fingers and workpiece support according to the dimensional diagram below.

7-114
 L32

7.18.3 Center adjustment of the loader hand

After replacing the loader hand fingers, the center position of the loader hand may be displaced from the spindle center.
If this happens, adjust the center position of the loader hand by following the procedure below.
[Procedure]
1. Remove the workpiece support from the pusher.
2. Mount the centering jigs A and B.

3. Loosen the hand fixing bolts.

4. Perform the “hand close” operation.
5. Tighten the bolts that were loosened in step 3.
6. Repeat the “hand open” and “hand close” operations several times to check that the correct center position has
been achieved.
7. If the center position is still misaligned, repeat the steps from 3 to 6.

Prepare centering jigs that are suited to the geometry of the material by referring to the dimensional diagram below.

7-115
L32

7.18.4 Adjusting positions of the loader

The loader hand position can be adjusted to ensure that “workpiece to be machined” can be properly supplied to the
spindle.
Note that the loader hand position has been adjusted in advance, before shipment.
Therefore, this position adjustment work is not mandatory to operate the machine.

Securely tighten the bolts and nuts that have been loosened for adjustment.

7-116
 L32

7.18.5 Adjusting the loader speed

Depending on the weight and shape of the workpiece, it may become misaligned during the supply operation.
If this happens, slow down the advance speed with the speed controller.

 Adjusting the loader speed

Adjust the loader advance and retract speeds by adjusting the speed controllers for loader advance and retract motion.

• Do not open the speed controller for loader advance motion beyond 6 turns from the fully closed
position.
This could damage the loader.
• Do not open the speed controller for loader retract motion beyond 6.5 turns from the fully closed
position.
This could damage the loader.

 Adjusting the arm speed

Adjust the arm advance and retract speeds by adjusting the speed controllers for arm advance and retract motion.

7-117
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 1E1-0705
Mfg. No. L32/0480～
Issue Date 2016.12

7-118
 8. Operating Procedures
8.1 Flow of Setup ............................................................................................................................................ 8-4
8.2 Procedure from Turning the Power on to Automatic Operation ................................................................. 8-5
8.3 Procedure from Continuous Operation to Turning the Power Off.............................................................. 8-7
8.4 Offset (Compensation) Data Input Procedure ........................................................................................... 8-8
8.5 MDI Operating Procedure ......................................................................................................................... 8-9
8.6 Procedure for Program Input from External Device ................................................................................ 8-10
8.6.1 Input from Front Card Slot ................................................................................................................. 8-10
8.6.2 Input from USB Port .......................................................................................................................... 8-11
8.6.3 Input Using RS232C Interface (option) ............................................................................................. 8-12
8.7 Procedure for Program Output to External Device.................................................................................. 8-13
8.7.1 Output to Card Slot ........................................................................................................................... 8-13
8.7.2 Output to USB Port ........................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.7.3 Output Using RS232C Interface (option)........................................................................................... 8-15
8.8 Program Creating Procedure .................................................................................................................. 8-16
8.9 Program Calling Procedure..................................................................................................................... 8-17
8.10 Program Editing Procedure..................................................................................................................... 8-18
8.11 Program Deleting Procedure .................................................................................................................. 8-19
8.12 Machining Data Setting Procedure ......................................................................................................... 8-20
8.13 Counter Setting Procedure ..................................................................................................................... 8-21
8.14 Tool Setting Procedure ........................................................................................................................... 8-22
8.14.1 Gang Tool Setting Procedure (T01's tool) ......................................................................................... 8-22
8.14.2 Gang Rotary Tool Setting Procedure ................................................................................................. 8-25
8.14.3 Front Drilling Tool Setting Procedure (T21's tool) .............................................................................. 8-27
8.14.4 Back Drilling Tool Setting Procedure (T31's tool) .............................................................................. 8-30
8.14.5 Back Drilling Tool Setting Procedure (T51's tool) .............................................................................. 8-32
8.15 Zero Point Returning Procedure ............................................................................................................. 8-34
8.16 Transformation of Eco・Machine Operation Information in csv format ................................................... 8-35
8.17 Csv File Format of Eco and Machine Operation Information .................................................................. 8-36

8-1
 (Blank Page)

8-2
 L32

Introduction
This manual is a summary of the Operator's Manual, provided to help you quickly search for specific operating
procedures.
This manual does not include important information such as descriptions of safety precautions, operation panel controls,
screen displays, preparations for machine operation, and of installation and adjustment.
Even when you have read through this manual, therefore, you must not operate the machine before reading the
Operator's Manual.
Before operating the machine, be sure to read, understand, and follow the contents of the Operator's Manual, including
<2. Safety Precautions>. Periodically read safety information contained therein to make sure that the machine has been
operating safely.
Citizen Machinery Co., Ltd. assumes no liability for any loss or damage, injury, or death, arising out of failure to read or
follow the safety precautions and other relevant information in the Operator's Manual or out of unauthorized use or
handling of the machine.

8-3
L32

8.1 Flow of Setup

[Procedure]
1. Check the drawing for the product to be machined and determine the machining direction in consideration of the
features and characteristics of the machine.
2. Determine the layout.
3. Prepare the requirements such as tools, spindle chuck, bushings, back chuck, and drill chuck.
4. Create a program.
5. Turn the machine on and load the program.
6. Input machining data.
7. Remove the tools used for the previous session of machining. They can be used as they are without being removed
if they can serve for machining to be performed.
* Be sure to remove any back machining tools (T31 to T39).
8. Replace and adjust chucks and bushings and replace the back chuck and knock-out jig. Also replace fingers if the
machine has an automatic bar loader.
9. Select the program and move to the start position.
10. Run the machine with no load a material to check the program and machine operations.
Use On-Machine Check to make this step easier.
11. Perform tool setting.
12. Run the machine with no load a material to check operations.
13. Load a material for checking by actually cutting it.
If back machining is required for the material without back chucking, modify the program not to chuck the
workpiece at the back spindle.
14. Execute one cycle of operation to check dimensions of the workpieces and operations, then correct the dimensions
by modifying the program and using the compensation function.
15. When all of the front machining dimensions is corrected, reprogram the machine to execute back chucking.
16. Perform back tool setting.
17. Execute one cycle of operation to correct the diameter, longitudinal, and other required dimensions of the
workpiece by modifying the program and using the compensation function.
18. When you have finished taking the above steps, execute continuous cycles to machine several workpieces to check
dimensions.
19. Set the workpiece counter, then machine them continuously.

8-4
 L32

8.2 Procedure from Turning the Power on to Automatic Operation

[Procedure]
1. Set the circuit breaker switch to the ON position.
2. Press the power ON switch on the operation panel to turn on the NC machine.
3. Door is locked.
4. The initial screen appears. After several ten seconds, the Preparation key goes on and the Preparation screen
and Program screen are displayed.
5. Enter the desired program number in the data setting field.
6. Press the Input key .

The Machining Data screen appears. Check the settings, then press the Escape key .
The program number is displayed at the upper right part of the screen.
7. Use the Main Spindle Chuck key for manual operation to open the spindle chuck.
Make sure that the Main Spindle Chuck key LED is off.
8. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
9. Pull out the material to the end face of the spindle.

If the material is left without being pull out, the material may interfere with the tool.

10. Close all doors.

11. Press the menu key [ST POS].
The Start Position screen appears.

Leave the safety cover closed while the lamp on the Start button is on.
Opening the safety cover with the LED on may result in a serious injury or death.

12. Press the Start button .

The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
13. Press the Start button .
The lamp on the Start button lights and each axis moves to the start position.
Upon completion of the move, the lamp on.
14. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
15. Press the material slowly to the cut-off tool.
(When the gap of the guide bushing is set narrowly, cut-off the end face of the material.)
16. Close all doors.
17. Press the Auto key as an Operation Mode Selection key.
The lamp on the Auto key goes on and the Automatic Operation screen appears.
18. Press the Coolant button .
The lamp on the Coolant button goes on and coolant is discharged.

The amount of discharged coolant or the coolant discharging position is inappropriate, the guide bushing or
tool may be damaged.

19. Press one of the menu key [Cont.], [1 Cycle], or [1 Block], which you required.
20. Make sure that all doors are closed, and press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.

8-5
L32

21. Press the Start button .

The lamp on the Start button goes on and the program is executed for one cycle for 1 Cycle or for one program line
for 1 Block.

8-6
 L32

8.3 Procedure from Continuous Operation to Turning the Power Off

[Procedure]
1. Press the menu key [1 Cycle].
The program is executed for only one cycle.
2. Wait until the lamp on the Start button goes off.
The lamp will go off, indicating the end of the single cycle.
3. Press the Coolant button .
The lamp on the coolant key goes off, indicating that coolant discharge has now been stopped.
4. Press the Power OFF button on the operation panel.
5. Set the circuit breaker switch to the OFF position.

8-7
L32

8.4 Offset (Compensation) Data Input Procedure

[Procedure]
1. Press the Offset key .
The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the menu key [Offset].
The Offset screen appears.
3. If the "INC" is not displayed on the upper right corner of the screen, press the menu key [ABS/INC].
The "INC" is reversed.
4. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the offset number you want to enter.

5. Use the tab keys to move the cursor to the desired input field.

6. Enter a numeric value as offset data.

7. Press the Input key .
Check the input offset data.
Press the Shift key and the Line deletion key to set the offset value for one screen to 0.

8-8
 L32

8.5 MDI Operating Procedure

[Procedure]
1. Press the MDI key .
The lamp on the MDI key goes on and the MDI screen appears.
2. Use the menu key [$-Select ] to select $1 (X1, Z1, Y1, C1) or $2 (X2, Z2, C2).
3. Press the menu key [1 Block] or [All Block].
1 Block: Allows input of multiple blocks and execution per block.
All Block: Allows input and continuous execution of multiple blocks.
4. Enter the command address and value.
5. Press the Input key .
"Set COMP" appears at the lower right corner of the screen.

Leave the safety cover closed while the lamp on the Start button is on.
Opening the safety cover with the LED on may result in a serious injury or death.

6. Close all doors.

7. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp flashes and the door is locked.
8. Press the Start button .
The lamp on the Start button goes on and the MDI program is executed.
All the programs are deleted by pressing .

8-9
L32

8.6 Procedure for Program Input from External Device

8.6.1 Input from Front Card Slot
[Procedure]
1. Insert the CF card into the front card slot.
2. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

3. Press the Edit key .

The last screen selected appears.
4. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [I/O].
The last screen selected appears.
6. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
7. Press the menu key [Input].
8. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to "External" folder.
The "CF card" appears.
9. Enter the number assigned to the "CF card" and press the Input key .
The folder is confirmed and the cursor moves to the "External" directory.
(The screen shows the contents of the selected directory. With the new card, the contents of the directory are
empty.)
10. Enter the relevant directory number.
Example) Press the key "1".
11. Press the Input key .
The directory is confirmed.
12. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to "Program" in "External" field. Enter the number for the target
file.
13. Press the Input key .
The program is confirmed.
14. Press the Input key .
Now, the program input is executed.

8-10
 L32

8.6.2 Input from USB Port

[Procedure]
1. Insert the USB flash drive into the front USB port.
2. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

3. Press the Edit key .

The last screen selected appears.
4. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [I/O].
The last screen selected appears.
6. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
7. Press the menu key [Input].
8. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to "External" folder.
The "USB flash drive" appears.
9. Enter the number assigned to the "USB flash drive" and press the Input key .
The folder is confirmed and the cursor moves to the "External" directory.
(The screen shows the contents of the selected directory. With the new card, the contents of the directory are
empty.)
10. Enter the relevant directory number.
Example) Press the key "1".
11. Press the Input key .
The directory is confirmed.
12. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to "Program" in "External" field. Enter the number for the target
file.
13. Press the Input key .
The program is confirmed.
14. Press the Input key .
Now, the program input is executed.

8-11
L32

8.6.3 Input Using RS232C Interface (option)

[Procedure]
1. Connect the cable from an external device to the RS232C connector.
The RS232C connector is provided on the right side of the operation panel.
2. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

3. Press the Edit key .

4. Press the menu key [List].

The List screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [I/O].
The Input/Output screen appears.
6. Press the menu key [RS232C].
The RS232C screen appears.
7. Press the menu key [Input].
8. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to "Comm. Set" in "External Device" field. Enter the number for
the target parameter.
9. Press the Input key .
The communication setting is confirmed and the cursor moves to "I/O Port" in "External Device" field.
10. Enter the number for the I/O Port, then press the Input key .
The I/O port is confirmed.
11. Press the Input key .
Data input starts.
12. Turn the external device on and enable it for output.
The program is input to the machine.

8-12
 L32

8.7 Procedure for Program Output to External Device

8.7.1 Output to Card Slot
[Procedure]
1. Insert the CF card into the front card slot.
2. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

3. Press the Edit key .

4. Press the menu key [List].

The List screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [I/O].
The Input/Output screen appears.
6. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
7. Press the menu key [Output].
8. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to "External" folder.
The "CF card" appears.
9. Enter the number assigned to the "CF card" and press the Input key .
The folder is confirmed and the cursor moves to the "External" directory.
(The screen shows the contents of the selected directory. With the new card, the contents of the directory are
empty.)
10. Enter the relevant directory number.
Example) Press the key "1".
11. Press the Input key .
The directory is confirmed.
12. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to "NC" program and enter the O number of the relevant
program.
13. Press the Input key .
The program is confirmed.
14. Press the Input key .
Now, the program output is executed.

8-13
L32

8.7.2 Output to USB Port

[Procedure]
1. Insert the USB flash drive into the front USB port.
2. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

3. Press the Edit key .

4. Press the menu key [List].

The List screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [I/O].
The Input/Output screen appears.
6. Press the menu key [File I/O].
The File Access screen appears.
7. Press the menu key [Output].
8. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to "External" folder.
The "USB flash drive" appears.
9. Enter the number assigned to the "USB flash drive" and press the Input key .
The folder is confirmed and the cursor moves to the "External" directory.
(The screen shows the contents of the selected directory. With the new card, the contents of the directory are
empty.)
10. Enter the relevant directory number.
Example) Press the key "1".
11. Press the Input key .
The directory is confirmed.
12. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to "NC" program and enter the O number of the relevant
program.
13. Press the Input key .
The program is confirmed.
14. Press the Input key .
Now, the program output is executed.

8-14
 L32

8.7.3 Output Using RS232C Interface (option)

[Procedure]
1. Connect the cable from an external device to the RS232C connector.
2. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

3. Press the Edit key .

4. Press the menu key [List].

The List screen appears.
5. Press the menu key [I/O].
The Input/Output screen appears.
6. Press the menu key [RS232C].
The RS232C screen appears.
7. Press the menu key [Output].
8. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to "Comm. Set" in "External Device" field. Enter the number for
the target parameter.
9. Press the Input key .
The communication setting is confirmed and the cursor moves to "I/O Port" in "External Device" field.
10. Enter the number for the I/O Port, then press the Input key .
The I/O port is confirmed and the cursor moves to "NC memory" in "NC" field.
11. Enter the O number of the relevant file (program).
12. Press the Input key .
The "NC" program is confirmed.
13. Press the Input key .
Data output starts.
14. Turn the external device on and enable it for input.
The program is output from the machine.

8-15
L32

8.8 Program Creating Procedure

[Procedure]
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key .

3. Press the menu key [List].

The List screen appears.
4. Press the menu key [NEW-INP].
The Create New Program window appears.
5. Enter the number and comment for the new program.
Use the arrow keys to move to the comment field.

6. Press the Input key .

The program number edit screen appears for the new program to be created.
The program numbers currently being selected for editing is displayed at the upper right corner of the screen, and
automatic operation is displayed at the upper left corner.

8-16
 L32

8.9 Program Calling Procedure

[Procedure]
1. Press the Edit key .

2. Press the menu key [List].

The List screen appears.
3. Select the program number you want to call by using the arrow keys or enter the program number in the
program number field.
4. Press the Input key .
The called program edit screen appears.

8-17
L32

8.10 Program Editing Procedure

[Procedure]
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key .

The last screen selected appears.
3. Perform the previous procedures to <8.8 Program Creating Procedure> and <8.9 Program Calling Procedure>
for the program for which you want to input machining data.
4. Use alphanumeric keys to enter the address and numeric values, then press the Input key .
• When inputting or modifying the program, make sure to press the Input key.
Otherwise, the modification is not stored.
• Delete key : Deletes the character to the right of current cursor position.

• Line Deletion key : Deletes the line currently containing the cursor.

• Insert key : Toggles the input mode between "insert" and "overwrite" whenever pressed. The current input
mode is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen.
• Backspace key : Deletes the character to the left of the current cursor position.

8-18
 L32

8.11 Program Deleting Procedure

[Procedure]
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key .

The last screen selected appears.
3. Press the menu key [List].
The List screen appears.
4. Press the menu selection key to enable the sub menu.
5. Press the menu key [Delete].
The Program Delete screen appears.
6. Enter the number of the program you want to delete.
7. Press the Input key .

8. The menu keys [Yes] and [No] are displayed. Press the menu key [Yes].
The specified program is deleted.

8-19
L32

8.12 Machining Data Setting Procedure

Machining data is required for machining, preparation, and for tool setting. It is handled in almost the same way as
machining programs; it is registered in memory. Machining data can be created or edited in the background, except the
machining data currently being used for execution for machine operation.
[Procedure]
1. Set the Program edit switch key to " ".
The program is released from the protected state.

2. Press the Edit key .

The last screen selected appears.
3. Perform the previous procedures to <8.8 Program Creating Procedure> and <8.9 Program Calling Procedure>
for the program for which you want to input machining data.
4. Press the menu selection key to enable the sub menu.
5. Press the menu key [MC-Data].
The Machining Data screen appears.
6. Use the page keys the arrow keys to move the cursor to the field for the item you want to
specify.
7. Enter a numeric value.
8. Press the Input key .
The cursor automatically moves to the next setting field.
9. For the holder item, enter the relevant number of the holder name you want to select.
10. Press the Input key .
The cursor automatically moves to the next setting field.
11. Specify all items.

8-20
 L32

8.13 Counter Setting Procedure

[Procedure]
1. Press the Auto key as an Operation Mode Selection key. The Automatic Operation screen appears.

2. Press the menu selection key to enable the sub menu.

3. Press the menu key [Counter]. The Counter window appears.
4. Press the menu key [Cnt Set].
The field for each item in the Counter window is enabled for set.
5. Use the arrow keys or the tab keys to move the cursor to the desired field.

6. Enter a numeric value.

7. Press the Input key .

8. Press the menu key [Set Cmpl]. The field for each item in the Counter window is disabled for set.
9. Press the menu key [Counter]. The Counter window is closed.

8-21
L32

8.14 Tool Setting Procedure

Described below are operation procedures when the Setting switch key is set to " ".
If you are going to work inside the machine, press the Door open button to unlock the door.
If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
The door cannot be unlocked unless the following conditions are met.
• All spindles have stopped.
• All servo axes have stopped.
• The machine is not operating.
• The coolant is not discharged.
• The Door open button is pressed.

8.14.1 Gang Tool Setting Procedure (T01's tool)

In the tool setting function, positioning of parts such as holders are performed based on machining data.
Before performing tool setting, be sure to check machining data for validity. If machining data contains an
error, the tools, holders, and material may interfere with one another.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation screen appears.
2. Press the menu selection key to enable the sub menu.
3. Press the menu key [PRG SEL].
The Program Select screen appears.
4. Use the arrow keys to select the desired program number.

5. Press the Input key .

The Machining Data screen is opened automatically.
6. Check machining data.
To change any content of machine data, follow the machining data input procedure in <8.12 Machining Data
Setting Procedure>.
7. Press the Escape key .
The Machining Data screen is closed.
8. Draw back the material beyond the end face of the guide bushing.

If the material is not drawn back sufficiently, the material and tool may interfere with each other.

9. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the number of the tool you want to set.

Use the tab keys to move the cursor to the "Core" in the window.

10. Press the menu selection key to enable the main menu.
11. Close all doors.
12. Press the menu key [Man. Set]. The Manual Tool Set screen appears.
13. Press the arrow key . Two cursors appear and the list showing the move positions is displayed.

8-22
 L32

14. Enter the selection number of "Center" and press the Input key .

Do not open the safety cover or touch any tool or material while the lamp on the Start button is on.
Doing either or both may result in a serious injury or death.

15. Press the Start button . The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
16. Press the Start button .
The holder moves to the core adjusting position for the called tool number.
The Manual Handle screen appears.
17. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
18. Set the material about 10 mm ahead of the end face of the guide bushing.
19. Fit the tool shank holder securely onto the tool mounting surface, then apply the tool nose slowly to the outer
circumference of the material.
20. Use the pulse handle to adjust the tool nose to fit the outer circumference of the material.
The distance adjusted by the pulse handle is displayed at the position of the core in the window.
If the mounted tool is right-handed, turning the pulse handle to the negative (–) side lowers the core while turning
it to the positive (+) side raises the core.
21. Press the Input key . The adjusted value is input to the position of the core.

22. Press the Escape key . The Manual Handle screen is closed.

23. Close all doors.

24. Press the menu key [Man. Set]. The Manual Tool Set screen appears.
25. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the "DIA" in the window.

26. Draw back the material to the end face of the guide bushing.

If the material is not drawn back sufficiently, the material and tool may interfere with each other.

Do not open the safety cover or touch any tool or material while the lamp on the Start button is on.
Doing either or both may result in a serious injury or death.

27. Press the Start button .

The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
28. Press the Start button .
The holder moves to the outer diameter set position for the called tool number.
The Manual Handle screen appears.
29. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
30. Set the material about 10 mm ahead of the end face of the guide bushing.
31. Fit the tool shank holder securely onto the tool mounting surface, then apply the tool nose slowly to the outer
diameter of the material.
32. Secure the tool temporarily using the tool clamp screw of the holder.
33. Close all doors.
34. Press the menu key [POS PNT].
The Positioning Point screen appears.

8-23
L32

35. Press the Start button .

The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
36. Press the Start button .
The lamp on the Start button goes on and the tool holder moves to the positioning point.
37. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
38. Tighten the tool clamp screw.
39. Draw back the material beyond the end face of the guide bushing.
40. Take steps 9. to 30. for other gang tools to set them in the same way.

[Note]
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• If the door is open:
The machine operates only when you are holding down the Start button.
The machine will stop when you release the key. The Start button lamp will blink (on for two seconds and off for one
second). Pressing the Start button when the lamp is blinking will restart the machine.
• When performing adjustment for core (Y), diameter (X) and center (X) using the handle, selection of multiplication
ratio ×100 is not possible.
• The menu key [Man. Set] is disabled if no program is selected.

8-24
 L32

8.14.2 Gang Rotary Tool Setting Procedure

If you perform this procedure for setting rotary tools, following the procedure in <8.14.1 Gang Tool Setting Procedure
(T01's tool) >, you can skip steps 1. to 7. below.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key .
The Preparation screen appears.
2. Press the menu selection key to enable the sub menu.
3. Press the menu key [PRG SEL].
The Program Select screen appears.
4. Use the arrow keys to select the desired program number.

5. Press the Input key .

The Machining Data screen is opened automatically.
6. Check machining data.
To change any content of machine data, follow the machining data input procedure in <8.12 Machining Data
Setting Procedure>.
7. Press the Escape key .
The Machining Data screen is closed.
8. Draw back the material beyond the end face of the guide bushing.

If the material is not drawn back sufficiently, the material and tool may interfere with each other.

9. Press the menu selection key to enable the main menu.

10. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the number of the tool you want to set.

11. Close all doors.

12. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears.
13. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the "DIA" in the window.

14. Enter the rotary tool shift amount (in the diametrical direction).
To set the amount of protrusion of the tool longer than the standard length, enter a positive (+) value. To set it
shorter, enter a negative (–) value. If the normal setting is fine, you do not needed to execute this step.
You should remember the entered shift amount because it is used in a procedure.
15. Press the Input key .

Do not open the safety cover or touch any tool or material while the lamp on the Start button is on.
Doing either or both may result in a serious injury or death.

16. Press the Start button .

The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
17. Press the Start button .
The lamp on the Start button goes on and the holder moves to the outer diameter set position for the called tool
number.
18. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
19. Set the material about 20mm ahead of the end face of the guide bushing.
20. Apply the tool nose slowly to the outer diameter of the material.
21. Tighten the cap nut for chucking the tool using the dedicated tool.

8-25
L32

22. Close all doors.

23. Press the menu key [POS PNT].
The Positioning Point screen appears.
24. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
25. Press the Start button .
The lamp on the Start button goes on and the tool holder moves to the positioning point.
26. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
27. Draw back the material beyond the end face of the guide bushing.
28. Take steps 10. to 21. for other rotary tools to set them in the same way.

If the tool positioning point value as machining data is incorrect, the tool and material may interfere with
each other.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• If the door is open:
The machine operates only when you are holding down the Start button.
The machine will stop when you release the key. The Start button lamp will blink (on for two seconds and off for one
second). Pressing the Start button when the lamp is blinking will restart the machine.

8-26
 L32

8.14.3 Front Drilling Tool Setting Procedure (T21's tool)

[Procedure]
1. Take steps 1 to 31 in <8.14.1 Gang Tool Setting Procedure (T01's tool)> in the same way to set the cut-off tool to
T01.
2. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to T01.

3. Close all doors.

4. Press the menu key [POS PNT].
The Positioning Point screen appears.
5. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
6. Press the Start button .
The cut-off tool is positioned at the positioning point.
7. Set the material so that its portion to be cut off protrudes from the cut-off tool.
Press the Door open button if you need to open the door.

8. Press the Main Spindle Chuck key .

(Check that the spindle chuck has already been adjusted.)
The lamp on the Main Spindle Chuck key goes on, then the material is chucked.
9. Press the menu key [Cut-Off].
The Cut-Off screen appears.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.
• If the door is open:
The machine operates only when you are holding down the Start button.
The machine will stop when you release the key. The Start button lamp will blink (on for two seconds and off for one
second). Pressing the Start button when the lamp is blinking will restart the machine.
10. Close all doors.
11. Press the Coolant button .
The lamp on the Coolant button goes on and coolant is discharged.

The amount of discharged coolant or the coolant discharging position is inappropriate, the guide bushing or
tool may be damaged.

Do not open the safety cover or touch any tool or material while the lamp on the Start button is on.
Doing either or both may result in a serious injury or death.

12. Press the Start button .

The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.

8-27
L32

13. Press the Start button .

The cut-off tool moves to the positioning point and the Start button blinks on and off. Check the cut-off tool,
material, coolant oil, and so on again.
14. Press the menu key [Cut-Off] and the Start button at the same time.
The lamp on the Start button lights and the tool cuts off the material.
Wait until the lamp on the Start button goes off.
15. Press the menu key [POS PNT].
The Positioning Point screen appears.
16. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
17. Press the Start button .
The lamp on the Start button goes on and the tool moves to the positioning point.
18. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
19. Set the chuck and tool on the drill sleeve and insert it into the drilling sleeve holder.
Set the tip of the tool near the drill sleeve.
To set the right-handed cut-off tool:
Go to step 20.
To set the left-handed cut-off tool:
The end face of the material extends from the program zero point.
Calculate the value from the cut-off tool shank width and tool width, lower the spindle for the value W in the figure
by pulse handle or MDI operation. Move the end face of the material to the program zero point. Then, go to step 20.

If the tip of the tool protrudes from the level of the end face of the back chuck cap nut, the tool and the
material or guide bushing may interfere with each other.

20. Use the page keys , the tab keys or the arrow keys to move the cursor to the
"Core" of the tool to be set.
21. Close all doors.
22. Press the menu key [Man. Set]. The Manual Tool Set screen appears.
23. Press the arrow key . Two cursors appear and the list showing the move positions is displayed.

24. Enter the selection number of "Center" and press the Input key .

25. Press the Start button . The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.

8-28
 L32

26. Press the Start button . The lamp on the Start button goes on. After the spindle (Z1) retracts 1 mm and the
sleeve moves to the set position, the spindle (Z1) advances 1 mm.
At this time, use the override dial to keep movement slow.
27. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
28. Fit the tool tip to the end face of the material, then secure it temporarily.
29. Take steps 15. to 20. for other front drilling tools to set them in the same way.
30. Tighten the clamp screw for the front drilling tool.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart operations, close all doors and hold down the Start button to cancel the temporary stop
of operations.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.

8-29
L32

8.14.4 Back Drilling Tool Setting Procedure (T31's tool)

In the tool setting function, positioning of parts such as holders are performed based on machining data.
Before performing tool setting, be sure to check machining data for validity.
If machining data contains an error, the tools, holders, and material may interfere with one another.

[Procedure]
1. Execute one cycle of operation to cut a workpiece dimensioned on the front side and to end up with the back chuck
clamping the workpiece.
Before executing one-cycle operation, check that the menu key [Last PRT] on the Automatic Operation screen has
not been selected. If the menu key [Last PRT] has been selected, press it again to deselect it.

2. Press the Preparation key . The lamp on the Preparation key goes on and the Preparation window appears.

3. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
4. Set the chuck and tool on the drill sleeve and insert it into the back drilling sleeve holder.

Make sure that the tip of the back machining tool is within 62 mm from the block end face of the back
machining tool holder.
If the tool protrudes excessively, the holder, tool, and workpiece may interfere with each other.

5. Use the page keys , the tab keys , and arrow keys to move the cursor to the number
of the back tool to be set.
6. Close all doors.
7. Press the menu key [Man. Set]. The Manual Tool Set screen appears.
8. Use the tab keys to move the cursor to "Longitud" in the window.

Do not open the safety cover or touch any tool or material while the lamp on the Start button is on.
Doing either or both may result in a serious injury or death.

9. Press the Start button . The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
10. Press the Start button .
The lamp on the Start button goes on. After the back spindle moves to the center of selected tool, it advances to the
set position.
At this time, use the override dial to keep movement slow.
11. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
12. Fit the tool onto the end face of the workpiece then secure it temporarily.
13. Press the menu key [OPP-RET]. The opposite tool post retract point screen appears.
14. Close all doors.
15. Press the Start button . The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
16. Press the Start button .
The lamp on the Start button goes on and the opposite tool post returns. The lamp on the Start button goes off upon
completion of returning.
17. Take steps 4. to 10. for other back drilling tools to set them in the same way.
18. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
19. Tighten the clamp screw for the back drilling tool.

8-30
 L32

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.

8-31
L32

8.14.5 Back Drilling Tool Setting Procedure (T51's tool)

In the tool setting function, positioning of parts such as holders are performed based on machining data.
Before performing tool setting, be sure to check machining data for validity.
If machining data contains an error, the tools, holders, and material may interfere with one another.

[Procedure]
1. Execute one cycle of operation to cut a workpiece dimensioned on the front side and to end up with the back chuck
clamping the workpiece.
Before executing one-cycle operation, check that the menu key [Last PRT] on the Automatic Operation screen has
not been selected.
If the menu key [Last PRT] has been selected, press it again to deselect it.

2. Press the Preparation key .

The lamp on the Preparation key goes on and the Preparation window appears.
3. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
4. Set the chuck and tool on the drill sleeve and insert it into the back drilling sleeve holder. Set the tip of the tool near
the drill sleeve.

The protrusion of the drilling tool may differ with the tooling, refer to <17. Tooling> for further information.
If the tool protrudes excessively, the holder, tool, and workpiece may interfere with each other.

5. Use the tab keys , and arrow keys to move the cursor to the number of the back tool to be set.

6. Close all doors.

7. Press the menu key [Man. Set].
The Manual Tool Set screen appears.

When the front machining tool is set, if the T51 to T59 is called with the material protruded to the front side,
the front machining tool and material may interfere with each other.
Make sure to draw out the material beforehand.

8. Use the tab keys to move the cursor to "Longitud" in the window.

Do not open the safety cover or touch any tool or material while the lamp on the Start button is on.
Doing either or both may result in a serious injury or death.

9. Press the Start button . The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
10. Press the Start button .
The lamp on the Start button goes on. After the back spindle moves to the center of selected tool, it advances to the
set position.
At this time, use the override dial to keep movement slow.
11. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
12. Fit the tool tip to the end face of the material, then secure it temporarily.
13. Close all doors.

8-32
 L32

14. Press the menu key [OPP-RET]. The opposite tool post retract point screen appears.
15. Press the Start button . The Start button lamp blinks on and off, and the doors will lock.
16. Press the Start button .
The lamp on the Start button goes on and the opposite tool post returns. The lamp on the Start button goes off upon
completion of returning.
17. Take steps 4. to 10. for other back drilling tools to set them in the same way.
18. Press the Door open button to unlock the door, and open the door.
19. Tighten the clamp screw for the back drilling tool.

[Note]
• To enable operation while the door is open, press the Door open button to unlock the door, and set the Setting
switch key to the " " position. If this switch key is set to the " " position, machine operation is prohibited
while the door is open.
• If the door on the rear panel of the machine is open, it is not possible to operate the machine.
• The unit will only operate with the door open while the Start button is pressed.
The axes speed at this time is limited to 2 m/min or less.
• Releasing the Start button stops axis feed in the hold state and the Start button lamp blinks (on for two seconds and
off for one second). To restart the operation, press the Start button.
• If no operation is performed within 15 seconds after making menu selections, menu selections will automatically be
canceled.
Menu selections will also be canceled if a reset is performed during or after operations.
To restart operations, be sure to again make selections with the menus.

8-33
L32

8.15 Zero Point Returning Procedure

This procedure is required only when the zero point request alarm has been generated.it is not required in a series of
procedures for normal operation.

Keep the safety cover closed during returning to the zero point because it involves axis movement.

[Procedure]
1. Press the Parameter key .
The last screen selected appears.
2. Press the menu key [ZP EXE].
The Zero Return screen appears.
3. Check that the operation mode is "All Axes".
4. Close all doors.
5. Press the Start button .
The Start button lamp flashes and the door is locked.
6. Press the Start button .
The message "Executing Zero Return" is displayed for the axis currently returning to the zero point. The message
"Completed Zero Return" is displayed for axes which have already returned to the zero point.

[Note]
• Zero Point Returning Procedure is not required in a daily operation. It is required only when the zero point return
request is issued or when the motor is replaced.
• When All Axes Zero Return is specified, first Z1, X1, and Z2 axes return to zero point. After X1 axis has returned to
zero point, Y1 axis starts to return to zero point. After Z2 axis has returned to zero point, X2 axis starts to return to
zero point.

8-34
 L32

8.16 Transformation of Eco・Machine Operation Information in csv format

[Procedure]
1. Launch the Microsoft Excel to open the csv file which was output from the machine.
2. Drag with the mouse to select the data for the chart.
3. With the data being specified, press the menu bar [Insert], and select [Chart].
The "Chart Wizard 1/4" appears.
4. Select [Column Chart] on "Standard" tab, and click [Next]. The "Chart Wizard 2/4" appears.
The "Chart Wizard 2/4" appears.
5. Select the "Data Range" tab, and click [Next].
The "Chart Wizard 3/4" appears.
6. Enter "Power Consumption" in the Chart Title box, "Date" in the Category (X) Axis, and "Watt" in Value (Y)
Axis.
7. Select the "Titles" tab, and click [Next].
The "Chart Wizard 4/4" appears.
8. Specify the location where you want to place your chart, and click [Finish].
9. The chart is displayed.
[Note]
• In addition to the steps described above, you can create a chart based on your csv file in various way.
• "Microsoft Excel" is registered trademark or trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
countries.

8-35
L32

8.17 Csv File Format of Eco and Machine Operation Information

[ ] : Indicates the unit of measurement.

(A) Power Consumption - Year: YYCns.csv (B) Power Consumption - Month: MMCns.csv
YYYY，XXXXXXXXXX YYYY/MM，XXXXXXXXXX
YYYY，XXXXXXXXXX YYYY/MM，XXXXXXXXXX
YYYY，XXXXXXXXXX YYYY/MM，XXXXXXXXXX
: :
: :
YYYY ... Year YYYY/MM ... Year/Month
XXXXXXXXXX ... Power Consumption [Wh] XXXXXXXXXX ... Power Consumption [Wh]

(C) Power Consumption - Day: DDCns.csv (D) Power Regeneration - Year: YYRgn.csv
YYYY/MM/DD，XXXXXXXXXX YYYY，XXXXXXXXXX
YYYY/MM/DD，XXXXXXXXXX YYYY，XXXXXXXXXX
YYYY/MM/DD，XXXXXXXXXX YYYY，XXXXXXXXXX
: :
: :
YYYY/MM/DD ... Year/Month/Day YYYY ... Year
XXXXXXXXXX ... Power Consumption [Wh] XXXXXXXXXX ... Regenerative Energy [Wh]

(E) Electric Power Regeneration - Month: (F) Electric Power Regeneration - Day:
MMRgn.csv DDRgn.csv
YYYY/MM，XXXXXXXXXX YYYY/MM/DD，XXXXXXXXXX
YYYY/MM，XXXXXXXXXX YYYY/MM/DD，XXXXXXXXXX
YYYY/MM，XXXXXXXXXX YYYY/MM/DD，XXXXXXXXXX
: :
: :
YYYY/MM ... Year/Month YYYY/MM/DD ... Year/Month/Day
XXXXXXXXXX ... Regenerative Energy [Wh] XXXXXXXXXX ... Regenerative Energy [Wh]

(G) Reduction Power - Year: YYEco.csv (H) Reduction Power - Month: MMEco.csv
YYYY，XXXXXXXXXX YYYY/MM，XXXXXXXXXX
YYYY，XXXXXXXXXX YYYY/MM，XXXXXXXXXX
YYYY，XXXXXXXXXX YYYY/MM，XXXXXXXXXX
: :
: :
YYYY ... Year YYYY/MM ... Year/Month
XXXXXXXXXX ... Reduction Power [Wh] XXXXXXXXXX ... Reduction Power [Wh]

(I) Reduction Power - Day: DDEco.csv (J) Machine Operation - Each Item, Year:
YYEchOpe.csv
YYYY/MM/DD，XXXXXXXXXX YYYY，aaa.a，bbb.b，ccc.c，ddd.d，eee.e
YYYY/MM/DD，XXXXXXXXXX YYYY，aaa.a，bbb.b，ccc.c，ddd.d，eee.e
YYYY/MM/DD，XXXXXXXXXX YYYY，aaa.a，bbb.b，ccc.c，ddd.d，eee.e
: :
: :
YYYY/MM/DD ... Year/Month/Day YYYY ... Year
XXXXXXXXXX ... Reduction Power [Wh] aaa.a ... Automatic Operation Time [%]
bbb.b ... Alarm Stop Time [%]
ccc.c ... No Operation Time [%]
ddd.d ... Setup Time [%]
eee.e ... Power OFF Time [%]

8-36
 L32

[ ] : Indicates the unit of measurement.

(K) Machine Operation Information - Each Item, (L) Machine Operation Information - Each Item,
Month: MMEchOpe.csv Day: DDEchOpe.csv
YYYY/MM，aaa.a，bbb.b，ccc.c，ddd.d，eee.e YYYY/MM/DD，aaa.a，bbb.b，ccc.c，ddd.d，
YYYY/MM，aaa.a，bbb.b，ccc.c，ddd.d，eee.e eee.e
YYYY/MM，aaa.a，bbb.b，ccc.c，ddd.d，eee.e YYYY/MM/DD，aaa.a，bbb.b，ccc.c，ddd.d，
: eee.e
: YYYY/MM/DD，aaa.a，bbb.b，ccc.c，ddd.d，
YYYY/MM ... Year/Month eee.e
aaa.a ... Automatic Operation Time [%] :
bbb.b ... Alarm Stop Time [%] :
ccc.c ... No Operation Time [%] YYYY/MM/DD ... Year/Month/Day
ddd.d ... Setup Time [%] aaa.a ... Automatic Operation Time [%]
eee.e ... Power OFF Time [%] bbb.b ... Alarm Stop Time [%]
ccc.c ... No Operation Time [%]
ddd.d ... Setup Time [%]
eee.e ... Power OFF Time [%]

(M) Machine Operation - Time Line, Day: (N) Time rate of Cut/Non-Cut - Year: YYCut.csv
DDTimOpe.csv
YYYY/MM/DD，HH:mm:SS，aa YYYY，aaaaaaaa，bbbbbbbb，cccccccc，
YYYY/MM/DD，HH:mm:SS，aa dddddddd
YYYY/MM/DD，HH:mm:SS，aa YYYY，aaaaaaaa，bbbbbbbb，cccccccc，
: dddddddd
: YYYY，aaaaaaaa，bbbbbbbb，cccccccc，
YYYY/MM/DD ... Year/Month/Day dddddddd
HH:mm:SS ... Hour/Minute/Second :
aa ... Mode [–] :
10 ... Auto 20 ... Alarm Stop YYYY ... Year
40 ... Setup 50 ... Power OFF aaaaaaaa ... Total automatic operation time [s]
bbbbbbbb ... Total Cut Time: $1 [s]
cccccccc ... Total Cut Time: $2 [s]
dddddddd ... Total Cut Time: $3 [s]

(O) Time rate of Cut/Non-Cut - Month: MMCut.csv

YYYY/MM，aaaaaaaa，bbbbbbbb，cccccccc，dddddddd
YYYY/MM，aaaaaaaa，bbbbbbbb，cccccccc，dddddddd
:
:
YYYY/MM ... Year/Month
aaaaaaaa ... Total automatic operation time [s]
bbbbbbbb ... Total Cut Time: $1 [s]
cccccccc ... Total Cut Time: $2 [s]
dddddddd ... Total Cut Time: $3 [s]

(P) Time rate of Cut/Non-Cut - Day: DDCut.csv

YYYY/MM/DD，aaaaaaaa，bbbbbbbb，cccccccc，dddddddd
YYYY/MM/DD，aaaaaaaa，bbbbbbbb，cccccccc，dddddddd
:
:
YYYY/MM/DD ... Year/Month/Day
aaaaaaaa ... Total automatic operation time [s]
bbbbbbbb ... Total Cut Time: $1 [s]
cccccccc ... Total Cut Time: $2 [s]
dddddddd ... Total Cut Time: $3 [s]

8-37
L32

 Sheet keyboard type: Symbol

8-38
 L32

(Blank Page)

8-39
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 1E1-0800
Mfg. No. L32/0001～
Issue Date 2015.5

8-40
 11. Fundamentals of Programming
11.1 The NC Program..................................................................................................................................... 11-3
11.1.1 Difference between cam control and NC ........................................................................................... 11-4
11.2 Process of Program Creation.................................................................................................................. 11-5
11.3 NC Program Structure ............................................................................................................................ 11-7
11.3.1 Machining data (screen display)...................................................................................................... 11-10
11.4 Tool Layout Pattern ............................................................................................................................... 11-14
11.5 Drive Axis .............................................................................................................................................. 11-15
11.5.1 6-axis control specification (Type XII).............................................................................................. 11-15
11.5.2 6-axis control specification (Type X)................................................................................................ 11-16
11.5.3 5-axis control specification (Type IX)............................................................................................... 11-17
11.5.4 5-axis control specification (Type VIII)............................................................................................. 11-18
11.5.5 Stroke drawing ................................................................................................................................ 11-19
11.5.6 Multi-axis control group ................................................................................................................... 11-20
11.6 Coordinate System ............................................................................................................................... 11-21
11.6.1 Coordinate axis ............................................................................................................................... 11-21
11.6.2 Setting the coordinate system (program zero point)........................................................................ 11-21
11.6.3 Signs ............................................................................................................................................... 11-22
11.6.4 Coordinate values ........................................................................................................................... 11-22
11.6.5 Absolute and incremental commands ............................................................................................. 11-23
11.7 Machining Pattern ................................................................................................................................. 11-24
11.7.1 Machining pattern list ...................................................................................................................... 11-25
11.7.2 Machining pattern flow .................................................................................................................... 11-27
11.7.3 Free pattern (machining pattern cancel) (G600) ............................................................................. 11-28
11.7.4 $1 single machining (G610) ............................................................................................................ 11-30
11.7.5 Inner/outer diameter simultaneous machining (G620) .................................................................... 11-33
11.7.6 Front/back parallel machining (G630) ............................................................................................. 11-35
11.7.7 Pick-off, center-support (G650) ....................................................................................................... 11-37
11.7.8 Front/back simultaneous machining (G660) .................................................................................... 11-41
11.7.9 Superimpose control ....................................................................................................................... 11-43

11-1
 (Blank Page)

11-2
 L32

11.1 The NC Program

The Numerical Control (NC) program is a group of commands designed to operate the machine using the NC unit.
These commands are simple alphanumeric codes designed to be readable by the NC unit as well as easy to use by the
programmer.
Before reading ahead for details on NC programs, try the following question as an example showing that NC
programming is easy.

The NC program is almost the same as codes above.

(The answer to Q is 11.6.5)

11-3
L32

11.1.1 Difference between cam control and NC

11-4
 L32

11.2 Process of Program Creation

11-5
L32

11-6
 L32

11.3 NC Program Structure

The NC program consists of a main program body and program data.
In the main program body, operation commands for a machine are arranged in the order of each machining process.This
is usually called a program.
In the program data, the preconditions under which a program operates are arranged.
This program is not only required for processing on a machine, but also it serves as the communication means between
the personnel.
The diagram on the next page summarizes the contents of commands used in the program body and for program data.
The diagram on the page that follows lists the actually used command strings and screen displays The machine operates
under control of the program configured with the program body and program data as illustrated in the diagrams.

11-7
L32

11-8
L32

11-9
L32

11.3.1 Machining data (screen display)

Bar Stock O.D.

Enter the outside diameter of materials to be machined.
Tool Positioning Point (DIA) Bar Stock O.D. +
The tool positioning point is the point at which a tool is positioned when selected from among tools T01 to T14. Enter
the clearance between the tool at the tool positioning point and the outer diameter of the material. That point is also the
position to which the currently selected tool escapes when another tool is selected. That is, the tool positioning point is
the position at which a tool is positioned when selected from among T01 to T14 and to which the tool escapes when
another tool is selected.
Cut-Off Tool number
In this machine, a cut-off tool is mounted in T0100. Therefore, T1 is specified automatically.
<Loader device specifications when enabled>
The cut-off tool number cannot be entered.
Cut-Off Speed (min–1)
The tip of materials is cut at this speed specified by CUT-OFF in Preparation screen or M108 Material Exchange
program.
<Loader device specifications when enabled>
The cut-off speed cannot be entered.

11-10
 L32

Cut-Off Feed (mm/r)

The tip of materials is cut at this speed specified by CUT-OFF in Preparation screen or M108 Material Exchange
program.
<Loader device specifications when enabled>
The cut-off speed of the cut-off tool cannot be entered.
Cut-Off End (DIA)
The tip of materials is cut to the end position of this X-axis position specified by CUT-OFF in Preparation screen or
M108 Material Exchange program.
This position is also used as the start position of an X-axis when the program starts.
<Loader device specifications when enabled>
The indication changes to "spindle return position."
The "spindle return position" is a position that allows you to set Z1 axis retraction position when the "start position"
is set during preparation. Use machine coordinates to set values. It is normal to set the same value as the M42R or
G698R argument. For details, see <13.48 Loader Device>
Machining Length, Start point shift amount
The entered values are different when using the GB model and when using the GBL model + stopper enabled
specifications.

<GB machine>
It is normal to enter the Z1 axis stroke required for machining one workpiece.
(Product length + Cut-off tool width + Face-cut allowance + α (Margin))

<In GBL, when stopper specifications are available>

Enter the value <(Maximum move distance required for machining the workpiece) – (Overall length of
workpiece)>.
(1) Right-handed cut-off tool Enter the value (Cut-off chip width) + (Shift amount of rear turning tool).
(If tool secondary machining tool is used, enter the shift amount of that
tool.)
(2) Left-handed cut-off tool Enter the larger value either of Cut-off tool shank width, or shift amount of
secondary machining tool.

<Loader device specifications when enabled>

The indication changes to "workpiece 0 point."
The "workpiece 0 point" is the length in Z direction from the chuck end face to the workpiece coordinate zero point
(end face of a completed workpiece) of material to be processed by the currently selected program. For details, see
<13.48.1 Series of workpiece loader operations (M42)>.

Pieces/1Chuck
Enter the number of product to be machined in the program.

11-11
L32

Back chuck extend length

When a back long-neck chuck is used, enter the protrusion length of long-neck chuck from the back spindle cap nut. If
"SUPPORT" is specified for "Back Spindle" on Machining Data screen, the "Back chuck extend length" is not
displayed.
Back work extend length
When the back chuck end face or back long-neck chuck is used, enter the workpiece length extruded from the end face of
back long-neck chuck.
Guide bushing type
Specify the type of guide bushing of the selected program by selecting one in the list.
Stopper number (In GBL, when stopper specifications are available)
When the GBL + stopper specification is enabled, select the guide bushing type of the selected program from the list.
Enter the stopper number. If the stopper is not used, enter "0".
Stopper numbers are: T01 to T05,T20.
<Loader device specifications when enabled>
The indication changes to "start tool number."
The "start tool number" is the number of the tool selected when the "start position" is set during preparation. A tool
number specified using an R argument cannot be set.
Gang tool post
Enter the name of the gang tool holder attached to the machine.
Gang tool post for specifying T numbers
Enter the holder name for cross drilling tool/end-face drilling tool beside the T number.
Opposite tool post
Enter the name of the front drilling tool holder on opposite tool post mounted on the machine.
Back tool post
Enter the name of the back drilling tool holder on back tool post attached to the machine.
Back Spindle
Enter the type of the back spindle attached to the machine by selecting Standard, With Basket or With Support.
Wrk Length + C-off TL Width
Enter the value "work length + cut-off tool width". This item is displayed only when the synchronous automatic bar
loader (CAV) is installed. Use this menu to display the rough estimate of products that can be machined with the
remnant material.

11-12
 L32

 Note
• The machining data is automatically output at the same time when the program is output. "#814=0000010000
(material outer diameter 10.0)" appears after $0 when viewing the program outside the machine.
• The value entered as the back long-neck chuck protrusion length can be reflected on programs to be created on the
basis of the back chuck end face. (See <15.16 Use of "Back Chuck Extend Length" in Machining Data> for details.)
• Select "SUPPORT" for back spindle if the back cap nut is changed to that of the stabilizer-attached type in long
workpiece machining. Selecting "SUPPORT" causes the "Back chuck extend length" to be erased from the
machining data.
When you select "SUPPORT", programs can be created on the basis of the brass part of the stabilizer-attached cap
nut by automatically considering that the stabilizer-attached cap nut is longer than the normal cap nut by 10.0 mm.

11-13
L32

11.4 Tool Layout Pattern

A more rational layout can be selected according to the number of tools to be used.
Select a suitable tool holder.
For more information, see <17. Tooling>.
The type of the tool holder you have selected is displayed on the Machining Data screen.
For information on holder name selection, see <6.1.5 Entering, updating and storing the machining data>.

11-14
 L32

11.5 Drive Axis

11.5.1 6-axis control specification (Type XII)
• The gang tool post moves vertically. (X1 axis)
• The gang tool post moves horizontally. (Y1 axis)
• The headstock horizontally moves left or right. (Z1 axis)
• The opposite tool post and back headstock move back and forth. (X2 axis)
• The opposite tool post and back headstock moves horizontally left or right. (Z2 axis)
• The back tool post moves vertically. (Y2 axis)

Tool post name

X1 axis Gang tool post
Z1 axis Headstock
Y1 axis Gang tool post
B1 axis B-axis S1 = Main spindle
C1 axis Main spindle C axis S2 = Back spindle
X2 axis Opposite tool post and back S3 = Rotary tool on gang tool post
headstock
Z2 axis Opposite tool post and back S4 = Front rotary tool on opposite tool post (Option)
headstock
Y2 axis Back tool post S5 = Rotary tool on back headstock
C2 axis Back spindle C axis
A7 axis Dedicated bar loader

11-15
L32

11.5.2 6-axis control specification (Type X)

• The gang tool post moves vertically. (X1 axis)
• The gang tool post moves horizontally. (Y1 axis)
• The headstock horizontally moves left or right. (Z1 axis)
• The opposite tool post and back headstock move back and forth. (X2 axis)
• The opposite tool post and back headstock moves horizontally left or right. (Z2 axis)
• The back tool post moves vertically. (Y2 axis)

Tool post name

X1 axis Gang tool post
Z1 axis Headstock
Y1 axis Gang tool post
S1 = Main spindle
C1 axis Main spindle C axis S2 = Back spindle
X2 axis Opposite tool post and back S3 = Rotary tool on gang tool post
headstock
Z2 axis Opposite tool post and back S4 = Front rotary tool on opposite tool post (Option)
headstock
Y2 axis Back tool post S5 = Rotary tool on back headstock
C2 axis Back spindle C axis
A7 axis Dedicated bar loader

11-16
 L32

11.5.3 5-axis control specification (Type IX)

• The gang tool post moves vertically. (X1 axis)
• The gang tool post moves horizontally. (Y1 axis)
• The headstock horizontally moves left or right. (Z1 axis)
• The opposite tool post and back headstock move back and forth. (X2 axis)
• The opposite tool post and back headstock moves horizontally left or right. (Z2 axis)

Tool post name

X1 axis Gang tool post
Z1 axis Headstock
Y1 axis Gang tool post
B1 axis B-axis S1 = Main spindle
C1 axis Main spindle C axis S2 = Back spindle
X2 axis Opposite tool post and back S3 = Rotary tool on gang tool post
headstock
Z2 axis Opposite tool post and back S4 = Front rotary tool on opposite tool post (Option)
headstock
S5 = back rotary tool on opposite tool post (Option)
C2 axis Back spindle C axis
A7 axis Dedicated bar loader

11-17
L32

11.5.4 5-axis control specification (Type VIII)

• The gang tool post moves vertically. (X1 axis)
• The gang tool post moves horizontally. (Y1 axis)
• The headstock horizontally moves left or right. (Z1 axis)
• The opposite tool post and back headstock move back and forth. (X2 axis)

Tool post name

X1 axis Gang tool post
Z1 axis Headstock
Y1 axis Gang tool post
S1 = Main spindle
C1 axis Main spindle C axis S2 = Back spindle
X2 axis Opposite tool post and back S3 = Rotary tool on gang tool post
headstock
Z2 axis Opposite tool post and back S4 = Front rotary tool on opposite tool post (Option)
headstock
S5 = back rotary tool on opposite tool post (Option)
C2 axis Back spindle C axis
A7 axis Dedicated bar loader

11-18
 L32

11.5.5 Stroke drawing

The fixed points shown in the figure below are set by each machining pattern. These fixed points vary according to a
change in the pattern.

Stroke diagram (GB specification)

Stroke diagram (GBL specification)

11-19
L32

11.5.6 Multi-axis control group

Six axes move independently. These axes are functionally classified into two groups.
As a basic function, the X1, Y1, and Z1 axes are called the axis control group 1. It is symbolized in the program as "$1".
The X2, Y2, and Z2 axes are set as system 2 and appear as $2 in the program.
In general, the two groups move independently. However, the Z1 and Z2 axes can be superimposed by the simultaneous
machining of outer and inner diameters or the Z1 and X2 axes can be interpolated by the $1 single machining. See <11.7
Machining Pattern>.

11-20
 L32

11.6 Coordinate System

11.6.1 Coordinate axis
The axis along the center axis of material rotation is determined as the Z axis and the axis perpendicular to the Z axis as
the X axis. In other words, the Z axis refers to the direction the material moves longitudinally and the X axis the
direction in which an outer diameter turning tool moves into the material. The Z and X axes are sometimes called the
longitudinal axis and diametric axis, respectively.

11.6.2 Setting the coordinate system (program zero point)

For the X and Z axes defined as explained above, set the zero point of them. Along the Z axis, a coordinate value
indicates the distance between a point in question and the end face of a material (Z = 0). This setting is possible by
specifying “G50 Z0” in a program. This command means “Define the current Z axis position as Z = 0.
For the X axis (diametric direction), set the center of material rotation as the zero point (X = 0). For this setting, it is not
necessary to specify the corresponding commands in a program because the tool setting is made so that tool nose comes
to the zero point (X = 0) when a tool is mounted. Now, the center of rotation at the material end face takes the coordinate
values (X0, Z0) and this point is called the program zero point.

11-21
L32

11.6.3 Signs
In the coordinate system, location of a point is defined by a coordinate value and a plus/minus sign. In other words, a
sign indicates at which side a point in question lies in reference to the zero point; for the X axis, the side on which a tool
exists is determined as X+, and for the Z axis, the side at which the material exists is determined as Z+.
Usually, machining is carried in the X+ and Z+ area.

11.6.4 Coordinate values

Along the Z axis, a coordinate value indicates the distance between a point in question and the end face of a material (Z
= 0). Along the X axis, it indicates a value two times the distance between a point in question and the center of rotation
of a material (X = 0). The reason for this is a material is rotated around the centerline and thus the diameter of a product
to be machined is two times the distance a point lies from the center of rotation. Since a coordinate value to be specified
for the X axis is two times the distance, an X axis command is called a diametric command. For a numeric value, a value
in “mm” unit with a decimal point is used. Note that a decimal point must always be specified in a coordinate value.

11-22
 L32

11.6.5 Absolute and incremental commands

The absolute command is used for the (X, Z) coordinate value of the target position and the incremental command is
used to specify the move distances of X and Z axis directions.
• Absolute commands
Specifies the (absolute) coordinate value of the target position. (indicated as X, Y, Z)
• Incremental command
Specifies the (relative) distance in the X, Y, and Z axis directions. (indicated as U, V, W)
* X and Y, and U and W are specified in diametrical values.

Regard Z0 as the start

Absolute Incremental
X10.0 Z0 U0 W0
↓ ↓
(1) X10.0 Z8.0 (1) U0 W8.0
↓ ↓
(2) X16.0 Z24.0 (2) U6.0 W16.0

<11.1> Q answer

3. G01 X2.0 4. X3.0 5. G01 X2.0 Z2.0 6. G01 X2.0 Z3.0

7. G01 X3.0 Z3.0 8. G02 X4.0 Z4.0 9. G02 X5.0 Z5.0 10. M02

11-23
L32

11.7 Machining Pattern

 Machining Pattern
To simplify a program used with a multi-axis machine, operations (machining) are grouped by purpose. An operational
(machining) group is called a machining pattern.
Specify the machining pattern in both axis control groups 1 and 2.
• Free pattern (machining pattern cancel) (G600)
This pattern cancels any of machining patterns G610 through G660 while the power is being turned on.
In the free pattern (machining pattern cancel) mode, front/back parallel machining is possible.
With the front axis control group 1, front outer diameter machining and front drilling operations are possible using
the gang tool post while machining using the back tool post is possible with the back axis control group 2.
• $1 single machining (G610)
This pattern allows the outer diameter machining by gang tool post or inner diameter machining by opposite tool
post in axis control group 1.
• Inner/outer diameter simultaneous machining (Z1-Z2 axes superimpose) (G620)
This pattern superimposes the Z2 axis on the Z1 axis, and allows outer diameter machining with gang tools in $1 and
inner diameter machining with drilling tools on opposite tool post in $2, simultaneously.
Pinch milling can be performed.
• Front/back parallel machining (G630)
This pattern is used in front/back parallel machining. With the axis control group 1, front outer diameter machining
and front drilling operations are possible using the gang tool post while machining using the back tool post is
possible with the back axis control group 2.
• Pick-off, center-support (Z1-Z2 axes superimposition) (G650)
This machining pattern enables the back spindle to rechuck the workpiece and support the center of the workpiece.
• Front/back simultaneous machining (G660)
This pattern allows front/back simultaneous machining of the axis control groups 1 and 2 using the drilling tool
holders on the gang tool post.

 Axis control group

The axes of a multi-axis machine are grouped by operational purpose. The axis groups are called axis control groups.
Create a program for each axis control group. The programs of the axis control groups are executed when the machine is
started.

 Superimpose control
If the superimpose control function (e.g., G620, G650 machining pattern) is specified to an axis control group, its
member axes that have been operating with different coordinate systems will operate synchronizing with the
superimposed coordinate system.
Example:With Z1-Z2 superimposed by G650, Z1 is the reference axis and Z2 is the superimposed axis. In a program,
you can specify Z2 coordinate values on the coordinate system of Z1 for synchronous or asynchronous operation.
See <11.7.9 Superimpose control> for more information.

11-24
 L32

11.7.1 Machining pattern list

Machining pattern Comm $1 $2
and
code
Free pattern (machining G600 Operations Operations
pattern cancel) X1, Z1 and Y1: No operation X2: No operation
Y2: No operation
Z2: Movement to return position
(Argument W0 (Specifying no operation of
Z2) is available)
Selectable tool numbers: Selectable tool numbers:
T0100～T1400,T2000 T3000
T5100～T6000 (except B axis) T3100 - T3900
* T0100～T1000 K2 * T5100 - T6000
Axes of axis control groups: Axes of axis control groups:
X1, Z1, Y1, (C1) X2, Z2, (C2), Y2
(* Note that the axes of axis control group (* Note that the axes of axis control group
are switched to X1, Z2, and Y1 (C2) when are switched to X1, Z2 and Y1 (C2)
T5100 to T5300 or T0100 to T1300 K2 is
called.)
$1 single machining G610 Operations Operations
X1, Z1 and Y1: No operation X2: No operation
Y2: No operation
Z2: Movement to return position
(Argument W0 (Specifying no operation of
Z2) is available)
Selectable tool numbers: –
T0100 - T1400
T2100 - T2400
Axes of axis control groups: –
X1, Z1, Y1, (C1)
X2, Z1, (C1), Y2
Inner/outer diameter G620 Operations Operations
simultaneous X1, Z1 and Y1: No operation X2, Z2: No operation
machining Y2: No operation
Selectable tool numbers: Selectable tool numbers:
T0100 - T0600 T2100 - T2400
Axes of axis control groups: Axes of axis control groups:
X1, Z1, Y1, (C1) X2, Z2, (C2), Y2
Superimpose
Z2 superimposed on Z1
G621 Axes of axis control groups: Axes of axis control groups:
X1, Z1, Y1, C1 X2, Z2, Y2
G622 Axes of axis control groups: Axes of axis control groups:
X1, Z1, Y1 X2, Z2, C1, Y2
Front/back parallel G630 Operations Operations
machining X1, Z1 and Y1: No operation X2, Z2: No operation
Y2: No operation
Selectable tool numbers: Selectable tool numbers:
T0100～T1400 T3000
T3100 - T3900
Axes of axis control groups: Axes of axis control groups:
X1, Z1, Y1, (C1) X2, Z2, (C2), Y2

11-25
L32

Machining pattern Comm $1 $2

and
code
Pick-off, G650 Operations Operations
center support X1, Z1 and Y1: No operation X2: Movement to the center of guide
(Z1-Z2 bushing
superimposition) (Argument U0 (Specifying no operation of
X2) is available)
Y2: Movement to the center of guide
bushing
(Argument V0 (Specifying no operation of
X2) is available)
Z2: Movement to return position
(Argument W0 (Specifying no operation of
Z2) is available)
Selectable tool numbers: Selectable tool numbers:
T0100 - T0600 T3000
Axes of axis control groups: Axes of axis control groups:
X1, Z1, Y1, (C1) X2, Z2, (C2), Y2
Superimpose
Z1 superimposed on Z2
Front/back G660 Operations Operations
simultaneous X1, Z1 and Y1: No operation X2: No operation
machining Y2: No operation
Z2: Movement to return position
(Argument W0 (Specifying no operation of
Z2) is available)
Selectable tool numbers: Selectable tool numbers:
T0800～T1000 T5100 - T6000
T1100～T1400
Axes of axis control groups: Axes of axis control groups:
X1, Z1, Y1, (C1) X2, Z2, (C2), Y2

11-26
 L32

11.7.2 Machining pattern flow

The machining pattern should be specified for both $1 and $2.

 Sample program
$1 $2
G610 ....................... $1 single machining G610 ...................... $1 single machining
: :
G660 ....................... Front/back simultaneous G660 ...................... Front/back simultaneous
machining machining
: :
G630 ....................... Front/back parallel machining G630 ...................... Front/back parallel machining
: :
G650 ....................... Pick-off G650 ...................... Pick-off
: :
G600 ....................... Free pattern G600 ...................... Free pattern
(machining pattern cancel) (machining pattern cancel)
:
M56
G999 G999
N999 N999
M02 M02
M99 M99
% %

 Note
• Execution of machining patterns is automatically queued.
• Before selecting the desired machining pattern, be sure to cancel the coordinate system shift and offset. For selection
of G650, however, it is not necessary to cancel the offset.
• Specify a machining pattern in a program for both axis control groups 1 ($1) and 2 ($2).
• Each axis control group should hold the feed-per-rotation command and feed-per-minute command as modal
functions.
• A machining pattern is a modal G code that remains valid until other machining pattern is specified.

11-27
L32

11.7.3 Free pattern (machining pattern cancel) (G600)

The free pattern can be used for front/back parallel machining. In addition, the operation can cancel the machining
patterns of $1 single machining (G610), Inner/outer diameter simultaneous machining (G620), front/back parallel
machining (G630), pick-off/center support (G650) and front/back simultaneous machining (G660) in the power-on
state.

 Command format
$1 $2
G600 G600 W0

 Axis control group

Specify this command for both axis control groups $1 and $2.

 Argument
$2 W0: The back headstock (Z2 axis) does not move. If the argument is omitted, the Z2 axis moves
to the return position.

 Operation example
The back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the return position at rapid feedrate.

11-28
 L32

 Macro specification
Command code G600
Name Free pattern (machining pattern cancel)
Axis control group $1 $2
Axes of axis control groups: X1, Z1, Y1, (C1) X2, Z2, (C2), Y2
Superimpose – –
Coordinate System – –
Argument – W0: The back headstock (Z2 axis) does not move.
Spindle with which Main spindle Back Spindle
synchronous feed is enabled
Spindle with which constant Main spindle Back Spindle
surface speed control is
enabled
Cutting block Main spindle Back Spindle
interlock
T command T0100～T1400,T2000 T3000
T5100～T6000 (except B T3100 - T3900
axis) T5100 - T6000
T0100～T1000 K2
Others – –

 Sample program
$1 $2
G600 ............................. Free pattern G600 ............................ Free pattern
(machining pattern cancel) (machining pattern cancel)
T5100
G00 Z–0.5
: G01 Z3.0 F0.1 T31
: G00 Z–0.5 T00
:
!2 L1 !1 L1
T3100
T0300 X17.0 :
G00 X9.0 Z–0.5 T03
G01 X12.0 Z1.0 F0.08
Z17.8
X15.2
X17.0 Z18.7
:
:

 Note
• When K2 argument for T command is specified, care must be taken for interference between the back headstock,
front/back drilling holder, and back tool post.
• To use a tool T50’s for back machining, be sure to use the queuing state as shown in the sample program. Because
tool T50’s is mounted on the gang tool post, a gang tool of another tool number cannot be selected during machining
with tool T50’s.

11-29
L32

11.7.4 $1 single machining (G610)

This pattern allows the outer diameter machining by gang tool post or inner diameter machining by opposite tool post in
axis control group 1.

 Command format
$1 $2
G610 G610 W0

 Axis control group

Specify this command for the axis control groups $1 and $2.

 Argument
$2 W0: The back headstock (Z2 axis) does not move. If the argument is omitted, the Z2 axis moves
to the return position.

 Operation example
$1: G610 does not cause any axis movement.
When a tool (T20's) is selected after the designation of G610, the gang tool post (X1 and Y1 axes) retracts, the opposite
tool post (X2 axis) starts movement toward the specified tool position, and the opposite tool post (Z2 axis) moves to the
forward end position. All of these operations are executed simultaneously. If the machine judges the gang tool post will
interfere with the opposite tool post, it automatically controls the feed rate of the Z2 axis before the interference area and,
when the gang tool post passes through the area, feeds the Z2 axis in rapid feed. If the free tool layout pattern is selected
for gang tool post, the parallel machining is not performed.

If the machine is operated in handle mode for on-machine program check, timings of gang and opposite
tool posts do not match. However, these timings will shift in a safe manner and, therefore, interference will
not occur.

$2：The back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the return position at rapid feed.

11-30
 L32

 Macro specification
Command code G610
Name $1 single machining
Axis control group $1 $2
Axes of axis control groups: X1, Z1, Y1, (C1), X2, Y2 –
Superimpose – –
Coordinate System – –
Argument – W0: The back headstock (Z2 axis) does not move.
If the argument is omitted, the Z2 axis moves
to the return position.
Spindle with which Main spindle –
synchronous feed is enabled
Spindle with which constant Main spindle –
surface speed control is
enabled
Cutting block Main spindle –
interlock
T command T0100～T1400 (on gang tool –
post)
T2100 - T2400
Others – –

 Sample program 1
$1 single machining (G610) → front/back parallel machining (G630)
$1 $2
: :
G610 ............................. $1 single machining G610 ............................ $1 single machining
T2100 (X2 Z1 C1)
:
T2300 (X2 Z1 C1)
:
T0500 (X1 Z1 Y1 C1)
:
T2100 (X2 Z1 C1)
:
G630 ............................. Front/back parallel machining G630 ............................ Front/back parallel machining
T0300 (X1 Z1 Y1 C1) T3200 (X2 Z2 C2)
: :

 Sample program 2
$1 single machining (G610) Machining with the cross machining and drilling tools (L20X)
$1 $2
: :
G610 ............................. $1 single machining G610 ............................ $1 single machining
T2300 (X2 Z1 C1).......... Select cross machining tool :
:
T2100 (X2 Z1 C1).......... Select drilling tool
G53 W21.0 .................... Z1 axis workpiece coordinate
shift command
:
G600 G600
: :

11-31
L32

The forward end position of opposite tool post (Z2 axis) with end-face drilling tools mounted: Z2 = 377.0mm

 Note
• In $1, the machining by alternately using a a tool on the opposite tool post (T20's) and a tool on the gang tool post
(T01's) can be performed.
• If a tool on opposite tool post (T20's) is called during $1 single machining (G610), after the X2 axis of the opposite
tool post is moved, then the Z2 axis moves to the forward end position (377.0) in the Z2 axis machine coordinate).
Therefore, if the workpiece is protruded from the guide bushing, interference between the workpiece and the tool
may occur. After the workpiece is escaped, the tool must be called.

11-32
 L32

11.7.5 Inner/outer diameter simultaneous machining (G620)

With the Z2 axis superimposed on the Z1 axis, G620 simultaneously enables:$1 to perform outer diameter machining
with a gang tool, and $2 to perform inner diameter machining with a front drilling tool on the opposite tool post. The
pinch milling can be performed.

When you intend to use the inner/outer diameter simultaneous machining (or pinch milling machining), pay
strict attention to interference. For details, see <13.46 Simultaneous Machining>

 Command format
$1 $2
G620 G620 Z

 Axis control group

Specify this command for the axis control groups $1 and $2.

 Argument
$2 Z The opposite tool post (Z2 axis) moves to the specified position (in workpiece coordinate).
In the Z2 axis workpiece coordinate system, the workpiece end face on the front $1 is zero
(0) position. If the argument is omitted, the Z2 axis does not move.
G621 Main spindle C-axis (C1) $1 side valid
G622 Main spindle C-axis (C1) $2 side valid
Specify G621 or G622 for both axis control groups $1 and $2. If the main spindle C-axis is not mounted, these
commands are ignored.

 Operation example
The axis does not move if no argument is specified.

11-33
L32

 Macro specification
Command code G620
Name Inner/outer diameter simultaneous machining
Axis control group $1 $2
Axes of axis control G620: X1, Z1, Y1, (C1) G620: X2, Z2, (C2), Y2
groups:
G621: X1, Z1, Y1, C1 G621: X2, Z2, Y2
G622: X1, Z1, Y1 G622: X2, Z2, C1, Y2
Superimpose – Z2 superimposed on Z1
Coordinate System – The coordinate system for the Z2 axis is established
by defining the workpiece end face as zero position
(i.e. reference).
Argument – Z :
The opposite tool post Z2 axis moves to the specified
position. If the argument is omitted, the Z2 axis does
not move.
Spindle with which Main spindle Main spindle
synchronous feed is
enabled
Spindle with which Main spindle Main spindle
constant surface speed
control is enabled
Cutting block Main spindle Main spindle
interlock
T command T0100 - T0600 (on gang tool post) (Opposite tool post)
T2100～T2600
Others – –

 Sample program
$1 $2
G600 G600
: :
G99 M3 S1=4200 :
G620 G620
(X1 Z1 Y1 C1) ............... Inner/outer diameter (X2 Z2 C2) .................... Inner/outer diameter
simultaneous machining simultaneous machining
T0200 T2300
G0 X17.0 Z–1.0 G0 Z–5.0
G1 X4.0 F0.3 G98
G1 Z30.0 F0.1 G1 Z4.5 F200
G1 Z14.5 F250
G622 G622
(X1 Z1 Y1) (X2 Z2 Y2 C1)
: :
The values in parentheses indicate the axes to which the tool belongs. Programming is not necessary.

 Note
• When G620 (inner diameter/outer diameter simultaneous machining) is specified, the Z2 axis moves with
superimposing on Z1 axis. If the axis movement command is specified for Z2 axis, the Z2 axis moves on the
workpiece coordinate of Z1 axis.
• G621 or G622 can be specified in G620 mode only. If specified in any other mode, an alarm will occur.
• Specify G621 or G622 for both axis control groups $1 and $2

11-34
 L32

11.7.6 Front/back parallel machining (G630)

Use this machining pattern to perform outer or inner diameter machining or front drilling with the gang tool post on axis
control group 1 ($1) and back machining with the back tool post on axis control group 2 ($2).

 Command format
$1 $2
G630 G630

 Axis control group

Specify this command for both axis control groups $1 and $2.
When a tool (T01's) is selected after the designation of G630, the opposite tool post (Z2) retracts. At the same time, the
gang tool post (X1 and Y1 axes) starts movement toward the specified tool position. These operations are executed
simultaneously. If the machine judges the gang tool post will interfere with the opposite tool post during the gang tool
post tool positioning, it automatically controls feed rates of X1 and Y1 axes before the interference area and, when the
opposite tool post passes through the area, feeds X1 and Y1 axes in rapid feed. If the free tool layout pattern is selected
for gang tool post, the parallel machining is not performed.

If the machine is operated in handle mode for on-machine program check, timings of gang and opposite
tool posts do not match. However, these timings will shift in a safe manner and, therefore, interference will
not occur.

 Macro specification
Command code G630
Name Front/back parallel machining
Axis control group $1 $2
Axes of axis control X1, Z1, Y1, (C1) X2, Z2, (C2), Y2
groups:
Superimpose – –
Coordinate System – –
Argument – –
Spindle with which Main spindle Back Spindle
synchronous feed is
enabled
Spindle with which Main spindle Back Spindle
constant surface
speed control is
enabled
Cutting block Main spindle Back Spindle
interlock
T command T0100～T1400 (on gang tool post) T3000
T3100 - T3900
Others – –

11-35
L32

 Sample program
$1 $2
G600 G600
: :
G630 ............................. Front/back parallel machining G630 ............................ Front/back parallel machining
T0300 T3100
(X1 Z1 Y1 C1) (X2 Z2 C2)
G0 X21.0 Z0 G0 Z–1.0
G1 X–0.5 F0.03 G1 Z2.5 F0.05
: :
G600 G600
: :

 Note
• If you want to specify the Z2 axis in $2 after the designation of G630, select the T30’s tool first. If the command is
specified for the Z2 axis without selection of T30’s tool, an illegal address error will occur.
• The opposite tool post (Z2) retracts when the T01's tool is selected in $1 after the designation of G630. The opposite
tool post (Z2) also retracts when the T30's tool is selected or M34 (product collection) is specified in $2.
• If the free tool layout pattern is selected for gang tool post, the opposite tool post (Z2) retracts when G630 is
specified.

11-36
 L32

11.7.7 Pick-off, center-support (G650)

This machining pattern enables the back spindle to pick off the workpiece and support the center of the workpiece.

 Command format
$1 $2
G650 G650 Z U0 V0 W0

 Axis control group

Specify this command for the axis control groups $1 and $2.

 Argument
$2 Z The back spindle (Z2 axis) moves to the specified position (in workpiece coordinate). In the
Z2 axis workpiece coordinate system, the workpiece end face on the front $1 is zero (0)
position. If this argument is not specified, the Z2 axis moves to the return position.
U0 Specify this argument not to move the back spindle (X2 axis) to the center of the guide
bushing. If this argument is not specified, the X2 axis moves to the center of the guide
bushing.
V0 Specify this argument not to move the back spindle (Y2 axis) to the center of the guide
bushing. If this argument is not specified, the Y2 axis moves to the center of the guide
bushing.
W0 Specify this argument not to move the back spindle (Z2 axis) to the return position.
If this argument is not specified, the Z2 axis moves to the return position. However, the back
spindle (Z2 axis) does not move to the return position when the back spindle (X2 axis) is at
the center of the guide bushing.

 Operation example

The back spindle (Z2 axis) moves to the return position and the back spindle (X2 axis) moves to the center of the guide
bushing. However, the back spindle (Z2 axis) does not move to the return position when the back spindle (X2 axis) is at
the center of the guide bushing.
Set the work coordinate system for the Z2 axis so that the end face of a workpiece is adjusted to 0 for front machining.

11-37
L32

 Macro specification
Command code G650
Name Pick-off, center-support
Axis control group $1 $2
Axes of axis control X1, Z1, Y1, C1 X2, Z2, C2, Y2
groups:
Superimpose – Z2 superimposed on Z1
Coordinate System – The coordinate system for the Z2 axis is established by
defining the workpiece end face as zero position.
Argument Z :
The back spindle Z2 axis moves to the specified position. If
this argument is not specified, the Z2 axis moves to the return
position.
U :
Specify this argument not to move the back spindle (X2 axis)
to the center of the guide bushing. If this argument is not
specified, the Y2 axis moves to the center of the guide
bushing.
V :
Specify this argument not to move the back spindle (Y2 axis)
to the center of the guide bushing. If this argument is not
specified, the Y2 axis moves to the center of the guide
bushing.
W :
Specify this argument not to move the back spindle (Z2 axis)
to the return position. If this argument is not specified, the Z2
axis moves to the return position.
Spindle with which Main spindle Back Spindle
synchronous feed is
enabled
Spindle with which Main spindle Back Spindle
constant surface
speed control is
enabled
Cutting block Main spindle Back Spindle
interlock
T command T0100 - T0600 (on gang tool T3000 (Back spindle)
post)
Others – –

 Sample program
$1 $2
:
G99 M03 S1=1500 M24 S2=1500
T0100
G0 X17.0 Z30.0
G650 ............................. Pick-off G650 ............................ Pick-off
G0 Z–0.5
G98 G1 Z10.0 F3000
G4 U0.5
M15
!2L1 !1L1
G01 X–1.0 F0.03
G600 G600
X–3.0
: :

 Note
• When G650 (pick-off, center support) is specified, the Z2 axis moves with superimposing on Z1 axis. If the axis
movement command is specified for Z2 axis, the Z2 axis moves on the workpiece coordinate of Z1 axis.

11-38
 L32

• Position the Z1 axis at cut-off position before specifying the G650 command.
• During pick-off operation (G650), you can move the Z2 axis to machine zero point by specifying the G231
command. See <15.18 Pick-off Cancel (G231)>.
• When machining a workpiece with a gang rotary tool while performing center support, the gang rotary tool driving
device may interfere with the back spindle, depending on the position of back spindle (Z2 axis).

 Sample program for pick-off in use of back long-neck chuck

• The long-neck chuck
shall protrude from the end face of the cap nut by 5.0 mm.
• The workpiece protrusion length from the long-neck chuck end face shall be
5.0 mm.
• The cut-off tool shall be  12 and left-handed .
• The total length of the workpiece shall be 30.0 mm.
Enter 5.0 as "Back chuck extend length" in the machining data.
Enter 5.0 as "Back work extend length" in the machining data.

 Sample program
$1 $2
G600 G600
:
G99 M3 S1=2000
M24 S2=2000
T0100
G0 X21.0 Z42.0 T1
G650 G650
M16
M72
G0 Z–1.0 ............................ The end face of the back chuck is positioned
at the front position separated from the front
end face of the workpiece by 1.0 mm.
M77
G98 G1 Z25.0 F3000 ......... Move the chuck to the position separated
from the front end face of the workpiece by
25.0 mm (the workpiece protrusion length
from the back end face of the chuck after
re-chucking: 5.0 mm (total length of
workpiece 30.0 – 25.0)).
M15
!2 L1 !1 L1
: :

11-39
L32

 Note
• When a numeric value is specified in "Back chuck extend length" on the Machining Data screen, the Z2 axis moves
to the position where the front workpiece end face and the back long-neck chuck end face are aligned by the Z0.0
command of $2 specified after G650.
• When "SUPPORT" is selected for "Back Spindle" on the Machining Data screen, the Z2 axis moves to the position
where the front workpiece end face and the end face of the long workpiece cap nut brass part are aligned by the Z0.0
command of $2 specified after G650. In this control, the length of the cap nut with the support for a long workpiece
which is 10.0 mm longer than the ordinary cap nut is taken into account.

11-40
 L32

11.7.8 Front/back simultaneous machining (G660)

This pattern allows front/back simultaneous machining with drilling holder on gang tool post in front $1 and back $2.

 Command format
$1 $2
G660 G660 W0 X2

 Axis control group

Specify this command for the axis control groups $1 and $2.

 Argument
$2 W0： The Z2 axis (back headstock) does not move. If the argument is omitted, the Z2 axis moves to the
return position.
$2 X2 ： The X2 axis is superimposed on the Y1 axis. Specify this argument when you intend to move the Y1
axis on front $1 in the front/back simultaneous machining. With the movement of Y1, the X2 axis
moves as well.。

 Operation example
The back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the return position in rapid feed rate.

After T11's or T51's tools are selected, the axis moves to the following position.

11-41
L32

 Macro specification
Command code G660
Name Front/back simultaneous machining
Axis control group $1 $2
Axes of axis control X1, Z1, Y1, C1 X2, Z2, C2, Y2
groups:
Superimpose – The X2 axis is superimposed on the Y1
axis.
Coordinate System Z2:
The coordinate system for the Z2 axis is
established by defining the position where
the tool nose of the vertical end face drilling
holder is aligned with the back workpiece
end face as the reference position.
Argument W0:
The back spindle (Z2 axis) does not move.
If the argument is omitted, the Z2 axis
moves to the return position.
X2:
The X2 axis is superimposed on the Y1
axis.
Spindle with which Main spindle Back Spindle
synchronous feed is
enabled
Spindle with which Main spindle Back Spindle
constant surface speed
control is enabled
Cutting block Main spindle Back Spindle
interlock
T command T0800～T1000 T5100 - T6000 (except B axis)
T1100～T1400 (Drilling tool on gang tool post)
(Drilling tool on gang tool post)
Others – –

 Sample program
$1 $2
: :
G660........................ Front/back simultaneous G660 ....................... Front/back simultaneous
machining machining
T1200 T5200
G00 Z–0.5 T12 G00 Z–0.5 T52
G01 Z5.0 F0.03 G01 Z5.0 F0.03
: :

 Note
• Specify commands to rotate the main spindle in $1, and specify commands to rotate the back spindle in $2.
• When the G660 command is executed, the queuing state is automatically placed at selection of a tool in the
T01/T10's and a tool in the T50's. Select a tool in the T01/T10's and a tool in the T50's when replacing the current
tool.
Be sure to specify the same number as the first digit of the tool number in the T01/T10's and the tool number in the
T50's.
• Front/back simultaneous machining (G660) cannot be performed on the B axis drilling spindle (MEU307).

11-42
 L32

11.7.9 Superimpose control

This section explains superimpose control giving an example.
Mr. A got on the end of the train. He was getting off at the next station. The front end of the train is close to the barrier.
So, he walked to the front end of the train and got off.
The following figure shows the work done by the train and Mr. A.
The work done by the train when moving the 1 distance at speed F1, as the result of Mr. A moving 2 distance at speed
F2, he performed the work of 1＋2. The train acts Z1 as the reference coordinate axis. Mr. A acts as the Z2 axis. Mr. A
(Z2 axis) did his work while being on the train (Z1 axis). This is called superimpose control.
In terms of this machine, the train corresponds to the headstock (Z1 axis), and Mr. A corresponds to the back headstock
tool post (Z2 axis).

Operation with superimpose control:

• If Z2 axis movement is not specified and Z1 axis movement is specified, the Z2 axis moves synchronously with the
Z1 axis.
• If Z2 axis movement is specified and Z1 axis movement is not specified, only the Z2 axis moves.
• If both Z2 axis movement and Z1 axis movement are specified, the Z2 axis moves while being superimposed on the
Z1 axis (being on the Z axis).
Explanation of the above figure:
When F1 = F2, the Z2 axis appears to be in stopped state.
When F1 < F2F1 < F2, the Z2 axis moves forward at speed of F2-F1.
When F1 > F2, the Z2 axis moves backward.
The queuing command is specified in the program for adjusting the timing of the Z1 and Z2 axes.

[Note]
A machining pattern command cannot be executed in MDI mode.

11-43
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 2E1-1101
Mfg. No. L32/0261～
Issue Date 2015.12

11-44
 12. Command Codes
12.1 Summary of Addresses Used in NC Programs ....................................................................................... 12-3
12.2 Axis Commands (Feed Commands) ....................................................................................................... 12-5
12.3 T Functions (Tool Codes) ........................................................................................................................ 12-6
12.3.1 Tool mounting positions and machining points .................................................................................. 12-8
12.3.2 Overview of coordinate systems ....................................................................................................... 12-9
12.4 T Code Arguments ................................................................................................................................ 12-10
12.4.1 Tools on the gang tool post (T0100 to T1400) ................................................................................. 12-10
12.4.2 Back drilling tool on gang tool post (T5100 to T6000) ..................................................................... 12-26
12.4.3 Front drilling tool on opposite tool post (T2100 to T2400) ............................................................... 12-32
12.4.4 Back spindle (T3000) ...................................................................................................................... 12-35
12.4.5 Back drilling tool on back tool post (T3100 to T3900) ..................................................................... 12-36
12.4.6 T codes and arguments effective in machining patterns ................................................................. 12-43
12.5 G Functions (G Codes) ......................................................................................................................... 12-44
12.5.1 G codes table .................................................................................................................................. 12-44
12.5.2 Rapid feed positioning (G00)........................................................................................................... 12-46
12.5.3 Linear interpolation (G01) ............................................................................................................... 12-48
12.5.4 Circular interpolation (G02, G03) .................................................................................................... 12-50
12.5.5 Dwell (G04) ..................................................................................................................................... 12-52
12.5.6 Exact stop check (G09) ................................................................................................................... 12-53
12.6 F Functions (F Codes) (Cutting Feed Rate) .......................................................................................... 12-54
12.6.1 Cutting feed rate (F) ........................................................................................................................ 12-54
12.7 M Functions (M Codes)......................................................................................................................... 12-55
12.7.1 M codes table .................................................................................................................................. 12-55
12.7.2 Main spindle rotation and stop (M03, M04, M05) ............................................................................ 12-58
12.7.3 Back spindle rotation and stop (M23, M24, M25) ............................................................................ 12-59
12.7.4 Rotary tool on gang tool post rotation and stop (M80, M81, M82)................................................... 12-60
12.7.5 Rotary tool on back tool post rotation and stop (M180, M181, M182) ............................................. 12-61
12.7.6 Front rotary tool on opposite tool post rotation and stop (M83, M84, M85) ..................................... 12-62
12.7.7 Spindle chuck open and close (M06, M07) ..................................................................................... 12-63
12.7.8 Back spindle chuck open and close (M15, M16) ............................................................................. 12-63
12.7.9 Workpiece conveyor start (M31) ..................................................................................................... 12-64
12.7.10 Opposite tool post advance and return (M140, M141) .................................................................... 12-65
12.7.11 Gang tool post retraction (M151)..................................................................................................... 12-67
12.7.12 Thread Cutting Chamfering ON/OFF (M204, M205) ....................................................................... 12-68
12.7.13 Interference check function (M88, M89) .......................................................................................... 12-70
12.8 S Function (S Codes) (Spindle Speed Commands).............................................................................. 12-71
12.9 Queuing Function between Axis Control Groups "!" .............................................................................. 12-72

12-1
 (Blank Page)

12-2
 L32

12.1 Summary of Addresses Used in NC Programs

As described in previous sections, commands used in NC programs are alphanumeric codes (alphabetic character and
number) associated with some special symbols.
The alphabetic character in each command is referred to as an address.
This chapter describes the meanings and functions of addresses, $, and ! and explains how to specify their respective
commands.

12-3
L32

12-4
 L32

12.2 Axis Commands (Feed Commands)

 Outline
For the commands used to feed an axis, two types of command are available. They are absolute command and
incremental command.
• Absolute (absolute position) command
An absolute command specifies the axis feed target position in an absolute value referenced from the fixed position
(program zero point).
• Incremental (relative position) command
An incremental command specifies the axis feed target position as a relative position referenced from the current
position.
Command Format Command Format Feed Axis
Absolute Incremental
X . U . X1 or X2 axis
Z . W . Z1 or Z2 axis
Y . V . Y1 or Y2 axis
C . H . C1 or C2 axis

 Note
Specify a numerical value with a decimal point.
If a numerical value is specified without a decimal point, the value is judged a micron unit value.

 Example
If "X10;" is specified,
The axis moves to the X0.010 position when the control specification is the micron specification.
The axis moves to the X0.0010 position when the control specification is the sub-micron specification.

12-5
L32

12.3 T Functions (Tool Codes)

T codes can be specified to provide target tools with selections, positioning and coordinate setting easily. This enables
tools to be selected and machining to be continued without specification of many commands.
• Gang tool (T01 to T06)
• Stopper (T20)
• Rotary tool on gang tool post (T07 to T14)
• Front drilling tool (T21 to T24)
• Back drilling tool (T31 to T39)
• Back spindle (T30)
The figure below shows an example of tool layout.

12-6
 L32

Outer diameter tool (T01 to T14);

Diameter X = Position of "Material diameter D + Positioning point 2a"

Inner diameter tool (T21 to T24), back spindle (T30);

Center position of materials

Back machining tool (T31 to T39)...

Center of back spindle
(Actually, the back spindle moves.)

 Command format
T-code four-digit command
T
：Tool number
：Tool wear offset number
A T-code command with a 4-digit number provides a tool with positioning. The first two digits correspond to the tool
number. The last two digits correspond to the offset number. Specify 00 as an offset number in the offset cancel state.

T-code two-digit command

T
：Tool wear offset number
The T-code command with a 2-digit number makes the offset valid with axis movement following the same block.
Specify 00 as an offset number in the offset cancel state.

12-7
L32

12.3.1 Tool mounting positions and machining points

Usually, use T01 as a cut-off tool.
The following list shows examples for GTF5916 + Ū3213 + SEU1110.
Tool post Tool No. Outer Rotary tool Inner diameter Back Spindle Inner diameter
diameter machining in machining in
machining front back
machining machining
Gang tool post 20 T2000
（Stopper）
01 T0100
02 T0200
03 T0300
04 T0400
05 T0500
06 T0600
07 T0700
08 T0800
09 T0900
11 T1100
12 T1200
13 T1300
14 T1400
51 T5100
52 T5200
53 T5300
54 T5400
Opposite tool post 21 T2100
22 T2200
23 T2300
24 T2400
Back Spindle 30 T3000
Back tool post 31 T3100
32 T3200
33 T3300
34 T3400
35 T3500
36 T3600
37 T3700
38 T3800
39 T3900

 Note
• If the T code is specified with "No Tool Name" on Preparation screen, an alarm occurs.
• Normal tool selection is operated at the rapid feed rate. However, normal tool selections do not operate in the
door-open state.
• Specify T codes in a single block.
• When arguments described below are specified for tool selection, interference between the tool and the workpiece
may occur. Care for use of an argument is needed.

12-8
 L32

12.3.2 Overview of coordinate systems

If the standard tool holder (GTF5916 + Ū32B + SEŪ1110) is used, the workpiece coordinate systems used for a tool
(T0100 to T1000) selected on the GTF5916 differ from the coordinate system used when a tool (T1100 to T1400) is
selected on the SEŪ1110.

 Relationship between workpiece coordinate systems and operation modes

Mode Description
Automatic operation The system switches the workpiece coordinate system when any of T11 to T14 is
selected.
Program check The system switches the workpiece coordinate system when any of T11 to T14 is
selected.
Preparation The system switches the workpiece coordinate system when any of T11 to T14 is selected
on the Tool Setting screen.
Manual operation When the workpiece coordinate has been switched, you can feed an axis on the Handle
Feed screen after any of T11 to T14 is selected.
MDI The system switches the workpiece coordinate system when any of T11 to T14 is
selected.

12-9
L32

12.4 T Code Arguments

T code arguments allow target tools to be selected in various ways. The idling time may be omitted in tool replacement
depending on uses.

When an argument is specified for tool selection, interference between the tool and the workpiece may
occur. Care for use of an argument is needed.

12.4.1 Tools on the gang tool post (T0100 to T1400)

 Command format
T H Q1 X Y Z K2 E R M1

 Argument
H: Specify this argument to temporarily change the positioning point (relief point from material O.D. in the
machining data) of the current tool. If the argument is omitted, the tool moves to the position (material
diameter + tool positioning point + maximum DIA value of tool set data between current and specified
tools).
Q1: Select a tool without moving the current tool to the positioning point. If the argument is omitted, select a
tool after moving the current tool to the position (material diameter + tool positioning point + maximum
DIA value of tool set data between current and specified tools).
X: Specify the work coordinate of X1 axis after tool selection. If the argument is omitted, the tool moves to the
positioning point.
Y: Specify the workpiece coordinate of Y1 axis after tool selection. If the argument is omitted, the tool moves
to the zero point of the workpiece coordinate.
Z: Specify the workpiece coordinate of Z axis after tool selection. If the argument is omitted, the Z axis does
not move. If K2 argument is specified together, the Z1 axis is used.
K2: Specify this argument for back machining by gang tool. The axes of axis control groups are set as follows
after tool selection.
When T code is specified in $1:

$1 $2
K2 argument not X1, Z1, Y1 (,C1)
specified
K2 argument specified X1, Z2, Y1 (,C2)

The workpiece coordinate of the Z2 axis is set so that the tool nose directed to the back spindle becomes 0.
However, the K2 argument cannot be used for T11's. If specified, an alarm occurs.
W: When the K2 argument is specified, specify the retract point of the back headstock (Z2 axis) (incremental
move distance of the back headstock (Z2 axis) from the current position). The back headstock (Z2 axis)
moves to the return position (Z2 axis machine coordinate: 45.0 mm (type VIII, IX), 0.0 mm (type X, XII))
when this argument is omitted. Specify W0 not to move the Z2 axis to the return position.
E: Specify this argument to index the spindle at the specified indexing angle during tool selection. If the
argument is omitted, the spindle is not indexed. This argument is useful in the transition from turning to
secondary machining process. If the K2 argument is specified together, the specification is invalid.
When the spindle C axis option is not specified: Integer between 0.0 and 359.0
When the spindle C axis option is specified: 0.000 to 359.999
R: Specify R to call a tool associated with R when GDF1207, BSE607, BSE707, etc. is mounted.
M1: Ignore the maximum tool set diameter alarm.
M2: Ignore the gang tool path alarm.

12-10
 L32

[Note]
If the tool nose of the current tool is located above the relief position (material O.D. + positioning point + maximum DIA
value of tool set data between current and specified tools) of the tool post (X1 axis), the tool post (X1 axis) does not
move to the tool positioning point.

 T Example of operation without use of arguments

• T0100 - T1000 to T0100 - T1000
T0500→T0800

12-11
L32

 TH Example of operation using the H argument

G00 X8.0 (When the material diameter is 20.0 mm)
T200 H12.0 Moves the current tool to the X32.0 position and switches to the next tool.

[Note]
When the X1 axis of the currently selected tool (Point a) and the X1 axis of the specified tool (Point b) are as shown
below:
If the point b is larger than point a, the machine moves as shown in (1). If the point b is smaller than point a, the machine
moves as shown in (2).

 TQ1 Example of operation using the Q1 argument

When the TQ1 command is issued, the tool currently being used for machining moves to the positioning point
of the next tool and that next tool is selected at the positioning point in rapid feed.
T200 Q1

[Note]
The positioning point determined at this time is "the material diameter + tool positioning point" set as machining data.

12-12
 L32

 TX Example of operation using the X argument

The tool currently being used for machining moves to the positioning point and the next tool is positioned at the +X
position in rapid feed.
T X5.0

[Note]
When the X1 axis of the currently selected tool (Point a) and the X1 axis of the specified tool (Point b) in Example 1.
above are as shown below:
If the point b is larger than point a, the machine moves as shown in (1). If the point b is smaller than point a, the machine
moves as shown in (2).

[Note]
The Z argument can be used in the same way as above.

 TY Example of operation using the Y argument

The tool currently being used for machining moves to the positioning point and the next tool moves to the +Y
position in rapid feed.

12-13
L32

 TK2 Example of operation using the K2 argument

The Z2 axis (back spindle) is the target Z axis after tool selection. However, the K2 argument cannot be used for T11's.
If specified, an alarm occurs.
T200 K2

 TE Example of operation using the E argument

Specify this T code when you want to select a tool and index the main spindle at the same time. For a value following
For a value following E , specify an indexing angle.
T1200 E90

When an end-face drilling tool is being selected or specified:

The tip of the specified tool moves directly to the center of workpiece.

12-14
 L32

 TR Example of operation using the R argument

Specify the R1 argument to call a tool associated with R1 when GDF1601, GSE1810, GDF1207, BSE707, etc. is
mounted.

12-15
L32

3) Selection of the tool T1100 or T1200 while a tool T0100 to T1000 is selected
Example:
T0200→T1100

1. The X1 axis (motor X1 axis) moves to the machine coordinate 90.0 mm: ø32, 96.0mm: ø38 mm.
2. The Y1 axis (motor Y1 axis) moves to the tool change position (Y1 machine coordinate = 765.0mm: ø32,
771.0 mm: ø38).
3. The Y1 axis (motor X1 axis) moves to the center of command tool T11.
4. The X1 axis (motor Y1 axis) moves to the standby position of command tool T11.

12-16
 L32

4) Selection of the tool T1100 or T1200while a tool T1300 to T1400 is selected

Example:
T1400→T1100

1. The X1 axis (motor Y1 axis) moves to the tool change position (Y1 machine coordinate = 765.0mm: ø32,
771.0 mm: ø38).
2. The Y1 axis (motor X1 axis) moves to the center of command tool T11.
3. The X1 axis (motor Y1 axis) moves to the standby position of command tool T11.

12-17
L32

5) Selection of a tool T0100 to T1000 while the tool T1100 or T1200 is selected
Example:
T1100→T0200

1. The X1 axis (motor Y1 axis) moves to the tool change position (Y1 machine coordinate = 765.0mm: ø32,
771.0 mm: ø38).
2. The Y1 axis (motor X1 axis) moves to the machine coordinate 90.0 mm: ø32, 96.0mm: ø38 mm.
3. The Y1 axis (motor Y1 axis) moves to the center of command tool T02.
4. The X1 axis (motor X1 axis) moves to the standby position of command tool T02.

12-18
 L32

6) Selection of a tool T1300 to T1400 while the tool T1100 or T1200 is selected
Example:
T1100→T1400

1. The X1 axis (motor Y1 axis) moves to the tool change position (Y1 machine coordinate = 765.0mm: ø32,
771.0 mm: ø38).
2. The Y1 axis (motor X1 axis) moves to the center of command tool T14.
3. The X1 axis (motor Y1 axis) moves to the standby position of command tool T14.

12-19
L32

7) Selection of a tool T1300 or T1400 while a tool T0100 to T1000 is selected

Example:
T0200→T1300

1. The X1 axis (motor X1 axis) retracts by the maximum tool setting diameter for T01 to T10.
2. The X1 axis and Y1 axis move directly to the standby position of the command tool T13.

12-20
 L32

8) Selection of a tool T0100 to T1000 while a tool T1300 or T1400 is selected

Example:
T1400→T0200

1. The X1 axis (motor Y1 axis) moves to the tool change position (Y1 machine coordinate = 765.0mm: ø32,
771.0 mm: ø38).
2. The X1 axis (motor X1 axis) moves directly to the maximum tool setting diameter position for T01 to T10,
and the Y1 axis (motor Y1 axis) moves directly to the center of the command tool T02.
3. The X1 axis (motor X1 axis) moves to the standby position of command tool T02.

12-21
L32

9) Selection of a tool T1100 to T1400 while a tool T0100 to T0700 or T1900 is selected (when GDF or BSE is mounted
on T08 to T09) * Excludes GSE2010 and GSE1810)
Example:
T0100→T1100

1. When GDF or BSE is installed (excludes the GSE2010 and GSE1810), if a tool is called within this
operation, the X1 axis (motor X1 axis) moves to the tool change position (X1 machine coordinate =
228.0mm ø32, 234 mm: ø38).
2. The Y1 axis (motor Y1 axis) moves to the tool change position (Y1 machine coordinate = 765.0 mm:
ø32, 791.0 mm: ø38).
3. The Y1 axis (motor X1 axis) moves to the center of command tool T11.
4. The X1 axis (motor Y1 axis) moves to the standby position of command tool T11.

 Note
• If the Q1 argument is specified in the tool selection command in 3) to 9), the axis moves directly to the "positioning
point" of the specified tool.
• If the value more than 50.0mm for T0100 to T1000 or the value more than 30.0 mm for T1100 to T1400 is specified
as the tool set diameter, an alarm is issued when tool T code is selected.

When you want to set the value more than 50.0 mm for T0100 to T1000 or the value more than 30.0 mm for
T1100 to T1300 as the tool set diameter according to tool layout pattern, changing the default value of
machine variable (50.0 in #26070, and 30.0 in #26071) allows the machine to operate. However, there is a
possibility of collision between the material and tool or between the tool and guide bushing. Be sure to
check operation carefully.

12-22
 L32

10) Selection of a tool T1100 to T1400 while a tool T0100 to T0700 or T1900 is selected (when BSE707 is mounted on
T8, and GSE3807 is mounted on T13)
Example:
T0200→T1100

1. The X1 axis (motor X1 axis) moves to X1 = 228.0mm ø32, 234 mm: ø38.
2. The Y1 axis (motor Y1 axis) moves to Y1 = 635.0mm, ø32, 655 mm: ø38.
3. The X1 axis (motor X1 axis) moves to X1 = 40.0mm ø32, 96 mm: ø38.
4. The Y1 axis (motor Y1 axis) moves to Y1 = 765.0 mm, ø32, 771 mm: ø38.
5. The Y1 axis (motor X1 axis) moves to the center of command tool T11.
6. The X1 axis (motor Y1 axis) moves to the standby position of command tool T11.

• A T code command may trigger an alarm depending on the combination of mounted holders.
• M2 argument can be used to cancel an alarm, however since operation continues along the above path
there is still risk that the workpiece and the holder interfere. Be sure to check operation carefully.

 Alarm example

12-23
L32

 Note
• When GDF508, GSE3707 or GSE3807 is mounted on T12 or T13 and an end-face holder is mounted on T9, a T10 or
greater cross-machining tool command or selection will cause an alarm.

12-24
 L32

 Note
When an end-face holder is set on T10, a T11 or greater cross-machining tool command or selection will cause an
alarm.

 Note
• When the command or selected tool (GTF6312, 6313) is close to the right of the end face holder, an alarm is
generated.

 Note
• When GDF505 or GSE3707 is set on T12, a T10 or greater cross machining command or selection will generate an
alarm.

12-25
L32

12.4.2 Back drilling tool on gang tool post (T5100 to T6000)

 Command format
T X Y Z W Q1 Q3 E R

 Argument
X: Specify the workpiece coordinate of X1 axis after tool selection. Without the argument specified, the tool
moves to the center of the workpiece (0.0 mm). For front/back simultaneous machining (G660), specify X
argument with T11's.
Y: Specify the workpiece coordinate of Y1 axis after tool selection. Without the argument specified, the tool
moves to the center of the workpiece (0.0 mm). For front/back simultaneous machining (G660), specify Y
argument with T11's.
Z: Specify the position to which the back headstock (Z2 axis) is moved (absolute move distance from the
machine zero point of Z2 axis).
If the argument is omitted, the back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position separated from the
maximum nose protrusion length by 5.0 mm.
W: Specify the retract point of the back headstock (Z2 axis) (incremental move distance of the back headstock
(Z2 axis) from the current position). If the argument is omitted, the back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the
position separated from the maximum nose protrusion length by 5.0 mm.
Q1: Select a tool without moving the back headstock (Z2 axis). If the argument is omitted, the back headstock
(Z2 axis) moves to the position separated from the maximum nose protrusion length by 5.0 mm.
Q3: Select a tool after moving the back headstock (Z2 axis) to the return position. If the argument is omitted,
the back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position separated from the maximum nose protrusion length by
5.0 mm.
E: Specify this argument to index the back spindle at the specified indexing angle during the tool selection. If
the argument is omitted, the spindle is not indexed. This argument is useful in the transition from turning to
secondary machining process.
When the back spindle C axis option is not specified but the back spindle 1º indexing is specified: Integer
between 0.0 and 359.0 (with decimal point)
When the back spindle C axis option is specified: Numeric value between 0.000 and 359.999 (with decimal
point)
R: Specify R to call a tool associated with R when GDF1207, BSE607, BSE707, etc. is mounted.

If mounting the back drilling tool on gang tool post (T5100's) with the tool nose position beyond the
standard position, be sure to set the protrusion from the standard tool nose position with a negative value,
which is used for the tool setting in the longitudinal direction. Failure to do so may cause interference.

 Note
• Arguments Z, W and Q are exclusive with each other. Accordingly, do not specify them together.
• If the large value is specified for "Longitud" in Tool Set screen, an alarm may occur at tool selection.

12-26
 L32

 T Example of operation without use of arguments

[Motion sequence]
1. The back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position "maximum tool set data in longitudinal direction" + "relief
amount for back drilling" (5.0 mm).
2. The back headstock (X2 axis) moves to the center of the specified tool.
3. The coordinate system is set with the end face of the workpiece chucked by the back spindle as the workpiece zero
position of the back headstock (Z2 axis).
4. The tool post of the specified tool (X1 and Y1 axes) moves to the workpiece coordinate 0.

[Note]
• If the position of the back headstock (Z2 axis) has exceeded the position indicated in Step 1 (position "maximum
tool set data in longitudinal direction" + "relief amount for back drilling" (5.0 mm).), back spindle (Z2 axis) does not
move.
• Steps 2 and 4 are performed simultaneously.

 T X Example of operation using the X argument

Specify the workpiece coordinate of X1 axis after tool selection. Without the argument specified, the tool moves to the
center of the workpiece (0.0 mm). For front/back simultaneous machining (G660), specify X argument with T11's.
[Motion sequence]
1. The X1 axis directly moves to the position (the center of the specified tool + X argument).

12-27
L32

 T Y Example of operation using the Y argument

Specify the workpiece coordinate of Y1 axis after tool selection. Without the argument specified, the tool moves to the
center of the workpiece (0.0 mm). For front/back simultaneous machining (G660), specify Y argument with T11's.
[Motion sequence]
1. The Y1 axis directly moves to the position (the center of the specified tool + Y argument).

 T Z Example of operation using the Z argument

Specify the position to which the back headstock (Z2 axis) is moved (absolute move distance from the machine zero
point of Z2 axis). If the argument is omitted, the back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position separated from the
maximum nose protrusion length by 5.0 mm.
[Motion sequence]
1. The back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position of the Z argument.
2. The coordinate system is set with the end face of the workpiece chucked by the back spindle as the workpiece zero
position of the back headstock (Z2 axis).
3. The back headstock (X2 axis) moves to the center of the specified tool.
4. The tool post of the specified tool (X1 and Y1 axes) moves to the workpiece coordinate 0.

[Note]
When the Z argument is specified, note sufficiently that interference between the back headstock (Z2 axis) and the
sleeve holders (X1 and Y1 axes) may not occur.

12-28
 L32

 T W Example of operation using the W argument

Specify the retract point of the back headstock (Z2 axis) (incremental move distance of the back headstock (Z2 axis)
from the current position). If the argument is omitted, the back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position separated from
the maximum nose protrusion length by 5.0 mm.
[Motion sequence]
1. The back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position specified by the W argument.
2. The back headstock (X2 axis) moves to the center of the specified tool.
3. The coordinate system is set with the end face of the workpiece chucked by the back spindle as the workpiece zero
position of the back headstock (Z2 axis).
4. The tool post of the specified tool (X1 and Y1 axes) moves to the workpiece coordinate 0.

[Note]
• When the W argument is specified, note sufficiently that interference between the back headstock (Z2 axis) and the
sleeve holders (X1 and Y1 axes) may not occur.
• If the W argument is specified with a positive value, an alarm occurs.

 T Q1 Example of operation using the Q1 argument

Select a tool without moving the back headstock (Z2 axis). If the argument is omitted, the back headstock (Z2 axis)
moves to the position separated from the maximum nose protrusion length by 5.0 mm.
[Motion sequence]
1. The back headstock (X2 axis) moves to the center of the specified tool.
2. The coordinate system is set with the end face of the workpiece chucked by the back spindle as the workpiece zero
position of the back headstock (Z2 axis).
3. The tool post of the specified tool (X1 and Y1 axes) directly moves to the work coordinate 0.

[Note]
When the Q1 argument is specified, note sufficiently that interference between the back headstock (Z2 axis) and the
sleeve holders (X1 and Y1 axes) may not occur.

12-29
L32

 T Q3 Example of operation using the Q3 argument

Select a tool after moving the back headstock (Z2 axis) to the return position. If the argument is omitted, the back
headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position separated from the maximum nose protrusion length by 5.0 mm.
[Motion sequence]
1. The back spindle (Z2 axis) moves to the return position.
2. The back headstock (X2 axis) moves to the center of the specified tool.
3. The coordinate system is set with the end face of the workpiece chucked by the back spindle as the workpiece zero
position of the back headstock (Z2 axis).
4. The tool post of the specified tool (X1 and Y1 axes) directly moves to the work coordinate 0.

[Note]
The return position of the back headstock (Z2 axis) is Z2 axis machine coordinate 45.0 mm (type VIII, IX), 0.0 mm (type
X, XII).

 T E Example of operation using the E argument

Specify this argument to index the back spindle during tool selection.
Specify the indexing angle with decimal point for E .
T5100 E90.0

[Note]
• If the back spindle indexing option (the back spindle C axis or back spindle 1-degree indexing) is not specified,
specifying the indexing angle (E argument) causes an alarm to occur.
• Specify the indexing angle (E argument) with decimal point. If omitted, an alarm occurs or an indexing at specified
angle will fail.
• If the value specified for indexing angle (E argument) is out of the allowable range, an alarm occurs.
Allowable range
• Back spindle 1-degree indexing:Integer between 0.0 and 359.0 (with decimal point)
• Back spindle C axis:Numeric value between 0.000 and 359.999 (with decimal point)
• If the value specified for indexing angle (E argument) is out of the valid indexing angle, an alarm occurs.
• The back spindle indexing can be performed while the back spindle is rotating.

12-30
 L32

 T R1 Example of operation using the R1 argument

Specify R to call a tool associated with R when GDF1207, BSE607, BSE707, etc. is mounted.

12-31
L32

12.4.3 Front drilling tool on opposite tool post (T2100 to T2400)

 Command format
T Q1 W X Y Z E S M1

 Argument
Q1: Select the tool without moving the back spindle Z2 axis of the currently used tool to the return position.
W: Specify the retract point of the back headstock (Z2 axis) (incremental move distance of the back headstock
(Z2 axis) from the current position). Specifying this argument with positive value causes an alarm to occur. If
the argument is omitted: $1: Only the opposite tool post X2 axis moves. $2 The opposite tool post Z2 axis
moves to the return position, then the X2 axis starts to move. Specify W0 not to move the Z2 axis to the return
position.
X: Specify the X2 axis workpiece coordinate after tool selection. It the argument is not specified, the drilling tool
moves to the center (0.0 mm) of workpiece, or the cross machining tool moves to the return position.
Y: Specify the Y2 axis workpiece coordinate after tool selection. It the argument is not specified, the tool moves
to the center (0.0 mm) of workpiece.
Z: Specify the Z2 axis workpiece coordinate after tool selection. It the argument is not specified, the Z2 axis does
not move.
E: Specify this argument to index the main spindle during tool selection.
The specification is valid when the turning process changes to the secondary machining process. The
argument is valid only for $1.
Without main spindle C-axis option:Integer between 0.0 and 359.0
With main spindle C-axis option:0.000 to 359.999
S: Specify the shift amount from the forward end position of the Z2 axis (Z2 axis machine coordinate 377.0)
during the first selection of T20’ tool after the designation of machining pattern G610. If the T20’ tool is
mounted in excess of the standard tool nose position, be sure to specify the shift amount with negative value.
This argument is valid only for the first T20’ tool after the designation of G610. If the argument is omitted, the
Z2 axis moves to the forward end position.
M1: Ignores an alarm message "EX737 S2 cover may interfere with back cross-machining holder".

 Note
• If this command is specified during $1 single machining (G610) front drilling tools (T2100 to T2400) selection, only
the X2 and Y2 axes of the opposite tool post move.
So, escape the workpiece to prevent interference.
• If this T command is specified during the inner/outer diameter simultaneous machining (G620), the X2 axis starts
movement after the Z2 axis moves to the return position. Since Z1 and Z2 axes are superimposed, the Z2 axis may
overtravel. In this case, use the W argument.
• If this command is specified during $1 single machining (G610), after the X2 axis of the opposite tool post is moved,
then the Z2 axis moves to the forward end position (Z2 axis machine coordinate 377.0). Since the Z2 axis moves to
the forward end position, if the workpiece is protruded from the guide bushing , interference between the workpiece
and the tool may occur. After the workpiece is escaped , the tool must be called.

12-32
 L32

 Operation example
When specified in $1:
[Motion sequence]
1. In the machining program, move the Z1 axis to the position where the drilling tool will not interfere, then specify
the T code command.
2. The X2 axis moves.

When specified in $2:

[Motion sequence]
1. The Z2 axis moves to the return position.
2. The X2 axis moves.

12-33
L32

When specified in $2 with Q1 argument

While the Z2 axis is superimposing on Z1 axis in G620 mode, the Z2 axis moves to the return position when the tool is
selected. It may cause an over-travel of Z2 axis. Use the Q1 argument to avoid over-travelling.

12-34
 L32

12.4.4 Back spindle (T3000)

 Command format
T W Q1 E

 Argument
W: Specify the retract point of the back headstock (Z2 axis) (incremental move distance of the back headstock (Z2
axis) from the current position). The back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the return position (Z2 axis machine
coordinate: 45.0 mm (type VIII, IX), 0.0 mm (type X, XII)) when this argument is omitted.
Q1: Select the back spindle without moving the back headstock (Z2 axis). The back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to
the return position (Z2 axis machine coordinate: 45.0 mm (type VIII, IX), 0.0 mm (type X, XII)) when this
argument is omitted.
E: Specify this argument to index the back spindle at the specified indexing angle during the tool selection. If the
argument is omitted, the spindle is not indexed.
When the back spindle C axis option is not specified but the back spindle Integer between 0.0 and 359.0
1º indexing is specified: (with decimal point)
When the back spindle C axis option is specified: Numeric value between 0.000 and
359.999 (with decimal point)

 Operation example
[Motion sequence]
1. The back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the machine zero point (Z2 axis machine coordinate: 45.0 mm (type VIII,
IX), 0.0 mm (type X, XII)).
2. The back headstock (X2 axis) moves to the center of the main spindle.
3. The coordinate system is set with the back headstock (Z2 axis) machine coordinate.

 Note
• Arguments Z, W and Q are exclusive with each other. Accordingly, do not specify them together.
• If the W argument is specified with a positive value, an alarm occurs.

12-35
L32

12.4.5 Back drilling tool on back tool post (T3100 to T3900)

 Command format
T Z W X Y Q1 Q3 E

 Argument
Z: Specify the retract point of the back headstock (Z2 axis) is moved (absolute move distance from the machine
zero point of Z2 axis).
If the argument is omitted, the back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position separated from the maximum
nose protrusion length by 5.0 mm.
W: Specify the retract point of the back headstock (Z2 axis) (incremental move distance of the back headstock
(Z2 axis) from the current position).
If the argument is omitted, the back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position separated from the maximum
nose protrusion length by 5.0 mm.
X: Specify the X2 axis workpiece position during tool selection. If the argument is omitted, the X2 axis moves to
the center of the tool (X2 axis workpiece coordinate: 0) if the drilling tool is mounted. If the cross machining
tool is mounted, the X2 axis moves to the positioning point.
Y: Specify the Y2 axis workpiece coordinate after tool selection. It the argument is not specified, the tool moves
to the center (0.0 mm) of workpiece.
Q1: Select a tool without moving the back headstock (Z2 axis). If the argument is omitted, the back headstock (Z2
axis) moves to the position separated from the maximum nose protrusion length by 5.0 mm.
Q3: Select a tool after moving the back headstock (Z2 axis) to the return position. If the argument is omitted, the
back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position separated from the maximum nose protrusion length by 5.0
mm.
E: Specify this argument to index the back spindle at the specified indexing angle during the tool selection. If the
argument is omitted, the spindle is not indexed. This argument is useful in the transition from turning to
secondary machining process.
When the back spindle C axis option is not specified but the Integer between 0.0 and 359.0
back spindle 1° indexing is specified: (with decimal point)
When the back spindle C axis option is specified: Numeric value between 0.000 and 359.999
(with decimal point)

If mounting the back tool post back drilling tool (T3100 to T3900) with the tool nose position beyond the
standard position, be sure to set the protrusion from the standard tool nose position with a negative value,
which is used for the tool setting in the longitudinal direction. Failure to do so may cause interference.

 Note
• Arguments Z, W and Q are exclusive with each other. Accordingly, do not specify them together.
• If the large value is specified for "Longitud" in Tool Set screen, an alarm may occur at tool selection.

12-36
 L32

 T Example of operation without use of arguments

When a drilling tool is selected (includes turning tool)
[Motion sequence]
1. The back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position "maximum tool set data in longitudinal direction" + "relief
amount for back drilling" (5.0 mm).
2. The back headstock (X2 axis) moves to the center of the specified tool.
The Y2 axis moves to the center of the specified tool along with the X2 axis.
3. The coordinate system is set with the end face of the workpiece chucked by the back spindle as the workpiece zero
position of the back headstock (Z2 axis).

[Note]
If the position of the back headstock (Z2 axis) has exceeded the position indicated in Step 1 (position "maximum tool set
data in longitudinal direction" + "relief amount for back drilling" (5.0 mm).), back spindle (Z2 axis) does not move.

12-37
L32

When a cross machining tool is selected

[Motion sequence]
1. The cross headstock (X axis) moves to the positioning point.

2. The back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position "maximum tool set data in longitudinal direction" + "relief
amount for back drilling" (5.0 mm). The "maximum tool set data in longitudinal direction" is equal to the
"maximum back drilling tool length in longitudianl direction".

3. The back headstock (X2, Y2 axes) move to the specified tool position at the same time.
4. The coordinate system is set with the end face of the workpiece chucked by the back spindle as the workpiece zero
position of the back headstock (Z2 axis).

12-38
 L32

 T Z Example of operation using the Z argument

Specify the position to which the back headstock (Z2 axis) is moved (absolute move distance from the machine zero
point of Z2 axis). If the argument is omitted, the back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position separated from the
maximum nose protrusion length by 5.0 mm.
[Motion sequence]
1. The back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position of the Z argument.
2. The back headstock (X2 axis) moves to the center of the specified tool.
3. The coordinate system is set with the end face of the workpiece chucked by the back spindle as the workpiece zero
position of the back headstock (Z2 axis).

[Note]
When the Z argument is specified, note sufficiently that interference between the back headstock (Z2 and X2 axes) and
the back tool post may not occur.

 T X Example of operation using the X argument

Specify the X2 axis workpiece position during tool selection. If the argument is omitted, the X axis moves to the center
of the tool (X2 axis workpiece coordinate: 0).
[Motion sequence]
1. The back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position "maximum tool set data in longitudinal direction" + "relief
amount for back drilling" (5.0 mm).
2. The back headstock (X2 axis) moves to the position shifted from the center of the specified tool by the X argument.
3. The coordinate system is set with the end face of the workpiece chucked by the back spindle as the workpiece zero
position of the back headstock (Z2 axis).

12-39
L32

 T W Example of operation using the W argument

Specify the retract point of the back headstock (Z2 axis) (incremental move distance of the back headstock (Z2 axis)
from the current position). If the argument is omitted, the back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position separated from
the maximum nose protrusion length by 5.0 mm.
[Motion sequence]
1. The back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position specified by the W argument.
2. The back headstock (X2 axis) moves to the center of the specified tool.
3. The coordinate system is set with the end face of the workpiece chucked by the back spindle as the workpiece zero
position of the back headstock (Z2 axis).

[Note]
• When the W argument is specified, note sufficiently that interference between the back headstock (Z2 and X2 axes)
and the back tool post may not occur.
• If the W argument is specified with a positive value, an alarm occurs.

 T Q1 Example of operation using the Q1 argument

Select a tool without moving the back headstock (Z2 axis). If the argument is omitted, the back headstock (Z2 axis)
moves to the position separated from the maximum nose protrusion length by 5.0 mm.
[Motion sequence]
1. The back headstock (X2 axis) moves to the center of the specified tool.
2. The coordinate system is set with the end face of the workpiece chucked by the back spindle as the workpiece zero
position of the back headstock (Z2 axis).

[Note]
When the Q1 argument is specified, note sufficiently that interference between the back headstock (Z2 and X2 axes) and
the back tool post may not occur.

12-40
 L32

 T Q3 Example of operation using the Q3 argument

Select a tool after moving the back headstock (Z2 axis) to the return position. If the argument is omitted, the back
headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the position separated from the maximum nose protrusion length by 5.0 mm.
[Motion sequence]
1. The back spindle (Z2 axis) moves to the return position.
2. The back headstock (X2 axis) moves to the center of the specified tool.
3. The coordinate system is set with the end face of the workpiece chucked by the back spindle as the workpiece zero
position of the back headstock (Z2 axis).

[Note]
The return position of the back headstock (Z2 axis) is Z2 axis machine coordinate 45.0 mm (type VIII, IX), 0.0 mm (type
X, XII).

 T E Example of operation using the E argument

Specify this argument to index the back spindle during tool selection.
Specify the indexing angle with decimal point for E .
T3100 E90.0

12-41
L32

 Note
• If the back spindle indexing option (the back spindle C axis or back spindle 1-degree indexing) is not specified,
specifying the indexing angle (E argument) causes an alarm to occur.
• Specify the indexing angle (E argument) with decimal point. If omitted, an alarm occurs or an indexing at specified
angle will fail.
• If the value specified for indexing angle (E argument) is out of the allowable range, an alarm occurs.
Allowable range
• Back spindle 1-degree indexing:Integer between 0.0 and 359.0 (with decimal point)
• Back spindle C axis:Numeric value between 0.000 and 359.999 (with decimal point)
• If the value specified for indexing angle (E argument) is out of the valid indexing angle, an alarm occurs.
• The back spindle indexing can be performed while the back spindle is rotating.
• The signs of coordinates when using the boring tool are as shown in the figure below.

Opposite tool post viewed from the top

• Move the tool away from the end face of the material after completing the boring.
It is dangerous to specify a tool selecting command without moving the tool away from the end face.
• Mechanical constraints and the location of the back tool post make it impossible to perform boring and inner
diameter thread cutting.
Use the mechanical constraints for boring.

12-42
 L32

12.4.6 T codes and arguments effective in machining patterns

The table below lists T codes and arguments effective in machining patterns.
For machining patterns, see <11.7 Machining Pattern>.
Machining Axis Tool type Tool No. Argument
pattern contr No X Y Z W H Q1 Q3 K2 A E S R
ol ne
grou
p
Free pattern $1 Outer dia. T0100 - T1400,        ×  ×  × ×
(G600) machining T2000
tool
Front T0800 - T1400     × × × × × ×  × 
drilling tool
Back drilling T5700 - T5900      ×   × ×  × 
tool
$2 Back T3000  × × ×  ×  × × × × × ×
Spindle
Back drilling T3100 - T3900      ×   × ×  × ×
tool T5100 - T5900      ×   × ×  × 
$1 single $1 Outer dia. T0100 - T1400     ×   ×  ×  × ×
machining machining
(G610) tool
Front T2100 - T2400      ×  × × ×   ×
drilling tool
Inner/outer $1 Outer dia. T0100 - T0500     ×   × × ×  × ×
diameter machining
simultaneous tool
machining $2 Front T2100 - T2400      ×  × × × ×  ×
(G620) drilling tool
Front/back $1 Outer dia. T0100 - T1400        ×  ×  × ×
parallel machining
machining tool
(G630) Front T0800 - T1400     × × × × × ×  × 
drilling tool
$2 Back T3000  × × ×  ×  × × × × × ×
Spindle
Back drilling T3100 - T3900      ×   × ×  × ×
tool
Pick-off, $1 Outer dia. T0100 - T0600     ×   × × ×  × ×
center support machining
(G650) tool
$2 Back T3000  × × ×  ×  × × × × × ×
Spindle
Front/back $1 Front T0800 - T1400     × × × × × ×  × 
simultaneous drilling tool
machining $2 Back drilling T5700 - T5900  × × ×  ×   × ×  × 
(G660) tool
：Specification permitted, ×： Specification not permitted

[Note]
• Any commands other than those listed in the table above cannot be specified.
• If required arguments are not specified or one or more unavailable tools or arguments are specified, an alarm occurs.

12-43
L32

12.5 G Functions (G Codes)

The G functions, specified by 2-digit numerals after the G, are preparatory functions. They also send the axis (X1, Y1,
Z1, X2, Y2, Z2) control command to the NC.

 Command format
G

 Example
G00 Rapid feed
G01 Cutting feed

12.5.1 G codes table

Once specified, each G code belonging to groups 01, 02, 05, 07….. in the following table remains valid until another G
code in the same group is specified. That is, the G code is a modal code.

 G codes table
G code Function Group Remarks
G00 Rapid feed positioning 01 12.5.2
 G01 Linear interpolation 01 12.5.3
G02 Circular interpolation (clockwise) 01 12.5.4
G03 Circular interpolation (counterclockwise) 01 12.5.4
G04 Dwell 12.5.5
G09 Exact stop check ON 12.5.6
G12.1 Milling interpolation ON 19 14.9
G13.1 Milling interpolation OFF 19 14.9
G16 Y-Z cylindrical plane selection 02
G17 X-Y plane selection 02 14.8.1
G18 Z-X plane selection 02 14.8.1
G19 Y-Z plane selection 02 14.8.1
G32 Thread cutting 01 13.11
G34 Variable lead thread cutting (option) 01
G35 Circular thread cutting (clockwise) 01 13.15
G36 Circular thread cutting (counterclockwise) 01 13.15
 G40 Tool nose radius compensation cancel 07 13.8
G41 Tool nose radius compensation left ON 07 13.8
G42 Tool nose radius compensation right ON 07 13.8
 G43 Back spindle feed per revolution mode OFF 08 15.14
G44 Back spindle feed per revolution mode ON 08 15.14
G50 Coordinate system setting/Main spindle speed clamp setting
G53 Machine coordinate system command 13.21
G65 Macro call (option) 13.38
G66 Macro modal call A (option) 14 13.38
G66.1 Macro modal call B (option) 14 13.38
G70 Finish machining cycle 09
G71 Rough machining cycle in longitudinal direction 09
G72 End face rough machining cycle 09
G73 Closed loop machining cycle 09
G74 End face cut-off machining cycle 09
G75 Outer/inner diameter cut-off cycle 09 13.12
G76 Compound type fixed cycle for turning machining 09
G79 Face drilling cycle 09 13.13
 G80 Synchronous tapping mode OFF 09 13.14
G83 Canned drilling cycle (Z axis) 09
G84 Synchronous end face tapping mode ON 09 13.14
G85 Front/back boring cycle 09
G88 Synchronous cross tapping mode ON 09 13.14
G90 Canned cycle longitudinal machining 09 13.17
G92 Thread cycle canned cycle 09 13.18

12-44
 L32

G code Function Group Remarks

G94 End face machining cycle (Z axis) 09
G96 Constant surface speed control ON 17 13.7
 G97 Constant surface speed control OFF 17 13.7
G98 Millimeter per minute feed (mm/min) 05 12.6
 G99 Millimeter per revolution feed (mm/rev) 05 12.6
G113 Spindle synchronous control cancel 15.8
G114.1 Spindle synchronous control 15.8
G114.2 Polygon machining 14.10
G114.3 Hobbing machining 14.11
G115 Start position queuing (Type 1) 13.29
G116 Start position queuing (Type 2) 13.30
G117 Auxiliary function output during axis feed 13.31
G140 Arbitrary axis exchange 13.32
G149 End position specified queuing 13.33
G156 Arbitrary axis superimpose 13.34
G164 Differential speed rotary tool function 13.16
G173 Slanted helical interpolation function 14.14.2
 G190 Absolute value commands for B-axis ON
G191 Relative value commands for B-axis ON
G231 Pick-off cancel ($1 only) 15.17
G600 Free pattern (machining pattern cancel) 11.7.3
G610 $1 single machining 11.7.4
G620 Inner/outer diameter simultaneous machining 11.7.5
G621 Inner/outer diameter simultaneous machining - Main spindle 11.7.5
C-axis (C1) $1 side valid
G622 Inner/outer diameter simultaneous machining - Main spindle 11.7.5
C-axis (C1) $2 side valid
G630 Front/back parallel machining 11.7.6
G650 Pick-off, center-support 11.7.7
G660 Front/back simultaneous machining 11.7.8
G813 Spindle synchronous control cancel 15.8
G814 Spindle synchronous control 15.8
G900 B-axis mode ON
G901 B-axis mode OFF
G910 B-axis revolution
G950 Coordinate rotation ON
G951 Coordinate rotation OFF
G999 Last program 15.11

[Note]
• Multiple G codes can be specified in the same block if they belong to different groups.
• G codes cannot be specified with T in the same block.
• A three-digit G codes cannot be executed in MDI (manual data input) mode.
• Single block operation is not possible while G32, G34, G76, G79, G84, G88, G90 or G92 is valid.
Even if single block operation is being executed, once the NC reads any one of the above G code commands, that G
code will be continuously executed until canceled. If either one of the axis control groups ($1 or $2) operates in this
condition, the other axis control group will also continue to operate in the same manner.
• G codes with  mark are selected when the power is turned on.

12-45
L32

12.5.2 Rapid feed positioning (G00)

G00 is used to move the tool rapidly to a specified X, Z coordinate and position it there.
G00 is also used to return the spindle.

 Description
• The G00 code is used for moving the tool or the spindle from the current position to the specified position in rapid
feed.
• The G00 code maintains the current state (modal) until a command (G01, G02, or G03) (see the G functions table) in
the same A group and H group is specified.
• The rapid feed rate has been defined in advance. This rate does not require specification in a program.
• X axis: X1 = 32m/min, X2 = 32m/min
• Y axis: Y1 = 32m/min, Y2 = 24m/min
• Z axis: Z1 = 32m/min, Z2 = 32m/min
• Use U ,W and V instead of X ,Z and Y when an incremental command is
specified.

 Command format
G00 Z Rapid feed in longitudinal (Z-axis) direction (X is fixed.)
To complete one cycle and to proceed execution to the next cycle, use a G00 Z0 command to return the spindle to the
start position.

12-46
 L32

 Command format
G00 X Z Simultaneous rapid feed in diametrical (X-axis) and longitudinal (Z-axis)
directions (Both X and Z axes move.)
If you want to position the tool in a diameter of 6.0 mm and set the clearance between the tool and material to 0.5 mm,
specify a G00 X6.0 Z–0.5 command.

 Rapid feed positioning (G00)

Normally, G00 is used for rapid feed. You can change the feed rate by adding F argument. Note, however, the F
argument specified in this procedure is not held as modal functions.

 Command format
G00 Z ,F

12-47
L32

12.5.3 Linear interpolation (G01)

G01 is used to perform a cutting operation while moving the tool on a line to the desired X and Z coordinates at the
specified feed rate.
This function is called linear interpolation in the NC terminology.

 Description
• The G01 code allows the tool to cut from the current position to the specified position in a straight line.
• The G01 code maintains the current state (modal) until a command (G00, G02, or G03) (see the G functions table) in
the same group is specified.
• The feed rate is specified by "F ." See <12.6 F Functions (F Codes) (Cutting Feed Rate)>.
• The unit of X and Z coordinate values is defined as shown below.
Program command Unit
With no decimal point. X1 0.001mm
With a decimal point. X1.0 1mm
* With the sub-micron specification, "X1" corresponds to 0.0001 mm.
• Use U and W instead of X and Z when an incremental command is specified.

 Command format
G01 X F Feed in diametrical (X axis) direction.(Z axis is fixed.)
G01 Z F Feed in longitudinal (Z axis) direction. (X axis is fixed.)
G01 X Z F Simultaneous feed (tapering) in diametrical (X axis) and longitudinal (Z
axis) directions. (Both X and Z axes move.)

Tool feed in direction of diameter

 Command format
G01 X F Feed in diametrical (X axis) direction.(Z axis is fixed.)

Cutting from point A to point B (–3.0, 32.0)

G01 X–3.0 F

12-48
 L32

Tool feed in longitudinal direction

 Command format
G01 Z F Feed in longitudinal (Z axis) direction. (X axis is fixed.)

Cutting from point A to point B (8.0, 20.0)

G01 Z20.0 F

Simultaneous tool feed in diametrical and longitudinal directions (tapering)

 Command format
G01 X Z F Simultaneous feed (tapering) in diametrical (X axis) and longitudinal (Z
axis) directions. (Both X and Z axes move.)

Cutting from point A to point B (16.0, 20.0)

G01 X16.0 Z20.0 F

 Note
Pay attention to the spindle rotation, coolant, chuck, and guide bushing states when performing the cutting feed.

12-49
L32

12.5.4 Circular interpolation (G02, G03)

G02 and G03 are used for cutting while moving the tool on an arc with radius R from the current position to the specified
position at the specified feed rate.
This function is called circular interpolation in the NC terminology.

 Description
• The G02 and G03 codes enable the cutting on an arc with radius R from the current position to the specified position.
In this case, it is not necessary to specify the center of the circle.
• The G02 and G03 codes maintain the current state (modal) until a command (G00 or G01) (see the G code function
table) in the same group is specified.
• The feed rate is specified by "F ."
• The unit of X and Z coordinate values is the same as for the G01 code.

 Command format
G02 X Z R F Clockwise
G03 X Z R F Counterclockwise

The G02 and G03 codes also can specify coordinates as shown below. "I" (X direction) and "K" (Z direction) indicate
the distance (with signs) to the center of an arc from the start position. In this case, the radius of a circle is not required.
In this case, the radius of a circle is not required.

 Command format
G02 X Z I K F Clockwise
G03 X Z I K F Counterclockwise

The coordinate system of G02 (clockwise) and G03 (counterclockwise) is used as shown below.

12-50
 L32

To move the tool in the + (plus) direction on the Z axis:

• Specify G02 to cut the workpiece into a raised shape.
• Specify G03 to cut the workpiece into a dented shape.

 G02 Clockwise (CW)

Arc machining from point A to point B (12.0, 6.0)
G02 X12.0 Z6.0 R6.0 F
(G02 X12.0 Z6.0 K6.0 F )

 G03 Counterclockwise (CCW)

Arc machining from point A to point B (14.0, 9.0)
G03 X14.0 Z9.0 R5.0 F
(G03 X14.0 Z9.0 I5.0 K0 F )

12-51
L32

12.5.5 Dwell (G04)

Use dwell to stop the program, holding the current operation state, for a specified period of time.
The purpose of dwell is:
• To stabilize the groove diameter.
• To stabilize speed before starting thread cutting after the specification of a spindle speed command.
See <8.1 Thread cutting with a tap> and <8.4 Thread Cutting> in [Introduction] of the Instruction Manual
(Optional).
• To perform deep hole machining (stepping) using a drill.
See <7.5 Drilling> in [Introduction] of the Instruction Manual (Optional).
Specifying a dwell command suspends the machine for the number of seconds specified by U or P that
follows "G04" before executing the next block after executing the command in the previous block.
The dwell function starts after the axis feed speed specified in the preceding block becomes zero.

 Command format
G04 U Pause dwell (indicates the unit of seconds.)
or
G04 P (For address P, no decimal point can be used.)
The maximum command time is 9999.999 seconds.

 Sample program
For a dwell command of 2.5 seconds, the command format is as follows:
G04 U2.5 (2.5 sec)
or
G04 P2500 (2500 msec)

12-52
 L32

12.5.6 Exact stop check (G09)

Use this command when higher precision in edge processing is required. If the Exact stop check is enabled (ON), cutting
feed proceeds to the next block after confirming the speed is completely decelerated. Thus, the desired edge precision
can be obtained.

 Command format
G09 Exact stop check ON

 Sample program
$1
:
T0200 (Front turning)
G0 X11.0 Z-1.0 T02
X6.0
G09 G1 Z0 F0.05
G09 X7.0
G09 X8.0 Z0.5 F0.03
G09 Z10.0 F0.05
G09 X10.0
G0 X11.0 T00
:

 Note
• Exact stop check function is disabled (OFF) at power on.
• Exact stop check function is effective only when G1, G2, or G3 command is specified.
• Difference from the error detect function
The exact stop check function is enabled only in the block where G9 is specified. Meanwhile, the error detect ON
(M92) is enabled until the error detect OFF (M93) is specified.
• When the exact stop check function is enabled, the longer cycle time is required than that in disabled state because
the completion of cutting feed is prolonged.

12-53
L32

12.6 F Functions (F Codes) (Cutting Feed Rate)

12.6.1 Cutting feed rate (F)
The F code specifies the feed rate for linear or circular cutting.

 Command format
F Feed rate command
The cutting feed cannot be executed unless these F codes are specified.

 Description
• The feed rate given by the F command function maintains the current state (modal) until the next command is
specified.
(The cutting feed is executed by the F code used in the previous machining.)
• The feed rate is specified according to the cutting shape of "G01", "G02", and "G03" codes.
• There are 2 types of the feed rate.
• G98：mm/min (per minute feed : distance of the tool in mm per minute)
• G99：mm/rev (per revolution feed : distance of the tool in mm per spindle revolution)
• The G99 state is assumed when the power is turned on.
When switching the feed method from G99 to G98 in a block of G01 cutting block, the G code must come before the
F code.

 Sample program
G98 G01 X Z F

Per minute feed Per revolution feed

Description The feed distance of the tool in mm per The feed distance of the tool in mm per spindle
minute. revolution.
Designation and F F
address
Designated G code G98 G99
Input feed rate 1mm/min to 8000mm/min 0.001mm/rev to 999.999mm/rev
range
Override Both per minute feed and per rotation feed are fixed in 100%.
Feed rate changes by 0%, 1%, 3%, 5%, and in steps of 10% subsequently.

Estimation from G98 and G99

Determine the proper feed rate by tables of the cutting conditions.

12-54
 L32

12.7 M Functions (M Codes)

12.7.1 M codes table
M code Name Remarks Remarks
M00 Program stop Stops the automatic operation.
M01 Optional stop The automatic operation stops by pressing the switch.
M02* Cycle stop Stops the automatic operation in the 1 cycle mode.
M03 Main spindle forward rotation Starts the main spindle forward rotation. 12.7.2
M04 Main spindle reverse rotation Starts the main spindle reverse rotation. 12.7.2
M05 Main spindle stop Stops the main spindle rotation. 12.7.2
M06* Main spindle chuck close Closes the main spindle chuck. 12.7.7
M07* Main spindle chuck open Opens the main spindle chuck. 12.7.7
M08 Enable bar stock exchange Starts the automatic material replacement program. 13.2
program
M09 Completed bar stock exchange Completed bar stock exchange program 13.2
program
M10* Knock-out advance Advances the back spindle knock-out. 15.5
M11* Knock-out retract Returns the back spindle knock-out. 15.5
M15 Back spindle chuck close Closes back spindle chuck. 12.7.8
M16* Back spindle chuck open Opens back spindle chuck. 12.7.8
M18* Enable main spindle C axis A series of C-axis ON operations (M18C***) 14.2.3
M20 Main spindle indexing cancel Cancels main spindle indexing. In C-axis mode, the 14.2.1
excitation of main spindle is not canceled.
M23 Back spindle forward rotation Starts the back spindle forward rotation. 12.7.3
M24 Back spindle reverse rotation Starts the back spindle reverse rotation. 12.7.3
M25 Back spindle stop Stops the back spindle rotation. 12.7.3
M28* Main spindle indexing A series of spindle indexing operations (M28S***) 14.2.1
M31 Work conveyor ON Workpiece conveyor start ON 12.7.9
M33* Positioning to product separation Performs a series of axis feed operations. Axes move to 15.7
position the product separation position.
M34* A series of operations for product Performs a series of axis feed, chuck open, and knock-out 15.7
separation operations.
M48* Enable back spindle C axis Turns on the back spindle C axis for a series of 14.2.4
operations. (M48C***)
M50 Pick-off failure detect After a workpiece is cut off, the main spindle rotates at 15.12
low speed and the M50 command is executed.
M51* Tool breakage detection ON Starts cut-off tool break detection. 13.9
M52 Coolant ON Starts the coolant supply.
M53 Coolant OFF Stops the coolant supply.
M54 Turn off the bar loader torque. Stops the feeding of the pushrod. 13.3
M55* Start bar loader operation Starts the bar loader material replacement. 13.3
M56 Product count Starts the product count.
M61 to External M code Used when optional function is added.
M65
M72 Back spindle air blow ON 15.4
M73 Back spindle air blow OFF 15.4
M77 Wait until spindle synchronization Waits for completion of synchronization of the main and 15.8
is completed. the back spindles.
M78* Back spindle indexing A series of back spindle indexing operation (M78S***) 14.2.2
M79 Back spindle indexing cancel Cancels back spindle indexing. While in C-axis mode, 14.2.2
does not cancel the excitation of the back spindle.
M80 Rotary tool on gang tool post Rotates the rotary tool on gang tool post in forward 12.7.4
forward rotation direction.
M81 Rotary tool on gang tool post Rotates the rotary tool on gang tool post in reverse 12.7.4
reverse rotation direction.
M82 Rotary tool on gang tool post stops Stops the rotation of the rotary tool on gang tool post. 12.7.4
rotation
M83 Front rotary tool on opposite tool Rotates the rotary tool on opposite tool post in forward 12.7.6
post forward rotation direction.
M84 Front rotary tool on opposite tool Rotates the rotary tool on opposite tool post in reverse 12.7.6
post reverse rotation direction.

12-55
L32

M code Name Remarks Remarks

M85 Front rotary tool on opposite tool Stops thhe rotation of the rotary tool on opposite tool 12.7.6
post stop post.
M86 Cutting start interlock enabled Cutting is not starting until spindle speed reaches the 13.27
specified value.
M87 Cutting start interlock disabled Starts the cutting regardless of spindle speed. 13.27
M88 Interference check OFF Disables interference check. 12.7.13
M89 Interference check ON Enables interference check. 12.7.13
M92 Error detect ON Turns error detection on (for higher precision in edge 13.28
processing).
M93 Error detect OFF Error detect OFF 13.28
M94 Back spindle speed fluctuation 13.6
detection ON
M95 Back spindle speed fluctuation 13.6
detection OFF
M96 Main spindle speed fluctuation Enables abnormal rotation detection of the main spindle. 13.6
detection ON
M97 Main spindle speed fluctuation Disables abnormal rotation detection of the main spindle. 13.6
detection OFF
M98 Call sub-program Calls a subprogram. 13.5
M99 Return to main program Be sure to insert this code at the ends of the main program 13.5
and subprograms.
M108* Sequential operation of bar Sequential operation of bar material replacement 13.4.1
material replacement
M110 Workpiece hand air blow ON
M111 Workpiece hand air blow OFF
M116 The workpiece hand is closed
M117 The workpiece hand opens
M122 Back spindle torque limit L 15.16
selection (25%)
M123 Back spindle torque limit H 15.16
selection (50%)
M124 Back spindle torque limit OFF 15.16
(100%)
M140* Opposite tool post advance Advances the opposite tool post. 12.7.10
M141* Opposite tool post retract Retracts the opposite tool post. 12.7.10
M151* Gang tool post retract Moves the gang tool post X1 axis to the return position. 12.7.11
M180 Back rotary tool forward rotation Starts the back rotary tool forward rotation. 12.7.5
M181 Back rotary tool reverse rotation Starts the back rotary tool reverse rotation. 12.7.5
M182 Back tool spindle stop Stops the back rotary tool rotation. 12.7.5
M190* C1-C2 superimpose ON 15.9
M191* C1-C2 superimpose OFF 15.9
M204 Thread cutting chamfering ON 12.7.12
M205 Thread cutting chamfering OFF 12.7.12
M211* Mirror image ON X (Motor Y1 axis) 14.9.7
M212* Mirror image OFF X (Motor Y1 axis) 14.9.7
M238* Optional block skip 13.45
M239* Back machining program skip 15.18
M260 to External M code relay ON/OFF
M269
M320* Move basket forward 15.6.1
M334* Product unloader performs a series 15.6.1
of operations
M335* Product unloader command 15.6.1
M350* Rapid feed rate setting ON 13.26
M351* Rapid Feed Rate Setting OFF 13.26
M360* Rapid Feed 13.24
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
Constant Setting ON

12-56
 L32

M code Name Remarks Remarks

M361* Rapid Feed 13.24
Acceleration/Deceleration Time
Constant Setting OFF
M430 Coolant Valve 1 ON 13.25
M431 Coolant Valve 1 OFF 13.25
M432 Coolant Valve 2 ON 13.25
M433 Coolant Valve 2 OFF 13.25
M434 Coolant Valve 3 ON 13.25
M435 Coolant Valve 3 OFF 13.25
M436 Coolant Valve 4 ON 13.25
M437 Coolant Valve 4 OFF 13.25
M452 Medium-/high-pressure coolant 13.25
pump ON
M453 Medium-/high-pressure coolant 13.25
pump OFF
M458 Supply pump ON 13.25
M459 Supply pump OFF 13.25
M780* Back spindle zero point indexing (Available when a basket is used; executable only in MDI 15.6.4
mode)

[Note]
• The M codes marked with an asterisk (*) used macros.
• Specify these macro M codes alone.
Do not specify these codes along with any other code in the same block.
• If the M code belonging to the same group is specified in the same block, the later one becomes effective.
• Specifying any unused M code causes an alarm to occur.

12-57
L32

12.7.2 Main spindle rotation and stop (M03, M04, M05)

These codes are used for rotating (forward and reverse) and stopping of the main spindle.
The forward rotation in this case means the counterclockwise rotation toward the spindle.
To stop the rotation of the spindle, you can also use the Spindle stop key on the operation panel.

 Command format
M03 S1= Main spindle forward rotation
M04 S1= Main spindle reverse rotation
M05 Main spindle stop

 Description
The spindle speed changes when only "S1= " is specified during the rotation of the main spindle.

12-58
 L32

12.7.3 Back spindle rotation and stop (M23, M24, M25)

These codes are used for rotating (forward and reverse) and stopping of the back spindle.
The forward rotation in this case means the counterclockwise rotation toward the back spindle.
To stop the rotation of the back spindle, you can also use the Spindle stop key on the operation panel.

 Command format
M23 S2= Starts the back spindle forward rotation
M24 S2= Starts the back spindle reverse rotation
M25 Stops the back spindle rotation

 Description
The spindle speed changes when only an "S2= " is specified during the rotation of the back spindle.

 Note
A workpiece receiver box may have been mounted when the back spindle chuck is opened. Therefore, the back spindle
speed is limited to 100 min–1 (maximum).
The back spindle rotates only at 100 min–1 even if M23 S2 = 2000 is specified.
If any of the following command has been specified, however, the spindle speed limit is released, regarding that the
workpiece receiver box has been rarely mounted.
• Tool selecting commands T3000, T3100, T5100
• T0100 with K2 argument
• M15
• G650

12-59
L32

12.7.4 Rotary tool on gang tool post rotation and stop (M80, M81, M82)
These codes are used for rotating (forward and reverse) and stopping of the rotary tool in a secondary process.
The forward rotation in this case means the counterclockwise rotation toward the rotary tool.
To stop the rotation of the rotary tool, you can also use the Spindle stop key on the operation panel.

 Command format
M80 S3= Rotary tool on gang tool post forward rotation
M81 S3= Rotary tool on gang tool post reverse rotation
M82 Rotary tool on gang tool post stops rotation

 Description
The spindle speed changes when only an "S3= " is specified during the rotation of the rotary tool.
Maximum spindle speed is 6000 min–1 (4500 min–1)
( ) The value in parenthesis indicates the rated spindle speed.

If the speed exceeds the rated value, the motor may be overloaded. Reduce the speed to machine the
workpieces. Machining the workpieces without reducing the speed may damage machine components
such as the motor and gears.

 Note
• The G99 (feed per revolution) mode cannot be used. A feed command must be specified in the G98 (feed per
minute) mode.
• See <14.5 Automatic Control of Rotation Direction of Rotary Tool>. The rotation direction of rotary tool may
change depending on tool layout or the selected tool number.

12-60
 L32

12.7.5 Rotary tool on back tool post rotation and stop (M180, M181, M182)
This back tool post rotates the rotary tool of the back tool post, enabling eccentric drilling with a drill and end mill. The
device can accept a standard drill sleeve using a sleeve adapter.
These codes are used for rotating (forward and reverse) and stopping of the rotary tool in a back machining.
The forward rotation in this case means the counterclockwise rotation toward the back rotary tool.
To stop the rotation of the rotary tool, you can also use the Spindle stop key on the operation panel.

 Command format
M180 S5= Back rotary tool forward rotation
M181 S5= Back rotary tool reverse rotation
M182 Back rotary tool stop

 Description
The spindle speed changes when only an "S5= " is specified after the M180 and M181 codes.
Maximum spindle speed is 6000min–1 (3000min–1. ( ) The value in parenthesis indicates the rated spindle speed.

If the speed exceeds the rated value, the motor may be overloaded. Reduce the speed to machine the
workpieces. Machining the workpieces without reducing the speed may damage machine components
such as the motor and gears.

 Note
• If you operate the machine in the state in which the end face drilling spindle of the back machining rotary tool is
dismounted, use the sleeve adapter or the cap provided as an accessory to close the hole in order to prevent oil from
going inside.
• The G99 (feed per revolution) mode cannot be used. A feed command must be specified in the G98 (feed per
minute) mode.
• See <14.5 Automatic Control of Rotation Direction of Rotary Tool>. The rotation direction of rotary tool may
change depending on tool layout or the selected tool number.

12-61
L32

12.7.6 Front rotary tool on opposite tool post rotation and stop (M83, M84, M85)
These codes are used for rotating (forward and reverse) and stopping of the rotary tool on the opposite tool post in
secondary machining.
The forward rotation in this case means the counterclockwise rotation toward the rotary tool.
To stop the rotation of the rotary tool, you can also use the Spindle stop key on the operation panel.

 Command format
M83 S4= Front rotary tool on opposite tool post forward rotation
M84 S4= Front rotary tool on opposite tool post reverse rotation
M85 Front rotary tool on opposite tool post stop

 Description
• The spindle speed changes when only an "S4= " is specified after the M83 and M84 codes.
• Maximum spindle speed is 6000min (3000 min . ( ) The value in parenthesis indicates the rated spindle speed.
–1 –1

If the speed exceeds the rated value, the motor may be overloaded. Reduce the speed to machine the
workpieces.
Machining the workpieces without reducing the speed may damage the machine components such as
motor and gears.

 Note
• If you operate the machine in the state in which the end face drilling spindle of the front rotary tool is dismounted,
use the sleeve adapter or the cap provided as an accessory to close the hole in order to prevent oil from going inside.
• The G99 (feed per revolution) mode cannot be used. A feed command must be specified in the G98 (feed per
minute) mode.
• Refer to <14.5 Automatic Control of Rotation Direction of Rotary Tool>. The rotation direction of rotary tool may
change depending on tool layout or the selected tool number.

12-62
 L32

12.7.7 Spindle chuck open and close (M06, M07)

These codes open and close the chuck built in the spindle.
Using the codes can allows the chuck to clamp the material to transfer the spindle rotation to the material.

 Command format
M06 Main spindle chuck close
M07 Main spindle chuck open

Macro operation
M06 Closes the spindle chuck.
Starts synchronization control between the Z1 axis and the A7 axis (bar loader).
M07 Checks the spindle status and opens the spindle chuck when the spindle speed is lowered to the
specified speed or less.
The specified spindle speed is set by the parameter. (Standard: 300min–1)
Stops synchronization control between the Z1 axis and the A7 axis (bar loader) and starts constant
torque control.

12.7.8 Back spindle chuck open and close (M15, M16)

These codes open and close the chuck built in the back spindle.
Using the codes allows the chuck to clamp the material to transfer the back spindle rotation to the material.

 Command format
M15 Back spindle chuck close
M16 Back spindle chuck open

Macro operation
M15 Closes the back spindle chuck.
M16 Opens the back spindle chuck.
If M16 is specified while the back spindle is in speed acceleration/deceleration mode, the chuck
starts to open when the back spindle stops or reaches the defined speed.

12-63
L32

12.7.9 Workpiece conveyor start (M31)

This code sends the products collected from the workpiece chute on workpiece conveyor, to the outside of the machine.

 Command format
M31 Work conveyor ON

 Operations
The workpiece conveyor operates for 14 seconds.

 Setting
To change or set the workpiece conveyor operating time, follow the steps below.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Maintenance key .

2. Press the menu key [I/F Diag].

3. Input "1001/M" and press the Input key .

4. Press the Parameter key.

5. Press the menu key [Menu SEL] repeatedly until [PLC-Data] item is displayed in the lower row of the menu
display.
6. Press the menu key [PLC-Data].
The PLC CONSTANT TIMER PARAMETERS screen is displayed.
7. Move the cursor to No. 18016 by pressing the cursor move keys.
8. Enter the workpiece conveyor operating time.。
Example: To set 15 seconds → Enter "150".
9. Press the Input key.
The entered time is set.
10. Turn off and on the power to the operation panel.
 Note
• The M31 command is valid only when the workpiece conveyor switch operates intermittently.
• The M31 command is included in M34 command.

12-64
 L32

12.7.10 Opposite tool post advance and return (M140, M141)

Using M codes, opposite tool post front drilling tools (T21 to T24) can be advanced or returned. These M
codes are used to return the workpiece separator in the workpiece collection mode (with workpiece receiver box).

 Command format
M140 W Z M1 Opposite tool post advance
M141 W Z Opposite tool post retract

 Argument
M140
W ： Change the forward end position of the opposite tool post. Specify the difference from the
forward end position of 377.0 in the Z2 axis machine coordinate. If this W argument is set to –
10.0, the Z2 axis is positioned at 367.0 in the Z2 axis machine coordinate. If the argument is
omitted, the Z2 axis is positioned at 377.0 in the Z2 axis machine coordinate.
Z ： Change the forward end position of the opposite tool post. The opposite tool post moves to the
reference position of front workpiece end face (Z1 axis coordinate system). If the argument is
omitted, the Z2 axis is positioned at 377.0 in the Z2 axis machine coordinate.
M1 ： Ignores an alarm message "EX737 S2 cover may interfere with back cross-machining holder".
M141
W ： Change the return position of the opposite tool post. Specify the difference from the return
position of 45.0 mm (type VIII, IX), 0.0 mm (type X, XII) in the Z2 axis machine coordinates.
If this W argument is set to 10.0, the Z2 axis is positioned at 55. 0mm (type Ⅷ, Ⅸ), 10.00 mm
(type Ⅹ, Ⅻ) in the Z2 axis machine coordinate.
If the argument is omitted, the Z2 axis is positioned at 45.0 mm (type Ⅷ, Ⅸ), 0.0 mm (type
Ⅹ, Ⅻ)) in the Z2 axis machine coordinate.
Z ： Change the return position of the opposite tool post. The opposite tool post moves to the
reference position of front workpiece end face (Z1 axis coordinate system). If the argument is
omitted, the Z2 axis is positioned at 55.0 mm (type Ⅷ, Ⅸ), 10.0 mm (type Ⅹ, Ⅻ)) in the Z2
axis machine coordinates.

M140 and M141 commands are enabled on $1 after tools (T21 to T24) are specified.

12-65
L32

If W or Z argument is omitted in the M140 command, the Z2 axis moves to the position of 377.0 in the Z2
axis machine coordinate.

The tool set to the standard position is positioned as shown below by this code.

As shown in the figure above, the drill that was set without being shifted strikes against the material end face of Z = 0.
Therefore, the end face is moved to Z = –0.5 so as to advance the tool as shown below.

 Sample program
($1)
G0 Z-0.5
G610
T2200
M140

Using the M140 W command, position the opposite tool post Z2 axis.

12-66
 L32

The tool returns to the machine zero point of the Z2 axis by the M141 code.

 Note
• W positioning is performed at the standard set position of the opposite tool post. Therefore, the positioning
point of shifted tool must be set in axis control group 1 again by the G50 code.
• If T21 to T24 code is specified after M140 code, the tool selection is performed without retracting the
opposite tool post.
Pay attention to the interference with the material.
• If T31 to T39 code is specified before M140 code, the M140 code causes no operation to be performed
(resulting in an alarm).
• The M141 code can also be used to return the workpiece separator advanced by the M320 command (in the
workpiece receiver box collection mode).
12.7.11 Gang tool post retraction (M151)
The M151 command moves the gang tool post (X1 axis) to the return position.

 Command format
M151 Gang tool post retract

 Axis control group

$1

 Sample program
$1
G600
T0200
:
M151 ................... Gang tool post retract
:

 Note
• The gang tool post X1 axis cannot be specified after the M151 command is executed. To specify the X1 axis again,
specify the machining pattern.
• When M151 is specified, the offset for X1 axis is canceled.

12-67
L32

12.7.12 Thread Cutting Chamfering ON/OFF (M204, M205)

Chamfering in thread cutting operation is turned ON/OFF using the setting switch No. 17. However, M codes can also
be used for this purpose.

 Command format
M204 Chamfering ON
M205 Chamfering OFF

 Description
Turning thread cutting chamfering ON with the setting switch

Turning thread cutting chamfering OFF with the setting switch

By specifying the chamfering ON/OFF M code, chamfering can be turned ON and OFF disregarding the setting of the
switch

12-68
 L32

 Sample program
M3 S1=
T300
M205 ............................................ Chamfering OFF
G50 W–2.0
G0 X8.0 Z–2.0 T
G92 X5.5 Z12.0 F1.0
X5.06
:
G0 X12.0 Z–2.0
G50 W2.0
M204 ............................................ Chamfering ON
:
M3 S1=
T300
G50 W–2.0
G0 X13.0 Z13.0 T
G92 X10.56 Z20.0 F0.1
X10.26
:
G0 X13.0

 Note
See <13.18 Thread Cycle Canned Cycle (G92) >.

12-69
L32

12.7.13 Interference check function (M88, M89)

The interference check function checks position data specified in Machining Data and Machine Structure screen to
prevent machine components such as the tool post, back headstock, and product separation parts from interfering with
other parts or workpieces as possible. This function raises an alarm if it detects an interference.
The interference check function is turned on usually when the power supply is turned on.
If the interference check function is disabled using the setting switch or by specifying the interference check OFF M
code in the program, confirm that interference does not occur and perform the operation very carefully. Enable the
interference check function as long as possible.

 Command format
M88 Interference check disabled
M89 Interference check enabled

 Components to be checked
• Guide bushing
• Gang tool post
The data depends on setting of "Front Mach Holder Name" in Machining Data.
• Back spindle including opposite tool post
The data depends on setting of "Front Drill Holder Name" in Machining Data.
• Product collection box including back spindle
The data depends on setting of "Back Drill Holder Name", "Back Spindle", and "Back work extend length" in
Machining Data.

 Note
• The interference check function assumes the typical settings for use under standard conditions. Note, therefore, that
the function cannot check interferences when the machine is used under special conditions.
• The interference area cannot be set correctly if an incorrect holder or settings have been selected.
• If you run the machine with this function disabled by the program, check all the relevant parts in advance and use
meticulous care.
• When the back spindle is being used in the workpiece receiver box collection mode, the interference check applies to
the workpiece receiver box.

12-70
 L32

12.8 S Function (S Codes) (Spindle Speed Commands)

The S functions specified in the following format are also called rotation functions. These are used to specify the main
spindle, back spindle, rotary tool speeds.

 Command format
S1 =  Main spindle 4-digit command
S2 =  Back Spindle 4-digit command
S3 =  Rotary tool on gang tool
post
S4 =  Front rotary tool on opposite
tool post
S5 =  Rotary tool on back tool post

The spindle speed is calculated from the following formula and rounded up to the nearest whole number.
N： Speed (min–1)

V： Cutting speed (m/min)

D： Material diameter (mm), or hole diameter for drilling
π： Circular constant (approx. 3.14)

 Specification Ranges
Axis Spindle Speed
control
group
S1 Main spindle 200 to 8000min-1
S2 Back Spindle 200 to 8000min-1
S3 Rotary tool on gang tool post 200 to 6000 (4500) min-1
S4 Front rotary tool on opposite tool 200 to 6000 (3000) min-1
post
S5 Rotary tool on back tool post 200 to 6000 (3000) min-1

( ) The value in parenthesis indicates the rated spindle speed. If the speed exceeds the rated value, the
motor may be overloaded. Reduce the speed to machine the workpieces.
Machining the workpieces without reducing the speed may damage the machine components such as
motor and gears.

12-71
L32

12.9 Queuing Function between Axis Control Groups "!"

 Command format
! L Queuing between multi axis control group programs

 Argument
!: Enter the queuing axis control group number. (1 or 2).
L： Enter the queuing number. (0 to 8999)
The queuing function enables specific parts of programs of two axis control groups ($1 and $2) to be executed
simultaneously.
If the number is entered incorrectly, the program cannot advance in the queuing state.

 Sample program
Example of multi-axis control group queuing command
O

12-72
 L32

(Blank Page)

12-73
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 2E1-1203
Mfg. No. L32/0480～
Issue Date 2016.12

12-74
 13. Sample Programming [Advanced]
13.1 Tool Position Offset ................................................................................................................................. 13-3
13.1.1 Examples of offset specification ........................................................................................................ 13-4
13.1.1.1 Outer diameter machining ........................................................................................................... 13-4
13.1.1.2 Face drilling (with a drill or tap) .................................................................................................... 13-5
13.1.1.3 Cutting-off .................................................................................................................................... 13-6
13.2 Bar Feed Program Enable/Terminate (M08, M09) .................................................................................. 13-7
13.3 Bar Feed (M54, M55) .............................................................................................................................. 13-8
13.4 Automatic Bar Feeder ............................................................................................................................. 13-9
13.4.1 M108 (Material change using an argument) ...................................................................................... 13-9
13.4.2 General-purpose material change program (by user program) ....................................................... 13-17
13.5 Subprogram (M98)................................................................................................................................ 13-20
13.5.1 Subprogram call instruction ............................................................................................................. 13-20
13.5.2 Calling a subprogram from the main program ................................................................................. 13-20
13.5.3 Example of using a subprogram...................................................................................................... 13-21
13.6 Spindle Speed Change Detection Function (M94, M95, M96, M97) ..................................................... 13-23
13.7 Constant Surface Speed Control (G96, G97) ....................................................................................... 13-24
13.8 Tool Nose Radius Compensation Function ........................................................................................... 13-26
13.8.1 Tools subject to tool nose radius compensation and virtual tool nose numbers .............................. 13-27
13.8.2 Basic pattern of tool nose radius compensation G code ................................................................. 13-28
13.9 Cut-off Tool Breakage Detection (M51) ................................................................................................. 13-31
13.10 Corner Chamfering / Corner R .............................................................................................................. 13-34
13.11 Thread Cutting (Equal Pitch Thread Cutting and Continuous Thread Cutting) (G32) .......................... 13-36
13.12 Longitudinal Cut-Off Cycle (G75) .......................................................................................................... 13-38
13.13 Deep Hole Drilling Cycle 2 (G79, G80) ................................................................................................. 13-40
13.14 Synchronous Tapping Functions (G88, G84, G80) ............................................................................... 13-42
13.14.1 Synchronous tapping for outer circumference with a rotary tool (G88 and G80)............................. 13-42
13.14.2 Synchronous tapping for the end face of a workpiece with a rotary tool (G84, G80)....................... 13-44
13.14.3 Synchronous tapping for the center of the end face of a workpiece (main or back) (G84, G80) ..... 13-46
13.14.4 Continuously synchronous tapping ................................................................................................. 13-48
13.15 Arc Threading (G35, G36) .................................................................................................................... 13-50
13.16 Differential Speed Rotary Tool Function (G164) ................................................................................... 13-52
13.17 Canned Cycle Longitudinal Machining (G90)........................................................................................ 13-55
13.17.1 Straight cutting cycle ....................................................................................................................... 13-56
13.17.2 Taper cutting cycle .......................................................................................................................... 13-57
13.18 Thread Cycle Canned Cycle (G92) ....................................................................................................... 13-58
13.19 Link-Thread Machining ......................................................................................................................... 13-62
13.20 Multi-thread Screw Cutting.................................................................................................................... 13-65
13.21 Machine Coordinate System Command (G53) ..................................................................................... 13-67
13.22 Y-axis Holder ........................................................................................................................................ 13-68
13.23 Multi-piece Machining ........................................................................................................................... 13-70
13.24 Rapid Feed Acceleration/Deceleration Time Constant Setting ON/OFF (M360/M361) ......................... 13-72
13.25 Medium-/High-pressure Coolant Device ............................................................................................... 13-74
13.26 Rapid Feed Rate Setting ON/OFF (M350/M351) .................................................................................. 13-76
13.27 Cutting Start Interlock Enabled/Disabled (M86, M87) ........................................................................... 13-77
13.28 Error Detect ON/OFF (M92, M93)......................................................................................................... 13-78

13-1
 13.29 Start Position Queuing (Type 1) (G115) ................................................................................................ 13-79
13.30 Start Position Queuing (Type 2) (G116) ................................................................................................ 13-80
13.31 Auxiliary Function Output during Axis Feed (G117) .............................................................................. 13-81
13.32 Arbitrary Axis Change (G140) ............................................................................................................... 13-82
13.33 End Position Specified Queuing (G149) ............................................................................................... 13-83
13.34 Arbitrary Axes Superimposition (G156)................................................................................................. 13-84
13.35 Line Angle Command ........................................................................................................................... 13-85
13.36 Geometric Command ............................................................................................................................ 13-87
13.37 Free Tool Layout Pattern (Holder Name = Free Tool) ........................................................................... 13-88
13.38 User Macro Program (Program Call by G code) ................................................................................... 13-89
13.39 User Macro Date Adding Function ........................................................................................................ 13-90
13.40 DPRINT Function (POPEN, PCLOS, BPRNT, DPRNT) ........................................................................ 13-91
13.41 External Memory Program Operation Function..................................................................................... 13-92
13.42 Collision Detection Function ................................................................................................................. 13-93
13.43 Optional Block Skip ............................................................................................................................... 13-94
13.43.1 Expansion of the optional block skip function .................................................................................. 13-94
13.43.2 Optional block skip M code (M238) ................................................................................................. 13-96
13.44 Thermal Displacement Correction Function .......................................................................................... 13-98
13.44.1 Environmental requirements and restrictions on use ...................................................................... 13-98
13.44.2 Setting thermal displacement correction function ............................................................................ 13-99
13.45 B Code I/F (MB) .................................................................................................................................. 13-100
13.46 Simultaneous Machining ..................................................................................................................... 13-101
13.46.1 Inner/outer diameter simultaneous machining............................................................................... 13-101
13.46.1.1 Outer diameter cutting and drilling simultaneous machining ................................................... 13-102
13.46.1.2 Outer/Inner diameter simultaneous machining (boring) ........................................................... 13-103
13.47 ø38 Specification (Option) Tooling Restrictions .................................................................................. 13-104
13.48 Loader device ..................................................................................................................................... 13-105
13.48.1 Workpiece loading operations (M42) ............................................................................................. 13-105
13.48.2 Workpiece loading preparations (M42).......................................................................................... 13-109
13.48.3 Loader advance, retract (M221, M222) ......................................................................................... 13-110
13.48.4 Loader arm advance, retract (M223, M224) .................................................................................. 13-110
13.48.5 The loader hand opens and closes. (M225, M226) ....................................................................... 13-111
13.48.6 Shutter open, close (M227, M228) ................................................................................................ 13-111
13.48.7 Back spindle air blow On, Off (M229, M230) ................................................................................. 13-111
13.48.8 Front spindle headstock moves to the return position, start tool positioning (G698) ..................... 13-112

13-2
 L32

13.1 Tool Position Offset

This function compensates for the difference between actually machined dimensions and dimensions on the drawing.
Coordinates on the program need not be changed. If a difference is entered in advance, dimensions are automatically
corrected. Before this automatic correction can be made, an instrument for giving the difference must be provided.

 Command format
Tool selection and offset specification at the same T (4 digits)
time:
When only compensation value is given after tool T (2 digits)
selection:

 Description
• An offset command T is given with a two-digit number.
• T (4 digits):
Tool selection and offset specification (only for the diameter direction) are given at the same time.
The first two digits are a tool number and the last two digits are an offset number.
• T (2 digits):
When the tool has already been selected, this format is used to give or change an offset value without changing
the tool. (Generally, the two-digit format is used.)
• Actual offset values are entered by the machine operator. The programmer gives offset numbers at places where
coordinate correction seems necessary on the program. Generally, the following positions require an offset:
• At the time of tool selection and positioning
• At each step
• At the beginning of longitudinal feed for end-face drilling or tapping
• The current offset remains in effect until the next tool selection command or another tool offset command comes.
• Any offset can be canceled by a T00. Cancellation is needed when:
• The machine returns to the start point because cutting-off is completed.
• The machine returns in the longitudinal direction after end-face drilling or tapping.
• Offset values are modal.
• The available offset numbers are 01 to 40. 41 through 80 are optional.
• When a T (4-digit) command is given, the machine moves to the position calculated with the offset value
included (only in the diameter direction) . If a
T (2-digit) command is given, the offset will be in effect when the next X and Z command is
given.

13-3
L32

13.1.1 Examples of offset specification

13.1.1.1 Outer diameter machining
 Outline of machining

 Sample program
N0112 T0200
G00 X4.0 Z–0.5T01 ...................... An offset command is given in a block which brings the tool close to the
workpiece at the rapid feed rate.
(an offset for the dimension of a 6.0 mm diameter).
G01 X6.0 Z0.5 F0.03
Z15.0
X7.0 T02 ....................................... If steps are involved, an offset is specified for each step.
(an offset for the dimension of an 8.0 mm diameter)
X8.0 Z15.5
Z22.0

 Note
Assumes that offset values of T01 and T02 on Z axis are the same.
If not, chamfering angle of the next block may get out of position. In some cases, it is required to enter the offset value of
T02 in the preceding block, and add Z-axis offset T03 in the block containing Z22.0.

13-4
 L32

13.1.1.2 Face drilling (with a drill or tap)

 Outline of machining

 Sample program
N0323 T2300
G00 Z–0.5
G01 Z15.0 F0.08T13 .................... Specifies offset value to correct the drill depth.
G00 Z–0.5T00 .............................. Offset cancel (required at the time of return)

13-5
L32

13.1.1.3 Cutting-off
 Outline of machining

 Sample program
N0401 T0100
G00 X21.0 Z22.0T01 .................... The product length is decided by the Z axis direction offset.
G650
!2 L1
G01 X–3.0 F0.02
G600
M05
M07
G00 X–3.0 Z0 T00 ........................ Offset cancel.
Always specify this command when returning the spindle to the start position.
If it is not specified, the position in the longitudinal direction will shift in every
workpiece separation, and it finally causes a Z axis over-travel error.
M56
G999
N999
M02
%

13-6
 L32

13.2 Bar Feed Program Enable/Terminate (M08, M09)

These codes enable and terminate a bar changing program. The commands in the block (= bar changing program)
enclosed between M08 and M09 are executed when the material shortage signal is received. They are otherwise skipped.
(A block skip symbol "/" is used.)
The bar changing program is inserted between the cut-off and end processes.

 Command format
Bar feed program enable/terminate
M08 Enable the bar changing program
M09 Terminate the bar changing program

 Sample program

 Note
• The M08 and M09 codes can be specified for both axis control groups.
• While synchronizing with the main spindle, be sure to specify G113 to cancel the spindle synchronous control mode
before executing bar change.

13-7
L32

13.3 Bar Feed (M54, M55)

These codes are used to operate the bar loader.

 Command format
Bar feed
M54 Turn off the bar loader torque
M55 Start the bar loader
The bar loader performs the following operations:

 Actions of M55 (Synchronous bar loader)

13-8
 L32

13.4 Automatic Bar Feeder

When removing the residual material or supplying material using the automatic bar feeder unit, the following process
must be inserted between the cut-off process and the ending process.
13.4.1 M108 (Material change using an argument)
Using an argument with the M code allows you to change material without having to write a program.

 Command format
M108 U C D B S W F A R1 K1 M1 T E1 X
I

 Argument
U Movement of the X axis for deburring (in mm dia.). With no argument specified, this point is set at the
point "Tool Positioning Point (DIA)" in the machining data. Specify the value with decimal point.
C Feedrate to position the deburring point (mm/min). With no argument specified, the feedrate is 150.0
mm/min. Specify the value with decimal point.
D Movement of Z axis for deburring (mm). With no argument specified, deburring is not performed.
B Movement of X axis for deburring (in mm dia.). With no argument specified, deburring is not performed.
S Spindle speed at withdrawing the residual material and inserting the material (min–1). With no argument
specified, the spindle speed is 300 min–1. If the specified value exceeds 300min–1, the spindle speed is
clamped at 300min–1.
W Movement of spindle at withdrawing the residual material and inserting the material (mm). With no
argument specified, movement is 30.0mm.
F Feed rate (per minute) of the headstock (Z1 axis) when withdrawing the residual material and inserting the
material. With no argument specified, feed rate is 3000.0 mm/min. Specify the value with decimal point.
A Dwell time after the spindle is chucked (second). With no argument specified, the dwell time is 2 seconds.
R1 Specify this argument to rotate the spindle during changing material. Omitted: The spindle stops. 1: The
spindle rotates.
K1 Specify this argument to stop supplying coolant before unloading the material. When omitted, the
supplying coolant is stopped.
T Dwell time (second) after tuning the coolant on. With no argument specified, the dwell time is 3.0 seconds.
Specify the value with decimal point.
E1 When a cut-off tool break detection unit is used, it detects whether the material has been advanced to the
short-cut position when new material is inserted. If the detection unit comes into contact with the material,
it will determine that it is at the normal shortcut position and will proceed to the next block. If the argument
is omitted, detection is not performed. When an R1 argument is specified, the main spindle will stop to
perform detection.
X When an E1 argument is specified, specify the positioning (X1 axis work coordinate) of the cut-off tool
break detection unit. If the argument is omitted, the tool moves to the positioning point. In usual case, this
argument is not required. Specify this argument only when the cut-off tool breakage detector cannot reach
the workpiece. (Equivalent to the X argument of cut-off Tool Breakage Detection (M51)) When the E1
argument is specified, this argument is ignored.
I This is a CAV specific argument.
During inching of non-conformed materials, adjust the torque value (%) to suit the type of material and its
diameter. For details, refer to the CAV instruction manual.

13-9
L32

 Sample program 1
All arguments necessary are input.
Preparation process
M09
↓
Machining Process
↓
T0100
G00 X Z T
G650
!2 L1
G01 X–3.0 F0.02
G600
M08
M08
/M108 U1.0 C150.0 D1.5 B3.0 S800 W30.0 F3000.0 A3.0 R1 K1 M1 T3.0 E1 X
M09
M05
M07
G00 X–3.0 Z0 T00
M56
%

 Sample program 2
Chamfering of residual material is not performed.
M108 S800 W30.0 F3000.0 A3.0 R1 T3.0

13-10
 L32

 M108 Material Change Flow

[Motion sequence]
1. The material shortage signal is issued from the bar feeder unit.
2. Cutting-off process is terminated at cutting-off end position in the machining data. ...Fig. (a)
3. Read the program Material Exchange (M108).
4. The spindle rotates at the "Cut-off Speed" in the machining data.
5. The tool moves to the "Bar Stock O.D." (machining data) + "U argument value" position at the feed rate specified
by the C argument. ... Fig. (b)
6. The Z axis advances by the distance specified by the D argument. ... Fig. (c)
7. The residual material is chamfered according to the values specified by the D and B arguments at the "Cut-off
Feed" in the machining data. ... Fig. (d)
8. If the K1 argument is omitted, Coolant OFF and Stop Medium-pressure Coolant Pump commands are issued.
9. The spindle speed is changed to the speed specified by the S argument.
10. The "Tool Positioning Point" in the machining data is shifted by the value specified by the W argument and at the
same time the residual material is withdrawn from the guide bushing at the feed rate specified by the F argument. ...
Fig. (e)
11. The spindle stops or keeps rotating according to the setting at the R argument.
12. Feed torque of the bar loader is turned off.
13. The main spindle chuck opens.
14. Bar stock is exchanged.
(The residual material is brought to the retraction end of the bar loader and withdrawn by the finger chuck. The
new bar stock is taken from the rack and inserted into the finger chuck. The bar loader pushes the bar stock up to
the position set at the bar loader.) The bar stock exchange completed signal is returned from the bar loader to the
machine.
15. The main spindle chuck closes.
16. The machine dwells for the period specified by the A argument.
17. The main spindle rotates at the speed specified by the S argument.
18. If the M1 argument is specified, phase adjustment of guide bushing is performed.
19. The bar stock is inserted into the guide bushing by the amount specified by the W argument. The bar stock is then
fed forward by the front end cut length at the feed rate specified by the F argument.
20. If the E1 argument is specified,
- The main spindle will stop. (Only when an R1 argument is specified)
- When a cut-off tool break detection unit is used, it detects whether the material has been advanced to the
short-cut position when new material is inserted. If the detection unit comes into contact with the material, it will
determine that it is at the normal shortcut position and will proceed to the next block. If it does not, it will generate
an alarm.
- The tip of the cut-off tool moves to the [material diameter+positioning point].
21. Specify (Coolant ON) and Stop Medium-pressure Coolant Pump commands.
22. The machine dwells for the period specified by the T argument.
23. The spindle speed is changed to the speed specified at the "Cut-Off Speed" in the machining data.
24. Cutting-off is performed up to the position specified at "Cut-Off End" in the machining data at the feed rate
specified at "Cut-Off Feed" in the machining data.
25. The Material Change OFF M code is read.
26. The M108 program ends.

13-11
L32

 Note
• When material change is specified according to Sample program 1, all steps from step 3 to step 25 are performed.
• When material change is specified according to Sample program 2, steps are performed from step 3 to step 25
omitting steps 4 to 7.
• Chamfering of the residual material is not performed unless arguments D and B are specified.
• Specify the material change operation (M108) in axis control group 1 ($1).
• In the material change operation (M108) commands, if "rotate (1)" is specified by spindle rotation selection (R
argument), the spindle speed is clamped at 300min–1 when a value larger than 300min–1 is specified for the spindle
speed (S argument) to be applied to residual material withdrawal and new bar stock insertion operation.

13-12
 L32

 Material change flow

Material change flow when cutting-off procedure is complete, change material using an automatic bar feeder is
performed in the following sequence illustrated. Chamfering of residual material can be performed as needed.

Perform chamfering of residual material (if necessary).

See (a) to (e) in the figure on the next page.
Chamfering is needed when the residual material is difficult to be withdrawn or may cause damage on the guide bushing
due to burrs generated.

13-13
L32

 Chamfering of residual workpiece

Figure (a)

• When the steps 6 through 12 are completed.

• The spindle rotates at the cutting-off speed specified in the machining data.
• The tool moves upward to the position (b) at the feedrate specified by an argument C.

Figure (b)

• The tool moves to the position of material outer diameter + value of argument U.

[Note]
The position described above is not the tool positioning point in the machining data. If 0 is specified for argument U, the
next material is fed to the point where the tool tip is positioned. So care must be taken.

13-14
 L32

Figure (c)

• The Z axis advances by the amount specified by the argument D at the feed rate specified by the argument C. (The
material protrudes from the guide bushing.)
• Chamfering of residual material is ready.

Figure (d)

• The tool moves downward from point (A) to (B), Z axis returns to the point specified by an argument D. Then the
chamfering of residual material can be performed.
• Use the B argument and the Z argument to specify moves, as required, in the X and Z axis direction, respectively.

13-15
L32

Figure (e)

• The tool moves to the position of material diameter +U argument value. At the same time, the residual material is
returned as specified by an argument W at the feedrate specified by an argument F.

13-16
 L32

13.4.2 General-purpose material change program (by user program)

The material change program prepared by the user can be stored as a subprogram and called and executed by specifying
M98.

 Command format
M98 P
P Material change program number (numbers only)
See <13.5 Subprogram (M98)> for details of M98.

 Sample program 1 (GB specification)

13-17
L32

 Sample program 2 (GBL specification)

Material change after cut-off machining (Material positioning by loader)

13-18
 L32

 Sample program 3 (GBL specification)

Material change after selecting stopper (Using loader to bring material into contact with the stopper)

 Note
• The material change program shown above is an example. Change values as needed.
• The program number must be 4 digits or less. Numbers 9000s cannot be used.
• The M7 (Chuck Open) command is valid when the spindle speed is L220:2000, L32:300 min–1 or slower.
Specifying the M7 command when the spindle speed exceeds 2000 min–1 causes an alarm to occur.

13-19
L32

13.5 Subprogram (M98)

Once you store a coding sequence (that is going to be repeatedly used within a program) in advance as a subprogram,
you can call this subprogram from the main program each time that sequence is needed in the program. And you can
make the main program structure simple.

13.5.1 Subprogram call instruction

The subprogram call has the following regulations.

 Command format
M98 P H L ,D2

 Argument
P Program number (1 to 99999999) of the subprogram to be called
(If omitted, the main program is called.)
H Sequence number (1 to 99999) in the subprogram to be called
(If omitted, the program is executed from the beginning of the main program.)
L The number of times (1 to 9999) the subprogram is to be repeated.
(If omitted, L1 is assumed.)
,D2 This argument is an option.
Specify this when calling a program stored in the compact flash card (CF).
Specify a program number by the P argument. See <13.41 External Memory Program
Operation Function>.

13.5.2 Calling a subprogram from the main program

• The subprogram is executed only once if the number of repetition is not specified.
• The subprogram can be repeated up to 9,999 times when it is called from a main program once.
• Subprograms can be nested to eight levels.
• The subprogram call command can be specified in either of the axis control groups ($1 and $2) in the main program.
• The main program and subprogram are called for each axis control group.

 Sample program

• The M99 command must always be placed at the end.

• The subprogram does not require M02.

13-20
 L32

13.5.3 Example of using a subprogram

 Dimensions and machining layout

13-21
L32

 Sample program

13-22
 L32

13.6 Spindle Speed Change Detection Function (M94, M95, M96, M97)
The spindle speed change detection function monitors the spindle speed. If the speed change exceeds a preset rate, this
function automatically stops the machine. This prevents operation overload and damage to the guide bushing baking.
Both main spindle and back spindle have this spindle speed change detection function.

 Command format
M97 Main spindle speed change detection OFF
M96 Main spindle speed change detection ON
M95 Back spindle speed change detection OFF
M94 Back spindle speed change detection ON

 Note
• The main spindle speed change detection function is on by default when the power supply is turned on. To turn the
detection function off, include the M97 or M95 command in the program.
Normally, the program should contain M96 or M94 in the beginning to turn on the detection function for safety.
• Turn off the spindle speed change detection function to perform tapping with a dice, constant surface speed control
or spindle synchronous control.

13-23
L32

13.7 Constant Surface Speed Control (G96, G97)

While the material is cut in a diametrical direction or while cutting off the workpiece after finishing a machining process,
the diameter of the material may vary depending on the portion of a workpiece, and the surface speed (the relative speed
of the workpiece and tool) may also change. The control unit can detect the tool position, calculate the spindle speed,
and change the spindle speed accordingly by using this command to instruct a relative speed.

 Command format
G50 S Q : Specifies the spindle speed limitation
The speed is controlled so that the spindle speed does not exceed the limitation during
constant surface speed control.
S: Maximum spindle speed (min–1) clamp value
Q: Minimum spindle speed (min–1) clamp value
G96 S : Starts constant surface speed control
S: Constant surface speed value (m/min.)
G97 S1= : Ends constant surface speed control
(S2= ) S1= min-1 Main spindle speed after canceling the constant surface speed control
mode
S2= min-1 Back spindle speed after canceling the constant surface speed control
mode

 Note
• If an S value is not specified when switching the mode between G96 and G97, the S value previously used is valid in
the new mode.
• The spindle speed fluctuation detection cannot be turned on during constant surface speed control.
• G50 S is effective only when the constant surface speed control command is effective by entering the G96
command.
• Specify Q, when the minimum spindle speed may change too lower.
• The tool selection command (T) cannot be used during constant surface speed control.
• When selecting the tool, specify the tool selection command after a cancel command (G97) is specified.

13-24
 L32

 Sample program

* The above program does not cover product separation.

13-25
L32

13.8 Tool Nose Radius Compensation Function

If a rounded tool-bit is used, the rounded tool nose can cause an error between the programmed form and the cutting
form during taper cutting or circular cutting.
The tool nose R compensation function automatically calculates the error and compensates. The command code can fix
the compensation direction.

 Command format
G40 Tool nose radius compensation mode Cancel
G41 Tool nose radius compensation left mode ON
(Offsets the tool to the left in reference to the tool advancing direction.)
G42 Tool nose radius compensation right mode ON
(Offsets the tool to the right in reference to the tool advancing direction.)
Enter tool nose R data in advance in <R> (tool nose radius value) and <P> (virtual tool nose No.) on the Tool Data
screen.
Note that the meaning of <R> on the Offset screen is different from <R> on the Tool Data screen.

 Virtual tool nose

• The virtual tool nose is the point of a nonexistent tip of the tool, corresponding to the zero point shown below.
• Be sure to set the tool bit in the holder as shown in the diagram.

 Virtual tool nose number

• The direction of the virtual tool nose viewed from the tool nose radius center is determined as the virtual tool nose
number.
• Tool nose between 0 and 9 is determined according to tool noses.

13-26
 L32

13.8.1 Tools subject to tool nose radius compensation and virtual tool nose numbers
These diagrams illustrate some commonly used tools with the associated virtual tool nose numbers.

13-27
L32

13.8.2 Basic pattern of tool nose radius compensation G code

The conception of the tool nose radius compensation is described below.

 Note
• When positioning in rapid feed or canceling the tool nose radius compensation, pay attention to the interference with
the material.
The tool nose must be kept apart from the material by more than nose radius.
• If some improper G commands are specified during tool nose radius compensation execution, an alarm occurs.
For the contents of the alarm, see the Instruction's manual of the NC manufacturer.
• While the tool nose radius compensation is being executed, tool exchange command (T) ) is disabled.

13-28
 L32

 Machining drawing

 Machining layout

13-29
L32

 Sample program
O0300
$1 $2
G50 Z0
M06
G00 X15.0 Z–0.5
G99 M03 S1=2000
G630 G630 ............... Front/back parallel machining

N103 T0300
G00 X15.0 Z–0.5 T03
G42 G01 X4.05 F0.2 ............... Tool nose radius compensation right mode
ON
G41 X5.45 Z0.2 F0.03 ............... Tool nose radius compensation left mode
ON
Z6.0 F0.04
G04 U0.3
X10.0 F0.2
X15.0 Z8.5 F0.03
G40 G00 X16.0 T00 ............... Tool nose radius compensation OFF

N202 T0200
G50 W–3.0
G41 G00 X15.0 Z23.5 T02 ............... Tool nose radius compensation left mode
ON
G01 X10.0 Z26.0 F0.03
X8.0 F0.015
Z34.0 F0.03
X6.8 Z34.6 F0.02
X15.0 F0.2
G40 G00 X16.0 T00 ............... Tool nose radius compensation OFF
G50 W3.0

N301 T0100
G50 W–3.0
G00 X15.0 Z34.5 T01
G01 X9.0 F0.2
X–3.0 F0.03
G50 W3.0
M05
M07
G00 Z0 T00
M56
G999 G999
N999 N999
M02 M02
M99 M99
% %

 Note
This program example does not contain product separation.

13-30
 L32

13.9 Cut-off Tool Breakage Detection (M51)

The cut-off tool breakage detection function (M51) can be specified to check for damage to the cut-off tool.
Cut-off Tool Breakage Detection is performed as follows:
(1) Move material to the detection position. (Z1 axis movement)
(2) The selected tool moves to the (material outer diameter of machining data + maximum tool setting diameter data).
(X1 axis movement)
(3) Select the detection axis of the cut-off tool breakage detector. (Y1 axis movement)
(4) The cut-off tool breakage detector moves to the material outer diameter of machining data + tool positioning point in
machining data (positioning point or X argument position). (X1 axis movement)
(5) Cut-off tool breakage detector starts operating.

 Command format
M51 X W E1 Cut-off tool breakage detector

 Argument
X Select the detection axis and specify the positioning (X1 axis work coordinate) of the cut-off tool
break detection unit. When unspecified, the tool moves to the positioning point (material outer
diameter of machining data + tool positioning point). In usual case, this argument is not required.
Use this argument only when the positioning point is large and the cut-off tool breakage detector
cannot reach the workpiece.
W Specify the move distance for the material (relative move distance). If not specified, the workpiece
will not move.
E1 When a cut-off tool break detection unit is used, it detects whether the material has been advanced to
the short-cut position when new material is inserted. If the detection unit comes into contact with the
material, it will determine that it is at the normal shortcut position and will proceed to the next block.
If it does not, it will generate an alarm. If the argument is omitted, detection is not performed. This is
mainly used by the Material change program (M98).

If the workpiece is short or a large start position shift amount is set, specify the W argument to advance the
spindle to the position where the sensor touches the material.
The advance amount varies according to the shift amount (shifted 2.0mm from the zero point) shown in
Fig. 2 on the next page, the start position shift amount, the workpiece length and the cut-off width. Enter an
appropriate W argument value meeting the conditions.

13-31
L32

13-32
 L32

 Sample program 1 (GB specification)

$1 $3
G50 Z0
G600 G600
M06

G00 X13.0 Z–0.5

M51 ......................... Cut-off tool breakage
detector
M03 S1=3000 G99

 Sample program 2 (When no arguments) (GBL Specifications)

O0007
:
G99 G01 X–1.0 F0.05
G600
M05
G00 X13.0 Z T00............................ The tool moves to the positioning point and the Z axis moves to
the program zero point.
M51.......................................................... Cut-off tool breakage detection command (series of operations)
T2000
M56
M02

 Sample program 3 (with arguments) (GBL specification)

O0007
:
G99 G01 X–1.0 F0.05
G600
M05
G00 X13.0 Z T00
M51 X W F1000.0 ................. Cut-off tool breakage detection command (series of operations)
Specify the X argument when changing the position to move the
tip of touch sensor.
Specify the W argument when the workpiece length is short.
The F argument is used to perform operation at a feed rate of
F1000.0.
T2000
M56
M02

13-33
L32

13.10 Corner Chamfering / Corner R

The corner chamfering/corner R function chamfers or rounds a corner, at the point of intersection of lines, by entering
the chamfering or R size in the block that contains the coordinate value representing the corner.
Therefore, this function allows specification of chamfering or R at a corner without requiring coordinate calculation
usually necessary for corner chamfering or R.

 Command format
Corner chamfering:
G1 X(Z) ,C F
Corner R:
G1 X(Z) ,R F

 Argument
X: Specify the X coordinate of a corner.
Z: Specify the Z coordinate of a corner.
,C: Specify the corner chamfering size.
,R: Specify the corner R size.
F: Specify the feed rate.

 Sample program
Corner chamfering:
:
G1 X1.0 Z1.0 ........................................... Coordinate values of the point preceding the corner
X5.0 ,C0.5................................................ Coordinate values representing the corner and the chamfering size
Z10.0 ....................................................... Coordinate values of the point that follows the corner to be rounded

13-34
 L32

Corner R:
:
G1 X1.0 Z1.0 ........................................... Coordinate values of the point preceding the corner
X5.0 ,R0.5................................................ Coordinate values representing the corner and the corner R size
Z10.0 ....................................................... Coordinate values of the point that follows the corner to be rounded

 Note
• This function does not compensate for tool nose R.
To reflect the nose R to the workpiece shape by using the dimensions specified on the drawing, use the nose R
compensation function.
• If both ",C" and ",R" values are specified in the same block, the command specified later is valid.
• If "," is not specified in ",C", the command is assumed as a C command.
• If "," is not specified in ",R", the command is assumed as an R command.
• Tool offset is calculated for the shape after the execution of corner chamfering or R.
• If the shape specified in the block that follows the corner chamfering or R block is not a line, program error (P382)
occurs.

13-35
L32

13.11 Thread Cutting (Equal Pitch Thread Cutting and Continuous Thread
Cutting) (G32)
This function performs thread cutting by controlling the feed and the phase of main spindle rotation. Use this function to
perform a straight and equal pitch screw thread cutting and tapered thread cutting. Continuous thread cutting that
controls axis feed to maintain synchronization with spindle rotation with minimal errors at the shape changing point
when cutting screw thread when shapes change is also possible.
This function is effective for thread cutting to the part of smaller diameter (machined in back turning process), which
cannot be performed by the canned threading cycle. G32 command is used in G92 (canned threading cycle).

 Command format
G32 X(U) Z(W) F Q E

 Argument
X(U) Specify the thread cutting infeed position. (U: Incremental command)
Z(W) Specify the thread cutting end position in longitudinal direction. (W: Incremental command)
F Specify the pitch (lead) in longitudinal direction.
Q Enter the Q argument to specify the thread cutting start shift angle (0° to 359.999°)
E Specify the number of threads per inch. The E argument is used instead of the F
argument that specifies the longitudinal thread pitch/lead.

 Sample program

This program is an example of machining a workpiece into a form as shown above. An outline cutting tool for front
turning is used to finish-machine the top end of the workpiece into this form. Thread cutting is performed twice: the first
infeed amount is 0.4 mm in the diameter, the second one is 0.2 mm in the diameter, and the final thread cutting is
finished at 45°.

13-36
 L32

When machining a workpiece into a generally threaded form, you can also use this function to change the amount of
infeed or the angle of final thread cutting.

 Note
• If screw thread changes in lead or geometry consecutively at very short intervals, the workpiece may not be
machined correctly into the specified form.
• The program above is given as a sample, so specify machining conditions in consideration of the actual material to
be machined, etc.
• G32 comamnd is canceled when G0 or G1 command is issued. To return the main spindle from the threading end
position to threading start position, specify G0 or G1 at the top of every coordinate command.

13-37
L32

13.12 Longitudinal Cut-Off Cycle (G75)

The longitudinal cut-off is a canned cycle which automatically performs grooving in outer diameter direction of
workpieces by specifying the grooving end position, infeed amount, tool shift amount, and move distance of tool at fillet.
This cycle is used for rough grooving on outer diameter and step machining in cutting-off operation on the fixed
headstock lathes.

 Command format
G75 R(1)
G75 X Z P Q R(2) F

 Argument
R(1): Specify the return amount for every step.
X Specify the grooving end position of X axis.
Z Specify the grooving end position of Z axis.
P Specify the infeed amount (steps) for every step.
Q Specify the tool shift amount.
R(2) Specify the move distance of Z axis at fillet.
F Specify the cutting feed rate. (If omitted, the feed rate used in previous cycle is used.)

 Sample program
:
(1) T200 ....................................................... Call the tool
(2) G0 X20.0 Z7.0 T2 ................................... Position to the grooving position (start position of canned
cycle)
(3) G75 R0.2 ................................................ Specify the return amount for every step
(4) G75 X10.0 Z15.0 P2.0 Q2.5 R0 F0.1 ...... Perform grooving to the fillet position X10.0, Z15.0: X
direction: 2 mm at every step (P2.0) Z direction: Grooving 2.5
mm at every step (Q2.5) Z axis: Does not move (R0)
(5) G0 X20.0 T0 ........................................... Move the tool away (including canned cycle cancel)
:

13-38
 L32

 Sample program for rough grooving to outer diameter

:
T300
G0 X18.0 Z3.0 T3
G75 R0.2
G75 X5.0 P1.5 F0.08
G0 X18.0 T0
:

 Note
• Position the tool to the threading start point before specifying the cycle command.
• If Z and P arguments are omitted or 0 is specified, only the X axis moves.
• If the value of P argument is larger than the hole depth, step machining is not performed.
• The following conditios cause an alarm to occur.
• The Z argument is specified, but the P argument is omitted or 0 is specified.
• The value for P argument is larger than groove width.
• The value for R(2) argument is larger than that for Q argument.
• The value for R(1) argument is larger than that for P argument.
• The canned cycle is canceled when 01 group of G code (G0, G1, G2, or G3) is specified.

13-39
L32

13.13 Deep Hole Drilling Cycle 2 (G79, G80)

Deep hole drilling can be specified by one line of commands when [Deep Hole Drilling Cycle 2 (G79)] is used.
The deep hole drilling cycle 2 allows specification of the first infeed depth and the second infeed depth independently.
Furthermore, drilling in the end face direction and that in the cross direction are automatically distinguished by the
arguments specified in the program.

 Command format
G79 Z(X) R I K A Q J F ,F
G80

 Argument

13-40
 L32

 Sample program
:
:
T1200
G0 Z–1.0
G79 Z20.0 I6.0 K3.0 A0.5 J500 F0.1 T12
G80
G0 Z–1.0 T0
:
:

 Note
• For the dwell command (Q and J arguments), a decimal point must not be specified. To specify 0.5 seconds, for
example, input "Q (J) 500". If these arguments are omitted, dwell is not performed.
• If the A argument (drill return safety distance) is omitted, the value set at "G83 Retract" in the preparation parameter
is used.
• The drilling cycle is canceled when G80, or G0, G1, G2 or G3 is specified. At the same time, argument values are
cleared to zero.
• When a drilling cycle is performed in the 1-block state, operation does not stop during the execution of the cycle but
it stops after the completion of the cycle.
• When the Hold key is pressed during the execution of a drilling cycle, the cycle stops immediately. The operation
can be restarted from the stopped position.

13-41
L32

13.14 Synchronous Tapping Functions (G88, G84, G80)

The synchronous tapping functions perform tapping while fully controlling the feed and rotational phase.
This feature brings about merits such as the use of an ordinary drill holder instead of a floating tap holder. The thread
length is easily calculated by using an ordinary drill holder.

 Note
The tapping speed becomes slower or faster than the value specified in the program, depending on the type of the holder
to be used. When using holders with which the tapping speed changes, specify the tapping speed in consideration of
deceleration or acceleration. For example, if the holder of 1/2 deceleration is used, specify the value for F
argument as a half of the standard value. Specify the rotary tool speed S in consideration of deceleration ratio
(twice as standard value in case of 1/2 deceleration).

13.14.1 Synchronous tapping for outer circumference with a rotary tool (G88 and G80)
This function performs tapping while synchronously controlling the rotary tool and the X axis (NC axis).
This function enables tapping for outer circumference, which makes a tapped hole in highly accurate depth.

 Command format
G88 X R F D± S Q , R1 or R2 Tapping cycle
G80 Tapping cycle cancel

 Argument
X Specify the tapping end position. The value must be specified for the diameter.
R Specify the distance from the point where the tap is positioned to the position where synchronous
tapping starts. The distance must be specified with a value for the radius.
F Specify a screw pitch.
D± Specify the rotary tool and the rotation in which the spindle rotates. 3: Rotary tool on gang tool post,
5: Rotary tool on back tool post. + denotes forward rotation, – denotes reverse rotation.
S Specify the spindle speed.
Q Specify this argument to speed up the tap when it returns. A multiple of 100 can be specified in the
range 100 to 500. For example, when Q200 is specified, the tap returns twice as fast as when it heads
toward the specified position. The default is Q100. In this case, the tap returns at the same speed as
when it heads toward the specified position. A value "300" is recommended for the Q argument.
However, the value of the Q argument depends on the conditions and the material. Determine the
value in accordance with the shape of the tap. To specify the Q argument, high-speed synchronous
tapping option (different from the synchronous tapping option).
,R1 Specify the synchronous tapping mode. Unless ",R1" is specified, the feed with the G98 command
specified is used in the previous mode. If only "G88, R1" is specified, the mode is switched, but
tapping is not performed.
,R2 Specify the synchronous tapping mode and phase adjustment. Specify this argument, for example, if
you execute synchronous tapping, execute other machining process, and then execute synchronous
tapping again for deburring. The starting positions of first and second synchronous tapping must be
same. The R2 argument (phase adjustment) is available only to rotary tool on the gang tool post (S5).
To use the R2 argument, the phase adjustment for synchronous tapping option (differs from the
synchronous tapping) is required.

13-42
 L32

 Sample program
Material diameter: ø12.0 When the screw pitch is 0.7:
When using the cross machining tool on front side (L20X)

13-43
L32

13.14.2 Synchronous tapping for the end face of a workpiece with a rotary tool (G84, G80)
While stopping the main spindle from rotating and synchronously controlling the rotary tool and the Z1 axis (or Z2 axis),
this function performs tapping for the end face of the workpiece (center or eccentric). This function makes a tapped hole
in highly accurate depth.

 Command format
G84 Z R F D± S Q , R1 or R2 Tapping cycle
G80 Tapping cycle cancel

 Argument
Z Specify the tapping end position.
R Specify the distance from the point where the Z1 axis is positioned to the position where
synchronous tapping starts.
F Specify a screw pitch.
D± Specify the rotary tool and the rotation in which the spindle rotates. 3: Rotary tool on gang tool post,
5: Rotary tool on back tool post. 4: The front rotary tool (end-face drilling tool) on opposite tool post
+ denotes forward rotation, – denotes reverse rotation.
S Specify the spindle speed.
Q Specify this argument to speed up the tap when it returns. A multiple of 100 can be specified in the
range 100 to 500. For example, when Q200 is specified, the tap returns twice as fast as when it heads
toward the specified position. The default is Q100. In this case, the tap returns at the same speed as
when it heads toward the specified position. A value "300" is recommended for the Q argument.
However, the value of the Q argument depends on the conditions and the material. Determine the
value in accordance with the shape of the tap. To specify the Q argument, high-speed synchronous
tapping option (different from the synchronous tapping option).
,R1 Specify the synchronous tapping mode.
,R2 Specify the synchronous tapping mode and phase adjustment. Specify this argument, for example, if
you execute synchronous tapping, execute other machining process, and then execute synchronous
tapping again for deburring. The starting positions of first and second synchronous tapping must be
same. The R2 argument (phase adjustment) is available only to front rotary tool on opposite tool post
(S4) and rotary tool on the gang tool post (S5).
To use the R2 argument, the phase adjustment for synchronous tapping option (differs from the
synchronous tapping) is required.

 Note
The rotation direction of rotary tool may change depending on tool layout or the selected tool number. See <14.5
Automatic Control of Rotation Direction of Rotary Tool> for more information.

13-44
 L32

 Sample program
When the screw pitch is 0.7:
Rotary tool on back tool post
$2
:
M78 S0
G98 M180 S5=0
T3200
G0 X0 Z–3.1 T32
G84 Z8.0 R1.0 F0.7 D5 S500, R1
G80
G0 Z–3.1 T0
M182
:

When the screw pitch is 0.7:

Front rotary tool on opposite tool post
$2
:
M28 S0
M83 S4=0
T2100
G98 G00 X0 Z–3.1 T32
G84 Z8.0 R1.0 F0.7 D4 S500, R1
G80
G0 Z–3.1 T0
M85
:

13-45
L32

13.14.3 Synchronous tapping for the center of the end face of a workpiece (main or back)
(G84, G80)
While rotating the spindle (main or back) and synchronously controlling the spindle and the Z axis (Z1 axis for main
spindle, Z2 axis for back spindle), this function performs tapping for the center of the end face of the workpiece (main or
back).
This function makes a tapped hole in highly accurate depth.

 Command format
M97(M95) Main spindle speed fluctuation
detection OFF
(Back spindle speed change
detection OFF)
G84 Z R F D± S Q , R1 or R2 Tapping cycle
G80 Tapping cycle cancel
M96(M94) Main spindle speed fluctuation
detection ON
(Back spindle speed change
detection ON)

 Argument
Z Specify the tapping end position.
R Specify the distance from the point where the Z1 axis is positioned to the position where
synchronous tapping starts.
F Specify a screw pitch.
D± Specify the spindle and the rotation in which the spindle rotates. 1: Main spindle 2: Back spindle +
denotes forward rotation, – denotes reverse rotation.
S Specify the spindle speed.
Q Specify this argument to speed up the tap when it returns. A multiple of 100 can be specified in the
range 100 to 500. For example, when Q200 is specified, the tap returns twice as fast as when it heads
toward the specified position. The default is Q100. In this case, the tap returns at the same speed as
when it heads toward the specified position. A value "300" is recommended for the Q argument.
However, the value of the Q argument depends on the conditions and the material. Determine the
value in accordance with the shape of the tap. To specify the Q argument, high-speed synchronous
tapping option (different from the synchronous tapping option).
,R1 Specify the synchronous tapping mode.
,R2 Specify the synchronous tapping mode and phase adjustment. Specify this argument, for example, if
you execute synchronous tapping, execute other machining process, and then execute synchronous
tapping again for deburring. The starting positions of first and second synchronous tapping must be
same. When using R2 argument (phase adjustment), the gear ratio of the motor and the holder must
be 1:1.
To use the R2 argument, the phase adjustment for synchronous tapping option (differs from the
synchronous tapping) is required.

 Note
Be sure to execute the M97 (M95) command (spindle speed change detection OFF) before the G84 command. If the
spindle speed change detection is not OFF, synchronous tapping ends up with an alarm.

13-46
 L32

 Sample program
When the screw pitch is 0.7:
Front side

Back side

13-47
L32

13.14.4 Continuously synchronous tapping

This function performs synchronous tapping continuously. If ordinary synchronous tapping is unable to make a tapped
hole in desired depth because the cutting load, this function achieves the desired depth by performing synchronous
tapping continuously while changing the amount of infeed.

 Command format
Synchronous tapping to end face of the workpiece:
G84 Z R F D± S Q , R1 or R2 Tapping cycle
Z R Continuous tapping cycle

Synchronous tapping to outer circumference of the workpiece:

G88 X R F D± S Q , R1 or R2 Tapping cycle
X R Continuous tapping cycle
G80 Tapping cycle cancel

 Argument
X Specify the tapping end position. The value must be specified for the diameter.
R Specify the distance from the point where the tap is positioned to the position where synchronous
tapping starts. The distance must be specified with a value for the radius.
F Specify a screw pitch.
D± Specify the rotary tool and the rotation in which the spindle rotates. 3: The rotary tool on gang tool
post rotates forward. 4: The front rotary tool on opposite tool post rotates forward.
5: The rotary tool on back spindle rotates forward. + denotes forward rotation, – denotes reverse
rotation.
S Specify the spindle speed.
Q Specify this argument to speed up the tap when it returns. A multiple of 100 can be specified in the
range 100 to 500. For example, when Q200 is specified, the tap returns twice as fast as when it heads
toward the specified position. The default is Q100. In this case, the tap returns at the same speed as
when it heads toward the specified position. A value "300" is recommended for the Q argument.
However, the value of the Q argument depends on the conditions and the material. Determine the
value in accordance with the shape of the tap. To specify the Q argument, high-speed synchronous
tapping option (different from the synchronous tapping option).
,R1 Specify the synchronous tapping mode. Unless ",R1" is specified, the feed with the G98 command
specified is used in the previous mode. If only "G88, R1" is specified, the mode is switched, but
tapping is not performed.
,R2 Specify the synchronous tapping mode and phase adjustment. Specify this argument, for example, if
you execute synchronous tapping, execute other machining process, and then execute synchronous
tapping again for deburring. The starting positions of first and second synchronous tapping must be
same. The R2 argument (phase adjustment) is available only to front rotary tool on opposite tool post
(S4) and rotary tool on the gang tool post (S5).
To use the R2 argument, the phase adjustment for synchronous tapping option (differs from the
synchronous tapping) is required.

13-48
 L32

 Sample program
Material diameter: ø12.0
When the screw pitch is 0.7:
$1
:
:
M28 S0
S3=0 M80 G98
N0711 T1300
G00 X18.2 Z25.0 T13
G88 X5.0 R1.0 F0.7 D3 S500, R1
X0.0 R1.0
G80
G00 X18.2
M82
:
:

Material diameter: ø12.0

When the screw pitch is 0.7:
Front rotary tool on opposite tool post
$2
:
:
M28 S0
M83 S4=0
N0711 T2300
G98 G00 X18.2 Z25.0 T13
G88 X5.0 R1.0 F0.7 D4 S500, R1
X0.0 R1.0
G80
G00 X18.2
M85
:
:

13-49
L32

13.15 Arc Threading (G35, G36)

The arc threading function performs arc threading through circular interpolation while controlling the feed of the tool
synchronized with the spindle. Use of the continuous threading function enables the switching of machining - for
example, from arc threading to linear threading or from arc threading to taper threading.

 Command format
G35(G36) X(U) Z(W) I K (R ) F(E) Q
G35 Clockwise
G36 Counterclockwise

 Argument
X(U) X-axis coordinate as the arc end point
Z(W) Z-axis coordinate as the arc end point
I X-axis coordinate as the center of the arc (increment to the center of the arc when viewed from the
start point)
K Z-axis coordinate as the center of the arc (increment to the center of the arc when viewed from the
start point)
R Radius of the arc (Specify the argument I, K, or R.)
F(E) Lead (F: General lead screw, E: Precision lead thread or inch screw thread)
Q Shift angle at which threading starts (0.001 to 360.000°)

13-50
 L32

 Sample program
$1
T300
G50 W–10.0
G0 X11.0 Z–1.0 T3
X0.98
G35 U1.638 W4.48 R12.66 F0.9 ......... Arc threading
G32 U0.682 W4.52 F0.9...................... Taper threading
G0 X5.0
Z–1.0
G50 W10.0

13-51
L32

13.16 Differential Speed Rotary Tool Function (G164)

This function controls spindles by superimposing the speed of a spindle on the speed of another spindle.
Use this function when you need to rotate a rotary tool by imposing it on the rotation of the main spindle. For example,
the function performs tapping at the center of the workpiece with the rotary tool while the workpiece chucked by the
main spindle is rotating.
The G164 command specifies the reference spindle and superimposed spindle, and places the two specified spindles in
the superimposed status.
The G113 command frees the two spindles from the superimposed status in which they are rotating by the differential
speed rotary tool command.

To specify G164 (differential speed rotary tool function), specify it after the tool has been selected. See
<14.5 Automatic Control of Rotation Direction of Rotary Tool>.

 Command format
G164 H D± Differential speed rotary tool command
G113 Differential speed rotary tool cancel command

 Argument
H Specify the reference spindle. 1 is the main spindle, 2 is the back spindle.
D± Specify the rotation direction of the axis relative to superimposed and reference spindles.
–3: The rotary tool on gang tool post –4: The front rotary tool (end-face drilling tool) on opposite
tool post –5: The rotary tool on back spindle

13-52
 L32

 Sample program
$1
M3 S1=3000
M81 S3=2000
T1200
G164 H1 D–3 .......................................... Differential speed rotary tool command
M77
G0 Z–2.0
G84 X0.0 Z10.0 R1.0 F1.0 D3 S2000 ,R1 Synchronous tapping
G80
G113........................................................ Differential speed rotary tool cancel command

$2
M23 S2=5000
M81 S3=1000
T5200
G164 H2 D–3 .......................................... Differential speed rotary tool command
M77
G0 Z–2.0
G84 X0.0 Z10.0 R1.0 F1.0 D3 S1000 ,R1 Synchronous tapping
G80
G113........................................................ Differential speed rotary tool cancel command

Front rotary tool on opposite tool post

$2
M3 S1=3000
M83 S4=2000
T2100
G164 H1 D–4 Differential speed rotary tool command
M77
G0 Z–2.0
G84 X0.0 Z10.0 R1.0 F1.0 D4 S2000 ,R1 Synchronous tapping
G80
G113 Differential speed rotary tool cancel command

13-53
L32

 Note
• Be sure to specify the command M77 (spindle synchronization completion queuing) after specifying the command
G164.
• The spindle rotating by the differential speed rotary tool function stops when the machine enters the emergency stop
state.
The differential speed rotary tool mode is canceled at the same time.
• Be careful of the maximum spindle speed clamp when specifying the differential speed rotary function. While the
maximum spindle speed clamp command is active, the superimposed spindle is unable to maintain the speed
difference specified for the reference spindle.
• Indexing for the reference spindle is not permitted in the differential speed rotary tool mode.
• To index the reference spindle, cancel the differential speed rotary tool mode.
• An alarm is issued if the spindle speed is clamped when a synchronous tapping command is executed in the
differential speed rotary tool mode.
M23 S1=5000
M181 S5=4000
T3100
G4 H2 D-5
M77
G0 Z-2.0
G84 X0.0 Z10.0 R1.0 F1.0 D–5 S4000 ,R1
G80
G113
In the example above, the speed of the superimposed spindle ranges from 1000 min–1 (tapping) to 9000 min–1 ((tap
returning). Since some values exceed clamp speeds of the superimposed spindle (rotary tool on gang tool post):
5000min–1, an alarm is generated before tapping.
• In the differential speed rotary tool mode, specification of “,R2” (synchronous tapping phase adjustment) is not
permitted.
• The rotation direction of rotary tool may change depending on tool layout or the selected tool number. See <14.5
Automatic Control of Rotation Direction of Rotary Tool> for more information.

13-54
 L32

13.17 Canned Cycle Longitudinal Machining (G90)

When machining a workpiece with simple shape, usually the linear interpolation (G1) function is used. However, if the
workpiece has large allowance, the turning fixed canned cycle is used. The following explains the canned cycle
longitudinal machining (G90).

 Command format
G90 X(U) Z(W) R F

 Argument
X Coordinate value of the end point in the diametric direction (X axis) (Absolute command)
U Coordinate value of the end point in the diametric direction (X axis) (Incremental command)
Z Coordinate value of the end point in the longitudinal direction (Z axis) (Absolute command)
W Coordinate value of the end point in the longitudinal direction (Z axis) (Incremental command)
R Taper amount (in a radial value)
F Feed rate (mm/rev)

 Outline of machining
Straight and taper cutting in the longitudinal direction is performed in the cycle as shown below.

13-55
L32

13.17.1 Straight cutting cycle

 Sample program
Cutting ø20.0 mm toø15.0 mm material × 5.0 mm long product
Infeed depth: 0.5 mm/infeed
G90 X(U) Z(W) F

G99 M3 S1=4000; .................................. Feed per revolution mode, spindle forward rotation, 4000
min–1
T500; ...................................................... T05 tool selection
G0 X21.0 Z-1.0 T5; ................................. Positioning point, offset
G90 X19.0 Z5.0 F0.1; ............................. 1st infeed
X18.0; ..................................................... 2nd infeed
X17.0; ..................................................... 3rd infeed
X16.0; ..................................................... 4th infeed
X15.0; ..................................................... 5th infeed
G0 X21.0 Z-1.0 T0; ................................. Tool returns, offset is canceled
:

13-56
 L32

13.17.2 Taper cutting cycle

 Sample program
Cutting ø20.0 mm material × 5.0 mm long product
Infeed depth: 0.5 mm/infeed
G90 X(U) Z(W) R(I) F

G99 M3 S1=4000; .................................. Feed per revolution mode, spindle forward rotation, 4000
min–1
T500; ...................................................... T05 tool selection
G0 X21.0 Z-1.0 T5; ................................. Positioning point, offset
G90 X20.0 Z5.0 R-1.0 F0.1; ................... 1st infeed
X19.0; ..................................................... 2nd infeed
X18.0; ..................................................... 3rd infeed
X17.0; ..................................................... 4th infeed
X16.0; ..................................................... 5th infeed
X15.0; ..................................................... 6th infeed
G0 X21.0 Z-1.0 T0; ................................. Tool returns, offset is canceled
:

 Note
The canned cycle longitudinal machining is canceled by G0 and G1. After the completion of the canned cycle, always
specify G0 or G1 in the coordinate value command that specifies tool return operation.

13-57
L32

13.18 Thread Cycle Canned Cycle (G92)

This thread cutting cycle machines thread by controlling axis feed and spindle phase.

 Command format
G92 X Z R Q F

 Argument
X Specify the thread cutting infeed position in the X axis direction.
Z Specify the thread cutting infeed position in the Z axis direction.
R Specify the taper size (r) for taper thread cycle canned cycle.
Q Enter the Q argument to specify thread cutting start shift angle (0.001 - 360.000 degrees)
F Specify a screw pitch.

 Example of machining with M10 P=1.5

Machining a non-ferrous material (right-hand thread)
G92 X Z F

L (1.5mm)： Thread lead

Za (12mm)： Effective length
a (10.5mm)： Tool shift
Xn： In-feed
* Uneven thread ridge portion
For the details on the in-feed, see <9.3 Thread Cutting Count> in [Introduction] of the Instruction Manual (Optional).

13-58
 L32

 Outline of machining
Perform threading with a tool in the following cycle:

13-59
L32

 Sample program
T0300 ................................................ Selects the T03 tool
G50 W-10.5
M03 S1=1500 .................................... specifies spindle forward rotation at 1500 min–1
G4 U1.0 ............................................. 1.0 second dwell for stabilize rotation
G00 X13.0 Z-3.0 T .................... Positions the tool at the initial point (Z = 2L)
G92 X9.3 Z15.0 F1.5 .......................... 1st in-feed (X1 0.35) (Z = Za ) (F = L)
X8.8 .................................................... 2nd in-feed (X2 0.25)
X8.48 .................................................. 3rd in-feed (X3 0.16)
X8.28 .................................................. 4th in-feed (X4 0.1)
X8.16 .................................................. 5th in-feed (X5 0.06)
X8.06 .................................................. 6th in-feed (X6 0.05)
X8.06 .................................................. 0 cut (same as final in-feed)
G00 X Z ........................... To initial point of next process
G50 W10.5

• The spindle speed is limited as specified by the following equation:

• The standard spindle speed for thread cutting is 500 to 2000 min .
–1

• Uneven thread ridges are produced at the threading start and end points due to the delay of the servo system. The
length of uneven thread portions at a spindle speed of 1,500 min–1 is approximately two times of the thread lead
length (2L) at the entry area, and the thread lead length (L) at the exit area. This uneven thread ridges, length
becomes shorter as the spindle speed lowers.
• When selecting right-handed or left-handed threading, reverse the rotation of the main spindle either by changing
the Z-axis start position or by using the reverse holder.
• For chamfering (round-up on the screw trailing end), 0 to 89 degrees can be set using a parameter. (See the
Instruction Manual of the NC manufacturer.)

 Note
• For the details on the in-feed, see <9.3 Thread Cutting Count> in [Introduction] of the Instruction Manual
(Optional).
• In the G92 thread cutting programming, if EOB (;) is specified for an infeed command, the infeed command in the
preceding block is used as modal command.
G92 X11.0 Z F ;
X10.0;
X9.0;
; (Thread cutting at X9.0)
; (Thread cutting at X9.0)
G0 ;

13-60
 L32

 G92-Taper thread cutting canned cycle

G92 can be used for taper thread cutting.
Taper thread cutting is performed in a canned cycle from (1) to (2), (3) to (4), then back to (1). The coordinate reference
point is (3).
The sign (+ or –) of the slope "r" indicates the direction of the location of the start point from the end point.

 Outline of machining
G92 X Z R r F

L： Thread lead
Za： Effective length
a： Tool shift
r： Slope
* Uneven thread ridge portion

 Sample program
T ..................................................... Select threading tool
M S1= ................................... Command for spindle forward or reverse rotation at a spindle speed
of min–1
G4 U1.0 ................................................... 1.0 second dwell for stabilize rotation
G00 X  Z T ..................... Positioning tool at initial point.
X (thread diameter + 2L), Z (a –2L)
G92 X  Z R –r F .......... 1st in-feed
X ()........................................................ 2nd in-feed
X ()........................................................ 3rd in-feed
X ()........................................................ Zero cut
G00 X Z ................................ Move to initial point of next process. (Threading cycle OFF)

13-61
L32

13.19 Link-Thread Machining

With a machine equipped with guide bushing, if the thread length in Z direction is longer than the hold length of inner
diameter of guide bushing, the workpiece becomes apart from the guide bushing when it returns to the thread positioning
point. Thus, the machining is discontinued. In such a case, repeat a cycle of "outer diameter turning to thread cutting"
several times to link the thread to subsequent threads. It enables thread cutting in Z direction without being broken.
This function performs thread cutting by controlling the feed and the phase of main spindle rotation. Using this function
enables link-thread cutting by specifying the link position in the same Z direction.

 Sample program
Hold length of guide bushing inner diameter: 25.0 mm
Material diameter ø20.0
Thread shift amount 1.5mm
M12 × pitch 1.5

13-62
 L32

T300 (Front turning (1)) Subprogram

G0 X21.0 Z–0.5 T3
G1 X9.0 F0.1 O0007
G1 X12.0 Z1.0 F0.05 G0 X14.3
Z19.0 F0.1 G32 X11.3 W1.5 F1.5
X18.0 W15.0 (*)
X21.0 W1.5 U3.0 W1.5
: G0 W–18.0
T40 (Thread cutting (2)) X13.8
G50 W–1.5
G0 X21.0 Z–1.5 T4 G32 X10.8 W1.5 F1.5
M98 P0007 ............................. To subprogram W15.0
G0 X21.0 Z–1.5 T0 U3.0 W1.5
G50 W1.5 G0 W–18.0
X13.48
T300 (Front turning (3))
G0 X21.0 Z18.0 T3 G32 X10.48 W1.5 F1.5
G1 X14.0 F0.1 W15.0
G3 X12.0 Z19.0 R1.0 F0.05 U3.0 W1.5
G1 Z33.0 F0.1 G0 W–18.0
X18.0 X13.28
X21.0 W1.5
: G32 X10.28 W1.5 F1.5
T400 (Thread cutting (4)) W15.0
G50 W-1.5 U3.0 W1.5
G0 X21.0 Z12.0 T4 ................. Z: Distance from the first threading position G0 W–18.0
M98 P0007 multiple of pitches X13.16
G0 X21.0 Z12.0 T0 First threading position Z –1.5 to Z12.0 13.5 mm
G50 W1.5 13.5 / 1.5 = 9 Divided out G32 X10.16 W1.5 F1.5
W15.0
T300 (Front turning (5)) U3.0 W1.5
G0 X21.0 Z32.0 T3 G0 W–18.0
G1 X14.0 F0.1 X13.06
G3 X12.0 Z33.0 R1.0 F0.05
G1 Z47.0 F0.1 G32 X10.06 W1.5 F1.5
X18.0 W15.0
X21.0 W1.5 U3.0 W1.5
: G0 W–18.0
T400 (Thread cutting (6)) X13.06
G50 W–1.5
G0 X21.0 Z25.5 T4 G32 X10.06 W1.5 F1.5
M98 P0007 .............................. To subprogram W15.0
G0 X21.0 Z25.5 T0 U3.0 W1.5
G50 W1.5 G0 W–18.0
:
: M99

13-63
L32

 Note
• The program is an example for the reference. Specify an appropriate depth of cut and the cutting condition,
according to the workpiece and the tool.
• Specify the thread length so that the workpiece will not be apart from the guide bushing. Note that the length to be
held by the guide bushing depends on the material diameter.
• Be sure to deburr from the workpiece diameter at the end of front turning. If the burr is remained, the workiece
cannot be returned into the guide bushing. It may cause an accident and the pitch may be shifted.
• Determine the Z coordinate position to connect the second and the subsequent screws by calculating the distance
(the first threading point + multiple of pitch). The length of thread cutting (shown by (*) in the sample program)
must be a multiple of pitch. If these values are inaccurate, a pitch shift may occur.
• If the chuck opens during thread cutting, the shift phase of thread occurs and it causes link-thread cutting to fail. Be
sure to perform link-thread cutting within one chuck.
• The program is an example when machining a thread of 1L. Take 2L or more margin for first and the final thread
cuttings.
• It is recommended that the second and the subsequent infeed and the final thread cutting is finished at 45°.

13-64
 L32

13.20 Multi-thread Screw Cutting

 Multi-thread screw
Generally used screw is called as a single-thread screw, which has a spiral in one pitch, and advances only one pitch per
one revolution. With the single-thread screw, the lead (distance per one rotation) is equal to the pitch. In contrary, the
screw that has two or three spirals within one lead is called multi-thread screw. With the multi-thread screw, the lead is
multiple of pitches.
• Pitch × Number of threads = Lead
• Pitch 0.75 × double-thread screw = Lead 1.5

 Sample program
The G32 command performs thread cutting by controlling the feed and the phase of main spindle rotation.
The position of spindle rotation direction where the infeed starts with G32 command is always the same. Define this
position (angle) as 0°. If the infeed of first thread starts from 0°, start the infeed of second thread from the position
shifted by 180°. This can make the multi-thread screw.
See <13.11 Thread Cutting (Equal Pitch Thread Cutting and Continuous Thread Cutting) (G32)> for command
format.
Material diameter ø20.0
Thread shift amount 1.5mm
Machining of double-thread screw of M12 × Pitch 0.75 (Lead = 1.5)

13-65
L32

Front turning process Subprogram 1 Subprogram 2

:
: O0077 O0777
: G0 X11.76 G0 X11.76
T300 (Multi-thread G32 W15.0 F1.5 Q0 G32 W15.0 F1.5 Q180000
cutting)
G50 W–1.5 U5.196 W1.5 F1.5 U5.196 W1.5 F1.5
G0 X21.0 Z–3.0 T3 G0 W–16.5 G0 W–16.5
X14.0 : :
M98 P0077 ................... To subprogram 1 G0 X11.56 G0 X11.56
G0 X14.0 Z–3.0 G32 W15.0 F1.5 Q0 G32 W15.0 F1.5 Q180000
M98 P0777 ................... To subprogram 2 U5.196 W1.5 F1.5 U5.196 W1.5 F1.5
G0 X21.0 Z–3.0 T0 G0 W–16.5 G0 W–16.5
G50 W1.5 : :
: G0 X11.36 G0 X11.36
: G32 W15.0 F1.5 Q0 G32 W15.0 F1.5 Q180000
: U5.196 W1.5 F1.5 U5.196 W1.5 F1.5
G0 W–16.5 G0 W–16.5
: :
G0 X11.2 G0 X11.2
G32 W15.0 F1.5 Q0 G32 W15.0 F1.5 Q180000
U5.196 W1.5 F1.5 U5.196 W1.5 F1.5
G0 W–16.5 G0 W–16.5
: :
G0 X11.1 G0 X11.1
G32 W15.0 F1.5 Q0 G32 W15.0 F1.5 Q180000
U5.196 W1.5 F1.5 U5.196 W1.5 F1.5
G0 W–16.5 G0 W–16.5
: :
G0 X11.1 G0 X11.1
G32 W15.0 F1.5 Q0 G32 W15.0 F1.5 Q180000
U5.196 W1.5 F1.5 U5.196 W1.5 F1.5
G0 W–16.5 G0 W–16.5
: :
M99 M99

By applying this program, change the infeed start angle to make triple- or quad-thread screw.

 Note
• The program is an example for the reference. Specify an appropriate depth of cut and the cutting condition,
according to the workpiece and the tool.
• Specify the thread length so that the workpiece will not be apart from the guide bushing.
• Be sure to deburr from the workpiece diameter at the end of front turning. If the burr is remained, the workpiece
cannot be returned into the guide bushing. It may cause an accident and the pitch may be shifted.
• If the chuck opens during thread cutting, the shift phase of thread occurs and it causes multi-thread cutting to fail. Be
sure to perform multi-thread cutting within one chuck.
• Consider the lead angle to perform high-lead threading, and select an appropriate tool.
• For the high-lead threading, specify the cutting condition not to exceed the maximum feedrate.

13-66
 L32

13.21 Machine Coordinate System Command (G53)

The machine coordinate system command (G53) function specifies the positioning point in the machine coordinate
system.

 Command format
G53 X Z Y ,F

 Argument
X: Specify the X axis coordinate in the machine coordinate system. The axis in the specified axis control group
moves to the machine coordinate specified by X.
Z: Specify the Z axis coordinate in the machine coordinate system. The axis in the specified axis control group
moves to the machine coordinate specified by Z.
Y: Specify the Y axis coordinate in the machine coordinate system. The axis in the specified axis control group
moves to the machine coordinate specified by Y.
,F: Specify the feed rate. If this argument is omitted, the axis moves in rapid feed rate.

13-67
L32

13.22 Y-axis Holder

The Y-axis holder performs cutting in Y direction. The cutting chips are dropped naturally from the cutting position, and
effective for the chip removal.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Preparation key to display the Preparation screen.
2. Mount the Y-axis holder while pushing its shoulder part to the gang tool holder.

3. Move the cursor to [Tool Typ] of the tool for which the Y-axis holder is mounted and set [L Y] for the tool name.
If the "Tool Type" was [12R], change it to [12L Y].
*Usually the tool name is [R]. By changing this to [L Y], the tool is positioned at the position shown in Figure A or
Figure B when [DIA] or [Core] is executed.
4. Press the menu key [DIA], and press the Start key several times until the cursor reaches the position [DIA]. Then,
align the outer diameter of the material with the tool nose. (Figure A)
5. Move the tool away from the material, and move the material backward so that it is placed behind the end-face of
guide bushing.
6. With the menu key [Core DWN] being selected, press the Start key continuously until the cursor reaches the
position [Core DWN]. Then, align the outer diameter of the material with the tool nose. (Figure B)
* When adjusting the position by "Core DWN", pay attention to interference between the tool at left and the
material.
7. Move the tool away from the material, and move the material backward so that it is placed behind the end-face of
guide bushing.
8. Repeat Step 5. Now the setting completes.

13-68
 L32

 Sample program Material dia.: 20 mm

T500 (Front turning)
G0 X21.0 Z0 T5 ;
G1 X-0.5 F0.1 ;
X18.0 ;
Z15.0 ;
X19.2 ;
X20.2 W0.5 ;
G0 X21.0 W0 T0 ;
T300 (Y axis back ← Moves to the position shown in Figure A.
turning)
G50 W-3.0 ;
G0 Y21.0 Z20.0 T3 ;
X0.0 ; ← Moves to the position shown in Figure B.
G1 Y16.0 F0.05 ; ← Cutting is performed in Y direction.
Z30.0 ;
Y15.4 W0.3 ;
Y21.0 ;
X21.0 ;
G0 U0 V0 W0 T0
G50 W3.0 ;

 Note
• The Y-axis holder size differs according to the machine model. Select the holder meeting the machine model.
• Do not mount a Y-axis holder next to a rotary tool. If mounted, the tool may interfere with the material during
machining depending on the material diameter.

13-69
L32

13.23 Multi-piece Machining

In ordinary operation, material is re-chucked after machining of one workpiece is completed. In the multi-piece
machining, however, multiple workpieces are machined continuously in single material chucking operation.

 Sample program
Machining data
Material diameter 10.0mm
Machining length 27.6mm 27.6 mm Total workpiece length + Cut-off tool
width + Shift amount for end face turning＋Margin
＝25.0＋2.0＋0.1＋0.5
Number of 3 pcs.
workpieces/chucking
Back spindle chuck position 20.0mm

 Setting the machining data

After setting the machining length of a workpiece to "Machining Length" on the Machining Data screen, set the number
of workpieces to be machined in one chucking to "Pieces/1Chuck".

 Main Program
O0002
$1 $2
G50 Z0
M6
G99

!2L15 !1L15
M98 P5 L3 .......................... Calling subprogram O0005 M98 P5 L3 Same as $1
Number of repetitive calling times: 3 Same as $1

!2L20 !1L20
M8
M8
/M98 P7000 ........................ Material change program
M9
M5
M7
G0 X-3.0 W-81.3* T00........ Move to the starting point.
G0 X-3.0 W-* T00 is obtained as described
below.
W value = (Total workpiece length + Cut-off
tool width + Shift amount for end face
turning) × (Number of products / chucking)
G999 G999
N999 N999
M2 M2
M99 M99

13-70
 L32

 Subprogram
O0005
$1 $2
G50 Z-0.1 ....................................... Shift amount for end face turning: 0.1
mm
M9
M6
G113
G0 X11.0 Z-1.0
： ：
： ：
[Front machining] [Back machining]
： ：
： ：
T3000
!2L1 !1L1
M24 S2=2500 M3 S1=2500
G114.1 H1D-2

T100 (CUT-OFF)
G0 X11.0 Z27.0 T1 ......................... Z27.0 = Total workpiece length +
Cut-off tool width
G650 G650
G0 Z-1.0
M72
G98 G1 Z5.0 F2000
M77
G4 U0.3
M15
M73
G4 U0.2
!2L10 !1L10
G99 G1 X-1.0 F0.03
G600 G600
G98 G1 X-3.0 F0.05 M25
G113
M5
M56
M99 M99

 Note
• The Z1 axis starts retracting from the forward end position by "Machining Length × Pieces/1Chuck" when the start
point operation is executed.
• When 1-cycle operation completes, make sure that the start point is identical to the end point. (Execute start point
operation.)
If they do not match, over-travel or interference may occur.

13-71
L32

13.24 Rapid Feed Acceleration/Deceleration Time Constant Setting

ON/OFF (M360/M361)
While running a program, rapid feed acceleration/deceleration time constant of individual axis (X1, Z1 and Y1 axes) can
be changed. This feature is especially effective in G630 front/back parallel machining. By changing the
acceleration/deceleration time constant of the gang tool post (X1 and Y1 axes) the workpiece can be finished at high
accuracy in back machining.
To the contrary, rapid feed acceleration/deceleration will be slowed in tool selection for the gang tool post when the
acceleration/deceleration time constant is changed, causing the cycle time to be increased.

 About rapid feed acceleration/deceleration time constant

An axis for which rapid feed (G0) is specified is accelerated to the rapid feed rate at a constant slope and then decelerated
at a constant slope to stop at the target point of positioning. The duration in which the axis is accelerated or decelerated
is called the acceleration/deceleration time constant. Note that the acceleration time and deceleration time are the same
time.

 Initial Value of Rapid Feed Acceleration/Deceleration Time Constant of Each Axis

Axis Name Acceleration/Decel
eration Time
Constant
X1 95 msec
Z1 120 msec
Y1 70 msec
X2 80 msec
Z2 70 msec
Y2 60 msec

 Command format
M360 X Z Y Rapid feed acceleration/deceleration time constant setting ON
M361 Rapid feed acceleration/deceleration time constant setting OFF

 Argument
X Specify an integral multiple of the initial value of X1 axis acceleration/deceleration time constant. Specify a
value with a decimal point. Specification range: 1 to 6
Z Specify an integral multiple of the initial value of Z1 axis acceleration/deceleration time constant. Specify a
value with a decimal point. Specification range: 1 to 6
Y Specify an integral multiple of the initial value of Y1 axis acceleration/deceleration time constant. Specify a
value with a decimal point. Specification range: 1 to 6
The acceleration/deceleration time constant of the X1, Z1 and Y1 axes is reset to the initial value.
When execution of a program is terminated halfway, it is possible to reset the acceleration/deceleration time constants to
the initial values by pressing the Reset key.

13-72
 L32

 Sample program
In the program below, M361 and M360 are specified before and after the tool selection command in $1 in the operation
where back finish machining in $2 and tool selection in $1 are overlapped. Tool selection operation in $1 is performed at
a restricted speed and finishing accuracy in back machining is secured.
$1 $2
:
:
M360 X4.0 Y4.0 .............................. Multiplies the X1 and Y1 axis :
acceleration/deceleration time
constant by four
T300 ............................................... Tool selection Back finish machining
M361 .............................................. Resets the X1 and Y1 axis :
acceleration/deceleration time
constant to the initial values
:
:

 Note
• Specify axis control group 1 ($1) as rapid feed acceleration/deceleration time constant setting (M360/M361) for X1,
Z1 and Y1 axes and specify axis control group 2 ($2) as rapid feed acceleration/deceleration time constant setting for
(M360/M361).
• Changing the acceleration/deceleration time constants may increase a cycle time.
• Determine the multiplication value for changing the acceleration/deceleration time constants according to the
machining accuracy required in the back machining.
• To achieve better finishing accuracy in back machining, use M350/M351 (rapid feed rate setting ON/OFF) together
with M360/M361.
See <13.26 Rapid Feed Rate Setting ON/OFF (M350/M351)> for the use of M350/M351.
• M360/M361 cannot be specified in the superimposition (G620 or G650) mode.

13-73
L32

13.25 Medium-/High-pressure Coolant Device

This device discharges medium-/high-pressure coolant upon opening the desired valve to run the separately installed
pump. The device can discharge strong coolant and is effective for chip removal.

 Command format
Medium-/high-pressure coolant pump
M452 Medium-/high-pressure coolant pump ON
M453 Medium-/high-pressure coolant pump OFF

Valves
M430 SVCL1 ON (Back spindle oil blow ON)
M431 SVCL1 OFF (Back spindle oil blow OFF)
M432 SVCL2 ON (Opposite tool post ON)
M433 SVCL2 OFF (Opposite tool post OFF)
M434 SVCL3 ON (Back tool post ON)
M435 SVCL3 OFF (Back tool post OFF)
M436 SVCL4 ON (Guide bushing ON)
M437 SVCL4 OFF (Guide bushing OFF)

Supply pump (only for high-pressure coolant device)

M458 Supply pump ON
M459 Supply pump OFF

 Note
• Open any of the valves before turning the medium-/high-pressure coolant pump ON.
• If the valve is closed immediately after turning the medium-/high-pressure coolant pump OFF, pressure remains in
the coolant line. Therefore, create a program that allows a certain interval between stopping the pump and closing
the valve.
• At the end of the program, open all valves to release internal pressure. If residual internal pressure remains, the pump
motor or a valve may be damaged.
• Confirm the rating plate of the medium-pressure coolant discharge location and the rating plate, both plates are on
the rear panel of the machine, of the corresponding valves before writing a program.
• The M codes for turning ON and OFF the valves described above show the position to where the coolant is to be
discharged for the installation of the standard configuration described in <7.15.1 Medium-pressure coolant device
(option) configuration>. The position may differ depending on customer's requirement.
• With the high-pressure coolant device, the supply pump normally starts running automatically when the coolant
level of the device drops below the float switch at the lower limit while in the automatic operation mode or during
automatic operation in the program check mode. Then, when the coolant level reaches the float switch at the upper
limit the supply pump stops.
• M458 and M459 are used to start and stop the supply pump during maintenance, when filling the coolant tank of the
high-pressure coolant device with coolant for the first time for example. They can be specified only in the MDI
mode and specifying them other than in the MDI mode causes “EX417 High pressure coolant device M-Code
alarm”. Do not specify them during automatic operation or in the program check mode.

13-74
 L32

Medium-pressure coolant piping on the rear panel of the machine

13-75
L32

13.26 Rapid Feed Rate Setting ON/OFF (M350/M351)

The standard rapid feed rate for each axis is set to 32 m/min for the X1, Y1, Z1, X2 and Z2 axes and 24m/min is set for
the Y2 axis. Use this to change the feed rate of parts that operate at G0 (feed rate) when a canned cycle, etc. is used.

 Command format
M350 X Y Z Rapid feed rate setting ON
M351 Rapid feed rate setting OFF (Restores the standard rapid feed rate)

 Argument
When specifying the function in axis control group 1 ($1)
X Specify the rapid feed rate of the X1 axis. Specification range: 0 to 32000 mm/min
Y Specify the rapid feed rate of the Y1 axis. Specification range: 0 to 32000 mm/min
Z Specify the rapid feed rate of the Z1 axis. Specification range: 0 to 32000 mm/min
When specifying the function in axis control group 1 ($2)
X Specify the rapid feed rate of the X2 axis. Specification range: 0 to 32000 mm/min
Y Specify the rapid feed rate of the Y2 axis. Specification range: 0 to 24000mm/min
Z Specify the rapid feed rate of the Z2 axis. Specification range: 0 to 32000 mm/min

 Sample program

 Note
• After turning on the rapid feed rate setting function by specifying M350, make sure to turn the function off by
specifying M351 when the function is no more necessary. If the function is not turned off, the axis moves at the
specified rapid feed rate in tool selection and the G0 mode, causing the operation to be executed slower than usual.
There are cases the cycle time is considerably increased.
• Pressing the Reset key restores the standard rapid feed rate.
• M350/M351 cannot be specified in the superimposition (G620 or G650) mode.

13-76
 L32

13.27 Cutting Start Interlock Enabled/Disabled (M86, M87)

The cutting start interlocks are automatically turned ON/OFF when the machining pattern is changed.
In general, you do not have to turn ON/OFF the cutting start interlocks by using the M codes.

 Command format
M86 Cutting start interlock enabled
(The cutting start interlock of a specified axis control group is set back to original.)
M87 Cutting start interlock disabled
(All the cutting start interlocks of a specified axis control group are disabled.)

 Relationship between the machining patterns and cutting start interlocks:

Machining S1 S2
pattern S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5
G600     
G610  
G620    
G630    
G650 Depending on the previous machining pattern
G660    
 : Cutting start interlock enabled

 Note
Cutting start interlock function may not work correctly if the cutting feed is specified immediately after the spindle or
rotary tool rotation command, even if this function is enabled. In this case, insert two or mroe G4 codes between the
rotation command and the cutting block.

13-77
L32

13.28 Error Detect ON/OFF (M92, M93)

Use this command when higher precision in edge processing is required. If the error detect is enabled (ON), cutting feed
proceeds to the next block after confirming the speed is completely decelerated. Thus, the desired edge precision can be
obtained.

 Command format
M92 Error detect ON
M93 Error detect OFF

 Sample program
$1
:
T0200 (Front turning)
G0 X11.0 Z-1.0 T02
X6.0
M92 (ON)
G1 Z0 F0.05
X7.0
X8.0 Z0.5 F0.03
Z10.0 F0.05
X10.0
G0 X11.0 T00
M93 (OFF)
:

 Note
• Error detect function is disabled at power on (error detect OFF (M93)).
• Error detect function is effective only when G1, G2, or G3 command is specified.
• Difference from the exact stop check (G9) function
The exact stop check function is enabled only in the block where G9 is specified. Meanwhile, the error detect ON
(M92) is enabled until the error detect OFF (M93) is specified.
• When the error detect function is enabled, the longer cycle time is required than that in disabled state because the
completion of cutting feed is prolonged.

13-78
 L32

13.29 Start Position Queuing (Type 1) (G115)

 Command format
!L G115 X Z C

 Operation example
This command specifies a start position to provide a queuing point halfway through a block.
[Motion sequence]
1. When queuing is specified in the program for an axis control group (local axis control group), the other axis control
group (remote axis control group) starts moving first.
2. The local axis control group starts moving when the remote axis control group reaches the specified start position.
3. If the start position specified by G115 does not exist on the next-block moving path of the remote axis control
group, the local axis control group starts moving when the remote axis control group reaches all axis coordinate
values of the commanded position.
4. The start position check applies only to the axis specified by G115.
5. If the start position is not found when the remote axis control group moves to the next block, the local axis control
group waits until the remote axis control group reaches the start position by moving beyond the next block.
6. If the two axis control groups overlap by the G115 command, they remain queued.
7. When specifying the start position, use the work coordinate values of the remote axis control group.
8. Specifying G115 for more than three axis control groups results in the program error P33.
9. The G115 block is not subject to single-block stop.
10. If two or more G115 blocks are specified consecutively, the block specified last is valid.
11. The addresses that follow G115 are the X-axis, Z-axis, and C-axis workpiece coordinates.

13-79
L32

13.30 Start Position Queuing (Type 2) (G116)

 Command format
!L G116 X Z C

 Operation example
When queuing is specified in the program for an axis control group (local axis control group), the local axis
control group starts moving first.
[Motion sequence]
1. The other axis control group (remote axis control group) starts moving when the local axis control group reaches
the specified start position.
2. If the start position specified by G116 does not exist on the next-block moving path of the local axis control group,
the remote axis control group starts moving when the local axis control group reaches all axis coordinate values of
the commanded position.
3. The start position check applies only to the axis specified by G116.
4. If the start position is not found when the local axis control group moves to the next block, the program error P33
occurs before the local axis control group starts moving.
5. If the two axis control groups overlap by the G116 command, they remain stopped.
6. When specifying the start position, use the work coordinate values of the remote axis control group.
7. If G116 is specified for more than three axis control groups, multiple remote axis control groups start moving
simultaneously.
8. The G116 block is not subject to single-block stop.
9. If two or more G116 blocks are specified consecutively, the block specified last is valid.
10. The addresses that follow G116 are the X-axis, Z-axis, and C-axis work coordinates.

13-80
 L32

13.31 Auxiliary Function Output during Axis Feed (G117)

 Command format
G117 X Z C 
Auxiliary function

 Operation example
This command specifies an intermediate point and the auxiliary function to be output at that point. It allows the
auxiliary function to be executed during movement.
[Motion sequence]
1. This command is placed independently immediately before the moving command block in which you want the
auxiliary function to be executed.
2. This command is not subject to single-block stop.
3. In the G117 block, auxiliary functions can be specified within the limit indicated below.
M command: 4 sets (M code used for macro: No more than 2 sets)
S command: 1 set each
T command: 1 set

4. This command can be specified for up to two consecutive blocks.

If three blocks or more are specified consecutively, the last two blocks are valid.
5. If the operation start position specified by G117 does not exist on the moving path, the auxiliary function is output
when all axis coordinate values of the operation start position are reached. Only the specified axes are checked.
6. At the operation start position, after checking that the previous auxiliary function has been output, the next
auxiliary function is output. The PC interface can be used as usually without modification.
7. The auxiliary function specified along with a moving command block is output before movement is started.
Movement does not stop at the operation start position. Note that, at the block end position, after checking that all
auxiliary functions have been output, the next block is executed.
8. G117 should be specified in the order of operation start positions. The program error P33 occurs if the order of
operation start positions is opposite to the moving sequence.
When the operation start positions match the moving sequence, auxiliary functions are output in the order in which
they are specified.
9. If the operation start position for the next block is not found, the program error P33 occurs before moving to the
next block.
10. The descriptions (8) to (9) above can be summarized as in the following table:
First block First block
Intermediate point found during No intermediate point during movement
movement
Second block The order in 8 is followed. Program error occurs as in 8.
Intermediate point found
during movement
Second block The order in 9 is followed for the The order in 9 is followed. Auxiliary functions
No intermediate point second block. are output in the order of the first block, then the
during movement second block regardless of the order of the
specified points.
11. The addresses that follow G117 are the X-axis, Z-axis, and C-axis work coordinates.

13-81
L32

13.32 Arbitrary Axis Change (G140)

Use the G140 command to declare the axis you want to use.
Use the G140 command to declare the axes you want to superimpose on each other.

 Command format
G140 X=X1 Z=Z1 Y=Y1 The command specifies the axes to be used in the subsequent operations as follows:
X=X1, Z=Z1, Y=Y1
G140 X=X1 Z=Z2 Y=Y1 The command specifies the axes to be used in the subsequent operations as follows:
X=X1, Z=Z2, Y=Y1
Gang tool post X1 Z1 Y1 C1 (Z1: Main headstock, C1: Main spindle C axis)
Opposite tool post X2 Z2 C2 (C2: Back spindle C axis) Y2

 Sample program
$1 $2

G600........................ Machining pattern cancel G600 ................................... Machining pattern cancel

T0800
:
:
!2L1 !1L1
G4 ....................................... * The G4 command is
executed to prevent the
read ahead of G140 while
$1 is using the X1 axis
and Y1 axis
G140 X=X1 Z=Z2 Y=Y1 The arbitrary axis change
(G140) command is executed
after $1 finishes using the X1
axis and Y1 axis

:
G140 X=_ Z=_ Y=_;............ Must be returned to the
previous axis.
:

 Note
Before the arbitrary axis change (G140) command can be executed to declare the number of an axis being used by
another axis control group, the queuing command must be executed for the axis control group to finish using the axis. At
this time, the G4 command must also be executed to prevent the read ahead of G140 after the queuing command.

Be careful when using the G140 command (arbitrary axis change). If the G140 command is specified to
declare an axis that is being used by another axis control group, the machine may encounter an
interference problem.

13-82
 L32

13.33 End Position Specified Queuing (G149)

This command enables queuing between an arbitrary position in an arbitrary block in the local axis control group and an
arbitrary block position in the remote axis control group.
While the standard queuing function adjusts the start timing between the queuing axis control groups, this function
adjusts the end timing of the end block specified by the block ID number.

 Command format
!L G149 Q X Z C End position specified queuing
Q represents the end position block number. It is specified
by BN .

 Sample program
$1 $2

G98 G0 X1.1
!2 G149 Q100 X1.0 ....... Queuing block specification !1 Q120 ......................... Queuing block specification
...................................... Queuing time ...................................... Queuing time
G1 X5.0 F50
BN100 G1 X–1.0 F10 BN120 G1 Z50.0 F100

With this example, block BN120 in $2 is completed when the X axis in $1 passes a point of 1.0 in block BN100.
• The end position queuing position must be specified in the work coordinate system.
• Only the axis on which a queuing position has been specified is checked for its passing the end position.
• If the queuing position is specified on multiple axes, the queuing time is the time by which all the specified axes
have passed the specified point.
• If the specified axis does not pass the point specified in the block of the specified end position block number, a
program error (P33 format error) occurs when the G149 command is issued.
• If the end position block number of the G149-specified axis control group is not found within 10 blocks from the end
position specified queuing command or if no P code has been specified, the required time is calculated assuming the
moving block in which all the specified axes has passed the specified point as the end position specification block.
Note, however, that a program error (P700BN No number) occurs if the moving block is not found within 10 blocks
from the end position queuing command.)
• The program error (P700BN No number) also occurs if the end position block number of an axis control group not
specified by G149 is not found within 10 blocks from the end-pint queuing command.
• If a macro call or subprogram call is included within the range specified for end position specified queuing, the
macro call or subprogram call and M99 are counted as one block.
• Whichever axis control group that requires shorter run time for the range of program specified for end position
specified queuing waits for processing to be started. ($2 may move first.)
• The end position queuing position is not aligned if the range of program specified for end position specified queuing
requires run time exceeding two hours.
• Do not place an end position specified queuing command within 10 blocks from another end position specified
queuing command. Doing so causes a program error (P700BN No number).
• Within the range specified for end position specified queuing, do not include any command for changing the
workpiece coordinate system, shifting the local coordinate system, presetting the counter, or for milling. Otherwise,
the end position specified queuing position is mis-aligned because the specified position is calculated on the
workpiece coordinate system effective in the block in which end position queuing is specified.
• The end position may not be able to be obtained if any of the following commands is placed, in the range of program
specified for end position specified queuing, for controlling the axis having the specified end position. Do not
include the following commands concerning the end position specified axis.
• Arbitrary axis exchange control, Direct axis control
• Arbitrary axis superimpose control
• Address Q that follows G149 specifies a queued block; X1, Z1, and C specify their respective work coordinates.
• If an axis passes the queuing position even once in the range of the program from the block of G149 to the block
immediately before the BN block, queuing is not executed correctly.

13-83
L32

13.34 Arbitrary Axes Superimposition (G156)

Use the G156 command to declare the axes you want to superimpose on each other.

 Command format
G156 Z2=Z1 Superimpose ON The Z2 axis is superimposed on the Z1 axis.
G156 Z2 Superimpose OFF (To cancel superimposition, specify the superimposed axis.)
The superimposition of the Z2 axis on the Z1 axis is
canceled.
Gang tool post:X1Z1Y1C1 (Z1: Main headstock, C1: Main spindle C axis)
Back spindle head stock:X2Z2C2 (C2: Back spindle C axis)

 Sample program
$1 $2
G600.............................. Machining pattern cancel G600 ............................. Machining pattern cancel
T0300 T3300
!2L1 !1L1
: G156 Z2=Z1 .................. Arbitrary axis superimpose
!2L2 !1L2
: G50 Z*** ........................ Coordinate system setting
: :
: :
: :
!2L3 !1L3
G156 Z2 ........................ Superimpose cancel
!2L4 !1L4
: :

 Note
• Before the arbitrary 1-pair axes (G156) command can be executed, the queuing command must be executed for
stopping the base axis and the axis to be superimposed. The queuing command must also be executed before the
superimposition cancel command.
• After executing the arbitrary 1-pair axes superimposition command (G156), set the coordinate system of the
superimposed axis conforming to the coordinate system of the base axis.
• The G53 command cannot be executed for a superimposed axis during execution of the superimpose function.
• By specifying a sign preceding an axis name like "G156 Y2=－Y1", the superimposed axis can be moved in the
opposite direction of the reference axis movement direction.
• To cancel superimposition, specify G156 and the superimposed axis in the program of the axis control group that
contains the superimposed axis.

13-84
 L32

13.35 Line Angle Command

This command is used to define the end position of a line by specifying the angle of the line and the coordinate value of
either of two axes of the end position. The command automatically calculates the coordinate value of the end position of
the other axis and controls axis movement accordingly.
Therefore, the line that has the desired angle can be directly specified using the angle without calculating the coordinate
values of the end position.

 Command format
G1 X (Y) (Z) A F

 Argument

 Sample program 1

:
G1 X5.0 F0.03 ......................................... 
Z5.0 ......................................................... 
X9.0 A30.0 ............................................... 
Z15.0 ....................................................... 
:

13-85
L32

 Sample program 2

:
G1 X10.0 F0.05 ....................................... 
Z4.0 ......................................................... 
Z7.0 A-45.0 .............................................. 
Z12.0 ....................................................... 
:

 Note
• Specify the angle of the line by measuring it in reference to the positive direction of the horizontal axis in the
selected plane (G18). The angle measured in the counterclockwise direction is expressed with the "+" (plus) sign and
that in the clockwise direction with the "–" (minus) sign.

• For the end position, specify either of the axes constituting the selected plane (G18).
If the angle and the coordinate value of both axes are specified, the angle is disregarded.
• This command is valid only in the G1 mode. It is not valid for other interpolation modes or positioning modes.

13-86
 L32

13.36 Geometric Command

It is possible to define the chamfering or R shape on the corner formed by arbitrary lines by combining the corner
chamfering/corner R command, explained in <13.10 Corner Chamfering / Corner R >, and the line angle command
explained in <13.35 Line Angle Command>.
If the coordinate values of the point of intersection of two lines cannot be calculated easily, the geometric command
function calculates the coordinate values of such a point by simply specifying the angle of the first line and the
coordinate values (absolute values) of the end position and the angle of the second line. The function automatically
calculates the coordinate values of the end position of the first line and controls axis movements.

 Command format
G1 A *1 ,R(C) F ;
X(Y) Z A *2;

 Argument
A *1 Specify the slope (angle) of the first line.
,R(C) Specify the R (chamfering) amount at the corner formed between two lines.
(This argument can be omitted if corner R (chamfering) is not necessary.)
F Specify the feed rate.
X Specify the X coordinate value (absolute value) of the end position of the second line.
Y Specify the Y coordinate value (absolute value) of the end position of the second line.
Z Specify the Z coordinate value (absolute value) of the end position of the second line.
A *2 Specify the slope (angle) of the second line.

 Sample program

:
G1 Z5.0 F0.1;
X9.536;
G1 A75.0 ,R0.3 F0.03;
X19.0 Z9.732 A15.0;
Z20.0 F0.1
:

13-87
L32

13.37 Free Tool Layout Pattern (Holder Name = Free Tool)

This command allows the number of tools to be increased by changing the pitch between the tools on the tool post.
Usualy, 18 gang tools is available on gang tool post. Specify "Free Tool" as holder names on the Machining Data screen.
However, you will need to manufacture a special holder in accordance with your requiremnet.

 Command format
T (Four-digit T code)
This command is much the same as an ordinary tool selection command.
Usually, T01 to T19,T21 to T29, T51 to T59, T30, and T31 to T39 can be used.

 Tool Layout Pattern screen

Enter the tool position data on the Tool Pattern screen shown below.

Like the ordinary machining, an ordinary command can be issued in the X-Y coordinates after tool selection. Each
program can be created as before.

 Note
• Notice that the tool moves using the T code.
• Confirm the contents of the following before machining when the free tool layout is used.
1. Check whether "Free Tool" has been specified as holder name 1 to 3 on the Machining Data screen.
2. Check the position of each tool from the guide bushing center as the reference point.
• Sufficient T codes are provided in the machine software. In actual usage, tool size and other mechanical factors are
subject to limitations. Take proper care during operation.

13-88
 L32

13.38 User Macro Program (Program Call by G code)

To call the user macro program that has been edited and registered, you can use G code number instead of using O
number. Up to 200 code numbers (between G1200 and G1399) can be registered. O8100 to O8999 are used as program
numbers for this function. You may use the conventional method, calling by O number.

 Command format
G65 P8101; Program call by O number (conventional method)
G1201; Program call by G code

 Operating Procedures
[Procedure]
1. Press the Parameter key .

2. Press the menu key [Set Up 1].

3. Specify values according to the table below.

 Preparation Parameter screen

No. Item Description Setting
value
8071 For G1200 to Type 0:M98 P**** 0～3
G1299 1:G65 P****
2:G66 P****
3:G66.1 P****
8072 Program No. Specify the numerical value for the hundreds place of the user 1～9
program number to be called. If "3" is specified, G1200 to G1299
correspond to O8300 to O.8399.
Ex.) G1256 calls O8356.
8073 For G1300 to Type 0:M98 P**** 0～3
G1399 1:G65 P****
2:G66 P****
3:G66.1 P****
8074 Program No. Specify the numerical value for the hundreds place of the user 1～9
program number to be called. If "5" is specified, G1300 to G1399
correspond to O8500 to 8599.
Ex.) G1356 calls O8556.

 Note
• G1200 to G1399 must be specified in single block. These codes cannot be specified together with any other codes in
the same block.
• A, B, C, G, M, N, O, P, S, or T cannot be used as an argument.
• The argument cannot be used when the user macro G code call type is M98.
• G, L, N, O and P cannot be used as an argument when the user macro G code call type is G65, G66 or G66.1.

13-89
L32

13.39 User Macro Date Adding Function

This macro sets NC date information in a machine variable. Use a user macro to date stamp work pieces and for other
applications.

 Address
Date: Machine variable #25916
Time: Machine variable #25917

 Format
Da te: YYMMDD example) 2014/2/10 → 140210.000
Ti me: HHMMSS example) 12:45:02 → 124502.000

 Sample program
:
#1= [#25916] .......................................... Date data is set in variable 1
#2= [#25917] .......................................... Time data is set in variable 2
;
#3=RND [#1 / 10000.000 + 2000.000] Years are set in variable 3
#4=RND [#1 MOD 10000.0 / 100.000] Months are set in variable 4
#5=#1 MOD 100.000 Days are set in variable 5
:

13-90
 L32

13.40 DPRINT Function (POPEN, PCLOS, BPRNT, DPRNT)

Use this function to output values or characters of variables according to NC program, via RS-232C interface.

 Command format
POPEN Preparation for data output
PCLOS End processing for data output
BPRNT Outputs characters and variable values in binary format
DPRNT Outputs characters and variable values by every digit

Switching output destination using NC program commands

• CH1: RS232C
• CH2: CF card
• CH3: USB flash drive
• CH4: Network drive (when the OP network I/O function is enabled)

 Format
DPRINT [CHx] Example) DPRNT [CH2] → switches the output destination to a CF card.

 Sample program
$1
POPEN;
DPRNT [CH1] ;
DPRNT [ABC #500 [53] DEF #800 [44]] ;
DPRNT [CH2] ;
DPRNT [ABC #500 [53] DEF #800 [44]] ;
PCLOS;

The command in the second block changes the output destination to RS232C and the command in the third block is
output to RS232C.
The fourth block changes the output destination to CF card and the command in the fifth block is sent to the CF card.
The last output destination change is stored as the output destination in the DPRINT setting in the I/O screen.
Variable #500:-400.000, #800:1.2346
In [53] and [44], specify the number of digits required for integral and decimal parts.
Note: Total number of digits for integral and decimal parts must not exceed 8.
(For example, [53] represents that five digits for integral part and three digits for decimal part are specified.)

 Format for outputting data to RS-232C and CF cards

Communication parameter: CRLF for EOB output, 0 for feed count

DC2％CRLF
ABC-400.000DEF1.2346CRLF
％DC4

 Note
To output data to RS-232C, be sure to specify PCLOS command to close the line. Do not terminate communication with
the line being opened by POPEN command. The line is closed by Reset command, but it is not closed at 1-cycle stop. If
an operation is attempted on the Input/Output screen while the line is open, machine operation is not guaranteed.

13-91
L32

13.41 External Memory Program Operation Function

 Outline
This function allows the use of subprograms stored in the CF (Compact Flash) memory card. Insert the CF card into the
CF card slot at the front of the operation panel.

 Setup procedures
See <6.18 External Memory Program Operation>.

 Command format
M98 P H L ,D2

 Argument
P Program number (1 to 99999999) of the subprogram to be called
(If omitted, the main program is called.)
H Sequence number (1 to 99999) in the subprogram to be called
(If omitted, the program is executed from the beginning of the main program.)
L The number of times (1 to 9999) the subprogram is to be repeated.
(If omitted, L1 is assumed.)
,D2 Specify this when calling a program stored in the compact flash memory card (CF).

 Sample program

 Note
• The programs stored in external memory can be called and executed only as subprogram. They cannot be used as a
main program.
• During the operation using the subprogram stored in the CF card, do not remove the CF card from the slot.

13-92
 L32

13.42 Collision Detection Function

When an interference is detected, this fucntion suppress the excessive torque of the motor to minimize the mechanical
damage to the machine.

This function is aimed to minimize the machine damage due to interference.

This function does not protect the machine from interference, nor guarantee the maintenance-free
operation.

When the machine is running at rapid feed rate and the motor torque exceeds the boundary to detect a collision, this
function reduces the speed and stops the machine, then issue an alarm. This function generates bring back torque to pull
the motor to the reverse direction. It pulls the motor in the reverse direction by about 100 to 200 µ.
The Collision Detection Function is valid only when the machine is running at rapid feed rate (G00), not at cutting feed
rate.

Torque diagram in rapid feed

The boundary for detecting collisions is set with a leeway based on the torque estimated from the inertia. If a collision
alarm has occurred, one of the following problems might be causing the alarm.
• Interference has occurred among the workpiece, tools, and machine.
• There is a load on the machine’s feed mechanism.
• The clearance between the guide bushing and the workpiece is insufficient and seizure has occurred between
them.
.
In these cases, take necessary measures such as reviewing the machining layout and programs, inspecting the machine,
or adjusting the guide bushing clearance.

13-93
L32

13.43 Optional Block Skip

13.43.1 Expansion of the optional block skip function
By specifying a number "1" to "9" following the slash code "/" at the beginning of a program block, up to nine kinds of
optional block skip can be used. Specification of a multiple block skip commands in a single block is also allowed.
If only a slash code "/" is specified without a number, it is regarded as "/1".

 Operation
Setting valid/invalid for the optional block skip "/1" ("/") function
[Procedure]
1. On the Automatic Operation, On-Machine Check or MDI screen, press the menu key [Skip1].
The menu item is highlighted and the optional block skip "/1" ("/") function is enabled.
To make the function invalid, press the menu key [Skip1] again. The menu item display returns to the normal
display and the optional block skip "/1" ("/") function is disabled.
Setting valid/invalid for the optional block skip "/2" to "/9" function
[Procedure]
1. Press the menu key [Set SW].
The Set SW screen appears.
2. On the Set SW screen, turn on the optional block skip switch for the optional block skip 2 to 9 functions to be used.
This enables the selected optional block skip function.
Turn off the optional block skip switch to disable the optional block skip function.

 Command format
/1 to /9
Specification of only a slash code "/" without a number is equivalent to "/1".

 Sample program
When optional block skip 2 is enabled.

*1
Turning on of the optional block skip 2 switch on the Set SW screen skips the blocks preceded by "/2" when the
program is executed.

13-94
 L32

When optional block skip 1 or 3 is enabled.

*1
Turning on of the optional block skip 3 switch on the Set SW screen skips the blocks preceded by "/3" when the
program is executed.
*2
Pressing the menu key [Skip1] on the Automatic Operation screen skips the blocks preceded by "/1" or "/" when the
program is executed.

 Note
• Optional block skip 1 to 9 functions are invalid when the power supply to the NC operation panel is turned on.
• Although "/" is equivalent to "/1", use "/1" if several slash codes are to be specified in a block. Specification of
several slash codes in the form of "/ /3 N20 G1 X25.0", for example, causes an alarm.
• For the slash code "/", only a number in the range from 1 to 9 is allowed. Specification of "/13 N20 G1 X25.0", for
example, causes an alarm.
• For the slash code "/", a variable cannot be used instead of a number. Specification of "/#502 N20 G1 X25.0", for
example, causes an alarm.
• For the slash code "/", only an integer can be used. Specification of "/1.2 N20 G1 X25.0", for example, causes an
alarm.

13-95
L32

13.43.2 Optional block skip M code (M238)

By specifying M238, it is possible to skip program blocks between M238 and a sequence number.
The optional block skip function, specified by the slash code "/", can be used together.

 Command format
M238 A1 to 9
N9991 to N9999

 Argument
• A number (1 to 9) that follows the A argument corresponds to the last digit of a four-digit sequence number (9991 to
9999). The combinations of an A argument and a sequence number are "A1 and N9991", "A2 and N9992", "A3 and
N9993" to "A9 and N9999".
• If the A argument is omitted, it is regarded as A1.
• Sequence numbers N9991 to N9999 must not be used for other purposes. If a sequence number in this range is used
incorrectly, blocks will be skipped unexpectedly.

 Sample program
When optional block skip 2 is enabled.

*1
Turning on of the optional block skip 2 switch on the Set SW screen skips blocks from M238A2 to N9992 when the
program is executed.

13-96
 L32

When optional block skip 1 or 3 is enabled.

*1
Turning on of the optional block skip 3 switch on the Set SW screen skips blocks from M238A3 to N9993 when the
program is executed.
*2
Pressing the menu key [Skip1] on the Automatic Operation screen skips the blocks from M238 (A1) to N9991 when
the program is executed.

13-97
L32

13.44 Thermal Displacement Correction Function

The thermal displacement correction function observes the components of machine and predicts the amount of thermal
displacement of the machine.
This function automatically adds the correction amount to the tool positioning coordinate.
By using this function, the amount of thermal displacement can be reduced at the cold start or during halting state.
If a tool is selected by T code, it is positioned to the point where the thermal displacement correction amount is reflected.
This reflection is performed internally in the NC unit. Thus, tool wear compensation and shape compensation can be
performed as usual.

 Target axes
• X1 axis (T01 to T14)
• X2 axis (T21 to T24, T31 to T39)

 Note
• Correction will be performed on the target axis only.
• If the tool is positioned without using the T code command, the amount of thermal displacement correction will not
be reflected.
• The amount of thermal displacement correction is updated at the cycle start, when M2 is specified, or when the bar
stock change is executed.
Accordingly, the amount of thermal displacement correction is not changed within a cycle operation.
• After enabling the thermal displacement correction function, be sure to perform cutting to check the size of
machined workpiece.

13.44.1 Environmental requirements and restrictions on use

Required environmental conditions for thermal displacement correction function are as follows:
In an environment where the temperature is out of this range or obstruction frequently occurs, the thermal displacement
correction function may not work correctly. In such a case, disable this function.

 Environmental condition
• Ambient temperature at site: 10 to 30°C
• Range of temperature change in a day: Within 10°C

The default setting of thermal displacement correction function is "Enabled". However, some
restrictions are imposed on using this function as described below.

* For how to enable or disable the thermal displacement correction function, see <13.44.2 Setting thermal displacement
correction function>.

 Restrictions
• The thermal displacement correction function is unavailable if water-soluble coolant is used.
Disable the thermal displacement correction function.
• The correction results may not be constant even if the same machining program is used, due to characteristics of the
thermal displacement correction function.

13-98
 L32

13.44.2 Setting thermal displacement correction function

Use Machine Structure screen to enable or disable the thermal displacement correction function.

 Setting method
[Procedure]
1. Press the Manual select key or Preparation key to enter the EDIT mode.

2. Open the Machine Structure screen.

Press the Parameter key and press the Menu selection key several times until the menu key [MC-STRCT]
appears. Then, press the menu key [MC-STRCT].
3. Set the thermal displacement correction function.

When the following screen appears, press the menu key [Set].
Use the Arrow keys to move the cursor onto "T.D.C. Function Enabled"

, and press the Input key to put a checkmark in checkbox.

: Enabled state  : Shows Disabled state
4. Be sure to power on the machine to make effective the new setting.

13-99
L32

13.45 B Code I/F (MB)

The B code I/F is used to control external peripheral equipment via I/O.

 Command format
MB B code command

：Specify any integer. Specify an integer between 1 and 255.

Enter a value between 1 and 255 in the box after "MB" and the corresponding binary Y output signal will go on (1).
Y87 Y86 Y85 Y84 Y83 Y82 Y81 Y80
MB1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
MB2 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
MB3 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
MB4 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
: :
MB255 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

For example a "MB3" specification will result in "00000011" and the Y81 output signal (I/O:Y8.1) and the Y80 output
signal (I/O:Y8.0) go on (1). And when the common X input signal X82 (I/O: X8.2) is on (1), the above Y output signal
goes off (0).

 Note
• Only 1 B code can be executed per block.
• The B code command in a multi-axis system can be executed independently for each system.

13-100
 L32

13.46 Simultaneous Machining

The Z1 and Z2 axes can be specified independently. This enables free simultaneous machining.
The way to machine with superimposition and the way to machine without superimposition are available for
simultaneous machining.

13.46.1 Inner/outer diameter simultaneous machining

For the simultaneous machining, perform the outer diameter machining by T02, and the hole machining by a T21
(recommended), T22 on T03 tool. However, some restrictions for stroke exist depending on the relation between the tool
shape and the diameter of front drilling tool.
Interference may occur if another combination of tools are used for simultaneous machining.
• Select tools for each axis control group ($1 (gang tool post) and $2 (opposite tool post)) by the ordinary T
command.
• After machining is complete, be sure to move the tool to the positioning point.
• The machining is performed at the feed rate (F) specified in each axis control group.
As shown in the figure below, the machining is performed by combining the vertical tools and the tools on the opposite
tool post.

Figure 1 Simultaneous machining for outer and inner diameters

 Note
• The opposite tool post assumes tools whose maximum drilling diameter is 10 mm. Be careful when using tools
exceeding the diameter or odd-shaped tools because they have potential risk of interference.
• Be careful in simultaneous boring with the opposite tool post, when the gang tool and the tool on the opposite tool
post are off-centered, causing some tools to interfere with each other.

13-101
L32

13.46.1.1 Outer diameter cutting and drilling simultaneous machining

 Outline of machining

 Sample program

13-102
 L32

13.46.1.2 Outer/Inner diameter simultaneous machining (boring)

 Outline of machining

 Sample program

13-103
L32

13.47 ø38 Specification (Option) Tooling Restrictions

When a ø38 specification option is mounted, be sure to check "Oversize specification" in the Machine
Structure screen. If this setting is not made in the <6.12 Machine Structure>,
the following may happen.
• When the Z1 axis moves forward, the RGB machine (ø38 specification, option) and the front end may
interfere with each other.

When the "Oversize specification" is selected in the Machine Structure screen, use the GTF6016 tool holder. Five tools
can be mounted changing the tool numbers on a gang rotary tool drive device. Tool post..See layout diagram. T01
standard tool setting position is automatically switched.
For restrictions regarding tooling, see <17. Tooling>.

13-104
 L32

13.48 Loader device

The loader device receives workpieces from external bar loaders and transfers them to a spindle during forging.

13.48.1 Workpiece loading operations (M42)

By specifying this M code, the loader hand on the loader device receives the workpiece from an external bar loader,
moves it to the workpiece loading position and performs all the operations to transfer the workpiece to a spindle.

 Command format
M42 R A F C T K W0 Workpiece loading operations

 Axis control group

$1

 Argument
R: Allows you to specify the return position (spindle workpiece loading return position) when the spindle
receives the workpiece from the loader. Specify the distance from the front spindle return position. If the
argument is omitted, it moves to the front spindle return position (Z1 = 0.0 mm). A value larger than 65.0 is
ignored.
A: Allows you to specify the advance position (spindle workpiece loading advance position) when the spindle
receives the workpiece from the loader. Specify the distance from the front spindle return position (Z1 =
0.0mm). Settings that are larger than 65.0 or that omit the argument are ignored.
F: Allows you to specify the feed rate when the spindle receives the workpiece from the loader (unit: mm/min). If
arguments are omitted, specify F=500.0.
C: Allows you to specify the index angle when the spindle receives the workpiece from the loader. If the
argument is omitted, indexing is not performed (index angle is determined by an option setting).
T: Allows you to specify air blowing when the spindle receives the workpiece from the loader (unit: sec). If no
argument is specified, air blowing is not performed.
K: After opening of the loader hand, the main spindle chuck opens and closes twice to stabilize the posture of the
workpiece. The value set with this argument specifies the dwell time between the first and second chuck
opening/closing operations. (Unit: second) K0 specifies a dwell of 0 second and K1.0 specifies a dwell of 1.0
second. When omitted, no dwelling and chuck open/close operation are carried out after closing the chuck.
W0: Spindle retraction is not performed when the spindle receives the workpiece from the loader.

 Operations
Workpiece loading operations Loader device parallel machining
(1) The spindle moves to the "spindle workpiece (Start of parallel machining): First cycle only
loading return position" at a rapid feed rate.
(2) Shutter closed: (1) Spindle operation and parallel (11) The loader device moves to the "workpiece loading
machining position."
(3) Spindle indexing (when a C argument is (12) The loader device moves to the "position where it will
specified): (1) Spindle operation and parallel receive the workpiece"
machining
(13) Request for workpiece from the external bar loader
(14) The hand closes.
(15) Request that external bar loader releases the
workpiece.
(16) The loader device moves to the "workpiece loading
position."
(17) Request that external bar loader be retracted
(Parallel machining completed)
(Waiting for completion of parallel machining)
(4) The loader moves to "workpiece loading
position" and spindle air blow goes on (when a T
argument is specified)
(5) The spindle moves to the "spindle workpiece
loading advance position" at a speed specified by
the F argument.
(6) The loader hand opens.

13-105
L32

Workpiece loading operations Loader device parallel machining

(7) Main spindle chuck close
The following items are executed only when a K
argument is specified.
Dwell is executed for the time specified with
the K argument.
The main spindle chuck opens.
Dwell is executed for the time specified with
the K argument.
The main spindle chuck closes.
Dwell is executed for the time specified with
the K argument.
(8) The spindle retracts to the "spindle workpiece
loading return position" at a rapid feed rate.
(9) The loader device retracts to the "workpiece
loading position."
(10) Shutter closes. (Parallel machining started)
(11) The loader device moves to the "workpiece loading
position."
(12) The loader device moves to the "position where it will
receive the workpiece"
(13) Request for workpiece from the external bar loader
(14) The hand closes.
(15) Request that external bar loader releases workpiece
(16) The loader device moves to the "workpiece loading
position."
(17) Request that external bar loader be retracted
(Parallel machining completed)
[Motion sequence]
1. The spindle moves to the "spindle workpiece loading return position" specified by the R argument at a rapid feed
rate.

2. When the spindle moves to a position where the shutter can close, spindle retraction and parallel machining closes
it.
3. When a C argument is supplied, spindle indexing starts simultaneously with spindle retraction.
(11) - (17) After receiving the workpiece, the loader moves to the "workpiece loading position" ((1) - (3) and
parallel machining).
4. After the spindle moves to the "spindle workpiece loading return position" the loader device moves to the
"workpiece loading position."

5. When a T argument is supplied, the spindle airblow is on.

13-106
 L32

6. The spindle moves to the "spindle workpiece loading advance position" specified by the A argument at a speed
specified by the F argument.

7. The loader hand opens.

8. Main spindle chuck close
9. The spindle retracts to the "spindle workpiece loading return position" at a rapid feed rate.
10. The loader device moves to the "workpiece loading position."
11. The shutter opens (after this parallel machining by the loader device starts (11) - (17)).

 Sample program
$1 $2
M42A10.0 (Workpiece loading operations) (Back spindle machining)

G630 (Front/back parallel machining) G630 (Front/back parallel machining)

• Gang tool machining and cross drilling using T01's tool • End-face drilling using T31 tool
• End-face drilling using T11 tool M34 (Product collection)

G650 (pick-off) G650 (pick-off)

G600 G600

G999 (last program) G999 (last program)

N999 N999
G698 (front spindle moves to the return position)

M2 M2

13-107
L32

 R argument and A argument (example)

• Workpiece length: 70 mm
• Spindle chuck grip length: 30.5 mm
• Spindle workpiece protrusion: 39.5 mm

 Note
• Check that the external bar loader is operating.
• When two control axis groups are specified, an alarm is generated.
• If specified when the spindle is gripping a workpiece (chuck closed), an alarm is generated.
• When the A argument is not specified or is larger than the maximum loader forward position (Z1 = 65.0 mm), an
alarm is generated.
• When the R argument is larger than the maximum loader forward position (Z1 = 65.0 mm), an alarm is generated.
• The R argument is normally set to the same value as the "spindle return position" of machining data or the G698 R
argument.
• Specify the M42 alone. Do not specify these codes along with any other code in the same block.
• If the loader device generates an alarm during execution of an M42 command, machining continues and the $2 side
ignores $1 system queuing. However, if a G650 or G660 specification has been supplied, which starts synchronous
operation with the $1 system, the loader device will output an alarm message and the machine stops.

13-108
 L32

13.48.2 Workpiece loading preparations (M42)

When this M code is specified with an argument, the loader hand on the loader device receives the workpiece from an
external bar loader, moves it to the workpiece loading position and performs all the operations to transfer the workpiece
to a spindle. These operations are performed parallel with the main program.

 Command format
M42 Q1 Workpiece loading preparations

 Axis control group

$1

 Argument
Q1: When specified with this argument, workpiece loading preparations start. If no argument is specified,
workpiece loading operations start.

 Operations
Workpiece loading preparations
(Parallel machining started)
(1) The loader moves to the "position where it will receive the workpiece."
(2) Request for workpiece from the external bar loader
(3) The hand closes.
(4) Request that external bar loader release the workpiece
(5) The loader device moves to the "workpiece loading position."
(6) Request that external bar loader be retracted
(Parallel machining completed)

 Sample program
$1 $2
:
M223 ............................ Arm advance
G1 W5.0 F500 Spindle advance
M226 ............................ The hand opens.
M6 ................................ Chuck close
G1 W-5.0 F500
M224 ............................ The arm retracts.
M42 Q1......................... Workpiece loading preparations
:
:

 Note
• Check that the external bar loader is operating.
• When two control axis groups are specified, an alarm is generated.
• If not specified when the arm is retracted, an alarm will be generated.
• Specify the M42 alone. Do not specify these codes along with any other code in the same block.

13-109
L32

13.48.3 Loader advance, retract (M221, M222)

 Outline
Advances or retracts the loader device.

 Command format
M221 Loader advance
M222 Loader retract

 Operations
• Loader advance (M221)
Use the loader advance (M221) command to advance the loader with the air cylinder.
• Loader retract (M222)
Use the loader retract (M222) command to retract the loader with the air cylinder.

 Note
• When the loader arm advances, an alarm is generated if the M221 or M222 commands is also specified.
• Since an alarm is generated if the M221 or M222 command is specified when the loader is not at the front or rear
end, manually move the loader to the front or rear end before using these commands.
• When two control axis groups are specified, an alarm is generated.

13.48.4 Loader arm advance, retract (M223, M224)

 Outline
Advances or retracts the arm of the loader device.

 Command format
M223 Loader advance
M224 Loader retract

 Operations
• Loader arm advance (M223)
Use the loader arm advance (M223) command to advance the arm with the air cylinder.
• Loader arm retract (M224)
Use the loader arm retract (M224) command to retract the arm with the air cylinder.

 Note
• When the loader arm retracts, an alarm is generated if the M223 or M224 command is also specified.
• Since an alarm is generated if the M223 or M224 command is specified when the loader arm is not at the front or rear
end, manually move the loader arm to the front or rear end before using these commands.
• When the spindle headstock (Z1 axis) is at a position beyond 65.0 mm, an alarm is generated if the M223 command
is also specified.
• When two control axis groups are specified, an alarm is generated.
• When the arm advances, the Z1 axis stroke is limited to prevent interference.

13-110
 L32

13.48.5 The loader hand opens and closes. (M225, M226)

 Outline
The loader device hand opens and closes.

 Command format
M225 The hand closes.
M226 The loader hand opens.

 Operations
• The loader hand closes (M225).
Use the loader hand close (M225) command to close the hand with the air cylinder.
• The loader hand opens (M226).
Use the loader hand open (M226) command to open the hand with the air cylinder.

 Note
• If the M42 command fails to properly grip a workpiece, an alarm is generated.
• When two control axis groups are specified, an alarm is generated.

13.48.6 Shutter open, close (M227, M228)

 Outline
Opens and closes the shutter.

 Command format
M227 Closes the shutter.
M228 Opens the shutter.

 Operations
• Shutter close (M227)
Use the shutter close (M227) command to close the shutter with the air cylinder.
• Shutter open (M228)
Use the shutter open (M228) command to open the shutter with the air cylinder.

 Note
• When the spindle headstock (Z1 axis) is at a position beyond 276.5 mm, an alarm is generated if the M227 command
is also specified.
• When two control axis groups are specified, an alarm is generated.
• When the shutter is closed, the Z1 axis stroke is limited to prevent interference.

13.48.7 Back spindle air blow On, Off (M229, M230)

 Outline
These commands determines whether the back spindle air blow expels air or not.

 Command format
M229 Back spindle air blow ON (expels air)
M230 Back spindle air blow OFF (does not expel air)

13-111
L32

13.48.8 Front spindle headstock moves to the return position, start tool positioning (G698)
Since the Z1 axis stroke is inside the machining area during forging, the front spindle cannot be moved to the return
position. However, you can use the M code to change the Z1 axis stroke and move the front spindle headstock (Z1 axis)
to the position specified by the R argument at a rapid rate. The Z1 axis moves to the spindle return position and the
specified tool is selected using the start tool number and the X1 axis moves to the workpiece coordinate value 100.0 mm
position. If you use the G code to move the spindle to a position where the shutter can close, spindle retraction and
parallel machining closes it.

 Command format
G698R Q1C Front spindle headstock moves to the return position, start tool positioning

 Axis control group

$1

 Argument
R: The return position for the spindle can be specified. Specify the distance from the front spindle return
position. If the argument is omitted, it moves to the front spindle return position (Z1 = 0.0 mm).
Q1: Gang tool post operation is not performed.
C: Allows you to specify the index angle when the spindle receives the workpiece from the loader. If the
argument is omitted, indexing is not performed (index angle depends on an option setting). Indexing is
performed during spindle retraction and parallel machining.

 Sample program
$1 $2
M42 A10.0 R2.0 (Workpiece loading operations) (Back spindle machining)

G630 (Front/back parallel machining) G630 (Front/back parallel machining)

• End-face drilling using the T31 tool
• Gang tool machining and cross drilling using T01 M34 (Product collection)
tool
• End-face drilling using T11 tool

G650 (pick-off) G650 (pick-off)

G600 G600

G999 (last program) G999 (last program)

N999 N999
G698 R2.0 (front spindle headstock moves to the return
position)

M2 M2

 Note
• The R argument is normally set to the same value as "spindle return position" for the M42 R argument or machining
data.
• Specify the G698 alone. Do not specify these codes along with any other code in the same block.
• When the R argument is larger than the maximum loader forward position (Z1 = 65.0 mm), an alarm is generated.
• When two control axis groups are specified, an alarm is generated.
• The X1 axis moves to the center when the start tool is used for end-face drilling.

13-112
 L32

(Blank Page)

13-113
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 2E1-1304
Mfg. No. L32/0480～
Issue Date 2016.12

13-114
14. Sample Programming [Rotary tool Machining]
14.1 Rotary Tool Process Guidelines .............................................................................................................. 14-3
14.1.1 Turning process and rotary tool process ........................................................................................... 14-3
14.1.2 Machining process order ................................................................................................................... 14-3
14.1.3 The coordinate system for rotary tool process .................................................................................. 14-4
14.2 Main Spindle Indexing ............................................................................................................................ 14-5
14.2.1 Main spindle indexing (M28, M20) .................................................................................................... 14-5
14.2.2 Back spindle indexing (M78, M79) .................................................................................................... 14-6
14.2.3 Main spindle C-axis indexing (M18) .................................................................................................. 14-7
14.2.4 Back spindle C axis indexing (M48) .................................................................................................. 14-9
14.2.5 C axis machining in the spindle synchronous control mode ............................................................ 14-10
14.3 Calculating the Command Speed ......................................................................................................... 14-11
14.3.1 Calculating the spindle speed value ................................................................................................ 14-11
14.4 Upcut and Downcut .............................................................................................................................. 14-12
14.4.1 Calculating the tool feed rate........................................................................................................... 14-13
14.5 Automatic Control of Rotation Direction of Rotary Tool ......................................................................... 14-14
14.5.1 Applicable tool layout and tool numbers .......................................................................................... 14-14
14.5.2 Rotary tool start/stop (M80/M81/M82) ............................................................................................. 14-16
14.5.3 Simultaneous front/back end-face tapping (G84) ............................................................................ 14-19
14.6 Two-Surface Width Machining (Including Indexing) Program ............................................................... 14-20
14.7 Through-Hole Machining....................................................................................................................... 14-22
14.8 Circular Interpolation in Rotary tool Process ......................................................................................... 14-23
14.8.1 Plane selection ................................................................................................................................ 14-23
14.8.2 Tool diameter compensation in rotary tool process ......................................................................... 14-24
14.9 Milling Interpolation (G12.1, G13.1) ...................................................................................................... 14-27
14.9.1 Milling coordinates .......................................................................................................................... 14-27
14.9.2 Milling plane .................................................................................................................................... 14-29
14.9.3 Programming of a milling process ................................................................................................... 14-30
14.9.4 Calculation of milling coordinates .................................................................................................... 14-32
14.9.5 Program format ............................................................................................................................... 14-37
14.9.6 Supplementary explanation for tool diameter compensation ........................................................... 14-38
14.9.7 Milling interpolation and mirror image ............................................................................................. 14-39
14.9.8 List of NC unit errors during milling interpolation ............................................................................. 14-40
14.9.9 Example of using the milling interpolation function 1....................................................................... 14-41
14.9.10 Example of using the milling interpolation function 1 (D cut) ........................................................... 14-43
14.9.11 Example of using the milling interpolation function 2....................................................................... 14-45
14.9.12 Example of using the milling interpolation function 3....................................................................... 14-48
14.9.13 Example of using the milling interpolation function 4....................................................................... 14-50
14.10 Polygon Machining Function (G114.2, G113) ....................................................................................... 14-52
14.11 Hobbing Machining Function (G114.3, G113) ....................................................................................... 14-54
14.11.1 Gear formula ................................................................................................................................... 14-56
14.11.2 Cutting condition table (reference) .................................................................................................. 14-56
14.11.3 Example of using the hobbing machining function .......................................................................... 14-57
14.12 Coordinate rotation (G950, G951) ........................................................................................................ 14-58
14.13 B-axis Function ..................................................................................................................................... 14-59
14.13.1 Machining data setting .................................................................................................................... 14-59
14.13.2 B-axis tool angle.............................................................................................................................. 14-60
14.13.3 B-axis tool coordinate system ......................................................................................................... 14-60
14.13.4 Commands and program examples for B-axis control .................................................................... 14-61

14-1
 14.13.5 Command specified axes and offset axes of B-axis tools ............................................................... 14-67
14.13.6 Offset for B-axis tools ...................................................................................................................... 14-68
14.13.7 How to avoid problems in B-axis mode ........................................................................................... 14-69
14.13.8 Precautions to be heeded during B-axis tool use ............................................................................ 14-69
14.14 Helical Interpolation .............................................................................................................................. 14-71
14.14.1 End-face helical interpolation process............................................................................................. 14-71
14.14.1.1 Relation between circular plane and linear interpolation axis .................................................... 14-71
14.14.2 Slanted helical interpolation process (G173) ................................................................................... 14-73
14.14.3 Slanted helical interpolation process (G950, G951) ........................................................................ 14-76
14.15 3D Chamfering Function (G370) (Option) ............................................................................................. 14-77

14-2
 L32

14.1 Rotary Tool Process Guidelines

14.1.1 Turning process and rotary tool process
In the machining operations already discussed, such as outer diameter machining, center hole drilling, and outer
diameter thread cutting, the spindle is rotated. Namely, the workpiece is rotated and the tool is got in touch with it for
cutting. This machining style is generally called "turning". In the rotary tool process described in this chapter, the cutting
tool rotates while the material remains static.
Turning: Machining is performed by rotating the material.
Rotary tool process:Machining is performed by rotating the cutting tools.

14.1.2 Machining process order

Machining of a product that requires a rotary tool process is all done in a cycle in the same manner as the machining of
a turning process. The rotary tool machining procedure is basically decided according to the following rule.

 Basic rules for the rotary tool machining procedure

• The rotary tool process performs the machining tasks from left to right in order on the material.
• The center hole drilling and rotary tool process on the end face of a material are done before other processes.
• If turning and rotary tool process are to be performed on the same coordinate, the "turning" is done first.
The tooling layout is created based on the conception described above.
The number of tools to be mounted in a rotary tool process varies depending on the holder to be used. (For further details,
see <17. Tooling>).

 Machining example

14-3
L32

14.1.3 The coordinate system for rotary tool process

Before creating a rotary tool process program, it is advisable to have an understanding of the coordinate system.
The diagram below shows the rotary tool in its position relative to the material.

 Coordinate values and signs

Program coordinates for the rotary tool process are set in the same way as the coordinates for turning. The only
difference is that the rotary tool process can perform machining using three axes (X, Z, and Y) since the Y axis
coordinate is movable.
Values for the X and Y axis coordinate must be specified in diameter. The program zero points for the X and Z axes are
the same as the ones for turning.
The Y axis zero point is set at the center of the material.
For the sign, the moving direction of the tool as shown above is defined as "+" (positive) assuming that the workpiece is
fixed.
Y command can be issued even when four-digit T command is issued.
T X Y Z ;

 Tool position and coordinate system shift

The rotary tool is shifted 15 mm toward the Z axis. If a program is created without a consideration for the shift,
machining will be done to a point 15 mm away from the intended position.
To avoid this displacement, shift the length between the program zero point in the Z-axis direction and rotary tool center.
This coordinate system shift must always be canceled after the rotary tool process is complete.
Write the program in $1.

 Command format
G50 W–15.0 Coordinate system shift
G50 W15.0 Coordinate system shift cancel

14-4
 L32

14.2 Main Spindle Indexing

14.2.1 Main spindle indexing (M28, M20)
In the rotary tool process, the main spindle can be indexed in 1-degree steps.

 Command format
M28 S Main spindle indexing command
M20 Main spindle indexing cancel

• Use these commands in the $1 axis control group program.

• "S " should be integer in absolute value ranging from 0 to 359.
• The spindle is indexed in the shortcut direction.
• To specify M28 during the rotation of spindle, it is not necessary to stop the spindle. Directly specify M28.
• At the first indexing after power-on, the main spindle makes two or more rotations for indexing its zero point.
However, at the second or subsequent time, the indexing is performed within a single rotation.
• To return to turning during the spindle indexing, it is not necessary to use M20. Directly specify M03 S1 = .

 Machining example

 Sample program
:
M28 S0 ......................................... Indexing command
G98 M80 S3= ...................... Rotary tool on gang tool post rotates forward, per minute feed
: Machining program
M82............................................... Rotary tool on gang tool post stops rotation
:
M03 S1= G99 ...................... Spindle forward rotation, per rotation feed

14-5
L32

14.2.2 Back spindle indexing (M78, M79)

The back spindle can be indexed in 1-degree steps.

 Command format
M78 S Back spindle indexing
M79 Back spindle indexing cancel

• Use these commands in the $2 axis control group program.

• "S " should be integer in absolute value ranging from 0 to 359.
• The spindle is indexed in the shortcut direction.
• To specify M78 during the rotation of back spindle, it is not necessary to stop the back spindle. Directly specify
M78.
• To return to turning during the back spindle indexing, it is not necessary to use M79. Directly specify M03 S1 =
.

 Sample program
M25............................................... Back spindle stop
G04 U0.5 ...................................... Dwell
M78 S0 ......................................... Back spindle indexing
: Machining program
M79............................................... Back spindle indexing cancel
G04 U0.5 ...................................... Dwell
M23 S2= .............................. Back spindle forward rotation

14-6
 L32

14.2.3 Main spindle C-axis indexing (M18)

The main spindle C axis command can be specified in the rotary tool process. (In 0.001-degree units)

 Command format
M18 C or G0 C Command of main spindle C axis

• Specify M18 in axis control group 1 ($1). Specifying M18 in $2 is allowed, however, the main spindle C axis
interpolation command after M18 must be specified in $1.
• G0 C can directly be specified without using M18.
• M18 C or G0 C can directly be specified for the spindle C axis during the rotation of spindle.
• To return to turning during the spindle C axis control, directly specify the rotation command M03 S1= .
• Main spindle indexing direction can be specified. Spindle indexing in the forward direction is specified by the "+"
(plus) sign and that in the reverse direction is specified by the "–" (minus) sign. "Forward" and "reverse" of spindle
indexing direction are defined as below by viewing the material from the end face. Forward: Counterclockwise
Reverse: Clockwise
Note that the "+" (plus) sign is omitted.
• The indexing angle for M18 C can be specified in the range of 0.0 to 359.999 degrees.
The indexing angle for G50 C(H) , G00 C(H) , G01 C(H) , or F can be specified in the
range of –99999.999 to 99999.999 degrees.
• The indexing can be specified in the range of 0.001 to 99999.999 degrees.

Exa G50 C(H) H is an incremental command

mpl
e:
G00 C(H)
G01 C(H) F

 Machining example

14-7
L32

 Sample program
:
G0 C0 (M18 C0) ........................... Indexing command
G98 M80 S3= ...................... Rotary tool on gang tool post rotates forward, per minute feed
: Machining program
M82............................................... Rotary tool on gang tool post stops rotation
M03 S1= G99 ...................... Spindle forward rotation, per rotation feed

Indexing can be specified in the range of 0.001 to 99999.999 degrees.

 Indexing command
Absolute commands
G0 C0 (M18 C0)
↓
G0 C120.001 (M18 C120.001)
↓
G0 C240.0 (M18 C240.0)

Incremental command
G0 C0 (M18 C0)
↓
G0 H120.0
↓
G1 H20.0 F

 Note
If the machine is not in the C axis mode and M18 C or G0 C is specified in any modal except for G0 modal,
an alarm is generated.

14-8
 L32

14.2.4 Back spindle C axis indexing (M48)

In the rotary tool process, the back spindle C axis can be indexed. (In 0.001-degree units)

 Command format
M48 C or G0 C Command of back spindle C axis

• Specify M18 in axis control group 2 ($2). Specifying M48 in $1 is allowed, however, the back spindle C axis
interpolation command after M48 must be specified in $2.
• G0 C can directly be specified without using M48.
• M48 C or G0 C can directly be specified for the back spindle C axis during the rotation of back spindle.
• To return to turning during the back spindle C axis control, directly specify the rotation command M23 S2= .
• Main spindle indexing direction can be specified. Spindle indexing in the forward direction is specified by the "+"
(plus) sign and that in the reverse direction is specified by the "–" (minus) sign. "Forward" and "reverse" of spindle
indexing direction are defined as below by viewing the material from the end face. Forward: Counterclockwise
Reverse: Clockwise
Note that the "+" (plus) sign is omitted.
• The indexing can be specified in the range of 0.001 to 99999.999 degrees.

Exa G50 C(H) H is an incremental command

mpl
e:
G00 C(H)
G01 C(H) F

 Note
If the machine is not in the C axis mode and M48 C or G0 C is specified in any modal except for G0 modal,
an alarm is generated.

14-9
L32

14.2.5 C axis machining in the spindle synchronous control mode

The feature explained below is used to switch the mode to the C axis machining mode while a long workpiece is
clamped at the front and back side in the spindle synchronous state. Chuck opening and closing operation can be
eliminated.

 Sample program
$1
:
M3 S1=1000 M24 S2=1000
G114.1 H1 D2 ................................ Spindle synchronous control ON
M77 ................................................ Wait for the completion of spindle synchronization
:
Machining in the spindle
synchronous control mode
:
G0 C90.0 ........................................ Switching from the spindle synchronous control mode to the C axis mode (C1
- C2 synchronization) *1
:
Machining in the C axis mode
:
M3 S1=1000 ................................... Switching from the C axis mode to the spindle synchronous control mode
:
Machining in the spindle
synchronous control mode
:
G113............................................... Spindle synchronous control OFF
M5 M25
:
* Specification of a C axis command in the spindle synchronous control mode is allowed. The main spindle and the back
spindle decelerate in the synchronous state and the mode is switched to the C axis mode.

 Note
• When a C axis command is specified in the spindle synchronous control mode, the C1 and C2 axes are placed in the
synchronous state.
• Specification of a C2 axis command is not allowed while the C1 and C2 axes are in the synchronous state.
• If the spindle synchronous control OFF command (G113) is specified in the state the C1 and C2 axes are
synchronized, both the spindle synchronous control mode and the synchronization between the C1 and C2 axes are
canceled. In this case, however, the C1 axis remains in the C axis mode.

14-10
 L32

14.3 Calculating the Command Speed

14.3.1 Calculating the spindle speed value
The spindle speed value is calculated using the following formula (A).

 Calculation example
Rotary tool process spindle
Use an 4-mm diameter end mill to machine a material under the following conditions;
Material: Brass
Cutting speed: 25 (m/min)
Tool diameter: ø4 (mm)

The spindle speed is obtained from formula (A) as follows:

• The result of the calculation is rounded up to a whole number value.

• If the result of the speed calculation is more than the maximum speed, set the maximum speed.

14-11
L32

14.4 Upcut and Downcut

There are two machining methods for side milling using an end mill: Downcut and upcut.
The tool in a normal end mill machining turns clockwise when seen from above. In reverse milling, the tool turns in the
opposite direction.

 Upcut
When seen from above, the material appears to the left relative to machining direction of the tool. In this type of
machining, cutting depth starts at 0 and gradually increases. Upcut tends to provide a better finish, but tool life tends to
be shorter.

 Downcut
When seen from above, the material appears to the right relative to machining direction of the tool. In this type of
machining, cutting depth starts at maximum and gradually decreases. Downcut tends to increase tool life.

14-12
 L32

14.4.1 Calculating the tool feed rate

The tool feed rate (mm/min) is calculated using either of the following formulas based on the calculation results of
formula (A). Note, however, that the formula to be used depends on the tool used.

 Tool feed rate formula:

End mill and slitting cutter
F = N × fz × Z (B)
F： Feed rate
N： Spindle speed
fz： Feed amount per cutter
Z： Cutters (cutter/rev)

Drill
F = N × fz (C)
F： Feed rate
N： Spindle speed
fz： Feed amount per revolution

 Calculation example
Rotary tool process spindle
Use an 4-mm diameter end mill to machine a material under the following conditions;
Material: Brass
Spindle speed: 2000 (min–1)
Feed rate per tool: 0.065 (mm/tool)
Number of cutting edges: 2 (teeth)

The tool feed rate is obtained from formula (B) as follows:

F = 2000 × 0.065 × 2 = 260 (mm/min)

14-13
L32

14.5 Automatic Control of Rotation Direction of Rotary Tool

The rotation of rotary tool depends on the tool layout and the selected tool number. This function automatically controls
the rotation direction of the motor so that the direction to rotate the rotary tool is made identical to that specified by G or
M code. With this function, you can specify the rotation direction of rotary tool without considering the tool layout or the
tool numbers.

The Automatic Control of Rotation Direction of Rotary Tool function is unavailable in the following cases:
• During front/back simultaneous machining (G660), when back drilling tool on gang tool post (T51's) is
selected
• When a free holder is used in the machining data

14.5.1 Applicable tool layout and tool numbers

The rotation direction specified by G or M code differs from that of rotary tool in the following tool layout.

14-14
 L32

14-15
L32

14.5.2 Rotary tool start/stop (M80/M81/M82)

 Rotation direction of rotary tool
The rotation direction depends on mechanical wheel block. When M80 or M81 (rotary tool rotation command) is issued,
the rotation direction of motor is automatically determined by the tool number being selected. The rotation direction of
tool edge is defined as follows: Counterclockwise rotation when viewed toward the spindle is regarded as forward
rotation, and clockwise rotation is regarded as backward rotation.
Tool No. M80 M81 M82

T01/T11's

T51's

 Rotation direction of rotary tool at tool selection

If a tool is selected (with T code) while the rotary tool is rotating, the rotation direction of rotary tool is automatically
determined according to the specification described above.
For example, if the tool number T12 is selected while the tool number T11 is being selected and the rotary tool is rotating
forward, the motor rotates in opposite direction. However, the tool edge keep rotating forward, you can write a program
in the conventional way.

14-16
 L32

 Rotation direction of rotary tool by machining pattern

The rotation direction of rotary tool during front/back simultaneous machining (G660) is controlled by the tool on front
spindle (T01/T11's), a contrary rotation of the tool on back spindle (T51's).

 Sample program

14-17
L32

 Note
• If this function is specified in front/back simultaneous machining (G660), the rotation direction is determined based
on the front machining tool (T01/T11's).
• This function can be used in synchronous tapping (G88, G84), differential speed rotary tool function (G164),
hobbing machining (G114.2), and polygon machining (G114.3).
• To specify differential speed rotary tool function (G164), hobbing machining (G114.2), and polygon machining
(G114.3) using this function, these machining must be performed after tool selection.
• Specify the reference direction of rotation before selecting a tool.
• If a machining program contains repetitive foward/reverse rotation at high speed, it may cause an overload alarm to
occur. Rewriting the program as shown below may avoid such an alarm.

Acceleration and switching between forward and reverse rotation

M80 S3=1000 Tool spindle motor rotates forward at M80 S3=1000 Tool spindle motor rotates forward at
1000 rpm. 1000 rpm.
T1100 T1100
: ⇒ :
M80 S3=5000 Accelerate to 5000 rpm from 1000 T1200 Select a tool and tool spindle motor
rpm. rotates backward.
T1200 Tool spindle motor rotates backward M80 S3=5000 Accelerate to 5000 rpm from 1000 rpm.
immediately after acceleration.
: :

Decelerated and switching between forward/backward rotation

M80 S3=5000 Tool spindle motor rotates forward at M80 S3=5000 Tool spindle motor rotates forward at
5000 rpm. 5000 rpm.
T1100 T1100
: ⇒ :
T1200 Select a tool and tool spindle motor M80 S3=1000 Deceleration from 5000 rpm to 1000
rotates backward. rpm.
M80 S3=1000 Deceleration from 5000 rpm to 1000 T1200 Select a tool and tool spindle motor
rpm directly after switching to rotates backward.
backward rotation.
: :

14-18
 L32

14.5.3 Simultaneous front/back end-face tapping (G84)

 Axis control group
This command can be specified for the axis control groups $1 and $2.

 Sample program
$1 $2
:
T1300 (X1,Z1,Y1)
G84 Z F S D3
:
G80

:
T5300 (X1,Z2,Y1)
G84 Z F S D3
:
G80

 Rotation direction of rotary tool

The rotary tool rotates regardless of tool number specified. If "+3" is specified for D argument, the rotary tool (S3)
rotates forward at tap infeed. If "–3" is specified for D argument, the rotary tool (S3) rotates backward at tap infeed.
Tool No. D argument "+3" D argument "-3"

T01/T11's

T51's

14-19
L32

14.6 Two-Surface Width Machining (Including Indexing) Program

This example is a portion of one program relating to the rotary tool process.

 Machining layout

 Sample program
T0800 ...................................................... Tool selection
G50 W–15.0 ............................................ Longitudinal coordinate system shift
M28 S0 .................................................... Main spindle indexing command
M80 S3= G98 ................................. Rotary tool forward rotation command
G00 Y10.6 Z16.5 T ......................... Y, Z axis rapid feed positioning
X10.0 ....................................................... X axis positioning
G01 Y–10.6 F ................................. Two-surface width single machining
M28 S180 ................................................ 180-degrees indexing
Y10.6 ....................................................... Remaining single machining
G00 X13.0 M82 ....................................... Move in the diametrical direction. (Rotary tool rotation OFF)
G50 W15.0 .............................................. Longitudinal coordinate system shift cancel
M03 S1= G99

Calculation and explanation are shown in the next page.

14-20
 L32

 Calculation and explanation

Spindle rotation "N" is given by the following expression.

Therefore, end milling feed rate "F" is given by

F = 2700 × 0.05 × 2 = 270 (mm/min)

The longitudinal direction position is set as shown in the figure below.

Therefore, the Z coordinates for positioning are as follows:

15 + 3 (end milling diameter) / 2 = 15 + 1.5 = 16.5

As shown below, the Y coordinates (diameter specification) are given by the following expression.
Y = ( + 0.5 + 1.5) × 2 = (3.32 + 0.5 + 1.5) × 2 = 10.64≈10.6

14-21
L32

14.7 Through-Hole Machining

Explanation of this section is an example of machining which pierce the material of ø16.0 with a cross drill of ø3.5.
The X1 axis stroke of a gang tool is a maximum of X–5.0. The ordinary tool set cannot drill the through-hole of the
material. Accordingly, the drill must be shifted so that it is elongated by the setting of the tool setting data when
mounting it.

The X value of a program that considers no shift is –16.0 – (1.05 × 2 ) = –18.1.

If X–18.1 is specified, an X axis overrun occurs.
Since there is a stroke in X–5.0, the X value becomes 18.1 – 5.0 = 13.1. Enter this shift amount to "DIA" in the tool
setting data on the Preparation screen. This enables through-hole machining by specifying X–5.0 in the program.
In this case, the drill is shifted 15.0 mm in diameter (satisfactory if shifted 13.1 mm).

[Note]
• After entering the shift amount to "DIA" in the tool setting data on the Preparation screen, call "DIA" and then set
the tool.
If an incorrect value is set, the tool and the material will interfere with each other when calling a tool or executing the
positioning point command.
• When selecting a tool, tool change is performed with the maximum value of "DIA" values of the gang tools set on
the Preparation screen taken into account. Therefore, it is not necessary to specify unnecessarily large retraction
amount or set a large value to "Tool Positioning Point (DIA)" on the Machining Data screen.

14-22
 L32

14.8 Circular Interpolation in Rotary tool Process

Circular interpolation feed for the rotary tool process is available on three planes:

 Command format
G17 XY plane
G18 ZX plane (Plane selection mode for normal turning)
G19 YZ plane

14.8.1 Plane selection

When the machine is turned on or after resetting, the ZX plane (G18) is selected. The circular interpolations (G02 and
G03) in turning are also performed on this plane.
If another plane is required for circular interpolation in the rotary tool process, enter the plane selection command G17
(XY plane) or G19 (YZ plane).
Select ZX plane (G18) again to return to turning.

14-23
L32

14.8.2 Tool diameter compensation in rotary tool process

The tool diameter compensation is programmed using a tool nose R compensation function.

 Command format
G40 Tool diameter compensation (tool nose R compensation) mode cancel
G41 Tool diameter compensation left (tool nose R compensation left) mode ON
G42 Tool diameter compensation right (tool nose R compensation right) mode ON

The relation between the tool diameter and the cutting position in a program is described below.
In the registration item of the tool diameter compensation, preset to "0" or "9" to the virtual tool nose number.

The tool cutting point and compensation are as shown below.

G41: Offset to the left for the tool advance direction.
G42: Offset to the right for the tool advance direction.

14-24
 L32

 Machining layout

14-25
L32

 Sample program
This program is described in the $1 program.
$1
T1200 .................................................. Select and compensate the tool spindle.
G50 W–15.0 ........................................ Longitudinal coordinate system shift.
M28 S0 ................................................ Index the spindle by 0°.
S3= M80 G98............................. Rotate the rotary tool in the forward direction.
G19 G00 Y22.0 Z1.0 T12 .................... Set the plane to YZ and position the tool to the cutting start point in the
YZ plane.
X10.0 ................................................... Position in the cutting direction (X axis).
G01 Y–22.0 F
G41 Y–5.0 Z7.5 ................................... Compensate the tool diameter.
Z27.5
G02 Y5.0 R2.5 F
G01 Z7.5 F
G02 Y–5.0 R2.5 F
G40 G1 Y–22.0 F ....................... Cancel the tool diameter compensation.
G00 Z34.0
G01 Y22.0 F
G00 Z37.0
G01 Y–22.0 F
M28 S90 .............................................. Index the spindle by 90°.
G00 X14.0
Y–18.0 Z33.0
G01 Y18.0 F
G00 Z37.0
G01 Y–18.0 F
G18 G00 X18.0 T00 ............................ Return the plane command to the turning mode, cancel the compensation,
and return the tool to the positioning point in the diametrical direction.
M82 G99.............................................. Stop the rotary tool.
G50 W15.0 .......................................... Longitudinal coordinate system shift cancel.

14-26
 L32

14.9 Milling Interpolation (G12.1, G13.1)

Generally, the X and Z axes are controlled as linear axes and the C axis is controlled as the rotary axis of the spindle. The
milling interpolation function permits the C axis to be used as a linear axis at right angles to the X and Z axes, and
enables the creation of a three-dimensional program with the three axes X, Z, and C.

14.9.1 Milling coordinates

Milling interpolation is performed between when G12.1 (milling interpolation ON) is executed and when G13.1 (milling
interpolation cancel) is executed. Specify the coordinates of X (Z) and C axes with values calculated for the radius.
The plus and minus signs of X and C are as shown in the figure below.

14-27
L32

 Command format
G12.1 D E= Milling interpolation ON
G13.1 Milling interpolation cancel

 Argument
D ： Selects the name of a milling virtual axis. Specify "0" to select Y axis, and specify "1" to select
C axis. The default is 1(C axis).
E= ： Specify an axis for milling interpolation. If omitted, the axis is determined by the milling axis
number specified in the basic specification parameter #1125.

For the E argument, specify "E=C" if the axis number of C axis is different between the axis control group and the tool
holder.
For example, if a front drill holder is used with $1, the axis number of C axis is identical; 3 for both the axis control
group and the tool holder. Thus, there is no need to specify the E argument. (Specifying the argument does not cause any
problem.)
If a gang tool holder is used with $1, the axis number of C axis is different between the axis control group and the drill
holder. In this case, "E=C" must be specified.
In general, you do not have to specify the D argument.
When specifying both D and E arguments, be sure to specify in the order of D and then E.

 Relationship between the axis numbers of C axis and the axis control groups
$1 $2
Axis number of 3 2
C axis

 Relationship between the axis numbers of C axis and the tool holders
Axis number
of C axis
Gang tool holder (T0100 to T1400) 3
Front drilling holder on gang tool post (T2100 to T2400) 2
Back drilling holder on back tool post (T3100 to T3900) 2

14-28
 L32

14.9.2 Milling plane

To perform end-face machining, execute the G17 command to select the X-Y plane, and program the coordinate values
viewed from the end face of the workpiece.
At end-face Compensation mode
machining (operation)
Tool diameter G40 Offset cancel
compensation G41 Right compensation
G42 Left compensation
Circular G02 CCW (Counterclockwise
Interpolation threading)
G03 CW (Clockwise threading)

14-29
L32

14.9.3 Programming of a milling process

Consider the following points in programming a milling process:
When starting a milling process, move the X axis away from the workpiece to obtain an enough approach distance. The
X axis makes an approach to the workpiece, and then moves to the specified position. Therefore, if the approach distance
is not enough as shown in the following figure, the tool and workpiece interfere with each other.
During the positioning of the X axis from point A to point B in the following figure, the X axis makes an approach to the
workpiece in the range from point A to point K, and moves away from the workpiece in the range from point K to point
B.
The milling start position (point A) for avoiding interference with the workpiece must be obtained by calculation.
Point A = Ps position

14-30
 L32

Determine the milling start position in consideration of the diameter of the rotary tool to be used and the diameter of the
workpiece to be machined. If the start position is not suitable, the tool and workpiece may interfere with each other.
If the machining start position is point K for making the D cut as shown in the following figure, the tool and material
interfere with each other in the shaded area when the X axis makes an approach to the workpiece.
To avoid the interference, obtain the machining start position (point B) by calculation.
Point B = Pa position

When performing machining both sides of a workpiece (e.g., 2-face width machining), cancel milling interpolation at
completion of machining one side, rotate the C axis 180 degrees, then start machining the other side.
If both sides are machined continuously without milling interpolation cancel, the tool and workpiece may interfere with
each other.

14-31
L32

14.9.4 Calculation of milling coordinates

This section describes how to calculate the coordinates used in milling process.
To minimize the move distance, calculate the coordinates based on the leeway for start position (a) and leeway for end
position (b).
This calculation for minimizing the approach distance is not always necessary. Taking a long approach distance creates
less chances of interference between the tool and the workpiece.

Example: When d = 20 mm, r = 15 mm, w = 8mm, a = 2 mm, and b = 2 mm:

Ps = (63.392, 0) Pa = (8.0, 14.142)
Pd = (8.0, –8.00) Pe = (31.696, 0)

Obtain machining positions suitable for the milling process from the formulas shown in the following table:
Machining position X axis coordinate C axis coordinate
Milling start positions Xs > { (d/2 + r + a)2 / (w + r) } × 2 Cs = 0
Ps = (Xs, Cs)
Machining start position Pa = (Xa, Xa = w
Ca)
Machining end position Pd = (Xd, Xd = w
Cd)
Milling end position Xe = Xs > (d/2 + r + a) 2 / (w + r) Ce = 0
Pe = Ps = (Xe, Ce)
※Xs: Two times the calculated value since it is specified in a diametric value.

 Note
• The results of the above formulas are free from the plus and minus signs. When changing the results to coordinates,
assign signs to them in consideration of the tool position.
• The coordinate represented by Ps is identical to that by Pe.
The coordinate Xs of Ps is moved before milling interpolation ON is specified. Therefore, be sure to change the
coordinate to a value calculated for the diameter when specifying it.
The other values of Xa, Xd, and Xe are calculated for the radius. The calculated values can be used as they are.
• The description above is an example when the tool diameter compensation is enabled to move the tool from Ps to Pa.
If tool diameter compensation function is not used, calculate coordinate for the center of tool, and specify it in the
program.

14-32
 L32

 Calculation procedure
Calculate the machining positions in the following procedures:
[Procedure]
1. Determine the leeway for start position (a), and calculate the machining start position (Pa).
2. Based on the machining start position (Pa), calculate the milling start position (Ps), the first positioning point of
milling.
3. Determine the leeway for end position (b), and calculate the machining end position (Pd).
4. Based on the machining end position (Pd), calculate the milling end position (Pe).

1. Determine the leeway a for the start position shown in Fig. 1. Here, take value a as 2.0 mm.

[Note]
The coodinate of Pa is used to calculate the coordinate of the cutting point based on assumption to use tool diameter
compensation function (G42, G41, and G40). If tool diameter compensation function is not used, calculate the
coordinate in consideration with the tool diameter.

14-33
L32

2. The milling start position (Ps) is determined at the center of the circle which moved to position C0.0
parallel to the line between (Pa) to leeway for start position (a). When the tool moves from (Ps) to
(Pa) for milling interpolation, the distance calculated here is secured.

[Note]
The coordinate (Ps) calculated here is the one before the tool diameter compensation is used. The coordinate of center of
milling tool is calculated in diameter value.

14-34
 L32

3. Determine the leeway b for the end position shown in Fig. 3. Here, take value b as 2.0 mm.

• The actual tool is placed in negative area, accordingly the coordinate value becomes Cd = – 8.0.
Pd = (8.0, – 8.0)

[Note]
The coodinate of Pd is used to calculate the coordinate of the cutting point based on assumption to use tool diameter
compensation function (G42, G41, and G40). If tool diameter compensation function is not used, calculate the
coordinate in consideration with the tool diameter.

14-35
L32

4. The milling end position (Pe) is equal to the milling start position (Ps).
Note, however, milling interpolation is active when the tool moves to the milling end position (Pe), the coordinates
represents the radius value. The tool diameter compensation is canceled at the same time when the command to move to
(Pe) is issued, thus the (Pe) is the coordinate of center of tool as well as in (Ps).
Pe = (31.696, 0)
↑
Diameter value
Axis movement sequence
Order Coordinates Comman Milling Tool diameter
d interpolation compensation
1 Ps = (Xs, Cs) Diameter
2 Pa = (Xa, Ca) Radius Used Used
3 Pd = (Xd, Cd) Radius Used Used
4 Pe = (Xe, Ce) Radius Used

 Sample program
The sample program below uses the values calculated from the milling coordinates.
Previous process
:
M5............................................................ Main spindle stop
G98 M80 S3= ................................. Feed per minute. Rotate the rotary tool in forward direction
M18 C0
GC0 ......................................................... Set C axis coordinate system

Milling process
T ..................................................... Milling tool selection
G0 X63.392 Z1.0 C0 T ................... Go to milling start position (Ps)
G12.1 ....................................................... Milling interpolation ON
G17
G41 G1 X8.0 C14.142 F ................ Tool diameter compensation ON, go to machining start position (Pa)
(See <14.9.2 Milling plane> and <14.8.2 Tool diameter compensation
in rotary tool process> for tool diameter compensation.)
G1 X8.0 C–8.0 F ............................ Go to machining end position (Pd)
G40 G1 X31.696 C0 F ................... Go to milling end position (Pe)
G13.1 ....................................................... Milling interpolation OFF
M82.......................................................... Rotary tool stop
M20.......................................................... C axis function cancel
:

14-36
 L32

14.9.5 Program format

 Sample program

 Note
G00 command is disabled while milling interpolation is set to on (G12.1).
Use the G01 command to move an axis.

14-37
L32

14.9.6 Supplementary explanation for tool diameter compensation

The tool nose is programmed as the center of a rotary tool for a milling process.
The nose R compensation commands (G40, G41, and G42) are used during the milling process. Thus, be sure to read the
explanation of nose R compensation in the <Programming Guide> issued by Mitsubishi Electric Co., Ltd. The following
shows the setting of nose R compensation:
Example: When T05 is used:

If the coordinate system shift in the diametrical direction of the tool is different from the actual shift, the workpiece is cut
in an invalid shape.
For example, if linear interpolation is performed for the end face as shown in the following figure, the workpiece has the
externally round shape like orbit B when the coordinate system shift is too large. Conversely, the workpiece has the
internally round shape like orbit C when the coordinate system shift is too small. If linear interpolation causes a round
shape, the coordinate system shift is invalid. Correct the coordinate system shift.

To compensate the dimensions of a finished workpiece, change the tool data R.

When a dimension of an actually machined workpiece
is greater than the specified value, decrease the value specified in the tool data by the error.
When a dimension of an actually machined workpiece is smaller than the specified value, increase the value specified in
the tool data by the error.

14-38
 L32

14.9.7 Milling interpolation and mirror image

Specifying Milling Interpolation ON command (G12.1) to the motor axis that is subject to milling interpolation while
the Mirror Image ON (M211) is enabled causes an alarm to occur. To avoid an alarm from occurrence, specify the
Mirror Image OFF command (M212) temporarily.
The following tool layout is applicable:
• 3-tool Cross Machining/ End-face Drilling Spindle (GSE3210) (mounted in cross machining direction)

 Sample program
$1
:
T1200 Tool selection
M212 Y1 Mirror image OFF X (motor for Y1 axis)
G50 X Y ............................... Coordinate system setting
G0 X Y T .................... Move to milling interpolation start point
G12.1
: Machining with milling interpolation ON
G13.1
M211 Y1 Mirror image ON X (motor for Y1 axis)
G50 X Y ............................... Coordinate system setting
T1300
:

 Note
• When the Mirror Image ON/OFF command (M211 or M212) is specified, the plus and the minus signs of the front
horizontal axis are reversed.
• After specifying the Mirror Image ON/OFF command (M211 or M212), specify the Coordinate system setting
command (G50). Outer circumference milling spindle is used for mirror image, therefore, specify G50 X [material
diameter + positioning point] Y0, in normal case. For the offset, specify it when the spindle is moved to the milling
start point by the G0 command.
• When machining is complete, specify M211 (mirror image ON), then proceed to the next process.

14-39
L32

14.9.8 List of NC unit errors during milling interpolation

The following table lists alarms which may be issued during automatic operation. A program error is posted if a program
creation error occurs or if a program is not created in accordance with the NC specifications.
Error No. Message displayed on Description Action
the screen
P480 NO. MILL SPEC The milling command (G12.1 or Check the specification.
G13.1) was executed when the
milling function was not specified.
P481 MILL ILL. G A G code, which must not be Delete the invalid G code.
executed during milling
interpolation, was executed.
P482 MILL ILL. AXIS The command was executed for the Delete the command for the rotary
rotary axis during milling axis.
interpolation.
P484 INCOMPLETE RETURN When the milling interpolation Return the axis to the reference
AXIS (MILL) process starts, there is an axis which point in manual or automatic
has not returned to the reference mode.
point.
P485 INVALID MODAL • When the milling interpolation • Execute the cancel command
(MILL) process starts, tool diameter (G40, G97, or G80) before the
compensation, constant surface G12.1 command.
speed control, or the boring cycle • Execute the T command before
is in progress. the G12.1 command.
• A T command was executed
during milling interpolation.

14-40
 L32

14.9.9 Example of using the milling interpolation function 1

This section shows a program sample for performing milling interpolation with a gang tool. A special spindle is
necessary in this case.

Example: When d = 12mm, r = 2.5mm, w = 5.5mm, a = 1.0mm, and b = 1.0mm:

Ps Xs > (d/2 + r + a)2 / (w + r)
= (12/2 + 2.5 + 1)2 / (5.5 + 2.5) = 11.281
11.281 × 2 (diameter value) = 22.562≈22.6
Cs = 0 (C coordinate)
Pa Xa = w = 5.5
Ca > {(d/2 + r + a)2 – (w + r)2}1/2
= {(12/2 + 2.5 + 1)2 – (5.5 + 2.5)2}1/2 = 5.12≈5.2 (C coordinate)
Pd Xd = w = 5.5
Cd > {(d/2)2 + w2}1/2 +b
= {(12/2)2 – 5.52}1/2 + 1 = 3.39≈3.4 (C coordinate)
Pe Xe > (w + r) + Cd2 / (w + r)
= (5.5 + 2.5) + 3.42 / (5.5 + 2.5) = 9.44≈9.5
Ce = 0 (C coordinate)

14-41
L32

 Sample program

 Sample program
Upcut

14-42
 L32

14.9.10 Example of using the milling interpolation function 1 (D cut)

14-43
L32

 Sample program
$1
:
M5
G98
M80 S3=1260
M18 C0
G50 C0

T
G50 W–5.0
G00 X63.0 Z0.5 T03 ............................... Ps milling start position
G12.1
G17
G41 G01 X2.0 C19.0 F ................. Pa machining start position
G01 C–7.7 F80 ....................................... Pd machining end position
G40 G01 X23.0 C0 F .................... Pe milling end position
G13.1
G50 W5.0
M82
M03 S1=3000 G99
:
:

14-44
 L32

14.9.11 Example of using the milling interpolation function 2

14-45
L32

 Sample program
$1
:
G98
M80 S3=1260
M18 C0
G50 C0
T
G50 W–5.0
G00 X57.0 Z0.5 T03 ................................ Ps milling start position
G12.1
G17
G41 G01 X4.0 C23.0 F .................. Pa machining start position
G01 X2.0 C–4.9 F80 ............................... (1)
G02 X1.9 C–5.0 R0.1 F1200 ................... (2)
G01 X–1.9 F80 ........................................ (3)
G02 X–2.0 C–4.9 R0.1 F380 ................... (4)
G01 C4.9 F80 .......................................... (5)
G02 X–1.9 C5.0 R0.1 F1200 ................... (6)
G01 X1.9 F80 .......................................... (7)
G02 X2.0 C4.9 R0.1 F380 ....................... (8)
G01 X2.0 C–23.0 F500............................ Pd machining end position
G40 G01 X96.5 C–23.0 F .............. Pe milling end position
G13.1
G50 W5.0
M82
M03 S1=3000 G99
:

14-46
 L32

 Note
If the R setting value of tool diameter compensation is too large, the cutter makes unnecessary movement when cutting
each corner of the workpiece. As a result, machining takes more time than it should. To minimize the machining time
and have corners well finished, specify such a value for R that the corners are finely rounded.

The cutter once moves away from the workpiece, and then makes an approach to the workpiece to start machining.
This cutter's movement is unnecessary.

To eliminate the cutter's unnecessary movement when specification is made for the cutter to move at right angles,
move the cutter circularly (as if it draws arcs) as shown in the above figure.
The feed rate specified in a program indicates a speed at which the center of the cutter moves, thus differs from the
actual feed rate at the machining point in the circular motion. The feed rate to be specified in the program must be
calculated.
With an arc circumscribed with the outer diameter of the cutter:
When the machining feed rate is set as F2 = 80 mm/min, obtain the feed rates Fa and Fb to be specified in
programs.

* The machining feed rate (80 mm/min) is a standard value.

If you move the cutter circularly to machine corners, the cutter cuts more part of the next machining face as the
cutter diameter becomes greater. Decrease the feed rate (calculated in the above) in accordance with the
allowance, then specify the decreased feed rate.

14-47
L32

14.9.12 Example of using the milling interpolation function 3

14-48
 L32

 Sample program
$1
:
G98
M80 S3=2700
M18 C0
G50 C0
N424
T
G00 X17.0 Z2.0 T04 ................................ Ps milling start position
G12.1
G17
G42 G01 X7.0 C–1.5 F .................. Pa machining start position
G01 X3.0 F200 ........................................ (1)
C–3.0 ....................................................... (2)
X–3.0 ....................................................... (3)
C3.0 ......................................................... (4)
X3.0 ......................................................... (5)
C1.5 ......................................................... (6)
X7.0 F500
Z–1.0
G40 G01 X7.0 C0 F
G13.1
G0 U0 V0 W0 T0
M82
M03 S1=3000 G99
:

14-49
L32

14.9.13 Example of using the milling interpolation function 4

 Sample program
$1
:
G98
M80 S3=2700
M18 C0
G50 C0

T
G00 X16.0 Z–1.0 T02 .............................. Ps milling start position
G12.1
G17
G42 G01 X2.5 C2.5 F .................... (1)
G01 Z2.0 F125 ........................................ (a)
G02 C–2.5 R2.5 F160 ............................. (2)
G01 X0.5 ................................................. (3)
G02 C2.5 R2.5 ........................................ (4)
G01 X2.5 ................................................. (5)
Z–1.0 F1000 ............................................ (b)
G40 G1 U0 W0 F
G13.1
G0 U0 V0 W0 T0
M82
M03 S1=3000 G99
:
:

14-50
 L32

With an arc inscribed with the inner diameter of the cutter:

d1 Cutter diameter r1 Cutter radius
d3 Machining diameter r3 Machining radius

F1 Feed rate specified in the

program
F2 Feed rate at which you want
to machine workpieces

Obtaining the feed rate for the machining diameter:

The feed rate for the machining diameter (F2) is set as 100 mm/min.

* The machining feed rate (100mm/min) is a standard value.

14-51
L32

14.10 Polygon Machining Function (G114.2, G113)

The polygon machining function enables machining for polygonal workpieces by controlling the rotary tool rotation
(polygon axis) synchronously with the rotation of the spindle (workpiece axis).
This function also enables the Z axis to move under synchronization control.

Select a tool before specifying polygon machining (G114.2).

Before specifying polygon machining (G114.2), specify zero rotation to the main spindle and the rotary tool.

 Command format
G114.2 H D± E L R Polygon machining mode ON
M77 Wait for synchronization completion
G113 Polygon machining mode OFF

 Argument
H Specify the polygon machining axis.
3: Rotary tool on gang tool post, 5: Rotary tool on back tool post
D± Specify the workpiece axis (spindle) and its rotational direction.
1: The main spindle rotates in the same direction as the rotary tool. 2: The back spindle rotates in the
same direction as the rotary tool.
E Specify the rotational rate of the polygon axis (number of gear teeth in polygon cutter).
Specify an integer between 1 and 999. The default is 1.
L Specify the rotational rate of the work axis (number of corners in polygon machining).
Specify an integer between 1 and 999. The default is 1.
R Specify the amount (angle) of the phase shift between synchronous spindles. The phase is shifted in
the clockwise direction to the main spindle. If no R argument is specified, the phase adjustment is
not performed.
Setting range: 0 to 359.999°

14-52
 L32

 Sample program
Workpiece axis: Main spindle (S1), rotational rate: 1
Polygon axis: Rotary tool on gang tool post (S3), number of teeth: 1, rotational rate: 6
$1
M3 S1=0 .................................................. Main spindle zero rotation in forward direction
M80 S3=0 ................................................ Rotary tool on gang tool post zero rotation in forward direction
T1200 ...................................................... Select rotary tool
G0 X10.0 Z–5.0
G114.2 H3 D1 E1 L6 R0.......................... Polygon machining mode ON
M77 ......................................................... Wait for synchronization completion
S3=600
:
G1 Z10.0 F0.1 ......................................... Polygon machining
:
G113........................................................ Polygon machining mode cancel

 Note
• Constant surface speed control function (G96) is disabled while the polygon machining mode is active.
• The rotational rate (E and L arguments) must not exceed the maximum speed of the spindle.
If the specified value exceeds the maximum, the spindle speed is clamped to the maximum speed.
• You cannot specify the polygon machining mode (G114.2) while the spindle synchronous control mode (G114.1 or
G814) or the hobbing machining mode (G114.3) is active.
• The rotation direction of tool spindle may change depending on tool layout or the selected tool number. See <14.5
Automatic Control of Rotation Direction of Rotary Tool> for more information.

14-53
L32

14.11 Hobbing Machining Function (G114.3, G113)

The hobbing machining function enables machining for spur gears by controlling C-axis (workpiece axis) rotation
synchronously with the rotation of the rotary tool (hob cutter).
In addition, machining for helical gears can be performed by compensating the workpiece axis synchronously with the
movement of Z axis.

Select a tool before specifying hobbing machining (G114.3).

Before specifying hobbing machining (G114.3), specify zero rotation to the rotary tool.

 Command format
G114.3 H D± E L R P Q Hobbing machining mode ON
G113 Hobbing machining mode OFF

 Argument
H Specify the rotary tool (hobbing machining axis).
3: Rotary tool on gang tool post, 5: Rotary tool on back tool post
D± Specify the workpiece axis (spindle) and its rotational direction.
Specify 9.
E Specify the rotational rate of the hobbing machining axis (hob cutter condition).
Specify an integer between 1 and 999. The default is 1.
L Specify the rotational rate of the work axis (number of machining gear teeth).
Specify an integer between 1 and 999. The default is 1.
R Specify the amount (angle) of the phase shift of workpiece axis.
The phase is shifted in the clockwise direction to the workpiece.
If no R argument is specified, the phase adjustment is not performed. Setting range: 0 to 359.999°
P Specify the helix angle of a gear. Specify the helix angle of a helical gear. Setting range -89000 to
+89000 (-89 to +89).
A spur gear is assumed unless the P argument is specified or if P0 is specified.
Q Specify the gear module.
In millimeter: From 100 to 25000 (0.1 to 25 mm). The minimum specification unit is 0.001 mm.
In inch:From 100 to 250000 (0.1 to 25 inch-1). The minimum specification unit is 0.0001 inch-1.

14-54
 L32

 Note
• The speed of the C axis is determined by the number of hob threads and the number of gear teeth that are specified by
the G114.3 command.

Sh： Rotary tool speed (min-1)

E： Number of hob cutter's threads
Z： Number of gear teeth

• The speed of the C axis is determined by the speed of the rotary tool. Specify the speed of the rotary tool that does
not exceed the speed clamp value of the C axis.

V： Cutting speed (mm/min)

d： Cutter diameter (ø 32 mm)
Z： Number of teeth (number of thread ridges)

• The hobbing machining mode is using the C axis. Therefore, if you want to use the C axis after canceling the
hobbing machining mode, you need to index the C axis and set the coordinate system again.
• You cannot specify the command to move the C axis while the hobbing machining mode is active.
• You cannot specify the hobbing machining mode (G114.3) while the spindle synchronous control mode (G114.1 or
G814) or the polygon machining mode (G114.2) is active.
• Specify P and Q arguments for machining of helical gears.
• To machine the helical gears, specify G98 (feed per minute), instead of G99 (feed per revolution).
• The rotation direction of tool spindle may change depending on tool layout or the selected tool number. See <14.5
Automatic Control of Rotation Direction of Rotary Tool> for more information.

14-55
L32

14.11.1 Gear formula

When a gear is machined in actual operation, an approach distance is necessary. When calculating the dimensions of a
gear, consider the approach distance.

14.11.2 Cutting condition table (reference)

Rank Material Module Feed rate (mm/rev) Cutting speed
(mm/min)
1 Non-ferrous material (brass, 0.5 0.4 to 1.0 150 to 300
aluminum) 1.0 0.5 to 1.0 150 to 300
2 Free-cutting ferrous material 0.5 0.5 to 0.75 80 to 150
(SUM) 1.0 0.5 to 1.25 60 to 120
3 General ferrous material 0.5 0.5 to 0.75 50 to 90
(SUS303) 1.0 0.5 to 1.25 40 to 80
4 Heavy-cutting ferrous 0.5 0.5 to 0.75 30 to 60
material (SUS304) 1.0 0.5 to 1.25 25 to 50

14-56
 L32

14.11.3 Example of using the hobbing machining function

ø20
Brass
Module: m = 1.0
Number of cutting 18
edges:
Spur gear

(according to <14.11.2 Cutting condition

table (reference)>)

 Sample program
$1
:
M80 S3=0 G98 ........................................ Rotary tool on gang tool post zero rotation in forward direction
M18 C0 .................................................... C axis zero point return
T1200
G0 X10.0 Z–5.0
G114.3 H3 D–9 E1 L18 R0...................... Hobbing machining mode ON
M77 ......................................................... Wait for synchronization completion
S3=1800 .................................................. The hob cutter rotates, and the C axis rotates at the same time.
G00 X15.6 Z–9.3 T
G01 Z11.0 F60 ........................................ Hobbing machining
X22.0 F500
G00 Z–9.3
X15.6
G01 Z11.0 F300 ...................................... Zero cut
X22.0 F500
M82
G4 U0.1
G113 Hobbing machining mode OFF
T
:
:

14-57
L32

14.12 Coordinate rotation (G950, G951)

Coordinates can be rotated to any angle relative to plane selection. Use slanted helical interpolation via the B axis or the
variable tilt spindle.

 Command format
G950 X Z Y B Coordinate rotation ON
G951 Coordinate rotation OFF

 Argument
X ： Specify the X-axis workpiece coordinate zero point after coordinate rotation.
Z ： Specify the Z-axis workpiece coordinate zero point after coordinate rotation.
Y ： Specify the Y-axis workpiece coordinate zero point after coordinate rotation.
B ： Specify coordinate rotation angle. An angle of 0 degrees is used unless specified.

 Note
• The X, Z and Y arguments of the coordinate rotation (G950) command can only be specified for a plane selected
prior to command selection.
• After B-axis mode is turned on (G900) when B-axis tools are used, plane selection is locked in the XZ plane (G18)
until the coordinate rotation (G950) command is executed. To specify helical interpolation, specify plane selection
after executing the coordinate rotation (G950) command.

14-58
 L32

14.13 B-axis Function

A machine equipped with a B-axis unit (type IX, XII) can be positioned for machining at any angle on the B-axis.
Program commands make it possible to use rotary tools on a B-axis unit for cross machining, tilt machining and end-face
machining at any angle position.
Contour machining with 4-axis interpolation (X, Z, C, B) is possible. Programming for contour machining requires use
of a third-party CAM system.

14.13.1 Machining data setting

Specify the front drill holder name in the machining data for the B-axis holder of a rotary tool equipped with the B-axis
function.

14-59
L32

14.13.2 B-axis tool angle

The B-axis angle is 90 degrees in cross direction and 0 degreesin end face direction. The B-axis coordinate system for
B-axis front machining (T11's) and back machining (T51's) is reversed.
 B-axis front machining (T11's)

 B-axis back machining (T51's)

14.13.3 B-axis tool coordinate system

In gang tool (T0100 - T1000) machining, diametrical infeed occurs along the X-axis and core infeed occurs on the
Y-axis. Also on in B-axis tool (T1100 - T1400, T5100 - T5400) machining, diametrical infeed occurs along the X-axis
and core infeed occurs on the Y-axis. However, when B-axis mode is on, infeed occurs along the Z-axis.

14-60
 L32

14.13.4 Commands and program examples for B-axis control

This section describes the command codes and program methods for using a B-axis tool to machine at angles along the
B-axis.

 G900/G901 B-axis mode ON/OFF

This command is used to program the tip of the B-axis tool as a supporting point. Enter the offset number (T2 digit) of
the B-axis tool for machining, then run the G900 command to make the tool tip a program point. Run tool number
commands when B-axis mode is in off status. Refer to <Program examples of diagonal drilling using B-axis tools> for
information on programming.

 Command format
T Offset number command
G900 X Z Y B B-axis mode ON
G901 B B-axis mode OFF

 Argument
X, Z and Y Specify the coordinates for tip movement in the work coordinate system before turning on
arguments： B-axis mode. You must specify argument X and Z. If not specified, an alarm occurs.
B arguments： Specify B-axis rotation angle (in 0.001 degree increments). If omitted, the current B-axis angle
position is used.

Machining L32
Front machining (T11's) –45.000 (-37.000, -10.000) - 90.000
Back machining (T51's) –6.000 - 45.000 (10.000, 37.000)

 Note
• The B argument enables sub-micron (sub-inch) specifications in 0.0001 degree increments.
• Specify an offset number (T2 digit) before running a G900 command. If not specified, an alarm occurs.
• You can also enter numeric characters in the last two digits and specify an offset number in a T code 4-digit
command.
• Tool selection is not available in G900 mode. You must specify B-axis mode cancellation in G901 during tool
replacement.
• Using T code, machining patterns, superimpose control and spindle synchronous control commands in G900 B-axis
mode will generate an alarm.
• An alarm will occur if a G900 command is added to the G620, G650 and G660 machining patterns. An alarm will
occur if an axis superimposition (G156) contains an G900 command.
• B-axis mode is turned off at the current B-axis angle position when the B argument is omitted during G901
specification.
• $1 axes of axis control groups in B-axis mode are the five axes of X1, Z1, Y1, C1 and B1, but synchronous
specification in one block is possible for four axes. It is possible to select any of the four axes that will be used, but
specifying a fifth axis will generate an alarm.
• The B code command address is "B" ⇒ "MB".
• Although specifications for back machining (T51's) can theoretically be made down to the lower limit of -90.000 for
the B argument range when B-axis mode is on (G900), any specification below -6.000 will generate a Y1-axis stroke
end alarm.
• Gang tooling limits B axis angle.
ø32 T08 T09
ø38 T07 T08
Holder • GDF • GDF
• BSE • BSE
• GSE • GSE
B-axis angle direction -37.000～90.000 -10.000～90.000

14-61
L32

 G950/G951 Turning workpiece zero point specification on/off for each axis in the coordinate
rotation and rotation coordinate system.
Specify this command to enable machining at any angle using B-axis tools. Use this command to incline the plane to the
B-axis angle to enable operation of a machining program on an inclined plane.

 Command format
G950 X Z Y B Specifying work coordinate zero point during or after coordinate rotation
G951 Canceling work coordinate zero point specification during or after
coordinate rotation

 Argument
X, Z and Y The workpiece coordinate position specified by an argument becomes workpiece zero point
arguments： "0" after coordinate rotation.
B arguments： Specify coordinate rotation angle (in 0.001 degree increments). If omitted, the current B-axis
angle is used as rotation angle.

Machining L32
Front machining (T11's) –45.000 (-37.000, -10.000) - 90.000
Back machining (T51's) –6.000 - 45.000 (10.000, 37.000)

 Note
• The B argument enables sub-micron (sub-inch) specifications in 0.0001 degree increments.
• Command specified axis/offset axis for the direction of the tip of the tool becomes the Z-axis. For details, refer to
<Regarding command specified axes and offset axes of B-axis tools>.
• In the coordinate rotation mode (G950), all axis commands are specified in a radial value. However, for X and Y
axes, diametric values can be used by changing the setting at the corresponding parameter.

Setting method
Choose Parameter screen→menu key [control parameter] →No. 8162 "G176 diameter specification enable" to set "1"
and the X and Y axes specify the diameter.
• Tool selection is not available during G950 coordinate rotation. You must use G951 to turn off coordinate rotation
before specifying tool numbers. Use G901 to turn off B-axis mode while G900 B-axis mode is on.
• The G950/G951 coordinate rotation can be turned on/off also when the B-axis function is not available. This is
useful during machining using variable tilt spindles and other fixed tilt tools.
• To specify G950 coordinate rotation in G900 B-axis mode, make the specification when the G18 (XZ) plane is
selected. Making a specification in any other plane will generate an alarm. To switch to any other plane, use the
G950 command before specifying. For example, to specify helical interpolation of an XY plane in G900 B-axis
mode, specify G950 coordinate rotation before selecting the G17 (XY) plane.
• The X, Z and Y arguments of G950 require that the axis of the selected plane is specified first. The X and Z
arguments are mandatory for a G18 (XZ) plane, the X and Y arguments are mandatory for the G17 (XY) plane and
the Y and Z arguments are mandatory for the G19 (YZ) plane. If not specified, an alarm occurs. Specify the plane
before running the G950 command. However, when the G900 B-axis mode is on, the G950 command can only
specify the G18 (XZ) plane.
• Although specifications for back machining (T51's) can theoretically be made down to the lower limit of -90.000 for
the B argument range when B-axis mode is on (G900), any specification below -6.000 will generate a Y1-axis stroke
end alarm.
• Gang tooling limits B axis angle.
ø32 T08 T09
ø38 T07 T08
Holder • GDF • GDF
• BSE • BSE
• GSE • GSE
B-axis angle direction -37.000～90.000 -10.000～90.000

14-62
 L32

Coordinate system for B-axis tools after specifying G950 coordinate rotation
The G950 coordinate rotation command allows you to machine in tool nose direction using 1-axis commands without
having to use 2-axis interpolation programming. At this time, regardless of the position of the B-axis angle, the Z-axis is
the command specified axis for tool nose direction.
For example, if the B-axis turns at 90 degrees, the tip of the tool is pointed in cross direction and also then the Z-axis is
the command specified axis for cross direction.
If G950 coordinate rotation has not been specified, the command specified axis for cross direction is the motor axis
(X-axis).

14-63
L32

 G910 independent B-axis tool rotation

This function is used to turn the angle of B-axis tools without turning on the B-axis mode.

 Command format
G910 B D1

 Argument
B arguments： Specifying B-axis rotation angle (in 0.001 degree increments).

Machining L32
Front machining (T11's) –45.000 (-37.000, -10.000) - 90.000
Back machining (T51's) –6.000 - 45.000 (10.000, 37.000)

D1 arguments： B-axis rotation occurs first. Moves in parallel according to the main system commands.

Since the G910 command does not rotate around the tool tip supporting point but around the center of the
B-axis, care must be taken to prevent interference with the workpiece.

 Note
• The B argument enables sub-micron (sub-inch) specifications in 0.0001 degree increments.
• B-axis rotation by G910 can only be performed using absolute value commands.
• When using the D1 argument, B-axis rotation occurs first and B-axis rotation is performed in parallel with
operations in the next block. When the D1 argument will not be used, operation continues from the next block after
completing rotation.
• Although specifications for back machining (T51's) can theoretically be made down to the lower limit of -90.000 for
the B argument range when B-axis mode is on (G900), any specification below -6.000 will generate a Y1-axis stroke
end alarm.
• Gang tooling limits B axis angle.
ø32 T08 T09
ø38 T07 T08
Holder • GDF • GDF
• BSE • BSE
• GSE • GSE
B-axis angle direction -37.000～90.000 -10.000～90.000

14-64
 L32

 Switching G190/G191 B-axis absolute/relative value commands

Separate addresses to run absolute/relative value commands like for the X, Z, Y and C axes are not provided for the
B-axis. For this reason, it is necessary to use G code G190/G191 to switch between absolute/relative value commands
for the B-axis. In initial state (at power up), absolute value commands are used. G190/G191 are modal G codes and
modal status can be confirmed on the Modal Information Screen.
The B-axis angle position can be confirmed in the Automatic Operation screen or the Position Data Screen.

Modal Information Screen

 Command format
G190 Absolute value commands for B-axis
G191 Relative value commands for B-axis

Absolute/relative value command address for each axis

Address
Each axis
Absolute value command Relative value command
X axis X U
Z axis Z W
Y axis Y V
C-axis C H
B-axis B (after specifying G190) B (after specifying G191)
The absolute/relative value command address of the B-axis is "B".

 Sample program
G900 X33.0 Z-1.0 B0 ; ............................. B-axis mode ON
G0 B45.0 ; ............................................... Absolute value movement. Position at a B-axis angle of 45 degrees
G191 ; ...................................................... B-axis relative value (incremental) command on
G0 B15.0 ; ............................................... Relative value movement. Positions the tool +15.0 degrees (absolute
value: 60 degrees) from the current position
・
・
・
G190 ; ...................................................... B-axis absolute value command on
G0 B20.0 ; ............................................... Absolute value movement. Position at a B-axis angle of 20.0 degrees
G901 B90.0 ; ........................................... B-axis mode OFF

 Note
B-axis command is enabled when the G900 B-axis mode is on. To rotate B-axis angle when B-axis mode is off, use the
G910 B-axis tool independent rotation.

14-65
L32

 Program examples of diagonal drilling using B-axis tools

14-66
 L32

14.13.5 Command specified axes and offset axes of B-axis tools

 Regarding command specified axes and offset axes of B-axis tools
In G900 B-axis mode, the command specified axis and offset axis of infeed direction changes depending on whether or
not G950 coordinate rotation is used.

List of command specified axis and offset axis of infeed direction for B-axis tools
Tool names when G900 G950 Machine Command Offset axis for Pattern
setting tools B-axis Coordinate B-axis angle specified axis for infeed direction
mode rotation direction infeed direction
B-axis cross ON ON –46.000～ Z axis Z axis 
machining 90.000° (B-axis angle (B-axis angle
(B-axis 90 degrees) direction) direction)
OFF 0.000° Z axis Z axis 
–46.000～- X, Z-axis X, Z-axis 
0.001 ,
0.001～89.999°
90.000° X axis X axis 
OFF OFF 90.000° X axis X axis 
B-axis end face ON ON –46.000～ Z axis Z axis 
drilling 90.000° (B-axis angle (B-axis angle
(B-axis 0 degree) direction) direction)
OFF 0.000° Z axis Z axis 
–46.000～ X, Z-axis X, Z-axis 
-0.001 ,
0.001～89.999°
90.000° X axis X axis 
OFF OFF 0.000° Z axis Z axis 
• Regarding command direction along the X, Z and Y axes, patterns  -  and  -  operate using a rectangular
coordinate system regardless of B-axis angle while patterns  and  operate in B-axis angle direction.
• Tool length (when the tool name is set as "B-axis cross machining" it refers to a "diameter" value and when it is
set as "B-axis end face drilling" it refers to "longitude" value and is used as tool length) when G900 B-axis mode
is on is reflected to nose direction.

 How to machine in tool set direction without turning the B-axis angle
To set tools, select cross direction (90 degree B-axis angle) or end face direction (0 degree B-axis angle) in the
Preparation screen. For details, refer to the "Operator's Manual". When the workpiece that will be machined does not
require B-axis rotation during tool setting, you can use B-axis tools in the traditional manner without having to use the
B-axis mode or coordinate rotation commands described so far. That is operation using patterns  and  in the list
above.

14-67
L32

14.13.6 Offset for B-axis tools

 Offset
You can also place the offset number in the last two digits of T to call tools. For information on the direction for
entering offsets (axis), refer to the list of <Regarding command specified axes and offset axes of B-axis tools>.
Offset cancel (T0 command) cannot be specified in G900 B-axis mode or when G950 coordinate rotation is on. Be sure
to turn G901 B-axis mode off and G951 coordinate rotation off before canceling offset. Attempting to cancel offset
when G900 B-axis mode and G950 coordinate rotation are on will generate an alarm.

 Offset number changes during B-axis mode

To change the offset number in B-axis mode do not change when G950 coordinate rotation on. As shown in the
following program example, turn off G951 coordinate rotation, change the offset number and then specify G950 again.
To enable only compensation without moving the X and Y axes, use the incremental command to specify a move
distance of 0.

 Sample program
T1100
G0 **** T11 ................................... Specifies offset numbers
G900 X** Z** B60.0 ...................... B-axis mode ON
G950 X** Z** (B60.0) .................... With the coordinate rotation and rotation coordinate system on
Coolant process
G951 ............................................. With the coordinate rotation and rotation coordinate system off
G0 U0 W0 T12 .............................. Changes offset number
G950 X** Z** (B60.0) .................... With the coordinate rotation and rotation coordinate system on

14-68
 L32

14.13.7 How to avoid problems in B-axis mode

If, for some reason, operation stops during front machining using a B-axis tool, and program operation is reset, confirm
that the "motor axis" menu key is not selected in the Handle Feed screen. If not set, it will be possible to move the tool
in B-axis angle direction using Z-axis movement.
For example, if program operation is reset while using B-axis tools to drill at a B-axis angle of 45 degrees, this method
enables a reset without damaging tool tips. For details, refer to the "Operator's Manual".
14.13.8 Precautions to be heeded during B-axis tool use
 Precautions to be heeded during B-axis tool selection
When a tool is selected at a B-axis angle of 0 degrees, the center of the tool moves to the center of the end face of the
material since the tip of the tool faces the end face direction. The material must be called at a position away from
program zero point. If the material is called when it protrudes, there is a risk of interference with the tip of the tool.
When B-axis angle is between -46.000 and -0.001 degrees or 0.001 and 89.999 degrees, it is assumed that the tip of the
tool is moving in cross direction. After the X-axis moves 10.0 mm beyond the positioning point of the machining data
(diameter value), the tool is positioned in Y-axis direction.
When at a 90 degree angle of the B-axis (cross direction), the tool is positioned at the positioning point.

A tool selection position at a B-axis angle of -46.000 to -0.001 degrees, or 0.001 to 89.999 degrees (the figure below
shows a 45 degree angle)

A tool selection position at a B-axis angle of 90 degrees (cross direction)

14-69
L32

 Precautions to be heeded during B-axis tool rotation

If the tool is not retracted when G900 B-axis mode is on and the tool is rotated at a B-axis angle from 0 to 90 degrees, the
material and the tip of the tool will interfere as shown in the diagram below.

For that reason, the tool should be retracted along the X and Z-axes before it rotates the B-axis.

The diagram below shows what happens when the B-axis angle is rotated from 0 to 90 degrees (G910 B0) when B-axis
mode is off.

14-70
 L32

14.14 Helical Interpolation

The machine can provide the circular interpolation for arbitral two axes among the three axes (X1, Y1, and Z1 or Z2
axes) which are perpendicular with one another and also the linear interpolation for the remaining axis in
synchronization with the circular rotation. This function enables drilling of large orific size.
14.14.1 End-face helical interpolation process
 Command format
G2/G3 X(U) Y(V) Z(W) I J K P F

14.14.1.1 Relation between circular plane and linear interpolation axis

Linear interpolation
Circular plane
axis
G17 XY plane Z axis
G18 ZX plane Y axis
G19 YZ plane X axis

 Argument
For circular plane G17 (X-Y plane):
X(U) Specify the end-point coordinate of the circular arc. Base it on the diameter.
Y(V) Specify the end-point coordinate of the circular arc. Base it on the diameter.
Z(W) Specify the end-point coordinate of the linear axis. Base it on the radius.
I Specify the center of the arc.
Specify the radius command increment of the center X coordinate as seen from the start point.
J Specify the center of the arc.
Specify the radius command increment of the center Y coordinate as seen from the start point.
P Specify the number of pitches.
When no P argument is specified or P0 is specified, it causes the helical interpolation from the start
to end points within a single circuit.
F Specify the feed rate.

14-71
L32

 Sample program
$1
:
G98 M80 S3=4000 ......................... Rotary tool on gang tool post forward rotation
M28 S0 ........................................... Spindle 0-degree indexing
T1200
G0 Z–5.0 T12
X0
G17 ................................................ X-Y plane selection
G42 G0 X4.0 Y0 Z-1.0 .................... Positioning
Nose R compensation mode ON (Specify R of tool data T12 to end mill radius
1.0.)
G2 X4.0 Y0 Z0 I-2.0 F300 .............. Move to start point using helical interpolation
G2 X4.0 Y0 Z1.0 I-2.0 P10 F60 ...... Cuts in 10 pitches of helical interpolation.
G2 X4.0 Y0 I-2.0 ............................. Circulates tool by a single circle on the bottom of hole.
G40 G1 X0 Y0 ................................ Nose R compensation mode cancel.
G0 Z-1.0
G18 ................................................ Z-X plane selection
G0 X0 Z–1.0
G50 W5.0
M82 ................................................ Rotary tool on gang tool post stops rotation
M3 S1=3000 G99
:
:

 Note
X(U) and Y(V) should be specified with diameter values.

14-72
 L32

14.14.2 Slanted helical interpolation process (G173)

The slanted rotation coordinate instruction allows the coordinate system to be rotated at the specified angle with the Y1
axis set to the center axis on the Z-X plane and the X1 axis set to the center axis on the Y-Z plane. The slanted rotation
coordinate instruction can be combined with the helical interpolation to provide the slanted helical interpolation process.

 Setting of slanted rotation coordinate

 Command format
G173 X Z D Slanted rotation coordinate command for rotating Z-X plane with Y1 axis
set to the center axis
G173 Y Z D Slanted rotation coordinate command for rotating Y-Z plane with Z1 axis set
to the center axis
G173 Canel slanted rotation coordinate command

 Argument
X Specify the center-of-rotation coordinate on X1 axis.
This argument should be specified for the rotation with Y1 axis set to the center axis.
Y Specify the center-of-rotation coordinate on Y1 axis.
This argument should be specified for the rotation with X1 axis set to the center axis.
Z Specify the center-of-rotation coordinate on Z1 axis.
D Specify the rotation angle. If no argument is specified, 0° is assumed.

Angular rotation direction

14-73
L32

 Helical interpolation command when slanted rotation coordinate is specified

 Command format
G2/G3 X(U) Y(V) Z(W) I J K P F

 Argument
For circular plane G17 (X-Y plane):
X(U) Specify the end-point coordinate of the circular arc. Base it on the radius.
Y(V) Specify the end-point coordinate of the circular arc. Base it on the radius.
Z(W) Specify the end-point coordinate of the linear axis. Base it on the radius.
I Specify the center of the arc.
Specify the radius command increment of the center X coordinate as seen from the start point.
J Specify the center of the arc.
Specify the radius command increment of the center Y coordinate as seen from the start point.
P Specify the number of pitches. Specify an integer between 0 and 99.
When no P argument is specified or P0 is specified, it causes the helical interpolation from the start
to end points within a single circuit.
F Specify the feed rate.

 Sample program
$1
:
G98 M80 S3=4000 .............................. Rotary tool on gang tool post forward rotation
M28 S0 ................................................ Spindle 0-degree indexing
T1200
G50 W–5.0
G0 X0 Y0 Z-3.0 T12 ............................ Position the tool at center of workpiece.
G173 Y0 Z11.15 D15.0........................ Coordinate system rotate command
Rotate the Y-Z plane 15 degrees at the position Z11.15.
G17
G1 X0 Y0 Z-2.0 F300 .......................... Move the tool to the center of slanted coordinate system.
G42 X2.0 Y0 ........................................ Move the tool to the positioning point while compensating the tool
diamter.
G2 X2.0 Y0 Z0 I-2.0 P1.0 F300 ........... Circulates tool helically by a single circle to the position Z0 of slanted
coordinate system
(air cut).
G2 X2.0 Y0 Z3.38 I-2.0 P10.0 F60 ...... Cuts in 10 pitches of helical interpolation to the position Z3.38.
G2 X2.0 Y0 I-2.0 .................................. Circulates tool by a single circle on the bottom of hole.
G40 G1 X0 Y0 ..................................... Move the tool to the center of workpiece while canceling the tool diameter
compensation.
Z-3.0 F1500 T0 .................................... Move the Z axis away from the tool.
G173.................................................... Cancel coordinate system rotate command.
G0 X0 Z-3.0 ......................................... Position the tool at center of workpiece.
G50 W5.0
G18
G0 Z–1.0
M82

M3 S1=3000

T200
:
:

14-74
 L32

 Note
• The axis addresses in the G173 command should be specified based on radius.
• The circular plane should be changed from one to another after G173 command is issued. The initial value of the
circular plane is G17 (X-Y plane). After the slanted rotation coordinate command is canceled, the circular plane is
automatically returned to G18 (Z-X plane).

14-75
L32

14.14.3 Slanted helical interpolation process (G950, G951)

Slanted helical interpolation machining can also be performed using the coordinate rotation command (G950, G951).
Use a rotary tool with B-axis or a variable tilt spindle. For information on the coordinate rotation command (G950,
G951), refer to <14.12 Coordinate rotation (G950, G951)>.

 Sample program
Performing slanted helical interpolation using B-axis tools on a gang tool post or variable tilt spindle
$1
:
M5 M80 S3=4000 G98 ............................ Rotary tool on gang tool post forward rotation
T1200 E0.0 .............................................. Tool selection, spindle 0-degree indexing
G0 X0 Z-2.0 T12
G900 X0 Z-0.907 B4.8 ............................ Turn on B-axis mode, position the tool at a B-axis angle of 4.8 degrees
and the tool tip at X 0 and Z -0.907
G950 X0 Z0 B4.8..................................... Coordinate rotation ON, Specify X0Y0Z0 as the zero point
G17 ......................................................... X-Y plane selection
G41 G0 X1.409 Y0 Z-0.907 ..................... End mill positioning
Tool compensation on End mill radius 1.0 at tool data T12 R
G3 X1.409 Y0 Z0 I-1.1 F300 ................... Move to start point using helical interpolation
G3 X1.409 Y0 Z0.995 I-1.1 P25 F60 ....... Cut using a helical interpolation pitch of 25 mm
G3 X-0.791 Y0 W0.005 I-1.1 F100
G3 X-0.791 Y0 I1.1 F100......................... Circulates tool by a single circle on the bottom of hole.
G3 X-0.791 Y0 Z-0.907 I1.1 F500 ........... End mill retracts
G40 G0 X-0.791 Y0 Z-0.907.................... Tool compensation off
G951........................................................ Coordinate rotation OFF
G901 B0 .................................................. B-axis mode OFF
G0 U0 V0 W0 T00 ................................... Offset cancel
G18 ......................................................... X-Z plane selection
M82 ......................................................... Rotary tool on gang tool post stops rotation
M3 S1=3000 G99
:

14-76
 L32

14.15 3D Chamfering Function (G370) (Option)

The G370 command can be specified to enable uniform chamfering of a cross hole on a workpiece. Chamfering of the
inner side of the cross hole can also be performed in the same way as the outer periphery.

 Command format
G370 A C D Q±1 E F H I J S
T1 X R Z K U

 Argument
A: This specifies the diameter of the cross hole of the workpiece. Be sure to always specify this argument.
C: This specifies the chamfering width of the cross hole of the workpiece. Be sure to always specify this
argument.
D: This specifies the outer diameter or inner diameter of the workpiece. Use the outer diameter of the
workpiece when chamfering the outer periphery, and user the inner diameter of the workpiece when
chamfering the inner side. Be sure to always specify this argument.
Q±1 This specifies whether chamfering is performed on the outer periphery or the inner side of the workpiece.
Q1 specifies chamfering of the outer periphery, and Q-1 specifies chamfering of the inner side. Be sure to
always specify this argument. An alarm occurs if the argument is not specified.
E: This specifies the circular interpolation direction of the chamfering operation. Specify E2 to perform
interpolation in the G02 direction (up-cut), and specify E3 to perform interpolation in the G03 direction
(down-cut). If no argument is specified, the machining advancing direction is G03 direction (down-cut).
F: This specifies the feed rate per minute (mm/min). Be sure to always specify this argument.
H: This specifies the tool tip angle (umbrella angle). Be sure to always specify this argument.
I: This specifies the diameter of the usage section of the tool. Be sure to always specify this argument.
J: This specifies the height of the usage section of the tool. Be sure to always specify this argument.
S: This specifies the diameter of another tool when using the extended lifespan function. Specify a value that
is larger than the value for the I argument. An alarm occurs if a value smaller than the I argument is
specified.
T1: Machining is performed at the tool diameter of the S argument of the extended lifespan function. Specify
if operation confirmation is performed.
X: The X-axis moves to the specified position (in workpiece coordinates) when machining is started. If no
argument is specified, no axis movement is performed.
R: This is specified for moving the tool even closer to the workpiece from the X-axis position when
machining is started. When a positive value is specified, the X-axis moves closer to the workpiece.
Z: The Z-axis moves to the specified position (in workpiece coordinates) when machining is started. If no
argument is specified, no axis movement is performed.
K: The X-axis moves to the specified position (in workpiece coordinates) when machining ends. If no
argument is specified, the X-axis position at the start of machining is used.
U: This specifies the position where the X-axis moves when machining ends (incremental command from the
X-axis position when machining ends). If no argument is specified, the X-axis position at the start of
machining is used.

14-77
L32

 Note
If the I argument, J argument, and K argument are specified, specify in the order of I, J, and K.
An alarm occurs if the Q argument is specified using a value other than ±1.
An alarm occurs if the S argument is smaller than the I argument.
An alarm occurs if the E argument is specified using a value other than 2 and 3.
An alarm occurs if the T argument is specified using a value other than 1.
When chamfering is performed on the inner side, an alarm can occur for certain angle settings of the H argument. The
conditions where the alarm occurs are shown below.

As shown in the figure, if the angle formed by the line joining the workpiece center hole and the chamfering edge is
smaller than the angle on one side of the tool, interference will occur between the tool and workpiece inner side. In this
case, an alarm occurs before machining is performed.

In the example shown in the above figure, we have

and so, an alarm occurs because this is smaller than the 45° angle on one side of the tool.
In these types of cases, use a tool that has an angle that is smaller than the calculated value. In the example above,
machining can be performed for a tool angle of 60° (30° on one side).

14-78
 L32

 Extended lifespan function

When the same location on a tool is used for machining, wear occurs only at that location. For this reason, the extended
lifespan function is used to extend the lifespan of the tool by using different cutting points each time within the
designated range by specifying the diameter of another point.

Specify the diameter of the second point using the S argument. Be sure to always specify a value for the S argument that
is larger than the value of the I argument.
An alarm occurs if the value of the S argument is smaller than the value of the I argument.
The cutting point changes randomly between the point specified by the I argument and the point specified by the S
argument for each cycle. When this function is used, be careful that you specify the correct value for the angle in the H
argument. Specifying an incorrect value can cause the size of the surface to change each time that machining is
performed so that chamfering cannot be performed.
Machining can be confirmed at the diameter of the S argument by specifying the T1 argument. Be sure to always
confirm beforehand.
Example
G370 A4.0 C0.1D10.0 F300 H90.0 I1.6 S2.0T1 J0.3 Q1

14-79
L32

 Sample program
Machining drawing

Tool drawing

M80 S3=3000 .......................................... Rotation tool rotation command: 3000 rotations

T800 ........................................................ Cross rotary tool selection
M18 C0 .................................................... Spindle indexing command
G50 W–15.0 ............................................ Longitudinal coordinate system shift
G0 X11.0 Z5.0 ......................................... Tool positioning
G370 A4.0 C0.1 D10.0 F500 H90.0 I1.6 J0.3 Q1 3D chamfering (chamfering of outer periphery)
G370 A4.0 C0.1 D7.0 F500 H90.0 I1.6 J0.7 Q–1 3D chamfering (chamfering of inner side)
G0 X14.0 ................................................. Tool retracting
G50 W15.0 .............................................. Longitudinal coordinate system shift cancel

14-80
 L32

 Note
An alarm occurs if the three axes X, Z, and Y do not belong to the system that is specified by G370. Before specifying
G370, select a tool that has the three axes X, Z, and Y.
If using a user macro in a machining program that has a G370 command, pay careful attention to the following points.
Also note that the user macro is an optional function.
After issuing the G370 command, if using one of the common variables below, be sure to set the common variable to 0
or the initial value. If one of the common variables below is already being used in another macro, change it to a number
that is different from the ones listed below before using this function.
The common variables used in G370 are the numbers shown below.
#100, #101, #103～105, #110～#113, #115～#121, #124, #125, #127, #128, #130
The above-listed common variables appear when the menu key [ComVal.2] in the Offset screen is pressed.
Be sure to check operation before performing the actual cutting operation.
An alarm occurs if this function is not enabled.

14-81
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 2E1-1402
Mfg. No. L32/0284～
Issue Date 2016.7

14-82
 15. Sample Programming [Back Machining]
15.1 Back Machining Program ........................................................................................................................ 15-3
15.2 Back Machining Coordinates .................................................................................................................. 15-4
15.3 Back Machining Process......................................................................................................................... 15-5
15.4 Back Spindle Air Blow (M72, M73) .......................................................................................................... 15-8
15.5 Knock-out Advance/Retract (M10, M11) ................................................................................................. 15-9
15.5.1 Air cylinder driven knock-out device .................................................................................................. 15-9
15.5.2 Motor-driven knock-out device ........................................................................................................ 15-10
15.6 Product Collection by Basket (M320, M33, M34, M780) ....................................................................... 15-11
15.6.1 Move basket forward (M320)........................................................................................................... 15-11
15.6.2 Basket collection mode - Move product collection position (M33) ................................................... 15-13
15.6.3 Basket collection mode - sequential operation of product collection (M34) ..................................... 15-15
15.6.4 Mounting and adjusting the basket on back spindle (M780) ........................................................... 15-16
15.7 Pick-off Collection of Products by Back Spindle (M33, M34) ................................................................ 15-17
15.7.1 Move product collection position (M33) ........................................................................................... 15-17
15.7.2 A series of operations for product separation (M34)........................................................................ 15-19
15.7.3 Cut-off and product collection.......................................................................................................... 15-20
15.8 Workpiece unloader .............................................................................................................................. 15-22
15.8.1 Series of workpiece unloader operations (M334) ............................................................................ 15-22
15.8.2 Workpiece unloader command (M335) ........................................................................................... 15-29
15.8.3 M code list for workpiece unloader .................................................................................................. 15-30
15.9 Spindle Synchronous Control (G114.1, G814, G113, G813, M77) ........................................................ 15-31
15.10 C1-C2 Axis Superimposition (M190, M191) .......................................................................................... 15-34
15.11 Pick-Off and Ending Process ................................................................................................................ 15-36
15.11.1 Pick-off process ............................................................................................................................... 15-38
15.11.2 Re-chucking of a long workpiece .................................................................................................... 15-40
15.12 Executing the Last Program (G999) ..................................................................................................... 15-46
15.13 Pick-off failure detect(M50) ................................................................................................................... 15-48
15.14 Machining with Tool or Rotary Tool in Back Machining ......................................................................... 15-49
15.15 Back Spindle Feed Per Rotation ON/OFF (G44, G43) ......................................................................... 15-51
15.16 Use of "Back Chuck Extend Length" in Machining Data ....................................................................... 15-52
15.17 Back Spindle Torque Limit (M122, M123, M124) .................................................................................. 15-54
15.18 Pick-off Cancel (G231).......................................................................................................................... 15-55
15.19 Back Machining Program Skip Function (M239) ................................................................................... 15-56

15-1
 (Blank Page)

15-2
 L32

15.1 Back Machining Program

The back machining is performed by combining a front machining program ($1) and back machining program ($2).

 Sample program

As shown above, the workpiece is finished after two cycles of program execution.
Note that inserting the back machining program at the last program execution (G999) can execute workpiece back
machining after cut-off machining both in the first cycle, thereby finishing the workpiece in one cycle. The program is
not however be executed unless the menu key [Last PRT] at the bottom of the screen is set to ON. The program is
executed when [Last PRT] in the first cycle has been ON.

15-3
L32

15.2 Back Machining Coordinates

The coordinates in programming must be understood according to the back spindle movement during program creation.
The positional relationship among the back spindle, the back machining tools, and the workpiece in the back spindle
chuck is shown in the figure below.

The same conception as in <11.6 Coordinate System> can be applied as the coordinate axis. Programming is performed
on the assumption that the material is fixed.

 Note
• The length of the workpiece that protrudes from the end face of the back spindle chuck plus the protrusion length of
the long-neck chuck is 80 mm (type VIII, IX) and 65.0 mm (type X, XII). For more than 30.0 mm, the workpiece
interferes with the workpiece separator (product chute) during workpiece separation.
• The length of the workpiece protruding from the end face of the back spindle chuck must be entered in the Back
work extend length in machining data.
(Protruding workpiece length = entire workpiece length – programmed back chucking position)
If no value is specified, the back machining tool interferes with the workpiece protruding from the back spindle
when the workpiece is chucked because the end face of the back spindle is assumed as the zero point.

15-4
 L32

15.3 Back Machining Process

• The back machining is performed by tools T31's and T51's. This machining is basically the same as for front
machining.
• After the selection of a tool of any of T31's and T51's, the program zero point of the Z2 axis is taken at the end face
position of the back workpiece that has the "Back work extend length" (plus "Back chuck extend length") set on the
Machining Data screen. Enter the extend length of the workpiece, the length the workpiece end face extends from
the back spindle chuck end face, to "Back work extend length" on the Machining Data screen. When a long-neck
chuck is used, also enter the data to "Back chuck extend length".
• Place the back machining tool to within 103.5 mm from the end face of the sleeve holder.
• If "Z–1.0" is specified after tool selection of T31's or T51's, the workpiece end face on the back spindle is positioned
at the point where the clearance between this workpiece end face and the back machining tool is 1.0 mm. Placing it
outside the 103.5 mm range may cause interference. Pay attention when setting the tool.
• The amount of the workpiece that protrudes from the back spindle cap nut must be within 80 mm (type VIII, IX) and
65.0 mm (type X, XII).
• Write a program in $2.
• For "Back work extend length" of the machining data, enter the amount protruding between the end face of the back
spindle chuck and the end face of workpiece.
(Back workpiece protruding amount) = (whole workpiece length) – (programmed back chuck position)
• For "Back chuck extend length" of the machining data, enter the data when the long-neck chuck is used. The value to
be entered is the protrusion length of the long-neck chuck from the end face of the back spindle cap nut. This sets the
position of "Back chuck extend length" + "Back work extend length" as the program zero point.
• The GSE1910 rotary cross-machining tool can be mounted on U12B rotary tool driving device.
Mount it on the T31 - T34.

 Note
• During back machining, use the two tools close to the center of the main spindle to drill deeper than the back spindle
end face. For example, use number T31 and T32 tool positions on the U150B. For information on other tool
combinations, refer to the tool layout figure while also taking care to avoid interference.
Machining with the tool moved further into the back spindle results in interference between the cap nut of the
adjacent tool sleeve and the cap nut of the back spindle.
• Set the boring sleeve in the opposite tool post or back tool post so that the tool nose faces horizontally.
• Using the T34 and T39 in the T35 and U12B on the U150B and U151B for boring, due to interference between the
back spindle and the workpiece chute, it is not possible to transfer this operation to the back spindle end face.

15-5
L32

15-6
 L32

 Sample program
(Center hole and drilling)
$2
G600
G99 M23 S2= .................. Specify per rotation feed and forward rotation of back spindle.
(Center machining)
T3 .................................... Select the back machining tool.
G00 Z—1.0 ............................... Position the tool 1.0 mm away from the workpiece end face.
G01 Z5.0 F0.05 T ............... Cut to the specified depth in cutting feed.
G00 Z—1.0 T00........................ Cancel the compensation while returning to the position 1.0 mm away from the
workpiece in rapid feed.
(Drilling)
T3 W—1.0 ....................... Select the back machining tool at the position –1.0 mm away from the current
back spindle position.
G00 Z—1.0 ............................... Position the tool 1.0 mm away from the workpiece end face.
G01 Z15.0 F0.08 T ............. Cut to the specified depth in rapid cutting feed.
G00 Z—1.0 T00........................ Cancel the compensation while returning to the position 1.0 mm away from the
workpiece in rapid feed.
M25 Stop the back spindle.
M34 A series of operations of product separation is performed after back machining is
completed.

15-7
L32

15.4 Back Spindle Air Blow (M72, M73)

Blowing air from the tip of the fixed knock-out pipe in the back spindle can be controlled by these commands.

 Command format
M72 Back spindle air blow ON (Starts air blow.)
M73 Back spindle air blow OFF (Stops air blow.)

15-8
 L32

15.5 Knock-out Advance/Retract (M10, M11)

15.5.1 Air cylinder driven knock-out device
 Outline
The back spindle knock-out device advances or retracts.

 Command format
M10 Knock-out advance
M11 Knock-out retract

 Operations
• Knock-out advance (M10)
The knock-out advance (M10) command allows the knock-out device to be advanced by the air cylinder.
• Knock-out retract (M11)
The knock-out advance (M11) command allows the knock-out device to be retracted by the air cylinder.

 Note
• If the knock-out advance/retract (M10/M11) command is specified while the back spindle chuck is closed or the
back spindle is operating (during rotation, while controlled in C-axis mode, during rigid tapping, during orientation,
or while controlled in spindle synchronous mode), an alarm occurs.
• Adjusting the speed controller of the air cylinder allows the advance/retract speed of the knock-out device to be
adjusted.

15-9
L32

15.5.2 Motor-driven knock-out device

 Command format
M10 Z F T Knock-out advance
M11 Z F Knock-out retract

 Argument
Z: Specifies the position to move the knock-out device. If not specified, the knock-out advance M10 will move
to the knock-out advance position and knock-out retract M11 will move to 0 mm.

L32
Knock-out advance 150.0mm
position

F: Specifies the feed rate of the knock-out axis (per min). Specify a value of F100 or more for mm units and 2 or
more for inch units. If omitted, the detector moves at a rapid feed rate. The rapid feed rate is 30000
(mm/min).
T: Indicates the torque of the knock-out axis. It is indicated as a ratio (%) of the maximum torque value. If no
argument is specified, 200% is assumed. Only valid for M10. A value between 0 - 200% can be set.

 Note
• When the back chuck is closed or when the back spindle is rotating, no operation is performed. An alarm occurs.
• If a low value is set for knock-out axis torque (T argument), the knock-out will not advance and an alarm occurs.

15-10
 L32

15.6 Product Collection by Basket (M320, M33, M34, M780)

15.6.1 Move basket forward (M320)
The M320 (move basket forward) command moves the back spindle headstock (Z2 axis) to the basket advance position
if "BASKET" is specified for the back spindle in the machining data. If the M34 (series of operations for product
separation) command is specified, the products received by the basket are collected into the product receiver box.

 Command format
M320 X W U Z R1 F Move basket forward

 Argument
X End position queuing X position. When the X1 axis reaches the end position during cut-off process,
the basket on the back headstock (Z2 axis) finishes advance movement. If X argument omitted, the
end-position queuing is not performed.
W Specify the position to retract the Z2 axis (distance from zero point of Z2 axis). Moves the axis to the
return position (45.0 mm for VIII, 0.0 mm for X, XII) when omitted.
U Specify the position to which the X2 axis advances. Moves to the zero point (1000.0mm) when
omitted.
Z Specify the position to which the basket advances (absolute command). If Z argument is omitted, the
back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the point 321.0mm of machine coordinate. When Z argument is
specified, R1 argument is ignored even if specified.
R1 Specify "1" when shifted tool is used for cut-off tool.
1: The Z2 axis advances to the position 301.0mm.
Omitted: The Z2 axis advances to the position 321.0mm.

F Specify the feed rate (per minute) of the back headstock (Z2 axis). If F argument is omitted, the back
headstock (Z2 axis) moves in rapid feed. Specify the value with decimal point.

 Note
When specifying the M320 (move basket forward) command with an X argument (end position queuing), the X axis
must reach the specified end position during the execution of 8 blocks of commands that follow the M320 command. If
the X axis does not reach the end position within this period, an alarm occurs.

15-11
L32

 Sample program
• With queuing at end point
$1 $2
G600................................... Free pattern G600 ............ Free pattern
(machining pattern cancel) (machining pattern cancel)
M34 .................................... A series of operations for product
separation
: :
T0100 ................................. Select the cut-off tool
G0 X20.0 Z10.0 T1 ............. Position the cut-off tool
M320 X13.0 ........................ X1 axis (cut-off tool) at the point 13.0
mm waits for
Z2 axis (basket) at the point 321.0mm
.
G99 G1 X–3.0 F0.03 .......... Perform cut-off machining
M141 .................................. Return the basket

 Note
• Before executing the M320 (move basket forward) command with end-position queuing specified (with X argument
specified), set the override to 100%. If the override setting is changed during operation, an end-position queuing will
fail.
• When specifying the M320 (move basket forward) command with an X argument (end position queuing), the X axis
must reach the specified end position during the execution of 8 blocks of commands that follow the M320 command.
If the X axis does not reach the end position within this period, an alarm occurs.
• Select "BASKET" for "Back Spindle" in Machining Data screen. Specifying M320 (move basket forward)
command while "Standard" is selected for "Back Spindle" causes an alarm to occur.

15-12
 L32

15.6.2 Basket collection mode - Move product collection position (M33)

 Command format
M33 Move product collection position
M33 W D U E

 Argument
W Specify the position to retract the Z2 axis (distance from zero point of Z2 axis). Moves the axis to the
return position (45.0 mm for VIII, IX, 0.0 mm for X, XII) when omitted.
D Specify the feed rate (per minute) to retract the Z2 axis. Moves the axis in rapid feed when omitted.
Specify the value with decimal point.
U Specify the position where the separator on X2 axis collect products. Moves to the zero point (0.0
mm) when omitted.
E Specify the feed rate (per minute) when the separator on X2 axis moves. Moves the axis in rapid feed
when omitted.
Specify the value with decimal point.

W D U E : Can be omitted.

 Sample program
$2
M88
M33 .......................................... Move the product collection position.
If M33 is specified without argument specified, X2 and Z2 axes move to the zero
point.
After the X2 and Z2 axes movement is completed, the coordinate system setting
for the Z2 axis is executed.
Specify a program that puts the finished workpiece in the product box in the next
line of the M33 code.
G00 Z .............................. Move the back spindle to the workpiece collection position in rapid feed.
M23 S2=100 ............................. Rotate the back spindle to put the product on the workpiece separator.
G04 U1.0 .................................. Dwell
M25 .......................................... Stop the rotation of back spindle.
G0 Z0
M31 .......................................... Work conveyor ON
T3000 ....................................... Move the back spindle at the center of main spindle.
M89

15-13
L32

 Note
• Specify "STANDARD" in "BACK SPINDLE" of the machining data.
• The above program example selects T3000 after product collection.
• Compared to M34 (sequential operation of product collection), M33 allows individual operations for product
collection to be programmed. M33 can therefore save product collection time by efficient programming.
• Decimal point is required for argument for feed rate.
Ex.) M33 D3000.0 E5000.0

15-14
 L32

15.6.3 Basket collection mode - sequential operation of product collection (M34)

The product received by the basket is transferred to the production collection box.

 Command format
M34 W D U E Z F T S
B X

 Argument
W Specify the position to retract the Z2 axis (distance from zero point of Z2 axis). Moves the axis to the
return position (45.0 mm for VIII, IX, 0.0 mm for X, XII) when omitted.
D Specify the feed rate (per minute) to retract the Z2 axis. Moves the axis in rapid feed when omitted.
Specify the value with decimal point.
U Specify the position where the separator on X2 axis collect products. Moves to the zero point
(0.0mm) when omitted.
E Specify the feed rate (per minute) when the separator on X2 axis moves. Moves the axis in rapid feed
when omitted.
Specify the value with decimal point.
Z Specify the position to advance Z2 axis. Moves the axis to 118.0 mm for VIII and IX and 58.0 mm
for X and XII when omitted.
F Specify the feed rate (per minute) when Z2 axis advances. Moves the axis in rapid feed when
omitted.
Specify the value with decimal point.
T Specify the time to rotate the back spindle at product collection. When this argument is omitted, the
back spindle rotates for two seconds.
S Specify the back spindle speed at product collection. If not specified, the back spindle will rotate for
30 min –1.
B Specify the position to retract the Z2 axis after product collection. Moves the axis to the return
position (45.0 mm for VIII, IX, 0.0 mm for X, XII) when omitted.
X Specify the position to move the X2 axis after product collection. Moves the axis to the center of the
spindle when omitted.

W D U E Z F

T S B X can be omitted.

15-15
L32

15.6.4 Mounting and adjusting the basket on back spindle (M780)

[Procedure]
1. Specify M780 (Back spindle zero point indexing) command in MDI mode.
2. Press the Reset key.
3. The back spindle is indexed at the zero point. Mount the basket on a level with the back spindle. For detailed
mounting procedures, refer to the Operator's Manual.

 Note
• Select "BASKET" for "Back Spindle" in Machining Data screen.
• Note that the back spindle is not excieted when mounting the basket.

15-16
 L32

15.7 Pick-off Collection of Products by Back Spindle (M33, M34)

The following explains a series of operation to collect the products, picked off by the back spindle, into the product
receiver box.

15.7.1 Move product collection position (M33)

 Command format
M33 Move product collection position
M33 W D U E

 Argument
W Specify the position to retract the Z2 axis (distance from zero point of Z2 axis). Moves the axis to the
return position (45.0 mm for VIII, IX, 0.0 mm for X, XII) when omitted.
D Specify the feed rate (per minute) to retract the Z2 axis. Moves the axis in rapid feed when omitted.
Specify the value with decimal point.
U Specify the position where the separator on X2 axis collect products. Moves to the zero point (0.0
mm) when omitted.
E Specify the feed rate (per minute) when the separator on X2 axis moves. Moves the axis in rapid feed
when omitted.
Specify the value with decimal point.

W D U E : Can be omitted.

 Sample program
$2
M25 .......................................... Back spindle stop
M33 .......................................... Move the product collection position.
If M33 has no argument specified, the X2 and Z2 axes move to the zero point and
terminates operation with the back spindle chucking the workpiece.
After the completion of axis movement, the machine coordinate system is set for
the Z2 axis.
Specify a program that puts the finished workpiece in the product box in the next
line of the M33 code.
G53 Z .............................. Move the back spindle to the workpiece separation position in rapid feed.
M16 .......................................... Opens the back spindle chuck.
M10 .......................................... Advance the knock-out bar.
G04 U0.5 .................................. Dwell
G00 Z0 ..................................... Return to the back spindle zero point.
M72 .......................................... Turn the back spindle air blow on.
M11 .......................................... Return the back spindle knock-out bar.
T3000 ....................................... Move the back spindle at the center of main spindle.
M73 .......................................... Turn off the air blow of the back spindle.

15-17
L32

 Note
• Specify "Standard" for "Back Spindle" in the Machining Data screen.
• The above program example selects T3000 after product collection.
• Compared to M34 for sequential operation for product collection, M33 allows individual operations for product
separation to be programmed. M33 can therefore save product separation time by efficient programming.

15-18
 L32

15.7.2 A series of operations for product separation (M34)

 Command format
M34 X W D U E Z F T B K1

 Argument
X Specify the position to move the X2 axis after product collection. Moves the axis to the center of the
spindle when omitted.
W Specify the position to retract the Z2 axis (distance from zero point of Z2 axis). Moves the axis to the
return position (45.0 mm for VIII, IX, 0.0 mm for X, XII) when omitted.
D Specify the feed rate (per minute) to retract the Z2 axis. Moves the axis in rapid feed when omitted.
Specify the value with decimal point.
U Specify the position where the separator on X2 axis collect products. Moves to the zero point
(0.0mm) when omitted.
E Specify the feed rate (per minute) when the separator on X2 axis moves. Moves the axis in rapid feed
when omitted.
Specify the value with decimal point.
Z Specify the position to advance Z2 axis. Moves the axis to 125.0mm for VIII and IX and 65.0mm for
X and XII when omitted.
F Specify the feed rate (per minute) when Z2 axis advances. Moves the axis in rapid feed when
omitted.
Specify the value with decimal point.
T Air blow time after product separation. Blows air for one second when omitted.
B Specify the position to retract the Z2 axis after product collection. Moves the axis to the return
position (45.0mm for VIII, IX, 0.0mm for X, XII) when omitted.
K1 The back spindle cleaning operation is skipped. The cleaning operation starts when no argument is
specified.

W D U E Z F

T B X can be omitted.

 Sample program
$1 $2
G630.............................. Front/back parallel machining G630 ............................. Front/back parallel machining
T0200 T3100
: :
T0300 M25 ............................... Back spindle stop
: M34 ............................... A series of operations for
product separation

 Note
Specify "Standard" for "Back Spindle" in the Machining Data screen.

15-19
L32

15.7.3 Cut-off and product collection

The product is separated on the back spindle side.
Adjust the rotation of the main spindle and back spindle in the same direction before the back spindle chuck is closed.

 Sample program
$1 $2
M3 S1=1500 M34 ............................ Specify a series of operations
for the product separation.
M16 ............................ Opens the back spindle chuck.
M24 S2=1500............. Specify 1500 for the back
spindle reverse rotation speed.
!L1 ............................. Queuing command !L1

G114.1 H1D-2 ........... Rotation synchronization of

main spindle and back spindle
N11 T0100................. Select the cut-off tool
G00 X26.Z T01
.................................. Cut-off tool positioning
G650.......................... Automatic queuing. G650 .......................... Pick-off
M72 ............................ Turn the back spindle air blow
on.
G00 Z–1.0 .................. Position the back spindle 1.0
mm before the workpiece by
rapid feed.
G98 G01 Z F1000
................................... Advance the back spindle to the
chuck position.
G04 U1.0.................... Specify a dwell pause command
of one second at the chuck
position.
M77 ............................ Wait until spindle
synchronization is completed.
M15 ............................ Close the back spindle chuck.
M73 ............................ Turn off the air blow of the back
spindle.
!L2 ............................. Queuing command !L2

G99 G01 X–1.0 F0.03

.................................. Workpiece cut-off
G600.......................... Automatic queuing. G600 .......................... Cancel the machining pattern
(superimpose control).
X–3.0 F0.03
G113.......................... Spindle synchronous control
mode cancel
M05
M07
G00 X–3.0 Z
T00 ............................ Return to the start point.
M56 M25 ............................ Stop the back spindle rotation.
G999.......................... Automatic queuing. G999
N999 .......................... Automatic queuing. N999
M02 M02
M99 M99
% %
L (product length) + 3 (tool shift amount) + (tool width)
1 (chuck amount) Move distance required until the workpiece is chucked by the back spindle chuck.
3 (tool shift amount) Return to the program start point.

15-20
 L32

 Home position of product separation, and serial operation

The product after cut-off machining or back machining is collected to a workpiece receiver box at this stroke during the
operation.

 Description
When product collection is specified by M34
[Motion sequence]
1. The Z2 axis returns to the return position.
2. The X2 axis moves to the product collection position.
3. The Z2 axis advances and moves to the product collection position.
4. The Z2 axis returns to the return position after product knock-out.
5. The X2 axis moves to the center of the guide bushing.
When specified by M33
Operation stops after completing step 2. The subsequent collection must be programmed.
• Specify M33 in $2.

15-21
L32

15.8 Workpiece unloader

15.8.1 Series of workpiece unloader operations (M334)
This command enables a series of operations that collect a workpiece held by the back spindle. Workpieces can be
collected either by hand (U35J) or basket (U351J) whose operations differ.

 Operation example
Collection using the hand (U35J)

15-22
 L32

Collection using the basket (U351J)

15-23
L32

Collection using the basket (U351J) back spindle basket

15-24
 L32

 Command format
M334 H1 A B I J D Z F T R1 W

 Axis control group

$1, $2
Normally, specify using machining pattern G600, G610, or G630.

 Argument
Hand specific arguments
H1: Specifying this argument will cause the hand to move. If no argument is specified, the basket will move. If an
H1 argument is specified, an alarm is generated if workpiece unloader B (hand) is not selected. If an H1
argument is not specified, an alarm is generated if workpiece unloader A (basket) is not selected.
A: Specify the position where the hand (A4) will grip the workpiece. Make a negative specification using the
work end piece as reference. For example, if A-20.0, the left end of the hand finger is 20 mm from the back
workpiece end face. If no argument is specified, an alarm will occur.
B: Specify the amount withdrawn when the hand (A4 axis) has gripped the workpiece. Specify an affirmative
value for the withdrawal amount relative to the current grip position. For example, a value of B10.0 will
mean that 10 mm is withdrawn from the current grip position. If omitted, the hand moves to the retract
position and releases the workpiece.
I: Specify the amount by which the hand (A4 axis) should change its grip position. Specify a negative value for
the incremental amount from the initial withdrawal position. If not specified, the hand will not change its grip
position.
J: Specify the withdrawal amount when the hand (A4 axis) has changed its grip on the workpiece. Specify an
affirmative value for the incremental amount from the position the hand gripped based on the I argument.?
For example, a value of J10.0 will mean that 10 mm is withdrawn from the grip position that the I argument
indicated. If omitted, the hand moves to the retract position and releases the workpiece.
Basket specific arguments
Z: You can specify the location where the basket (A4 axis) hands over the workpiece. The end face of the basket
is used as reference to specify the location of the end face of the back spindle cap nut as a negative value.
Specify Z-2.0 to position the basket 2 mm from the end face of the back spindle cap nut. If omitted, the
basket end face is positioned 8.0 mm from the end face of the back spindle cap nut.
Hand and basket arguments
D: Specify the position of the hand or basket (A4 axis) where the workpiece is unloaded from the machine.
Specify the distance from the standard drop position. If omitted, the hand or basket will move to the standard
drop position and unload the workpiece.
F: Set the feed rate (per minute) to move the hand or basket to an intermediate position. Specify a value of 8 or
more for mm units and 1 or more for inch units. If omitted, the detector moves at a rapid feed rate.
T: You can specify the dwell time when a workpiece has been unloaded (by hand or basket) If omitted,0.5 sec.
R1: Specifying this argument and the hand or basket will move to the position where the workpiece is unloaded
from the machine with the workpiece still in the chuck. (Use this argument to transfer workpieces to another
machine. The hand or basket will not open and will not return to the positioning point.
And the machine will not execute any program commands other than the M334 command until the position
where the workpiece is unloaded is reached.
Knock-out arguments used in the M334 command
W: Specify the knock-out advance position executed by M334. If omitted, a normal advance is assumed. An air
cylinder driven knock-out device will generate an error if this argument is used.

15-25
L32

 Hand stroke drawing

The coordinate values indicating a 30.0 mm position of a back workpiece is indicated as shown below.
Type VIII/IX

L32
a 0.0
b -1220.0
c 0.0
d -1220.0
e 1190+30=1220.0
f 0.0
g 1319.0
h 99.0
i 0.0

Type X, XII

L32
a 0.0
b -1175.0
c 0.0
d -1175.0
e 1145+30=1175.0
f 0.0
g 1274.0
h 99.0
i 0.0

15-26
 L32

 Basket stroke drawing

The coordinate values indicating a 30.0 mm position of a back workpiece is indicated as shown below.
Type VIII/IX

L32
a 0.0
b -1242.0
c 0.0
d -1242.0
e 1319.0
f 77.0
g 0.0
h 69.0

Type X, XII

L32
a 0.0
b -1197.0
c 0.0
d -1197.0
e 1274.0
f 77.0
g 0.0
h 69.0

15-27
L32

 Sample program
When the hand collects
$1 $2
: :
G630 G630
: T3100
: G00 Z–0.5
: G01 Z3.0 F0.1 T31
G00 Z–0.5 T00
:
:
M25
M334 H1 A–5.0 B20.0 .............. The hand will grip the workpiece 5.0 mm from its end
face and
withdraw 20.0 mm.
G650 G650
G630 :
When the basket collects
$1 $2
: :
G630 G630
: T2100
: :
M25
M334
G650 G650
: :

 Note
• If a command selecting an back tool post (T30s) tool is used after the M334 command, the back spindle headstock
and the hand or basket on the way to the unloading position may interfere with each other. Use the R1 argument in
M334 to avoid interference or create a program using different M code instead of a series of operations (M334).
• When the hand collects a workpiece, the interference check OFF/ON (M88/M89) may sometimes be required. Take
proper care to prevent interference.
• The back spindle must be stopped (M25) before using the M334 command.
• The M334 command for initiating a series of operations that include back chuck open/close, knock-out
advance/retract and air blow ON/OFF.
• In the L32 series, combined use of the long workpiece device and the workpiece unloader changes the A4 axis
positioning point to machine coordinate 0.0 mm.

15-28
 L32

15.8.2 Workpiece unloader command (M335)

Use this command to move the hand or basket to the desired location.

 Command format
M335 A

 Axis control group

$1, $2

 Argument
A: Use workpiece coordinates to specify the position the hand or basket will move to. If the argument is omitted,
the tool moves to the positioning point.
For details on A4 axis workpiece coordinates, see <15.8.1 Series of workpiece unloader operations (M334)>

 Sample program
Using machining pattern G630 for collection
$1 $2
: :
G630 G630
: T3100
: G00 Z–0.5
: G01 Z3.0 F0.1 T31
: G00 Z–0.5 T00
: :
: :
M25
M334 H1 A–5.0 B20.0 R1......... Use the R1 argument to have the hand stop at the unload
position
to transfer the workpiece or perform other operations.
Command to transfer the
workpiece
G650 M117 ........................................ The hand opens
: :
: :
M335 ........................................ The hand moves to the positioning point
:
:

15-29
L32

Using M335 for programming

$1 $2
: :
G630 G630
: T3300
: G00 Z–0.5
: G01 Z3.0 F0.1 T33
: G00 Z–0.5 T00
: :
: M25
: M110........................................ Hand air blow ON
M117........................................ The hand opens
G0 Z Z2 axis retracts
M335 A–5.0 ............................. The hand moves to the position where it will receive the
workpiece
G98 G1 X F1000 ............ The X2 axis moves to the position where it will receive
the workpiece
M116........................................ The hand closes
M111........................................ Hand air blow OFF
G4 U0.2
M16.......................................... Back spindle chuck open
G4 U0.2
M335 A ........................... The hand moves to the position where the workpiece is
removed.
T3000 ...................................... The back spindle axis moves to the G/B center position
M335 A ........................... The hand moves to the position where the workpiece is
unloaded.
M117........................................ Hand opens
M335........................................ The hand moves to the positioning point
G650 G650
: :
: :

 Note
To use M335 for programming, note that the X2 and Z2 workpiece coordinates differ for tool numbers and the A4 axis
(hand) differ depending on the value for the amount the back workpiece extends from the end face in the machining data.
15.8.3 M code list for workpiece unloader
M code Description
M334 Series of workpiece unloader operations
M335 Workpiece unloader command
M110 Hand air blow ON
M111 Hand air blow OFF
M116 Hand and basket opens
M117 Hand and basket opens
Use the M335, M110, M111, M116 or M117 or other command to make a program that will unload workpieces instead
of using a series of workpiece unloader operations (M334).
Then you will need to pay attention to interference between the back spindle headstock and back tool post.
If the back spindle headstock is at any position other than T3000 [X2 machine coordinate <520.0 mm], interference is
possible when the hand or basket is moved.
The basket will not open if it is not at A4 axis machine coordinate position <1277.0mm.

15-30
 L32

15.9 Spindle Synchronous Control (G114.1, G814, G113, G813, M77)

These commands control the speed and phase of a spindle in synchronous with another spindle.
Use a spindle synchronous control command when you need to synchronize two spindles with each other. For example,
use the command in the following cases: the back spindle pick-off the workpiece that is now chucked by the main
spindle, a workpiece is machined chucked by both the main spindle and the back spindle, and a non-conform workpiece
is picked-off by adjusting the phases of the two spindles.
The G814 command defines the main spindle (S1) as the reference spindle and the back spindle (S2) as the synchronized
spindle, and synchronizes the two spindles with each other.
The G114.1 command specifies a reference spindle and synchronized spindle, and places the two specified spindles in
the synchronized status.
The G113 command cancels the synchronization of two spindles that was specified by a spindle synchronous control
command.

 Command format
G814 R Spindle synchronous control
G813 Spindle synchronous control cancel
G114.1 H D± R Spindle synchronous control
G113 Spindle synchronous control cancel
M77 Wait until spindle synchronization is completed.

 Argument
H Specify the reference spindle. 1 is the main spindle.
D± Specify the spindle to be synchronized and the direction in which the spindle rotates. When –2 is
specified, the back spindle rotates backward.
R Specify the amount (angle) of the phase shift between synchronous spindles. The R argument is
automatically added to the phase difference calculated and stored by the non-conform material phase
adjustment command in the Preparation screen. Specify a positive R argument for the phase shift in
the clockwise direction (the direction of forward rotations of the main spindle).
Setting range: 0 to 359.999°

 Note
• Before specifying G114.1 or G814, be sure to specify the speed commands M3 S1= and M24 S2= .
• If executing re-chucking, be sure to specify G114.1 or G814.
• The spindle rotating under spindle synchronous control stops when the machine enters the emergency stop state. The
spindle synchronous control mode is canceled at the same time.
• The speed clamp during spindle synchronous follows the reference spindle speed clamp value or the synchronized
spindle speed clamp value whichever is smaller.
• Indexing for the reference spindle or the synchronized spindle is disabled in the spindle synchronous control mode.
To index either spindle, cancel the spindle synchronous control mode.
• To let the back spindle to chuck a workpiece under spindle synchronous control, set the spindle speed to 2500 min
–

1
or less. (Speed-regulated area)
• The R argument specifies an amount (angle) of the phase shift between synchronous spindles.
The synchronized spindle is shifted from the reference spindle by the phase shift amount specified by the R
argument and rotates synchronizing with the reference spindle. Unless the R argument is specified, the value stored
by executing the non-conform material phase adjustment command is used as the amount of shift.
• The spindle synchronous control is canceled by pressing the Reset key when all spindles stop (0 min , indexing
–1

excluded).
• While synchronizing with the main spindle, be sure to specify G113 to cancel the spindle synchronous control mode
before executing bar change.
• Specifying the spindle synchronous control command while the main and the back spindles do not rotate once
causes an alarm to occur. Be sure to rotate the main and back spindles at least once before specifying the spindle
synchronous control command.

15-31
L32

 Sample program
$1 $2
!2L1 .................................... Queuing !1L1 ........................... Queuing
M3 S1=1000 ...................... Main spindle forward rotation M24 S2=1000 ............ Back spindle reverse
rotation
!2L2 .................................... Queuing !1L2 ........................... Queuing
T0100 ................................ Select the cut-off tool
G0 X Z T01
........................................... Cut-off tool positioning
M97 .................................... Main spindle speed fluctuation
detection OFF
M95 .................................... Back spindle speed fluctuation
detection OFF
G96 S150 .......................... Constant surface speed control
G50 S2500 ......................... Maximum spindle speed clamp
command
G814 R0 ............................ Spindle synchronous control
(with angular shift adjustment)
G650................................... Pick-off G650 .......................... Pick-off
G00 Z–1.0
M77 ........................... Wait until spindle
synchronization is
completed.
G98 G01 Z F1000
G4 U0.5
M15 ........................... Back spindle chuck close
!2L3 .................................... Queuing !1L3 ........................... Queuing
G1 X–1.0 F0.03 ................. Cut-off machining
G600................................... Machining pattern cancel G600 .......................... Machining pattern cancel
X–3.0 F0.05 ........................ Cut-off machining
G97 .................................... Constant surface speed control
cancel
M96 .................................... Main spindle speed fluctuation
detection ON
M94 .................................... Back spindle speed fluctuation
detection ON

G113................................... Spindle synchronous control

cancel
M5 M25 ............................. The spindle stops, the back
spindle stops

 Spindle synchronous control command (G814 R0)

When non-conform material phase adjustment is performed to re-chuck the workpiece in the back spindle, "G814
(G114.1 H1 D-2) R0" must always be specified. If the R argument is not specified, the workpiece is not inserted into and
cannot be correctly re-chucked by the back spindle chuck since the spindles rotate synchronously without matching the
angular phases.

15-32
 L32

 Note
• The sample program does not contain product separation.
• M77 (waiting for completion of spindle synchronization) command position
The following conditions must be satisfied for picking-off a non-conform material: the phase adjustment of both
spindle must be completed, and then the back spindle is moved to the position where it chucks the workpiece. In the
program sample, the M77 command is executed immediately before the back spindle moves to the position where it
chucks the workpiece.
To pick-off a round material, the M77 command can also be executed immediately before the M15 (back spindle
chuck close) command.
• Specify a dwell command (G4 U0.5) after the back spindle has moved to the product chucking position.
• The operation enclosed in the broken lines is performed under constant surface speed control.

15-33
L32

15.10 C1-C2 Axis Superimposition (M190, M191)

This C1-C2 axis superimpose control function controls the back spindle (C2 axis) by superimposing its movement over
the main spindle (C1 axis) movement.

 Command format
M190 C1-C2 axis superimpose control ON
The back spindle (C2 axis) moves along with the move command for the main spindle (C1 axis).
M191 C1-C2 axis superimpose control OFF. Cancels superimposition of the back spindle (C2 axis) from
the main spindle (C1 axis).

 Sample program
$1 $2
:
M80 S3=4000
G98
T1100
G0 X21.0 Z77.0 T11
G650 G650
M18 C0 .......................... Main spindle C axis indexing M48 C0 ......................... Back spindle C axis indexing
M72
M16
G0 Z–1.0
G98 G1 Z30.0 F5000
G4 U0.3
M15
M73
!2L1 !1L1
M190 ............................. C1-C2 axis superimpose
control ON
G50 W–15.0
G0 X21.0 Z62.0 T11
:
:
G0 X21.0 T0
G50 W15.0
M82
M16
!2L2 !2L1
M191 ............................. C1-C2 axis superimpose
control OFF
M20 ............................... Cancel main spindle C axis
function
M79 ............................... Cancel back spindle C axis
function
: :
: :

15-34
 L32

 Note
• The M190/M191 (C1-C2 axis superimpose control ON/OFF) command is enabled when the optional main spindle
and back spindle C-axis functions are selected.
• Specify M18 (main spindle C axis function) in $1 and M48 (back spindle C axis function) in $2 before specifying
the C1-C2 axis superimpose control command.
• C1-C2 axis superimpose control function (M190, M191) can be performed only in automatic operation mode. It
cannot be performed in manual operation mode.
• Specify the M191 (C1-C2 axis superimpose control OFF) command only in the axis control group that contains the
C2 axis.
To cancel the C1-C2 axis superimpose control mode, execute queuing and specify the M191 command in $2. If it is
specified in $1, an alarm " M01 G156 command at illegal system 1103" occurs.

15-35
L32

15.11 Pick-Off and Ending Process

The back spindle picks off the workpiece in a cut-off process.
After that, the back spindle returns to the return position (Z2-axis machine zero point) to execute the ending process.

15-36
 L32

 Description
[Motion sequence]
1. Select the cut-off tool.
2. Select the back spindle.
3. Rotate the main spindle in the forward direction and the back spindle in the reverse direction at the same speed.
Open the back spindle chuck.
4. Opens the back spindle chuck.
5. Move the Z1 axis to the cut-off position.
The shift amount (3) and cut-off tool width (a) of the cut-off tool must be considered.
Z =  (workpiece length) + a (cut-off tool width) + l3 (tool shift amount)
6. Move the back spindle to the back spindle chuck point. (Z2 axis)
7. Make the back spindle chuck.
8. Cut off the workpiece by the cut-off tool.
9. Return the back spindle to the return position.
10. Execute the ending process.

 Note
• Advance the back spindle up to the point 10 mm from the guide bushing. The most advanced position of the back
spindle depends on the size of the tool and on the tool holder.
The most advanced position of the back spindle is 10 mm from the standard tool point.
Therefore, the tool shift amount (3) is determined in consideration of the above limitation.
• When cutting off the workpiece with chucking the back spindle, perform the reverse rotation command (M24) if the
main spindle rotates in the forward direction (M03). Also use a forward rotation command (M23) if the main spindle
rotates in the reverse direction (M04).

15-37
L32

15.11.1 Pick-off process

 Sample program 1 (GB specifications)
$1 $2
T3000
(1) M03 S1=3000 M24 S2=3000 G98

(2) T0100
(3) G00 X7.0 Z32.0 T11
(4) G650 (4) G650
(5) G00 Z–1.0
(6) G01 Z20.0 F1000
(7) G04 U0.5
(8) M15
(9) G04 U0.5
(10) !L1 (10) !L1
(11) G01 X–0.5 F0.015
(12) G600 (12) G600
X–3.0 F0.03
M05
M07
G0 Z0 T0
M56 M25
G999 G999
N999 N999
M02 M02
M99 M99
% %

 Explanation of each process

(1) Adjust the main spindle speed to the back spindle speed. (Examine in advance by MDI.)
(2) Select the cut-off tool
(3) Cut-off tool positioning
(4) The Z2 axis is superimposed on the Z1 axis.
(5) The back spindle is positioned 1 mm before the end face of the workpiece in rapid feed.
(6) The back spindle advances 20 mm from the end face of the workpiece in cutting feed.
(7) Dwell for 0.5 second
(8) Back spindle chuck close
(9) Dwell for 0.5 second
(10) Queuing
(11) Cut-off machining
(12) Superimpose cancel. The Z2 axis moves to the zero point in rapid feed.

15-38
 L32

 Sample program 2 (GBL specifications)

$1 $2
(1) M03 S1=3000 M24 S2=3000
(2) G814
(3) T0100
(4) G00 X13.0 Z32.0 T01
(5) G650 (5) G650
(6) G00 Z–1.0 (a)
M77
(7) G98 G01 Z20.0 F1000
(8) G04 U0.5
(9) M15
(10) G04 U0.5
(11) !2 L1 (11) !1 L1
(12) G01 X–0.5 F0.015
(13) G600 (13) G600（b)
M05 M25
G00 X13.0 Z [***] T00
M51
T2000
M56
G999 G999
N999 N999
M02 M02
% %
[***] indicates the coordinate system setting for the starting point

 Explanation of each process

(1) Adjust the main spindle speed to the back spindle speed.
(2) Spindle synchronous control command
(3) Select the cut-off tool
(4) Cut-off tool positioning
(5) Set the coordinate system on the back spindle side so that the end face of the workpiece is adjusted to 0 for front
machining.
(6) The back spindle is positioned 1 mm before the end face of the workpiece in rapid feed.
(7) The back spindle advances 20 mm from the end face of the workpiece in cutting feed.
(8) Dwell for 0.5 second
(9) Back spindle chuck close
(10) Dwell for 0.5 second
(11) Queuing
(12) Cut-off machining
(13) Cancel machining pattern. The back headstock (Z2 axis) moves to the positioning point at the rapid feed rate.

15-39
L32

15.11.2 Re-chucking of a long workpiece

In general, the machining length of a workpiece must be within the Z1 axis stroke. If the machining length of a
workpiece exceeds the Z1 axis stroke, the workpiece needs to be re-chucked by the main spindle and the back spindle. In
this case, create the program including the re-chucking process as shown below.

 Machining layout

 Operation sequence

15-40
 L32

 Operation example

15-41
L32

Requirements for program creation:

• Specify the total length of the workpiece + the cut-off tool width, as the maximum move distance. (Including
end-face turning and cut-off machining which is performed twice)
• The move distance of a chuck must be within the maximum machining length not including the machining position
when the workpiece is re-chucked.
• The workpiece machining completion point must be identical to the program zero point of the start point.

 Sample program
O0001
$1 $2
G50 Z0
M06
G00 X11.0 Z–0.5 G99
M3 S1=3300

N0101 T0400
G00 X11.0 Z0.7 T04
G01 X8.6 Z–0.5 F0.03
X11.0 F0.2
Z11.5
X8.0 F0.03
X11.0 F0.2
W–0.7
X9.6 W0.7 F0.03
X11.0 F0.2
W0.7
X9.6 W–0.7 F0.03
X11.0 F0.2

N0204 T0100................. Select the cut-off tool

M05 ............................... Main spindle stop
!2 L1 .............................. Waiting for !1L1 !1 L1 .............................. Waiting for !2L1 (1)
T3000
M16 ............................... Back spindle chuck open
G50 Z0
G0 Z ................... The back spindle advances
mm from the Z2 axis
zero point (2)
G04 U0.5
!2 L2 .............................. Waiting for !1L2 !1 L2 .............................. Waiting for !2L2
G00 Z–377.0 T00 .......... Determines rechucking
position,
and cancels offset (3)
G04 U0.5
M15 ............................... Back spindle chuck close
G04 U0.5
M07 ............................... Main spindle chuck open
G04 U0.5
G00 W–82.0 .................. The Z1 axis retracts to –82.0
(4)
M06 ............................... Main spindle chuck close
G04 U0.5
M16 ............................... Back spindle chuck open
G04 U0.5
G50 W82.0 .................... Z axis coordinate system
setting
–1
S1=3300 M03 ................ Main spindle 3300 min
forward rotation

15-42
 L32

$1 $2
–1
S2=3300 M24 ................ Back spindle 3300 min
reverse rotation

G00 X11.0 Z407.0 T01

G650 G650 W0 ....................... Z1-Z2 superimpose
G98 G1 Z .0 F3000
G04 U0.5
M15
!2 L3 !1 L3
G01 X9.6 F0.03
X11.0 F0.2
W–0.7
X9.6 W0.7 F0.03
X–0.5
G600 G600
X–3.0
M05
M25
M07
G50 W–82.0
G0 X–3.0 Z0 T00
M56
G999 G999
N999 N999
M02 M2
% %

: Program portion for long workpieces.

15-43
L32

Stroke diagram (GB specification)

15-44
 L32

Stroke diagram (GBL specification)

* Back spindle stroke

When a long workpiece is used: The forward end position 377 – (Number of tool square) –
(10 mm stabilizer) retract 0 mm

[Note]
When the back spindle cap nut is replaced with the one for the long workpiece device, the stroke changes by the amount
of the stabilizer (made of brass). In this case, set "SUPPORT" for "Back Spindle" on the Machine Data screen.

15-45
L32

15.12 Executing the Last Program (G999)

This command must be specified in the last portion (end process) of each axis control group ($1, $2) program that
includes the last program.
In general, the last program is executed to perform back machining for workpieces with which front machining is
completed. The back machining is performed in the last cycle while the machine is in the stopped state (e.g., 1-cycle stop
or product counting by the counter).
Specify the G999 command for each axis control group to automatically enter the axis control groups in the queuing
state. The last program between G999 and N999 is executed in the 1-cycle or 1-block operation mode.
Be sure to specify the N999 command at the end of the last program contents of each axis control group. To finish
program creation, specify three commands following N999 at the end of the end process. The commands must be
specified in the sequence of M02, M99 and then %.

 Command format
G999 Last program execution

 Axis control group

Specify this command for both the axis control groups $1 and $2.

 Sample program
$1 $2
: :
!2 L20 !1 L20
G1 X–1.0 F0.03 ........................ Cut-off process
G600 G600
G1 X–3.0 F0.05
/G813

M5
M25
M56
G999 G999
G0 X11.0 W [***–1.0]................ Move the cut-off tool and workpiece
(1)

!2 L100 !1 L100
M23 S2=2000 .......... Back machining
process
G99
G44
T5100
:
M141
T3300
:
M25

M34

15-46
 L32

 Note
• The last program is not executed unless the menu key [Last PRT] is set to ON.
• Be sure to close the front chuck before selecting a tool in the last program. If selected with the chuck opened, the
material may extrude from the guide bushing.
• Be sure to terminate the last program with cut-off the workpiece. If the T51's holder (sleeve holder) is not specified
in the last program and only the T31's holder is specified, you need not move the cut-off tool. Accordingly, the
processes (1) and (2) can be omitted.
• Be sure to coincide with the machine coordinates of X1, Y1, Z1, and Z2 axes before calling the last program and
after it was called when terminating the last program.
• Cancel the coordinate system shift command and offset command before executing the G999 command.
• The M56 (product count) command must be specified before the G999 command.

15-47
L32

15.13 Pick-off failure detect(M50)

Use this command to detect a cut-off tool breakage. After a workpiece is re-chucked, the main spindle rotates at low
speed (approx. 200 min–1) and detects the back spindle rotation to determine if the cut-off tool is broken or not.

 Command format
M50 Pick-off failure detect

 Sample program
$1 $2
:
M3 S1=2000 M24 S2=2000
G114.1 H1 D-2
T0100
G0 X21.0 Z20.0 T01
G650 G650
G0 Z-1.0
G98 G1 Z10.0 F3000
M77
M15
!2 L1 !1 L1
G1 X-3.0 F0.03
G113
M5 M25
M3 S1=200
G4 U2.0
M50
G600 G600
: :

 Note
• Specify M50 after the main spindle rotation becomes constant.
• The main spindle rotation shall be approx. 200 min .
–1

• M50 may fail to detect a cut-off tool breakage even when the tool has been broken if the workpiece on front spindle
is apart from the workpiece chucked at back spindle due to some reasons.

15-48
 L32

15.14 Machining with Tool or Rotary Tool in Back Machining

 Operation example
Machining with tool

Machining with rotary tool

15-49
L32

 Sample program
$1
:
T300 K2 ...............................
G0 X21.0 Z0 T7
G1 X0 F0.1
:
G0 X21.0 .............................
G0 Z–10.0 T0
TK2 .........................
:

 Note
• The positioning point of Z2 axis is changed depending on the squares of tool (12 or 13) selected in tool layout
pattern. (The position of the rotary tool Z2 axis is not changed.)
In the free tool layout, 13 is used.
• Specify the command to stop rotation of rotary tool in $1. (Refer to <12.7.4 Rotary tool on gang tool post rotation
and stop (M80, M81, M82)>.)
• To perform machining with rotary tool in $1, specify M78 and M48 after issuing T K2 command.
(See <12.3 T Functions (Tool Codes)>.)
• When machining the workpiece on back spindle by using the rotary tool, the back spindle may interfere with the
gang tool post. If "interference check" function is disabled (see <12.7.13 Interference check function (M88, M89)>,
pay strict attention to interference between the gang tool post and the back spindle when machining the workpiece.
• When machining workpiece in longitudinal direction, pay attention to interference between the workpieces on back
and main spindles.
• When machining the workpiece with gang rotary tool while performing center support, the gang rotary tool driving
device may interfere with the coolant nozzle located at upper portion of back spindle, depending on the position of
back spindle (Z2 axis).

15-50
 L32

15.15 Back Spindle Feed Per Rotation ON/OFF (G44, G43)

The feed per rotation command can be specified for the back spindle.

 Command format
G43 Back spindle feed per revolution mode OFF
G44 Back spindle feed per revolution mode ON

The feed rate of feed per rotation is generally determined by the main spindle speed. When the G44 is specified for
machining a workpiece at the back spindle, feed per rotation is performed at the back spindle speed in the specified axis
control group.
If G600's machining patterns are used, the machining pattern command automatically controls the back spindle in the
feed per rotation mode and, therefore, G43 and G44 are usually not necessary.
The following table lists back spindle controls for individual machining patterns.
Machining pattern $1 $2
Free pattern – ON
(machining pattern cancel) (G600)
$1 single machining (G610) – ON
Inner/outer diameter simultaneous machining – OFF
(G620)
Front/back parallel machining (G630) – ON
Pick-off (G650) – OFF
Front/back simultaneous machining (G660) – ON

15-51
L32

15.16 Use of "Back Chuck Extend Length" in Machining Data

A long-neck chuck may be used if right-handed cut-off tool must be used for machining and the back chucking position
is close to the cut-off position.
Use of standard chuck

Use of long-neck chuck

When a long-neck chuck is used, programming can be easier by entering the protrusion length of the long-neck chuck
from the cap nut end face in machining data "Back chuck extend length."

15-52
 L32

In the figure above, the long-neck chuck protrusion length is 5.0 mm.Thus, enter "5.0" as the machining data.
Then if the machining data is added in pick-off (G650) and G0 Z–1.0 is specified in $2, the end face of the long-neck
chuck front end is positioned in front of the front workpiece end face by 1.0 mm.
In addition, enter the workpiece protrusion length from the chuck end face as machining data "Back work extend
length." In this example, enter "3.0".

 Sample program
$1 $2
:
T100
G0 X21.0 Z14.0 T1
G650 G650
M72
M16
G0 Z–1.0 ............................ The back spindle moves to the position shown in the
figure above.
M77
G98 G1 Z9.0 F3000
G4 U0.2
M15
!2 L1 !1 L1
G99 G1 X–1.0 F0.05 M73
: :

 Note
• Select the long-neck chuck and the cut-off tool properly by calculating their shapes which may not cause any
interference between them to occur.
• To use a program for an existing machine as a program using long-neck chucks, change machining data "Back chuck
extend length" and the pick-off part in the program.

15-53
L32

15.17 Back Spindle Torque Limit (M122, M123, M124)

This command enables the back spindle to re-chuck workpiece that has been chucked by the main spindle. When
performing re-chucking without using the Spindle synchronous control (G114.1), the back spindle overload error (S03
SV alarm NR0051 S2) occasionally occurs. The back spindle torque limit command is effective in such a case.

 Command format
M122 Back spindle torque limit L selection (25%)
M123 Back spindle torque limit H selection (50%)
M124 Back spindle torque limit OFF (100%)

 Sample program
$1 $2
:
M3 S1=2000 M24 S2=2000
T100 (Cut-off)
G0 X11.0 Z32.0 T1
G650 G650
M72
G0 Z-1.0
G98 G1 Z10.0 F3000
M123 Back spindle torque limit H
G4 U0.5
M15
! L10 ! L10
G1 X-1.0 F0.03
G600 G600
X-3.0 F0.05
M124 (OFF)
M5 M25
M7
: :

 Note
Specify the back spindle torque limit commands only while the back spindle rotates without speed changes.
If the back spindle speed is changed (accelerated or decelerated) in the back spindle torque limit enabled state, back
spindle rotation will become unstable.

15-54
 L32

15.18 Pick-off Cancel (G231)

This command can move the back headstock (Z2 axis) to the fixed point with the X1 axis staying in an arbitrary position
while the cut-off is being executed with the pick-off command G650.

 Command format
G231 X F A Z

 Axis control group

Specify this command for $1.

 Argument
X Specify the X1 axis workpiece coordinate as the end position in the cut-off process.
F Specify the X1 axis feed rate in the cut-off process.
A Specify the X1 axis position for start-position queuing. When the X1 axis reaches the workpiece
coordinate specified by the A argument during cut-off machining, the back headstock (Z2 axis) start
moving.
Z Specify the retract position (in machine coordinate) of the back spindle (Z2 axis).
Moves the axis to the return position (45.0mm for VIII, IX, 0.0 mm for X, XII) when omitted.

 Sample program
$1 $2

G600 G600
: :
G99 M03 S1=1500 M24 S2=1500 :
G114.1 H1 D–2 :
T0100 :
G00 X13.0 Z85.0 T01
G650..................................... Pick-off G650 ............................ Pick-off
G00 Z–2.0
G98 G01 Z10.0 F1000
G4 U0.5
M77
M15
!2L1 !1L1
G231 X–3.0 F0.03 A–1.0
............................................. Pick-off cancel
(When the X1 axis reaches the
workpiece coordinate – 1.0, the back
headstock moves to the backward
end position.)
: :

 Note
• The superimposition of the Z1 and Z2 axes is canceled when the G231 command is executed.
• The G231 does not permit arc cut-off machining.

15-55
L32

15.19 Back Machining Program Skip Function (M239)

The function checks whether a workpiece is clamped or not in the back spindle and if it judges there is no workpiece in
the back spindle, the program blocks preceded by "M239" and followed by "N19999" are skipped. This judgment is
made only in the first cycle after executing the [ST POS] on the Preparation screen and not made in the second and later
cycles. The function is effectively used for the machine equipped with the knock-out jig for through-hole workpieces so
that the back machining is not performed mistakenly although a workpiece is not held in the back spindle to prevent the
knock-out jig for through-hole workpieces from being cut erroneously.

• Whether a workpiece is clamped in the back spindle chuck or not is checked by advancing the
knock-out rod. Whether a workpiece is clamped in the back spindle chuck or not is checked by
advancing the knock-out rod. Since the rod is pushed against the workpiece that is clamped in the
chuck, the workpiece may fall, move, or is damaged if chucking depth is short or chucking force is
weak. Therefore, the function cannot be used if a workpiece is not securely clamped in the back spindle
chuck.
• Use the speed controller to adjust the advance speed of an air cylinder knock-out system. However, the
cycle time will be delayed if the advance speed is too slow.
• In dry run operation (warm-up operation) where material is not inserted into the guide bushing, use the
optional block skip function.

 Command format
M239 Z F T K Back machining program skip
N19999 Back machining program skip end

 Argument
Z: Specifies the position to move the knock-out device. If not specified, a move will be made to the knock-out
advance position. Not valid for air cylinder driven knock-out operations.

L32
Knock-out advance 150.0mm
position

F: Specifies the feed rate of the knock-out axis (per min). Adjust the feed rate as required by the workpiece.
Specify a value of F100 or more for mm units and 2 or more for inch units. If not specified 5000 (mm/min).
Not valid for air cylinder driven knock-out operations.
T: Indicates the torque of the knock-out axis. It is indicated as a ratio (%) of the maximum torque value. Adjust
torque as required by the workpiece. If no argument is specified, 60% is assumed. A value between 0 - 100%
can be set. Not valid for air cylinder driven knock-out operations.
K1: Whether a workpiece exists in the back spindle chuck is checked in the cycles that follow the first cycle
operation performed after the execution of the [ST POS] on the Preparation screen. When the argument is not
specified, existence of a workpiece is checked only for the first cycle operation.
K2: In the first cycle after executing start position operation, the M239 command that specified this command
detects whether or not a workpiece is clamped in the back headstock using knock-out. Subsequent M239
commands use the result of detection to determine whether to skip program blocks. When not specified, the
M239 command in the first cycle is the only command performed and knock-out is used to determine whether
a workpiece is clamped in the back headstock.

15-56
 L32

 Sample program

*1
Existence of a workpiece, clamped in the back spindle chuck, is checked by M239. If judgment is "no workpiece", the
function skips the program blocks preceded by M239 and followed by N19999.

No K argument
$2
First cycle On and after second cycle
M239 Knock-out check No knock-out check
No workpiece: Skip to N19999 To the next block
Workpiece present: To the next block
:
N19999
:

M239 Knock-out check No knock-out check

No workpiece: Skip to N19999 To the next block
Workpiece present: To the next block
:
N19999

K1 argument
$2
First cycle On and after second cycle
M239 K1 Knock-out check Knock-out check
No workpiece: Skip to N19999 No workpiece: Skip to N19999
Workpiece present: To the next block Workpiece present: To the next block
:
N19999
:

M239 K1 Knock-out check Knock-out check

No workpiece: Skip to N19999 No workpiece: Skip to N19999
Workpiece present: To the next block Workpiece present: To the next block
:
N19999

15-57
L32

K2 argument
$3
First cycle On and after second cycle
M239 K2 Knock-out check No knock-out check
No workpiece: Skip to N19999 To the next block
Workpiece present: To the next block
:
N19999
:

M239 (K2) No knock-out check No knock-out check

The result of the previous cycle To the next block
No workpiece: Skip to N19999
Workpiece present: To the next block
:
N19999

 Note
• Sequence number N19999 cannot be used for other purposes.
• If the back spindle chuck is open when the back machining program skip function (M239) is executed, the back
machining program is skipped unconditionally.

15-58
 L32

(Blank Page)

15-59
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 2E1-1502
Mfg. No. L32/0284～
Issue Date 2016.3

15-60
 16. Program Example
16.1 Program Creation ................................................................................................................................... 16-3
16.1.1 Example 1 (Front machining) ............................................................................................................ 16-3
16.1.2 Example 2 (Front machining with opposite tool post) ...................................................................... 16-10
16.1.3 Example 3 (Back machining)........................................................................................................... 16-15
16.1.4 Example 4 (Front/back simultaneous machining)............................................................................ 16-20
16.1.5 Example 5 (Machining with rechucking long workpiece) ................................................................. 16-29
16.1.6 Example 6 ....................................................................................................................................... 16-33
16.1.7 Example 7 ....................................................................................................................................... 16-41

16-1
 (Blank Page)

16-2
 L32

16.1 Program Creation

Following programs are only examples. During actual machining, the optimum spindle speed and feed must be selected
in consideration of various conditions.
The sample programs 1 and 2 show programs created with the machining pattern and those created without the
machining pattern.
• Example 1: Front machining
• Example 2: Front machining with opposite tool post
• Example 3: Back machining
• Example 4: Front/back simultaneous machining
• Example 5: Machining with rechucking long workpiece
• Example 6
• Example 7

16.1.1 Example 1 (Front machining)

This example assumes the workpiece receiver box collection mode.

 Machining drawing

 Tool layout

16-3
L32

 Machining data

 Tool set

 Tool layout pattern

16-4
 L32

 Sample program
Machining pattern G600s included, two axis control groups used
O0001 ....... Program No.
$1 $2 ....... Axis control group
G50 Z0 ....... Coordinate system setting (Figure 1)
M06 ....... Chuck close
G00 X21.0 Z–1.0 ....... Move the material from the tool. (Figure 2)
–1
M03 S1=2500 G99 ....... Main spindle forward rotation (2,500 min ) Per rotation feed
G610 G610

N0103 T0300 ....... Sequence number and T03 tool selection

M34 ....... A series of operations for product separation
G00 X21.0 Z–1.0 T01 ....... Positioning to ø14 in rapid feed Compensation No. 1 command
(Figure 3)
G01 X14.0 F0.5
Z40.0 F0.05 ....... Cut to 40 mm in longitudinal direction (Figure 4)
X21.0 ....... Cut to the material outer diameter + 1.0 mm (Figure 5)
!2 L1 !1 L1

N0201 T0100 ....... Sequence number and T01 tool selection (Figure 6)
G00 X21.0 Z52.0 T02 ....... Cut-off positioning compensation No. 2 command in rapid feed
(Figure 7)
M320 ....... Advance the back spindle to the workpiece separator position
(Figure 7)
G99 G01 X–1.0 F0.03 ....... Workpiece cut-off (Figure 8)
X–3.0 F0.05
M141 ....... Return the back spindle workpiece separator to Z2 axis zero
point (Figure 9)
M05 ....... Stop rotating the main spindle
M07 ....... Chuck open
G00 X–3.0 Z0 T00 ....... Return to the start point.
M56 ....... Product count
G999 G999 ....... Last program execution command
G610 G610 ....... $1 single machining command ON
M34 ....... A series of operations for product separation
G600 G600 ....... Free pattern (machining pattern cancel)
N999 N999 ....... Last program queuing
M02 M02 ....... 1-cycle stop
M99 M99 ....... Return to the top of a program.
% % ....... Stop code

16-5
L32

 Sample program
No machining pattern, single axis control group used
O0001 V： 160m/min
$1 D： ø20 mm
G50 Z0 π： 3.14
M06
G00 X21.0 Z–1.0
M03 S1=2500 G99

N0103 T0300
M34
G00 X21.0 Z–1.0 T01
G01 X14.0 F0.5
Z40.0 F0.05
X21.0

N0201 T0100
G00 X21.0 Z52.0 T02
M320
G99 G01 X–1.0 F0.03
X–3.0 F0.03
M141
M05
M07
G00 X–3.0 Z0 T00
M56
G999
M34
N999
M02
M99
%

16-6
 L32

 Program (GBL specification)

Machining pattern G600s included, two axis control groups used
O0001 ....... Program No.
$1 $2 ....... Axis control group
G50 Z50.0 ....... Coordinate system setting (Figure 1)
M7
G98 G1 Z-0.3 F3000
G4U0.5
M6 ....... Chuck close
G4U0.5
G0W-1.0 ....... Move the material from the tool. (Figure 2)
–1
M03 S1=2500 G99 ....... Main spindle forward rotation (2,500 min ) Per rotation feed
G630 G630

N0103 T0300 ....... Sequence number and T03 tool selection

M34 ....... A series of operations for product separation
G00 X21.0 Z–1.0 T01 ....... Positioning to ø11 in rapid feed Compensation No. 1 command
(Figure 3)
G01 X14.0 F0.5
Z40.0 F0.05 ....... Cut to 40 mm in longitudinal direction (Figure 4)
X21.0 ....... Cut to the material outer diameter + 1.0 mm (Figure 5)
!2 L1 !1 L1

N0201 T0100 ....... Sequence number and T01 tool selection (Figure 6)
G00 X21.0 Z52.0 T02 ....... Cut-off positioning compensation No. 2 command in rapid feed
(Figure 7)
M320 ....... Advance the back spindle to the workpiece separator position
(Figure 7)
G99 G01 X–1.0 F0.03 ....... Workpiece cut-off (Figure 8)
X–3.0 F0.05
M141 ....... Return the back spindle workpiece separator to Z2 axis zero
point (Figure 9)
M05 ....... Stop rotating the main spindle
T2000 ....... Stopper call
M7 ....... Chuck open
G0 Z50.0 ....... Return to the start point. (Figure 10)
M56 ....... Product count
G999 G999 ....... Last program execution command
G630 G630 .......
M34 A series of operations for product separation
G600 G600 ....... Free pattern (machining pattern cancel)
N999 N999 ....... Last program queuing
M02 M02 ....... 1-cycle stop
M99 M99 ....... Return to the top of a program.
% % ....... Stop code

16-7
L32

 Program (GBL specification)

No machining pattern, single axis control group used
O0001
$1
G50 Z50.0
G98 G1 Z-0.3 F3000
G4U0.5
M6
G4U0.5
G0W-1.0
M03 S1=2500 G99

N0103 T0300
M34
G00 X21.0 Z–1.0 T01
G01 X14.0 F0.5
Z40.0 F0.05
X21.0

N0201 T0100
G00 X21.0 Z52.0 T02
M320
G99 G01 X–1.0 F0.03
X–3.0 F0.03
M141
M05
T2000
M7
G0 Z50.0
M56
G999
M34
N999
M02
M99
%
A parameter setting switch of $2 Cycle Start OFF must be set to ON before the above program can be run.

 Main spindle speed

From cutting condition table For conversion into per minute feed
in Chapter 10
FX = 0.03mm/rev F(mm/min) = Spindle speed ×
F(mm/rev)
FZ = 0.05mm/rev FX = 2500 × 0.03 = F75
FZ = 2500 × 0.05 = F125

16-8
 L32

 Operation diagram

16-9
L32

16.1.2 Example 2 (Front machining with opposite tool post)

 Machining drawing

 Tool layout

16-10
 L32

 Machining data

 Tool set

 Tool layout pattern

16-11
L32

 Sample program
Machining pattern G600s included, two axis control groups used
O0002
$1 $2
G50 Z–0.1
M06
G113
G00 X13.0 Z–1.0
M51
–1
M03 S1=1800 G99 ....... Main spindle forward rotation (2,500 min ) Per rotation feed
G610 G610 ....... $1 single machining command ON

N0121 T2100 ....... The opposite tool post advances while the gang tool post is
retracting.
G00 Z–1.0
G01 Z6.0 F0.08 T1
G00 Z–1.0 T00

N0222 T2200
G0 Z–1.0
G01 Z16.0 F0.1 T02 ....... Start drill in-feed operation
G00 Z–1.0
G04 U0.5
Z15.5
G01 Z27.0 F0.09
G00 Z–1.0
G04 U0.5
Z26.5
G01 Z34.0 F0.08
G00 Z–1.0
G04 U0.5
Z33.5
G01 Z40.0 F0.07 ....... Last drill in-feed operation
G00 Z–1.0 T00

N0323 T2300
G0 Z–3.0
M97
S1=400
G04 U1.0
G32 Z12.0 F0.8 T03 ....... Forward in-feed operation for M6 thread cutting
Z–3.0 F1.0 M03 T00 ....... Reversing
G04 U2.0
G00 Z–1.0
M03 S1=2800

16-12
 L32

$1 $2
M96
G630 G630

N402 T0200 M34 ....... Gang tool post is positioned while the opposite tool post is
retracting.
G00 X13.0 Z–1.0 T04 M16
G1 X5.0 F0.5
Z0 F0.06
X8.4 M24
S2=2800
X9.0 Z0.3
Z13.0
X11.6
X13.0 Z13.7
G0 U0 W0 T0

N503 T0300
G00 X13.0 Z33.3 T05
G01 X11.6 Z34.0 F0.03
X9.5
Z35.5 F0.06
X11.0 Z36.25
Z40.5
X10.0 Z41.0 F0.03
Z42.0 F0.06
X13.0 F0.2
G0 U0 W0 T0
S1=1000
G4 U1.0

N604 T0400
G00 X13.0 Z42.0 T06
G92 X10.56 Z49.0 F1.0
X10.26
X10.04
X9.86
X9.76
X9.7
X9.7
G00 X13.0 W0 T0
S1=2800
G114.1 H1 D–2

N0701 T0100
G00 X13.0 Z40.0 T07

G650 G650
M72
G00 Z–1.0

16-13
L32

$1 $2
G98 G01
Z12.0 F1000
G04 U1.0
M77
M15
M73
!L1 !L1
G01 X4.0 F0.03
G600 G600
G00 X13.0 W–0.5
Z42.0
G01 X–3.0 F0.03
G113
M05 M25
M07
G00 G0 X–3.0 Z–0.1 T00
M56
G999 G999
M34
N999 N999
M02 M02
M99 M99
% %

16-14
 L32

16.1.3 Example 3 (Back machining)

 Drawings

 Machining layout

 Tool layout

16-15
L32

 Machine condition settings

Machining data setting
Material outer diameter 16.000mm
Machining length 70.000mm
Product count per chuck: 1 pc
Tool positioning point: 1.0mm
Back spindle chuck position: 16.0mm

Mount the tool T9 (drill diameter: 3 mm) after specifying 5 mm in DIA field in Manual Tool Set menu.

 Sample program
Machining pattern G600s included, two axis control groups used
O0003
$1 $2
G50 Z9.9 ....... Z9.9 = 13 square – 3 mm width – machining allowance 0.1
G99
M06
G113
G0 X17.0 Z–1.0
M3 S1=2400
G610 G610 ....... $1 single machining command ON
G50 Z9.9

N1 T0200
G0 X17.0 Z0 T02
G1 X–0.5 F0.1
Z–1.0
G0 X17.0
U0 W0 T0
S1=1061

N2 T2100 ....... The opposite tool post advances while the gang tool post is
retracting.
G0 Z–1.0
G1 Z2.7 F0.08 T21
G0 Z–1.0 T0
S1=1600

N3 T2200
G0 Z–1.0
G1 Z12.0 F0.06 T22
G0 Z–1.0
G4 U0.5
Z11.5
G1 Z16.15 F0.06
G0 Z–1.0 T0
G630 G630 ....... Front/back parallel machining
S1=2400 M98 H1 ....... "H" calls the sequence number; "H1" calls N1.
G99 M24 ....... Gang tool post is positioned while the opposite tool post is
S2=1600 retracting.

N4 T0200
G0 X17.0 Z–1.0 T02
G1 X8.06 F0.5
X10.0 Z5.0 F0.03
Z20.0 F0.05

16-16
 L32

$1 $2
G4 U0.2
X14.845
X16.0 Z21.0 F0.03
W0.5 F0.1
X17.0
M5

G98
M80 S3=1300

N5 T0800
M28 S0
G50 W–15.0
G0 X17.0 Z31.0 T08
G1 X7.6 F50 ....... X7.6 = ø16 – 4.2 × 2
G0 X17.0 T0
G50 W15.0
M80 S3=1600

N6 T0900
G50 W-15.0
G0 X17.0 Z31.0 T09
G1 X-5.8 F80 ....... X-5.8 = ø16 – 10.9 × 2
10.9 = 10 + 0.9 (Drill tip height)
G0 X17.0 T0

G50 W15.0
M80 S3=0

N7 T1000
G50 W-15.0
G00 X21.6 Z31.0 T10 ....... X21.6 = ø16 + {(1 + 1.8) × 2} = 21.6
1.8 = 0.6 (Pitch) × 3
G88 X0 R1.0 F0.6 D3 S500,
R1
G80
G0 X22.0 T0
G50 W15.0
M82
M20
G99
M3 S1=2000

N8 T0300
G50 W–3.0
G0 X17.0 Z34.0 T03
G1 X15.0 Z35.0 F0.015
X10.0
Z49.5 F0.03
X8.8 Z50.1 F0.015

16-17
L32

$1 $2
X17.0 F0.1
G50 W3.0
S1=1600
!2L1 !1L1
G114.1 H1 D–2

N9 T0100
G0 X17.0 Z63.0 T01
G650 G650 ....... Pick-off, center-support
M72

G0 Z–1.0
G98 G1
Z34.0 F1000
G4 U0.5
M77
M15
M73
!2L2 !1L2
G1 X-1.0 F0.02
G600 G600
G1 X-3.0 F0.05
G113
M5 M25
M7
G0 X-3.0 Z9.9 T0
M56
G999 G999
M98 H1
N999 N999
M2 M2
M99 M99
N1
G99 M23
S2=1061

T3100
G0 Z–1.0
G1 Z2.3
F0.05 T31
G0 Z–1.0 T0
S2=1900

T3200
G0 Z–1.0
G1 Z6.6
F0.05 T32

16-18
 L32

$1 $2
Z–1.0 F1.0
G4 U0.5
Z6.1
Z8.6 F0.05
Z–1.0 F1.0
G4 U0.5
Z8.1
Z10.6 F0.05
Z–1.0 F1.0
G4 U0.5
Z10.1
Z12.6 F0.05

Z–1.0 F1.0
G4 U0.5
Z12.1
Z14.6 F0.05
Z–1.0 F1.0
T0
S2=500
G4 U1.0

T3300
G0 Z–1.5
G01 Z12.1 ....... With tapping sleeve used
F0.56 T33 Without back spindle chasing function (option)
Z–1.5 F0.7
T0 M24
G4 U2.0
G0 Z–5.0
M25
M34 ....... A series of operations for product separation
M99 M99
% %

16-19
L32

16.1.4 Example 4 (Front/back simultaneous machining)

 Workpiece drawing

 Tool layout

16-20
 L32

 Machine condition settings

Machining data setting
Material outer diameter 8mm
Machining length 20mm
Product count per chuck: 1 pc
Tool positioning point: 1mm
Back spindle chuck position: 4mm

16-21
L32

 Tool layout

16-22
 L32

 Sample program
Front/back simultaneous machining G600s, two axis control groups used
O0001
$1 $2
G50 Z10.4
M06
M09
G113
G00 X9.0 Z–1.0
M51 X9.0
G98 M80 S3=4000
G600 G600
/M98 H100
/M98 H1
/M25
/M98 H200
G630 G630
/M98 H2
G99 M03 S1=4000

N01 T500 ....... Center

G00 X0 Z–1.0
G01 Z0.2 F0.02 T5
Z–1.0 F0.2 T0

M28 S0
G98 M80 S3=4000

N02 T1100 ....... Drilling 0.35

G50 W–10.0
Z–1.0
G01 Z0.5 F25 T11

Z–1.0 F500
G50 W10.0
G1 Z–1.0 F1000 T0

M82
M20
G99 M03 S1=5000

N03 T400

G00 X9.0 Z0 T4
G01 X–1.0 F0.02
X3.0 F0.5
Z3.2 F0.04
X7.0 F0.03
X7.9 W0.5 F0.01
G03 U1.0 W0.5 R0.5 F0.02
G00 X9.0
G01 Z–1.0 F1.0
X–1.0 F0.5
Z0 F0.01

16-23
L32

$1 $2
X0.8 F0.03
X1.0 Z0.1 F0.005
Z1.6 F0.015
X1.975 Z3.2
Z6.6 F0.02
X6.705 F0.03
X6.905 W0.1 F0.02
X7.0
X7.9 W0.5 F0.01
G03 U1.0 W1.0 R1.0 F0.02
G00 X9.0
G01 Z–1.0 F1.0 T0

S1=4000

T500 ....... Center

G00 X0 Z–1.0
G01 Z0.2 F0.01 T5
G04 U0.1
G00 Z–1.0 T0

T300 ....... Grooving

G00 X9.0 Z11.0 T3
G01 X4.2 F0.02
G00 X9.0

T200 ....... Pointed tool

G50 W–5.5
G00 X9.0 Z6.1 T2
G1 X5.7 F0.5
G01 X6.9 Z6.7 F0.01
Z8.9 F0.02
X6.7 Z9.0 F0.015
Z11.0 F0.03
X6.9 W0.1 F0.02
Z12.4 F0.025
X6.7 W0.1 F0.015
X9.0 F0.5
G50 W5.5
G00 Z3.0 T0
G50 W–5.5
G00 X9.0 Z6.1 T2

M28 S0
G98 M80 S3=4000

N04 T1200 ....... End face center

G50 W–5.0
G00 X4.2 Z–2.0 T12

G00 Z5.5
G01 Z7.125 F50
G00 Z5.5
M28 S90
G01 Z7.125 F50

16-24
 L32

$1 $2
G00 Z5.5
M28 S180
G01 Z7.125 F50
G00 Z5.5
M28 S270
G01 Z7.125 F50
G01 Z–1.0 T0
G50 W5.0
G00 Z5.5
G01 Z7.125 F50

N05 T1300 ....... End face drilling 1.45

G50 W–5.0
G00 X4.2 Z–1.0 T13
G00 Z5.5
G01 Z8.535 F65
G00 Z5.5
M28 S0
G01 Z8.535 F65
G00 Z5.5
M28 S90
G01 Z8.535 F65
G00 Z5.5
M28 S180
G01 Z8.535 F65
G0 Z–1.0
G50 W 5.0
G00 Z–1.0 T0

M82
M20
G99 M03 S1=4500

T300 ....... Grooving

G00 X9.0 Z11.0 T3
G01 X4.2 F0.02
G00 X9.0

M03 S1=2500 M24 S2=2500

G114.1 H1 D–2

N9 T100 ....... Cut-off

G00 X9.0 Z24.50 T1

G650 G650
M16
M72
G00 Z–1.0
M72
G98 G01 Z8.5
F2000
G04 U0.1
M77
M15
M73

16-25
L32

$1 $2
G04 U0.1

!L1 !L1

G231 X–3.0 F0.03 A–1.0

G113
M05 M25
M07
M56
G01 X–3.0 Z10.4 T0
G999
M06
G04 U0.2
G00 X9.0 Z–1.0 T0
G98 M80 S3=4000
G600 G600
M98 H100
M98 H1
M25
M98 H200

G630 G630

M98 H2

T100
G99 M03 S1=2500
G00 X9.0 Z10.8
G01 X–1.0 F0.03
G01 X–3.0 F0.06
M05
M07
G00 X–3.0 Z10.4 T0
N999 N999
M02 M02
M99

N100
G43
G98 M80 S3=4000
M78 S0

T5100 ....... Back center

G00 Z–1.0
G01 Z1.1 F100 T21
G04 U0.1
Z–1.0 F2000 T0

T5200 ....... Back drilling 1.4

G00 Z–1.0
G01 Z3.6 F70 T22
Z–1.0 F1000
G04 U0.05
G01 Z3.1

16-26
 L32

$1 $2
Z6.42 F70
Z–1.0 F1000 T0

T5300 ....... Back bottom center

G00 Z–1.0
G01 Z5.5 F100 T23

Z6.7 F20
G04 U0.05
Z–1.0 F1000 T0
M60
M82
M79
M99

N1
G44
G99 M23 S2=5000

T3300 ....... Back drilling 0.7

G00 Z–1.0
G01 Z5.5 F0.1 T33
Z8.2 F0.006
G04 U0.02
Z–1.0 F0.1
G04 U0.1
G01 Z10.01 F0.006
G04 U0.02
G01 Z–1.0 F0.1 T0
M99

N200 ....... Back center

T5300
G43
G98 M80 S3=4000
M78 S0
G00 Z–1.0
G01 Z9.3 F80 T23
G04 U0.05
Z10.2 F20
G04 U0.05
Z–1.0 F1000 T0
M60
M82
M79
M99

N2
G99 M23 S2=5000
T3200 ....... Back drilling 0.4
G00 Z–1.0
G01 Z9.0 F0.2 T32

16-27
L32

$1 $2

Z10.5 F0.006
G04 U0.02
Z–1.0 F0.1
G04 U0.05
G01 Z10.0 F0.1
Z11.0 F0.006
Z–1.0 F0.1
G04 U0.1
G01 Z10.5
Z11.5 F0.006
Z–1.0 F0.1
G04 U0.1

G01 Z11.0
Z12.0 F0.006
Z–1.0 F0.1
G04 U0.1
Z12.02 F0.006
G04 U0.1
Z–1.0 F0.1 T0

S2=3500

T3100 ....... End face separation

G50 U–0.5
G00 X3.4 Z–0.5
G01 X1.3 Z1.3
Z –0.5 T0
G50 U0.5
M25
M34
M99

16-28
 L32

16.1.5 Example 5 (Machining with rechucking long workpiece)

 Workpiece drawing

 Machine condition settings

Machining data setting
Material outer diameter 10mm
Machining length 200mm
Product count per chuck: 1 sets
Tool positioning point: 1mm
Back spindle chuck position: 30mm

 Cutting tool

 Cutting tool

16-29
L32

 Sample program
$1 $2
(Preparation process)

G630 G630
T300 ................................... Front turning M98 H1 ............................... Back machining
G0 X11.0 Z-1.0 T3 T3000
: M16 .....................................  Back spindle chuck
open
(Machining) M25
:
M5
:
!L11 !L11
G98 G1 Z200.0 F2000 T0  G98 G1 W120.0 F2000 .......  Specify the move
distance according to the
position chucked by back
spindle chuck
!L12 !L12
G4 U0.2
M15 ....................................  Back spindle chuck
close
G4 U0.5
M7 ......................................  Main spindle chuck
open
G4 U0.2
G0 W-150.0 ........................  Spindle move
G50 W150.0 .......................  Coordinate system
shift for move distance
G4 U0.2
M6 ......................................  Main spindle chuck
close
G4 U0.5
M16 ....................................  Back spindle chuck
open
G4 U0.2
G98 G1 Z320.0 F2000 T0 
M3 S1=1000
M24 S2=1000
G114.1 H1 D–2
G650 G650 W0
M122 .................................. Back spindle torque G98 G1 Z275.0 F1000
limit L selection
(as needed)
M77
M15 ..................................... Back spindle chuck close
G4 U0.2

!L13 !L13
G99 M3 S1=2500 ............... Spindle rotation for
machining
T200 ................................... Rear turning
G50 W-3.5
G0 X11.0 Z320.0 T2
:

16-30
 L32

$1 $2
(Machining)
:
G50 W3.5

G99 M3 S1=2000 ............... Spindle rotation for

cut-off
T200 ................................... Cut-off, width 2 mm
G0 X11.0 Z347.0 T1
!L14 !L14
M16 ..................................... Back spindle chuck open
G98 G1 Z315.0 F1000
G4 U0.2
M15 ..................................... Back spindle chuck close
G4 U0.2
!L15 !L15
G99 G1 X–1.0 F0.03
G600 G600
G113 M25
G1 X–3.0 F0.03 M124 ................................... Back spindle torque limit
OFF
M5
M7
M56
G50 W–150.0 ..................... Shift cancel
G0 X–3.0 Z–0.1 T0
M2
M99
%

16-31
L32

 Operation diagram

16-32
 L32

16.1.6 Example 6
 Machining drawing

 Machining layout

16-33
L32

 Tool layout

16-34
 L32

 Machining data

 Tool set

 Tool layout pattern

16-35
L32

 Sample program
O412
$1 $2

G50 Z13.9
M9
M6
G113
G0 X21.0 Z-1.0
M51

G99 M3 S1=1500
G610 G610
T2100(CENTER-4.0)
G0 X0.0 Z-1.0 T12
G1 Z2.0 F0.05
G0 Z-1.0T0

G630 G630
G99 M3 S1=3000 /M98 H111
T0200(FRONT-T) M16
G0 X21.0 Z-1.0 T2 M24 S2=1500
G1 X14.01 F1.0
Z12.0 F0.01
X19.0 F0.01
X21.0 W1.0 F0.01
G0 Z-1.0
G1 X-0.5 F1.0
G1 Z0 F0.01
X6.0 F0.01
X8.0 W1.0 F0.01
Z8.0 F0.01
X11.0 F0.01
X12.0 W0.5 F0.01
Z12.0 F0.01
X21.0 F0.01
G0 Z-1.0 T0

M3 S1=1500
T300(THREAD-M8-1.0)
G50 W-1.5
G0 X9.0 Z-2.0 T3
G92 X7.56 Z5.0 F1.0
X7.26
X7.04
X6.86
X6.76
X6.7
G0 X21.0 Z-1.0 T0

G50 W1.5

M5
G98 M80 S3=4800
M18 C0

16-36
 L32

$1 $2

T1300(CENTER-2.0)

G50 W-10.0
G0 X15.5 Z-1.0T13
G0 Z11.0
G1 Z13.0 F150
G0 Z11.0
M18 C180.0
G4 U0.5
G1 Z13.0 F150
G0 Z-1.0 T0
G50 W10.0
G0 Z-1.0

T1300 R1(DRILL-1.45)
G50 W-10.0
G0 X15.5 Z-1.0 T23
G0 Z11.0
G1 Z13.5 F220
G0 Z11.0
G4 U0.3
G0 Z13.0
G1 Z15.0 F220
G0 Z11.0
G4 U0.3
G0 Z14.5
G1 Z16.5 F220
G0 Z11.0
G4 U0.3
G0 Z16.0
G1 Z18.0 F220
G0 Z11.0

M18 C0
G4 U0.5

G0 Z11.0
G1 Z13.5 F220
G0 Z11.0
G4 U0.3
G0 Z13.0
G1 Z15.0 F220
G0 Z11.0
G4 U0.3
G0 Z14.5
G1 Z16.5 F220
G0 Z11.0
G4 U0.3
G0 Z16.0
G1 Z18.0 F220
G0 Z-1.0
G50 W10.0

16-37
L32

$1 $2
G0 Z-1.0

G98 M80 S3=0

T1400(TAP-M1.8-0.35)
G50 W-10.0
G0 X15.5 Z-1.0 T14
G0 Z11.0
G84 Z16.0 F0.35 D3 S500, R1
G80
G0 Z11.0

M18 C180.0
G4 U0.5
G84 Z16.0 F0.35 D3 S500, R1
G80
G0 Z-1.0 T0
G50 W10.0
G0 Z-1.0
M82
M20
G99 M3 S1=2500

T0400(REAR-T)
G50 W-3.5
G0 X21.0 Z11.0 T4
G0 X19.5
G1 Z13.75 F0.03
X18.8 Z19.0 W0.35 F0.03
X16.0 F0.03
Z31.0 F0.04
X19.0 F0.05
X21.0 W1.0 F0.03
G0 Z14.0
G1 X12.0 F0.03
Z29.5 F0.04
X10.0 W1.0 F0.03
G0 X21.0 T0
G50 W3.5

M24 S2=1500
M3 S1=1500
G114.1 H1 D-2 R0

N9 T100(CUT-OFF)
G0 X21.0 Z46.0 T1
M1
G650 G650
G0 Z-1.0 M72
G98 G1Z11.0 F2000
M77
G4 U0.3
M15
M73

16-38
 L32

$1 $2
G4 U0.2
!L1 !L1
G1 X-1.0 F0.03
G600 G600
G1 X-3.0 F0.05 M25
G113
M5
M7
M56
G0 X-3.0 Z13.9 T00

G999 G999
G630 G630
M98 H111
N999 N999
M2 M2
M99 M99

N111
M25
G98 M180 S5=3800
M48 C0

T3100(B.CENTER-5.0)
G0 X0.0 Z-1.0 T31
G1 Z2.7 F150
G4 U0.1
G0 Z-1.0 T0

G98 M180 S5=2700

T3200(B.DRILL-4.0)
G0 X0.0 Z-1.0 T32
G1 Z5.2 F200
G0 Z-1.0 T0

G98 M180 S5=3800

T3300(B.CENTER-3.0)
G0 X-15.5 Z-1.0 T33
G0 Z15.0
G1 Z16.2 F150

G4 U0.1
G0 Z15.0

M48 C180.0
G4 U0.5
G0 Z15.0
G1 Z16.2 F150
G4 U0.1
G0 Z-1.0

G0 X8.0 Z-1.0
G1 Z1.0 F150
G4 U0.1

16-39
L32

$1 $2
G0 Z-1.0
M48 C0
G4 U0.5
G1 Z1.0 F150
G4 U0.1
G0 Z-1.0 T0

T3400(B.DRILL-1.5)
G0 X8.0 Z-1.0 T34
G1 Z1.8 F250
G0 Z-1.0
G0 Z1.3
G1 Z3.6 F250
G0 Z-1.0
M48 C180.0
G4 U0.5
G1 Z1.8 F250
G0 Z-1.0
G0 Z1.3
G1 Z3.6 F250
G0 Z-1.0 T0

M182
M79

M34
M99

16-40
 L32

16.1.7 Example 7
 Machining layout

16-41
L32

 Sample program
O1227
$1 $2
G50 Z0
G113
M9
M6
G0 X29.0 Z-1.0

G635 G635
M18 C0 G637
G98 M80 S3=1000 M25
T2000
T0700 (ENDMILL) M98 H11 (UKEKAGO)
G50 W-10.0
G0 X13.0 Y4.88 Z-3.5 T7
G1 X10.0 F1000
G1 Y9.5 Z8.22 F100
G1 X8.0 F1000
G1 Y4.88 Z-3.5 F100
G1 X4.0 F1000
G1 Y9.5 Z8.22 F100
G1 X0 F1000
G1 Y4.88 Z-3.5 F100
G1 X-4.0 F1000
G1 Y9.5 Z8.22 F100
G1 X-8.0 F1000
G1 Y4.88 Z-3.5 F100
G1 X-10.0 F1000
G1 Y9.5 Z8.22 F100
G1 X-12.0 F1000
G1 Y4.88 Z-3.5 F100
G1 X13.0 F1000
G50 W10.0
M80 S3=1000

G680 G680
T1100 (CENTER)
G0 X13.0 Y0 Z-2.0 T11
G900 X2.0 Z-2.0 B60.0
G950 X2.0 Z0
G0 X5.0 Z-1.0
G1 Z3.5 F50
G4 U0.05
G1 Z-3.0 F1000
G951
G901 X13.0 Z-3.0 B60.0

T1200(DRILL)
G0 X13.0 Y0 Z-2.0 T12
G900 X2.0 Z-2.0 B60.0
G950 X18.0 Z0
G0 X5.0 Z-1.0
G1 Z8.0 F50
G1 Z-3.0 F1000
G951

16-42
 L32

$1 $2
G901 X13.0 Z-3.0 B60.0
M80 S3=1000

T1300(TAP)
G0 X13.0 Y0 Z-2.0 T13
G900 X2.0 Z-2.0 B60.0
G950 X2.0 Z0
G0 X5.0 Z-2.0
G84 Z6.4 F0.7 D3 S800,R1
G80
G1 Z-3.0 F1000
G951
G901 X13.0 Z-3.0 B90.0
M82

!2!3L2 !1!3L2
G99 M3S1=1000 M24S2=1000
G114.1 H1 D-2

T0100
G0 X13.0 Z42.2 T1
G650 G650

!2!3L4 !1!3L4
G99 G1 X-1.0 F0.05
G600 G600
G1 X-3.0 F0.05
G113
M8
M8
/M155
M9
M5
M25
M82
M7
G4 U0.3
M56
G0 X-3.0 Z0 T0
G999 G999
G635 G635
G637
M25
T2000
M98 H11 (UKEKAGO)
G600 G600
N999 N999
M2 M2
M99 M99

16-43
L32

$1 $2

N11
M32 Z20.0
M16
G4 U1.0
M10
M72
G4 U0.5
M11
M33 T2500 H6000
M89
M31
M73
T2500
M99
％ ％

16-44
 L32

(Blank Page)

16-45
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 2E1-1600
Mfg. No. L32/0001～
Issue Date 2015.5

16-46
 17. Tooling
17.1 Structure of Tooling System .................................................................................................................... 17-3
17.2 Details of Tooling System...................................................................................................................... 17-10
17.2.1 Tool Holder ...................................................................................................................................... 17-10
17.2.2 Sleeve Holder.................................................................................................................................. 17-15
17.2.3 Rotary tool ....................................................................................................................................... 17-26
17.2.3.1 Outer Circumference Milling Spindle ......................................................................................... 17-26
17.2.3.2 End-face Drilling Spindle ........................................................................................................... 17-27
17.2.3.3 Outer Circumference Milling Spindle, End-face Drilling Spindle ................................................ 17-39
17.2.3.4 Slitting Cross Spindle ................................................................................................................ 17-43
17.2.4 Idle Gear Unit .................................................................................................................................. 17-46
17.2.5 Sleeve ............................................................................................................................................. 17-47
17.2.5.1 Boring and Drill Sleeve .............................................................................................................. 17-47
17.2.6 Tapping and Die Sleeve .................................................................................................................. 17-78
17.2.7 Sleeve Adapter ................................................................................................................................ 17-92
17.2.8 Notes on using the end face drilling sleeve holder to be mounted on the vertical holder ................ 17-95

17-1
 (Blank Page)

17-2
 L32

17.1 Structure of Tooling System

Name Specification Model Page
 Tool Holder
6-Tool Vertical Holder (6-tool) [16] GTF5916 17.2.1
5-Tool Vertical Holder (5-tool) [16] 38 mm dia. compatible GTF6016 17.2.1
Shift Tool Holder 20mm-shift, Adapter type GTF5716 17.2.1
Shift Tool Holder 4/5"-shift, Adapter type GTF5716L 17.2.1
1 Shift Tool Holder [12] GTF6312 17.2.1
1 Shift Tool Holder [13] GTF6313 17.2.1

 Sleeve Holder
3-tool Vertical Sleeve Holder [Sleeve diameter ø25.4] GDF1601 17.2.2
3-tool Vertical Sleeve Holder [Sleeve diameter ø19.05] GDF1207 17.2.2
2-tool Vertical Sleeve Holder [Sleeve ø19.05] for GSE3210 GDF508 17.2.2

 Front 4-tool Tool Holder [Sleeve diameter ø25.4] U120B 17.2.2

 Gang Rotary Tool Drive Device U30B 17.2.2

 Front Rotary Tool Drive Device U121B 17.2.2

 Back 5-Spindle Holder [Sleeve diameter ø25.4] U150B 17.2.2

 Back Rotary Tool Drive Device U151B 17.2.2

 Back Rotary Tool Drive Device U12B 17.2.2

 Rotary Tools
[Outer Circumference Milling Spindle]
Outer Circumference Milling Spindle ER16, AR16 (~ø10) GSC1310 17.2.3
(Rego Type Chuck)

[End-face Drilling Spindle]

Drilling Spindle (3-Tool) ER16, AR16 (~ø10) GSE1610 17.2.3
Drilling Spindle (Both Sides 3-Tool) ER16, AR16 (~ø10) GSE1810 17.2.3
Drilling Spindle (Both Sides 4-Tool) ER16, AR16 (~ø10) GSE2010 17.2.3
Drilling Spindle (Both Sides 4-Tool) ER16, AR16 (~ø10) SEU1110 17.2.3
End-face Drilling Spindle (Double spindles for both ends) ER11, AR11 (~ø7) for GSE3210 GSE3707 17.2.3
End-face Drilling Spindle (Triple spindles for both ends) ER11, AR11 (~ø7) for GSE3210 GSE3807 17.2.3
End-face Drilling Spindle (3-Tool) ER11, AR11 (~ ø7) for U31B, U32B BSE607 17.2.3
Both end-face Drilling Spindle (3-Tool) ER11, AR11 (~ ø7) for U31B, U32B BSE707 17.2.3

17-3
L32

Name Specification Model Page

[Outer Circumference Milling Spindle, End-face Drilling
Spindle]
3-tool Cross Machining/ End-face Drilling Spindle Inner dia. ø31, to be mounted in cross GSE3210 17.2.3
(mounted in cross machining direction) machining direction
3-tool Cross Machining/ End-face Drilling Spindle Inner dia. ø31, to be mounted in GSE3210 17.2.3
(mounted in end-face machining direction) end-face machining direction
Outer Circumference Milling Spindle (Double spindles) ER11, AR11 (~ ø7) for GSE3210 GSC1607 17.2.3

[Slitting and End Face Drilling Spindle]

Slitting Spindle For ER16, AR16 (~ ø10) GSE1910 17.2.3
(with slitting cutter) U151B, U12B
Slitting Spindle For ER16, AR16 (~ ø10) GSE1910 17.2.3
(with cross machining tool) U12B, U30B, U31B, U32B

 Idle Gear Unit

Idle Gear Unit For GSE3210 GSD107 17.2.4

 Sleeve
[Boring and Drill Sleeve]
Drill sleeve (ø7) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 ER11, AR11 ADS707 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø10) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 ER16, AR16 ADS810 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø10) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 ER16, AR16 ADS710 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø10) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 ER16, AR16 ADS110 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø10) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 ER16, AR16 ADS210 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø10) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 ER16, AR16 ADS410 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø13) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 ER20 AR20 ADS113 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø13) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 ER20 AR20 ADS213 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø16) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 ER25 AR25 RDS116 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø12) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 [MT1] ADS112 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø12) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 [MT2] ADS212 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø6) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 [MT1] ADS206 17.2.5
Boring sleeve (ø4) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 ø4 hole ABS104 17.2.5
Boring sleeve (ø8) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 ø8 hole ABS108 17.2.5
Boring sleeve (ø10) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 ø10 hole ABS110 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø10) both sides Sleeve dia. ø25.4 ER16, AR16 ADS1110 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø10) both sides Sleeve dia. ø25.4 ER16, AR16 ADS310 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø10) both sides Sleeve dia. ø25.4 ER16, AR16 ADS1410 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø10) both sides Sleeve dia. ø25.4 ER16, AR16 ADS1010 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø7) Sleeve dia. ø19.05 ER11, AR11 BDS507 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø10) Sleeve dia. ø19.05 ER16, AR16 BDS508 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø7) Sleeve dia. ø19.05 ER11, AR11 BDS607 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø10) Sleeve dia. ø19.05 ER16, AR16 BDS610 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø7) Sleeve dia. ø19.05 ER11, AR11 BDS707 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø7) Sleeve dia. ø19.05 ER11, AR11 VDS506 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø10) Sleeve dia. ø19.05 ER16, AR16 VDS110 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø10) Sleeve dia. ø19.05 ER16, AR16 GDS110 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø7) Both ends Sleeve dia. ø19.05 ER11, AR11 HDS5406 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø7) Both ends Sleeve dia. ø19.05 ER11, AR11 HDS5506 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø7) Both ends Sleeve dia. ø19.05 ER11, AR11 HDS5706 17.2.5
Drill sleeve (ø7) Both ends Sleeve dia. ø19.05 ER11, AR11 HDS5806 17.2.5

 Tapping and Die Sleeve

Tapping Sleeve (ø7) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 For ER11, AR11 tapping ATS210 17.2.6
Tapping Sleeve (ø7) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 For ER11, AR11 tapping ATS307 17.2.6
Tapping Sleeve (ø10) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 For ER16, AR16 tapping ATS112 17.2.6
Tapping Sleeve Sleeve dia. ø25.4 (ø20) AUS106 17.2.6
Tapping Sleeve Sleeve dia. ø25.4 (ø20) AUS110 17.2.6
Tapping Sleeve Sleeve dia. ø25.4 (ø38) AUS112 17.2.6
Tapping Sleeve Sleeve dia. ø25.4 (ø3/4”) AUS106L 17.2.6
Tapping Sleeve Sleeve dia. ø25.4 (ø1”) AUS110L 17.2.6
Tapping Sleeve Sleeve dia. ø25.4 (ø1-1/2”) AUS112L 17.2.6
For tapping and die sleeve (ø7) Sleeve dia. ø19.05 ER11, AR11 (die ø20, ø16) BNS407 17.2.6

17-4
 L32

Name Specification Model Page

For tapping and die sleeve (ø7) Sleeve dia. ø19.05 ER11, AR11 (die ø13/16”, ø5/8”) BNS507 17.2.6
For tapping and die sleeve (ø7) Sleeve dia. ø19.05 ER11, AR11 (die ø20, ø16) VNS406 17.2.6
For tapping and die sleeve (ø7) Sleeve dia. ø19.05 ER11, AR11 (die ø13/16”, ø5/8”) VNS506 17.2.6

 Sleeve Adapter
Sleeve Adapter (ø19.05) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 For U120B, U150B SAU719 17.2.7
Sleeve Adapter (ø20) Sleeve dia. ø25.4 For U120B, U150B SAU720 17.2.7
Sleeve Adapter (ø25.4) Sleeve dia. ø31 For U121B, U151B SAU825 17.2.7

 Notes on using the end face drilling sleeve holder to be mounted on the vertical holder 17.2.8

17-5
L32

 L32 Standard tool layout

The standard tool layout and stroke of opposite tool post device of L32 is shown below. It is not always necessary to
follow the above layout. Machining shall be done by optimum layout for the workpiece.

17-6
L32

17-7
L32

 L32 tool post tool layout

The layout of L32 tool post tool is shown in the figure below. The tool number differ with the tool holder type.

 32 mm dia. specification (tool holder GTF5916)

17-8
 L32

 32 mm dia. specification (tool holder GTF6016)

17-9
L32

17.2 Details of Tooling System

17.2.1 Tool Holder
 GTF5916 6-Tool Vertical Holder (6-tool)
This tool holder is provided for outer diameter cutting.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name GTF5916
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, X, Ⅻ
Usage All types of tools
Tool size 16 [5/8"] ×16 [5/8"] ×140
19×19×140 (T01),

[Note]
• Cut-off tool shall be mounted on the right-most position (T01).
• Use the provided spacer to mount a tool of 16 at the position T01.

17-10
 L32

 GTF6016 5-Tool Vertical Holder (5-tool)

This tool holder is provided for outer diameter cutting.
The tools are widely spaced and a 38 mm dia. specification is used.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name GTF6016
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, X, Ⅻ
Usage All types of tools
Tool size 16 [5/8"] ×16 [5/8"] ×140
20 [19, 3/4"] ×20 [19, 3/4"] ×140 (T01),

[Note]
• Cut-off tool shall be mounted on the right-most position (T01).
• Use the provided spacer to mount a tool of 16 at the position T01.

17-11
L32

 GTF5716 Shift Tool Holder (Adapter type)

This tool holder is provided for the turning tool. The tool can be mounted with 20mm [0.59"] longitudinal shift from
standard fitting point. This tool holder can be used with the vertical holder GTF5916 or GTF6016 and can be mounted at
the T02 - T05 turning tool station positions for the GTF5916 and turning tool station positions T02 - T04 for the
GTF6016.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name GTF5716
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Usage Threading and others
Tool size 16×16×140 mm (Shifted by 20mm [0.78"])
Provided set screws Two M6×25 screws

[Note]
When this spindle is mounted, the back spindle and the opposite sleeves may interfere with this spindle. Care must be
taken.

17-12
 L32

 GTF5716L Shift Tool Holder (Adapter type)

This tool holder is provided for the turning tool. The tool can be mounted with 20.32mm [4/5"] longitudinal shift from
standard fitting point. This tool holder can be used with the vertical holder GTF5916 or GTF6016 and can be mounted at
the T02 - T05 turning tool station positions for the GTF5916 and turning tool station positions T02 - T04 for the
GTF6016.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name GTF3313
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, X, Ⅻ
Usage Threading and others
Tool size 5/8"×5/8"×4"3/4" (Shifted by 4/5")
Provided set screws Two M6×25 screws

[Note]
When this spindle is mounted, the back spindle and the opposite sleeves may interfere with this spindle. Care must be
taken.

17-13
L32

 GTF6312 1 shift tool holder (12)

 GTF6313 1 shift tool holder (13)

This tool holder is provided for the turning tool. The tool can be mounted with a 6 mm [0.24"] longitudinal shift and a 5
mm [0.20"] core shift from the standard fitting point. Use Type X for the U31B rotary tool drive device and Type IX and
XII for the U32B rotary tool drive device.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name GTF6312 GTF6313
Machine type Ⅷ, IX, X, XII Ⅷ, IX, X, XII
Usage Threading, grooving, etc. Threading, grooving, etc.
Tool size 12 × 12 × 90mm [0.47 × 0.47 × 5.12"] 13 × 13 × 90mm [0.47 × 0.47 × 5.12"]
(Longitudinal direction: 5 mm shift) (Longitudinal direction: 5 mm shift)
(Core direction: 6mm shift) (Core direction: 6mm shift)
Provided set screws M5×20-3 pcs. M5×20-3 pcs.

[Note]
• The GTF5916 tool holder can be mounted on T07 - T09 and the GTF6016 can be mounted on T06 - T08. Note that
then the minimum machining diameter at the standard tool nose position is 10 mm.
• When the U31B and GSE3210 are used together, T10 to T13 can be mounted.
• The total length of mountable tool is 90 mm. Cut tool size to 90 mm or less.

17-14
 L32

17.2.2 Sleeve Holder

 GDF1601 3-tool Vertical Sleeve Holder
This sleeve holder is to be mounted on gang rotary tool driving device U30B, U31B and U32B and is used for end-face
drilling. Up to three arbitrary sleeves can be mounted.

Specification
Specification Specification
Sleeve name GDF1601
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, X, Ⅻ
Available sleeve ADS707, ADS710, ADS110, ADS210, ADS410, ADS113, ADS213, RDS116,
ADS1210, ADS1310, ADS112, ADS212, ADS206, ATS210, ATS307, ATS112,
AUS106, AUS110, AUS112, AUS110L, AUS112L, AUS106L, ADS1110, ADS310,
ADS1410, ADS1410, ADS1010, ABS104, ABS108, ABS110
Sleeve mounting hole ø25.4mm [ø1"]
diameter
Provided set screws M6 x 35-2 pcs., M6 x55 -2 pcs.

17-15
L32

[Note]
• The numbers of the tools that can be installed in this holder are listed below.
• The GTF5916 tool holder: U30B, U31B in T10 and T11; U32B in T08 and T09.
• The GTF6016 tool holder: U30B, U31B in T09 and T11; U32B in T07 and T08.
• When performing milling by the rotary tool mounted next to this holder, pay attention to the interference between
the workpiece and this holder.
• When this spindle is mounted, the back spindle and the opposite sleeves may interfere with this spindle. Care must
be taken.
• When front rotary tool drive device U121B is installed, back machining tools cannot be used at the following
positions. Be sure to follow this caution.
• For tool holder GTF5916: U31B, U32B T08
• For tool holder GTF6016: U31B, U32B T07

17-16
 L32

 GDF1207 3-tool Vertical Sleeve Holder

This sleeve holder is to be mounted on rotary tool driving device (U33B), and is used for end-face drilling. Up to three
arbitrary sleeves can be mounted.

Specification
Specification Specification
Sleeve name GDF1207
Machine type Ⅸ, X, Ⅻ
Available sleeve GDS110, BDS507, BDS607,BDS508,BDS707 ,BDS610,VDS506, VDS110,
GDS110, HDS5406, HDS5506, HDS5706, HDS5806, BNS407, BNS507, VNS406,
VNS506
Sleeve mounting hole ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]
diameter
Provided set screws Hexagon socket head bolts two M5×25 screws, Hexagon head bolt one M6×20

[Note]
• The numbers of the tools that can be installed in this holder are listed below.
• The GTF5916 tool holder: U31B, U32B T08 and T09
• The GTF6016 tool holder: U31B, U32B T07 and T08
• When performing milling by the rotary tool mounted next to this holder, pay attention to the interference between
the workpiece and this holder.
• When this spindle is mounted, the back spindle and the opposite sleeves may interfere with this spindle. Care must
be taken.
• When a tool diameter of 32 mm is exceeded, care must be taken to prevent interference with adjacent holders.

17-17
L32

• When front rotary tool drive device U121B is installed, back machining tools cannot be used at the following
positions. Be sure to follow this caution.
• For tool holder GTF5916: U31B, U32B T08
• For tool holder GTF6016: U31B, U32B T07

17-18
 L32

 GDF508 2-tool Vertical Sleeve Holder

This sleeve holder is to be mounted on GSE3210, and is used for end-face drilling. Up to two arbitrary sleeves can be
mounted.

Specification
Specification Specification
Sleeve name GDF508
Machine type X
Available sleeve BDS707,
Sleeve mounting hole ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]
diameter
Provided set screws Two M5×50 screws, two M5×30 screws,one M5×40 screw

[Note]
• Up to three sleeves can be mounted on GSE3210 (T11 to T13). However, when mounted on T11 and T12, and the
tool holder is GTF5916, the T10 cannot be used, and when the tool holder is GTF6016, the T09 cannot be used.
• The T10 (GTF5916) cannot be used. When this spindle is mounted on T12 or T13, care must be taken for setting T10
in diameter direction.
• When this sleeve is mounted, the back spindle and the opposite sleeves may interfere with this spindle. Care must be
taken.
• This spindle becomes unavailable if GSE3210 is mounted in the end-face direction.
• When a tool diameter of 32 mm is exceeded, care must be taken to prevent interference with adjacent holders.
• When a rotary tool is mounted below, the GDS107 idle gear unit is required.

17-19
L32

 U30B Gang Rotary Tool Drive Device

This device is used to stop main spindle rotation or use a drill to drill holes or perform end milling on the outer
circumference of a workpiece. Three fixed rotary machine tools are installed at a location 15 mm away.
The T10 and the T09 can be replaced with end-face drilling tools when the tool holder is the GTF5916 and the GTF6016,
respectively. The GTF1601 sleeve holder can be mounted on the T11.

Specification
Specification Specification
Sleeve name L32 U30B
Machine type Ⅷ
Max. chuck dia. ø10mm [ø3/8"]
Maximum speed / Rated 6,000min-1／4,667min-1
speed

17-20
 L32

 U120B Front 4-tool Tool Holder

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name U120B
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Available sleeve ADS707, ADS710, ADS110, ADS210, ADS113, ADS213, RDS116, ADS1310,
ADS112, ADS212, ADS206, ATS210, ATS307, ATS112, AUS106, AUS110,
AUS112, AUS110L, AUS112L, AUS106L, ABS104, ABS108, ABS110
Sleeve mounting hole ø25.4(ø1")
diameter

17-21
L32

 U121B Front Rotary Tool Drive Device

This device performs drilling or end milling on the front face of workpiece with up to three GSC1310s.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name U121B
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, XII
End face milling spindle GSC1310
Sleeve holder (for stationary tool) SAU825
Maximum speed / Rated speed 6,000min-1／3,000min-1

17-22
 L32

 U150B Back 5-Spindle Holder (ø25.4)

Up to five sleeves can be mounted. This holder is used for back drilling.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name U150B
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ
Available sleeve ADS707,ABS810, ADS710, ADS110, ADS210, ADS113, ADS213,
RDS116, ADS1310, ADS112, ADS212, ADS206, ATS210, ATS307,
ATS112, AUS106, AUS110, AUS112, AUS110L, AUS112L, AUS106L,
ABS104, ABS108, ABS110
Sleeve mounting hole diameter ø25.4mm (ø1")

17-23
L32

 U151B Back Rotary Tool Drive Device

This device performs drilling or end milling on the back workpiece end face with up to four GSC1310s.
By mounting the SAU825 sleeve adapter on the T31, you can use a 25.4 mm dia. drill sleeve.
The T32 and T35 allow you to mount the GSE1910 slitting spindle.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name U151B
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ
End face milling spindle GSC1310
Slitting Spindle GSE1910
Sleeve holder (for stationary tool) SAU825
Maximum speed / Rated speed 6,000min-1／3,000min-1

[Note]
When the U35J workpiece unloader is attached, the T35 cannot be mounted on the GSE1910.

17-24
 L32

 U12B Back Rotary Tool Drive Device

This device performs drilling, end milling or cross drilling on the back workpiece end face with up to four GSC1310s or
GSE1910s mounted on the upper stage. By mounting the SAU825 sleeve adapter on the lower stage, you can mount five
ø25.4 mm dia. drill sleeves.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name U12B
Machine type X, Ⅻ
End face milling spindle GSC1310
Cross milling spindle GSE1910
Slitting Spindle GSE1910
Sleeve holder (for stationary tool) SAU825
Maximum speed / Rated speed 6,000min-1／3,000min-1

17-25
L32

17.2.3 Rotary tool

17.2.3.1 Outer Circumference Milling Spindle
 GSC1310 Outer Circumference Milling Spindle (Rego Type Chuck)
This spindle is used to perform drilling on the outer diameter of the workpiece, or to perform key grooving by the end
mill, after stopping the spindle.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name GSC1310
Machine type VIII, IX, X, XII
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Spindle speed 200 to 6,000min-1
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Provided set screws Four M5×35 screws
Provided tool －

17-26
 L32

17.2.3.2 End-face Drilling Spindle

 GSE1810 Drilling Spindle (Both Sides 3-Tool)

 GSE2010 Drilling Spindle (Both Sides 4-Tool)

This spindle is used to perform drilling on the end-face or outer circumference of the workpiece, or to perform
machining by the end mill, after stopping the spindle.

17-27
L32

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name GSE1810
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Spindle speed 200 to 6,000min-1
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Provided set screws Two M6×30 screws, two M6×60 screws
Three M8×50 screws (With U31B T11 mounted)

[Note]
• The numbers of the tools that can be installed in the GTF1810 holder are listed below.
• When the tool holder is the GTF5916: T10 for the U30B, T10 and T11 for the U31B and T08 and T09 for the
U32B.
• When the tool holder is the GTF6016: T09 for the U30B, T09 and T10 for the U31B and T07 and T08 for the
U32B.
• When front rotary tool drive device U121B is installed, the following tool positions cannot be used. Be sure to
follow this caution.
When the tool holder is the GTF5916, the U32BT08 cannot be used. When the tool holder is the GTF6016, the
U31B, U32BT07 cannot be used.

17-28
 L32

• Adjustments between 0 to 90° are possible when U31B T11 are installed. When the supplied pin is installed in the
U31B, 0° and 90° positioning is possible. When used in the cross-machining direction (90°) or end-face machining
direction (0°), add two securing bolts (M6×25) to enhance mounting strength. A coolant oil nozzle can be mounted
on the side of the holder (U61R: option).
• When an angle between 12 and 66 degrees is used on the T10, interference with the T09 tooling is possible. If this
happens, remove the T09 tooling.

Specification Specification
Tool holder name GSE2010
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅹ
Rotary Tool Drive Device U31B
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Spindle speed 200 to 6,000min-1
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Provided set screws Two M6×30 screws, two M6×60 screws
Three M8×50 screws

[Note]
• Tool number U31B T11 can be installed in this holder. It can be adjusted to 0, to 90 degrees. When the supplied pin
is installed in the U31B, 0° and 90° positioning is possible. When used in the cross-machining direction (90°) or
end-face machining direction (0°), add two securing bolts (M6×25) to enhance mounting strength. A coolant oil
nozzle can be mounted on the side of the holder (U61R: option).
• When an angle between 12 and 66 degrees is used on the T10, interference with the T09 tooling is possible. If this
happens, remove the T09 tooling.

17-29
L32

 GSE1610 3-Tool Drilling Spindle

This spindle is used to perform drilling on the end-face or outer circumference of the workpiece, or to perform
machining by the end mill, after stopping the spindle.

17-30
 L32

Specification Specification
Tool holder name GSE1610
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, X, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Spindle speed 200 to 6,000min-1
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Provided set screws Three M8×50- 3 screws (With T11 mounted)
Two M6×35 screws, two M6×65 screws

[Note]
• Adjustments between 0 to 90° are possible when U31B T11 are installed. When the supplied pin is installed in the
U31B, 0° and 90° positioning is possible. When used in the cross-machining direction (90°) or end-face machining
direction (0°), add two securing bolts (M6×25) to enhance mounting strength.
• When an angle between 12 and 66 degrees is used on the T10, interference with the T09 tooling is possible. If this
happens, remove the T09 tooling.
• When a workpiece diameter of 32 mm is exceeded, care must be taken to prevent interference with adjacent
workpieces.

17-31
L32

 GSE3707 End-face Drilling Spindle (Double spindles for both ends)

This spindle is provided for drilling or milling on the end-face while the main spindle is stopped. Fix the mounting plate
to GSE3210, and then fix GSE3207 to the mounting plate.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name GSE3707
Machine type Ⅷ, X
Rotary Tool Drive Device U31B
Max. chuck dia. ø7mm [ø0.2756"]
Spindle speed 200 to 6,000min-1
Chuck type ER11, AR11
Provided set screws Four M5×10 screws, and four M5×16 screws

[Note]
• Up to three spindles can be mounted on GSE3210 (T11 to T13). However, when mounted on T11 and T12, and the
tool holder is GTF5916, the T10 cannot be used, and when the tool holder is GTF6016, the T09 cannot be used.
When this spindle is mounted on the T13, care must be taken for setting the diameter direction.
• This spindle becomes unavailable if GSE3210 is mounted in the end-face direction.
• When this spindle is mounted, the back spindle and the opposite sleeves may interfere with this spindle. Care must
be taken.
• When a tool diameter of 32 mm is exceeded, care must be taken to prevent interference with adjacent holders.

17-32
 L32

 GSE3807 End-face Drilling Spindle (Triple spindles for both ends)

This spindle is provided for drilling or milling on the end-face while the main spindle is stopped. Fix the mounting plate
to GSE3210, and then fix GSE3807 to the mounting plate.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name GSE3807
Machine type VIII, X
Rotary Tool Drive Device U31B
Max. chuck dia. ø7mm [ø0.2756"]
Spindle speed 200 to 6,000min-1
Chuck type ER11, AR11
Provided set screws Four M5×10 screws, and four M5×16 screws

[Note]
• This spindle can be mounted on GSE3210 (T13). When the tool holder GTF5916 and the GTF6016 are used with the
T10 and T09, respectively, the radial direction must be set with care.
• This spindle becomes unavailable if GSE3210 is mounted in the end-face direction.
• When this spindle is mounted, the back spindle and the opposite sleeves may interfere with this spindle. Care must
be taken.
• When mounted on type X, the axis stroke is restricted in pinch milling.
• When a workpiece diameter of 32 mm is exceeded, care must be taken to prevent interference with adjacent holders.

17-33
L32

 SEU1110 Drilling Spindle (Both Sides 4-Tool)

This spindle is used to perform drilling on the end-face or outer circumference of the workpiece, or to perform
machining by the end mill, after stopping the spindle. The spindle can be mounted at an arbitrary angle between –45 to
90 degrees against the workpiece.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name SEU1110
Machine type Ⅸ, Ⅻ
Rotary Tool Drive Device U32B
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Spindle speed 200 to 6,000min-1
Chuck type AR16, ER16
Provided set screws Five M6×35 screws

[Note]
• A coolant oil nozzle can be mounted on the side of the holder (U61R: option).
• When used at an angle other than 90°, make sure that it does not interfere with the back headstock and the opposite
sleeves.
• When the GSE1810 or other end-face tool holder is nearby, angle of movement is restricted to -10 to +90°.
• When the GSE1810 or other end-face tool holder is nearby, angle of movement is restricted to -37 to +90°.

The following conditions must be observed.

The machine coordinate X1 <10.0 mm (diameter) and Y1 <774.0 mm (diameter) range will interfere with
each other and must not be called.
If G0, G53 and other rapid feed rate commands are called in this range, there is a risk of collision with the
guide bushing which could damage the machine.

17-34
 L32

17-35
L32

 BSE607 End-face Drilling Spindle (3-Tool)

This spindle is mounted on rotary tool drive device, and used for end-face drilling.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name BSE607
Machine type Ⅸ, X, Ⅻ
Rotary Tool Drive Device U31B, U32B
Max. chuck dia. ø7mm [ø0.2756]
Spindle speed 200 - max. 6,000min-1
Chuck type ER11, AR11
Provided set screws Hexagon socket head bolts two M5×25 screws, Hexagon head bolt one M6×20

[Note]
• The numbers of the tools that can be installed in this holder are listed below.
• The GTF5916 tool holder: U31B, U32B T08 and T09
• The GTF6016 tool holder: U31B, U32B T07 and T08
• Make sure that it does not interfere with the back headstock and the opposite sleeves.
• Take care as the amount of workpiece protrusion may result in interference with the tooling.

17-36
 L32

 BSE707 Both end-face Drilling Spindle (3-Tool)

This spindle is mounted on rotary tool drive device, and used for end-face drilling.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name BSE707
Machine type Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Rotary Tool Drive Device U31B, U32B
Max. chuck dia. ø7mm [ø0.2756]
Spindle speed 200 to 6,000min-1
Chuck type ER11, AR11
Provided set screws Hexagon socket head bolts two M5×25 screws, Hexagon head bolt one M6×20

[Note]
• The numbers of the tools that can be installed in this holder are listed below.
• The GTF5916 tool holder: U31B, U32B T08 and T09
• The GTF6016 tool holder: U31B, U32B T07 and T08
• When front rotary tool drive device U121B is installed, back machining tools cannot be used at the following
positions.
• When the tool holder is the GTF5916, the U31B and U32B T08 cannot be used.
• When the tool holder is the GTF6016, the U31B, U32B T08 cannot be used.

17-37
L32

• Make sure that it does not interfere with the back headstock and the opposite sleeves.
• Take care as the amount of workpiece protrusion may result in interference with the tooling.

17-38
 L32

17.2.3.3 Outer Circumference Milling Spindle, End-face Drilling Spindle

 3-tool Cross Machining/ End-face Drilling Spindle (GSE3210) (mounted in cross machining
direction)
This spindle is to be mounted on a U31B rotary tool in the end-face or cross-machining direction, and is used for outer
circumference and end-face machining including drilling, tapping, or milling with rotary tools.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name GSE3210 (when mounted in cross machining direction)
Machine type Ⅷ, X
Rotary Tool Drive Device U31B
Outer dia. of sleeve ø31mm [ø1.2205"]
Spindle speed 200 to 6,000min-1
Rotary tool GSC1310 (T11~T13) ,
GSC1607 (T13) ,
GSE3707 (T11~T13) ,
GSE3807 (T13)
Holder sleeve GTF6312, GTF6313, GDF508
Provided set screws Three M8×50 screws

17-39
L32

[Note]
• When performing milling by the rotary tool mounted next to this holder, pay attention to the interference between
the workpiece and this holder.
• When this spindle is mounted, the back spindle and the opposite sleeves may interfere with this spindle. Care must
be taken.
• If this holder is used for end-face direction, GSC1607, GSE3707 and GSE3807 cannot be used.
• The Y1 stroke is 419 mm when this holder is mounted in cross-machining direction or tilt direction.
When the Y1 axis stroke is released as described in <6.8.6 Setting switches>, the holder and guide bushing device
will interfere in the 80 - 90° range and must be used with great care.

17-40
 L32

 3-tool Cross Machining/ End-face Drilling Spindle (GSE3210) (mounted in end-face machining
direction)
This spindle is to be mounted on a rotary tool (U31B) in the end-face or cross-machining direction, and is used for outer
circumference and end-face machining including drilling, tapping, or milling with rotary tools.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name GSE3210 (when mounted in end-face machining direction)
Machine type Ⅷ, X
Rotary Tool Drive Device U31B
Outer dia. of sleeve ø31mm [ø1.2205"]
Spindle speed 200 to 6,000min-1
Rotary tool GSC1310 (T11～T13) ,
GSC1607 (T13)
Provided set screws Three M8×50 screws

[Note]
• When performing milling by the rotary tool mounted next to this holder, pay attention to the interference between
the workpiece and this holder.
• When this spindle is mounted, the back spindle and the opposite sleeves may interfere with this spindle. Care must
be taken.
• If this holder is used for end-face direction, GSE3707, GSE3807, GDF508, GTF6312 and GTF6313 cannot be used.
• When the GSE1810 is near this holder, the GSC1607 cannot be mounted.
• The Y1 stroke is 419 mm when this holder is mounted in cross-machining direction or tilt direction.
When the Y1 axis stroke is released as described in <6.8.6 Setting switches>, the holder and guide bushing device
will interfere in the 80 - 90° range and must be used with great care.

17-41
L32

 GSC1607 Outer Circumference Milling Spindle (Double spindles)

This spindle is used to perform drilling on the outer diameter of the workpiece, or to perform key grooving by the end
mill, after stopping the spindle.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name GSC1607
Machine type Ⅷ, X
Rotary Tool Drive Device U31B
Outer dia. of sleeve ø7mm [ø0.2756"]
Spindle speed 200 to 6,000min-1
Rotary tool ER11 , AR11
Provided set screws Two M5×25 screws, one M5×35 screw

[Note]
The spindle can be mounted only on T13 of GSE3210.

17-42
 L32

17.2.3.4 Slitting Cross Spindle

 GSE1910 Slitting Spindle Cross Spindle (with slitting cutter)
This spindle is to be mounted on the U151B or U12B back rotary tool driving device, and be used for screw slitting on
back side.

17-43
L32

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name GSE1910
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Rotary Tool Drive Device U151B, U12B
Max. chuck dia. ø10 [ø3/8"]
Spindle speed 200 to 6,000min-1
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Max. cutter diameter ø50 [ø1.9685"]
Provided set screws Two M6×30 screws, two M6×60 screws

[Note]
• The numbers of the tools that can be installed in this holder are listed below.
• U151B T32, T35 can be used. However, when the U35J workpiece unloader is installed, only the T32 can be
used.
• U12B T31 - T34 can be used.
• The ASU130 slitting arbor (shank diameter ø6), ASU230 (shank diameter ø10) or commercially available arbors
are required.
• The workpiece on the back spindle may interfere with the slitting cutter. Pay attention to the protruded length of
workpiece.

17-44
 L32

 GSE1910 Slitting Spindle Cross Spindle (with cross machining tool)

This spindle is to be mounted on back rotary tool driving device (U12B), and is used for back cross machining.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name GSE1910
Machine type Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Rotary Tool Drive Device U12B
Max. chuck dia. ø10 [ø3/8"]
Spindle speed 200 to 6,000min-1
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Provided set screws Two M6×30 screws, two M6×60 screws

[Note]
• In cross-machining the U12B and T31 - T34 can be attached.

17-45
L32

17.2.4 Idle Gear Unit

 GSD107 Idle Gear Unit
This unit can be mounted on GSE3210. Mount this unit on T11 or T12 if the rotary tool unit is mounted on T12 or T13.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name GSD107
Machine type X
Provided set screws Two M5×8 screws

17-46
 L32

17.2.5 Sleeve
17.2.5.1 Boring and Drill Sleeve
 ADS707 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø7)
This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ADS507
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-47
L32

 ADS810 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø10)

This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ADS810
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-48
 L32

 ADS710 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø10)

This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ADS710
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-49
L32

 ADS110 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø10)

This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ADS110
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-50
 L32

 ADS210 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø10)

This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ADS210
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-51
L32

 ADS410 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø10)

This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ADS410
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-52
 L32

 ADS113 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø13)

This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ADS113
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø13mm [ø0.5118"]
Chuck type ER20, AR20
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-53
L32

 ADS213 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø13)

This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ADS213
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø13mm [ø0.5118"]
Chuck type ER20, AR20
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-54
 L32

 RDS116 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø16)

This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name RDS116
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø16mm [ø0.6299"]
Chuck type ER25, AR25
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-55
L32

 ADS112 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Morse taper, ~ø12)

This sleeve is designed for the Morse taper (MT1) shank drill used for front or back machining. The protrusion amount
is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ADS112
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Drill diameter ø12mm [ø1/2"]
Sleeve taper MT1
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-56
 L32

 ADS212 Drill Sleeve (Morse taper, ~ø12)

This sleeve is designed for the Morse taper (MT2) shank drill used for front or back machining. The protrusion amount
is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ADS212
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Drill diameter ø12mm [ø1/2"]
Sleeve taper MT2
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-57
L32

 ADS206 Drill Sleeve (Morse taper, ~ø6)

This sleeve chucks straight shank drills and drills in drill chucks. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve
in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ADS206
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Drill diameter ø6mm [ø1/4"]
Sleeve taper MT1
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-58
 L32

 ABS104 Boring sleeve (ø4)

This tool holder is provided for boring. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ABS104
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Tool No. IE6140, IE6240
Max. chuck dia. ø4mm [ø5/32"]
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-59
L32

 ABS108 Boring sleeve (ø8)

This tool holder is provided for boring. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ABS108
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Tool No. IE6180, IE6280
Max. chuck dia. ø8mm [ø5/16"]
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-60
 L32

 ABS110 Boring sleeve (ø10)

This tool holder is provided for boring. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ABS110
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Tool No. IE6340-BR-404
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-61
L32

 ADS1110 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Both ends, Rego Type Chuck, ~ø10)
This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ADS1110
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• Pay attention to the interference between the back spindle including the opposite sleeves, when mounting this
sleeve.

17-62
 L32

 ADS310 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Both ends, Rego Type Chuck, ~ø10)
This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ADS310
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• Pay attention to the interference between the back spindle including the opposite sleeves, when mounting this
sleeve.

17-63
L32

 ADS1410 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Both ends, Rego Type Chuck, ~ø10)
This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ADS1410
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• Pay attention to the interference between the back spindle including the opposite sleeves, when mounting this
sleeve.

17-64
 L32

 ADS1010 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Both ends, Rego Type Chuck, ~ø10)
This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ADS1010
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• Pay attention to the interference between the back spindle including the opposite sleeves, when mounting this
sleeve.

17-65
L32

 BDS507 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø7)

This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name BDS507
Machine type Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø7mm [ø0.2756"]
Chuck type ER11, AR11
Outer dia. of sleeve ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U120B and U150B, the SAU719 is required.

17-66
 L32

 BDS508 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø10)

This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name BDS508
Machine type Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Outer dia. of sleeve ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U120B and U150B, the SAU719 is required.

17-67
L32

 BDS607 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø7)

This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name BDS607
Machine type Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø7mm [ø0.2756"]
Chuck type ER11, AR11
Outer dia. of sleeve ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U120B and U150B, the SAU719 is required.

17-68
 L32

 BDS610 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø10)

This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name BDS610
Machine type Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Outer dia. of sleeve ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U120B and U150B, the SAU719 is required.

17-69
L32

 BDS707 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø7)

This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name BDS707
Machine type Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø7mm [ø0.2756"]
Chuck type ER11, AR11
Outer dia. of sleeve ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U120B and U150B, the SAU719 is required.

17-70
 L32

 VDS506 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø7)

This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name VDS506
Machine type Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø7mm [ø0.2756"]
Chuck type ER11, AR11
Outer dia. of sleeve ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U120B and U150B, the SAU719 is required.

17-71
L32

 VDS110 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø10)

This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name VDS110
Machine type Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Outer dia. of sleeve ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U120B and U150B, the SAU719 is required.

17-72
 L32

 GDS110 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø10)

This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name GDS110
Machine type Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø10 mm [ø3/8"]
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Outer dia. of sleeve ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U120B and U150B, the SAU719 is required.

17-73
L32

 HDS5406 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Both ends, Rego Type Chuck, ~ø7)
This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name HDS5406
Machine type Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø7mm [ø0.2756"]
Chuck type ER11, AR11
Outer dia. of sleeve ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]

17-74
 L32

 HDS5506 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Both ends, Rego Type Chuck, ~ø7)
This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name HDS5506
Machine type Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø7mm [ø0.2756"]
Chuck type ER11, AR11
Outer dia. of sleeve ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]

17-75
L32

 HDS5706 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Both ends, Rego Type Chuck, ~ø7 Semi-long type)
This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name HDS5706
Machine type Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø7mm [ø0.2756"]
Chuck type ER11, AR11
Outer dia. of sleeve ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]

17-76
 L32

 HDS5806 Boring and Drill Sleeve (Both ends, Rego Type Chuck, ~ø7)
This sleeve chucks the drill or other tools with the straight shank used for the front and back machining by the rego type
chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name HDS5806
Machine type Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø7mm [ø0.2756"]
Chuck type ER11, AR11
Outer dia. of sleeve ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]

17-77
L32

17.2.6 Tapping and Die Sleeve

 ATS210 Tapping Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø7)
This sleeve is a floating sleeve used for hold taps. It chucks rego type chucks and the protrusion amount is adjustable by
putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ATS210
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø7mm [ø0.2756"]
Chuck type ER11, AR11
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-78
 L32

 ATS307 Tapping Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø7)

This sleeve is a floating sleeve used for hold taps. It chucks rego type chucks and the protrusion amount is adjustable by
putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ATS307
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø7mm [ø0.2756"]
Chuck type ER11, AR11
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-79
L32

 ATS112 Tapping Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø7)

This sleeve is a floating sleeve used for hold taps. It chucks rego type chucks and the protrusion amount is adjustable by
putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name ATS112
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø10mm [ø0.2756"]
Chuck type ER16, AR16
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-80
 L32

 ABS106 Die sleeve

This is a floating sleeve designed for M2 - M6 dies. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name AUS106
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Screw tapping diameter M2 - M6x30
Size (ød x t) ø20 x 7
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-81
L32

 AUS110 Die sleeve

This is a floating sleeve designed for M6 - M8 dies. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name AUS110
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Screw tapping diameter M6 - M8x30
Size (ød x t) ø25 x9
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-82
 L32

 AUS112 Die sleeve

This is a floating sleeve designed for M8 - M10 dies. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name AUS112
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Screw tapping diameter M8 - M10x35
Size (ød x t) ø38 x13
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-83
L32

 AUS106L Die sleeve

This is a floating sleeve designed for M2 - M6 dies. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name AUS106L
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Screw tapping diameter M2 - M6x1-3/16"
Size (ød x t) ø3/4" x1/4"
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-84
 L32

 AUS110L Die sleeve

This is a floating sleeve designed for M6 - M8 dies. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name AUS110L
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Screw tapping diameter M6 - M8x1-3/16"
Size (ød x t) ø1"x11/32"
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-85
L32

 AUS112L Die sleeve

This is a floating sleeve designed for M8 - M10 dies. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name AUS112L
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Screw tapping diameter M8 - M10x1-3/8"
Size (ød x t) ø1-1/2"x1/2"
Outer dia. of sleeve ø25.4mm [ø1"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U121B, U151B and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-86
 L32

 BNS407 Tapping and Die Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø7) (Die ø16, ø20)
This sleeve is used to hold the tap and die. Tap can be hold by rego type chuck. The die is hold by die holder mounted in
place of cap nut of rego type chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name BNS407
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø7mm [ø0.2756"]
Chuck type ER11, AR11
Die size ø16 × 5mm, ø20 × 7 mm
Outer dia. of sleeve ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]

[Note]
• In case of installing the sleeve to the sleeve holder GDF1207, the die holder is not available for use.
• To use this sleeve on the U120B and U150B, the SAU719 is required.

17-87
L32

 BNS507 Tapping and Die Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø7) (Die ø5/8, ø13/16")
This sleeve is used to hold the tap and die. Tap can be hold by rego type chuck. The die is hold by die holder mounted in
place of cap nut of rego type chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name BNS507
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø7mm [ø0.2756"]
Chuck type ER11, AR11
Die size ø5/8" × 1/4", ø13/16" × 1/4"
Outer dia. of sleeve ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]
Provided set screws －

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U120B and U150B, the SAU719 is required.

17-88
 L32

 VNS406 Tapping and Die Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø7) (Die ø16, ø20)
This sleeve is used to hold the tap and die. Tap can be hold by rego type chuck. The die is hold by die holder mounted in
place of cap nut of rego type chuck. The protrusion amount is adjustable by putting sleeve in and out.

17-89
L32

 VNS506 Tapping and Die Sleeve (Rego Type Chuck, ~ø7) (Die ø5/8, ø13/16")

17-90
 L32

Specification
Specification Specification
Tool holder name VNS406 VNS506
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Max. chuck dia. ø7mm [ø0.2756"] ø7mm [ø0.2756"]
Chuck type ER11, AR11 ER11, AR11
Die size ø16 × 5mm, ø20 × 7 mm ø5/8" × 1/4", ø13/16" × 1/4"
Outer dia. of sleeve ø19.05mm [ø3/4"] ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]

[Note]
• To use this sleeve on the U120B and U150B, the SAU719 is required.

17-91
L32

17.2.7 Sleeve Adapter

 SAU719 Sleeve Adapter (ø19.05)
This adapter is provided for using the ø19.05 mm diameter sleeve with the U120B and U150B.

Specification
Specification Specification
Adapter name SAU719
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Sleeve Holder U120B, U150B
Inner dia. of adapter ø19.05mm [ø3/4"]
outer dia. of adapter ø25.4mm [ø1"]

17-92
 L32

 SAU720 Sleeve Adapter (ø20)

This adapter is provided for using the ø20 mm diameter sleeve with the U120B and U150B.

Specification
Specification Specification
Adapter name SAU720
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Sleeve Holder U120B, U150B
Inner dia. of adapter ø20mm [ø0.7874"]
outer dia. of adapter ø25.4mm [ø1"]

17-93
L32

 SAU825 Sleeve Adapter (ø25.4 mm)

This adapter is provided for using the ø25.4 mm diameter sleeve with the U121B, U151B and U12B.

Specification
Specification Specification
Adapter name SAU825
Machine type Ⅷ, Ⅸ, Ⅹ, Ⅻ
Rotary Tool Drive Device U121B, U151B, U12B
Inner dia. of adapter ø25.4mm [ø1"]
outer dia. of adapter ø31mm [ø1.2205"]
Provided set screws Four M5×35 screws

[Note]
• To use a stationary sleeve on the U121B, U151B, and U12B machines, the SAU825 is required.

17-94
 L32

17.2.8 Notes on using the end face drilling sleeve holder to be mounted on the vertical
holder
The dimension of tools is uneven. If the core of tool is not aligned with that of workpiece, perform adjustment using an
alignment ring. (See <7.13.6 Adjustment using alignment ring (Option)>.)

17-95
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 2E1-1702
Mfg. No. L32/0284～
Issue Date 2016.7

17-96
 21. Machine Structure
21.1 Outline .................................................................................................................................................... 21-3
21.2 Main Components of the Machine .......................................................................................................... 21-4
21.3 Spindle Device ........................................................................................................................................ 21-5
21.4 Guide Bushing and Guide Bushing Drive Device.................................................................................... 21-6
21.5 Tool Post ................................................................................................................................................. 21-7
21.6 Rotary Tool Drive Devices....................................................................................................................... 21-8
21.7 Back Spindle Devices ............................................................................................................................. 21-9
21.8 Z-Axis Feed Mechanism ....................................................................................................................... 21-10
21.9 X, Y-Axis Feed Mechanism................................................................................................................... 21-11
21.10 Lubricating Device ................................................................................................................................ 21-12
21.11 Coolant Device ..................................................................................................................................... 21-14
21.12 Pneumatic Device ................................................................................................................................. 21-15
21.13 Electric Device ...................................................................................................................................... 21-17

21-1
 (Blank Page)

21-2
 L32

21.1 Outline
The user's cooperation is indispensable for maintaining the machine in good conditions and for recovering the machine
immediately if trouble occurs. This also requires that you have an understanding of machine structure. To provide an
mechanical overview, this chapter illustrates the major mechanisms and components of the machine. See <Wiring
Diagrams> for electric devices.

21-3
L32

21.2 Main Components of the Machine

Shown below are the front and rear views of the machine with the names of its main components.

Front view of machine

Rear view of machine

21-4
 L32

21.3 Spindle Device

Shown below are the names of the components of the spindle device.

Spindle Device

21-5
L32

21.4 Guide Bushing and Guide Bushing Drive Device

Shown below is the external view of the guide bushing and guide bushing drive device and its main components.

Rotary guide bushing

21-6
 L32

21.5 Tool Post

Shown below is the external view of the tool post with the names of its components.

Tool post

21-7
L32

21.6 Rotary Tool Drive Devices

Shown below is the external view of the rotary tool drive device with the names of its components.

Rotary tool drive devices

21-8
 L32

21.7 Back Spindle Devices

Shown below are the names of the components of the back spindle device.

Back spindle devices

21-9
L32

21.8 Z-Axis Feed Mechanism

Shown below is the perspective view of the Z-axis feed mechanism with the names of its components.

Z-Axis Feed Mechanism

21-10
 L32

21.9 X, Y-Axis Feed Mechanism

Shown below is the perspective view of the X,Y-axis feed mechanism with the names of its components.

Front view of X, Y-axis feed mechanism

Rear view of X, Y-axis feed mechanism

21-11
L32

21.10 Lubricating Device

Shown below are the front and rear views of the Lubricating oil device, and the Lubricating oil piping diagram.

 Lubricating oil piping diagram

Front view of machine

Rear view of machine

21-12
 L32

 Lubricating oil circuit diagram

21-13
L32

21.11 Coolant Device

Shown below are coolant piping diagrams.

 Coolant piping diagrams.

21-14
 L32

21.12 Pneumatic Device

Shown below are the pneumatic device piping diagram and pneumatic piping diagram.

 Pneumatic piping diagram

Rear view of machine

21-15
L32

 Pneumatic circuit diagram

21-16
 L32

21.13 Electric Device

Shown below are the names and locations of electric components (motors, switches, and sensors) .

Electric device (front panel)

Parameter axis name list

Item Parameter axis name
Main spindle drive motor (MS1) S1
Back spindle drive motor (MS2) S2
Rotary tool drive motor (MS3) S3
Front rotary tool drive motor (MS4) S4 (type VIII, IX, X, XII options)
Back rotary tool drive motor (MS5) S5 (type X, XII standard) (type XIII,
IX option)
X1 axis control motor (MX1) X1
Z1 axis control motor (MZ1) Z1
Y1 axis control motor (MY1) Y1
X2 axis control motor (MX2) X2
Z2 axis control motor (MZ2) Z2
Y2 axis control motor (MY2) Y2 (type X, XII only)
Gang tool B axis motor (MA6) A6 (type IX, XII only)

21-17
L32

Electric device (rear panel)

21-18
 L32

(Blank Page)

21-19
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 3E1-2101
Mfg. No. L32/0198～
Issue Date 2015.10

21-20
 22. Periodical Check
22.1 Periodical Check ..................................................................................................................................... 22-3
22.1.1 Daily Check ....................................................................................................................................... 22-4
22.1.2 Monthly Check .................................................................................................................................. 22-6
22.1.3 Semi-Annual Check ........................................................................................................................ 22-11
22.1.4 Removing Chips .............................................................................................................................. 22-13
22.1.5 Cleaning the coolant tank of the high-pressure coolant device ....................................................... 22-15
22.2 Oil and Grease Supply .......................................................................................................................... 22-16
22.2.1 Lubrication list ................................................................................................................................. 22-16
22.2.2 Precautions on Lubrication and Replacement of Lubricant ............................................................. 22-17
22.2.3 Coolant............................................................................................................................................ 22-21
22.3 Consumable Parts ................................................................................................................................ 22-23

22-1
 (Blank Page)

22-2
 L32

22.1 Periodical Check

The machine must be checked at regular intervals regardless of presence or absence of a machine fault. Periodical
checks enable you to predict a machine fault or detect it at an early stage. Consequently, you can minimize the loss of
production.
This section explains periodical checks (daily, monthly, and semi-annually).

Be sure to make periodical checks.

Otherwise, the machine may seriously be damaged.

Be sure to conduct any work in emergency stop state other than operation check.
Working with the machine during operation causes an accident which could result in death or serious
personal injury.

22-3
L32

22.1.1 Daily Check

Daily check is required every day before the machine is operated or while the machine is operating.
Check the parts indicated by numbers in figures below. The numbers correspond to those in the daily check item tables
below. In addition to the check items, you can also check other items (e.g., sound, temperature, scratch, and odor) using
your five senses during operation. You must know how the machine operates normally to predict a machine fault using
your five senses. Prediction of a machine fault in this way is considered as the most effective method of daily check.
Your attitude to the machine as described above is very important when you maintain the machine.

 Daily check points

Front view of machine

Rear view of machine

22-4
 L32

 Daily check items

Type No. Check item Check method or point
Before power-on 1 Coolant level and lubricant level. Check the coolant level gage. The Lubricant level
must be at least as a quarter of the transparent tank.
2 Check if the tools and measuring Confirm that no tool or measuring equipment is left
tools are back in place. on a moving section.
3 Check if chips are removed. Remove chips from the coolant tank as soon as
possible. Take out the chip receiver box and
remove accumulated chips. Be sure to remove
chips according to <22.1.4 Removing Chips>.
Remove accumulated chips from the tray at the exit
to the workpiece conveyor. For details, see <7.11.2
Cleaning the Workpiece Conveyor>.
4 Check if the cutting room door Open and close the cutting room door to check if
opens and closes normally. the door closes firmly.
5 Has the air equipment been Check if water has accumulated in the drain tank of
drained? the filer regulator. If so, push the drain button at the
lower part using a cloth.
6 Check if regulator pressure is Check if regulator pressure is set to 0.5 MPa.
normal.
After power-on 7 Check if an alarm lamp on the Confirm that the LCD screen shows no alarm and
operation panel is on. that no alarm lamp on the machine operation panel
is on.
8 Check if lamps on the operation Check if the push-button switches and lamps are
panel are in normal state. normal.
9 Check if the back spindle fan is Open the door to the cutting room and check if air is
operating normally blowing from the back spindle in the direction of
the front of the machine.
After setup 10 Check if the tool is clamped Confirm that the screws securing the tool to the
correctly. holder and the holder to the tool post are firmly
tightened.
11 Confirm that the tool is not Check the tool edge.
damaged.
12 Check if the guide bushing and the Check the clearance between the material and the
chuck are adjusted correctly. guide bushing. Confirm that the collet chuck holds
the material smoothly.
13 Check if the sliding part of the Apply lubricant manually if the surface is dry.
bobbin is lubricated correctly.
During operation 14 Confirm that there is no abnormal Check if the rotary parts and slides sound normal.
noise.
15 Confirm that the machine is in Check the machine using your five senses (e.g.,
normal state. noise, temperature, scratch, and odor).
16 Check if the lubrication pump is Normal if the motor shaft in the transparent tank
working. takes 60 min to make a full rotation
17 Check if the coolant pump is Look into the window in the upper part of the pump
working. to check that the cooling fan is turning in the
direction of the arrow. Check also that the coolant
nozzle is jetting coolant.
18 Check if the cooling fan is Check that air is being blown to the machine back
operating normally side.

22-5
L32

22.1.2 Monthly Check

Monthly check is required for predicting a machine fault (or detecting it at an early stage) which may be missed through
daily check. Must be carried out.

 Monthly check points

Front view of machine

Rear view of machine

22-6
 L32

Replacement of filter mat

Filter mat assy

Filter mat

22-7
L32

Front side

Back side

If the control unit filter mat is soiled, the control unit will become contaminated with oil, which could damage
servo amps and other electronic devices. Clean the filter mat at regular intervals.

22-8
 L32

 Monthly check items

Type No. Check item Check method Criteria and action
Spindle 1 Heating of the bearing Rotate the spindle at 3,000 Touch the housing by hands.
min–1 for 30 min. Normal if the housing is only
warm.
2 Wear of the chuck Visually check the chuck If the chuck finger is
finger fingers. remarkably worn out, replace
the chuck finger.
Back spindle 3 Heating of the bearing Rotate the spindle at 3,000 Touch the housing by hands.
min–1 for 30 min. Normal if the housing is only
warm.
4 Wear of the chuck Visually check the chuck If the chuck finger is
finger fingers. remarkably worn out, replace
the chuck finger.
Headstock and tool 5 Condition of slide Visually check the slide Replace them if they are
post feed structure cover of feed axis cover. damaged.
Guide bushing 6 Inner hole of the guideVisual check and finger No scratch or burr
device bush sleeve touch
7 Chuck and guide Dismount the collect chuck, Clean the inside of the spindle
bushing statues remove the springs, and then and the removed parts.
dismount the chuck sleeve, Similarly, clean the guide
intermediate sleeve, and bushing and the removed parts.
balance sleeve.
Coolant device 8 Check for chip Remove the partition from Remove chip accumulation
accumulation in the the side on which the coolant from the coolant tank and the
areas around the pump is mounted. See areas around and under the
coolant pump and in <22.1.4 Removing Chips>. coolant pump.
the coolant tank. Draw the coolant tank and
check for chip accumulation
in the tank.
Lubricating device 9 Discharge amount of Check how fast the manual 1.5 cc in 60 min
oil from the pump unit handle drops. Check the piping if the manual
handle drops too fast.
10 Parts for lubrication Visual check of the piping Retighten the loosened parts if
piping and oil leakage and tubes it is oily.
11 Check how oil is Determine if oil Check the motor shaft
discharged. replenishment is necessary. revolution.
Filter of pneumatic 12 Confirm that the filter Visual check and finger Replace the filter with neutral
device is not stained or touch detergent if it is stained or
clogged. clogged.
Cooling device 13 Check if each cooling A cooling fan is provided for If a fan is not working
fan is working the spindle cooling device normally, replace it.
normally and each amplifier in the
electric box. Place your palm
near the air outlet of each fan
unit to see if the fan is
operating normally.
14 Level of cooling oil for Check the oil level gauge on If the oil is insufficient, pour
headstock headstock cooling system clean oil into the tank until the
tank is at full capacity.

22-9
L32

Type No. Check item Check method Criteria and action

Control unit filter 15 • Grimed and clogged • Visual check and finger • If the filter is grimed and
state of the filter touch clogged, wash the filter with
neutral detergent.
* When washing the filter use
only neutral detergent. If
other cleaning agent is
used, the filter may be
damaged.
• Grimed and clogged • Check the oil pan visually. • If the oil pan is filled with the
state of the oil pan waste oil, clean it.
* If the oil pan is grimed, the
filter may be clogged.
Check the filter.
Checking the motor 16 Connector status of Check if the connectors of Retighten loose connectors if
wiring each motor each motor are firmly any.
tightened.
B1 axis revolving 17 Lubricant level Visually check the oil gauge If there is not enough oil, add
assembly of the B1 axis revolving oil.
(Type IX and XII) assembly. Be sure to execute after
referring to ＜22.2.2
Precautions on Lubrication and
Replacement of Lubricant＞.

22-10
 L32

22.1.3 Semi-Annual Check

Semi-annual check is carried out for parts which seldom fail or for determining when to replace consumable parts. Do
not neglect the check items. Otherwise, the machine may seriously be damaged.

 Semi-annual check parts

Front view of machine

Rear view of machine

22-11
L32

 Semi-annual check items

Type No. Check item Check method Criteria and action
Spindle 1 Deflection of the Attach the dial indicator to Normal if the indicator shows a
spindle straight hole the hole into which the value which is within the
spindle chuck sleeve is tolerance of the inspection table
inserted, and give a full provided with the machine.
rotation to the spindle softly. (TIR0.005)
2 Wear of the chuck Visual check of the outer The chuck bobbin can be used
bobbin circumference if not severely worn out.
Back spindle 3 Deflection of the back Attach the dial indicator to Normal if the indicator shows a
spindle straight hole the hole into which the back value which is within the
spindle chuck sleeve is tolerance of the inspection table
inserted, and give a full provided with the machine.
rotation to the spindle softly. (TIR0.005)
4 Wear of the chuck Visual check of the outer The chuck bobbin can be used
bobbin circumference if not severely worn out.
Guide bushing 5 Heating of the bearing, • Rotate the spindle at 3,000 • Touch the housing to check if
device abnormal noise, and min–1 for 30 min. it is abnormally hot. Check if
thrust rattling • Push and pull the sleeve to the rotary spindle generates
the thrust direction by abnormal noise during the
hand. rotation.
• Check if rattling condition is
observed.
6 Tension on and wear of • Remove the belt cover to • Replace the belt if it has been
the timing belt for visually check how much peeled or cracked on the
driving the guide the belt has worn. surface.
bushing • Press the center part of the • Make sure that the belt is
belt lightly with your tensioned so that the belt and
finger for its tension. the pulley may be well
engaged without slipping.
Coolant device 7 Float switch in the tank Remove oil from the tank. Normal if the alarm lamp on the
operation panel goes on after
one cycle
Lubricating device 8 Float switch of the Remove oil from the pump Normal if the alarm lamp on the
pump unit unit tank. operation panel goes on after
one cycle
9 Grimed and clogged After removing the cover of If the filter is dirty and clogged,
state of the suction the pump unit, remove the clean it, and blow the filter with
filter suction filter, and check compressed air to remove any
visually and by touching dirt and other foreign objects.
with your finger.
Rotary tool spindle 10 Abnormal noise and • Rotate the tool spindle at • Check if the rotary spindle
thrust rattling 2000 min–1 for 30 min. generates abnormal noise
• Push and pull the spindle during the rotation.
to the thrust direction by • Check if rattling condition is
hand. observed.
Inspection of the 11 Checking Air Pressure • Check regulator pressure • The device is operating
U53B knock-out after using M10 to normally if the air pressure is
device advance the knock-out 0.25 MPa.
device.

22-12
 L32

22.1.4 Removing Chips

If you are negligent to remove accumulated chips from coolant tank, it causes an unexpected trouble such as coolant
overflow. This section explains how to remove chips from chip chute and to clean the coolant tank.
Provide an area large enough to pull out the chip chute from the machine.
[Procedure]
1. Remove larger chips. Open the chip outlet door provided on the lower part of the left side of the machine, rake out
chips with the attached chip remover rod, and close the door.

2. Remove fine chips. Remove the oil splash protection cover provided at the back of the left side of the machine,
gently lift up the chip receiver box, throw away chips, then remount the chip receiver box and the cover.
Sometimes check whether the filter in the chip receiver box is clogged. Clean the filter with a wire brush if it is
clogged.
3. Remove accumulated chips from the areas around and under the coolant pump. Remove the oil cover, the chip
receiver box, and the partition on the side on which the coolant pump is mounted. Remove chips around the suction
opening of the pump, using a shovel, etc. Return the cover and chip receiver box to the original positions.

4. When the machine is used for a long time period, very fine chips may accumulate at the bottom of the coolant tank.
Draw the coolant tank, remove the chip-accumulated floor plate, the three chip chutes, and clean it as required.
Be sure to disconnect the wiring connectors and the piping joints before separating the coolant tank from the
machine.

22-13
L32

Never discharge coolant for machining with fine chips accumulated at the bottom of the coolant tank.
Chips in coolant may cause a fire or damage to the coolant pump.

Be sure to disconnect the wiring connectors before separating the coolant tank from the machine.
Otherwise, the coolant pump cable and the level detection cable may be damaged.

Be sure to turn off the main circuit breaker before removing the wiring connector of the coolant tank from
the machine. Failure to do so may result in death or serious personal injury due to an electric shock.

22-14
 L32

22.1.5 Cleaning the coolant tank of the high-pressure coolant device

If foreign matter such as chips gets mixed in the coolant tank of the high-pressure coolant device, remove it
immediately.
This section explains how to clean the coolant tank of the high-pressure coolant device.
Secure sufficient working space for the cleaning work.
[Procedure]
1. Turn the high-pressure coolant device off.
2. Remove the filter cover and the filter, then drain out coolant from the coolant tank.
3. Visually check for foreign matter on the coolant tank and remove any found.
4. Return the filter to the original position and close the filter cover.
5. Turn the high-pressure coolant device on and fill its coolant tank with coolant.

Running the high-pressure coolant device with foreign matter mixed in its coolant tank can not only
damage the high-pressure pump but also cause a fire hazard.

22-15
L32

22.2 Oil and Grease Supply

For trouble-free operation, the machine requires lubrication by additionally supplying or replacing appropriate oils on a
regular basis. This section describes lubrication required for the A20 machine.

22.2.1 Lubrication list

For details of lubrications, see <22.2.2 Precautions on Lubrication and Replacement of Lubricant>.
Status of
Frequen
Lubricating Position Capacity Lubrication type and name oils and
cy
greases
Feed shaft lubrication pump a 0.8 Mobil Vactra Oil No.2 or its equivalent Liquid
(Viscosity: ISO VG68)
Coolant tank a Depends on tank See <22.2.3 Coolant> Liquid
capacity
Tooling spur gear b Adequate Mobilith SHC220 or its equivalent semi-solid
(Grease of wide application temperature (grease)
ranges for rolling bearing) (DIN
KPHC2N-40)
Bobbin sliding portion a Adequate Mobilith SHC220 or its equivalent semi-solid
(Grease of wide application temperature (grease)
ranges for rolling bearing)
Oil air lubrication unit a 1.8 Mobil Vactra Oil No.2 or its equivalent Liquid
(Viscosity: ISO VG68)
Spindle cooling device ｂ 15 Mobil Velocite Oil No.3 or its Liquid
(tank 8) equivalent (Viscosity: ISO VG02)
B1 axis revolving assembly b 0.2 Mobilith SHC220 or its equivalent Liquid
(SHC629)
• Be sure to lubricate the parts 'a' as required during the daily check and the parts 'b' as required during the monthly
check, respectively.
• Contact the manufacturer for equivalent to recommended lubricant.

[Note]
• The feed shaft lubrication oil pump supplies the lubricating oil to the machine when it is powered. And the discharge
amount is set to 1.5 cc/60 min.
• The LM guide uses a QZ lubrication unit (manufactured by THK) and is provided with an appropriate amount of oil
at all times.
• The spindle bearing is lubricated with high quality, long life grease (Isoflex NBU15 manufactured by Cluber),
requiring no additional lubrication except an appropriate amount of the grease used when the spindle bearing is
replaced.
• Dispose of the waste oil according to all national laws and regulations.
• Applying grease to the tool spindle gear and tools excessively causes heat generation.
• When replacing the quill-drive tool and B-shaft tooling, apply a proper amount of grease to the gear teeth before
inserting the tool.

22-16
 L32

22.2.2 Precautions on Lubrication and Replacement of Lubricant

 Feed shaft lubrication oil
• Fill the lubricant tank with new oil when the lubricant level for the slides is nearing the lower limit.
There is no need to replace all the oil if you supply the oil correctly.
• If the machine has not been used for a long time, conduct the following sequence before starting the machine:Pull up
the pump manual handle and release it. Repeat this operation until the lubricant is well supplied to each part.

[Note]
Ask the manufacturer for lubricant for slide equivalent to Exxon Mobil Vactra Oil No. 2.

Never push down the pump manual handle.

Otherwise, the lubrication pump may be damaged.

Lubrication pump unit

 For coolant oil

Coolant is frequently disposed with chips. Therefore, the coolant level lowers rather fast.
Pay attention to the coolant level gage at work in order to supply the coolant whenever necessary.

Monitor the level and condition of the coolant in the machine every day. Low or ineffective coolant can
result in damage to the tool and a possible fire.

 Tool post spindle spur gear lubricating

If the tool spindle is equipped with the grease nipple, use the grease gun to apply grease to the teeth of the spur gear
located inside the tool spindle.

22-17
L32

 Bobbin sliding portion

Apply grease on the sliding portion of the spindle bobbin.
Apply grease on each location with the chuck both opened as well as closed.

Spindle Bobbin Sliding Portion

Back Spindle Bobbin Sliding Portion

Avoid "empty chucking" (chucking with no bar material).

Doing so may cause the machine to malfunction or damage the collet chuck.

Be sure to make the machine in emergency stop status before applying grease to the bobbin or spindle.
Otherwise, your hand may be caught in the machine, resulting in a severe injury.

22-18
 L32

 B1 axis removing assembly lubrication (type IX, XII)

[Procedure]
1. Set the B1 axis to B1 = 90 degrees.
2. Move the X1 axis downwards.
3. Remove covers (1), (2) and (3).

4. Remove the drain-side plug, and drain the old lubricant.

5. Remove the plug for the lubricant supply port.

6. Pour lubricating oil into the oil inlet port until it reaches the center of the oil level gauge.
7. Install the covers.

22-19
L32

 Lubricating the gears of the rotary tool drive device

Tooling and the rotary tool drive device need to be lubricated with grease. Use a grease gun to apply grease to the teeth
of the gears located inside the tooling via the grease nipple.

22-20
 L32

22.2.3 Coolant
The applicable machine can use the following coolants.
• Water insoluble coolant (oilness)：
Usable with the machine of standard specification
• Water soluble coolant：
Usable with the machine of special specification (e.g., air sealing)

 Water insoluble coolant (oilness)

Selecting a coolant
• Copper corrosion (100°C, 1h) 1：
Usable with no problem.
• Copper corrosion (100°C, 1h) 2：
Basically usable, however, some products have high activity. Contact the manufacturer of coolant before selecting a
coolant.
• Copper corrosion (100°C, 1h) 3, 4：
Do not use. The machine (including electric and electronics component, resin, and sealant) will remarkably be
damaged.

Precautions on the use of coolants

The chemical admixture contained in coolant may be deteriorated by evaporation due to heat generated during cutting or
others. Accordingly, the initial performance may not be expected. Provide an appropriate maintenance such as
replacement interval according to the instruction of manufacturer.

 Water soluble coolant

Selecting a coolant
• Emulsion (milky white) type：
Usable with no problem.
• Soluble (translucent and transparency) type：
Basically usable, however, some products have high permeability. Contact the manufacturer of coolant before
selecting a coolant.
• Solution (transparency) type：
Do not use. The machine (including painted portion, rotating section, resin, and sealant) will remarkably be
damaged. Some products are called as a synthetic type.

22-21
L32

Precautions on the use of coolants

• To prevent the adherence of rotary section, always open the manual cock of the air seal device when using a water
soluble coolant.
• The dilution methods and ratio of coolants vary depending on the type of coolant. Follow the instructions provided
by the manufacturer of each coolant. Be sure to check the coolant diluted state every day to keep the appropriate
strength of the coolant solution. A rust may be generated with low pH (8.0 or less).
• Water-soluble coolants offer protection from rust while the machine surface is wet. Once the machine surface dries,
however, it could rust. Apply the rustproof oil while the machine surface is still wet, to prevent rust.
• If the surface of the water-soluble coolant appears to be unclean (abnormal), replace the coolant immediately.
• Before starting and after ending operations, remove chips and lightly apply lubricating oil on the sliding parts of the
machine.

Water-soluble coolants have high degreasing strength due to their alkaline content and this may cause
skin inflammation.
Be sure to wash your hands with neutral detergent after ending operations. Apply a protective cream
especially if you have sensitive skin.

22-22
 L32

22.3 Consumable Parts

Some parts reach their life faster than the others. It is unavoidable to use short-life parts in terms of the machine structure.
These wearing parts must be checked regularly and replaced if defect is found. This section describes consumable parts.

Consumable parts
For the information on how to replace the parts listed below, refer to <7. Mounting and Adjusting Chuck >.
For the replacement of filter mat, see <22.1.2 Monthly Check>.
Check Criteria for
Name Machine type Manufacturer
interval replacement
Main spindle collet chuck FC081-M, Citizen Every • Fatigue
FC251-M , FC951-M S&M 3 months in • Damage in the chuck
TF37, TF43, TF48 NEUCOMM continuous grip
40.008, 231.009, SCHAUBLIN use • Abnormal wear
171E DUNNER
76-740, 76-81, 76-99
F48, F42
Main spindle chuck finger L32: C108 Citizen Every month Abnormal wear
Guide bushing drive 900-U5GT-28 Unitta Every 6 • Damage
timing belt UB3X9 months • Abnormal wear
Guide bushing FG531-M, Citizen Every 6 • Damage
WFG531-M, S&M months • Abnormal wear
FG581-M NEUCOMM
TD32, STM38
28.001, 468.001
Back spindle collet chuck FC081-M-K ,FC251 Citizen Every • Fatigue
-M-K, FC951-M-K S&M 3 months in • Damage in the chuck
TF37, TF48, TF42 NEUCOMM continuous grip
40.008, 231.009, SCHAUBLIN use • Abnormal wear
171E DUNNER
76-740, 76-81, 76-99
F48, F42
Back spindle chuck finger L32 U40B: 111 Citizen Every month Abnormal wear
Y2 axis drive timing belt 460-5GT-20 Unitta Every 6 • Damage
months • Abnormal wear
Element for pneumatic AW20-01BG-A SMC Every month • Stained and clogged
device • Discolored
(AF20P-060S)
Back rotary tool drive 615-3GT-12 Unitta Every 6 • Damage
timing belt months • Abnormal wear
Filter mat SK3170100 RITTAL Every month • Fatigue
• Stainer
Medium-pressure coolant 12410242 OKINAYA Every month • Stained and clogged
device (100 mesh)
Trochoid pump element
Medium-pressure coolant P26-20-SW Masuda Every month • Stained and clogged
device (Stainless steel wire Manufacturing
Line filter element mesh)
High-pressure coolant device NF1-20M NIKUNI Every month • When the indication
Filter element (20 µ) at the pressure gauge
of the supply pump
exceeds 0.3 MPa

22-23
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 3E1-2202
Mfg. No. L32/0480～
Issue Date 2016.12

22-24
 23. Troubleshooting
23.1 Failure Detection..................................................................................................................................... 23-3
23.1.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... 23-3
23.1.2 Failure detecting procedure............................................................................................................... 23-3
23.2 Interface Diagnosis ................................................................................................................................. 23-5
23.2.1 Operating the I/F DIAGNOSIS screen ............................................................................................... 23-5
23.2.2 Device numbers and display data ..................................................................................................... 23-6
23.3 Alarms..................................................................................................................................................... 23-7
23.3.1 Error and alarm messages ................................................................................................................ 23-7
23.3.2 Alarm lists.......................................................................................................................................... 23-8
23.3.2.1 List of messages when the error lamp blinks ............................................................................... 23-8
23.3.2.2 List of messages displayed with alarm indicator on ................................................................... 23-12
23.3.2.3 NC alarm messages .................................................................................................................. 23-17
23.3.3 Stop codes ...................................................................................................................................... 23-18
23.3.4 File system error lists ...................................................................................................................... 23-19
23.4 Post-Alarm Actions ............................................................................................................................... 23-21
23.4.1 Recovery from interference check alarm ......................................................................................... 23-21
23.4.1.1 Interference check ..................................................................................................................... 23-21
23.4.1.2 Troubleshooting after "M03 COLLISION ALARM" ..................................................................... 23-22
23.4.1.3 Troubleshooting after "M04 AREA ALARM" .............................................................................. 23-22
23.4.2 Resetting Knock-Out Alarm ............................................................................................................. 23-23
23.4.2.1 Troubleshooting after the "EX106 Knock-Out Overload" alarm occurred
(When the machine is equipped with the U51B air-driven back knock-out device).................... 23-23
23.4.2.2 Resetting "EX144 Knock-out Sensor Illegal" Alarm ................................................................... 23-24
23.4.3 Recovery from spindle chuck illegal state ....................................................................................... 23-26
23.4.4 Recovery from back spindle chuck illegal state ............................................................................... 23-27
23.4.5 Recovery from emergency stop button alarm.................................................................................. 23-28
23.4.5.1 Resetting "EX052 Emergency stop button alarm." .................................................................... 23-28
23.4.5.2 Turning on/off the power ............................................................................................................ 23-28
23.4.5.3 Setting value of the safety relay................................................................................................. 23-29
23.4.6 Recovery from pump overload alarm .............................................................................................. 23-30
23.4.6.1 Troubleshooting after "EX055 Coolant or medium-press. pump overload.
Thermal activated." .................................................................................................................... 23-30
23.4.7 Recovery from overcurrent alarm .................................................................................................... 23-31
23.4.7.1 Troubleshooting after "EX001 200VAC over current alarm. Circuit protector is activated." ....... 23-31
23.4.8 Troubleshooting when 24 VDC power supply fails .......................................................................... 23-33
23.4.9 Troubleshooting after main spindle, back spindle, and rotary tool alarms ....................................... 23-33
23.4.10 Troubleshooting after spindle related alarms .................................................................................. 23-34
23.4.10.1 Troubleshooting after "EX109 Main spindle speed fluctuation alarm." ...................................... 23-34
23.4.10.2 Troubleshooting after "EX110 Back spindle speed fluctuation alarm." ...................................... 23-35
23.4.10.3 Procedure if the message "EX592 Knock-out can not be advanced to correct position."
appears ..................................................................................................................................... 23-36
23.4.11 Recovery from external device alarms ............................................................................................ 23-37
23.4.11.1 Troubleshooting after "EX133 Bar loader is not ready." ............................................................ 23-37
23.4.11.2 Troubleshooting after "EX101 Bar loader alarm" ....................................................................... 23-37
23.4.11.3 Troubleshooting after "EX201 Bar stock empty" ........................................................................ 23-38
23.4.11.4 Troubleshooting after "EX208 Chip conveyor overload." ........................................................... 23-38
23.4.12 Troubleshooting after OP076 Device battery low level Alarm .......................................................... 23-39
23.4.13 Recovery from other alarms ............................................................................................................ 23-40
23.4.13.1 Troubleshooting after "EX108 Cycle time alarm" ....................................................................... 23-40
23.4.13.2 Troubleshooting after "EX105 Coolant Discharge Alarm" .......................................................... 23-42
23.4.13.3 Troubleshooting after "EX107 Tool bit breakage alarm. Cut off tool is broken." ........................ 23-43
23.4.13.4 Troubleshooting after "EX202 Lubrication oil empty alarm or EX204 Oil-air lub alarm"............. 23-43
23.4.13.5 Troubleshooting after "EX203 Coolant oil alarm"....................................................................... 23-44

23-1
 23.4.13.6 Troubleshooting after "Z52 Battery fault xxxxx" ......................................................................... 23-45
23.4.13.7 Troubleshooting after "S52 Battery voltage drop 009F" ............................................................. 23-47
23.4.14 Recovery from thermal displacement correction device alarm ........................................................ 23-48
23.4.14.1 roubleshooting after "EX122 T.D.C. device alarm", "EX131 T.D.C. data alarm"........................ 23-48
23.4.14.2 Troubleshooting after "EX132 T.D.C. sensor alarm (ch）".................................................. 23-48
23.4.15 Recovery from loader device alarms ............................................................................................... 23-48
23.4.15.1 Measures to process "EX412 loader arm invalid" ...................................................................... 23-48
23.4.15.2 Measures to process "EX413 loader hand invalid" .................................................................... 23-50
23.4.15.3 Measures to process "EX414 shutter invalid" ............................................................................ 23-51
23.5 Mechanical Errors ................................................................................................................................. 23-52
23.5.1 Machine fails to start ....................................................................................................................... 23-52
23.5.2 Main spindle does not rotate during automatic operation ................................................................ 23-53
23.5.3 Back spindle does not rotate during automatic operation................................................................ 23-53
23.5.4 Rotary tool does not rotate during automatic operation................................................................... 23-53
23.5.5 Guide bushing alarms ..................................................................................................................... 23-54
23.5.5.1 Fretting problem ........................................................................................................................ 23-54
23.5.5.2 Too large machining diameter fluctuations ................................................................................ 23-54
23.5.5.3 Poor machining roundness ........................................................................................................ 23-55
23.5.5.4 Abnormal noise during rotation .................................................................................................. 23-55
23.5.6 If "It fails in the update of OP088 Eco/ope. info. file." alarm occurred ............................................. 23-55
23.6 Appendix ............................................................................................................................................... 23-58
23.6.1 PLC constant setting ....................................................................................................................... 23-58
23.6.2 PLC bit selection parameter setting ................................................................................................ 23-60
23.6.3 Checking the version of software .................................................................................................... 23-62
23.6.4 Checking the alarm history .............................................................................................................. 23-63
23.6.5 Checking the key-in history ............................................................................................................. 23-64
23.6.6 Terminal layout ................................................................................................................................ 23-65
23.6.7 Control box component layout......................................................................................................... 23-67

23-2
 L32

23.1 Failure Detection

The machine may cause a failure even though proper maintenance, including specified periodic checks, has been
performed sufficiently.The machine must be recovered from the failure even in that case. This chapter describes the
procedure for identifying the causes of relatively simple machine failures and the action required for recovering the
machine from them.

23.1.1 Introduction
Once the machine causes a failure, you must take immediate action to prevent the failure from resulting in a serious
accident. For this purpose, you must first use your senses to check for abnormal appearance of the machine such as
damages to its components, abnormal heat generation, parching smells, abnormal noise.
If a trouble is serious and dangerous, immediately turn off the main circuit breaker.

23.1.2 Failure detecting procedure

Detection with alarms
If the machine detects an error or failure, the alarm indicator on the operation panel goes on or blinks.
In this case, see <23.3 Alarms>.
↓
Detection by interface diagnosis
If the machine causes an unexpected or unknown fault or failure, it may adversely affect machine operation without
generating an alarm.
If this happens, signals of interface (I/F) diagnosis find the failure with checking input/output.
See <23.5 Mechanical Errors >. I/F diagnosis is also available even when a failure has been detected with an alarm.
For using I/F diagnosis, see <23.2 Interface Diagnosis>.
↓
Detection by checking the mechanism
If a failure occurs while input/output signals are normal, the possible cause is assumed to be a mechanical part. Check
the mechanical parts to see if the failure is a mechanical transmission fault caused by a loose or damaged belt or key or
a mechanical movement fault caused by a galling slide or damaged bearing.

23-3
L32

 Sheet keyboard type: Symbol

23-4
 L32

23.2 Interface Diagnosis

The machine is controlled by a programmable logic controller (PLC) built into the NC device. The PLC receives sensor
signals (as input signals) and drives parts such relays (using output signals) Checking the states of input and output
signals to and from the PLC is called interface (I/F) diagnosis and is performed on the I/F DIAGNOSIS screen.
Although I/F diagnosis is very effective to detect machine trouble, the user requires some technical knowledge.
This section provides general information for effective use of I/F diagnosis.

23.2.1 Operating the I/F DIAGNOSIS screen

Display the I/F DIAGNOSIS screen by following procedure.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Diagnosis key .
The Diagnosis menu appears.

2. Press the menu key [I/F Diag] (Skip this step when the I/F DIAGNOSIS screen has already been displayed.)
The I/F DIAGNOSIS screen appears.

3. Enter device numbers (X for input and Y for output) in the Device input fields on screen using
<alphanumeric keys>.
4. Press the Input key .
The entered device numbers are displayed.

23-5
L32

23.2.2 Device numbers and display data

The device number is made up of a letter from the alphabet and a number or numbers following that letter. Each device
number has a specific meaning in the PLC. There are two kinds of device numbers: bit type device numbers such as X
and Y, and data type device numbers such as D and R. Following is an explanation of the device numbers.

A signal changes according to the machine state and thus you can diagnose the machine state based on the signal.

23-6
 L32

23.3 Alarms
23.3.1 Error and alarm messages
If an error or alarm occurs, the warning or alarm indicator on the operation panel goes on or blinks and the Message
screen appears automatically. Check the message on the screen. The Message screen may not appear automatically
depending on the content of the error or alarm.
In that case, press the menu key [Message] to display the message.
[Procedure]
1. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key .
The submenus (upper level) are enabled. (Skip this step when the submenu has already been selected.)
2. Press the menu key [Message].
The Message window will then appear.

23-7
L32

23.3.2 Alarm lists

23.3.2.1 List of messages when the error lamp blinks
Alarm No. Message Description Action
M01 OPERATION ERROR Alarms during the NC run caused by operator See the Instruction manual of the
Error No. nnnn errors or machine failures are displayed. Use NC manufacturer.
the error number to check details.
M02 NEED R.P. RTN Absolute position detector malfunctions, such See the Instruction manual of the
Error No. nnnn as deleting the absolute position data or the NC manufacturer.
detector failure, occurred. Use the error
number to check details.
M03 COLLISION ALARM Specified command causes an interference See <23.4.1 Recovery from
between two parts. interference check alarm >.
M04 AREA ALARM Two parts are in the area where an See <23.4.1 Recovery from
interference may occur. interference check alarm >.

Alarm No. Message and symptom Action

OP001 Work counter is full. The machine will stop after this Press the Reset key after completion of the current
cycle. cycle.
OP002 Lubrication oil is empty The machine will stop after Add lubricating oil.
this cycle.
OP003 Chip conveyor is overloaded. The machine will stop See <23.4.11 Recovery from external device alarms>.
after this cycle.
OP004 Coolant oil is empty. Auto operation stops end of Add coolant.
cycle. The machine will stop after this cycle.
OP005 External error. The machine will stop after this cycle. The additional external device is malfunctioning.
Check added devices.
OP006 Bar stock is empty. The machine will stop after this Add materials to the bar loader shelf.
cycle.
OP008 Zero return mode. Other mode is disable. Press a key such as Manual Operation, MDI, or Auto.
OP009 Mechanical adjustment mode. Other mode is disable. Press a key such as Manual Operation, MDI, or Auto.
OP011 Spindle synchronization mode is operating. Main and Spindle synchronization is cancelled by specifying
back spindle synchronous mode. G113 in the program or by pressing the Reset key when
the back spindle stops.
OP012 Bar loader is disconnected. Setting switch No.7 is ON. Set the setting SW 7 to OFF to enable completion of
preparation of the bar loader.
OP013 Override switch is 0%. Then machine can not be Set the override switch appropriately.
moved.
OP014 Tool life is reached. The machine will stop after this Press the Reset key to release the machine from the
cycle. error. Replace the worn tool.
OP015 Interference check is disable. Setting switch No.11 is Move the axis outside the interference area. Then,
ON. press the menu key [INT.IVLD] or remove the check
mark from the setting switch "11 Interfere Check Off",
to enable the interference check.
OP040 T.D.C. sensor alarm. The machine will stop after this See <23.4.14 Recovery from thermal displacement
cycle. (**ch) correction device alarm>.
OP041 Door can not be locked. Please shut the door. Tightly close the door so that it can be locked.
OP045 Please lock a door by a start key. To re-start the main spindle, the door must be locked.
Press the Start button to lock the door.
OP046 Spindle not restarted. Press SPINDLE START button. The spindle is at standstill.
Restart the spindle with the Spindle start key and run
the program with the Start key.
OP050 Pause during axis movement Press the Start key.
OP056 The bar loader is not ready. The machine will stop after The bar loader is not ready.
this cycle. After the machine stops, check bar loader condition.
OP057 Dry run valid. Setting switch No. 4 is ON. Dry run is enabled.
Check the switch setting.
OP063 Bar loader door is open. Close the door. Close the bar loader door. (For dedicated bar loader)
OP076 Device battery low level See <23.4.12 Troubleshooting after OP076 Device
battery low level Alarm >.
OP079 Cycle Start Off on the Set SW screen is effective. Disable the Cycle Start Off function.
OP080 Single Block Off on the Set SW screen is effective. Disable the Single Block Off function.

23-8
 L32

Alarm No. Message and symptom Action

OP083 B axis is being set up. The handle cannot be operated. Turn the power off and then on again if the warning
does not go off.
OP087 Remote Access is permitted on the Set SW screen. Remote Access is enabled. Check the switch setting.
OP088 It fails in the update of Eco/ope. info. file. See <23.5.6 If "It fails in the update of OP088 Eco/ope.
info. file." alarm occurred >
OP089 Execute "ST POS" on the PREPARATION mode. When exiting from Idling Stop status, perform ST POS
(start position operation) on the Preparation screen
before restarting machine operation.
OP090 A axis zero point return Return the A3 axis to the zero point.
OP091 A4 axis zero point return Return the A4 axis to the zero point.
OP093 Execute "ST_POS" on the PREP_mode after power on. After power on, execute Start Position operation on
Preparation screen before running the machine.
OP094 Close the door. Close the door before starting operation.
OP095 Option effective time is less than. Confirm the enable/disable status and remaining
effective period of option.
OP097 Machine relocation detected. Contact service. Machine Contact your Service Department.
will stop in xx hours.
OP098 Abnormal machine detection Contact service. Machine Contact your Service Department.
will stop in xx hours.
OP100 Thermal displacement correction function is not See <23.4.14 Recovery from thermal displacement
working normally. The machine will stop after this correction device alarm>.
cycle.
OP101 The overheat in the control panel. It is high The temperature in the control unit is abnormally high.
temperature. Check the cause of the abnormal temperature rise.
OP102 There is not enough oil air lubrication. The machine When the cycle stops, replenish lubrication oil when it
will stop after this cycle. is safe to do so.

OP200 The interference check data is illegal. Reselect tool The interference check data is illegal.
holder. Reset "Bar Stock O.D.", "Back Spindle Chuck POS",
"Front Mach Holder Name", "Front Drill Holder
Name", and "Back Spindle" in the machining data.
OP201 Guide bush and work on back chuck are interfered. Continuing the operation may cause mechanical
interference.
Review the program or issue the M code to disable the
interference check (M88).
OP202 Guide bush and work basket on back spindle are 〃
interfered.
OP203 The guide bushing device and the workpiece separator 〃
interfere with each other.
OP204 The guide bushing device and the long workpiece 〃
device interfere with each other.
OP205 Back drill unit and work on back chuck are interfered. 〃
OP206 Back drill unit and back sp. work basket are interfered. 〃

23-9
L32

Alarm No. Message and symptom Action

OP207 Back drill unit and back spindle cap are interfered. 〃
OP208 Back drill unit and back spindle cap cover are 〃
interfered.
OP209 Back drill unit and back spindle are interfered. 〃
OP212 Back drill sleeve and work on back chuck are 〃
interfered.
OP213 Back drill sleeve and back sp. work basket are 〃
interfered.
OP214 Back drill sleeve and back spindle cap are interfered. 〃
OP215 Back drill sleeve and back sp. cap cover are interfered. 〃
OP216 Back drill sleeve and back spindle are interfered. 〃
OP218 Back drill sleeve and front drill sleeve are interfered. 〃
OP234 Front drill holder and back sp. work basket are 〃
interfered.
OP235 Front drill holder and work on back chuck are 〃
interfered.
OP236 Front drill holder and back spindle cap are interfered. 〃
OP237 Front drill holder and back Sp. cap cover are interfered. 〃
OP239 The front drill holder and the workpiece separator 〃
interfere with each other.
OP240 The front drill holder and the long workpiece device 〃
interfere with each other.
OP249 The workpiece separator and the long workpiece 〃
device interfere with each other.
OP266 The work chute and the opposite tool post interfere 〃
with each other.
OP267 Work chute and work on back spindle chuck are 〃
interfered.
OP268 Work chute and back spindle work basket are 〃
interfered.
OP269 Work chute and back spindle cap are interfered. 〃
OP270 The work chute and the front drill sleeve interfere with 〃
each other.
OP271 The work chute and the long workpiece device 〃
interfere with each other.
OP272 The work chute and the workpiece separator interfere 〃
with each other.
OP273 Front drill holder and front drill sleeve are interfered. 〃
OP275 Front holder and B.SP. slide cover are interfered. 〃
OP292 The guide bushing and gang tool post interfere with 〃
each other.
OP293 The back spindle unit and workpiece unloader interfere 〃
with each other.
OP294 The main spindle and the front drill holder may 〃
interfere with each other.
OP300 Press the enable switch. Press the Enable switch halfway down and perform the
operation.
OP301 T.D.C. data alarm The machine will stop after this See <23.4.14 Recovery from thermal displacement
cycle. correction device alarm>.

23-10
 L32

Alarm No. Message and symptom Action

OP302 Z1 axis stroke canceled. Setting switch No. 47 is ON. Z1 axis stroke is canceled.
Confirm it.
OP308 Parts must be saved. Exit the regular maintenance Check parts in the Regular Maintenance screen and
screen. perform maintenance.
OP309 Y1 axis stroke is being canceled. Setting switch No. 48 Y1 axis stroke is canceled.
is ON. If the stroke limit is canceled, the holder and guide
bushing may interfere with each other depending on
the angle the holder is mounted. Take due care when
using the machine.
OP310 The door on the rear panel is open. The door on the rear panel is open.
Close the door on the rear panel before starting
operation.
OP311 Check the holder and the machining data. Reset to Interference may occur when the holder and machining
release. data does not agree.
Check the machining data, then perform a reset to
release.
OP312 Axis movement may cause interference. 〃
OP313 Bar loader empty The bar loader runs out of material when a loader
device is installed.
OP314 Bar loader is disconnected. Setting switch No. 53 is The bar loader is disabled.
ON.
OP315 The bar loader does not respond. The bar loader does not respond, when a loader device
is installed.
OP317 Breaker of high pressure coolant device is off. Turn on the breaker of the high-pressure coolant
device.
OP319 High pressure coolant device coolant oil empty. Replenish the high-pressure coolant device with
coolant.
OP320 Supply line trouble arise. Coolant is not being properly supplied to the
high-pressure coolant device.

23-11
L32

23.3.2.2 List of messages displayed with alarm indicator on

Alarm No. Message and symptom Action
EX001 200VAC over current alarm. Circuit protector is See <23.4.7 Recovery from overcurrent alarm>.
activated.
EX003 Main spindle motor alarm. The drive unit is in alarm See <23.4.9 Troubleshooting after main spindle, back
status. spindle, and rotary tool alarms>.
EX004 Back spindle motor alarm. The drive unit is in alarm See <23.4.9 Troubleshooting after main spindle, back
status. spindle, and rotary tool alarms>.
EX005 Gang Rotary tool Motor Alarm. The drive unit is in See <23.4.9 Troubleshooting after main spindle, back
alarm status. spindle, and rotary tool alarms>.
EX008 Facing rotary tool motor alarm. The drive unit is in See <23.4.9 Troubleshooting after main spindle, back
alarm status. spindle, and rotary tool alarms>.
EX009 Back Rotary tool Motor Alarm. The drive unit is in See <23.4.9 Troubleshooting after main spindle, back
alarm status. spindle, and rotary tool alarms>.
EX052 Emergency button alarm. Emergency button is pressed. Turn the Emergency Stop button clockwise to cancel
emergency stop.
EX055 Coolant or medium-press. pump overload. Thermal Remove the major cause(s) and reset the thermal relay.
activated. This alarm can also be caused by a problem affecting
the high-pressure coolant device pump.
EX057 High pressure coolant device breaker alarm. The breaker of the high-pressure coolant device has
turned off. Turn off the power to the machine and
eliminate the main cause, then turn the power to the
machine and high-pressure coolant device back on.
EX058 High pressure coolant device thermal alarm. Either the high-pressure coolant pump or supply pump
is overloaded. Turn off the power to the machine and
high-pressure coolant device and eliminate the main
cause, then reset the thermal relay.
EX100 Bar loader alarm Bar loader is in alarm status.
Check the external bar loader.
EX101 Bar loader alarm. Bar loader device is in alarm status. See <23.4.11 Recovery from external device alarms>.
EX102 External alarm 1. Option device is in alarm status. Check the external device.
EX103 External alarm 3. Option device is in alarm status. Check the external device.
EX104 External alarm 4. Option device is in alarm status. Check the external device.
EX105 Coolant discharge alarm. Discharge amount is See <23.4.13.2 Troubleshooting after "EX105 Coolant
decreased. Discharge Alarm" >.
EX106 Knock-Out Overload. Knockout error sensor ON by See <23.4.13 Recovery from other alarms >
overload.
EX107 Tool bit breakage alarm. Cut off tool is broken. See <23.4.13 Recovery from other alarms >
EX108 Cycle time alarm. Machine stops long time. See <23.4.13 Recovery from other alarms >
EX109 Main spindle speed fluctuation alarm. Spindle speed See <23.4.10 Troubleshooting after spindle related
differs from command value. alarms >.
EX110 Back spindle speed fluctuation alarm. Spindle speed See <23.4.10 Troubleshooting after spindle related
differs from command value. alarms >.
EX113 Knock-out is not in a retract position. Retract the knock-out.
If the operation is not recovered, check the knock-out
retraction end sensor.
EX114 It cannot be ordered "M10" or "M11". M10 or M11 cannot be specified if the machine is
equipped with a back basket.
Revise the program.
EX115 BackSpindle rpm must be 100 or less due to back If the machine is equipped with a back basket, the back
basket. spindle speed must not be faster than 100 rpm.
Check the program.
EX118 Z1 is not in correct position. Move the Z1 axis manually to the area where the
machine can start.
If equipped with a loader device, move it as far along
the Z1 axis as it will go.
EX122 T.D.C. device alarm See <23.4.14 Recovery from thermal displacement
correction device alarm>.
EX131 T.D.C. data alarm See <23.4.14 Recovery from thermal displacement
correction device alarm>.
EX132 T.D.C. sensor alarm. (**ch) See <23.4.14 Recovery from thermal displacement
correction device alarm>.

23-12
 L32

Alarm No. Message and symptom Action

EX133 The bar loader is not ready. Bar loader power is not See <23.4.11 Recovery from external device alarms>.
turned on.
EX136 The bar loader is not ready. Close channel/stabilizer. Close stabilization in the bar loader operation screen.
EX137 The bar loader is not ready. Open the clamp. Use the bar loader operation screen to move the
material clamp to the open position.
EX138 The bar loader is not ready. Move the rail to the back. Use the bar loader operation screen to move the push
arrow to the lowered position.
EX139 The bar loader is not ready. Raise the bar rest. Use the bar rest operation screen to move the bar rest to
the raised position.
EX140 Back spindle error. The back spindle motor fails.
Check the switch setting.
EX144 Knock-out sensor is abnormal. See <23.4.2.2 Resetting "EX144 Knock-out Sensor
Illegal" Alarm>
EX146 Main Spindle chuck unjust operation. See <23.4.3 Recovery from spindle chuck illegal
state>.
EX147 Back Spindle chuck unjust operation. See <23.4.4 Recovery from back spindle chuck illegal
state>.
EX148 Retract the knock-out. Retract the knock-out device on Mechanical
Adjustment screen, then start operation.
EX149 Please advance knock-out. Advance the knock-out device on Mechanical
Adjustment screen, then start operation.
EX156 Middle pressure coolant valve is not open. Open valve before turning on the pump.
This alarm can also be caused by a problem affecting
the high-pressure coolant device.
EX157 Middle pressure coolant pump is turning on. Close valve before turning off the pump.
This alarm can also be caused by a problem affecting
the high-pressure coolant device.
EX158 The Main Spindle overheated. If you notice any unusual odor or abnormal
overheating from the main spindle, turn off the main
power, and contact your Service Department
immediately.
EX159 The Back Spindle overheated. If you notice any unusual odor or abnormal
overheating from the back spindle, turn off the main
power, and contact your Service Department
immediately.
EX165 Phase adj. disabled. Turn main/back Sp. more than 1 Run both spindle and back spindle by at least one
rev. rotation, and specify G899 again.
EX200 Work counter full. Work counter is full. Press the Reset key.
EX201 Bar stock empty. No bar stock. See <23.4.11 Recovery from external device alarms>.
EX202 Lubrication oil empty alarm. Lubrication oil is empty See <23.4.13 Recovery from other alarms >
Refill.
EX203 Coolant oil alarm. Coolant oil is empty. Auto operation See <23.4.13 Recovery from other alarms >
stops end of cycle. Refill.
EX204 Oil air lubrication alarm. There is not enough See <23.4.13 Recovery from other alarms >
lubrication oil. Refill.
EX205 External alarm 2. Option device is in alarm status. Check the optional device.
EX208 Chip conveyor overload. Chip is jammed in the See <23.4.11 Recovery from external device alarms>.
conveyor.
EX210 The bar loader failed to operate normally. The bar loader failed to operate normally.
Check for mechanical interference.
EX211 Tool life alarm. Specified tool's tool life is over. Press the Reset key and replace the worn tool.
EX212 Door open alarm of the bar loader. Close the door. Close the bar loader door. (special bar loader
mechanism)
EX215 Option effective time is over. Confirm the enable/disable status and remaining
effective period of option.
EX225 Automatic power-OFF failure. Automatic power-off function is disabled due to failure
of circuit. Check if circuit breaker (NFB1) and relay
(Ry201) work normally, or check if cables are properly
connected.

23-13
L32

Alarm No. Message and symptom Action

EX304 Illegal door lock signal. Door lock is faulty. Locked doors became unlocked during operation.
Turn the machine main circuit breaker off and
eliminate the cause(s) of the problem.
As soon as the door was locked, the door lock signal
went off.
EX311 Contactor & Relay breakdown. Fused contact was detected on contactor (MC1, MC2,
MC3, MC4, MC5, MCCL) or relay (RY10, RY12).
Replace the contactor or relay with new one.
EX312 Door lock relay breakdown. Fused contact was detected on relay RY11 or on-board
RY304. Replace the relay with new one.
EX313 Feedrate is over safety speed. Turn off the NC power or main breaker.
EX314 Sp.Rotation is over safety speed. Turn off the NC power or main breaker.
EX401 Detection of the machine moving. Contact your Service Department.
EX402 Device function alarm Contact your Service Department.
EX403 Internal data alarm. Contact your Service Department.
EX404 M-Code alarm. The specified M code is illegal.
Check the program.
EX407 Option is not set. Check the program.
EX410 Last part function not executed. Check workpiece. Last program has not been ejected.
Check the workpiece.
Also check the program.
EX411 Retract the unloader. After the unloader is retracted, close the basket.
EX412 Loader and arm are invalid. Loader or arm does not operate normally when a loader
device is installed.
Refer to <23.4.15 Recovery from loader device
alarms>.
EX413 The loader hand is invalid. The loader hand does not operate normally when a
loader device is installed.
Refer to <23.4.15 Recovery from loader device
alarms>.
EX414 Shutter is illegal The loader hand does not operate normally when a
loader device is installed.
Refer to <23.4.15 Recovery from loader device
alarms>.
EX415 Workpiece reception/abnormal loading When a loader was installed, the reception of
workpieces from an external loader or workpiece
loading on a spindle could not be properly
implemented.
Check if the loader hand is holding a workpiece or if it
is interfering with the spindle or external loader.
EX416 Bar loader preparation completed. The external loader preparation has not been
completed.
Check the external bar loader.
EX417 High pressure coolant device M-Code alarm. There may be the following problems. Review the
program.
• M452/M453 is specified while the breaker of the
high-pressure coolant device is turned off.
• M458/M459 is specified other than in the MDI
mode.
• M458 is specified while there is sufficient coolant in
the high-pressure coolant device.
• M458 is specified while there is insufficient coolant
at the machine.
EX418 High pressure coolant device coolant oil alarm. Replenish the high-pressure coolant device with
coolant.
EX419 Supply line alarm 1. There is an abnormality in the coolant supply line for
the high-pressure coolant device. Check for failure and
blockage in the supply line.
EX420 Supply line alarm 2. There is an abnormality in the coolant supply line for
the high-pressure coolant device. Check for failure and
blockage in the supply line.

23-14
 L32

Alarm No. Message and symptom Action

EX501 Spindle chuck closed. Open spindle chuck. Open the spindle chuck and perform start-position
operation.
EX502 Cut-off tool number on the Machining Data is not set. Specify the "Cut-Off Tool" in the machining data.
EX506 The tool number is outside the range. The selected tool number is outside the range. Check
the number of the selected tool.
EX516 Interference may occur between the end-face drilling Use the handle screen to move the gang tool post (X1
holder and workpiece. and Y1 axes) to a safe position.
EX517 Stopper parts number on the Machining Data is not set. Specify the stopper tool number in the machining data.
EX520 Cancel tool nose R compensation. (G40) Specify G40 before T code to cancel tool nose radius
compensation.
EX521 Cancel constant surface speed control function. (G97) Specify G97 to cancel constant surface speed control
before specifying the T code.
EX522 You cannot specify this T code. This T code does not exist.
Check the program.
EX524 You cannot specify a value less than "0" for "H When specifying the "H" argument at the selection of a
argument". tool on gang tool post, specify a value larger than "0".
EX525 A value exceeding "0" cannot be specified for For the "W" argument, specify a negative value.
"argument W".
EX526 Illegal argument is specified. An argument that is not permitted for a T code or
G300-level code was specified.
Check the program.
EX531 Use same number for X in T1X00 and T5X00. In the front/back simultaneous machining using the
T1X00 and T5X00, specify the same number for "X."
Check the program.
EX535 "Argument K2" cannot be specified. The tool number is invalid.
Check the program.
EX537 K2 & E argument cannot be specified simultaneously Specify either K2 or an E argument.
Check the program.
EX539 "R1 argument" cannot be specified. The R1 argument is unavailable for the specified T
code.
Check the program.
EX551 "Argument A" in the G231 block is illegal. The A argument is not specified in G231.
EX555 Designation of the machining pattern is not allowed. Cancel the current machining pattern and specify
another pattern.
EX556 "Argument X" in the G231 block is illegal. The "X" argument value is invalid.
Check the program.
EX559 Argument exceeds the upper bound value. The specified value is larger than the upper limit of this
argument.
Check the program.
EX562 Back spindle setting in machining data is illegal. On the Machining Data screen, "Basket" is not set for
"Back Spindle".
EX567 The argument for M211 or M212 was not specified. Check the program.
EX568 More than two M211 or M212 arguments are specified. Check the program.
EX569 The M211 or M212 arguments are invalid. Check the program.
EX574 You cannot specify M32 or M33. You can only specify M32 and M33 in G611 mode $1
or in G632 and G637 mode $2. Check the program.
EX577 You cannot specify "M334". Check the program.
EX578 "Argument A" for M334 has not been specified. "Argument A" is not specified in M334. Check the
program.
EX579 You cannot specify "M335". Workpiece unloader option has not been set up.
EX580 C axis option for the main spindle is not installed. To specify the C axis indexing command for main
spindle (M18) purchase the C axis option.
EX581 C axis option for the back spindle is not installed. To specify the C axis indexing command for back
spindle (M48) purchase the C axis option.
EX582 Indexing option for the back spindle is not installed. To specify the C axis indexing command (M78)
purchase the back spindle indexing option.
EX583 Indexing angle value must be within "0" to "360". For "M28", "M78", "M18", and "M48", specify
indexing angels equal to and greater than "0" and less
than "360".
EX584 Illegal indexing command specified. Indexing unit angle: Specify a multiple of (M28: 1°,
M78: 1°) as the spindle indexing angle.

23-15
L32

Alarm No. Message and symptom Action

EX586 The hand or basket are not at the positioning point. The workpiece unloader is not at the positioning point.
During preparations or other operations, use [Unload]
move devices to the positioning point.
EX590 Back spindle chuck closed. Open the back chuck before specifying advancing the
knock-out bar.
EX591 Back spindle is working. Stop the operation of the back spindle before
specifying advancing the knock-out bar.
EX592 Knock-out can not be advanced to correct position. See <23.4.10 Troubleshooting after spindle related
alarms >.
EX598 Argument Z cannot be specified. The Z argument cannot be specified for M10.
Check the program.
EX602 There is an error in R1 argument command. There is an error in a T code with R1 argument
specified in G660 mode.
Check the program.
EX603 Specify the A or B argument in G660 mode. Check the program.
EX604 This M code cannot be used by the superimposed. Cancel the superimposition mode, then specify this M
code.
Check the program.
EX605 Specify the same value simultaneously for X and Y Check the program.
arguments.
EX606 You cannot specify argument X. Check the program.
EX607 Specify the Z argument. Check the program.
EX609 You cannot make specifications for this system ($). Check the program.
EX620 Remnant bar did not retract. Return the remaining material.
EX621 Remnant bar was not removed. Pull out the remaining material.
EX622 Bar stock empty. Supply the bar.
EX623 Material is not in correct position. Check the material position and set the material
properly.
EX624 Abnormal bar feeder sensor. Clean the sensor. Clean the sensor element.
EX625 Abnormal bar feeder sensor. Check the bar feeder Check the sensor for staining.
sensor.
EX701 Tool has not been selected. Select tool. Select a tool with the cursor on the Preparation screen
before executing the preparation for operation.
EX702 Core cannot be selected for $2.
EX703 DIA cannot be selected for $2.
EX704 Cut-off cannot be selected for $2. Select the T code correctly on the Preparation screen to
perform "Cut-off" operation.
EX706 You cannot specify "T3000". A T code of "T3000" can be specified only in the
program of $2.
Check the program.
EX710 Opposite tool post could cause interference. Specify command M140 after T20's.
EX712 You cannot specify this T code (~"T2000"). This T code does not exist.
Check the program.
EX714 You cannot specify a T code less than "T2100" for $2. A T code that is less than "T2100" can be specified
only in the program of $1.
Check the program.
EX715 You cannot specify this T code (~"T2900"). This T code does not exist.
Check the program.
EX724 The tool nose is over the maximum length. Set the tool again after confirming the tool protruding
length, or use the "Q1" argument when specifying a T
code.
EX725 Z1-Z2 axes are superimposed. Cancel superimpose Specify G810 to cancel the Z1-Z2 superimposition,
function. and then specify T20's command.
EX729 Front mach holder on main chuck work may cause Move the Y1 axis to a safety position, and then operate
interference. the X1 axis.
EX734 You cannot specify argument E for $2. Specify without using argument E.
EX735 Specify the X argument. Argument X has not been specified for G900.
Check the program.
EX736 Back Toolset DIA is required. Specify the "Back Toolset DIA" in the Preparation
screen.

23-16
 L32

Alarm No. Message and symptom Action

EX737 S2 Cover & T3x Cross Holder may cause interference. Continuing the operation may cause mechanical
interference.
Specify the M1 argument.
Check the program.
EX738 You cannot specify this code. Check the program.
EX750 B axis device has not been mounted. Specify a B axis option.
EX751 You cannot make specifications in B axis mode Check the program.
(G900).
EX752 You cannot make specifications in modes other than B Check the program.
axis mode (G900).
EX753 Specify using machining pattern G600, G611 or G630. Check the program.
EX754 Specify when selecting a B axis tool. Check the program.
EX755 Invalid tool name used in preparations. During preparations, select [Man. Set] to change [Tool
Name].
EX757 Specify argument B. Check the program.
EX758 The plane selection is invalid. Check the program.
EX759 Make specification for plane G18. Check the program.
EX764 B axis angle is incorrect. Check the program.
EX765 You cannot specify argument Y. Check the program.

23.3.2.3 NC alarm messages

Alarm No. Message Description Action
S01 SERVO ALARM:PR Servo system error. See the Instruction manual of
Error No. nnnn Use the error number to check details. the NC manufacturer.
S02 INT PARAM ERR Error in parameters sent to the servo amplifier See the Instruction manual of
Error No. nnnn from the NC. the NC manufacturer.
S03 SERVO ALARM: NR. Servo system error. See the Instruction manual of
Error No. nnnn Use the error number to check details. the NC manufacturer.
S04 SERVO ALARM: AR Servo system error. See the Instruction manual of
Error No. nnnn Use the error number to check details. the NC manufacturer.
S51 PARAMETER ERROR Illegal value entered for the servo parameters. See the Instruction manual of
Warning No. nn the NC manufacturer.
S52 SERVO WARNING Servo system error. See the Instruction manual of
Error No. nnnn Use the error number to check details. the NC manufacturer.
Battery voltage drop 009F
The battery voltage, which is supplied to the
absolute position detector of servo motor, has
dropped.
Y02 SYSTEM ALARM Error in data transmission between the NC and the See the Instruction manual of
Error No. nnnn servo amplifier. Use the error number to check for the NC manufacturer.
details.
Y03 AMP. UNEQUIPPED Servo amplifier not equipped properly. See the Instruction manual of
the NC manufacturer.
Y05 INT PARAM ERR Error in parameters used to turn the NC power on. See the Instruction manual of
Error No. nnnn Use the error number to check for details. the NC manufacturer.
Y06 mcp_no ERROR When the NC power is turned on, there are See the Instruction manual of
Error No. nnnn discrepancies between the NC servo interface the NC manufacturer.
section (MCP) and the axis parameters. Use the
error number to check for details.
Y07 AMPLIFIER POWER OFF Servo system error. See the Instruction manual of
Error No. nnnn Use the error number to check details. the NC manufacturer.
Y51 PARAMETER ERROR Parameter error occurred while some control axes See the Instruction manual of
Error No. nnnn were moving. the NC manufacturer.
Use the error number to check details.
Z  NC system alarm. Use the error number to check See the Instruction manual of
for details. the NC manufacturer.
Z52 Battery fault xxxxx The voltage of the battery which is mounted on See the Instruction manual of
the NC control unit has dropped. the NC manufacturer.

23-17
L32

23.3.3 Stop codes

Stop codes represent the states in which the NC unit has been stopped in a certain condition.
Alarm No. Message Description Action
T01 CAN'T CYCLE ST NC can not start automatic operation in the See the Instruction manual of the
Error No. nnnn stop status. NC manufacturer.
Use the error number to find more
information.
T02 FEED HOLD A certain condition caused the automatically See the Instruction manual of the
Error No. nnnn operating NC unit to halt automatic operation. NC manufacturer.
Use the error number to find more
information.
T03 BLOCK STOP During automatic operation, the NC stopped See the Instruction manual of the
Error No. nnnn program execution at the end of 1 block. Use NC manufacturer.
the error number to find more information.

23-18
 L32

23.3.4 File system error lists

The following explains details of file system errors that occur during screen operation.
If a file system error occurs, the error message is displayed in the format of "File system error  (◇)".

: Indicates the operation.

(If the corresponding code is not displayed, the error code indicates that the error occurred during the operation of a file
other than the files below.)
Display Contents of operation
1 Directory operation
2 Machining program operation
3 Tool name file operation
4 Right-hand/left-hand information file operation
5 Tool pattern file operation
6 Interference check file operation
8 Tool set 2 file operation

: Indicates the processing executed at the occurrence of the error.

Display Contents of processing
1 Failed to open the file or directory.
2 Failed to read the file or directory.
3 Failed to write the data to the file.
4 Failed to close the file or directory.
5 Failed to delete the file.
6 Failed to copy the file.
7 Failed to get the size information of the file.
8 File size is larger than the available area size
9 Illegal holder number, etc.

◇: Indicates the detail cause of the error, or the name of the file that caused the error.
Display Details of cause
MDI Error occurred in MDI program operation.
Program No. Error occurred in machining program operation.
(Displays the program number.)
File name Name of the file that caused the error.
Error code Code of the error occurred as the result of operation.

23-19
L32

Display examples of file system error

Example 1) File system error 26 (1)
Failed in copying the machining program 1.prg file.
Example 2) File system error 1 (MDI)
Failed in opening the MDI program.

Action
(1) Error caused by machining program file operation
If the error occurs repeatedly when the same operation is attempted, the probable cause is "the file size is too large"
or "the file is illegal".
If the error occurred with the externally input program, check the program at the input source.
If the error occurred with the program created with PC, etc., the program must be created again.
If the problem cannot be cleared even after the corrective action explained above has been taken, it is necessary to
recover the SRAM. Before recovering the SRAM, back up the machining programs stored in the machine to the
external memory device (memory card, etc.) and record the offset data and tool setting data.
(2) Error caused by operation of a file other than the machining program file
The probable cause is "necessary file does not exist" or "SRAM area is destroyed". Please contact your Service
Department.

23-20
 L32

23.4 Post-Alarm Actions

This section describes the proper actions required to identify and correct the machine problem. The solutions provided
are those to some of the most common problems. Contact your Service Department if the problem cannot be located or
is beyond the scope of this manual.
23.4.1 Recovery from interference check alarm
23.4.1.1 Interference check
This machine checks for interference among the components.

The interference check function recognizes rough shape of the machine according to the machining data and checks for
interference among components by the data.

[Note]
Be sure to set the machining data correctly.

The NC unit does not have exact dimensional or geometrical data on the components of the machine when
checking for interference between them.
Accordingly, components may interfere with each other while the interference check alarm has not been
generated, or the interference check alarm may be generated while they seem to have no chance of
interference.
You should therefore perform visual check for interference in combination with the interference check
function of the machine.

23-21
L32

23.4.1.2 Troubleshooting after "M03 COLLISION ALARM"

[Procedure]
1. Press the Reset key .
The error indication disappears.

23.4.1.3 Troubleshooting after "M04 AREA ALARM"

[Procedure]
1. Press the Manual key .
The Manual key lamp goes on and the Handle Feed screen appears.
2. Press the Menu Up/Down selection key .
The submenus (upper level) are enabled. (Skip this step when the submenu has already been selected.)
3. Press the menu key [INT.IVLD].
The interference check is disabled.
4. Use the arrow keys to select the axis to be free from interference, then turn the handle to escape the
interfering object.
The alarm indicator goes off.
5. Press the menu key [INT.IVLD].
The interference check is enabled.

[Note]
• The interference check function can be disabled for only specific components by specifying M88 (interference
check disable command) and M89 (interference check enable command) in the program.
• The interference check alarm is generated by an error either in the program or in operation.
Try to create and use the program without generating the interference check alarm.

23-22
 L32

23.4.2 Resetting Knock-Out Alarm

23.4.2.1 Troubleshooting after the "EX106 Knock-Out Overload" alarm occurred (When the
machine is equipped with the U51B air-driven back knock-out device)
[Procedure]
1. Check if the workpiece is remained in back spindle chuck.
When remained:
• Remove the workpiece.
 Take procedures described in <7.5.3 Resetting knock-out overload alarm>.
When not remained:
 Go to Step 4.
2. Check if chips are remained in back spindle chuck or inside the machine.
When remained:
• Remove chips.
 Take procedures described in <7.5.3 Resetting knock-out overload alarm>.
When not remained:
 Go to Step 4.
3. Check if the knock-out rod is bent.
When bent
• Remove the cause that have made the rod bent. Then, replace the knock-out rod.
 Take procedures described in <7.5.3 Resetting knock-out overload alarm>.
When not bent:
 Go to Step 4.
4. Make sure that the knock-out rod is set in specified position, then make sure of X207 on I/F Diagnosis screen.

When X207 is zero:

• The sensor is failed.
• The sensor cable is disconnected.
• Incorrect sensor mounting position
The possible cause is any of the above conditions.

23-23
L32

23.4.2.2 Resetting "EX144 Knock-out Sensor Illegal" Alarm

[Procedure]
1. Check back spindle parts for abnormalities.
• Remove any chips or workpieces that remain in the back spindle chuck or inside the machine.
See <7.4.1 Mounting and adjusting chuck>.
• Make sure that the knock-out pipe and the knock-out jig are not damaged.
See <7.5.1 Mounting and replacing knock-out jig>.

If the knock-out pipe is seriously damaged (e.g., bent or deformed), replace the knock-out pipe with new
one. With the bent knock-out pipe will fail the knock-out operation, and causes a damage to the machine.

• Make sure that the knock-out jig is protruding from the front-end of the cap nut by about 3 mm.
See <7.5.2 Adjusting protrusion amount of knock-out jig>.
•
2. Move the knock-out device to the retract position.
3. Press the Reset key to cancel the "Knock-out Sensor Illegal" Alarm.

4. Advance and retract the knock-out device two or three times to make sure that the alarm does not occur.
The machine operates (no alarm occurs).
 Return was completed.
The machine operates, but an alarm occurs.
 Go to Step 5.
If not:
 Go to Step 6.
5. Check if knock-out operation completes within the specified time (standard time: 7.5 seconds).
If the cycle time exceeds the set time:
• Set the speed controller to an operation time of 7.5 seconds.
→See <15.5 Knock-out Advance/Retract (M10, M11)>.
If operation does not become faster,
• Pneumatic device error
• The solenoid valve is faulty.
• The air tube is faulty.
The above are probable causes of the alarm.
• If the set time is not set to 7.5 seconds or more when the forward operation time is 7.5 seconds or more, the
#18064 value is increased.
[Setting time]
PLC constant #18064 75

• If the set time is not set to 7.5 seconds or less when the backward operation time is 7.5 seconds or less, the
#18065 value is increased.
[Setting time]
PLC constant #18065 75

When the cycle time does not exceed the set time:
• The cylinder sensor failed.
• The cylinder sensor is poorly adjusted.
• The cylinder sensor cable is disconnected.
The above are probable causes of the alarm.

23-24
 L32

6. Check the Status Screen 4 while running the following program in MDI mode.

Make sure of Y0A on the Status screen while executing M10 (knock-out advance) command.
Make sure of Y0B on the Status screen while executing M11 (knock-out retract) command.

When Y0A and Y0B remains as 0:

• The NC unit may be faulty.
When Y0A and Y0B switches between 1 and 0:
• Pneumatic device error
• The solenoid valve is faulty.
• Breakage of solenoid valve cable
The above are probable causes of the alarm.

23-25
L32

23.4.3 Recovery from spindle chuck illegal state

[Alarm message]
EX146 Main Spindle chuck unjust operation
[Procedure]
1. Check if the spindle chuck operates.
If so:
• The spindle chuck open/close sensor is not adjusted correctly.
• The spindle chuck open/close sensor is faulty.
• The sensor cable is disconnected.
The possible cause is any of the above conditions.
If not:
 Go to Step 2.
2. Check Y23 and Y24 on the I/F DIAGNOSIS screen while manually operating the spindle chuck.

If Y23 and Y24 remain at "0":

• The NC input unit will be faulty.
If Y23 and Y24 change between "1" and "0":
• The pneumatic device is faulty.
• The solenoid valve is faulty.
The possible cause is any of the above conditions.

23-26
 L32

23.4.4 Recovery from back spindle chuck illegal state

[Alarm message]
EX147 Back Spindle chuck unjust operation
[Procedure]
1. Check if the back spindle chuck operates.
If so:
• The back spindle chuck open/close sensor is not adjusted correctly
• The spindle chuck open/close sensor is faulty.
• The sensor cable is disconnected.
The possible cause is any of the above conditions.
If not:
 Go to Step 2.
2. Check Y25 and Y26 on the I/F DIAGNOSIS screen while manually operating the back spindle chuck.

If Y25 and Y26 remain at "0":

• The NC input unit will be faulty.
If Y25 and Y26 change between "1" and "0":
• The pneumatic device is faulty.
• The solenoid valve is faulty.
The possible cause is any of the above conditions.

23-27
L32

23.4.5 Recovery from emergency stop button alarm

23.4.5.1 Resetting "EX052 Emergency stop button alarm."
[Procedure]
1. Check if the emergency stop button is pressed.
The emergency stop button is pressed:
• After confirming the safety, reset the emergency stop button by turning it clockwise.
Turn off the NC power and turn it on again.
The emergency stop button is not pressed:
 Go to Step 2.
2. Check the LEDs of the safety relay (RY10)
Only one LED is lit:
• Any of the circuit protectors (CP1, CP2, CP3, CP4, CP6) or the safety relay unit (RY10) is OFF or faulty.
• The thermal relay (OLS1, OLS4 or OLSCL) is tripped or faulty.
• Any of the following magnetic switches is melted or faulty:
MC1, MC2, MC3, MC4, MC5, MCCL, RY12, RY302, RY303, RY305
• The safety relay RY10 is melted or faulty.
The possible cause is any of the above conditions.

23.4.5.2 Turning on/off the power

To turn on the power
[Procedure]
1. Turn on the main circuit breaker.
2. Press the Power ON button on the operation panel.
(Power is supplied to the NC)

To turn off the power

[Procedure]
1. Press the Power OFF button on the operation panel.
The screen is blank.
2. Turn off the machine light.
3. Turn off the machine circuit breaker.

Do not touch the keys on the operation panel when tuning on/off the power.
Failure to observe this instruction can cause machine failure.

23-28
 L32

23.4.5.3 Setting value of the safety relay

Power supply to the servo axes and the spindles is shut off when the Emergency Stop button is pressed.
The safety relay has the timer that sets the delay time to shut off the power supply after the servo axes and the spindles
are stopped completely.

Symbol Setting value Use

RY10 6.5 Spindles and NC emergency stop

[Note]
Set the value indicated above to secure the time so that the servo axes and the spindles can stop completely before the
power supply is shut off.

23-29
L32

23.4.6 Recovery from pump overload alarm

23.4.6.1 Troubleshooting after "EX055 Coolant or medium-press. pump overload. Thermal
activated."

Be sure to turn off the main breaker of the machine before starting the work. Failure to do so will result in
death or serious personal injury from electric shock.

[Procedure]
1. Turn off the NC and disengage the main breaker.
2. Check the thermal relay OLS1, OLS4 and OLSCL (option).
When it has tripped:
• The coolant pump motor, spindle cooling device motor, or medium-/high-pressure coolant pump (option) is
overloaded. Check cooling oil amount and status. Check if the pump is overloaded due to being clogged with
chips that cause an overload.
• The thermal relay setting is inappropriate.
The above are probable causes of the alarm. Remove the cause and go to Step 3.
When it has not tripped:
 Go to Step 4.
3. Disengage the main breaker, reset the thermal relay, and engage the main breaker.
The alarm lamp goes off.
4. Check the following failures.
• Signal cable breakage
• Imperfect connector plugging-in
• NC unit failure
• Circuit protector failure

[Note]
Whether the thermal relay has tripped or not can be judged from the indication for trip status (green). When the thermal
relay trips, the indication disappears. If the thermal relay has tripped, pressing the reset bar restores the machine from the
trip condition.
To set the current capacity, use the adjustment volume.
Symbol Capacity Use
OLS1 2.3A Coolant pump
OLS4 0.56A Spindle cooling device
OLSCL 3.6A Intermediate pressure coolant pump
OLSHP 18.5A High-pressure coolant pump

23-30
 L32

23.4.7 Recovery from overcurrent alarm

23.4.7.1 Troubleshooting after "EX001 200VAC over current alarm. Circuit protector is
activated."

Be sure to turn off the main breaker of the machine before starting the work.
Failure to do so will result in electric shock or serious personal injury.

[Procedure]
1. Turn off the NC and disengage the main breaker.
2. When circuit protectors (CP1, CP2, CP3, CP4, and CP5) detect overcurrent, they are disengaged. Open the doors
of the control console and check the state of these protectors.
When CP5 detects an over current, the NC power supply does not go on and no alarm is output. Check whether
there is a short-circuit in the 200 V circuit.
The table below shows symbols, ratings, protection voltages, line numbers, and controlled devices for respective
circuit protectors.
Symbol Capacity Protection voltage Line number Controlled devices
CP1 7A 200 VAC, 3-phase R8, S8, T8 Coolant pump, spindle cooling device,
intermediate pressure coolant pump
(optional)
CP2 10A 200 VAC, 3-phase R13, S13, T13 Bar loader, workpiece conveyor and chip
conveyor (option)
CP3 3A 200 VAC, R14, S14 Lubricating oil pump, fan motors
single-phase
CP4 30A 200 VAC, 3-phase R6,S6,T6 Upstream of CP1, CP2, CP3
CP5 15A 200 VAC, R10, S10 Stabilized power supply (AVR1, AVR2),
single-phase servo amplifier module control power
supply
CP6 0.5A DC24V +24V1 Work light
When either CP1, CP2, CP3, or CP4 is disengaged:
 Go to Step 3.
When either CP1, CP2, CP3, CP4 and CP6 is engaged:
 Go to Step 9.
3. The main cause must be removed.
It depends on the circuit protector type.
 Remove the cause and go to Step 8.
When the circuit protector (CP1) is disengaged:
 Go to Step 4.
When the circuit protector (CP2) is disengaged:
 Go to Step 5.
When the circuit protector (CP3) is disengaged:
 Go to Step 6.
When the circuit protector (CP6) is disengaged:
 Go to Step 7.
4. Check whether a failure has occurred in the coolant pump.
• Coolant pump motor, spindle cooling device motor, intermediate pressure coolant pump is faulty or
short-circuited.
• The chip is accumulated around the suction opening of the coolant pump or intermediate pressure coolant pump.
• Circuit protector failure
The above are probable causes of the alarm. Remove the cause and go to Step 8.

23-31
L32

5. A failure was detected in the loader power supply circuit.

• The power circuit of bar loader is short-circuited.
• Workpiece conveyor is faulty or short-circuited.
• The power circuit of chip conveyor is short-circuited.
The above are probable causes of the alarm. Remove the cause and go to Step 8.
6. Check the lubrication oil pump and the fan motor for malfunctions.
• Lubricating oil pump motor is faulty or short-circuited.
• Control unit outdoor air intake fan motor (FAN 8, 9) are not turning (are locked)
• Back spindle cooling device fan motor (FAN 3) is not turning (is locked)
• Spindle cooling device fan motor (FAN 5) is not turning (is locked)
• Circuit protector failure
The above are probable causes of the alarm. Remove the cause and go to Step 8.
7. An error is detected on the internal illumination lamp.
• 24 VDC circuit of internal illumination lamp is short-circuited.
• The internal illumination lamp is faulty or short-circuited.
• Circuit protector failure
The above are probable causes of the alarm. Remove the cause and go to Step 8.
8. Disengage the circuit protectors once and engage them again, and engage the main breaker.
The alarm lamp goes off.

9. Check the following failures.

• Signal cable breakage
• Imperfect connector plugging-in
• NC unit failure
• Circuit protector failure

23-32
 L32

23.4.8 Troubleshooting when 24 VDC power supply fails

[Procedure]
1. Turn off the main breaker of the machine according to the procedure in <5.1 Turning On/Off the Power>, then
open the door of the front electric device box to check the fuse.
When the fuse has burned out:
• Check if any of the DC power lines (24 VDC, 5 VDC or 0V line) is short-circuited.
• Check if the total connected load exceeds the capacity of fuse.
If so, connect another power supply to the machine to supply sufficient power.
The possible cause is either of the above two conditions. Remove the cause and go to step 2.
When the fuse has not burned out:
• Any of the DC power lines (24 VDC, 5 VDC or 0V line) may possibly be disconnected. After removing the
cause of the fault, proceed to step 3.

2. Remove the burned fuse and replace it with a new one properly. Then go to step 3.
3. Close the door of the front electric device box, then turn on the machine according to the procedure in <5.1
Turning On/Off the Power>.

[Note]
If the same status recurs after operation is restarted, remove the main cause of the alarm.

23.4.9 Troubleshooting after main spindle, back spindle, and rotary tool alarms
EX003 Main spindle motor alarm
EX004 Back spindle motor alarm
EX005 Rotary tool on gang tool post motor alarm
EX008 Front rotary tool on opposite tool post motor alarm
EX009 Back rotary tool motor alarm

When one of the above PC alarms occurs, the machine stops and an NC alarm also occurs.
For details and causes of alarms, see the NC Alarm Table of the Instruction manual of the NC manufacturer.

23-33
L32

23.4.10 Troubleshooting after spindle related alarms

23.4.10.1 Troubleshooting after "EX109 Main spindle speed fluctuation alarm."
[Procedure]
1. Manually rotate the main spindle with the main circuit breaker off.
If the main spindle won't turn or feels extremely heavy:
• The main spindle may have a mechanical failure.
When the back spindle turns normally:
 Go to Step 2.
2. Check if the back spindle is heavily overloaded with the tool (drill) which has been chipped, broken, or worn
down.
If the tool (drill) has been chipped, broken, or worn down:
• Replace or re-polish the tool.
Normal
 Go to Step 3.
3. Turn on the power supply of the machine and manually turn the main spindle to check if the spindle speed S1
displayed on the screen is 0.
If S1 is 0:
• The encoder cable has been disconnected or the connector is loose.
• The encoder is faulty.
• The NC unit is faulty.
The possible cause is any of the above conditions.
Visually check the encoder cable for discontinuity and check for looseness of its connector. Contact your Service
Department if you find no problem with the encoder cable.
If the S1 value varies:
 Go to Step 4.
4. Remove the material first. Execute the spindle speed change detection OFF command (M97) in MDI mode, then
execute M3 S1=1000 to turn the spindle at 1000 min–1 to check whether the spindle speed S1 on the screen falls
within the range of 1000 ±100 min–1.
If the S1 value is within 1000 ±100 min–1:
• The spindle speed change detection level has not been set to the standard value.
For changing the setting, refer to see <13.6 Spindle Speed Change Detection Function (M94, M95, M96,
M97)>.
If the S1 value is outside 1000 ±100 min-1 or the main spindle motor alarm is raised:
• The encoder is faulty.
• The spindle speed has not been adjusted appropriately.
• The spindle motor is faulty.
• The encoder cable has been disconnected or the connector is loose.
• The spindle servo amplifier is faulty.
• The NC unit is faulty.
The possible cause is any of the above conditions.
Visually check the encoder cable for discontinuity and check for looseness of its connector. Contact your Service
Department if you find no problem with the encoder cable or if the procedure for recovery from the main spindle
motor alarm fails to cancel the alarm.

23-34
 L32

23.4.10.2 Troubleshooting after "EX110 Back spindle speed fluctuation alarm."

[Procedure]
1. Manually turn the back spindle with the main circuit breaker off.
If the main spindle won't turn or feels extremely heavy:
• The back spindle may have a mechanical failure.
When the back spindle turns normally:
 Go to Step 2.
2. Check if the back spindle is heavily overloaded with the tool (drill) which has been chipped, broken, or worn
down.
If the tool (drill) has been chipped, broken, or worn down:
• Replace or re-polish the tool.
Normal
 Go to Step 3.
3. Turn on the power supply of the machine and manually turn the back spindle to check if the spindle speed S2
displayed on the screen is 0.
If S1 is 0:
• The encoder cable has been disconnected or the connector is loose.
• The encoder is faulty.
• The NC unit is faulty.
The possible cause is any of the above conditions.
Visually check the encoder cable for discontinuity and check for looseness of its connector. Contact your Service
Department if you find no problem with the encoder cable.
If the S1 value varies:
 Go to Step 4.
4. Remove the workpiece first. Execute the spindle speed change detection OFF command (M87) in MDI mode, then
execute M23 S2=1000 to turn the spindle at 1000 min–1 to check whether the spindle speed S2 on the screen falls
within the range of 1000 ±100 min–1.
If the S1 value is within 1000 ±100 min–1:
• The spindle speed change detection level has not been set to the standard value. For changing the setting, refer to
see <13.6 Spindle Speed Change Detection Function (M94, M95, M96, M97)>.
If the S1 value is outside 1000 ±100 min-1 or the back spindle motor alarm is raised:
• The encoder is faulty.
• The spindle speed has not been adjusted appropriately.
• The back spindle motor is faulty.
• The encoder cable has been disconnected or the connector is loose.
• The back spindle servo amplifier is faulty.
• The NC unit is faulty.
The possible cause is any of the above conditions.
Visually check the encoder cable for discontinuity and check for looseness of its connector. Contact your Service
Department if you find no problem with the encoder cable or if the procedure for recovery from the main spindle
motor alarm fails to cancel the alarm.

23-35
L32

23.4.10.3 Procedure if the message "EX592 Knock-out can not be advanced to correct position."
appears
[Procedure]
1. Check if the workpiece is caught with the back spindle.
When caught:
• Remove the workpiece.
When not caught:
• Diameter of knock-out jig is larger than the chuck size.
• The knock-out rod is bent.
The possible cause is either of the above two conditions. Remove the cause. If you find no problem, contact your
Service Department.

23-36
 L32

23.4.11 Recovery from external device alarms

23.4.11.1 Troubleshooting after "EX133 Bar loader is not ready."
For a dedicated bar loader:
[Procedure]
1. Check the indicator on the Power key of the bar loader.

If the indicator is off:

• Press the Power key of the bar loader.

If the indicator is on:

• The NC unit may be faulty. Contact your Service Department.
For another bar loader:
[Procedure]
1. Check the power supply of the bar loader.
When the power is off:
• Turn the power on.
• Turn the bar loader torque ON (cycle start).
If the power is on:
• Turn the bar loader torque ON (cycle start).
• The cable has been disconnected or erroneously wired.
• The NC unit is faulty.
• The bar loader is faulty.
One of the above four conditions could have occurred. Follow the bar loader maintenance procedure to check the bar
loader and cable. Contact your Service Department if the problem cannot be identified.

23.4.11.2 Troubleshooting after "EX101 Bar loader alarm"

[Procedure]
1. Check the conditions of the bar loader.
If an alarm has been raised:
• Reset the alarm.
If no alarm has been raised:
• The bar loader has been wired erroneously or the cable has been disconnected.
• The NC unit is faulty.
One of the above two conditions could have occurred. Check the cable. Contact your Service Department if the
problem cannot be identified.

[Note]
If the machine is equipped with an automatic bar loader (excluding a dedicated bar loader) contact the bar loader
manufacturer.

23-37
L32

23.4.11.3 Troubleshooting after "EX201 Bar stock empty"

[Procedure]
1. Check whether there are materials on the bar loader.
When the bar loader has no material:
• Replenish the bar loader with materials.
If the bar loader has materials:
• The stock bar detection sensor is faulty.
• The bar loader has been wired erroneously or the cable has been disconnected.
One of the above two conditions could have occurred. Check the cable and sensor. Contact your Service Department
if the problem cannot be identified.

[Note]
If the machine is equipped with an automatic bar loader (excluding a dedicated bar loader) contact the bar loader
manufacturer.

23.4.11.4 Troubleshooting after "EX208 Chip conveyor overload."

[Procedure]
1. Check if the chip conveyor has been overloaded with clogging chips or other foreign matters.
If the chip conveyor has been overloaded:
• Remove the cause.
Normal
• Refer to the Operator's Manual for the chip conveyor.

[Note]
The chip conveyor requires cleaning at regular intervals. To clean the conveyor, detach it from the machine body to
remove fine chips.

23-38
 L32

23.4.12 Troubleshooting after OP076 Device battery low level Alarm

Before replacing the battery, make sure that the NC power is on.
If battery is replaced while the NC power is off, "EX401 Detection of the machine moving" alarm will occur.

[Procedure]
1. Prepare four pieces of new size AA alkaline battery.
2. Turn on the NC power supply.
3. Remove the three bolts on top of the operation panel, and open the operation panel.

View of Battery Holder

4. Remove the cover from the battery holder, then replace the four AA batteries in the battery holder with new ones.
When putting a battery in the battery holder, make sure to put one in the correct orientation.
5. Press the reset key to cancel the alarm. After that ensure that the alarm does not occur again in 5 seconds or
more.
When the alarm does not occur again in 5 seconds:
 Go to Step 7.
When the alarm is not reset or the alarm occurs again:
• The battery is not set in the correct orientation (+ / – terminals).
• The set number of batteries is less than four.
• The battery terminals are not correctly engaged with the mating terminals.
• Set batteries are not new.
The possible cause is one of the above four conditions. Check the battery holder and the set batteries. Contact your
Service Department if the problem cannot be identified.
6. Close the operation panel, and refit the bolts at the top of the operation panel that were removed in 3.
[Note]
Although the machine can be operated continuously even after the occurrence of the alarm, alarm "EX401 Detection of
the machine moving" may be detected if the machine is used for more than two weeks after the occurrence of the alarm.
(Alarm EX401 occurs when the battery voltage becomes lower than the specified limit value.)

23-39
L32

23.4.13 Recovery from other alarms

23.4.13.1 Troubleshooting after "EX108 Cycle time alarm"
[Procedure]
When an alarm occurs every time the program is run
1. Check if the program cycle time is exceeding the set time (the standard setting is 30 minutes).
If the cycle time exceeds the set time:
• Extend the set time.
To measure the actual cycle time, run the program for one cycle with the cycle time check disabled (by setting
the "Bit 1" of parameter #1 on the BIT SELECTION PARAMETERS screen to "1" according to see <23.6.2
PLC bit selection parameter setting>.

Disabling the cycle time check prevents the machine from raising an alarm even if the machine
causes an unexpected failure. Be sure to enable the cycle time check except when measuring the
cycle time for determining the setting.

When the cycle time does not exceed the set time:
 Go to Step 2.
2. Run the program for one block, then check the NC operation status display when the machine makes no response
with the Start key lamp remains on, to pressing the Start key.

Operation status
Symbol Description
EMG Emergency stop
RST Resetting the NC
RDY Completed preparation
During automatic
operation
SYN Being queued for
synchronization
CRS Waiting until axes cross
STP Stopping
HLD Holding

23-40
 L32

The status display is SYN for both axis control groups 1 and 2:
• Axis control groups 1 and 2 are being stopped by different queue commands.
Modify the program so that the queue commands for axis control groups 1 and 2 are of the same command
sequence.
When one of axis control groups 1 and 2 has no status display (automatic operation) and the other has a
status display of SYN, or when both of them have no status display:
• The block being executed for the axis control group with no status display contains a command for which no
completion signal has been issued.
f the same block contains multiple commands which can be specified alone, specify them in different blocks and
execute them one by one to identify the command that stops operation.
If the machine stops with a cutting block such as G1, G2, or G3:
• A per rotation feed command (G99) may be suspected while neither the spindle nor the back spindle is rotating.
If the cutting block contains no rotation command, insert one before that block. If the cutting block contains one,
see <23.5.2 Main spindle does not rotate during automatic operation> to remove the cause of stopping
operation, then run the program again.
If the machine has stopped with an M code:
• The M code may be illegal or the condition for completing the M code may not have been satisfied. After
making sure that the specified M code is not illegal, check whether the command-specified operation has been
performed or not (for example, whether the chuck has been closed completely, stopped prematurely, or left open
with M6 specified) Then, take action appropriately depending on the result of the check.
If the machine has stopped with any other command:
• Contact your Service Department.
When the program is run to the end:
• The program may not contain M02.
Check the program and insert M02 if it is not included.
If the program sometimes results in an alarm:
• The program stops running at such a G or M code as described above.
The "door open" signal is issued because of imperfect contact of the door switch while the door has been closed.

[Note]
• Select a PLC constant of 18003 (in 0.1 seconds) to set the cycle time.
• The cycle time can be set up to 32400 (54 minutes).
• See <23.6.1 PLC constant setting> for how to read the PCL-Data screen.
• The M codes for resetting the cycle time count are M1, M56, M57, and M2.
• The cycle time is checked only in automatic operation mode.

23-41
L32

23.4.13.2 Troubleshooting after "EX105 Coolant Discharge Alarm"

[Procedure]
1. Press the Reset key to cancel the alarm and adjust the coolant flow rate according to the adjustment
instructions for <7.14 Coolant Flow Detector (U53R)>, which are provided after this procedure.
If the alarm is raised as soon as you press the coolant switch to adjust the flow rate (Process 3):
• The coolant tank may be short of coolant. Check the oil level and replenish the tank if coolant is short.
• The filter in the coolant tank may have been clogged, preventing coolant from reaching the suction opening of
the pump. Clean inside the tank.
• The flow rate sensor may be defective. Fully turn the "set value adjusting potentiometer" counterclockwise.
If the "alarm output indicator LED" does not come on:
• Replace the flow rate sensor because it seems to be defective.
If the "alarm output indicator LED" comes on:
• The flow rate seems to have not been adjusted correctly. Adjust the flow rate over again.
When the flow rate can be adjusted as described in the procedure:
• The filter in the coolant tank may have been clogged, taking time for coolant to return to the suction opening of
the pump. Clean inside the tank.
• The flow regulating valve may have been too tightened or the "set value adjusting potentiometer" may have not
been adjusted correctly. Leave the coolant supply system as it is for further observation. If the alarm persists,
contact your Service Department.

[Note]
The coolant flow rate detector is an option.

23-42
 L32

23.4.13.3 Troubleshooting after "EX107 Tool bit breakage alarm. Cut off tool is broken."
[Procedure]
1. Make sure there is no material left without being cut off.
When remained:
• Replace the cut-off tool.
When not remained:
 Go to Step 2.
2. Check if chips have been jammed around the guide bushing.
If chips have been jammed:
• Remove chips.
When chips have not been jammed:
• The sensor is poorly adjusted.
• The sensor is failed.
• The sensor cable is disconnected.
One of the above three conditions could have occurred. Check the cable and sensor. Contact your Service
Department if the problem cannot be identified.

23.4.13.4 Troubleshooting after "EX202 Lubrication oil empty alarm or EX204 Oil-air lub alarm"
[Procedure]
1. Check the lubricating oil level.
If the lubricating oil level is too low:
• Add lubricating oil.
When the lubricating oil level is acceptable:
• The sensor is failed.
• The cable has been disconnected.
One of the above conditions could have occurred. Check the cable and sensor. Contact your Service Department if
the problem cannot be identified.

23-43
L32

23.4.13.5 Troubleshooting after "EX203 Coolant oil alarm"

[Procedure]
1. Check coolant level.
If the lubricating oil level is too low:
• Add coolant.
When the lubricating oil level is acceptable:
 Go to Step 2.
2. Check chips.
If clogging chips prevent the tank from collecting oil:
• Remove chips.
When chips are not clogging:
• The sensor is failed.
• The cable has been disconnected.
One of the above conditions could have occurred. Check the cable and sensor. Contact your Service Department if
the problem cannot be identified.
The sensor has a float which goes down as the oil level is lowered, raising an alarm just before the float reaches the
bottom of the tank.
Note, however, that the float reaching the bottom of the tank with no coolant left may be slanted and not go up next time
the tank is charged with coolant.
Since the sensor raises an alarm even with coolant in the tank, in this case, remove the sensor from the tank and set it
back again with the float set horizontally.

23-44
 L32

23.4.13.6 Troubleshooting after "Z52 Battery fault xxxxx"

It is required to replace the battery which is used for backup of the NC parameters stored in NC control unit and the
machining program.

Be sure to turn off the main breaker of the machine before starting the work.
Failure to do so will result in death or serious personal injury from electric shock.

[Note]
Be sure to complete replacement work within 30 minutes after powering off the NC unit.
If the new battery is not connected within 30 minutes, the backup data will be lost.
[Procedure]
1. Turn off the main breaker of the machine according to the procedure explained in <5.1 Turning On/Off the
Power>. After that open the operation panel and confirm the location of the NC control unit.
2. Make sure that LEDs and 7-segment indicators on NC control unit are unlit.

23-45
L32

3. Pull the right side of the front cover of the NC control unit toward you, and open the front cover.

4. Remove the connector coming from the battery out from the BAT connector on the NC control unit. Then, take the
battery out of the battery holder.
5. Put the new battery into the battery holder. Then connect the connector coming from the battery to the BAT
connector on the NC control unit.
6. Close the front cover of the NC control unit. Confirm that the cover is securely caught to the claw and click sound
is heard.
7. Close the operation panel door.
Continous battery backup time :45,000 hours (at ordinary temperature. Shortened by the
temperature deviation)
Useful life of battery :Approx. 5 years from manufactured date
Battery for replacement :Q6BAT BK0-C10811H03 (made by Mitsubishi Electric)

23-46
 L32

23.4.13.7 Troubleshooting after "S52 Battery voltage drop 009F"

It is required to replace the battery which is used for backup of the position data stored in absolute position detector of
AC servo motor.

[Note]
Conduct this work with the NC power being on. Otherwise, the stored absolute position data will be lost.

Replacement of the battery for backup of servo motor position data shall be conducted with the powers of
machine and the NC unit being on. Do not perform any other operation than the procedures described
below.
Failure to do so will result in death or serious personal injury from electric shock.

[Procedure]
1. Turn on the main breaker of the machine according to the procedure in <5.1 Turning On/Off the Power>.
2. Loosen the screw securing the battery box, and remove the cover.

3. Take the old battery out of the battery box, and put the new battery into the box. In this time, pay attention to
orientation of the battery.
4. Close the cover of the battery box and tighten the screw to secure the battery box.
Continous battery backup time ： 10,000 hours (at ordinary temperature. Shortened by the temperature
deviation)
Replace once a year the battery.
Useful life of battery ： Approx. 1 years from manufactured date
Battery for replacement ： LR20 (size D alkaline dry cell) × 4

23-47
L32

23.4.14 Recovery from thermal displacement correction device alarm

23.4.14.1 roubleshooting after "EX122 T.D.C. device alarm", "EX131 T.D.C. data alarm"
[Procedure]
1. Press the reset key to cancel the alarm.

2. Turn off the NC power supply, then turn off the main breaker of the machine.
3. Turn on the main breaker, and then turn on the NC power supply.
4. Restart operation and check if any alarm occurs between the first and third cycle.
Alarm occurs:
• The device may be faulty. Contact your Service Department.

23.4.14.2 Troubleshooting after "EX132 T.D.C. sensor alarm (ch）"

[Procedure]
1. Press the reset key to cancel the alarm.

2. Turn off the NC power supply, then turn off the main breaker of the machine.
3. Turn on the main breaker, and then turn on the NC power supply.
4. Restart operation and check if any alarm occurs between the first and third cycle.
Alarm occurs:
• The device may be faulty. Contact your Service Department.

23.4.15 Recovery from loader device alarms

23.4.15.1 Measures to process "EX412 loader arm invalid"
[Procedure]
1. Check that the loader/arm is at the front or rear end.
It is at the front end or rear end.
 Go to Step 2.
It is not at the front or rear end.
Manually move it to the front or rear end.
 Go to Step 2.
2. When an alarm occurs, check if the conditions required for operation were satisfied.
Occurred during loader advance/loader retraction
The arm is not at the front or rear end.
 Go to Step 3.
The arm is not at the front or rear end.
 Advance the arm to the return position.
Occurred during arm advance/arm retraction.
The loader is not at the front end.
 Go to Step 3.
The loader is not at the front end.
 Move the rail to a forward position.

23-48
 L32

3. Check loader/arm operation.

If so:
• The loader/arm front end sensor and rear end sensor are incorrectly adjusted.
• The spindle chuck open/close sensor is faulty.
• The sensor cable is disconnected.
The possible cause is any of the above conditions.
It does not operate
 Go to Step 4.
4. Move the loader/arm forward and backward in MDI and the Preparation screen while checking Y245 and Y246 for
the loader and Y247 and Y248 for the arm on the I/F Diagnosis screen.
Loader

Arm

The Y245 and Y246 or the Y247 and Y248 stay at 0.

• The NC input unit is faulty.
If Y245 and Y246 and the Y247 and Y248 change between "1" and "0."
• The pneumatic device is faulty.
• Solenoid valve failure
• Disconnection of solenoid valve cable
The possible cause is any of the above conditions.

23-49
L32

To move the loader, you must first retract the arm.

When the arm advances, the arm and spindle may interfere with each other which could result in machine
damage.
Move by pressing the arm or the slider.
Pushing the hand to move it may move the spindle from the center or damage the machine.

23.4.15.2 Measures to process "EX413 loader hand invalid"

[Procedure]
1. Check loader hand operation.
If so:
• The load hand open/close sensors are not adjusted correctly.
• The spindle chuck open/close sensor is faulty.
• The sensor cable is disconnected.
The possible cause is any of the above conditions.
It does not operate
 Go to Step 2.
2. Open and close the loader hand in MDI and the Preparation screen while checking Y249 and Y24A on the I/F
Diagnosis screen.

Y249 and Y24A stay at 0.

• The NC input unit is faulty.
If Y249 and Y24A change between "1" and "0"
• The pneumatic device is faulty.
• Solenoid valve failure
• Disconnection of solenoid valve cable
The possible cause is any of the above conditions.

23-50
 L32

23.4.15.3 Measures to process "EX414 shutter invalid"

[Procedure]
1. Check shutter operation.
If so:
• The spindle chuck open/close sensors are not adjusted correctly.
• The spindle chuck open/close sensor is faulty.
• The sensor cable is disconnected.
The possible cause is any of the above conditions.
 Go to Step 3.
It does not operate
2. Open and close the shutter in MDI and the Preparation screen while checking Y24B and Y24C on the I/F
Diagnosis screen.

Y24B and Y24 C stay at 0.

• The NC input unit is faulty.
If Y24B and Y24C change between "1" and "0"
• - The pneumatic device is faulty.
• - Solenoid valve failure
• - Disconnection of solenoid valve cable
The possible cause is any of the above conditions.
 Go to Step 3.
3. Check L13 in the I/F Diagnosis screen after recovery.

L13 is 0
• Move to the shutter open end and use the reset key to stop the alarm.
L13 is 1
• Move to the shutter close end and use the reset key to stop the alarm.

23-51
L32

23.5 Mechanical Errors

This section describes the troubleshooting procedures for mechanical errors or failures which do not result in alarms.
If the cause of a problem cannot be identified or the problem cannot be solved, contact your Service Department.
23.5.1 Machine fails to start
[Procedure]
1. Check whether the Start button is on
If the indicator is on:
• The override may be 0%.
If the indicator is off:
 Go to Step 2.
2. Check YC10 ($1) and YD50 ($2) on the I/F DIAGNOSIS screen with the Start button depressed.
Checking YC10 and YD50 on the I/F DIAGNOSIS screen

YC10=1，YD50=1
• The NC unit may be faulty.
YC10=0，YD50=0
 Go to Step 3.
3. Check whether MDI or AUTO mode has been selected.
If none of those mode has not been selected:
• Select the mode in which the machine can be started automatically.
If MDI or AUTO mode has been selected:
 Go to Step 4.
4. Check whether setting switches 18 ($1 cycle start) and 19 ($2 cycle start) have been checked.
If the switches have not been checked:
• Check the switches.
If the switches have been checked:
 Go to Step 5.
5. Check whether an alarm has occurred.
If an alarm has occurred:
• Reset the alarm.
If no alarm has occurred:
• The Start button is faulty or the cable has been disconnected.

[Note]
• See <23.2 Interface Diagnosis> for how to read the I/F DIAGNOSIS screen.
• See <6.8.6 Setting switches> for how to read the Set SW screen.

23-52
 L32

23.5.2 Main spindle does not rotate during automatic operation

[Procedure]
1. Enter the main spindle rotation command in MDI mode. (M03 S1=1000).
If the spindle rotates:
• The program may contain a command the specified main spindle rotating command may not be in the valid
format (for example, with S1= omitted).
If the spindle does not rotate:
• The NC unit is faulty.
• The motor is faulty.
• The drive unit is faulty.
• The cable has been disconnected.
One of the above four conditions could have occurred. Check the cable and sensor. Contact your Service
Department if the problem cannot be identified.

23.5.3 Back spindle does not rotate during automatic operation

[Procedure]
1. Enter the back spindle rotation command in MDI mode. (M23 S2=1000).
If the spindle rotates:
• The program may contain a command the specified back spindle rotating command may not be in the valid
format (for example, with S2= omitted).
If the spindle does not rotate:
• The NC unit is faulty.
• The motor is faulty.
• The drive unit is faulty.
• The cable has been disconnected.
One of the above four conditions could have occurred. Check the cable and sensor. Contact your Service
Department if the problem cannot be identified.

23.5.4 Rotary tool does not rotate during automatic operation

[Procedure]
1. Enter the rotary tool rotation command in MDI mode. (M80 S3=1000).
If the spindle rotates:
• The rotary tool rotating command specified in the program may not be in the valid format (for example, with
S3= omitted).
If the spindle does not rotate:
• The NC unit is faulty.
• The motor is faulty.
• The drive unit is faulty.
• The cable has been disconnected.
One of the above four conditions could have occurred. Check the cable and sensor. Contact your Service
Department if the problem cannot be identified.

23-53
L32

23.5.5 Guide bushing alarms

23.5.5.1 Fretting problem
[Procedure]
1. Check the cutting conditions.
• Check whether the spindle speed, feed rate, coolant, and the material and grinding state of the tool are
appropriate for the workpiece to be cut.
• Check whether the tools and tool bits are appropriate with proper rigidity without being abnormal, such as being
worn down, chipped, or damaged.
If the cutting conditions are inappropriate:
• Change cutting conditions.
When the cutting conditions are appropriate:
 Go to Step 2.
2. Check whether the clearance and contact between the guide bushing and the material are appropriate.
If the cutting conditions are inappropriate:
• Remove and clean the guide bushing and drawbar. Mount them back and perform set clearance adjustment.
• Lap the guide bushing and material to fit them together.
• Replace the guide bushing.
When the cutting conditions are appropriate:
 Go to Step 3.
3. Check whether the machine has no abnormal vibration with no sliding part rattling and with the rotary guide
bushing unit maintained normally.
If the cutting conditions are inappropriate:
• If the machine has a problem: Problem with the rotary guide bushing Check if: – the driving timing belt has been
worn. – the support bearing is abnormal.
• Contact your Service Department if the machine shows abnormal vibrations, a sliding part is rattling, or if the
rotary guide bushing unit is abnormal.

23.5.5.2 Too large machining diameter fluctuations

[Procedure]
For normal level of dispersion in the diametral or longitudinal direction
1. Check the cutting conditions as in steps 1 to 3 in see <23.5.5.1 Fretting problem>.
[Procedure]
Dispersion found with the lapse of time
1. Large fluctuation in the initial state.
• Check the initial wear of tools.
• Warm up the machine before re-machining.
2. Long-time dispersion which seems to be thermal variation.
• Check whether the room temperature is kept constant.
• Check whether turning on and off of air conditioning has any effect on the machine.
• Check whether the changes in temperature in the morning and evening have any effect on the machine.
[Procedure]
1. Check the following items as factors other than the above.
• Check if ball screws in the mechanical system are abnormal in clearance and bearing.
• Check if the spindle is abnormal such as having looseness, runout, or end face runout in the thrust and radial
directions.
• Check if the mechanical or driving system is abnormal in any other point.
If the cutting conditions are inappropriate:
• Contact your Service Department.

23-54
 L32

23.5.5.3 Poor machining roundness

[Procedure]
1. Check the roundness of the material.
• If the material is poor in roundness, the machined workpiece is also poor in roundness.
• Machining a profile or polygonal material results in a workpiece poor in roundness.
When the cutting conditions are appropriate:
 Go to Step 2.
2. Check the cutting conditions as in steps 1 and 2 in <23.5.5.1 Fretting problem>.
When the cutting conditions are appropriate:
 Go to Step 3.
3. For the synchronous rotary guide bushing device, remove the guide bushing and check the runout and looseness of
the tapered part of the opening of the sleeve.
• Much runout degrade the roundness of the workpiece machined.
If the cutting conditions are inappropriate:
• Contact your Service Department.

[Note]
Adjusting the clearance between the guide bushing and material changes the roundness of the material.

23.5.5.4 Abnormal noise during rotation

[Procedure]
1. Noise from the rotary guide bushing Check if:
• the driving timing belt has been worn.
• the support bearing is abnormal.

23.5.6 If "It fails in the update of OP088 Eco/ope. info. file." alarm occurred
If this message is displayed, it indicates that the file cannot be updated correctly and it is necessary to initialize the data.
After the initialization, all of Eco and machine operation information related data are initialized.
[Procedure]
1. Check whether the backup file is available or not.
Backup file is available:
 Go to Step 2.
Backup file is not available:
• Make a backup file by referring to <6.9.6.9 Output of Eco/Machine Operation Information>.
2. Press the Diagnosis key .

The Diagnosis menu appears.

23-55
L32

3. Press the menu key [I/F Diag] (Skip this step when the I/F DIAGNOSIS screen has already been displayed.)
The I/F DIAGNOSIS screen appears.

4. Use <alphanumeric> keys to enter "1001//M" in the input fields.

5. Press the Input key .

6. Press the menu key [Eco]. (Skip this step when the Eco screen has already been displayed. If the menu key [Eco]
is not on the screen, press the menu key [Menu SEL] to display the menu key [Eco].)
The Eco screen appears.

7. Press the menu key [Format]. (If the menu key [Format] is not on the screen, press the menu key [Menu SEL] to
display the menu key [Format].)
A message is displayed and menu keys [Yes] and [No] are displayed in the upper row menu.

8. Press the menu key [Yes].

All of Eco related data are initialized.

23-56
 L32

9. Press the menu key [Operation Infomation]. (If the menu key [Operation Infomation] is not on the screen. press
the menu key [Menu SEL] to display the menu key [Operation Infomation].)
The Machine Operation Infomation screen will appear.

10. Press the menu key [Format]. (If the menu key [Format] is not on the screen, press the menu key [Menu SEL] to
display the menu key [Format].)

11. Press the menu key [Yes].

All of machine operation information related data are initialized.
12. Turn the power supply on and off.

[Note]
When the data are initialized, the date for graph display is also initialized. The graph is displayed from the date when the
power is turned on next.

23-57
L32

23.6 Appendix
23.6.1 PLC constant setting
[Procedure]
1. Press the Diagnosis key .

The Diagnosis menu appears.

2. Press the menu key [I/F Diag] (Skip this step when the I/F DIAGNOSIS screen has already been displayed.)
The I/F DIAGNOSIS screen appears.

3. Use <alphanumeric> keys to enter "1001//M" in the input fields.

4. Press the Input key .

5. Press the Parameter key .

The Parameter screen appears.

23-58
 L32

6. Press the menu key [PLC-Data]. (Skip this step when the PLC CONSTANT PARAMETERS screen has already
been displayed. If the menu key [PLC-Data] is not on the screen, press the menu key [Menu SEL] to display the
menu key [PLC-Data].)
PLC CONSTANT PARAMETERS screen appears.

7. Move the cursor to the item (switch) to be set using the arrow keys or the tab keys .

8. Use <numeric> keys to enter the desired value.

9. Press the Input key .

10. Repeat steps 7. to 9. until all data is set.

23-59
L32

23.6.2 PLC bit selection parameter setting

[Procedure]
1. Press the Diagnosis key .

The Diagnosis menu appears.

2. Press the menu key [I/F Diag] (Skip this step when the I/F DIAGNOSIS screen has already been displayed.)
The I/F DIAGNOSIS screen appears.

3. Use <alphanumeric> keys to enter "1001//M" in the input fields.

4. Press the Input key .

5. Press the Parameter key .

The Parameter screen appears.

23-60
 L32

6. Press the menu key [BIT SEL]. (Skip this step when the BIT SELECTION PARAMETERS screen has already
been displayed. If the menu key [BIT SEL] is not on the screen, press the menu key [Menu SEL] to display the
menu key [BIT SEL].)
The BIT SELECTION PARAMETERS screen appears.

7. Use the arrow keys , tab keys , or Page keys to position the cursor on the item you
want to set.
8. Use <numeric> keys to enter eight bits of data. Or, use the arrow key or to position the cursor on the bit

you want to set, use the Delete key to delete the existing value, then enter a new value (0 or 1).

9. Press the Input key .

10. Repeat steps 7. to 9. until all data is set.

23-61
L32

23.6.3 Checking the version of software

[Procedure]
1. Press the Diagnosis key .

The Diagnosis menu appears.

2. Press the menu key [S/W LIST]. (Skip this step when the S/W LIST screen has already been displayed.)
The S/W LIST screen appears, displaying the version of each software program.

23-62
 L32

23.6.4 Checking the alarm history

[Procedure]
1. Press the Diagnosis key .

The Diagnosis menu appears.

2. Press the menu key [History]. (Skip this step when the Alarm History screen has already been displayed.)
The Alarm History screen appears, listing the last 100 alarms generated.

[Note]
• The Alarm History screen displays the menu keys [All DSP], [NC ALM], and [PLC ALM].
• Pressing the menu key [NC ALM] displays only the alarms generated from the NC unit.
• Pressing the menu key [PLC ALM] displays only the alarms generated from the PLC (ladder diagram and macros).
• Pressing the menu key [All DSP] displays both of the NC and PLC alarms.

23-63
L32

23.6.5 Checking the key-in history

[Procedure]
1. Press the Diagnosis key .

The Diagnosis menu appears.

2. Press the menu key [History]. (Skip this step when the Alarm History screen has already been displayed.)
3. Press the Page key .
The Key History screen appears, listing the last 120 keys you have pressed.

23-64
 L32

23.6.6 Terminal layout

23-65
L32

23-66
 L32

23.6.7 Control box component layout

Control panel front view (with cover)

Control panel rear filter detailed view

23-67
L32

Control panel side view

Control panel side cover detailed view

23-68
 L32

Control panel front cover view

Control panel rear detailed view

23-69
L32

Control panel rear filter detailed view

Control panel front view (without cover)

23-70
 L32

Control panel top view

23-71
L32

Cross-section along A-A

23-72
 L32

Swivel equipment panel detailed view

23-73
L32

Circuit breaker detailed view

23-74
 L32

Equipment panel detailed view

23-75
L32

Operation panel detailed view (1)

23-76
 L32

Operation panel detailed view (2)

23-77
L32

Operation panel arm detailed view

23-78
 L32

Relay box detailed view (1)

23-79
L32

Relay box detailed view (2)

23-80
 L32

(Blank Page)

23-81
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 3E1-2304
Mfg. No. L32/0480～
Issue Date 2016.12

23-82
 24. Relocating the NC Machine
24.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 24-3
24.2 Selecting the Installation Site .................................................................................................................. 24-3
24.3 Preparation for Transporting ................................................................................................................... 24-7
24.4 Transportation ....................................................................................................................................... 24-14
24.4.1 Hoist sling........................................................................................................................................ 24-14
24.4.2 Forklift truck..................................................................................................................................... 24-15
24.5 Installing the NC Machine ..................................................................................................................... 24-16
24.6 Fixing the Machine using Anchor Bolts ................................................................................................. 24-20
24.7 Pre-operation Check ............................................................................................................................. 24-22
24.8 Disposal ................................................................................................................................................ 24-23

24-1
 (Blank Page)

24-2
 L32

24.1 Introduction
It is necessary to relocate the NC machine installed by the manufacturer. This chapter explains how to safely prepare the
NC machine for relocation, transport the machine, select a suitable new site, and install the machine at the new site.
Before the work, you must carefully read this chapter.

If you do not follow the instructions herein, you will damage the machine.

24.2 Selecting the Installation Site

To ensure the highly precise cutting performance for on the NC machine, take into consideration the location of power
outlets, foundation strength, ambient temperature and humidity, traffic, ventilation, sunlight, nearby electrical machines
and equipment generating high-frequency noise, and all other considerations that may affect the operation of your NC
machine.
The site you select should meet the following requirements.

 Site foundation:
• The weight bearing capacity of the soil must be 1 ton/m , and the foundation thickness must be 100 mm or more.
2

• The foundation must extend 300 mm or more from the periphery of the NC machine.
• The NC machine must be installed on a sturdy, level surface that is not affected by vibrations of other machines.
If you are going to prepare a trench for isolating vibrations, dig it along the edge of the machine's foundation area.
• Concrete blocks cannot be used as foundation. Never place the NC machine on concrete blocks.
• Select an installation site that provides enough clearance around the NC machine to allow movement of a cart for
removing cutting chips and so that operators can perform maintenance tasks such as removing the panels without
bumping into other machines.
(External dimensions of the NC machine: depth 1,382 × width 2,520 × height 1,750 mm. When the cutting room
door is opened, the height becomes 2395 mm.)

 Site environment:
• The NC machine must not be installed in a place exposed to sharp temperature changes, for example, near air
conditioners.
• The NC machine must not be exposed to dust and direct sunlight or must not be placed near a ventilation opening or
heat source or in a place of high humidity.
If it is unavoidable to install the NC machine in such the location, a heavy curtain or a panel or screen can protect the
NC machine from direct sunlight or ventilation air or heat.
• The work site should be well ventilated to prevent heat build-up.
• To prevent external dust from getting into the machine, air purge (internal pressure) is applied to the air circuit.
The air circuits for the mechanisms are equipped with mist separators and dryers to clean air. However, if air is badly
polluted at the factory, the air cleaning capacity is not enough. In this case, polluted air is supplied causing a machine
failure.
• Simple method for checking the cleanness of air at factory
Blow the air to be used against a piece of white paper for about 30 seconds using an air gun. If the paper is as
white as before the test, the air can be supplied directly to the machine. If stains are detected on the paper, do not
supply the air directly to the machine.
• Procedure if air pollution is detected
The factory facilities need to be reviewed. To increase the air cleaning capacity, install additional air dryers, mist
separators, and filters into the factory piping system.

24-3
L32

Outside dimensions of the machine

24-4
 L32

Optional machine layout drawing

24-5
L32

 NC machine installation standards

Be sure to follow the instructions herein. High-frequency noise may cause malfunction of the machine,
resulting in severe injuries or deaths.

• Power line
Use a dedicated power line (200 VAC ± 10%) of the NC machine separately from the power lines of other machines
and equipment that generate high-frequency noise. (See examples below.)
• Installation site
Install the NC machine at least 20 m away from other machines and equipment that generate high-frequency noise.
(See examples below.)
• Grounding of the NC machine
Use 14.0mm2 or more thick grounding wire and ground the NC machine separately from the grounds of other
machines and equipment. The ground resistance of the NC machine should be 100 ohms or less.
If the NC machine is installed near machines and equipment that generate high-frequency noise, provide a separate
ground terminal within 5 m of the NC machine. The ground resistance of the NC machine should be 100 ohms or
less.
Examples of equipment that generate high-frequency noise:
• Arc welding machine
• Resistance welding
• High frequency dryer
• Electric spark machine
• Others
• If a circuit breaker with an electric leakage detection function is used as the power circuit breaker on the factory side,
the sensitivity current must be 30 mA. I f the sensitivity current is less than 30 mA, the circuit breaker may be
disengaged abnormally.

 Example of NC machine installation:

The illustration below shows an example on how to ground the NC machine installed near in the proximity of other
machines or equipment.

Operations needed at relocation should always be performed by the personnel who is authorized by the
public agency, for example, in hoist slinging or folk-lift truck operation. Operations by unauthorized
personnel may cause a serious accident.

24-6
 L32

24.3 Preparation for Transporting

Use the following steps to prepare the machine for transportation.
[Procedure]
1. Save data stored in device memory on an external storage device as a backup copy.
* The NC machine will retain the data even if you disconnect it from the power outlet. However, to assure the
safety of data, it is best to make backup copies before transporting the machine.
2. Remove the external storage device.
3. Remove tools from the machine.
4. Disengage the main circuit breaker of the machine and the breaker of the factory power outlet.

Make sure that the breaker of the factory power outlet and main circuit breaker of the NC machine
are disengaged. Failure to do so may expose you to hazardous voltage that can cause severe
injury or death.

5. Disconnect the coolant pump hose.

6. Disconnect the coolant pump connector cable.
7. Disconnect the coolant level detection sensor cable.

8. Pull out the coolant tank and remove the cutting chips and coolant from it.
* Dispose of the waste oil according to all national laws and regulations.

24-7
L32

9. Disconnect the power cable and grounding wire.

Failure to do so may expose you to hazardous voltage that can cause severe injury or death.
Make sure that the breaker of the factory power outlet and main circuit breaker of the NC machine
are disengaged.

a. Remove the cover on the right side of the control unit.

b. Remove the terminal cover.
c. Disconnect the power supply cable.
d. Disconnect the ground wire.
e. Replace the terminal cover.
f. Install the cover on the right side of the control unit.

24-8
 L32

10. If the bar loader is mounted, disconnect its connector cable.

11. Remove cutting chips and clean the machine.
12. Secure the moving parts of the machine to prevent movement and damage during transportation.
Secure the spindles
Install the supplied transfer jig in the prescribed location and secure the spindles.

Be sure to install the transfer jig.

If the jig is not installed during transportation, vibrations could cause the axis to come loose and
cause damage to the machine.
After removing the jig, store screws used to secure the jig not with the machine but with the jig. If
placed on the machine, the securing screws may cause damage by interfering with the moving
parts of the machine.

a. Secure the Z1 axis.

• Move the Z1 axis the position Z1=+433.
• Use the securing screw (M5x10) to secure the securing bracket (Z1).

After transporting the machine, do not forget to return the (Z1) securing bracket and the Z1 axis motor cover securing
screws that were removed to the machine.

24-9
L32

b. Secure the X1 and Y1 axes.

• Move the X1 axis to the machine coordinate position X1=+50 and the Y1 axis to the machine coordinate
position Y1=+403.
• Use the securing screw (M6x10) and flat washer (M6) to secure the securing bracket (X1, Y1).

24-10
 L32

c. Secure the Z2 and X2 axes.

• Move the Z2 axis to the machine coordinate position Z2=167 and the X2 axis to the machine coordinate position
X2=632.
• Remove the Z2 slider cover, the M5 x 8 small dish screws and the securing bracket M5 x 12. Store the removed
dish screws in the securing bracket.
Use the M6 x 10 securing screws for the rail to secure the securing bracket to the rail.
When the securing bracket is removed, be sure to use small dish screws to secure the Z2 slider cover. When X2
is pulled outwards there is a risk it will interfere with other parts.

24-11
L32

Secure the Covers

Affix paper tape to prevent covers (such as sliding cover) and doors from moving during transportation.

Do not use tapes with strong adhesives. Such tapes may peel off the paint on the machine when
you pull them off at the delivery site. Also, do not leave tape stuck on the machine for a long period.
Otherwise, the paint on the machine may peel off when you try to remove the tape

Protect and secure the operation panel

• Cover the LCD with styrofoam or other protective material.
• Remove the tray and use the securing screws of the cover to install securing bracket 1.
Use the securing screws of the lid on the rear of the arm to install securing bracket 2.
Insert the operation panel in the front panel and use M6 x 12 screws to connect the securing bracket 1 and 2.
Secure the operation panel and arm using the M5 x 20 securing screws.
When the brackets are removed, place the securing screws for the covers (M6 x 12) and the screws for the arm
lid (M40 x 6) in the tray and secure the tray in its original location.

24-12
 L32

Be sure to remove the securing screws after installing the machine, and store them together with the
transportation jigs outside the machine. If they are not removed, there is a risk of trapping and injuring your
hands when you swivel the operation panel.

Remove the patrol light and 3 step signal tower (optional)

• Loosen the holding nut at the base of the patrol light and 3-step signal tower.
• Unplug the connector to remove the patrol light and 3-step signal tower.
13. Loosen the four level adjustment bolts, and remove the machine from the bed while assuring safety.

24-13
L32

24.4 Transportation
Use a hoist sling or forklift truck to remove the machine from the current site and transport it to a new site or delivery
vehicle.
24.4.1 Hoist sling

• Be sure to follow the following precautions. Failure to heed these precautions may result in death or
serious personal injury.
• If the large unit such as chip conveyor is equipped with the machine, remove it before transportation.
The center of gravity will change with the large unit installed, and it may cause fall or overturn of the
machine resulting in severe personal injury or death.

[Note]
• The weight of the machine depends on the options mounted. The maximum weight is 2,900kg.
Nylon or wire ropes should be used for slinging the machine. They must be a minimum of 10 mm [0.39"] in
diameter.
• Use a hook as shown below.
• Do not use rusted, worn, or torn wire ropes.

[Procedure]
1. Insert a 60 mm [2.36"] diameter steel rod across the bolt holes on the lower bed.
2. Secure the slinging ropes to these steel rods as shown in the figure.
3. Hoist the rope gradually and stop hoisting when the wire rope becomes taught.
4. Check the sling to be sure it is safe and secure.
5. Hoist the rope until the machine is lifted of the floor.
6. Stop hoisting and check the sling again to be sure it is safe and secure.
7. If the sling is safe and secure, hoist the rope to the required height.
8. Transport the machine to a delivery vehicle or new site.
9. To place the machine on a vehicle or the ground, lower the machine gradually and stop just before the machine
touches the surface.

24-14
 L32

10. Check the position of contact and adjust the position if necessary.
11. If the position is correct, lower the machine to the surface.
24.4.2 Forklift truck

Be sure to follow the instructions herein. Failure to heed these precautions may result in death or serious
personal injury.

[Note]
• The weight of the machine depends on the options mounted. The maximum weight is 2,900kg. Be sure to use a
forklift truck that can handle this load.
• Be sure to have a supervisor attend the transport work together with a driver of the forklift truck so that projecting
portions of the machine are not damaged.
• Be sure to perform a trial lifting from the front, and rear, or side before the transportation. Consider the position
where the center of gravity is stable and good for lifting.

[Procedure]
1. Insert the fork into the cutout bottom position between the legs on the right and left side of the machine.
2. Identify the most stable position and lift the machine.
3. Transport the machine to a delivery vehicle or new site.
4. To place the machine on a vehicle or the ground, lower the machine gradually and stop just before the machine
touches the surface.
5. Check the position of contact and adjust the position if necessary.
6. If the position is correct, lower the machine to the surface.

24-15
L32

24.5 Installing the NC Machine

[Procedure]
1. Transport the machine to the installation site by hoist sling or forklift.
2. Gradually lower the machine and stop just before it reaches the floor.
3. Place the mounting seats under the machine and use leveling adjustment bolts and hexagonal bolts to secure it in
four locations. Adjust the leveling adjustment bolts so that the machine is approximately level.
* As a guideline, set the clearance between the bottom face of the machine and the floor surface to about 10 mm,
or secure enough clearance to insert the coolant tank.
4. After ensuring that the machine is approximately level, remove the wire ropes and steel rods from the machine or
withdraw the forklift.
5. Remove the transfer jig on the operation panel.
6. Place a spirit level on the machining surface.
* Make sure that the machining surface is clean and that there is no foreign material between the machine and the
level during measurement.
* The spirit level sensitivity should be approximately 0.02 mm [0.0008"] per meter for each scale setting.

24-16
 L32

7. Loosen the D leveling bolt and use the three leveling bolts and a spirit level to adjust the A, B and C leveling bolts
so that the machine is level to within 0.04 mm [0.0016"] in both the longitudinal and transverse directions.
Finally, tighten the D bolt so that the mounting seats are firmly secured.
8. Check the level to be sure it is correct.
9. Remove the gummed paper tape and gummed tape from the sliding doors and covers.
10. Remove protective material from the liquid crystal display (LCD).
11. Reinstall the patrol light and 3 step signal tower (if mounted).
12. Remove all of the transfer jig.

Be sure to remove the transportation jigs and bolts indicated in step 11 of <24.3 Preparation for
Transporting>, and store them together with the jigs, rather than fitting them back to the machine.
Forgetting to remove a jig or bolts will risk damage to the machine or injury.

24-17
L32

13. To connect the bar loader, connect the bar loader connector to the control unit.

14. Connect the coolant pump hose, coolant pump connector cable, and coolant level detection sensor cable.
15. Clean the machine by completing the following steps.
* The machine may get stained during transportation by foreign materials such as dust, earth, and sand. Before
starting, be sure to check the machine condition so that it will not be started in stained state.

Do not use compressed air to remove dust. Doing so may cause a damage to the fittings due to
foreign materials entered into the gaps between fittings.

Clean the machine with a dry cloth or a cloth soaked in high quality petroleum (neutral) to remove dust and foreign
materials.
After cleaning, lightly apply a lubricating oil equivalent to Exxon Mobil Vactor Oil No. 2 to the finish surface.
16. Connect the power cables and grounding wire.

Failure to do so may expose you to hazardous voltage that can cause severe injury or death.
Make sure that the breaker of the factory power outlet and main circuit breaker of the NC machine
are disengaged.

Ensuring the power breaker.

Ensure a dedicated power breaker (isolated from other machines) near the NC machine so that a machine operator
can turn it on/off easily. The breaker capacity should be 60A.
Arranging the power cable and grounding wire.
Connect the ground wire to the "PE" ground terminal.
Connect the power cable to a breaker.
Electric wire thickness
The power cable and grounding wire should conform to the following specifications.
Overall capacity R.S.T Grounding
15 kVA 14.0mm2 14.0mm2
* Be sure to use the O-ring type ground jack. The Y terminal can easily be disconnected and should not be used.

24-18
 L32

17. Fill the tank of the lubrication device.

* The tank can hold 0.8 liters. See the figure below.

18. Fill the coolant tank on the left side of the machine with coolant.
* The tank can hold approximately 220 liters.
Oil-based coolant is recommended to prevent frictional wear of material and guide bushing sliding mechanism.

24-19
L32

24.6 Fixing the Machine using Anchor Bolts

See the description below to fix the machine by using anchor bolts. Depending on machine structure, installation
environment, and/or installation status of option devices, the machine may not be fixed by the method described below.
Select a bracket type appropriate to your situation.
For outside dimensions of machine and location and size of leveling bolts, see <3.2 Outside Dimensions and Layout of
Machine>.
(1) Fixing by using blocks
Using the block as shown in the figure below, bind the seat, then fix the machine.

Dimensional Drawing of Anchor Block (reference)

Schematic Drawing of Anchor Block

24-20
 L32

(2) Fixing by bracket

Mount the bracket as shown in the figure below around the leveling bolt of machine body to fix the machine to the
floor. You need to make the tap hole on the machine body for mounting the bracket.

Dimensional Drawing of Anchor Bracket (reference)

Schematic Drawing of Anchor Bracket

[Note]
When making the tap hole on the bed, select a place where the drill never perforate into inside of bed (see the figure
below). Since the control unit is located in the bed, it may be damaged by perforation or may fail to work due to intrusion
of cutting chips or cutting oil.

For any other fixing method than described above, we will provide anchor bracket of dedicated design for fixing the
machine.

24-21
L32

24.7 Pre-operation Check

Use the following procedure to ensure that the NC machine functions properly before starting operations at the new
work site.
[Procedure]
1. Engage the breaker of the factory power outlet.
2. Check the power supply voltage.
* The power supply rating must be 3-phase, 200 VAC.
Measure the voltage of each 3-phase power cable and make sure the fluctuation is within 200 V  10%.
3. Engage the main circuit breaker of the NC machine.
4. Reset the Emergency Stop button on the operation panel if it has been pressed.
5. Press the power ON switch on the operation panel to turn on the NC machine.
6. Select Preparation and make sure the Preparation screen appears.

7. Press the Coolant button to check the coolant motor is certainly turned on and off.
Make sure the coolant oil pump rotates in the direction of the arrow indicated on the pump. If the connection is
incorrect, the pump runs in reverse direction.
8. Perform the regular test operation procedures and checkups.

[Note]
The following alarm may occur after the machine has been transferred:
"EX401 DETECTION OF THE MACHINE MOVING"
"OP097 Machine relocation detected. Contact service. 00 hours until machine shutdown"
This alarm occurs when the machine relocation detection function mounted on the machine detects the machine moving.
If the alarm occurs, contact the Service Department.

24-22
 L32

24.8 Disposal
Note the following when disposing of the machine.
• Be sure to remove all lubricant and coolant.
• Dispose of the machine and waste oil according to all national laws and regulations.

A falling object may cause an accident resulting in death or serious personal injury.
If you need to disassemble the machine, be sure to remove the headstock and the tool post or other
component that might fall by gravity, then unlatch the brake.

24-23
L32

Product Code C-L32 Ⅷ Ⅸ Ⅹ Ⅻ

Document Code 3E1-2404
Mfg. No. L32/0480～
Issue Date 2016.12

24-24